
Class, 
Book. 



/ 
VIGER'S GREEK IDIOMS 

ABRIDGED 

AND 

TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH 



PROFESSOR HERMANN'S LAST EDITION. 



ORIGINAL NOTES. 
By the Rev. JOHN SEAGER, B. 4 

RECTOR OF WELCH BICHXOK, ROSS, HEREFORDSHIRE. 

SECOND EDITION, 

WITH CORRECTIONS AND ADDITIONS. 



T 



LONDON : 

VRINTED BY A. J. VALRY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 

SOLD BY LONGMAN AND CO.; WHITTAKER AND CO.; BALDWIN 

AND CRADOCK : SIMPKIN AND MARSHALL ; 

AND ALL OTHER BOOKSELLERS. 



-? 






>n 



ABRIDGED INTO ENGLISH, 

FOR SCHOOLS AND COLLEGES, 

By the Rev. J. SEAGER, Author of 'Critical Observations on Classical 
Authors ' in the Classical Journal. 

VIGER ON GREEK IDIOMS. Translated into 

English, and abridged. 8vo. 9s. 6d. bds. 

' But when they have made real advances in Greek prose, read over with 
them the whole of Viger. Mr. Berry, what I now recommend is really one 
of the most useful parts of education. You should make them read Viger in 
this way twice every year for five or six or seven years.'— Dr. Parr. 

HOOGEVEEN ON GREEK PARTICLES, 

on the same Plan. 8vo. 7s. 6d. bds. 

' Hoogeveen's work on Particles has always been considered a valuable aid 
in the study of the Greek language ; and Mr. Seager has compressed and 
translated it in a manner which we could not desire to be better.' — Spectator. 

BOS ON GREEK ELLIPSES, on the same 

Plan. 8vo. 9s. 6d. bds. 

* Mr. Seager has contrived to retain the essence of all that is beneficial to 
the student, while he has placed it more easily within his reach by the order 
into which it is reduced.' — Intelligence. 

1 Bos, Hoogeveen, and Viger, are works of valuable criticism.' — Bicker- 
steth's Christian Student. 

HERMANN ON GREEK METRES, on the 

same Plan. 8vo. 8s. 6d. bds. 

' My hero is Hermann : he is not only a scholar, hut a philosopher of the 
highest order; and he smiles probably, as I do, at the petty criticisms of puny 
sciolists, who in fact do not understand what is written bv this great critic' — 
Dr. Parr. 

MAITTAIRE ON GREEK DIALECTS, on 

the same Plan. Svo. 9s. 6rf. bds. 

* It is impossible to speak too highly of the fidelity of the translation, or 
the skill of the abridgment. It is enriched by some modest Notes, and more 
original matter than careless readers will perhaps credit.'— Atlas. 

' This volume completes Mr. Seager's epitomising labors. With Viger, 
Hoogeveen, Bos, and Hermann, the Greek Student has a set of scarcely dis- 
pensable subsidia, at all events in a more accessible form than before. Mr. 
Seager has labored zealously, and must be allowed to have deserved well of 
Greek literature.' — New Monthly Mag. 

%* These Five Works may be had in 2 vols., neatly bound in cloth, £1. ISs. 



PREFACE. 



The utility of VigerV Treatise on the Principal Idioms of the 
Greek Language is well known, and fully justifies his recom- 
mendation of a repeated perusal of the work by all who are desirous 
of entering with advantage on the study of the Greek authors. In 
that work he has collected and explained, on a plan of arrangement 
for the most part practically convenient, a multitude of phrases 
remarkable for their peculiarity or elegance. Many of these are 
very difficult, and are interpreted in no other book, or in none 
accessible to the generality of students, or in none so fully, clearly, 
and correctly. Is" is no wonder, therefore, that the work should 
have continued in general use ever since its first publication. 2 
To say nothing of the testimony of others, Professor Hermann 
declares 3 it to have been deservedly esteemed most useful : and 
indeed its value is sufficiently attested by the comments of learned 
men ; of Reizius, Hoogeveeu, Zeunius, Schaefer, and lastly, of that 
most profound and acute critic, Professor Hermann himself. 

The first who published an edition of Viger with notes was 
Hoogeveen. Zeunius followed him, and added his own annotations 
to Hoogeveen's. Afterwards Hermann enriched his editions with 
the notes not only of Hoogeveen and Zeunius, and with a few 
which had been written by Reizius and by Schaefer* in the margins 
of their copies of Viger, but with very copious and important notes 
of his own. By all these additions to the original work, a body of 
Greek learning has been formed of the greatest moment to those 
who are desirous of attaining a thorough knowlege of that justly 

• Or, with the Latin termination with which his name, although he was a native of 
Rouen, has been dignified, Vigerus. 

2 In the edition printed at Paris in 1644. 3 De Idiomatis. 

* The notes of Reizius are judicious and useful ; but those of that able scholar 
Schaefer, which Hermann found of any use, are so very few, that they have left no 
impression on my mind with regard to their value. 



admired language, which it is calculated to illustrate. But many 
are deprived of the henefit to he derived from the book, not only 
by an inadequate acquaintance with the Latin language, in which it is 
written, but by the bulk and price of it in its improved condition. 
It was considered, therefore, that to persons under the disadvantage 
of such a deprivation an Abridgment in English of the last edition 
of Viger might prove highly beneficial; and the publication of such 
an Abridgment was consequently resolved on. The plan and 
execution of the work were intrusted to me : and of these I proceed 
to give the reader some account. It was requisite for the further- 
ance of the Publisher's design, to reduce Professor Hermann's last 
edition to about one-fourth of its bulk. 

This I have endeavored to effect without any sacrifice of useful 
matter, by embodying both the text and notes in the formation of a 
new text, retaining every thing really valuable, and rejecting all that 
is manifestly erroneous and useless. 1 

The general arrangement of Viger, however objectionable in some 
respects, has been unavoidably preserved, together with his division 
into Chapters, Sections, and Rules, as he calls his lowest sub- 
divisions. 2 The substance, indeed, of the notes appended in the 
original to each rule being here incorporated with the rule itself, 
the length of the rules is necessarily very unequal ; because many 
and long notes are often in the original referred to a long rule, 
while a short rule is often left without any annotation at all; but 
the facility of reference 3 and comparison afforded by this method 
will, it is hoped, overbalance any seeming inconvenience. 

1 A considerable space in the notes, especially in Hermann's, is occupied in 
pointing out errors in the text or in other notes. Hoogeveen and Zeunius, who are 
very liberal in observations for the benefit of the raw recruits, commencing with 
"'' ccBterum monendi sunt tirones," or the like well-known gracious and condescending 
introductions, seem both to have been regarded by Hermann as scarcely out of the 
awkward squad themselves. Poor Zeunius especially comes often under his dis- 
cipline : — " this could have entered into the head of no man on earth except Zeunius;' 
— " no one living, except Zeunius, could have entertained such an imagination;" &c. 
lashes which can hardly be thought too severe, when inflicted on an instructor, 
who could persuade himself and teach others, that airb, for instance, in the following 
passages signifies the final cause: idav/xa^ov tov ''Epfioyivqv airb cpiAoaocplas : — air' 
^lo-ayyeXlas Kplvecrdai. See note 57. page 581 of the original. Both the refuted 
and the refuting passages have generally been rejected by me ; but many useful parts, 
which may at first appear to be omitted, will be found transferred to places more 
appropriate to them. 

2 As it has been found necessary here and there both to omit some rules, and 
to compress several others into one, the numbers prefixed do not always correspond 
to those of the original : in such, cases the latter are inclosed in the marks of a 
parenthesis. See, e. g., p. 58. Sometimes the number of a rule of Viger has 
been retained, not on account of the rule itself, but of the notes belonging to it. 

3 One inducement among others to retain the division of the. original, was the 



PREFACE. VU 

Many of the definitions or descriptions which precede the examples 
of idioms in the original, are clumsy and inartificial ; inapplicable to 
the idioms treated of, or encumbered with unessential particulars; 1 
often inadequate to the comprehension of all the examples following 
them, and often, on the other hand, too loose to apply peculiarly 
and exclusively to the idiom introduced by them. I have ventured, 
therefore, to remodel them in so many instances, that I can give only 
this general advertisement of such alterations. 2 

The passages cited are next to be mentioned. Of passages equally 
adapted to the exemplification of an idiom, I have always preferred 
such as are given on good authority 3 to such as appear without any 
name either in the text or notes; and I have generally copied, with 
the omission sometimes of parts irrelevant to the idiom under con- 
sideration, all that are necessary to be immediately seen for the 
elucidation of that idiom ; 4 referring to all others of any use, espe- 
cially to such as are taken from books, where they may be easily and 
readily found. 5 In many instances mere references, instead of 
passages, are given in the original : the whole of these, I believe, 
both in the text and notes, have been transferred into this abridg- 
ment. They may perhaps appear very numerous; but for the 
thorough understanding of an idiom, it is often desirable to con- 
power afforded by it to my readers of ascertaining by reference the parts assignable 
to Viger and to each of his acnotators. The nature of my plan made it impossible 
to keep those parts separate, and distinguish them by the names of their respective 
contributors. There is one mark indeed by which some of Hoogeveen's contributions 
may stilt be often recognised without a reference to the original : I mean his affected 
and pedantic mode of quotation. He always, for example, cites the books of Hero- 
dotus by the names of the Muses ; and a certain part of Homer's second Iliad 
is always " Homer in Bceot." the verses being reckoned from the beginning of the 
Catalogue. He has, I believe, in very few instances been deprived by me of these 
badges of distinction. 

1 In this respect they have sometimes reminded me of Boyle's recipe for the cure 
of dysentery. One of the ingredients in his medicine is. calcined bone ; and the 
bone to be employed is " the thigh bone of a hanged man." 

3 As no mark of discrimination could well be applied to these numerous altera- 
tions, they can only be distinguished by comparison with the original. 

3 An examination of the passages in the books themselves from which they have 
been taken is of so much importance on many accounts, (see e. g. note w, p. 43. />, 
p. 45. t, p. 49. A, p. 54. c, p. 67. I, p. 69. u and v, p. 74. y, p. 77. c, p. 126./, p. 129. 
t/,p. I49.e, p. 150."r, p. 155.n,p.l62.a,p. 165.e,p. 170.<7,p. 191. c, p. 202./, p.204. 
s, p. 252.) that, to render it more easy, T have not only given more correct and 
precise references in many parts, but have often supplied them when altogether 
wanting. In the original, one part of a reference is often in the text, and the other 
parts in the notes : in this Abridgment the Reader will have the advantage of seeing 
all the parts of the references together. 

4 I have frequently thought it expedient to give the passages more fully than they 
appear in the original, and have sometimes given them from better editions. 

5 Where the phrases quoted to illustrate an idiom are numerous, I have usually 
reduced them into alphabetical order. 



VIM PREFACE. 

template it in different situations, and in all its shades of vari- 
ation ; and in a large number of references there is a chance that 
some at least of the books referred to may be accessible to every 
reader. 

In translating the examples, I have not contented myself with the 
sense which words may possibly admit when considered abstractedly ; 
but of all the passages which I remembered, or to whi/h I was able 
to refer, I .have endeavored to give that interpretation which the 
tenor of the context requires. 1 The limits assigned to the work 
obliged me in many instances to render the idiomatical words only ; 
and where the meaning is very obvious, and is moreover contained in 
an exposition preceding the citation of examples, any further inter- 
pretation has sometimes been judged needless. Translation indeed, 
properly so called, was not always possible. Various modifications, 
transitions, and connexions of thought are expressed in Greek by 
words to which there are none precisely equivalent in languages 
formed by nations of less acuteness and refinement. 

Such is the mode of proceeding which appeared to me the most 
eligible with regard to the materials furnished by the origiual. In the 
hope of increasing their utility, I have offered some additions aud 
observations of my own; 2 but the want of room obliged me to leave 
many things unaltered and unnoticed, the propriety of which ap- 
peared to me, to say the least, very questionable. 

They who are thoroughly acquainted with the last editions of 



1 In note 10, therefore, for example, p. 88. of the original, I have not, as others 
have, translated ovkst' epyov iyKadeiSeiv, 'dcrris iar 1 e\ev6epos, it is his business to 
sleep no more, who is free ; for that is far enough from the sense required by the 
context of Aristoph. Lysistr. 614. see this Abridgment p. 34. 1. 36. nor in note 88. 
p. 138, have I translated iro\vv p.\v top 'AA<=|cwSpov Kal$l\nritov iv tu7s Siaj8o\o?s (pepcav, 
often mouthing Alexander and Philip in accusations; see Abr. p. 51. 1. 11. nor in 
Hermann's note [143] on Ch. v. ^ ii. R. 7. olada vvv a p.oi yeviadca ; knottiest thou 
now what things are to happen to me? because it must be evident to any one reading 
and understanding the whole dialogue between Thoas and Iphigenia in the passage 
whence the words are taken, that the intention of the latter is not to inform Thoas of 
what is to happen to herself, but of what must be done to enable her to accomplish a 
purification which she pretends to be necessary: see this Abridgment p. 71. 1.2. 
nor in note 89, p. 340 of the original, have I rendered Aumjpbs '£<t6' &>p, know that you 
are wretched ; because in Aristophanes the words are addressed to Dicasopolis 
by Euripides after a great many impertinent and troublesome requests made by the 
former, and Euripides immediately adds, Kairox^pV^ov S6p.o}p : not to mention that 
KvTrnpbs never signifies unhappy or wretched: see this Abridgment p. 116. 1. 21. 
I will not exhaust the Reader's patience by giving any more instances, but rather 
refer him in general to the following work, and to the preceding note 3, page vii. 

2 These are generally either included within brackets in the text, or placed in 
notes at the bottom of the pages. I perceive that through my inadvertence a few 
remarks of others have been included between brackets ; but they may be easily 
distinguished by reference to the original. For every thing in the notes I am solely 
answerable. 



PREFACE. ix 

Viger need not be told that this Abridgment has been a work of 
much difficulty and perplexity; and therefore need scarcely be 
entreated to regard with indulgence the imperfections which they 
may discover in it. Any suggestions offered by the really learned 
for the improvement of it will be gratefully received by the pub- 
lisher. 

J.S. 
Welch Bicknor, 

August 19th, 1828. 



N.B. Similar abridgments of Hoogeveen on the Particles, Bos on the Ellipses, 
Hermann on the Metres, and Maittaire on the Dialects, of the Greek language have 
been published. 

%* With respect to the references, as passages may be readily found in any books 
divided always into verses or other small portions, the editions of such books need 
not be specified. Of books not so divided (as indeed of most books) the editions 
referred to may generally be understood to be the best, when there is no specification 
of any particular edition. The following, however, have sometimes been cited 
without such specification : ^Eschines, Orat. Aurel. Allobr. 1607. Aristides, 
interpr. Canter. 1604. Clemens Alexandr. Colon. 1688. Demosthenes, Aurel. 
Allobr. 1607. Dinarchns, appended to the edition of Demosth. Hippocrates, Genet. 
1657. Isocrates, interpr. Wolf. 1604. Lysias, Marburg. 1683. Pausanias, Xy- 
landr. Hanov. 1613. Philo Judseus, Colon. 1613. Plutarch, Francof. 1599. 
Proclus, appended to the Basil edition of Plato (but Plato himself is usually quoted 
from the edition of Serranus). 



In preparing this Second Edition for the Press, the Editor 
has corrected a few oversights which had formerly escaped his 
notice, and has inserted several additional Notes, the references 
to which are distinguished by asterisks ( # ) and obelisks (f). 



Viger. 



CONTENTS. 



CHAP. I. 



Page 
The Article (called by some the prepositive Article) . . l 

CHAP. II. 

The Relative o$ (called by some the subjunctive Article) . 13 



CHAP. III.— THE NOUN. 

Section 

I. The Noun Substantive 

II. The Adjective 

III. On some particular Nouns, Adjectives, and Substan 
tives, alphabetically : viz. ayaObs, Ixtcpos, aXXos, a/x^a) 
avr/p, ciTroQpas, avdpwxos, aperi), ap^v, avro^wpos 

IV. 'Acpop/jii], fiaoiXevs, fiovXrjfAa, /3ta, beiXr], brjXos, biaira, hi 
Kaws, ilovXrjs, kiriboZps, epyov, erebv, eroi/ios 

V. "InTros, 'nnroyvojfuov, 'Laos, tcaipos, kokos, kclkwois Ttjs eirap 
X^a-s, tcXoTrrj twv brjfiOffiivv, icotvbs, Karaypem, Kvpia, itpo 
Qea[xia> ipf/pr), Kvpios *■ .... 

VI. Aoyos 

VII. Mepos, fiolpa, umbels, ju^^an), fiLKpbv and fieya, veaviicbs 
VIII. 'Qbbs, oIkovojios, olos, opyi) .... 

IX. "Oaos 

X. Ovpos, iraibes, els iraaav, vrXoifios, TroXirda, 7roXvs, TrXeov, 

irpay/xa, irpa&s, Trpoffyrifxa, irpocpaais, irpmra 
XI. ^Lrjfielov, TeKfxrjptov, avobeifys, pybiovpyyfia, awfxa, reXos, 
rkyyt], ris ; and ris. ..... 

XII. Toaovrov, (pdovos, %apis, X ei P> XP^ 0S 
XIII, Xpfjfxa, xpvabs, %wpa, &pa .... 



18 
24 



30 
32 



36 
39 
40 
43 
46 

49 

52 
56 
57 



CHAP. IV. 



On the Pronoun 



59 



CHAP. V. — ON THE VERB. 

I. On the Verb, with respect to kind or form . . 65 

II. On the idioms of the Indicative, Imperative, Optative, 

and Subjunctive Moods .... 70 



CONTENTS. 



III. On the Infinitive Mood, and certain tenses . 

IV. Of the Verbs ayairciv, aripyeiv, airoxpfjv, aairdS,euQai 
ayeiv koX (pepetv, cnroXaveiv .... 

V. BovXofxai, ye.vvq.v, riKreiv, yiveadai, ytyvwcriceiv, Bia-^apelv 
biwuetv, (pevyeiv, emtyevai ..... 

VI. On the Verb dpi . . . 

VII. On the Verbs elirelv, eXnlcleiv, eXireodai, k^epyeadai 
e^tevai, eoiKa, e%(o ...... 

VIII. On the Verbs rJKta, tcaraXafifiavo), aei/jicu, XavQavu), fieXXio 
vikciw, vo/i($oo, olba, 'iadi, oifiai . . 

IX. On the Verbs KarayivoxrKetv, Xeyeiv, 6/j.oXoyelv, 6<pXia- 

Kaveiv, irapiaravai, Trdaj^eiv, vrepiibelv, irepwpq.v 
X. On the Verbs iroielv, iroielaQai, Trparreiv, 7rpoo7roie~i(rda.i 
XI. On the Verbs ovytcpore'iv, ovppqyvvvai, avfxcppoveiv, n 
6evai, rideudai, rvy^aveiv ..... 

XII. On the Verbs vfipl£u>, virapyta, {nrooreXXo/iai 

XIII. On the Verbs (palyofxai and (pepa> 

XIV. On the Verbs (j>Qdvetv, (pieiv, ^aipeiv, xpaodai, ■ywpeiv 
ey-^apeiv . . . . . . . 



72 

71 

79 

S2 

84 



92 

97 

101 
105 

107 

108 



CHAP. VI. — PARTICIPLE. 



I. On Participles in general 

II. On some Participles which appear to be redundant 

III. On the Participles inroXeXei/jifxevos, apyvnevos,, j3ovX6- 
fxevos, ytyvo/ievos, e^ojievos, evheypfievos 

IV. On the Participles of the Verbs ovofiaSot, vapex^, ttc- 
pie^w, 7ro£u5, reXeurdw, Tvyyavw, vnapxa, elfxl . ; . 



113 
120 



122 



123 



CHAP. VII.— ADVERB. 



I. On the terminations of certain Adverbs . . .126 
II. On the Adverbs aKptflCbs, aXXws re Km, apa . . 129 

III. On the Adverbs a/ueXet, dvriKpv; avrwpvs . . .131 

IV. On the Adverbs apaporus, apri, cnrapA, ems apri, apriws, 
dre^^ws, drpefxa, drpe/Jtas, av, aiidis, aire, abrlica . . 133 

V. On the Adverbs avrodev, elra, e-rcetTa, efnrijs . . 136 

VI. On the Adverbs e7rei, kneibrj, eirav, eireibav, eirietK&s . 139 
VII. On the Adverbs eirinpoadev, eiye, rj, %, (with the Par- 
ticles annexed to them,) and tfbt) . . . 142 
VIII. On the Adverbs fiaXXov and fxdXiara . . . . f 145 
IX. On the Adverbs fj,era£v, fiexpi, prjv, fxovov ov, \iwv, vol, 

vfi, vvv, ot, o'ifioi, olye, bfiov, o/xias .... 147 

X. On the Adverbs oiry, ottov, ottws, dirorav, orav, ore, ovtu>, 

pq.hiws, 6<f>pa, TrdXiv, irep, Ttpiv, pa . . . .153 

XI. On the Adverbs ttuis, ttov, rax«, w, and on those which 

express approbation or disapprobation . . . l6l 



xii CONTENTS. 

Section Page 

XII. Of Adverbs which have a peculiar energy and agree- 
ableness in negation ; and expressly of those of which 
/nil is the first in construction l65 

XIII. On oh and ovk, and the Particles joined with them . 171 



CHAP. VIII.— CONJUNCTION. 

I. On the Conjunction a\\a : 175 

II. On the Conjunction av (for which the poets use ire and 

Key) with regard to its first and second use . . 178 

III. On the third and fourth uses of av . . . . 181 

IV. On the Conjunctions apa, apa, and ye 182 
V. On the Conjunctions yap and £>) .... 186 

VI. On the Conjunctions el, l)v, av, ehv, and their concomi- 
tant Particles 189 

VII. On the Conjunctions re and mi, and their concomitant 

Particles 195 

VIII. On the Conjunctions ;ue> and Se, and the Particles joined 

with them 200 

IX. On the Conjunctions on and rolvvv .... 206 
X. On the Conjunction u>s, and the Particles connected 

with it 209 



CHAP. IX. — PREPOSITION. 



I. On the Prepositions afufi, avlt, avev, avn, 
II. On the Prepositions bia and eis . 

III. On the Prepositions Ik or e£, and kv . 

IV. On the Preposition em 

V. On the Prepositions Kara, fxera, and avv 

VI. On the Preposition Ttaph. . 

VII. On the Prepositions irepl and ?rpo 
VIII. On the Preposition irpos 

IX. On the Prepositions vnep, vn6, x w P« s ■ 



217 
222 
22S 
234 
242 
249 
253 
256 
260 



GREEK IDIOMS. 



CHAPTER I. 
THE ARTICLE.* 



Rule I. The article, in the masculine or feminine gender, agreeing 
ivill) no substantive expressed, is always to be referred to one under- 
stood ; and there is often an ellipsis of a participle agreeing with the 
substantive so understood : as Ttjs 'Aaias i) vpos tcis avaroXtts, i. e. § 
pep\s — Terpaniievriirpbs, — the part of Asia towards the East; -rjv Trapa 
to relyfos rjei/xev, i. e. rrjv obbv ayovaav Trapa r. r. .ZEschin. Socr. Dial, 
de Morte, c. 3. the road by the wall. (See H. Steph. de dial. Att. p. 17„ 
ad art. 21. Fisch. ad Well, iii, 259 seq. Wakef. ad Eurip. Ion, 
438.) 

With the article in the neuter also a noun is sometimes under- 
stood ; as when grammarians say ro woiw, i. e. to pfjfia iroiib, the 
•verb 7roiw ; ro kclXws, i. e. to kirippri{xa kqXws, the adverb kuXuis. But 
there are many phrases in which no noun is expressed with the 
neuter article, for this very reason, that either the thing intended 
had no appropriate denomination, or that such denomination 
did not occur to the speaker or writer. Such are the following : 
to fxev on— to be on — partly — partly; boKw fici :o tov 'Iflviceiov 
'i-wnov ireirovBevai, Plato in Parmen. what happened to Ibycus's horse 
seems to me to have happened to myself. So p) 7radoi/xt to tov Dow- 
tIus, Lucian, Demosth. Enc. p. 931. and Aristoph. Nub. 1200. 
ov novov to ttjs (tvkTjs TTturjaere, Matth. x\\, 21. ye shall not only 
do this which is done to the Jig-tree ; anijyyeiXov navra, kui tcl twv 
baifxojn$onerm', Matth. viii, 33. and told every thing, and what 
was befallen to the possessed of the devils. 

II. When the noun is expressed, the article is sometimes elegantly 
repeated: as e-^eadai tFjs bhov ti\s els t>)v (jMTtjpiav, to keep to the 
road to salvation. So tov vraparrXov tov ws enl tovs " Apafias, Arr. 
de Exp. Al. vii, 26* 

III. In a similar manner the article is joined elliptically with ad- 
verbs and prepositions: as ol Kad' fipas, (bvres,) those of our own 
times; ol evhov, those ivithin ; ol iraXai, the ancients ; c 6 navv, 

a Called by some the Prepositive Ar- sur la Nature des Animaux, p. 304. ed. 

tide. Paris. 1769.— J. S. 

6 'Ej/ to? (Tvyypdfj./jLari rep ireplTov'Hpa- c T<£ tov irdvv TlepiKXeovs vt$, Xen. 

Kkhus, Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 21. In his book Mem. iii, 5, 1. the son of the famous 

about Hercules. So in French: " Un tel Pericles. See Abridgm. of Bos, p. IOC, 

homme est sans doute L' itre LE plus note a. — J. S. 
heureux de la Nature." Buffon, Discours 

Viger. A 



2 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. 

the celebrated; r« oikoj, affairs at home, or one's home ; kv rols 
jj.d\t(TT a,* eminently or exceedingly. 11 

IV. The article, with the particles jute and be, serves for partition, 
distinction, or opposition ; as ruv yp'r avppu\ovr-ui' ol jufr padvpov- 
<nv, ol be advfiovoiv : oj I oar allies some are inactive, and others de- 
spond. In the following passages it serves for partition, or distinction 
between different parts of the same thing : i) tov pev/xaros eiceivov ttt}- 
yi), 11 piev els avrbv ebv, j; be, awopearovpevov, 2£w ('nroppel, Plato ill 
Phajdr., where >/ pev and ?/ be both signify partly ; navrus rov e'ibovs 
tovtov (pi'iGopev twtdvpeiv ; i) tov pev, tov be ov ; or the one part of it 
only, but not the. other? Plato de Rep. lib. v. p. 475. I. 15. — Some- 
times what is usually only referred to, or signified, by the article in 
this phrase, is, for greater perspicuity, expressed in addition to it ; 
either in both members, as imroi re iirnois, nai arbpes avbpaoiv, ))yw- 
viSovto' 01 pev — fitairacrdai tovs Ylepaas ol Maneboves' ol be elptai 
civtQv tijv enfiacnv, ol Yleprrai : those, the Macedonians, to repel the 
Persians ; these, the Persians, to prevent the egress of the Macedo- 
nians : Arrian, de Exp. Alex. 1. i. p. 33. 1. 11.; or in one only, as, 
e\et be avaXoyov ?/ KprjriK)) rafys npos Tt)v AaKojpiK>)v yeiopyovai re yap 
rols pev E'lXiores, ro'is be Kprjcrlv ol WepioiKm : for the Helots culti- 
vate the land for the latter, and for the former, (the Cretans,) the 
Periceci: Aristot. Polit. lib. ii. c. 8. 

Sometimes 6 pev and 6 be are not made correlative ; but what 
would have been signified by one or the other, is put in the place 
of it; as in Herodot. Terps. c. 94. where the Mitylenaeans and 
Athenians go to war with each other, ol pev cnraireovTes ttjv 
Xupnv' 'Adrjvaloi be, &c. " the former insisting on restoration 
of the territory, and the Athenians'' (instead of the latter,) &c. 
So Time. i. c. 84. — Sometimes one of these correlative expressions 
is omitted without any substitute, as dewv be lepa kv KuXAj/nj, 'AokXt)- 
ttlov, to be 'Afpobirqs emiv : there are temples of the gods in Cyllene, 
oj JEsculapius, and the other of Venus: Pausan. in El., lib. poster.; 
and in this case there is sometimes a repetition of the correlative 
expressed, as vexpol b % etwrTov, ol b' epeXXov, o! b' eneivro, Eurip. 
Or. 1496'. Pors.j See Musgr. on Iph. in T. 13fjl. In the following 
passage there is the same reference (or, to use a law term, the 
same innuendo) at each repetition of ol be, — ol pev being understood : 
rols 7ruio\ rols nXovtriois ol Tiarepes vfyeiv 7rapaivovmv, ol be (sc. KoXciKes) 
pedueiV ijbxppovelv, ol de uaeXyaiveiv' (jtvXarreiv, ol be bairavav' 0t- 
Xepyelv, ol be pa.dvp.e~iv : fathers exhort their rich sons to be sober ; 
but they (sycophants) to drink: to be temperate; but they, to 
be dissolute : to save ; but they, to spend: to be industrious; 
BUT they, to be idle: Plut. irepl ncab. ay. Ol be by itself, for 
some : kcrd'ra be ecpopeov beppara di'ipeia' ol be cat ly(dvu>v tu>v peyaXwv 
tu ira-^ea : they wore for clothes the skins of wild beasts: but some 
wore the thick skins of large fishes : Arr. Hist. Ind. c. 24. See too 

* See Abridgm. of Bos, p. 106, note /;. as eVl twv airo^roov, a secretary. — J. S. 
Add, ol iirl twv ^incrroKwv, the t 'SirovBrjs 5' vtto "Eirnrrov ol 5' a>p- 

clerhs or amanuenses ; and in such phra- Bovuto' tovs Se Ksipivovs Ne/cpous h.v eTSes. 

ses the article itself is sometimes omitted, Eurip. Hel. 1621.— J. S. 



Rule 4.] THE ARTICLE. 3 

Arr. de Exp. Al. 1. i. c. 11. in init. — 01 be, by itself, in a general 
sense, for men: Uvpyoi Karripuirovro, rol be (Ionic and poet, for 
ol be) Xoiadiav Ni}^ot'-o fiolpav irpovfifiarwv beboptcores : the towers 
were thrown doivn, and men swam about, seeing their last fate before 
their eyes: Lycoph. v. 81. speaking of the deluge. See another 
unusual form in Olyss. a, 115. — Sometimes ris is substituted for one 
member of tile phrase : e£ wv avrovs avi]ptiKa at rives, ol be teal brj- 
fjLorriq: kreXeiirnnav : of whom some have destroyed themselves, others 
have been publicly executed: iEschin. de fals. leg. p. 258. I. 39. 
Sometimes it is added: 6 fiev ris ererpwro, 6 be ko.1 e-rreirrioKti : 
one had been wounded, another had fallen: Xen. H. Gr. iv, 5, 
14. — Ol be rives and r t bi] be rives equivalent: ol fiev yap avruiv 
tcoXatcas teal irapaairovs uvaXa/jfiavovcnv, ol be rives eralpas ml %a- 
fiairvwas Xvrpovvrat, . . . e rjbri be rives teal tS>v veaviKwrepoov dirrovrai, 
KaKijp : for some of them entertain sycophants and parasites ; others 
purchase the freedom of courtesans and street-walkers, . . . and others 
there are who even engage in still bolder and more desperate prac- 
tices : Plut. irepl Tratb. ayioy. — Sometimes inslead of the partitive 
genitive which usually introduces this kind of phrase, a nominative is 
employed: ol be 'Acapvaves, ol fiev es"Apyos fcvvefioijBovv, ol be 
&c. for rwv be 'A«\ ol fiev — / Thucyd. iii, 105. So ol rrapovres be, 
ol fxev rjbovvro, ol be eyeXuiv : but as for those present, some were 
ashamed, and others laughed: Lucian in Conv. t. iii. p. 432. 1. 23. 
ed. Amst., which Latin authors have imitated : see Sallust, B. C. c. 2. 
init. Viig. iEn. xii, 277. Val. Fl. iii, 462. ; and Lucian has added 
to the nominative a genitive of a pronoun referring to it : oi Ko|ui- 
fiavres be, 6 fiev abrwv rifiverai £i<pei rbv Tti)-^yv, 6 be &C. : lite- 
rally, the Corybanles, one of them cuts his arm with a sword, another, 
&c. Dial. Ven. et Cup. — and, ol be am izaibes, >/ fiev avrwv 
appeviK)] irepa rov fierpov — 6 b' 'A-fruXXiov Trpoairoie~irai fiev Tctvra el- 
bevai &c. : and as to your children, one of them, your daughter, 
is masculine beyond measure ; — and the other, Apollo, pretends to 
know all things: Dial. Junon. et Lat. The following form is 
still more bold ; ttoXXovs npovrpeirei' enl (piXoaofiav' ol be ovbels 
avru npoael^ov, — for ruv be ovbels : he urged many to philosophy, 
but no one of them attended to him : iElian lib. x. c. \6. V. H. — 
Instead of 6 fiei>, 6 be, eh fiev, erepos be, (in French lun, Vautre,) are 
employed with propriety : bvo be kuI fieyaXa, ev fiev, on ov nepl r&v 
'iautv uywviZofiat, erepov be : the one, the other : Demosth. pro Cor. 
— Likewise, 6 els /cat 6 erepos, see Matth. vi, 24. ; and b els, 6 be erepos 
is in Luke vii, 41. ; and in Matth. xxiv, 40, 41, is found 6 els nat 6 
eh; and in Arist. 1. Etlt. vi, c. 1. ev fiev and ev be are opposed, 
and also in his Rhet. ii, 20. ; and in Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 8. Iv 

e v H8jj 8e rives is evidently more em- iroXv yap ovrcas p.eya\si6repov, evaWa- 

phatical than ol 8e rives. — J. S. yeiarjs irrwaeoes, 3} ehrep ovrais e<p'0, Ta>j/ 

/ Homer is the source of this elegance, Be Suca cxKinreKwv 6 p.ev — . <rvv)]Qws yap 

as of most others : ol Se b~vo anoireKoi, 6 i\4yero, irav Se rh wvyrjdes fUKpoirpeires' 

fxev ovpavbv evpvv titdvei, — rbv 8' erepov Sib Ka) adav/iacrrov. Demetr. Phal. de 

&c. Od. p.. 73. The following is a just Eloc. § 60.— J. S. 
remark on the effect of this unusual form: 



4 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. 

fxkv — Iv he — &XXo — liWo. In Aristoph. erepos he ris first follows 
6 pev, and afterwards 1 lie following members of the sentence 
are connected by 6 be : Plot. v. 1()2. seq. — In Xen. de Re Eq. 10, 6, 
eorut b fxkv Xe'ios, b be erepos &c. : let the one be smooth, but the 
other, &c. — A more unusual form is, 'iva virb fiev rwv aywrrat, 
v7ro be twv &8wvrai: that they may be led on by the first, and 
urged forward by the last: Xen. Mem. iii, 1, 8. and so Time, iii, 
6l. The following phrases may also be noticed : ware ras fxev av- 
tG)V KaTatjKUTTTeiv, kv be rals aKponbXeis reiyiSleiv '. so as to rase 
some, and build citadels in others: Isocr. Paneg. c. 2>J. eh /xev 
rows vfipicovres, to'cs be bovXevovres : insolent tyrants to some, to 
others slaves : Ibid. c. 41. And presently afterwards, 7rp6s fiev vovs 
fiXovs — irpbs fV kyQpovs. And see Steph. de dial. Att. p. 184. 

V. The article with the preposition Kara forms elegant phrases ; 
as ra ko0' ripcis, t he affairs of our time, or more generally, all that 
relates to us : ra Kara Uavaaviav rov AaKebai/xovioi', Km Q e fj. i a- 
TOKXea rov 'Adrira'iov — ourws ireXevrrjcrev : thus concluded the 
events relative to Pausanias the Lacedcemonian and Themistocles the 
Athenian: Thuc. i, 138. see Macchab. lib. ii, c. 15, v. 37. Phi- 
lipp. i, 12. Coloss. iv, 7.: b Ni'ypos etfprve to. ku6' eavrbv, Niger 
arranged his affairs: Herodian iii, 1, 17. — In the same sense ra Trepl 
r/uas : a/ja r« irvQeuBai ra tr epi A e vtXq v Ka 1 Ke0 q yo v '. what had 
befallen Lentulus and Cethegus : Plut. in Vit. Cic. p. 872. ra rrep^i 
Qrjfiaiovs, the state of the Thebans' affairs: Isocr. Or. ad Phil. So with 
a/.!0< : ra a/j.<j)l r))v 'Ewm', the affairs of the East: Zosim. i, 37- — 
But when the article before the preposition is in tlie masculine or 
feminine, as 01 a.fx<pl Ylplafiov in Hom.il. y. 146. irpbs ras irepi 
Mapdav Koi Mapiav St. John, c. xi, v. 19. the phrase signifies, 
sometimes, (especially in the earlier writers) the person named toge- 
ther with attendants, colleagues, followers, &c. or the latter only ; 
sometimes (especially in later writers,) merely the person named.* 
The following are examples of different forms : 01 a/xcf 'Obvtriia, 
Ulysses and his people : Horn. Od. y. l63. 01 a.fj(pi AvtoXvkov, Au- 
tolycus and his father : Xen. Symp. i, 4. ol ap^l QpaavXov koi 
'Epaenvibrjv, Thrasylus and Erasinides with their colleagues : Xen. 
Mem. i, 1, 18. ol 7repl 'AraXavrTjv, Atalanta with her Melanio : 
Palaeph. Fab. 14. ol a. ntyl rbv " Awrov, Anytus and the other ac- 
cusers of Socrates : vEHan V. H. ii, 13. 01 Trepl rov 'luavvrjv, John 
and his gang: Joseph. B.J. vi, 2. ol nepl rov IlavXov rjXOofxev 
eh Kaiaapeiav, Paul and we of his party : Acts xxi, 8. — The article 
before the preposition is omitted in Horn. II. 5. 436. t. 81 sqq. 
— 'AXefavbpos re kui ol a fi(f avrbv, Alexander and his, &c. Arrian 
ii, 10. ol 7repl rbv 'AXefavbpor, Alexander s captains, (thus meu- 

* "Pervulgatutnillud ol af/upl UKartova, but Weinke is of a different opinion, and 

pro solo Platone dictum, cadentis est refers to Horn. II. 1. 80. Herodot. i. 157. 

linguae, usitatum Plutarclio et consimi- (where he says it is plain from the follow- 

libus seriptoribus, non antiquioribus, ut ing chapters that Pactyas alone is meant.) 

Thucydidi, Platoni, Xenophonti, nedum, Plato in Menone, t. iv. p. 376. &c. See 

quod quidam opinati sunt, Homero." bis Pleonasm. Prseposit. § 2. — J. S. 
Hermann. De Eilips. et Pleonasm. — 



Rule 5—7.] THE ARTICLE. 5 

tioned after the death of Alexander himself,) ISA. V. H. xii, 64. ol pev 
yap afj.<pl tov YWaruva na\ \pva17nrov, ical Ylvdayopav, <pi\oi: for the 
followers of Plato, Chrysippus and Pythagoras [in the time of Lu- 
cian, centuries after the death of those philosophers themselves] were 
received by him [Alexander the false prophet] as friends : Lucian, 
Pseudom. [p. 879- E. ed. Salmur.] ol irepl tovs Kopivdlovs, the 
Corinthians : Herodot. ol irepl tov K6/ipobor, Herodian i, 9, 15. 
ol ire-pl tov 'Efiearjvdv 'AvtwvIvov, the faction of Antoninus of 
Emesa: Zosim. i, 10. ol itepl tlvo. Qepa-xovTes, the servants or 
train of a person: Herodian i, 6, 22. al trepl c<pa.s bwapeis, 
their forces: Zosim. ii, 18. ol ovv Tf Ack/w, ib. i, 22. — But the 
passage cited by Zeunius from Herodot. b. i. p. 12. 1. 21. ed. 
Camer. to show a verb in the singular agreeing with the article in 
the plural in this kind of phrase, is read differently by Hermann. 
The neuter article is said to be sometimes so employed : to. nepl 
KaWippoijv, Callirrhoe ; Cliarit. i, 8. like ret rf/s fxoipas,fate. 

VI. The neuter to with the adverb vvv, and the neuter participle 
ex ov > or ni one word Towveyov, signifies, at present, for the present, 
as things go now; as, Tovvvey^ov kv ciyadals yivopai reus eKiriai, 
at present I entertain the best hopes. See Plut. 'EpwT. init. and lib. 
Tub. vii, 11. 

VII. "Oc!e, rjbe, robe, with the article repeated are used demonstra- 
tively for ovtos, uvrr), rovro ; as, obe 6 dvdpioTros, this man ; and 
for the enclitic be the Attics use b), as 6bl [see Fisch. ad Well. ?. 
p. 345.] : btowep Taiir eypatyev obi Trepi epov : on which account this 
man (or my friend Ctesiphon here) proposed these things in the 
psephism concerning me: Demosth. pro Cor. ; but this form, and that 
of the adverbs evOabl, wv\, &c. are proper in familiar language only, 
and therefore are never employed in tragedy, though very frequent 
in comedy. — The article 6 is used also where avros, ws, instead of it, 
or dis alone, would make the sense plainer : Kepttvpa'toi crfiov qvtmv 
tovs e^dpovs boKovvTas elvat efovevov, tyiv pev aWiav em<pepoiT£s toIs 
tov brjfiov KnTaKvovaiv '. the Corcyrtzans destroyed those whom they 

judged to be their enemies, as being guilty of subverting the de- 
mocracy, — or, charging them with aiming at the subversion of the 
democracy: Thuc. lib. iii. c. 81. Here the sense would be the 
same if civtoIs, ws, or <bs alone, were substituted for rols. — The article 
is joined with a nominative for a vocative : 'O TpifiaWds, kark ye, 
Triballus : Aristoph. Av. 1627. — 'O is put for ov-os. The phrases 
in which the Attics employ it as a pronoun are the following : — 1„ 
after a preposition ; bia to, for hia tovto, Thucyd. vii, 71. kv to'ls, 
among these: Plato Euthyd. p. 281, 19. ed. Bas. prim. — 2. tov kui 
tov, to. kcii tu, such a one and such a one ; such and such things: 
Lysias pro Eratosth. caed. p. 27. Demosth. c. Mid. p. 560. This form 
admits of those cases only which begin with r. — 3. 01 pev, ot be, 
some, others. — 4. npo tov, or xpoTov: 6 irpb tov ^povos, hereto- 
fore, former time; Ka\ fxapTvpei izas 6 TrpOTOv ypovos yeyovws, 
and all past time testifies: Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 496. 1. IS. — 
5. the relative os following: to., e£ wv ovyneiTai, these things of 
which it is composed, or compounded : Arist.. Top. vi ; 13, § 14. — 1>. 



6 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. 

kv to'is fxakiara and the like; of which hereafter. — 7. even with- 
out a preposition : (xu tu yiyiwrrKets, Srt, you know this, that, — ; 
Plato Crat. p. 434. E. to bk &pa ov tovtu %v, Id. in Symp. xx. 7. 

VIII. Tjjbe adverbially; here; in this way; in this manner; 
for ovrws ; obco being defective: — evtoijcrwpev be rai rrjbe, let us 
consider it thus also: Plato Apol. 32. tpevyio to beiXov Trjbe, 
by this course I avoid the charge of timidity: Eurip. Or. v. 
773' Pors. — T»/6e is opposed to KaKeide'. — Trjbe Kcweiae arpe- 
(peaOai, to turn tins way and that way. Trj pev and rfj be are very 
frequently correlative ; for here, there, &c. : rrj pev opeaiv a-itelp- 
yeroi baaecri cot vxpijXols, Trj be irebiov avrf/s KaBfjKet is Te eir\ ti)v 
/neyaXrjv Tr)v Tavrr] daXnaaap : on the one side it (Hyrcania) is hem- 
med in by ivoody and lofty mountains ; on the other its plain extends 
as far as to the great sea in this part : Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii, 23. — 
Sometimes for partly — partly; or in this respect, —in that respect : 
teal ^,b)KpaTt}s rrj fiev opdws e3i]rei, rrj be f/papravev : and Socrates 
in some respects inquired rightly ; in other respects he erred: Aristot. 
Eth. vi, 13. 

IX. To tL among philosophers signifies the substance or essence of 
a thing; to tvoiov, the quality ; to noobv, the quantity: kcu yap 
(rayadov) ev rw ri Xeyerai, olov 6 6eos ical 6 vovs' teal ev tu iroiip, 
at aperai' rai ev rw iroau, to perpiov' ku\ ev rw irpos ti, to yp)\ci\xov' 
Knl ev xpovo), xaipos' rat ev tottw biatra, rat erepa TOiavra : for Good 
is spoken of in substance, as God, and Mind ; and in quality, as 
the Virtues ; and in quantity, as Mean or Moderation ; and in re- 
lation, as Utility ; and in time, as Opportunity ; and in place, as 
Habitation, and the like: Aristot. Eth. i, 6. 

X. With the same philosophers to bia ri is, the final cause. 

XI. Ti)v 7rp<jjrr)v* is at first : T))v fiev TrpwrrjV Trpo6vpu)S e£eis, 
at first you will be full of alacrity : Epict. Ench. c. 3 1. vvv pev- 
tol TrtweuTfxat rou0' ikclvov. irpoXafielv ehai fjplv tt)v irpioTnv, for a 
beginning, to begin: Demosth. Ol^nth. iii. [p. 2.Q. I. 1.] 1>)v 
Tayio-Tr\v, as quickly as possible : JE\. H. V. vii, 5. T>)v evde~iav, di- 
rectly, straightforward, openly: 'OpTr)uiov rr/v pev evdelav rw 
Beppr; avvenrelv fifj To\pi)aavros, Plut. in Cic. p. 864. I. 2$. [p. 1584. 
1. 8. ed. H. St.]— With the same ellipsis of Kara certain substan- 
tives expressed are employed with a genitive after them, as \apiv, 
for ihe sake : evbatporias xapiv, for the sake of happiness : Aristot. 
Eth. i, 3. see Eurip. Andr. 1228. Perictyone ap. Stob. 487, 51. 
Abresch, Auct. Diluc. Thuc, p. 420. — and with the article; tt)v 
ar)v "x.apiv, for your sake: Eurip. Andr. 221. and, Trarpwav 
■%apiv, for the sake of their father : Eurip. Heracl. 242. — So b'tK-qv 
and TpoiTov, after the manner of , like: biKnv twv beiXirwv 7rvevpa- 
tov, Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. g 11. bixriv \tpaipas, iEschyl. Ag. 241. 
TpoTrov aiyviriwv, Ibid. 241. like vultures; rpoirov Xoy^»js, He- 
rodot. vii, 6$. Xpeos, for the benefit of: gov ovk eXaooov Tj kcivvs 
Xpeos, for your advantage no less than for her own: Eurip. Hec. 
880. Pors. — Here may be mentioned ciKpiiv, still: unpriv kcl\ iipels 
ciavveToi eare ; Matth. xv, l(j. 

* See the Abridgm. of Bos, p. 100. I. 4. 



Rule 8— lb\] THE ARTICLE. 7 

XII. The article with a genitive of a proper name signifies the son 
of, and very frequently occurs in genealogies : 'O tov &r)fioodevovs, 
the son of Demosthenes. ^wKparys 6 ^Iwtypoviatcov is used to signify 
either that he was the only son of Sophroniscus, or that he was that 
Socrates, whose father was Sophroniscus, to distinguish him from 
others of the same name; hut Zw/cptirjjs 'S.wtypoviaKov, without the 
article, is Socrates who had Sophroniscus, not any other, for his 
father. See Herodot. Er. c. 52. Xenoph. Cyrop. i, 27. — So in the 
plural, 01 yovewv biatrt'ifxwv, the sons of illustrious parents: Plut. 
irepl naib. aywy. 

XIII. To with a neuter adjective, usually in the superlative, sig- 
nifying the chief thing in an enumeration, after the recital of others: 
01 be bvvarol icaXa KTrj/jtara Kara ti)v ywpav oiKobofxtais re ical noXv- 
TeXevi KaratTKevals a7ro\w\e(cores, to be pey iff tov, iroXefiov clvt 
elp-fjvrjs e-^ovres : but above all, &c. Thuc. ii, 65. ; and the neuter 
adjective without the article: /jieyiffTov be, Trj twv yj>r)na.Twv oiruvet 
KwXuaovrai : and what is of most consequence, they will be prevented 
by want of money: Thuc. i, 142. The expression is elliptical, to 
be jieyiaTov eart tovto. — In a similar sense the Latin writers used 
Id quod. See Cic. Mil. c. 30, fin. and ii. in Cat. c. 8. 

XIV. 'Fj-itI Tdbe (f-iepr) or KXlfxara), on this side, with a genitive; as 
e7rt Tabe twv Spun', on this side the mountains, opposed to e7re- 
neiva, on the further side, beyond; y) k-xeiceiva twv "AXTrewv 
KeXTiKrj, Gallia Transalpine Gaul beyond the Alps; ?'; en\ Tabe 
twv "AXnewv, Cisalpina, or Gaul on this side the Alps. — Not unlike 
this, is €7Ti QaTepa jiev, en\ darepa be, on this side, on that side. 

XV. To or, part: ttjs -%wpas to fxev ov Trpbs apKTOv earl, to be ov 
77-joos ne(jr)f.ifipiav : of the country one part is towards the North, 
the other towards the South : Aristid. Panath. s 

XVI. To fiev, to be, partly, partly : to pev vir' eXjr/Sos, robe vnb 
beovs, partly through hope, partly through fear. And sometimes 
ti is added either to to per or to to be, or to both, to qualify the 
affirmation, rendering it generally, in some respect or other, according 
to the various senses of rts, less definite: to pev ti KaToiKTiaei twv 
QtjJ3wv,t6 be ws avyyvwara bebpaKevai e<j)atvovTo : partly, in some 
degree, from compassion for Thebes, and partly upon their offence 
(the offence of Thessaliscus and Dionysodorus) appearing to be 
venial: Arrian, Exp. Al. ii, 15. to pev ti vpbs ti)v wyuor/jra tov vlov 
biafiXr)6ei$, to be ti ws Trapavopovvra avrbv alriaaafxevos, advfjrjcras 
ereXevra tov filov, Lucian, Macrob. p. S25. And sometimes to be ti is 
not introduced either by to /jev or to fiev tl: ovres fxev xai npoTov pr) 
ravels levai es tovs noXe/Jovs, — to be ti kcu 7roXepots olneiois e£eipyo- 
fievoi : being even in former times slow to go to war, — and then 
being moreover, in some measure, prevented by their own private 
wars: Thuc. i, 118. In the following passage to be n follows ra 
pkv, tci be: ra pev pifuijueTat tijv -rrpoTepav noXiTelav, to. be t?jv 
oXiyapyjav, — to be ti km avTrjs ej-ei 'ibiov : and something it will 

«■ But tJ» tv has sometimes the most fications, that of Being ia general ; as 
extended and comprehensive of all signi- in Plato's Parmenides. — J. S. 



3 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. t. 

have peculiarly its own: Plato tie Rep. viii, p. 517- — I" tlie mascu- 
line, 6 be tis : ev tovtu> oi ojlXoi tu> Kvpo) trpooriyov 01 /<6c KnSoj/a/ovs 
beofievovs avrov peveiv, ol be 'YpKavlovs, 6 hi tis Vcjfipvav, 6 b£ rts 
laKav : and some other, Gobryas, and some other, Sacas: Xen. 
Cyrop. vi. iuit. — Sumelimes to pip u, to bi ti are not adverbial: Tfjs 
yeveaews i)fxu>v to fiev n ?'; narpls fiepl^erat, to be n oi yevvifrravres, 
to be ol koiirol (pi\oi: part of our lives our country claims for her 
share, part our parents, and part our other friends : Plato Epist. 9* 
In the plural, tci pkv, tu be: Herodot. iii, 80. Pind. Pylh. ii, 19- 
Soph. Trach. 534. Ta /jev — to be irXeov, partly, — but principally, 
or more: Time, i, 90. init. The forms are much varied in Pindar. 
See Nem. ix, 102. Ol. xii, 7. Nem. ii, 29. viii, 51. Pyth. xi, 70. ii, 56. 
Isthm. iii, 18. Ol. ii, 132. — In the same sense tovto fxev, tovto be. : teal 
tovto fiev tw lafir]iiu) 'A.n6\Xojvi eyj)i}oa.T0, tovto be £elv6v tivo. — 
KdTeKo! fxiae es 'Afifiapem : he both consulted Ismenian Apollo, AND, 
&c. Herodot. viii, 134. see too Herodot. iii, 106. ix, 27- Tovto fiev 
by itself, Soph. Aj. 6?0. Herodot. ii, 99. iii, 106\ 108. vii, 21. Tovto 
be. by itself, Herodot. v, 45. viii, 60. tovto fiev, — ?/ he av eo-obos, 
Id. vii, 176. Tovto fiev with fteTct be corresponding, in the beginning 
of the following chapter : Herodot. vi, 125. To fiev — tovto be, Id. viii, 
102. Tovto fiev—eha, Soph. Phil. 1345.— This idiom is imitated in 
Latin by Hoc — Hoc. See Virg. Georg. ii, 351. 

XVII. To Xeyofievov, according to the adage, or proverb : dX\' 
i], to Xeyofievov, ko.toitiv eopTijs ijtcofiev ; but are we come, as they 
say, after the feast? Plato in Gorg. and in Phaed. c. 11. — To too 
Xoyov is used in the same sense ; Lucian, Demonax. [p. 999- A. edit. 
Salm.] Sometimes, instead of Xeyofievov or tov Xoyov, the name 
of the author, whose adage or words are quoted, is put in the 
genitive after ro : Hapfievibrjs be fioi (paiverai, to tov 'O fxr/pov, 
albows re fioi elvai a/j.a beirvs Te : in the words of Homer ; as Homer 
says: Plato Theaet. p. 183. The following are elegant variations 
of this idiom : fidXXov avTov XeXrjOev 1} 01 tijs daXarrns Xey 6 ptevoi 
%6es: he is more ignorant of it, than of the measures, as they say, 
of the water in the ocean : Plato Theaet. p. 173. I. 41. »/ Aiofieheia 
Xey 6 fievr) avayKn iroielv avr<i) -navTa a av ovtol eircuvwviv : he is 
under a Diomedean necessity, as it is called, to do whatsoever these 
may commend: Plato de Rep. vi, p. 493. r»)v Mvawv Xelav 
KaXovfj. evrjv, Demosth. de Cor. [p. 248. 1. 23. ed. Reisk.] — In the 
same manner to elp/jfievov, JEschyl. Agam. 1632. as Hermann reads, 
substituting to for rw.* 

XVIII. The neuter article, in all its cases, forms idioms by being 
joined with the infinitive of verbs ; as to iroielv, tov irvielv, els to iroielv, 
ev rw Troielv, &c. : tcis (3\aa<pr)fiias amov ovKotyavTias o'veras eirtbei£u), 
fit] fxovov rw ipevbels ehai, aXXa (cat rw (et to. yuaWra fjoav aXndels) 

* Tvdxrei yepaiv &v, cos SiSdcTKeadai jUapv as to \ey6fievov above, but I cannot but 

rip TnXtKOVTcp aui(ppovuv elprjfitvov. v. be diffident of mj opinion when a Prelate 

1610. Blomf. — ''Hermannus ad Vig. p. of such distinguished learning and abili- 

702. legit to t. <r. e. quod non intelligo." ties as Dr. Blomfield has declared he 

Blomf. Hermann, I think, takes tJ> elpri- cannot perceive Hermann's meaning. — 

fi&ov parenthetically, in the same sense J. S. 



Rule 17—19.] THE ARTICLE. 9 

ovtws ais eyfo Ke^ptj/Jtat, to7s trpaynaat av fxtyepeiv ^pi'iffCKrdai : not 
only because they are false, but because, even though they were true, 
it was advantageous to the state, that &c. Demosth. pro Coron. 
Ov yap ovofiaarl rovs Xoyovs Trou'iaofiai, Tw /u>) boKelv eXey\etv a KpvTrreiv 
Xpeutv : for I will not mention any one by name in my discourses, that 
I may not appear to accuse publicly what it is necessary to conceal: 
Greg. Naz. ad Episc. vs. 21. In this sense the genitive tov also is 
used with the infinitive, (eVecct or v-n-ep being defective,) but never 
perhaps without some negation, as fit), jur'i riva, fjrjbeva, following. 
See Sophocl. Philoct. 197. Heliodor. ^.thiop. p. 496. Diony. Hal. 
p. 12. 1. 33. Huds. Basil, quoted by Casaub. on Athen. p. 75. To 
is placed before words also taken materially, as bfie'is, w lirbpes 
'Adrjvcuot, (to b' v/jiels orav e'iirw, ti)v rtoXiv Xeyta — ) : but when I say 
YOU, when I use the word you : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 255. I. 4. 
Reisk.] But the article is sometimes omitted before words so taken : 
Ism.: 'Ft yap fxoyrj /xoi rvjab' arep (5iojitijj,ov ; Cieon : 'AW ?/oe 
fxevroL /jt) Xey' ov yap ear en, Soph. Ant. vs. 56j . do not employ 
the word ijbe:'' and in the writings of grammarians the article is 
put in the gender of the word understood before that which is 
taken materially; as Xeirrei »; els, (wpodeais being understood,) the 
preposition els is defective: Sch. Aristoph. Nub. 1083. So Xeliret 
ri bia, the preposition bia is understood: Sch. Thuc. 1. iv. init. 
The neuter article is put before members of sentences also: wept tov 
7rws aKoveiv v/ucis kfiov be't,' about the manner in which you ought to 
hear me : Demosth. de Cor. p. 226. 1. 5. [St. Luke xxii, 24. Plat, 
de Rep. vi, p. 510.] — and before sentences, either complete and 
forming propositions, or defective and elliptical : ws to 'H,uepa eaA, 
Kol Nv£ ean, Trpos [iev to bieievyfierov /ueyaXrjv e^et al,iav : as the 
proposition It is day, and the proposition It is night, are very good 
when taken disjunctively, or formed into a disjunctive proposition : 
Epietet. Enchir. c. 58. See Plato Pliaedr. p. 273. 1. 20. St. Paul, 
Gal. v, 14. Id. Rom. xiii, 9. Plato Phaedr. p. 272. init. : to b' e/ue 
Kopwvrj Treido/bievoi' tov ddXiov obov nepieXdelv crabia irXelf ?} -^IXta ! 
that I, ivretch that I am, should, have wandered about more than a 
thousand stadia trusting to a crow! Aristoph. Av. vs. 5. — See 
Virg. iEu. i, 41. Soph. Phil. 234. Aristoph. Nub. Sl6\ Xeuoph. 
Cyrop. ii, 2, 1. To be, followed by /.n} or pjSe, Aristoph. Nub. 
269. Ran. 741. 

XIX. The article is often deserted, as it were, by the noun which 
should have followed it, the construction having been suddenly 
changed on account of a doubt about the proper appellation of the 
thing to be expressed ; a form most common in orations ; as, // twv 
aXXiov 'E,\A?'/!'wi', e'ire xP'l Kamav, e'ire ayvoiav, e'ire kcu ravra afMporepa 
elireiv : the — must I call it baseness, or ignorance, or both together, 
of the other Greeks: Demosth. de Cor. [p. 231, I. 21.] — Two 
singular nouns after a plural article : ai J' avr eltropobxrai, 'Adrjvau'i 
re Kal "Hpt], Horn. II. v, 418. 

h I conjecture the true reading to be i To this head the passages quoted 
'AAA' tySe jUeV aoi jurjSeV* ov yap iar en. above from Dem. pro Cor. and Gregv 
— J. S. Naz. ought to be referred.-— J. S. 

Fiser.. B 



10 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. 

1. The article with an appellative noun sometimes stands for a pro- 
per name: o ketwioacxpHTTris, slthentEUS ; b yewypiupos, Strabo ; b irepi- 
vyi)Ti)<;, Dionysius, whose poem is entitled lUpn'iyrjo-is rfjs oiKovfiivr}s ; 
b eOriKoypc'ityos or b tOvoypr'npos, Stephanus of Byzantium, who wrote 
a book wept 7roAew>' rat b)'i/.iu>i> ; b napaftdirns, the emperor Julian, who 
is commonly styled the Apostate, uKoararris ; b t&v aruaeuiv &&?yi?r$*» 
Hermogenes the rhetorician ; b tc^vlkos, Herod tan the grammarian ; 
b reyvacos Tewpyios, Chceroboscus ; b iropO/xevs, Charon ; b irovnpbs, 
the Devil; b (IovkoXosJ Theocritus; b avyypafevs, Thucydides, 
(Aphthon. ; Greg. Cor. de dial.); b xPwopp>l/Jui>, Chrysostom ; b 
deoXoyos, Gregory of Nazianzum ; b 7roir)n)s, Homer ; b piirup, De- 
mosthenes. — Equivalent to the appellative so used is a participle 
with its dependent words : b to. edviKa ypdipas, Stephanus of Byzan- 
tium ; b iroujaas to. Aiovvmaica, Nonnus of Panopolis, whose 48 
books of Dionysiacs are still extant ; ' AXefavbpevs prjTwp b ra epwrtra 
Trails, k Achilles Tatius, author of the amours of Clitophon and 
Leucippe ; b ret j3ovkoXikci ypciipas, Theocritus ; b ra Kvirpia. ypaxpas 
(viz. eirr) or 7rotr)/uara), Stasitnus ; and b TreipaZwv, the Devil. 

2. Secondly, the article with an appellative marks a thing determi- 
nate^, or demonstratively : Ibovres tov aarepa, e^aprjuav, rat eXQov- 
t€s eis tov oikov evpov to traibiov, Matth. ii, 10, where a certain 
particular star, house, child, are emphatically signified ; see also 
Matth. ii, 2. [The article sometimes appears to be employed for a 
purpose exactly opposite, — to signify things indefinitely; whence it 
has been supposed to stand for tis : * eav tis tu>v tyiXwv avaicoivuiTai 
vTrep T(t>i>, iElian, V. H. viii, 1. et7rep rw aXXb), Plato Phaed. 25. 
see Xen. Mem. iv, 6, 13 : — and interrogatively, Xen. Mem. iv, 5, 10. 
cf. Xen. CEc. xi, 20. But in reality what is taken for the article in 
such passages, is tis itself in another form ; for the Ionic dialect sub- 
stitutes Teo and rev for tov when the latter represents twos or rivos, 
and Tea) for rlvi. The form is probably used by the Attics in the 
genitive and dative singular only; but if it should be granted that it 
is used in the plural also of those cases, (since the plural appears iu 
the Ionic rewr and reoim, and in the pronoun, otuiv and orois,) yet at 
all events it is never employed in the nominative or accusative of 
either number.] 

3. The article with the appellative sometimes follows the proper 
name as a cognominal addition: thus, 'HpanXetTos b crKoretvbs, Hera- 
clitus the obscure ; 'Iwawys b Ba7r-t<m)s, John the Baptist ; and the 
appellative is in many instances so added without the article. — In the 
following form a preposition with its case is substituted for the appel- 
lative : MiXru\br]v be, top ev Mapadwvi, &c. Miltiades the con- 
queror at Marathon: Plato Gorg. p. 51 6. 1. 40. 

The article is repeated, for the sake of greater distinction or em- 

i 'O I3ovko\m6s ? — J. S. genius. Advice to an Author. — J. S. 

* By the same sort of affected cir- * *H <papixd.Koi<nv % fiia ye rq> Tk%vn. 

cumlocution Lord Shaftesbury designates Aristoph. Thesm. 420. " Sciunt Grsece 

Aristotle as the Grand Master of Art, docti, tov, rep, indefinita, eademque ac- 

Homer as the Grand Poetic Sire, Socrates centu notata, et interrogantia omnium 

and Plato, as the Philosophical Patriarch, esse generum. evp-qpa Se'|aT' etc tov vvp.<pav. 

and his Disciple of noble birth and lofty Soph. 02d. T. 1107." Bnmck.— J. S. 



Rule 19.] THE ARTICLE. n 

phasis : 6 bfjfios 6 'AQrivaliov : 6 7roifxi)v 6 /eaXos, John x, 12. the 
good shepherd, by way of eminence; ol be "EWrives, ol fxtadofopoi, 
ol avv Aape/w, Arrian ii, JO. 

There is often a concurrence of several different cases of the arti- 
cle, without any intervening word: as, ol to twv baipovtov yevos — 
efrvpovres : those who first broached the doctrine of the demons, &c. 
Plut. de Or. Def. p. 415. r« ttjs t&v IXevdepwv <j>dopas vofito, 
iEschin. in Tim. p. 172, 1. 43. rijv tov ry ovtl pt}Topucov — re^vrjv, 
Plato Phaedr. p. 269, I. 30. 

The article repeated, with the intervention of nal, has an indefinite 
signification: el to teat to eirolrjirev avQpwrros ovrool, ovk av aireda- 
vev : if this man had done so and. so, or this and the other : Demosth. 
de Cor. [p. 308, 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] add Aristid. Orat. pro Quatuorv. p. 
420. ra Kal tu iroiovaas, Aristid. ib. p. 356. For this phrase 6 be'iva 
is sometimes substituted. — 'O belva is used on the following occasions : 
1. when a certain person is spoken of, but his name is unknown to 
the speaker : l bey^ov tovtov av, iropQfiev, /cat roe belva, Lucian, 
Catapl, 13. t. i. p. 635. — 2. when the name of something spoken 
of is purposely suppressed: ro belva fievToi p) Xa^uveTwaav 
ovtoi, to JbucaaTitcbv," 1 Lucian, Bis Ace. c. 23. t. ii. p. 822, 51. — 
3. when a name is not remembered: Aristoph. Thesm. 620, 621, 
622. — 4. when it is indicated that any name will serve the purpose, 
one as well as another. In this sense, for 6 be'iva koa 6 belva the 
Latins say Caius and Sempronius. In the plural, ol belves tov 
bij/uov (underst. presented with a crown) audevTes ino tov bfyov : 
such and such persons. 

The article is prefixed to interrogative pronouns; when it always 
refers to something previously said by the person interrogated ; the 
article appearing to be the commencement of an anticipation of what 
the person questioned is expected to say, and the interrogative pronoun 
to be resorted to, after a short aposiopesis, from inability to proceed. 
Tr. evbaifxovei' Tracy^ei be davfxaaTov. Merc, ro — tL', Aristoph. Pac. 
696.— -Merc. J, <i. ola fi eKeKevaev avairvQeaQai aov ; Tr. tu — ri ; 
Aristoph. Pac. 693. — n. irpayfia Tropovvwv fxeya. K. ro — irolov, 
to £iv ; Soph, ro nolov brjXiyeis; Plato Phzedr. 265. When there 
is nothing in the preceding words to which the article thus employed 
can be grammatically referred, some noun with which it may agree is 

1 In Aristophanes, Ran. 918, a person the point of taking away a slave bought 

both present and known by name to by him without inquiring what food he 

the speaker is called o Selva. Bacchus likes, exclaims, rb oeha 54- Sirens ?8a 

speaks of iEschylus. — J. S. rlai x a ' l P ei T ^" / eSeo-fidruv. — Aristophanes 

m A less questionable example of this frequently uses rb oe'tva thus, as an inter- 
use of rb Suva occurs in Aristoph, Ach. jection, not unlike Malum in Latin, and 
1149, where it signifies rb aldolov. In Plague on it! in English; as, ISob, icard- 
the passage of Lucian (in which there /ceitr' aviaas rr tcayib 'KSvo/Mcti. Kairoi, rb 
ought to be no comma after ovtoi, but a b~e~iva, \J/ja0<5s ear' i^oiarea, Lysistr. 921. 
colon after fievroi') the expression ap- but stay, what was I thinking about 1 &c. 
pears to be an interjection, or exclama- It is expressive on different occasions 
tion expressive of some degree of pertur- of surprise, vexation, anger, &c. See 
bation at having nearly forgotten what Aristoph. Av. 648. Vesp. 524. jEoI. 
ought to have been remembered : so in Fragtn. 1. — J. S. 
Lucian (Vit. Auct. p. 558.) a merchant on 



12 THE ARTICLE. [Chap. i. Role 19. 

expressed in tlic interrogation itself: Prom. Ovnrovs tnavaa />>] npo- 
bepKetrOai f.t6pov. Clior. to no~iov evpiov rijcrbe tyiipnaKov voaov ', 
jEschyl. Prom. vs. 248. the remedy which you discovered for this 
malady, was what ? 

Tiie article is joined with every part of speech, except the con- 
junction, in an adverbial sense : ro KeipaXaiov, principally, above 
all, in sum; to aXndes, Herodian iii, 8. r 6 arpexes, Theogn. 
\67 • in truth, in reality; to apx<ilov, to it aXatov, anciently: 
Plat. Hipp. M. 285. Heraclid. de Polit. Tolvavriov, on the 
contrary: Ceb. Tab. to Xonrdv, for the future : Thuc. i, 31. 56. 
for the remainder, Xen. H. Gr. vii. p. 6*26. To Xonrdv may be 
put for tov Xoinov, but not vice versa; see Xen. Cyrop. viii, 5, 24. 
Aristoph. Pac. 1084. Herodot. i, 11. vi, 12. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 4, 10. 
— ro Xoinov, for what remains, to proceed. [In these phrases the 
article sometimes coalesces with the following word : see Wessel. 
ad Herodot. p. 53. Duk. Pre f. to Thuc] to SXov, wholly: Plat. 
Phaedr. 26l. I. 7. to nav, to (ivfiTrav, altogether, entirely, on 
the whole: Lucian, Dear. Jud. Isocr. ad Nicocl. ro noXv, for the 
most part, mostly: Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 11. to gvvoXov, on the 
ivhole, in sum: Diod. Sic. i. to reXevTalov, at last; to irXeov, 
more: Thuc. i, 69. to irporepov, before: ib. c. 58. and ro 
nporepov i], before that : Herodot. i, 72. to varepov, the second 
time: Thuc. i, 73. ro bevrepov, the second time : Plat. Phaedr. p. 
286. 7-0 TpiTov, the third time : Plat. Theag. p. 129- ra upar inra, 
in the best manner possible: Thuc. i, 31. tovXci^igtov, for 
ro eXd^LtTTOP, at the least : Plut. in Cic. 865. to fieyiarov, in the 
greatest degree, most: Theogu. 111. Kal to fxeyiaTov bij, and 
what is above all: Xen. Cyrop. v, 1, 22, ro -n-pwror, at first : Lu- 
cian, t. i, p. 282. ro avTo, in the same manner: Plut. Apophth. 
ro vvv el vat,* Att. for the present: Xen. Anab. iii, p. 305. 
Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 312. — So to a^jxepov el vat, for to-day : 
see Steph. ad Corinth, art. 29. Alciph. i. ep. 1. — to en eiioi elvai, 
as far as I am concerned : see Duk. ad Thuc. iv, 48. as far as it is 
in my poiver. — to Xeyo/uevov, to vvv eypv, above, Rules 17, 6. — ro 
avetcadev, formerly, before: Nicol. Damasc. de Mor. Gent, ro 
/iera£i>, in the mean time: Lucian, Tox. to fx^XP 1 e^ou, 
down to my time: Herodot. Th. c. 10. to naXat, formerly: 
Plat. Phaedr. 251, 1. 19- to napavriKa, for the present, for the 
time: Thuoyd. i, 134. to irp\v, before: Iliad, e, 54. ro npoaQev, 
heretofore : Xen. Cyrop. v, p. 129- ro ttCjs, in what manner, how: 
St. Luke xxii, 2. to. is yevovs bo£av, ivitk regard to celebrity of 
birth: Pans, in Arc. — to a.no tovtov, to and Tovbe, to /xerct 
tovto, to etc Tovbe, from this time forward, henceforth. — to ana 
tovtov, and ro e7ri tovtois, after this, after these things: Lucian, 
Conv. t. iiij p. 427, 433, 447- to k\ apxvs, at first, at the outset : 

* " Neque ilia rb vvv elvai, rh Tiipepov yap u-erpioos t6 ye rlifiepov elvai. In 

elvai, idem significant quod vvv et ri^/xe- Soph. (Ed. C. 1189. ((re y elvai &c.) 

puv, sed, ut id nunc, ut id liodie sit : i. e. sensus est, ut tu sis is, qui ilium malis 

quantum hodie satis est: quod nos did- remuneretur. Nos, du fur deine person "■ 

mus, fur jetzt : fur heute. Kex^pevrcu Hermann De Ell. et Pieon. — J. S. 



Chap. ii. Rule ].] "Os. 13 

Paus. Achaic. 401. to e£ vpwv, as far as you can : Rom. xii, 18. 
to en kKeivf, as far as he is concerned: Isocr. Paneg. to tear 
e/jtavrov, as far as I am able, or in me lies, to the best of my ability : 
Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 908. 922. see Rom. i, 15. iElian, V. H. i, 32. 
70 icad' kavTov, individually , with respect to his own private con- 
cerns: Thuc. i, 60. to cu0' r/fiipav, daily: Plat. Phzedr. p. 240. 
1. lfj. to Kara capita, according to the Jlesh: Act. Ap. ii, 30. to 
irpbs ttiv eta, toivards the east : Herod. Melp. c. 19. to irpo tovtov, 
formerly, before: Thuc. ii, 15. ra 71-pos 7raroos 'Adriralos, on his 
father's side; to ewiira v, for the most part, always, universally: 
Herodot. Pol. c. 157. 

Tw, in that case, then : Horn. II. h, 290. — wherefore, for that 
reason, on that account: Horn. I!. (5, 250,254. and so all the 
poets. See Musgr. ad Eurip. Hel. 1489- Vale-ken. ad Fragm. 
Callim. p. 82. — In this sense Horace uses Hoc, Sat. i, 6, 41. In 
the same signification to, Horn. II. iii, J76. and o and w. Eurip. 
Hec. 13. Valcken. ad Phcen. p. 52. 



CHAPTER II. 

THE RELATIVE "Os." 

RULE I. °Os fxev, osbe, for 6 fxev, 6 be: ov fxev ebeipav, or be enre- 
KTeivav, ov be e\idoj36\r](Tai> : one — another — another: St. Matth. xxi, 
35. Herodian iii, 8. Rom. ix, 21. — So koi os, and he, i. e. then he 
answered or said thus ; and »)S' os, said he, (for e<pr) avros,) somelimes 
preceded by the name of the person meant: kui 6 'Abei/iavTos, r Apd 
ye, ?/£' os, &c. Plat, de Rep. i. ; sometimes followed by it : ri be; ?"}o' 
os, 6 QpaGVfxu^os, ibid. b. v, p. 450. 1. 13. so b. i, init. Lucian 
t. iii, pp. 440 et 443. — 'A^>' ov for and tov: rw per 6p6iZs ael XP^~ 
fxevos, afi ov be to'is beopevots eVapcwv : and with the other, or out 
of the other (wealth): Plut. Public, [p. 177- ed. H. St.] O 
fiev — os be, one — another: Theogn. 205. So Oppian, Hal. i, 585. 
in the plural; and Appian, Pun. p. 59- ^Elian, V. H. vi, 1. — 
"Os fxev — 6 be, one, — another: Rom. xiv, 2. — ("Os in these phrases 
is not what is sometimes called the relative, or subjunctive, article ; 
but a demonstrative pronoun. Anciently this pronoun had two forms, 
o, tov, and os, ov: both forms were used indifferently for the relative 
article, as appears from Homer; and although later usage appropriated 
os, ov, to the relative article, yet in some forms the ancient significa- 
tion has obtained.) To the examples may be added : Mosch. Ep. 
Bion. 77, 78. Rliinto ap. Cic. ad Att. i, 20. Demosth. pro Cor. 248. 

277, 20. 282. 289- In the second division of a sentence there 

must be sometimes understood a case of os different from the case 

* Called by some the Subjunctive Article. 



J 1 THE RELATIVE "Os. [Chap. ii. 

expressed in the first division : livioxOi be~ fxtv yaytkeoQat TJ, brew' re 
irari)p KeXerat, kcu avbavet avrfj, Odyss. ii, 114. I. e. ical bans avba- 
vet avrjj. — So Odyss. v, 54. xx, 341. Rhianus i, 9- 

*Os often, (as the Latin Qui,) agrees with a following noun instead 
of its antecedent: rt)v utcpijv ni KaXevvrat KXrjibes rf/s Kvirpov, 
Herodot. v, 108. UeprjiKov I'tfos, rbv a.KtvciKT]v KuXeuvat, Herodot. 
vii, 54. — so Eurip. Med. 14. Androm. 864. Hel. 289. See Fisch. 
ad Well. p. 341.— and sometimes with a noun understood, of a gen- 
der different from that of its antecedent: vetyeXr) be \xtv a./j.(pifieftr)Ke 
Kvaveri' 70 fjiev cvttot epwel, — i. e. vetyos, Horn. Od. xii, 74. See 
Greg. Cor. p. 38. and Keen. Steph. Dial. Att. p. 131, 134. 

Sometimes other redundant pronouns are added to 6's : <5v o pev 
av-wv, Callim. Epigr. 44. wv o fiev bfitiv, Menand. Epigr. ols 
'OXv/nriot deoi AoTeV iror alrols, Soph. Phil. 315. 

II. "Ooris is, l. Quis, Quisnam, who," without interrogation, and 
so jJTti, o,ti, (to distinguish it from bn, that, conjunction) through 
all the cases. In this sense it very frequently occurs in the repe- 
tition of the substance of a question by a person to whom that ques- 
tion has been addressed; corresponding to ris in the question: as, 
Pisth. : irpbs rwv Bewv, av b' el rls avbpwv ; Meton. bans e'ifi eycii ', 
Merwv: Aristoph. Av. [997.] See Aristoph. Av. 961. and 1528. in 
which last verse the neuter b,n is so used. — 2. Quisquis, who- 
soever/ In this sense it sometimes follows nds in the singular, (but in 
the plural rravres baot, not rravres (drives,) or has various particles 
annexed to it, as bartaovv, o,rl rrep, b,ri bt), b,ri irore, b,ri bij wore, 
or brth'inore, brtbrjirorovv. bans irore, 1E\. V. H. ii, 13. 0, rt irore, 
Aristoph. Pac. 180. bans brirrore, Demosth. in Chers. init. 
bartaovv, Plato Euthyphr. c. 6. and ./Esch. Dial, ii, 13. rrav b,ri 
irep, Plato Euthyphr. c. 6. bans by], Horn. Od. o, 400. ovs be ri- 
vets, some, preceded by ttoXXovs fiev, Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii. c. 23. — 
Ovbels bans ov, nemo non, every one : KarayeXq. av r)fiu>v ovb els oarts 
ov : there is no one who would not laugh at us: Plato, Hipp. M. p. 
299- see Herodot. iii, 72. v, 97. Eurip. Hel. 932. oibels bs ovy), 
Soph. CEd. R. 372. The entire phrase was originally ovbeis eartv, 
bans ov\ but afterwards the negative pronoun was put in the case, 
whatever it might be, which the construction required in the relative 
pronoun: as ovbeva bvriva ov tcarexiXaae rwv irapovrwv, Plat. Phaed. 
[p. 47. 1. 18. ed. Bas. prim.] Add Lucian, Deor. Dial, ii, 1. [p. 
122. B. ed. Salmur.] "Os enters into a phrase employed by persons 
unwilling or unable to speak plainly : j)v Evpvadevs ftev, bs l\v'. such 
as he was: Epict. ap. Arr. iii, 26. irpoetXero jmev bibaanaXov e£ 
enravrwv, bvriva hi) ko.1 rrpoeiXero: whoever he was: Aristid. 
Orat. Fun. in Eteon. p. 136. ebpaaev b,ri hi) ical ebpaaev, no mat- 
ter what: Heliod. CEth. I. 5. See ^sch. Choeph. 778. So 6W : 
ewXeva', ottws eirXevaa, deofiavel norpw, Eurip. Or. 79- Pors. 
[according to the ingenious punctuation of Hermann.] 

III. (IV.)"Orts is used by the poets, where the metre will not admit 



Ovk olS' Sans, I know not who: p Soph. Antig. 178. 182.— J. S. 
Horn. Od. 0. 28.— J. S. 



Rules— 11.] THE RELATIVE "Os. 15 

qf ports: ashy Horn. II. r, 260. Od. fx y 39. In other places they use 
octtis: see Odyss. 0, 210. o, 400. Callim. in Ap. 23. 27. 6'riVa 
for ovtivu, Odyss. 9, 204. onvas for oii<mi'as, II. o, 492. oYiva for 
utivu, II. x, 450. 

IV. (V.) "Quris, \qotis brj, and ds br],] Qui quidem, [Rom. xvi, 4, 6, 
7, 12.] in every gender, case, and number: in poetry os re, [see 
Hermann in Erf.'s ed. min. Soph. (Ed. R. 688.] for os fikv could not 
be used for Qui quidem. 

V. "Ootis, some, some or other: tca& ijvrtva -xpotyaoiv, upon some 
pretext, whatever it was: Anton. Lib. v, and xli. 

VI. The Attic writers are fond of using orov for ov or ov-ivos, and 
otu) for £ or lorivi, (but not orov for ov, or ovnva,) as avd' orov, where- 
fore : ecf erf bis)poboKi]ae-e, an occasion for taking bribes : Demosth. 
pro Cor. [p. 242, 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] 

VII. "Os lias been improperly used for the interrogative ris ; <Sv bk 
evexa ravra irpotr^veyKa r<p Xoyw ; CEnomaus ap. Euseb. Praep. vi. p. 
257. wherefore, on what account ? iralpe, if' w irapei ; Matth. xxvi, 
50. So ok rponov, for riva rpbirov ; 

VIII. The dative feminine y is, in the part in which, in the degree 
in which, in the way in which, as to, so far forth as, &c. as y fiev 
XoyiKos kartv, ecplerai rijs aperfjs, y be capKiKos, e\erai ruiv yyitav. It 
has sometimes the adjunct nep, and corresponds to ravry : btaipedrjvat 
ravry yirep avveredr), Plato Phaed. 

IX. Ku0' o, or KaOo, icad' o, re, or Kadon : where, in the part where, 
in as far as, how, as ; tcad' a, or Ka6h, as, where ; Trap" o, or napd, 
wherefore, beyond or contrary to, as nap' b be~t. 

X. 'A»-0' orov, on account of which, wherefore, on what account : 
Eurip. Ale. 247. Iph. T. 926. Hec. 1113. Pors. 1118. Pors. 'A><0' 
tav, (without an ellipsis,) wherefore, therefore : Lycurg. adv. Leocr. 
c. 18. St. Luke xii, 3. — (elliptically, see Theocr. Epigr. xvii.)— 
because; biKas eicricras, avd' <Sv a7rebpaaev, iElian, V. H. xiii, 28. 
See Judith vii, 15. Act. Ap. xii, 23. St. Luke i, 20. xix, 44. 
2 Thess. ii, 10. Ezech. v, 11. ap. Sept. — So l\ 3>v, q wherefore, on 
which account. 'Ep' 6ls, k(f f, eq>' are, on what terms, on condition, 

for the purpose of: 'iaraai yap e0' ol s avrovs Kva^ipjjs dyerai, on 
what terms or conditions: Xen. Cyrop. i, 6, 11. ovbenore petSorwv 
wpe^drjaav, i) k<f olairep — n)v j3aen\eiav napeXajSov : than what the 
conditions on which they received the crown allowed: Xen. Ages, i, 4. 
'E<f>, w, on condition that, with a future, Thuc. i, 113.: with an 
infinitive, Xen. Ages, iv, 1. H. Gr. vi, 3, 7- ii, 2, 12. Anab. iv, 2, 12. 
[k(j>' J, with a past tense, signifies bton, because: Thorn. M.] — kef w re, 
with an infinitive, on condition that: Aristoph. Plut. 1001. Xen. 
Hist. Gr. ii, 4, 28. iii, 1, 17. for the purpose of, Xen. Anab. vi, 
6, 13. H. Gr. ii, 3, 8.— Often ecp" oh is for iirl ro'is if' oh, and eft « 
for enl rw e(j>' J: as /japrvpe'i, e<p' ols ovk virevQvvos 1]V, eerretyavwaOai : 
that I was crowned for my conduct in affairs of which I was not 
liable to render account : Demosth. pro Cor. 

XL The dative feminine y, answering to Qua in Latin, signifies, 

«'E{ £v5)| Ka\ ipiaei rbv ~2,<aKp&Ti\v 6 Kpnias, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 31. — J. S. 



16 THE RELATIVE ."0*. [Chap. 11. 

I. where ; »] to twp Bewp ytvos ohel, Plato Pha?dr. p. 246. So yirep, 
Thuc. iv, 53. — 2. by which icay, the way that: ret — oro/iara, y 
to irrepop opaa, Plato Phaedr. p. 251. tuvti] Tpeiroprai ?) >'/ tytXotrocpia. 
b<pt)ye~iTai, Plato Phaedr. 32. — 3. in the manner or way that, as: 
rj aoi boKei, bie£tu)P, Plato <le Rep. ii. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 24. — 4. in 
what respect, why: fiayBapeis on erepa aXX))Xu)p earl, cat y erepa, 
Plato Euthyphr, c. 12. in respect of being, as, so far forth as, 
Quatenus : xP r i Tal vvobii/jtan ?J vTrobrj/ja, Aristut. de Rep. i, c. Q. — 5. 
with a comparative, by how much, Tavrrj Tr\eio> £>]Te~iy ecpobta, rj 
kXaaaiav obds KaraXeiirerai, Gaza de Sen. — 6. with superlatives : 
as ?] tux^to, as quickly as possible : Xen. Cyrop. vii, 5, 82. — and in 
the same sense with a substantive: »/ tu\os, with all speed : Plut. 
in Cic. p. S70. 1. 33. — In most of these instances pepibi or 6§w is 
understood. 

XII. "Os is frequently put in the case of its antecedent instead of 
the case which its governing verb would regularly require : as, 'ioaoi 
be obbev wv Xeyovai, but they know nothing of what they say: 
Plato A p. Socr. p. 22. 

XIII. The sense, or emphasis, requiring such a construction, os 
is placed before its antecedent, as Qua is in Latin : b'nep earl 
ftaXurQ' vnep hfiwp, — tovto TrapuoTijaat tovs Beovs v/jlIp : that WHAT 
is most for your interest, that the gods may suggest to you to do: 
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 226. 1. 2. Reisk.] See Mark vi, 16. Matth. 
xxvi, 48. — (A noun, which ought regularly to have been in another 
division of the sentence, is, with Attic elegance, joined to the pronoun 
relative : as orw eboicei TavTa 0ew TyueXei" for Beds jyueXet, Xen. 
Eph. p. l6l. but this phrase is not peculiar to Attic writers. See 
Vaick. ad Herodot. p. 574. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 27. 29. Coray ad 
Theophr. 268. Fisch. ad Well, iii, p. 340. seq.) 

XIV. "O, whereas/ or in which matter: biafepoprws yap robe 
ejfOfiev, &are toX/j^p re o't avTol paXtara, kcu 7rept wv eVi^eipty'rouei' 
eicXoyicleaBai. *0 rots dXXois afxaBla pep Bpacros, Xoyicpos be okvov 
<pepei : whereas in others, it is ignorance that inspires courage, and 
deliberation makes them irresolute: Thuc. ii, 40. [The following 
senses of o used as a particle, are to be noted : — 1. as to what : o be 
Xeyets, fiia napeXBopras oktjpovp, f//xe7s, &c. Xen. Anab. v, 5, 20. — 2. 
on which account, wherefore: o br) paXtoTa boKoi $wu>p e$T)Xu)icivai 
'nnroxePTavpovs, Xen. Cyrop. iv, 3, 17- — 3. that, on : AevacreTe yap 
roye TrciPTes, 6 pot yepas ot^erat aXXrj, Horn. II. a, 120.] 

XV. The neuter plural a with the particle re signifies as, as 
being, since, &c. rd avru kipovp, are ovic cnroXenrov eavrb, oinrore 
Xriyei Kipovpepop : as not deserting, since it does not desert, itself: 
Plato Piiaedr. p. 245. are tov 'AiroXXwvos optcs, as being Apollo's, 
since they are Apollo's: Plato Pluedr. c. 35. cf. Plat. ibid. c. 27, 28. 
275. iEsch. Dial. iii. extr. tovs 7rot»jras — ov irapabelopeBa, — are 
rvpappibos iptjras: since (or because) they are celebrators of 
despotism: Plato Rep. viii, p. 568. — With an absolute case: are 

r Thuc. seems to have referred h to in its progress, from what he at first in- 
roXnav and eK\oyl^eff9ai, hut to have tended it to be. See Thuc. iii, 12. p. 394. 
changed the construction of the sentence. 1. 11. ed. Bekk. — J. S. 



Rule 12— 18.] THE U&&& DbBfiTAN ' frTVE . 17 

tT]s fxev yrjs k\ovor]s ra fxeaa rov koer/idv, since the earth occupies the 
centre of the universe: iEsch. Dial, iii, 19. — In Pind. Pytli. iv. it 
signifies, in the manner in which, Kadanep : aV — evepye-ai Aet?rV 
eTTciyyeWovTt. (3 pers. plur.) "Are bij and ola b>) have the same sense 
as are. 

XVI. The neuter in the dative is put with a verh for the latter's 
derivative or kindred substantive: as, ols yap evTV-^ritceiaav ev 
AeuKrpois, ov [terpiws eiceyprivTo, Demosth. pro Cor. for rots evTv^ji- 
fiaai : their success, their victory at Leuctra. So ev ols ri /japravov 
at liWoi' for toIs riov aXXwv auaprj/uao-i : the errors of others : De- 
mosth. ib. [p. 231. 1. 13. ed. Reisk.] 

XVH. e Os sometimes follows an antecedent, with which it cannot 
grammatically agree : as, ev woXvrpoirois yap £u/u(f>opa7s kviar-uvtai (the 
parents of tliose who had fallen in battle) rpacpevres, to e' ei/ri»%es, 
oi av rrjs evirpe7reorarj]s Xa^uaiv, wcrirep o'lbe /uev vvv, reXevTfjs, vfie'is be 
Xuttijs, kciI oh evevhaifiovrjaai re 6 fitos o/moiws ical ivTeXevrfjaai £vve- 
fxerprjOr] : Thuc. ii, 44. le bonheur certes est pour ceux, qui, &c. Gail. 
That excellent critic Hermann reads i) oh evevbaifxovfjaai, &c. under- 
standing fxdXXov, and translating thus : Seiunt enim, va'riis se casibus 
in vita usos, potiusque fortunatos esse, quibus vel exitus honestis- 
simus, uti his nunc, vel luctus, ut vobis, contigerit, quam quibus sic 
est traducta vita, ut in ea et essent felices, et decederent. — [So the 
construction would be, to b' chromes etceivois elvai fxaXXov, oi, &c] 

XVIII. "Arm is put for ariva, what. When this substitution is 
more evident, it has the aspirate; when less so, the soft breathing, 
cirra, which last, like tis, is added to other words, and seems to render 
their meaning less determinate, being often little more than an 
expletive. The following are examples: — 1. utto, in direct interro- 
gation : irujs rat arra iroTe bteXe%0r) ', how and what? Demostli.de 
Fals. Leg. p. 241. see Horn. II. k, 409- : in indirect interrogation : e'i 
Tts — epwTMr] fi/uas, avra arret eari, Plato ii. de Rep. see Horn. II. k, 
208. : without any interrogation ; eTnarelXas arm efiovXero, Plato 
Phaed. c. 65. see Plat. Symp. 4. Soph. 41. extr. Crit. 12. Horn. II. 
a, 554. According to Eustath. the word is compounded of a and 
the Doric or Megaric aa, which signifies Ttva. — 2. arret : elVe fioi 
OTnroV atraa irepl \po\ ei'uara earo, Horn. Od. t, 218. i. e. birdla 
tan, aaca goto. See jEscIi. Dial, ii, 19. Plato Phaid. 31. Fisch. 
ad Plat. Soph. 45. Polit. 36. — "Arra may be rendered some, some 
such, nearly, or the like, somewhat, &c. : H) ravr eariv, rj Toiavra 
arra, Plato Phaed. 63. ct\\a cirra, Plato Phaed. 19, 52, 57. utto. 
ciXXa, Plat. Apol. 18. ttoXXo. arra, Plat. Phaed. 44, 65. erepa arra, 
iEsch. Dial, ii, 36. oXlya Uttu, Aristoph. Vesp. 55. afiiKpa arra, 
Plat. Polit. 3. arra roiabe, Plat. Phaed. 4. beiva a-ra, ib. 64. 
ohrpa arra, (i. e. oiKTpa citivu eariv) XoyonoiovvTes, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 6. 
reTTap' arra pev/xaTa, Plat. Phaed. 6l. — It is sometimes put absolutely : 
eXeyev arra rrpoaiceKvtyus, Plat, de Rep. 5. something. — To be ex- 
plained, eXeyev ariva eXeyev. — noXefiel be aXXr/Xots eviore avTwv arra 
Try : some, Plato Soph. 30. — With a substantive: avbpanoba cirra, 
Plato Phaedr. p. 259. ^P^"" 7 "" arra, id. Rep. x. p. 601. epy 
arra, Lucian, Nigr. — When the phrases in which cirra was used 
Viger. c 



18 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. hi. § i. 

became so trite, that ils original and proper signification was not 
attended to, it was joined willi some words very improperly, as witli 
irtji'iKu: wtivliea &rrtt, Aristoph. Av. 1.513. for irtiv'tKa ore. 

XIX. (XX.) "Arm is also a term of respect and kindness, used by 
younger persons in addressing their elders : <I>o7ri£, li-ra, yepme, 
Achilles to Phoenix, Mom. II. «, 003. see II. p, 56\. Od. tt, 31. 57. 
p, 6. 599- 0, 369. Calliin. Ep. i, 3. — So rerni was used by 
younger to older friends. 

XX. When the antecedent goes before an infinitive mood, the verb 
of the relative is also put in the infinitive : as e</>rj, el vat iroWovs 
aXXovs rwi' 'EXXifvuiv, ovs flovXe ardat, &c. for ol tfiovXovm : he said, 
there were many others of the Greeks, who were willing, &c. 
iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 288. See Plato Phanlr. p. 272. 1. 41. iElian, 
V. H. xii. c. 35. So the Latin writers. Corn. Nep. in Themist. c. 7« 
Curt. vii. c. 4. § 6. vi, 8, 10. viii, 1, 25. Suet. Caes. 47. 



CHAPTER III. 

SECTION I.— THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 

Rule I. Some remarkable changes of the cases and numbers of 
substantives, occurring chiefly in Attic writers, especially Plato, are to 
be observed : 6 be 'Aatrvptos, 6 BafivXwt'a. re eywv ko\ Trjv aXXrjv 'Aarrv- 
piav, eyto fiev utp.nl 'nnreas fxev a^eiv, Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39- 0»7A" — 
Karavevocu inreppevea Kpov/wva — ^AarpcnrT id v eiribe^^evaiatfiaa/]- 
para (paivwv, Horn. II. /3, 350, 353. See /Elian, V. H. ii. c. 11. 
init. Ep. ad Rom. ii, 8. So Ter. Hec. iii, 1, 6. See Linacer de 
Em. Struct. La't. Serin. Sanct. Min. iv, 11. and Perizon. Graev. ad 
Cic. Verr. iii, 71. Ern. Diatr. de grata negligentia orationis. Brunck. 
ad Soph. El. 480. 

Duals with plurals: hvolv — pepwv ovriav, Aristid. pro Qtia- 
tuOrv. p. 481. bvinv {]fxep(ov, Theophr. Ch. Adulat. : bvio be oi 
i/iees iiarriv, Horn. II. e, 10. Heliod. /Eth. x, 6. rw cV ai/rw 
fxaprvpoL earwv, Horn. II. a, 338. ./Elian, V. H. i, 15. in fine, rw — 
7)\Qov, Horn. II. e, 275. — An enallage from singular to plural is in 
Horn. II. a, 549, 550. and Acts xv, 46. See Xen. Mem. i, % 62. 
i, 2, 42. See Sil. It. xi, 25. — In Ter. Eun. i, 2, 88. his necessarily 
follows Eunnchum, because the class or kind in general was to be 
signified. See Virg. /En. viii, 427. — The plural is used for the 
singular to amplify or exaggerate : e/j.im<j)6yei ev to~is ovpiroaiois 
rovs <pi\ovs (for Clitus alone), Lucian, Dial. Mort. [p. 248. D. ed. 
Salmur.] See Virg. Eel. iii, 16. Ter. Andr. v, 4, 7. Virg. ./En. x, 79. 
81. vii, 359. xii, 799- 9^7- vii, 98. viii, 379. vi, fjifj. Hor. Od. ii, 13, 
3. iii, 3, 71. iv, 12, 8. Sen. in Tr. 328, 568. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 99. 
— By this kind of enallage the passage in 1 Cor. xv, 29- may perhaps 
be explained, if we take rwv veKpwv to signify Christ. See Rom. 

vi, 3. Rev. i, 5. 1 Cor. xv, 14. A plural verb is sometimes 

joined even with a neuter plural noun : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 27. Mem. 
ii, 4, 7. Xen. de Mag. Eq. viii, 6. See Fisch. ad Well. p. 30rJ. 



Rule 1—5.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 19 

Pors. Add. ad Eur. Hec. 1149. Ast. ad Plat. Polit. p. 386. ad Legg. 
p. 46.— Change of gender: Tpeirovrat eiri ryv Maiceboviav, e<f>' 
oirep teal irpoTepov e&ire/Lnrovro, Tliuc. i, 59- unless epyov, or some 
such word, be understood. In Thuc. ii, 47. — rj voaos — fip^aro, — 
Xeyopevov — eyKaraaKrjipai, Xeyopevov is a nominative absolute, and 
avrrjv is to be understood. See Clark, ad Odyss. xii, 75. — to bva- 
ttjvov eKetvo bo^apiov 7rpoer//xwi' tov fliov' vvv be ovvlrjfit fiby, ws 
eKeivr) p.ev avoxpeXijs, Lucian, Dial. Antil. et Achill. [p. 260. D. ed. 
Salmur.] Here eieetvri may agree with 8d|a understood. See Em. ad 
Xen. Mem. i, 3, 3. — There is no proper enallage in the passage of 
Paus., 1. El. post. p. 352. 1. 35. but rather an addition purposely 
made to state with greater exactness, what had before beeu stated 
with less : nor in Luke i, 55. because XaXe~iv irpos ma, and XaXelv 
tivi, are both forms in common use, and equivalent. — There are some 
instances of enallage in which neither the sense nor the construction 
is completed, as the beginning of the sentence might lead one to ex- 
pect ; as in the following auacoluthon : ^.fiivbvpibrjs o Ivfiapirrjs es 
ToaovTov Tpv<pf]s e&iceiXe : Smindyrides the Sybarite ran into such an 
excess of luxury, — (here, after tooovtov, we naturally expect ws, diore, 
oaov, that, as, or the like ; but the sentence proceeds — ) rat yap to7s 
^Lvfiaplrais iraaiv epyov -jjv rpvcpqiv kui T<p /3/w biappe'iv. 'O be Ifxtvbvpibrjs 
Ka\ TrXeov : for it was the main business of all the Sybarites to dis- 
solve in pleasure and effeminacy, but Smindyrides still more : IE\. 
V. H. ix, 24. — [The difference of cases in Demosth. pro Cor. p. 268, 
1. 9, 11. Reiske's ed., is regular and usual. See .-Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 
578, I. 12. Reisk.] 

II. A substantive concludes a member or period elegantly, when 
separated from its preceding adjective by a verb : as, /uera iracr^s 
e-xeoQai rf/s <j>i\oTrovlas : and in other constructions : see Arr. de Exp. 
Al. i. c. 18. in fine. 

III. Some substantives, especially 6b6s, way, ypafi/mrj, line, /iep\s or 
fiepos, part or portion, are elegantly understood. — 'Odds is defective 
in evdeias ixrpaTrfjiiai, to turn out of the straight road ; evavriav 
ievai or vir kvavrias (pepeoQai, to go, or be carried, the contrary 
way ; ayeaOat rr/v ewl davarw, to be led to execution. 

IV. On forensic subjects blxr) is often defective : as, bt evdeias or 
Kctr' evOe'iav avraywviSecrdai, to meet the proceedings of a plaintiff 
or prosecutor in a fair and direct manner, and not to have recourse 
to exceptions or other evasions, [see Suid. in WeTa,] equivalent to 
evdvbiKi'a yjprjaQai or evdvbiKe'iv. So KpiveaQai rrjv eiri Qavary, to be 
tried on a capital charge. 

V. 'lifxepa is understood in ttj it porepaia, the day before; rfj 
vcrrepaia, the day after, the next day. See Plut. Thes. [p. 5, 1. 20. 
ed. H. St.] 

The following examples of ellipsis of nouns may be added :-— 
to tov loXujvos, (a.ir6(pdey[ia, apophthegm): irpos 6pdr)v (yuviav, 
angle); -n-pos opdas ?lx^ w > ? et *"' ^ e drawn at right angles: Eucl. 
Opt. Theor. 24. rr/v eju)jj> avrfJKas, (yvth^rji', sentiments.) bia 
ToaovTov, (biavTi) fiaros, interval.) els q.bov, (bofxovor oikov, 
abode or habitation.) So ev tov av eovTes fiovXevwvTai, (o"iko> 



CO THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. hi. § i. 

house,) Herodot. i. 133. rov irepi tt/s \pvxv s ^pe^ur, (Kivhvvov, 
risk,) Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 430. Fully expressed, tuv irepi \pv%fis 
rptxovri Kivhvvov, Dion. Hal. in Isocr. p. 98. and Ant. Horn. iv. 
p. 209. I. 28. See Eurip. Phcen. 730. and Aristopli. Vesp. 375. 
kv \evK0~1s entyepevdm, (i /hut in is, garments,) Artemid. Oneir. ii, 3. 
So St. John xx, 12. 'O TlXaron' i\v rwv aotfiwv, (e'ts or tis, one.) 
ev rals Aiovvativ, (eopraolpois ijuepais, festival days.) ti)v 
apery v ec veas avuet, (f)\iicias, age, years,) Synes. irpb n]s ev 
AevKrpois, (fia\r)s, bailie.) to noXv tijs pr/TopiKTJs, (fiepos, part,) 
Plato. So Air. de Exp. Al. iii, 7. fully expressed in c. 24. — rfjs 
'ipv^ys tovto, (juepos) ev J al enidvuiai elaiv, Plato Gorg. p. 493. 
01 ev reXei, {aires, being ; those in office.) onus ruvra prjb^ls trevoerai, 
(opa, take care, s ) Lysias pro Erat. ra rov 'Hpoborov, (avyypau- 
uara, writings.) ypa/ufxariKt)v euade, (r e-% VT ) l '> art.) a^lav 
a-mireiv, (j 1 put pia%', penalty, punishment.*) ano rijs avrfjs aireia- 
8ai, (rpcnre$r)s, table.) yev tKrj cvvranaeTai, Kal airtariKrj, (ttt(j>- 
cei, case,) Sch. Aristopli. Plut. 93. an noXial, (rpf%es, hairs,) 
Epigr. Gr. i, 13. Ttorripiov i^vxP°v, (vbaros, water,) Matth. x, 42. 
us fiadvv eKotufidrjsl (vir vo v, sleep,) Lucian, Dial. Cycl. et Nept. 
bia KevTjS avenXaTTOjxev i]u~iv (pofiovs, (yrrovoias or inr o\ i]ipe ws, 
suspicion,) Dion. Hal. vi. rij erepa, (%eipi, hand.) eq> oaov, 
(xporor, time.) — 'Ufiepa, day, is not properly a substantive, says 
Eustath., but an adjective, signifying mild, placid, and with it there 
is understood tyams or Karaaraois rov aepos, illumination or state of 
the atmosphere: eireibi) ?}v irpbs ijpepav, when it was growing 
light; ir (ids eanepav, on the approach of evening. 

VI. T))v rirrav — air eiideias ovk e<ppaaev : directly, plainly, 
bluntly: Plut. Fab. Max. It seems doubtful what substantive is 
understood, bbov, (pwi'ijs, Xefcews, bnjyfjvews, ^v\i]s, yrwprfs, btaj'oias, 
or the like. — [For fuller information on the subject of Ellipsis, the 
reader is referred to the Abridgrn. of Bos.] 

VII. Upoiiyopov eixvv ovberepa X-qirrov : (understand ^etpt, 
hand; or fiepibi, part or side;) they had an advocate safe and 
guarded at all points, or, an advocate not to be worsted or mastered by 
any method: Themist. Or. x. opposed to which is avdpw-rrovs darepa. 
XrjTrrovs, Euseb. Dem. iv. c. Q. 

VIII. The plural nouns dyw vicruara, adXa, avadfj para, 
bwpa, (iv/uara, and the like, are to be understood respectively, 
according to the meaning of the context, with certain neuter adjec- 
tives preceded by the article, and followed such verbs as eoprc'iieiv, 
Oveiv, Travtjyvpiieiv, &c. as, r'a (Twrrjpia 7rnvt]yvpiS,eiv, to celebrate a fes- 
tival for safety obtained; to. yapim-i'ipta, for thanksgiving; ra 
petXlxia, and ra IXacrrr'jpm, for conciliating and propitiating the 
gods; ra biaj3arr)pia, for a prosperous passage; ra eniviicia, for 
victory ; ra eiairrjpia Qveiv, for the assembling of the senate ; ra 
evayyeXia, for good news ; ra yeredkia, on account of a birth-day ; 

s Here is a verb under the head Ellip- ' "EXarrov rrjs a£ias, Xen. Mem. i, 6, 
sis of substantives. A pronoun and parti- 11. (tijj.tjs, price.) — J. S. 
ciple had been given before. — J. S. 



Rule 6—9-] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 21 

to. yafirjXin, oh account of a wedding ; ra KaroiKiaia, for settling in 
a habitation ; Ta errata, anniversary ; ra Kovpoawa, to celebrate the 
offering of the hair first cut off. 

IX. The genitive case of substantives is put after verbs to signify 
a part only of what is spoken of: twv Tei^ewv nj (piXnt'dpum^ 
iwo x € ~'P a eftotelro, Xen. Or. de Ages, some of the fortresses or 
toivns, — (which resembles the French, il prenoit des villes par sa 
court oisie ; des being a sign of the genitive:) Karahvetv ovk ela 
orpoyyvKuv TrXoiwv, il ne permettoit pas quon enfoncast des 
navires rondes: Xen. ib. See Demosth. Ol. ii. [p. 18. 1. 14. ed. 
Reisk.] 01. i. [p. 16. 1. 29. eti. Reisk.] Also when it does not 
signify a part ; being governed by some preposition, either under- 
stood, or compounded with the verb which the genitive follows: 
as iraveoQai rrjs opyfjs, (underst. an 6,) to cease from anger; cnro- 
7TTib<jiv tov ap/j.ctTos, i. e. 7rr)b<jiv ano rov ap/iaros, to leap from the 
chariot. 



A substantive is often used by the poets instead of an adjective 
expressive of some attribute of a person, and the proper name of the 
person is changed into an adjective derived from it, and agreeing 
with the substantive before mentioned : as, vlees vlmvoi re fiirjs 
'HpaKXijeirjs, the sons and grandsons of the mighty Hercules: 
Horn, in Boeot. v. 173. for 'HpatcXovs fiiatov." See Hor. Od. i, 3, 36. 
Sometimes the proper name is put in the genitive case instead of 
being converted into an adjective: a£e-e he \Jpiafioio ftirjv, but 
bring the mighty Priam: Horn. II. y, 105. So lepbv fievos 'AXki- 
vooto, Horn. Od. 6, 2. lepi) ?s Tr]Xe [xci-^oio, Od. ir, 476. Qpaav 
adevot HLvpvirvXoio, Q. Cal. viii, 171. — The same form is used 
with an appellative noun in Hesiod : kv /leo-crw be bpaKovros eriv 
<po(5os, a terrible dragon: Scut. H. 144. [See Fisch. ad Well, 
iii. p. 269. p. 295. seq.] See Virg. Mn. xii, 199. Phaedr. F. i, 
13. (Corvi stupor, for corvus stupidus.) — Sometimes the proper 
name is in apposition with the substantive of the attribute : as 
Aai's 1) fxeya icXeos, the much celebrated Lais: Strattis ap. Athen. 
xiii. p. 589. 

Substantives are used for adjectives : v as, w ^tXorjjy,* friend, for 
w fiXe, Plato Phaedr. p. 228. nras koriv iiv6put7ros ov /jtyopij, every 
mortal is calamity: Herod. Clio p. 32. tivayKn hvo'iv darepor, the 
one or the other is necessary. So, scelus for scelestus. See Phzedr. 
i, 3, 16. i, 4, 5. i, 5, 11. See Em. ad Callim. t. i. p. 138. Brunck. 
ad Soph. CEd. R. 85. Abresch. ad jEsch. ii. p. 71. Fisch. ad Well. 
P- 297. 

Proper names of towns and other places, when compounded of 
two declinable words, are sometimes resolved : as, fxeyaXrj itoXis 
for MeyaXo7roXis. Their component parts are even transposed, and 

" 'HpaKXr/s 6 Kaprepbs, Aristoph. Ran. den,Transl. of Ov. Metam. b. xv. — J. S. 
464. — J. S. * This is rattier an example of the use 

" This is common in English : '.' Thus of an abstract term instead of a concrete, 

in successive course the minutes run, And — J. S. 
urge their predecessor minutes on." Dry- 



22 THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. [Chap. hi. 

are separated by other words : Ivpia >'/ Kol\n, Ccelesyria : Arr. Exp. 
Al. ii, 13. eV< ti)v pea-qv bieftr) tu>v irorapiLv, to Mesopotamia: 
Zositn. i, 4. 

A substantive is sometimes put in the nominative case absolute, 
when I lie rules of regular syntax require a different case: as, (3ovX6- 
pevos be KUTuanoirov rira irepipat, -ebo£ev airy eTrm'ibeos el vat v 
'Apacnras : wishing to send some spy, — Araspas appeared to him a 
Jit person : Xen.Cyrop.iM, 1,31. Oav&v yovv, &oe kuXXiov duvelv, 
(so Aldus rightly,) Enrip. Or. [v. 77 1. Pors.*] — and sometimes 
another word, equivalent in meaning to that in the nom. absolute, 
is added in the case in which regular construction would have 
required the nominative absolute to be : poav be £vi>ixet ttj apurrepqi, y 
be be^ia,dpdoi tt) s -^etpos eneivqs oi baKrvXoi, Philostr.de vit. A poll., 
1. iv. c. 28. but the right, the fingers of that hand are extended. 
So Rev. ii, 26. cf. Exod. xxxii. init. Act. Ap. vii, 40. Rev. iii, 21.Tob. 
vi, 7, 8. Judith xi, 9. Sirach x, 22. xx, 30. xl, 29- xli, 14. — On this 
idiom see Kypk. ad Act. Ap. xx, 3. Valck. ad Eur. Phcen. p. 101. 
seq. Brunck. ad i*Esch. Pers. 120. ad S. c. Th. 6*83. 

A genitive of an appellative is sometimes in apposition with a 
substantive not expressed, nor directly understood, but of which the 
meaning is contained in a preceding adjective : YLvdvicXia, Aaicebai- 
povtov ovra, iroXews irepupavovs, Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 15. In a simi- 
lar manner a pronoun or adjective has reference to a substantive, of 
which the sense is involved in a preceding noun, verb, or adverb : so 
avroi>s, meaning biaXoyovs, is by Lilian, V. H. xiv, 15. referred to 
btaXey eaQai™ which precedes; and avrovs meaning vavras to 
vavs preceding, by Ant. Lib. c. 37. See St. John vii, 44. Lucian, 
Nigr. 'AQnvas—avTo'is, i. e. the Athenians, [p. 21. A. ed. Salmur.] 
See Matth. iv, 23. — 'nnrofyopfilw — eVj rovrutv, i. e. horses: 
Herodot. iv, 110. tub 'Afljy ras, — 01, id. vii, 2. vees 'EXXrjvibes, — 
ovtoi, i. e. the Greeks: id. vii, 197. — So in Latin: Laconicam, 
— eorum : Corn. Nep. in Timoth. c. 2. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 
305. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. v, 54. xi, 20, 68. Pors. ad Hec. 22. 
Fisch. Preef. ad Well. Gr. p. 9. seq. and in Anim. ad Well. iii. p. 
268, 306. seq. Valck. ad Phcen. p. 9. ad Hippol. vs. 526. Jungerm. 
ad Lucian. t. i. p. 235. A. and Hemsterh. ad t. i. p. 400. Greg. Cor. 
p. 37. seqq. et Keen. Brunck. ad iEsch. Pers. 13. ad Soph. OZd. R. 
267. ad Eur. Phcen. 1767. 

So, an adjective: eytav avrbs biKaato, Kai p ovrira <pr]/Ji "AXXov 
e7ri7r\//£eiv Aavawv, "Get a yap earai, Horn. 11. \p, 56l. [580.] i. e. biKij, 
which is implicitly in btKaeno. — A substantive referred to an ad- 
verb : to. fiev errata navTa btepotparo baictwv' Tijv pev 'lav 
vvp<prj(7i Kai 'Eppfj Matabos vl'i, QijKev eitev^upevos, ras 6' aXXas velpev 
e/crjorw, Horn. Od. £, 434. "E^ra^a. is equivalent to els enrct poipas, 
into seven parts; to polpa therefore ri)v and ras aXXas are to be 
referred. In Horn. II. 1, 383. eKaoT^v, each, has reference to irvX-q, 



* Hermann quotes v. 590. of Pors. ed., vixas, % rvxeiv tovtov, i. e. w<pe\tias, 
but no such phrase occurs there. — J. S. Thuc. i, 74. — J. S. 
'" <f , a/uep oi>x t)<tgov avTol K^eXrjaai 



Chap, hi.] THE NOUN SUBSTANTIVE. 23 

gate, appearing in the preceding compound Iicoro/i7ri/\oi, hundred- 
gated. 

The following uses of the dative case are to be remarked : — 1. for 
a genitive, as rw 'Ai'bpaifiori 6 rafos, Andrtemon's sepulchre: Faus. 
Ach. p, 401. So the Romans; see Virg. Mn. vi, 5.96. Ov. Met. 
xv, 46. — 2. when it signifies a motive or cause : Mvricr-ifiovXov be rfj 
rov (dIov a w <p p o a v vy awaavres : on account of his well-regulated and 
faultless life: Demosth. ep. iii. p. 115. — 3. in an adverbial sense, 
some preposition being defective: brjfxoaia, publicly ; Ibia, privately ; 
''X^Vi scarcely: [jElian, V. H. ix. c. 24. Xen. Mem. iii, 14, 3. and 
Eruesti's note;] atyrj, silently, attentively: Plat. Phaedr. 233. 1. 29. 
bp6f.i(j), on a run: Arrian, Exp. Al. 1. i. — XP" V ^' a ft er a time*: Lucian, 
Tox. p. 621. [and with the article; see Fisch. ad Well, iii, p. 222.] 
vTrepfioXrj , excessively, extremely; vTrepfioXrj KaXriu, Plut. Apoph. 
p. 183. Add fjtrvxij; quietly, by gentle degrees: Herodian i, 4. vols 
oKois, upon the whole, altogether : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 318. I. 40. 
So the Latins use the ablatives, recta, forte, sponte, hodie, pridie, 
postridie, hac, iliac, fyc. See Virg. JEn. iv, 337. i, 3S1. — 4. a dative 
following a substantive with an ellipsis of an appropriate adjective 
[or participle]: enibpofiri rw TeiyLaijiaTi, Thuc., understand yevofxevt]. 
See Duk. ad Thuc. v, 46. Perizon. ad Sanct. Min. iv, 4, p. 617. 

The accusative. [See Chap. i. R. 11.] It is put after adjectives of 
quantity or quality, Kara being understood : roaavras to irXrjdos 
Tpajpeis, Kal TriXacavr as to /Jieyedos bvv&fieis : so many tri- 
remes, and so great forces : Isocr. Paneg. p. 133. So iEsch. c. 
Ctes. p. 285. 1. 22. A dative is sometimes thus used instead of an 
accusative: fieytaroi fteyedei, Paus. in Arc. Less common is an 
accusative quite unconnected, in construction, with the rest of a 
sentence: roc be ttovov tov Kara top noXe/jtov, — apKeiTio fxev vfj.lv 
ical e/cetj-a, &c. as to the labour in the war, &c. Thuc. ii, 62. 
See Aristoph. Nub. 1113. Xen. Anab. v, 5, !<?. Act. Ap. x, 36. 
Luc. xxi, 6. Ecclesiastic, xl, 2. See Kuhn. ad .ZElian. V. H. ii, 13. 
Dorv. ad Charit. p. 642. Interpp. ad 1 Cor. x, 16. Abridgment 
of Bos, p. 217. Kust. ad Aristoph. PI. 55. An accusative is used 
adverbially, to signify duration of time: ^povov — etyearwres, having 
stood awhile, aliquamdiu: Arrian, Exp. Al. i. p. 31. Archimedes says 
fully, xpovov 7roii}cravTes: de Spiral. Dosith. in princip. 

The Greeks put the same cases after verbal nouns, as the verbs, 
from which those nouns are derived, require: as ?/ e/uij ru" 0e« 
virripeaia, my subserviency to the god: Plato Apol. 17. because 
vnTjperelv requires a dative. See iElian, V. H. ii, 41. extr. 2 Cor. 
ix, 12. and Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 345. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. i, 4. 
p. 8. and ad Herodot. vii, 16. p. 517- Musgr. ad Eur. Suppl. 1157- 
Id. and Heath, ad Here. F. 78S. Brunck. ad Phoen. 85. ad Soph. 
Antig. 787. Port. Lex. Ion. v. ovofxara. So Plaut. Trin. ii, 1, 20. 
See Heusing. ad Vechn. Hellenol. p. 264. 



24 THE ADJECTIVE. [Chap. hi. § ii. 

SECTION II.— THE ADJECTIVE. 

Rule I. A neuter adjective is elegantly used for a substantive : 
as, to aotpov Kat to 'Attucov riys 'F.XXabos yXwcnrrys, the depth and 
elegance of the Greek language ; to beirdv rijs fpuaeus, the force 
and energy of the diction ; to /j.i) fivOuibes avrwv, the reality of 
them, {the events related) the absence of fable : Thuc. i, 22. [Some- 
times tiie adjective is masculine, 6 veicpds, 6 vetcvs, the corpse: 
Pans, in Ach. p. 399. App. Alex. i. B. C. p. min. 693.]— An ad- 
jective in the neuter plural, derived from a proper name, signifies, 
with the article, what is most remarkable with regard to the thing 
signified by that proper name; as tu Tpwi'sa, the Trojan war: 
Thucyd. i, 3. tovs -rrepl tu Tpfoiiea yiypofxivovs, those who lived in 
the time of the Trojan war: Isocr. Paneg. [So an adjective derived 
from an appellative : tu fjpfa'im, Athen. p. 19. A. /*era to. Tvpuvvidi, 
Aristot. Polit. v. 3.] But when such an adjective, whether derived 
from a proper name, or an appellative, is in the singular, it signifies 
plurally, nXfjdos, yeios, or the like being defective: as to 'EWnvacov, 
the Greeks; to '\XXvpn.bv, the Illyrians ; to re (3ovXevoi>, kui t6 itttti- 
k6v, kqi tov ofjuXov, the senators, the equites, and the plebeians : 
Dio. to fiapfiapov, the barbarians ; to vtd'jkoov, the subjects ; to GTpa- 
tiwtlkov, the soldiers ; to ireiiKov, the infantry ; to tzowov, the com- 
munity, the people, country, or nation. See Ovid, Met. xii, J. Cic. 
in Verr. [ii. 46', 6'3. i, 38.] 

II. An adjective sometimes assumes the natural gender of its sub- 
stantive, instead of the grammatical gender: as Kopiov KaXXiurn, a 
most beautiful girl ; fxetpaiaa evrv^e'is, fortunate youths : Synes. See 
Horn. Od. 0, 125. (See examples of adjectives, participles, and 
articles, so used, ap. Musgr. ad Eurip. Or. 270. Markl. ad Suppl. 
45, 237, 272, 91 8, 1141. Wessel. ad Diod. Sic. ii, 39. Hi, 36. xi, 25. 
Fisch. ad Well, i, p. 371. i", p. 274, 306, 314, 317- seq. Keen, ad 
Gr. Cor. p. 29.) — and sometimes, without any consideration of natural 
gender, or signification, an adjective, pronoun, or article, is put in a 
gender different from that of its substantive : as the Attics say tovtu 
tu) ripiepa, these two days: Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 11. tw x €l P e > ^ ne ^ wo 
hands: Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 18. See Seal, ad Phrvn. p. 84. Markl. 
ad Suppl. v. 140. Brunck. ad Soph. OZd. C. 1*600. El. 977- ad 
Amtoph. Lysistr. 323. Fisch. ad Well, i, p. 315 seq. 365. 379- 
ii, 160. iii, 308. It is common, especially in poetry, to join a mascu- 
line participle in the dual number with a feminine substantive. See 
Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 205. seq. and Matth. Gr. Gr. § 436. 
When masculine participles in the plural are put for feminine, (of 
which Hermann ad Orph. H. 78, 4, has given examples,) it seems to 
be either because some masculine substantive was in the thoughts of 
the writer, or because the plural, having a wider and more indefinite 
sense, has in general a designation of the preferable gender. Hence 
this change of genders is very rare in the singular : see Horn. II. /3, 



Rule 1 -4.] THE ADJECTIVE. 25 

88. ep-fcofievawv ; for these genitives plural of participles are used, in 
the masculine form, of the feminine gender. When one woman is 
spoken of in the masculine gender, the plural number is always used : 
and vice versa, wlien the plural is used of one woman, it is in the 
masculine gender : see Dawes, Misc. Cr. p. 310. Brunck. ad Soph. El. 
399- 977- Ant. 026. 986. ad Eur. Med. 316. Pors. ad Hec. 515. So 
when a man and a woman are spoken of together, as abeXtyol, Zeun. 
ad Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 7. But wlien any one person in general, man 
or woman, is signified, the masculine singular is used, although a 
woman may be meant on the particular occasion on which the 
words are spoken : as in Eurip. (Ion 973.) Creusa, speaking of her- 
self, says, Ka\ ttws tci Kpeiauw, 1' t) r o s £> v, virepbpap.w ; and hoiv can 
I, a mortal, get the better of the gods? See Heath, ad Eurip. Med. 
805. Valck. Diatr. p. 175. Elmsl. ad Med. p. 211. Hermann, ad 
Soph. Trach. 207. — On the other hand, when women are spoken of 
plurally, in such a manner that men cannot be understood to be 
meant also, the feminine gender is used: i\ netyvKctjjiev ootyal \i6l- 
Xiara, Eurip. Med. 386. 

Under this head may be mentioned the passage of St. Matth. 
XXVlh, 19. /-tadrjTevaare irtivTa ra edvrf, (3aicri$vvres avroiis, &c. 
in which uvrovs is to be referred to eOvrj, and not, as the Anabaptists 
say, to /j.adrjTas implicitly signified in padrjrevcrnTe. See Ron), ii, 14. 
and edi't], which is a collective noun, must be taken to comprehend 
infants: see Sept. Gen. xxv, 23. — This change of gender is fre- 
quent in the article: as, ra roiavra Kivabrj, vt nenoti]Ka(Ti fiev ov- 
bev, &c. Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 97. 1. 29. See Maccab. i, c. 5, 2. 
and Tibull. iv, 1, 62. and Cort. ad Sail. Catil. lvi, 5. The Greeks go 
even so far as to say Aai's, r] jieya icXeos, Athen. Deipn. xiii, 589. 

Sometimes the adjective is elegantly put in the gender, number, 
and case in which its substantive would have been put according to 
regular and ordinary syntax, while that substantive is put in the geni- 
tive plural after the adjective : as, <tv%vovs reirw twv Xoywv, for 
tovs Xoyovs, a multitude of words, a long discourse: Plato Gorg. p. 
519. 1. 41. see Soph. Phil. 86. ra Xoina twv aTrepfiaTwv, the 
rest of the seeds : vElian, V. H. i. c. 12. In this phrase the article 
before the substantive is indispensable. — Sometimes the adjective 
in this phrase is put in the neuter, although its substantive is of a 
different gender : as ra ptecra twv ttoXitwv, the moderate or neu- 
tral citizens : Thuc. iii, 82. ra vpwTa twv Tore 'EXXqvwv, the 
first of the Greeks of that time : Aristid. Serm. Sacr. p. 505. see 
Propert. iii, 7, 7. 

III. An adjective in the neuter, {^p^pia, npay/ia, epyov, Swov, or 
the like, being understood with it,) is elegantly joined with a sub- 
stantive of any gender and number: as, xprjatfiWT arov f] ytj- 
<r relet, fasting is most useful ; irorepov aKpibes rjbiov ?) Kt-^Xai ; 
are locusts or thrushes most delicious? Aristoph. Ach. 1115. See 
Virg. Eel. iii. [80. 82.] Ovid. [Amor, i, 10, 4.]— In a similar manner 
Theognis subjoins the neuter article to to rfjs aperfjs, v. 317. 

IV. The genitive plural of adjectives is used by the Attics instead 
of the nominative singular: 'ion twv ala^pwv, /atlXXov be twv 

Figer. rj 



i€ THE ADJECTIVE! [Chap. hi. $, ii. 

ala^tffTtov: it is a shameful, or rather a most shameful thing : De- 
fnosth. ii. 01. literally, it is of disgraceful things ; i. e. one among 
such. <I>«u\/3(a, yvvi\ -we kitifavStv : Fulvia, an illustrious woman : 
Pint, in Cic. p. S(>8. — [and for another case,] &pbpa tCjv intfavwy, 
an illustrious man: P'lut. in Cic. p. 867. 1. 30. So a substantive, 
and in the singular, — vfipios epya for 'vfiptoTiKo. epya, Solon, injurious 
deeds.— Sec Sail. B. J. c. 3. Corn. N. in Att. c. 13. 

V. Comparative adjectives are employed, sometimes, not to in- 
stitute a comparison between a higher degree of some quality, 
&c. in one thing, ami a lower degree of the same quality, &c. in 
another thing; but to signify an incapacity or inability in one thing 
to act in some certain manner, or to produce some certain effect, 
with regard to another thing : as, ^pn/iariov Kpeirrav, — nepbovs 
KpeirTwv, above the temptation of money, — of gain ; incorruptible: 
Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 197. 2Q0. fibovfjs Kpelrrwv, proof 
against pleasure, not to be subdued by pleasure : Heliod. /Eth. v, c. 
4. orepva Kpeirrii) Xoyov, breasts beautiful beyond description : 
Athen. Deipn. xiii. p. 588. apid/iov icp. out of number. See Spanh. 
ad Joseph, ii. p. 413. A. [See Eurip. Iph. T. 844. Suppl. 844.] e\- 
Trihos Kpelaoov, beyond hope of relief or amendment : Thuc. ii, 64. 
eXnibos tcpe'iaaov, beyond hope of attainment: Paus. in Beeot. p. 
5fj3. [So opinione valentior, Cic. ad Att. vii. ep. 6] irupufilbes 
Xoyov /uecjoves, Herodot. ii, 148. 

VI. In a bad sense: Kpe/rrwv rijs iraibelas, unimprovable by 
instruction: Aristot. tcpelaaov X6yov, too bad to be described: 
Thuc. ii, 50. icpeliraov irriKovpias, incurable: iElian, H. An. i, 
54. See Musgr. ad Eurip. Troad. 204. Thorn. M. p. 603. 

VII. So }]ttu»v irddovs, unable to bear up against calamity ; a\>~ 
bpa bo£r)s yrrova cat irpos tovs (plXovs albovs, a man not 
proof against the fear of public opinion, and the shame of refusing 
any thing to his friends : Plut. Pomp. p. 655. 1. 4. 

VIII. Sometimes the phrase is varied by substituting an accusa- 
tive governed by npos or Kara, preceded by rj, for the genitive: as, 
ao(pd)T€pa rj icad' eavrov, things too deep for himself. In this form it 
often signifies merely, in proportion to: as, bo£av eXarrw Jj npos to *a- 
Topdtvfia, glory too little in proportion to the achievement : but iepdv 
apj^aiorepoi' */ Kara rrjy 'luivwv evoiicriaiv, is, a temple built before 
the settling of the lonians : Pausan. Ach. p. 399- 1- 14. 

IX. Sometimes an infinitive, preceded by $, takes the place of the 
genitive : as, tcpeirrovs ovras 1) aXwrai, too powerful to be overcome or 
taken, for rfjs aXwcrcws \* and sometimes the infinitive is preceded by 
Jj its, Aristid. ad Capit. p. 529- 

X. Sometimes the genitive is put after the comparative degree, 
when the rules of ordinary syntax, and perspicuity, would require 
another case with ») : as, rats twv fiaXiara rjJ typove'iv btatyepovruv 
knXa~is Quaeon Trpoae^eiv bel ob-% t^ttov twv a nobel^e we, for ?/ rats 
anobdty-oLv : the simple affirmations of men eminent for wisdom are to 

"And without^: acrdeveffrepos i\v Demosth. c. Aristocr. p. 637. I. 17. ed. 
rbv faep Trjt y'lKrji iveyKflv k6vov, Reisk. — J. S. 



Rule 5— 12.] THE ADJECTIVE. 27 

be as much attended to as demonstrations: Aristot. So 777$ eJprjyrjs 
for 7} ?; eiprirT), Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 255. i. 12. cd. Reisk.] bixai- 
orepoy ev -oielv rot's olteiovs rwv odveiwv, for ?/ rows odveiovs : it is 
more just to do good to friends than to strangers. So Soph. Ant. 
74. Phil. 0S2. In other passages the genitive is the case required 
by regular construction, but it is irregularly made to depend on the 
comparative, instead of depending on some other word which is 
omitted: as, 7rvpajjuba be i-ai vvros aTreXine-o ttoXXov eXdaaw rov 
■xarpbs, for rijs rov irarpos : he too left a pyramid much less than 
his father's: — literally, less than his father : Herodot. ii, 134. See 
Diod. S. iii, 35. Eurip. Tr. 7S7- 

In the following passage the genitive is to be resolved into two 
other cases of the same uoun, with 1*/ preceding them : <prjai, ovkov 
ofiotorepa (understand to. -aibia) elvai tw warpiz he says, they 
(the children) are more like their father than one fig to another : 
for fj ovkuv itukw : Theophr. Eth. Ch. c. 5. 

XI. Comparatives are sometimes put for superlatives: as in 
Matth. xviii, 4. 1 Cor. xiii, 13. Virg. En. i, 347. and in the examples 
cited by Steph. de Dial. Alt. p. 40. Fisch. in preef. ad Well. Gr. p. x. 
and in Anira. ad eamd. ii, p. 149. And, vice versa, superlatives 
for comparatives ; when they alwa\s have either a genitive or ?*; after 
them, and some signification of comparison added to their own 
proper signification: Horn. Od. X, 4S1. iEschyl. Eum. 30. St. John 
i, 15. xv, 18. Maccab. iii, 7.21. See Davis, ad Just. M. p. 441. 
Wessel. ad Herodot. vii, lfj. p. 517- Clark, ad Od. 1. c. Fisch. 
Praef. ad Well. Gr. p. si. 

This permutation of comparatives and superlatives is in some cases 
to he imputed to the mistakes of transcribers with respect to the 
abbreviations of the terminations repos ami rarcs. See H. Steph. de 
Dial. Att. p. 41. Valck. ad Phoen. p. 666. Reisk. ad Lys. t. ii. 
p. lo 1. Herm. ad Eur. Hec. 1200. 

The positive degree also is used for the comparative : v/iias 
biKaiov e\eiv 70 erepoi' icepas 77-ep WOrjiaiovs, Herodot. ix, 26. 
(see Wessel.) it is more just that you should have the other icing of 
the army than the Athenians. — Mark is, 45. 4~. Phocvl. [Poem. 
Admon. v. 77.] — and the comparative for the positive: s^e Eurip. 
Alcest. 9S1. and Musgr. Kren. ad Greg. p. 46. Those who first used 
comparatives in this manner, really made some comparison, though 
without expressing the thing compared. Afterwards the form was 
retained by custom, while the thing compared was forgotten: 
Reizius. 

XII. The comparative and the superlative, with the genitive of a 
reciprocal pronoun, form a very strange but elegant idiom, in which 
a person or thing is compared to the same person or thing at another 
time: as, hwarw-epot av-ol ovt uv kyiyvcr-o: they became more 
poicerful than they ever icere before : (literally, more powerful than 
themselves:) Thuc. iii, II. ape\i)s ye% i)uerai fiaXXov avros avrov ; 
icill he become more negligent than before? Plato de Rep. iv. 
p. 421. See Fisch. ad Well. ii. p. 143. eavrov eWoyipraros 
eyere-o, he was more eloquent than ever; alrcv ra-^iaTa ebpaper, 



28 THE ADJECTIVE. [Chap. Hi. § ii. 

he surpassed all his former feats in running; v^os be, rij vipij- 
Xorarv enrtv avT>) eavrijs, OKrib upyviai '. the height, in the part 
where it is highest, is eight fathoms : Herodot. Etit. c. 124. avros 
avrov rdre (}>aiveTat fieXritiTti Ipr, in his best plight ; <pavX6- 
rara butKei/.ieros, in his ivorst : ./Eschin. Dial. <le Divit. 7]v kv rals 
irepi yvva'iKas kci\ ira'ibas IXevdepnvs abiKiats civrcts eavrov fio^dr)- 
poraros, worse even than in his other enormities : Plat, de Viit. niul. 
p. 2ol. fie(Tu)v be vvktwv (to vbwp eoriv) eavrov Oeppior ar ov, 
hotter than at any other time: (literally, hottest of itself:) Artian, 
de Exp. Al. iii, c. 4. See Fisch. ad Well, ii, p. 148. 

Of the comparative degree it is to be remarked, — 1. that it has 
an extenuating or palliative signification: as, virofiapyoTepos, Hcrodot. 
iii, 145. a little crackbrained or harebrained: see Steph. de dial, 
p. 3$. seq. — 2. that when two adjectives or adverbs are used in 
comparing what they respectively signify, not that one only of the 
two, which shows the excess, is put in the comparative degree, 
but the other also: as, irpodv/uos fi&XXov *i aofiorepa, more 
willing than wise: (literally, more willing than wiser:) Eurip. 
Med. 450. eiroirjcTa ra^vrepa ij cro^wrepa, Herodot. iii, 65. vii, 
194. f tXoTifAOTepo v rj aXrjd tvwre pov, Diod. S. i, 29- So the 
Latin subtilius, quam verius, and the like.— 3. that fxaXXov is 
sometimes added to comparatives, as in Eurip. Hec. davwv b' ac 
€"tr} fiaXXov evTv^eaTepos rj $wv, v. 377- Pors. — 4. that /jtaXXov is 
followed by other particles as well as */, signifying than : ov /jaXXov 
— oaov, iEsop, F. I. Huschk. yXvKepvrepo* — ooaov, Theocr. ix, 
33. see Eurip. Cycl. 147. — On ov paXXov or pr) fxaXXov itXXa, see 
Schaef. ad JEsop. p. 97. 

As a comparative is made by adding paXXov to a positive, so a 
superlative is made by adding — 1. fiaXiara. — 2. other particles, &c. 
els tcl etr^ara fiaXa cro(pbs, astonishingly wise: Xen. Lac. Rep. i, 2. 
So Trayt/, ttcivtws, ivavTairaoi, Xiar, peya, ayav, (copra, TrafAtrav, Ko/Jibrj., 
loyvpws, o<p6bpa, ttoXXov, virepfv&s, &c. — 3. noun substantives : 
inepfioXrj, fxeyedei, Paus. in Cor. p. 103. — 4. 5a: as CanXovros, 
exceedingly rich: Herodot. Clio c. 32. — 5. by repetition of the 
same word: iEschyl. Suppl. 532. See Fisch. ad Well. Gr. p. 152. 
Staver. ad Nep. Ages. c. 2. 

XIII. As to numeral adjectives it is to be observed, — 1. that the 
genitive is used elliptically : as, bvo~iv <j>da<rai, to make sure of one 
or the other of two things: Thuc. i, 33. underst. Qarepov. — 2. 
that the Greeks express a number by specifying how much it falls 
short of another number : as, irevrrjicovTa, pias beovaTjs, eXafiev 
aixptaXwrovs Tpiypeis, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 37 1 • he captured 
forty-nine triremes: and in another form, TrevrriKorra, bvolv 
beovra, err], Thuc. ii, 2. nepl err), evbs cnrobiovra, eKarov 
yeyorws: about ninety-nine years old: Lucian, in Macrob. p. 831. 
and in a third, fiiodo<p6pot oXiyov atrobeovres biafxvpiwv, mer- 
cenaries little short of twenty thousand: Arrian, de Exp. Al. i, 15. 
ire$o\ ov ttoXv Xeinovres fxvpiujy, infantry not much below ten 
thousand: Polyb. v. — or by specifying its excess above the greatest 
round or even number contained in it: as, bevrepf 6\vyiria.bi eir\ 



Rule 13— lM THE ADJECTIVE. 29 

rals ena-by, in the hundred and second olympiad: Pausau. El. 
p. 352. Tpirr] em betcnbi, the thirteenth day: and, instead of e-nl, 
Ka\ is sometimes used, v. hen the smaller number is changed from 
an ordinal to a cardinal number: as, rw ev\ icai rptaicoarui, the 
one and thirtieth, for ry npuru) kqi rp. Herodot. v. see 1 Maccab. 
vii. Gell. xiii, 12. See Vorst. de Lat. fals. susp. c. 27. Grut. ad 
Cic. Verr. iii, 70. — Sometimes the greater number is understood, 
e.g. err) etKatbeKa aTrebij/jrioe' rw be efibdfiw eiravT]\dey, for ij3b6fiti> 
e7ri beica : hut in the seventeenth he returned. Sometimes a numeral 
adverb is joined with a cardinal number, as efibofir)KovTaicis enra, 
Matt, xviii, 22. seventy times seven. 

XIV. — 3. That to express the excess of half an integral above any 
plurality of integrals, the Greeks join with a word compounded of 
r)fx\ and the name of that integral, the ordinal number marking the 
» numerical place in which that half integral would stand if each of 
the plurality of integrals and itself were numbered as units : as, two 
talents and a half, rplroy i^iTaXavTov. four drachmte and a half, 
iteix-KTov {j/ulbpa^iJLoy, Hesych. rerapTuv jj/xiav, to rerapro*' jy/aora- 
rjjpor. 

XV. — 4. That to designate lime, a numeral adjective in alos is 
often used, which does not agree with any substantive signifying 
time, but with some other: as, bevrepalos ck tov 'Adrjyaiwy uareos 
rjy ev liraprr], he was in Sparta on the second day from his leaving 
Athens: Herodot. Er. c. 106. becara'tos atyineTo, he arrived on 
the tenth day : Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 1. rerapralos eoriv, he has 
been dead four days : St. John xi, 39- See Wetsten. — and interro- 
gatively : 7ro<7ratos — kkelae atytKoifiriv ; in how many days could I 
get there? Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 129- airo tT]s fiaxy rptraXos 
cMpiKielTai, he arrives on the third day after the battle: Arrian, 
Exp. Al. c. 3. See Wakef. ad Soph. Trach. 1 65.— These adjectives 
in atos are sometimes used as ordinals, and made to agree with the 
substantive of time : Eurip. Hec. 32. Plato Phaed. [p. 22. 1. 20. ed. 
Bas. prim.] Thuc. v, 75. viii, 51. See Pors. ad Hec. 32. Valck. ad 
Hippo). 247. Monthly Rev., Jan. 1799. P- 89. 

XVI. — 5. That in a few inslances the adjective signifying an 
ordinal number is to be understood to designate a priority also in 
time : as, aiiTos r/pepq. TpiTT} — elbev o\piy cltottov, on the third day (i. e. 
before he slew Clittis.) he saw a strange vision: Plut. Alex. p. 6'93. 
When it designates posteriority in time, it has a genitive after it, with 
or without a preposition : as, irepTTTr) be 11 earn vpepci airo 
tovtcdv, on the fifth or sixth day after these things : Herodot. iii. p. 
92. ed. Camer. bevrepip be eret Tovreioy, Herodot. Er. c. 46. in the 
second year after these things ; Tpir-qv i]f.iepay aiirov i'ikovtos, the third 
day after he came : Thuc. viii, 23. Or it is followed by ?*; and a 
part of a sentence depending on it : as, rfj varepaiq: — iy ?f av e\dot 
to TrXolny, on the day after the arrival of the ship : Plato Phaed. 2. 

XVII. — 6. That the time in which any thing may be done or come 
to pass is put in the genilive : as, kljbv fj/jepHy beta, fiaWov be 
Tpiwv i] TCTTaptav, els tov 'EWrjVTrovTOv arjnxdai : it being prac- 
ticable to arrive at the Hellespont in ten days, or rather in three or 
four: Dem. pro Cor. p. 317. anovaeode bvo'cv rj rpiibv fipepfiy, 



30 'AyuQot— "AXKov. [CHAP. III. § iii. 

you will hear in two or three days : ibid. — 7. That the relative of a 
singular antecedent, with which an ordinal adjective agrees, is found 
in the plural: ievripav iirioToX))v, ev (us, 2 Pet. iii, 1., the relative 
applying to the first, as well as the second, which by implication in- 
cludes the first. — 8. That to express the number of associates of any 
person, the name of that person is followed by an ordinal number 
marking his numerical rank, if reckoned last, and by the pronoun 
avros : as, YlepiKXys 6 EavdiTntov arparriyos wv benaros avros, 
being general ivith nine others: Thuc. ii. 13.* KXeiniribTis — 
rpiros avros earparriyei, Cleippides had the command with two 
others: Thuc. iii, 3. e^eirefxipap — Auem-Xea -kL^-ivtov avrov 
cTparriyav, Thuc. iii, 19. so i, 6l, 116. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 
2125. See Plato de Legg. iii. p. 695. Theocr. ii, 119. Diodor. ii. 
p. 577- and interrogatively: noaanos earpart/yei \ or iroaros 
earpaTi/yet avros; how many were joined with him in command? 
and without a question and without specification of number, c)Xi- 
yooTos, with a few others: Beros. ap. Jos. Ant. x, 11. Jos. c. App. 
p. 1045. 1 Maccab. iii, \6.~9. That a declinable cardinal number, 
exceeding a hundred, is sometimes joined with a collective noun in 
the singular : as \i\iri 'I^ttos, a thousand horse : Herodot. See 
other examples in Steph. Thes. i. 1699. G. So 1 Maccab. iii, 39. 
iv, 28. — 10. That when a numeral adjective forms a compound with 
t"7T/,it signifies one integer, and such proportional part of that integer 
as the numeral adjective before its composition with eVi indicates : 
as inhpiTos, one and its third part ; eVoySoos, one and an eighth : 
Plato Timasus, p. 313. translated by Cic. (de Univ. c. 7>) sesqui- 
tertium, and sesquioctavum numerum. 

Section III. — On some particular nouns, adjectives, 
and substantives. Alphabetically. 

RULE I. 'Ayaf3o's. In the vocative, wyadk has a light shade of 
irony or sarcasm, as bone in Latin.* See Plato Gorg. p. 491. 1- 25. 

"Aicpos, chief, most eminent, has a partitive genitive, and genitive of 
the thing as to which the eminence is possessed: rwv ttoitjtwv oi 
anpoL rfjs noiricrews e/carepcts, of the poets the chief in both kinds 
of poetry : Plato Theaet. p. 152. I. 44. 

"AXXos, like a comparative, has a genitive: aXXo ov aladi) crews 
€7nffTiijj.r}, knowledge being different from perception : Plato Theaet. 
p. 186. aXXa 7-wi' hiKaibtr, things different from just things: 
Xen. Mem. iv, 4, 25. and erepos has the same construction. See 
Plato Phaed. c. 19. So alius in Latin : Hor. Ep. i, 16, 20. ii, 1, 
240. Pbaedr. Prol. 1. iii, 41. Ta aXXa, in other respects: Plat. 
Apol. Socr. p. 41. 1. 25. Herodot. ix, 25. So es r aXXa, and es re 
to. Xoina, Paus. Ach. p. 401. erepos aXXos, joined, Eurip. Suppl. 
573. Barnes. aXXos erepos joined, Eurip. Or. 339- Pors. 

* "Somma ledit Henry de sortir a ten others.) Voltaire, H. de Charles XII., 

parlementer pour son profict; commeil fit 1.2. 

luy qdatriesme." Montaigne, Ess. V Not unlike my icorthy, in English. 

1. i. c. 5. (with three others.) " Le Minime malus, and the good man, are 

roi de Pologne n'eut que le temps de said of dull or simple persons. — J. S. 
nionter a cheval, lui onzieme." (icith 



RULE 1 — 2.] v A\,We — 'Ardputros. 31 

For Xonrbs: lixekla // a\\ n, the rest of Sicily: Plato Ep. 8. p. 
307. 1. 6. ti)v fiev (iWjjv (Eiifioiav) b/xoXoyia naTearijaavTo, 'Eariaias 
be, &c. and the rest of the island, &c. 

"AXXore aXXos, and aXXos cat aXXos, are used to signify inconsis- 
tency and variability: iiXXore ciWwi' earl Xoywv, he says first one 
thing and then another: Plato Gorg. p. 482. I. 9- 01 b' avbpes 
aXXoi Ka\ &XX01 irapa tovs ypovovs, men change tvith the times: 
Aristid. pro Quatuorvir. p. 393. and compounded things are said 
iiXXor aXXcos e^en-, to be perpetually changing: Plato Phaed. c. 
25. 

"Afxcjxo (as well as apfyorepov) refers to two different things in a 
sentence in which it is syntactically unconnected : "A/^tpto yap, nal 
voiiaov ava\pv%eis irvpoeoaav, Kcu /mi cKopizioQev ftef^X-n^iv^ i)pa KOfii- 
e?e/s : for you both relieve my burning malady, and afford grateful 
assistance to me, who have been stung by a scorpion : Orph. de lap. 
in Chab. So Q. Cal. vapaXenr. i, 20. tyvoei j) rpotyrj ?*; ajityorepa, 
Plato Gorg. p. 542. I. 20. by nature or by aliment, or both. See 
Horn. II. y, 179. v, 166. 

-Avfip, even in the singular, is put, not for vir, but for homo, a mor- 
tal : Soph. (Ed. C. 566. Aj. 77- It is used for As, Horn. II. e, 
770. Theogn. 199. See Hor. Od. iii, 1, 9. Sometimes it abounds, 
or at least is not to be translated into Latin: as \cit6/j.ci avbpes, 
Q. Cal. povKukos aitjp, Id. vi, 347. stonecutters, neat-herd." So 
avdpwTros, Luc. ii, 15. Matth. xviii, 23. 'Av))p and tis are joined, 
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 5. Act. Ap. v, 1. In the plural, avbpes, for the 
continent, opposed to vrjuoL, Horn. H. Apoll. 142. Pind. Ol. vi, 15. 

'A-n-ofpas. 'Airoippabes i)/j.epai, dies nefasti, in Latin, on which it 
was unlawful to administer justice ; [from a™ in a sense of absence, 
and ippaSw."] Lucian calls the same anpaKTovs, void of business, in 
which nothing can be transacted; eirapuTovs, accursed; /mapovs, 
abominable ; anaitrtovs, unlucky, ill-omened. 'Ano<ppabes y/jiepai are 
also the seven days in which offerings were made to the dead. See 
Mceris Att. and Hesych. 

II. 'Airoippabes avQpioiroi, men shunned by all on account of enor- 
mous wickedness ; execrable miscreants. So fjtaaropes, traXappawt, 
aXiTijpioi, aXacrropes, Karaparoi, eiayels, e£,ayi(TT0t, awoTpoTratoi. 'A\i- 
rripios tov Atos, devoted to destruction on account of sacrilege 
against Jupiter; H> Tfjs 'EXXabos aXirtjpie, O pest of Greece! 
[/Esclrin. c. Ctes. p. 521. I. 8. Reiske's ed.] 

" AvQpionos is often said of a woman : as, yv/xv^v rrjv ardpwxov, the 
woman naked: Dion. Hal. irepl awO. 6v. So Plut. de Aud. Poet. 
p. 26. I. 47. Allien, xiii. p. 576. Dem. pro Cor. p. 518. 1. 43. /Elian, 
V. H. xii, 1. xiii, 33. Xen. Cyrop. v. beginning. Dion. Hal. i, p. 64. 
1. S.* Oeds also is said of a female. 

z Here the English idiom is similar; k a, <pofSr\di}(T€<TQe ; a barbarian, when that 

Herdsman. — J. S. barbarian is a woman too? Demosth. de 

a Quasi, /j.$i o'ta re ovtra (ppa^&jQai, not Rhod. Lib. p. 197. 1.12. &t>9pci}iros ei/- 

to be named: Eustatb. — J. S. vovs Kai ttio-t^, Demosth. in Kurrg. et 

* 'Afinp-ovovcrris de rrjs avQpconov, but Mnes. p. 1155. 1. 28. t^v &v9pojirov iireBei- 

the woman being much distressed: De- |a, ib. p. 1159. 1. 27. privo della vita 

raosth. Fals. Leg. p. 402. 1. 24. Reisk. molli huomini di ciascun sesso et eta. 

fiapfSapov &v9 poniTov, ical Tavrayvva?- Guicciard, 1. ii. — J. S. 



3'2 "Ardpunos — 'A^o/yu/. [CHAP. III. § iv. 

"AyBpuzos, for atrip, vir, a husband: ArQpwrros ku\ yvri), a husband 
and wife : xEschines. So Matth. xix, 10. "Ardpunos for ris, qtiidam, 
some one, a certain person : Mark xii, 1. 

III. 'ApeT>). — 1. beneficence, liberality : Time, ii, c. 40. 

IV. — 2. natural affection and humanity : oi uperF/s r) fierairoiov- 
fjevoi, Time, ii, 51. goodwill, benevolence, philanthrophy, Time. 
iv, S6\ So in Latin, virtus for benignilas: Plaut. Mil. Gl. iii, 1, 
82. 

V. — 3. celebrity, renown: bvya/xis — (pepovaa es /xev roiis iroXXoi/s 
aperijy, Time. i. [e. 33. pro evbotyu, Harpocr. See the Etym. So 
Anclocid. See Suid. Wass.] 

VI. — 4. the proper virtue or excellence of any thing in general: as 
aperijy yi/s, the goodness of the soil: Time, i, [c. 2.] aperi/ rijs j^w- 
pas, the goodness or fruitfulness of the country: Plalo de Legg. 
./Elian, V. H. ix, \6. aperrj <ju> par os, health, good habit or constitu- 
tion of body: Plato Gorg. p. 517- Troirjrov aperrj, the proper excel- 
lence of a poet : il>. v, 21. and ^j ev ro'is jxerpois aperi), metrical skill: 
ib. ii, 13. In Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, \6. itperij comprehends strength 
of body, fortitude of mind, skill in horsemanship, riches, power. 

VII. — 5. virtue, duty, honor: yvyaixeia aperi), Thuc. ii, 45. nepl 
rov biicaiov ecu rijs aperijs, Thuc. iii, 10. 

VIII. Ti)y apyi)v, hpyjiv, ro Knrapy^as, from the first, at first, 
at all: ^aXenwrepoy, Ik rrXovatov rtevqra yevecQai, f/ ap^j/v [i>) itXov- 
Tf](rai : it is more grievous to become poor after having been rich, 
than never to have been rich at all: Xen. Anab. vii. [7. 17-] fyn, v 
rr)y ap^rjv ov be7y eyue bevpo el<re\de~iv, i), erreibi) etarj\6ov, ov% vlov 
re elyai ro fit] anonrelyai fie: at first, at all: Plato Apol. Socr. 
p. 29. 1. 21. See Plato Lys. 265, 32. Gorg. p. 478. 1. 24. Soph. 
Phil. 1232. Antig. .92. El. 439- Herodot. i, 9. iv, 25. Thuc. vi, 56. 
Xen. CEc. ii, 1 1~ viii, 2. Symp. i, 15. iEschiri. in Ctes. p. 509- (70.) 
Lucian, Symp. 812. In the same sense es apxnv, Paus. in Lac. p. 
211. I. 16. Kar' ap^as ore : tear' ap-^as or r'jXdov, as soon as I had 
arrived: Plato Ep. iii. p. 310. 1. 19. 

IX. A delinquent taken in the fact is said to be eaXwKios en-' abro- 
<(>u>p<t>, or simply avr6<pu)pos, or irepityiopos, or evirepitywpos, from (pwpqy, 
to detect, to catch in a theft ; and those three substantives are joined 
with eli'cu, yii'eadcii, aXiaKeadai, (f>ayfjrai ; as, o tyevyurv err avrorpwpf 
yevofievos, the culprit having been caught in the fact. 'E7r«vri'0wpw 
is properly used of thieves taken with the stolen goods on them ; but 
it came to he applied to persons detected in the commission of any 
crime, as adultery, John viii, 4. 



SECTION IV. 

Rule I. 'Atyop/j)). — 1 . a power of shunning what is destructive : 
Beat. Damasc. 

II. — 2. substance, fortune, means of living: as, {i^be^iay ucpop/jtr/v 
k\ei rov fiiov, il n'a aucun moyen de vivre. See Xen. Mem. iii. 
[12, 4.] Demosth. pro Phorm. p. 601. I. 6\ and means, in general ; 



RULE 1—6.] BaatXevs — AyXas. 33 

occasions, facilities: ttoXv yap nXeiovs cKpoppas els to rrjv napa 
Qewv evvoiav e^eiv °l°^ vfuv evovaas, 1} eiceivw : que VOUS avez beaucoup 
plus de moyens que lui d'obtenir la bienveillance des Dieux : De- 
niosth. 01. ii. p. 8. 1. 51. See Xen. Mem. ii, 7, 11. Schol. Eurip. 
cited by Hindenb. ad Xen. and Suid. 

III. — 3. a deposit, a fund to draw upon, in a bank ; this the later 
Greeks called tvdrjicri, which comprehends all precious possessions. 

IV. — 4. for opfii], natural desire, instinct : Plut. — 5. in a rhetori- 
cal view, pretext, handle, occasion, for narration, for disquisition, 
for argumentation, &c. Dion. Hal. de Lysia. Plut. 

HaaiXeits, by itself sometimes, and sometimes with fxeyas or 6 jieyns, 
signifies, by way of eminence, the king of Persia: Demosth. de 
Rhod. Lib. 'p. 83". 1. 5. Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 33. ^Elian, V. H. i, 22. [cf. 
Aristoph. Acb. 647. Corn. Nep. in Ages. 2. J Plato Gorg. p. 524. 
Aristid. Or. in Rom. p. 352. Arrian, Exp. Al. c. 1. iElian, V. H. 
xii, 1. lEscb. Dial, ii, 4. Eustath. ad Dion. Perieg. v. 1056. twv Ylep- 
awv is added by Dinarchus, in Demosth. p. 96. 1. 26. and by others. 

BovXrjfxa sometimes means scope, drift, purport: tovto yap fiot 
boKei tG)v ptjfxuTwv to ftovXrjfxa elrai, Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 
423. and by the same kind of personification the verbs fiovXeadai and 
IdeXeiv are applied to inanimate things to signify tendency, approxi- 
mation, ability, &c. in them : /3ov\erai per tovto, o vvv eyw opw, 
elvai olov aXXo tl twv ovtwv, evbee'i be, &c. Plato Phaedr. C 1Q. tU 
fxev cjvv ywpia rat to. bevbpa ovhev p edeXei bibaffKeiv, Plato Phaedr. 
p. 230. cf. Xen. Mem. hi, 12. extr. 

Big. in the dative, with a genitive after it, signifies against the incli- 
nation or will of what is expressed by the genitive : as, fila fi/uwp, 
against our will : Thuc. i, 43. ftia Qvpov, unwillingly, contrary 
to my inclination: Eurip. Ale. 832. fiia. tGjv brjpapxwv, in spite 
of the tribunes, in defiance of the tribunes: Plut. in Caes. p. 7 19- c 
[See Abresch, Auct. Dil. Thuc. p. 2"22.] Sometimes the genitive 
is understood : as, fiia. ovv — oi^o/mai (pevywv, Plato Symp. 32. 

V. AeiXri, by itself, signifies twilight, either in the morning or in 
the evening. It is often joined with words denoting different parts of 
the day : belXtjs ewas, early dawn; belXrjs o4/ias, late, in the evening, 
about sunset ; beiXrjs (.tea^pfipias, noon. 

VI. ArjXos, abrjXos, <f>ayepds, and other similar adjectives, instead of 
being put in the neuter with the impersonal verb, followed by ws or 
on, or by an accusative and infinitive, are elegantly made to agree 
with the nominative case of the verb, followed by a participle also 
agreeing with that nominative: as, brjXos eoTi 7raparo/jLi]aas, he has 
evidently transgressed : for bfjXov eorty avTov wapat'ofiTjaai. So tyave- 
pbs with a future participle, Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 231. 1. 16. ed. 
Reisk.] and abrjXos : e'en be ovk abqXos epm>, it is plain that he 
means to say : Demosth. in Mid. Instead of a participle, ws, or on, 
is sometimes subjoined to the verb: w$ oh npoOvfios fie el bibafat, 
bfjXos el: Plato Euthyphr. p. 14. 1. 20. it is plain that you are not 

'Apecptav ras irv\as tj/mp jSia tcSs' spite of the multitude: Demosth. adv. 
it A ^ a> v : they opened the gales to its in Lept. p. 473. 1. 3. Reisk. — J. S. 
Viser. E 



34 Atd/rci — "F.pyov. [Chap, III. § iv. 

willing to teach me. 6n in Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 12. cf. Xen. GEc. 
\ii, 8. abriXos ear if el, Pint, ill Cues. p. 710. KctTuyeXqs jinv, 

brjKo's el: you are plainly laughing at me: Afistoph. Av. 1408-. 
For other adjectives so used, see below 11. J. 10. Chap. VI. Sect. 
i. R. 13. Diod. Sic. xi, 27- See Fiscli. ad Well, iii, 313. 

Auura is not only a certain mode of living, but a place, an apart- 
ment : rets Tuir 6epair6)Td)i' bialras, the bedchambers of the servants: 
Pint. Dicelce, Plin. ii. ep. 17. It also signifies an arbitration, upiais 
Tvpi) bkr)s, Moeris Att. 'Ei btairrjfjta, an abode, residence. 

VII. A/raios is used in the same manner as bF/Xos, &c. See R. 6. 
ti)i' ctlriav ovtos ecrn blicaios e^etv, it is just that he should 
bear the blame: Demosth. pro Cor. 

VIII. Aifcaiov, a defect, an objectionable particular ; forming a 
plea, or just ground for accusation or opposition : a^doi^inv av el 
tovto fxoiov bofyttpi bikenov naTiyyopelv tov rofiov, Demosth. adv. 
Lept. [p. 477- I. 6'. ed. Reisk.] 

'Eyicu/v\m iratbev/xaTa, the liberal arts : Plut. irepl nnib. ay. called 
collectively eyKVKXoTraibela. See Schott. Obs. Hum. ii, 1. 

IX. 'E^ovXns biKn, [from e^eiXXto, to eject ; or efyvXXeiv, 6 eanv 
klioQeiv Kdl iicfiaXXeiv, Hesych.] an action or prosecution against a per- 
son who expelled another from his properly, or detained it from him : d 
Demosth. in Mid. [p. 528. 1. 12. ed. Reisk.] Aristides uses the 
expression metaphorically, saying that no one could e&vXns Xd^etu 
rijs yijs against the Athenians; because they passed for avToydoves, 
and therefore could not be accused of ouster with regard to Attica. 
Patiath. 

X. 'ETrtbo^os is elegantly employed like bfjXos, &c. R. 6. 
eitibo^os — ear iv a. \pead at tov Kaipov, he is expected to seize 
the opportunity: iiriSo£6s eanv — xadelv, he is likely to suffer. 
See Oudend. ad Thorn. M. 

XI. "Epyov sometimes signifies interest of money, as in Demosth. 
in Aphob. [p. 8l6. 1. l6. Reisk. ] e office, pr ovince, business : rai -rtpoa- 
ern£e tQ naibl tovto ej^eiv epyov, and he assigned this to the boy as 
his business: iElian, V.H. viii, c. 15. See Aristoph. Av. 862. Hence 
epyov eanv is rendered decet, it becomes, it is the part of, as in ovk 
er epyov eynadevbeiv, ogtis ear eXevOepos : it no longer becomes, Ot- 
is the part of, any freeman to slumber in this affair: Aristoph. 
Lys. 6"l5. [6*14.] and by another gradation it signifies custom or 
way, edos: 'AOrjvaiwv epyov, eXerjtravres givtovs, — enoifoare : you 
did as the Athenians are accustomed to do: iEschin. Ep. xiii. See 
another example in Sect. i. R. 1. p. 84. and in this sense epyov is 
sometimes suppressed : tjbiicoviiev av, — kcu ov% ij^wv eTroioy/uev : we 
should have acted unjustly, and not like ourselves ; or, not after our 
usual manner: Aristid. Or. Leuctr. ii. p. 72. Sometimes it signi- 



d See Demosth. in Mid. p. 540. 1. 21. of a law-court.— J. S. 

Reisk. and 543. 1. 27. adv. Callipp. p. « Tb apxcuov, the principal; rb epyov, 

1240. 1. 22. where the Qovkr) consists in the interest : Dem. in Aphob. p. 819. 1. 2. 

refusing to pay, or deliver up one's goods Reisk. — J. S. 
to satisfy, a debt incurred by a sentence 



RULE 7—14.] 'Ereo>'— "Ero<juos. 35 

fies difficulty , arduous undertaking : epyov /ur) awi'idei opti, Karcopa- 
Qelv Tavra, Aristot. H. An. vi. 

XII. In the plural ra epya often signifies cultivated lands: Horn. 
II. fx, 283. Od. /3, 22. bywaas KaXa epya, Solon. Xen. in 
Kvvrjyer. p. 978. — and opyhs, abos, is uncultivated land. "Epya apyv- 
peia, or simply apyvpsia, or apyvpia, silver mines: Xen. de Retlit. 
iv, l. 5. 11. 13. 14. Xen. Mem. ii, 5, 2. iii, 6, 12. Demosth. 
Chers. [p. 100. 1. 27- Reisk.] "Epyov is joined with the verb yiyvea- 
Bm, to signify accomplishment, fulfilment, effect: as, e/cet rf/v npa^tv 
epyov yeyoveva t, that the enterprise, or deed, (the slaughter of 
Ca?sar,) was accomplished in that place : Plut. Cses. p. 73.9- irptv >} tijv 
vivooy^eoiv epyov aoi yeveaQai, before you have fulfilled your pro- 
mise : Lucian, Dem. EllC. p. 904. raya rrjs v/Aerepas yeyovev epyov 
o\tywplas, perhaps it was the effect of your negligence : Lucian, 
lb. p. 910. — or, that upon which any effect is produced ; the subject 
of it: fiiaiov davarov epyov eyevoiro, the victims of a violent death: 
iiilian, vii, 2. fieXuyv epyov ical ro^eias yey evr) fiev ot, victims, 
&c. Helioil. /Eth. i, 1. Kelrat XapUXeia, ku\ ttoXc fiias -^etpos 
epyov — yeyerrjrai, lb. ii, 4, TtoXepov epyov j.iayj>uevovs ye- 
veodai, lb. vi, 13. — It signifies any great event: Tpta'iicov epyov, 
the Trojan war: Arrian, Exp. Al. i, 11. t£ abrav rov epyov, imme- 
diately after the calamity: (of the sacking of Thebes,) lb. c. 18. 
7T/oo rod epyov rov ev Mapaduivi, before the achievement or victory 
at Marathon: Paus. in Ach. p. 425. [and in the plural, d™ twv 
Trept Mapadura epym>, Dion. Hal. Ant. R. v. p. 291.] Also a crime: 
to epyov to -rrepl rov "Irvv, Thuc. ii, 29. — An undertaking or 
enterprise : epyov /u?) e^eadai, ear av cKftiKero avrbs, not to engage 
in the undertaking, (a siege,) before he himself arrived: Arrian. 
Meya epyov in apposition with a noun to signify magnitude : 6 be 
■%epuabiov Xo/3e \etp\ Tvbeibrjs, peya epyov: Horn. II. e, 303.-^ 

XIII. 'Ereov is by nature an adjective, from eta or etjtl : el ereov 
KaX%as finvreveTat : true, aXr)Qes, Horn. II. /3, 800. But it is com- 
monly used adverbially, signifying, — 1. really, seriously, in truth: 
II. u, 359. o, 53. Aristoph. Vesp. 8. — 2. obsecro, prithee, I pray, en 
vtrite, en bonne foi, in reality : (interrogatively,) av b' el tis ereov; 
Aristoph. Eq. 730. See Aristoph. Nub. 93. 1502. Vesp. 832. 

XIV. "Etoi/uos sometimes signifies, in store, ready for use, or for 
supply : paaroi — nXypeis eirippeovros eTOifxov yaXaicros, Plut. in JEmil. 
p. 262. koXttovs pevuara — e£ erolfxrjs icat vTroKetfievrjs cKptevras ap-^fjs : 
cavities or reservoirs emitting streams from a source always subsisting 
in readiness: Plut. lb. 'E£ eroipov, readily, at will : arpaTu'o-as e£ 
erolpov Xifip)], Isocr. ad Phil. e£ eroifiov KaXo'is Kqlyado'is <piXov 
eivat, Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 16. e£ erolpov rayada adpoa awprjbov 
K€KXr]porofj(r]K6ra : without trouble, ready to his hands: Philo de 
Legal, ad Caium. 



/ According to the foregoing account duct of any action or operation, which it 

of tpyov, its meanings must be very various might not, upon such a plan of expli- 

indecd, some myriads perhaps ; for there cation, be said to signify. — J. S. 
is no action or operation, no effect or pro- 



36 YLvibrvfios—laos. [CHAP. III. § V. 

Evwvvnos, the left, was originally substituted for hpiaTcpbs, as a 
word of better omen, being derived from ev and orofta. Afterwards 
the use of it prevailed without any superstitious regard : ? Time. 
i, 48. iii, 107- Arriaii, de Exp. Al. i, p. (>. 1. 1, 6". p. 7. I. 26". p. 14. 
1. 7. p- 31. 1. 5, 19, 3*. p. 57- 1. 2, 4, 7- Matth. xx, 21, 23. xxv, 
41. xxvii, 38. Rev. x, 2. Act. Ap. xxi, 3. See Huds. ad Thue. 
i, 126. 

Qarepor, (formed of to erepov,) preceded by bvo~u>, is especially used 
in dilemmas. Aviuf Oarepov, either — or; one or the other: being 
often used absolutely (and sometimes parenthetically) with an ellipsis 
of livayKi], aXqdes, tract's eorti', or the like. See Aristid. pro Qua- 
tuorv. p. 46'9. 



SECTION V. 

Rule I. "Ittttos in the feminine signifies cavalry :* Herodot. i. 80. 
where too, »/ Kctfir)Xos, a troop of camels. So >/ fiovs, a herd of oxen : see 
Thorn. M. p. 169. "Itttios in composition with other words augments 
their significations : 'nnroypdjfAcjv, exceedingly discerning: eyto he 
tovtwv QvfJLov iTCTroyvCj fxova, iEsebyl. in Jacul. 'nnrofiafjiova. 
prj/jiaTa, high-sounding words, rant: (Jirirorvcpia , Lucian, de Conscr. 
Hist. c. 54.) Aristoph. Ran. 839- [821. Br.] called p/jfxaff \tttt6- 
Kprjfxva, Aristoph. Ran. 960. [929. Br.] i. e. excessively rough and 
rugged, as it were. 'nnraXeKTpvojv, magnus gallus, Aristoph. Ran. 
[932. 937. Av. 800. Pac. 1177-] See Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 237- 
Bovs has the same effect in composition as Ittttos : fiovirais, a great 
hoy, a lad: fiovXipos, fiovXi/jia, ravenous hunger: see Aristoph. 
Plut. 874. called also fiovfipuans by Horn. II. to, 532. and Callim. 
Cer. 103. and (joviTeiva by Callim. Cer. 24. fiwyaios, a braggadocio : 
Horn. II. v, 824. Od. c, 8. fiovvefipos, a large hind or fawn: see 
Etym. M. Moer. Tricl. ad Soph. Aj. 232. Tpls also is added 
lo adjectives to increase their signification : rpitr^aKupios, thrice 
happy, very happy: Tpifiapfiapos, extremely barbarous. So the neuter 
of nds : TTc'ivaoipos, consummately wise: TrayKaXos, most beautiful ; and 
TrayicctAws, adv. Plato Phsedr. p. 171. Tra/nTTovTipos, utterly bad: 
Aristoph. Ach. 934. Sometimes with superlatives: TrafifieyurTos, 
iElian, V. H. x. c. 2. Tra.[nrpG>Tos, Pind. Isthm. 6. Horn. II. «, 93. 
TTuvvcTaTos, and adverbially iravvoTaTov, for the very last time: 
Aristoph. Ach. 1133. Eurip. Or. 367. 1021. 

II. "Icros. 1. "mtov «<7w kuityepeiv, to make a just requital, par pari 
referre : expressed also by~ fxeTpeiv ttjv "iar\v, (fxolpav viz.) or toTs 'irrots 
u/j.elj3eadai, with an accusative of the thing or person : as ty)v evep- 
yeaiav, the benefaction : or rbv evepyeTi'iaav-a, the benefactor. But 
*iaov 'irru> sometimes means equal parts of wine and water: and the 
phrase is used adverbially, or unconnected syntactically with the rest 
of a sentence : as, (piXoTriaias iaov 'iaf KeKpap.evas, love-cups of equal 



S But see H. Steplu Thes, ii. 1332. * "Ittttou /.teAaiVjjs r,y^uuv rpur/xvpias. 

c— J. S. iEschyl. Pers. 320. Blomf.— J. S. 



Mule l — 6.] "loos. 37 

parts of wine and water : Alexis ap. Athen. Deipn. x. p. 431. See 
also Hippocr. de Nat. Mill. p. 570. 1. 48. 

III. Twv "idiav Tvyyaveiv, to meet with one's deserts ; either in a 
good or bad sense. 'A71-0 tov "iaov, or onto rrjs 'lays, on an equality, 
with equal rights, on equal terms ; and ec Tov'iaov, the same : Julian, 
Misopog. p. 359- and e7ri rrj 'iarf, to which na\ opoiq. is sometimes 
added: Thuc. i, 26. and in the plural, eni rots toots /cat 
ofAotois 7rn\iTeve(j9ai, to live in a state on an equality with the 
citizens. But e£ "iaov, eftarjs, and eTrtor/s, signify equally: Julian, 
Misopog. p. 358. Antonin. els eavr. 1. ii. c. 8. en 'iarjs atyws, worthily, 
suitably, adequately, as the subject deserves; pro rei dignitate : 
Lucian, Dem. Ene. t. iii. p. 498. ed. Amst. p. 891. 

IV. The following constructions of to. 'lira are to be remarked : oh 
fxeTean twv 'iawv, ovbe twv 6/uiolwv, w avbpes 'Adijt'dlov, vrpos tovs 
ttXovgiovs rols 7roX\o7s tjfiwv : the generality of us, or, we, the 
main body of the people, are by no means on a par with the rich, in 
obtaining redress, or maintaining our rights: we have not equal 
favor shown us: Demosth. in Mid. [p. 551. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] twv 

'iawv oh fiere'ix e to'is aXXois, id/' 

VI. "Ivor, with a dative, signifies, — 1. in a philological or gramma- 
tical use, equivalent : as, fir) eyylays <pbe (Exod. iii, 5.) "iaov rw M?) 
npocndi Toiavrrj biaaKeipei : i. e. the expression fir) e. y. is equivalent to 
fir) 7T, t. h. — 2. adverbially, equally with, as much as: Iaov yap a<piv 
■Kaatv airrj'xQeTO Kt]p\ fieXaivi], car Us le ha'issoient lous comme lamort : 
Horn. II. y. So in the plural : 7rikct 6' erpetye b~ia Qeavw 7 Iaa <pi\oiai 
T€K€<rai, Horn. II. e, 70. in which sense ev 'law is used. With el /cat : 
ev iaoy, el Kat fj.rjbev av f]<rdeT0,just as if he had perceived nothing. 
With a dative: ev 'lay fii]bev rjadr) fie vw, just like one w ho had per- 
ceived nothing: [like this is ev ofioiw, the same thing: Thuc. ii, 
25.] and in the same meaning plurally : too, not rex-WSiov rjbtarav 
Kara<pt\e~i, equally with, as much as ; toa Kat herat ia/j.ev, we are 
the same as suppliants : Thuc. iii, 14. SeeHor.Od. ii, 18,.v. 32 — 34. 
i, 4, v. 13. iii, 1, v. 13. And with an infinitive : iroWo\ ovTwai noisaTto- 
Kpivovrai, too Kat /it) aKovaai ju>)re ev : ' many answer as if they had 



h Viger says that in this passage the to?s Te 'Axaio?s ical ro?s "AAA01S TPH2IN 

idiom toTs &\\ois r,jj.7v is to be noted, as iyivovro, Flato Alcib. i. p. 25 8. 1. 27. ed, 

exactly answering to the French u nous Basil, prim. a Koiva, v)) Ala, waffiv inrdpxei 

autres ; but y/puv is not in the passage as to?s aycav&fxhois irapb. -rijr twv "AAAflN 

quoted by Viger, and I have notbeen able 'YMflN (pvcreoos : Dem. in Aristog. p. 794. 

to find the place in Demosth, — Hooge- 1. 9. Reisk. So in Italian : Ma voIaltei 

veen affirms that &A\os so abounds in elite ; Chicchesia potra dire &c. St. 

Lucian's dialogues, but does not refer tfj Matth. xv. 5. transl. of Martini, Arch- 

the place. I therefore give the following- bishop of Florence. Un pensar al fine 

examples of &\\os so redundant : avrap puo dare la vita a noi altri meschini. 

'OSvaaehs TepTrer ivl (ppecrlu fjaiv aKovoov, Inscript. in Notes on Byron's Ch. 

yfe Kat "AAAOI 4>AIHKE2, Horn. Od. 0, Harold, c. iv.— J. S. 

368. elydproi ical XPVP ^yx^P L0V "AAAO * I wish Viger bad given some autho- 

yivqrai, Hes. Op. 341. The meaning of rity for this phrase. The following is an 

&X\o in this last passage is discussed, or example of tea ical with an infinitive, but 

rather abandoned, by Steph. in his The- in a very different construction: N«o- 

saur. t. iv. c. 666. d.e.f.g. — ku\ al ^dxai ffTpdrov ttotI — avayivuxjKovrSs n tov ttch- 

7e, Kal oi 8d.VB.T0i, 5;a to.vtj\v ttjv diacfiopuv, 7)tov avry T€ ko.) Kpd.TVjTi, rbv lxzv (TuvSiaTi- 



38 Katpot — Ki'fiia. [CllAP. III. § v. 

not heard (l syllable. And with unep hv\ 'iaov av e'iri -rre'iaai, virep 
av, to Xeyb/jevov, XiOov eiprjaat : that one might as well try to boil a 
stone, as the saying- is, as to persuade him : jEscIi. Socr. Dial. 7rept 
irXovr. 

VII. Toy es 'iaov to. epya bpaiws icaiTovs Xoyovs — KadiCTav-a, who 
has made good his ivords : Time. i. — which might have been thus 
expressed also, 'too. rols Xbyois ra epya k. When number is 
spoken of, it signifies as many : jrern/Koira f*eP ira'ibas, 'laovs he 
avbpas, Thuc. i, 1 i 5. So Arrian, de Exp. Al. ii. c. 2. Some- 
times a dative of the thing equalled is added ; as, ^elprts be rerrapas 
elxe, Ktu aKeXrj ra. 'icra rnis x e P fTl > Plato Symp. p. 189- Sometimes 
the aceus. apiQfxbv follows 'ioos, as in Arrian, Exp. Al. i. p. 12. in fine. 
[For 'iaov 'lata see R. 2.] 

To "iaov, as a substantive, justice, right, law: iroXefiw fxaXXov */ r» 
'ia q> iifiovXi'idrjaai' ra ey(c\>j/uar« tiereXdelv, by war rather than by fair 
discussion of right : Time, i, 34. As an adjective, with a genitive : 
rijs a<f ))pG)V airias to Iaov e£ere, equal blame : Thuc. i, 39. Its 
compound ijpiavs, instead of being put in concord with a substantive, 
has sometimes a genitive of thai substantive after it ; as, Kara to helibv 
Kepas — twv 'Aypiavwr eTayQl aav ol j/jbj ae es, Arrian, Exp. Al. iii, 
c. 12. 

VIII. Katpol, opportunities, means, capabilities, either for good or 
evil: ywpiov — o perk peyiarwv Kaipwv oheiovTai Kal TroXepovrat, 
Thucyd. i. p. 26. 

IX. KaKa, trumpery, trash: twv pev ev Qpa\rj kokwv (ri yap 

aXXo tis av c'inoi ApoyyiXov kcu KajSiiXrjv icai Maoreipoj ;) kividvpeiv '. 

to have a desire for the beggarly places in Thrace : Demosth. de 
Chers. 

X. Kukwois tjjs eirapxlas is repetundarum, extortion; or spolia- 
tion of a province ; but ptcul at ion is KXom) twv brjpoaiwv {^pripaTwv 
viz.) 

Ka\a (neut. plur.) signifies any excellences in general: Lucian, 
Dem. Enc. p. 900. 

XI. Ta Koaa, for affability, condescension, civility : rols koivoTs 
Ka\ <piXavdpu>irois ena^eis tov ai'bpos, Pint, in Publ. p. 9[). B. 

XII. KaTaxpews, vnoy^pews, vniyyvos ovaia, property encumbered 
with debt, pledged, mortgaged, avenatyos (often joined with i/7ro0//i>?/) 
ovaia, the contrary: ovaia (pavepa (Demosth. de Pace) [p. 59- I. 5. 
Reisk.] real property, or immoveable goods : ovaia a(pavt)s, personal 
property, or moveables. 

XIII. Kvpia (fipepa viz.) the day fixed for a trial at law : Eui'ip. 
Or. 48. Achill. Tat. viii, 405. ty)v Kvpiav opoXoyelv, to undertake 
or find sureties for appearance, vadimonium promittere ; enrav-av els 
ti)v Kvpiav, to appear on the day, obire vadimonium : tjjs wplas enro- 
Xelneadat or varepelaOat, to fail of appearance, vadimonium deserere. 
Kvpia is also put for any appointed day ; as is cupupiapevr], ra/crj), 
ciTroreTay/JLerT], vevopiapevr). 



Oeadai, rhv 8' 'i a a k al \iy\ aKova ai: Diog. Laert. in Polem. p. 145. 1. 27. ed. 
H. St. 12mo. 



Rule 7 — 16.] Kvptos—Aoyos. 39 

XIV. So ?7 irpoQea^xia is used either for a fixed and appointed day 
in general, [see Lucian, Nigr. p. 39- C. F. ed. Salmur. and Galat. iv, 
2.] or for one fixed for some legal proceeding : whence v-ireprifxepos 
Tijs Ttpodeafjias, one who has failed to appear, or to comply with the 
sentence of a court, hy the time appointed ; a defaulter ; or simply 
vnepi]i.iepos, [Demosth. in Mid. p. 518, 1. 2. 54-0, 1. 23. in Lacr. 
p. 927. 1. 1. in Steph. i. p. ] 123. I. 4. ed. Reisk.] or eKirpoOecrpos, or 
virepirpuQeafxos. Hence vtrfpiifiepov Xafie'iv, and elairparreiv, Dem. 11. c. 
and vKepr)nepia, the last day allowed for the above-mentioned purposes J 
He who appeared on the appointed day was said to be e/jTrpodeo-fxos. 

XV. Related to this subject is the phrase epr)fjr) hikrj, or kprifiobiKiov, 
or simply epi'ip-ri : i. e. a cause in which there ivas a failure of ap~ 
pearance. Hence kpr]\xr\v Xafielv or iXelv, to have judgment 
by default; ep^/jr/v Karrjyopelv, to accuse a person in his ab- 
sence: Plato Ap. Socr. p. 18. I. 28. 

XVI. Kvptos vojjlos, a law in force; one which the people reus 
\prj(j)l(Tfiaai Kvpiov irenoi^Ke, has* passed by their suffrages ; axvpos, re- 
jected or repealed ; out wv, as fj m olaa bUri, a cause heard, decided, 

done ivith. "AKvpoi rwr eavrwv, or tuv itpbs avrovs, persons deprived of 
the management of their affairs, as ohocpdopoi, guilty of oUocpdopia, 
spendthrifts, miners of their fortunes and families. 

Kvpwas, and nvpos, power, efficacy, distinguishing character, vir- 
tue or faculty, essence: Plato Gorg. p. 450. 1. 20. 40. [p. 304. 1. 19, 
28. ed. Bas. prim.] expressed by xecpaXaiov, p. 453. and in another 
form by the verb nvpow, and its participle Kvpoifievos, p. 451. I. 17, 
32. and 1. 27- 



SECTION VI. 

< Rule I. Aoyos. [See Niceph. Greg, techn. gramm. p. 344. ap- 
pended by Hermann to the treatise de emend, rat. Gr. gramm.] 
See Plato Thea?t. p. 206. 208. Aoyov ahelv, to ask leave to speak ; 
Xoyov hihovai, to give permission to speak; \6yov Xafielv, and Xoyov 
Tv%e~iv, to receive permission to speak. 

II. Aoyov btbovcu, airobibovai, vizo(r\eiv, k to give account, to render 
account: see Plato Cratyl. p. 426. Phaad. p. 63. Gorg. Xoyov $riTelv, 
Xafifiaveiv wapd rivos, or uiraiTelv, to demand or take an account from 
him: Demosth. de Chers. [p. 101. 1. l6. Reisk.] Phil. i. [p. 49- 
1. 19-] de Chers. [p. 99. 1. 15.] and [in Onetor. p. 868. I. 5.] Some- 
times Xoyov biboiai is to submit to interrogation, to answer questions : 
Demosth. 01. ii, p. 9* 1. .44. like which is ev rw fiepei bibovai 
eXey-^ov, to expose one's self to refutation in one's turn: Plato 



i See Deraesth. in Euerg. &c. p. 1162. ferring to it in the plural: "And all 

1. 27. Reisk. lb. 1154. 1.8. — J. S. the way the joyous people sings, And 

* More properly perhaps have: but with their garments strowes the paved 

Spenser construes people with a verb in street." F. Q. i, xii, 13. 

the singular, although in the same sen- h Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 371. 1. 18. 

tence he puts a possessive pronoun re- Reisk. — J.S. 



40 Aoyos — Mepus. [CHAP. hi. § vii. 

Gorg. p. 474. 1. 11. and Xoyov bibovat, to enter into con- 
versation. 

III. Auyov euvr<j> bi&ut'cu is to consider a matter, to weigh it well, 
to turn it in one's mind: Plut. de Orae. Def. p. 419. 

IV. Auyov ncipe^etv, is, to give people a pretext or occasion to say, 
that, &c. appreter a purler, — dabimus sermonem iis qui aesciunt, 
&c. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix, 3. 

V. AoyoL, — 1. with reference to the meaning rather than to the 
.words themselves: rives ovv i)aav 01 ircipa tovtov \6yoL Tore prjdev- 
res ; ivhai then was the language which he held at that time? 
Demosth. pro Cor. — 2. considered as mere words, \6yot ravra teal 
oKf/xpis, Demosth. [What we familiarly call fudge, or humbug.} 

VI. Eis \6yovs ekdelv, or lerat, or Karacrrfjiai, or avveXQe'iv, or avvie- 
rai, or tMpiKeodat, to enter into conversation : rwv efjol c'nriKo/jtevwv es 
Xoyovs, of those who have talked with me: Herodot. ii. — and ev X6yu> 
ehai, to be engaged in conversation ; etre en propos avec quetqu'un. 

VII. But ev \6yois elvat, or 7ro\vs e. X. e. is, to be much celebrated ; 
and on the contrary, ovr' ev Xoyw, ovr ev apiQpy, of no name or 
account : -Orac. ap. Said, de iEgiuetis. 

VIII. Aoyos, by itself, it is rumoured, it is said: ws Xoyos, as it is 
rumoured. 

IX. Aoyos with a pronoun, opinion: ws abs Xoyos, as you 
maintain: Plato Gorg. p. 477. /car' efxov ye Xoyov, as I think, 
according to my opinion. 

X. Aoyos Trends, sermo pedestris ; either prose, properly so called, 
as in Strabo, i. p. IS, (and in which sense Plato opposes neiy Xeyetv 
to fxera fxerpiov: cf. Lucian. de Conscr. Hist.) or, a style plain and 
prosaic, although metrical. — Aoyos alone is also used for prose, as 
in Aristot. Poet, i, 19. iii, 26*. and in the plural, Xoyoi, Plato Gorg. 
p. 502. and Xoyoi ipiXol, as in Plato de Legg. ii. p. £)3. ed. Bip. Hence 
Xoytoi, prose-writers : Pind. Pyth. i, 183. Nem. vi, 51. but in v. 75. 
Xoylovs means writers in general. 

'Ev Xoytp, with some genitives, is under the name of: as in 
Herodot. Er. c. 23. 'Evl X6ya>, in a word, in sum : Plato Gorg. p. 
524.1.31. Phaed. c. 45. 

'Iicaros Xoyos, ample scope for holding forth or discourse : Plato 
Gorg. p. 512. 1. 23. Xoyos rroXvs av e'it] bieXdelv, it would require 
a long discourse to enumerate or recount. aXX' el pev OappaXeojs 
eyib e-^h) irpos davarov, Tj /ui), ciXXos Xoyos'. is another matter, is 
foreign to the present purpose: Plato, ore be QaXXaj "^aipovaiv, — 
a XX os earai Xoyos: there will be another time for discussing: 
Athen. Deipnos. xiii. p. 587. See Aristot. Poet, ii, 24. Eth. Nic. i, 5. 
Magn. Mor. i, 4. 5. 



SECTION VII. 

RULE I. Mepos. — ret ev fiepei, or ret e7r« fiipovs, or ret ica-a fxepos,. 
particulars. So to. ko.6' exuerrov. 

II. 'Ev jjiepet, or kcitu i^teoos, one by one, separately ; also, in turn : 



Rule 1—5.] Mepos — Meoos. 41 

Plato Gorg. p. 462. Thuc. iii. c. 4>g. Also Kara fxipos, by portions, 
part at a time : pvpiaat 7rapara£af<e»'os Kara fiepos rpiaKoaiais, Plut. 
Cres. p. 715. i. e. in different battles at different times. 'Ano /uipovs, 
in some measure, in some degree: Rom. xv, 15. 24. So £k fiepovs, 
2 Cor. ii, 5. 

III. 'Ev fxepei, in the fart ok place of, i. e. for, as: ev eiepye- 
aias fxepei, for, or as, a kindness : ev ovbevds pepei, in no ac- 
count or estimation : Demosth." Ol. ii. ev Ibiwrov pepet, in the 
condition of a private person : Isocr. in Evag\ p 382. 

IV. Mepos, one of a number or company. See Virg. Mil ii, 6. x, 
427. 737- Ov. Her. Ep. iii, 46. viii, 46. de Pont, iv, 1. [35.] 

V. Mepos, power, abilities; or part or concern: to e/mov ye 
fjipns, asfar as I am able, to the best of my abilities ; to <tov fiepos, 
■as far as you are concerned, as far as in you lies: Plato Crito § 5, 
1 1. 71-ajTwv kpi]}jiovs, irXrjv oaov to gov fxepos : but for you, unless 
you prevent it: Soph. (Ed. R. 1509- Sometimes pepos is elegantly 
suppressed in the phrase: as, to y efibv eroifxov, lav ovros eBeXrj '.for 
my part, I am ready : Plato Theag. p. 128. I. 20. ro yovv epbv, 
^lian, V. H. i, 32. In the same sense, ro eV epe, or els e/ue J]kov 
fjiepos, or without jxepos : as, to els avrbv rjKov, Also oaov e/jtot ye 
pepos eTTifiaWet, or to /aoi eTrifiaXXov. See below Sect. ix. R. 6. 

Meaos. — 1. ro iieaov, medium, middle condition or course, by which 
to avoid the extremities of some alternative : iEschiu. c. Ctes. p. 
287- I. 24. [p. 483. 1. 9- ed. Reisk.] where vnTipyev is equivalent to 
avuyKr) ?]y. — 2. ev \xeau> is said of, time intervening: vv£ ev peaw, 
Kal -Kuprifxev — els ttjv exkkiifflay : after a night had passed, we &c. 
iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 284. 1. 36. ypovos ev peay, Kal — avaKaXovat 
tov 'hoavvriv, after some time they recall John : Euseb. Hist. Eccl. iii, 
23. See Propert. iii, 14. ink. Ov. Met. iv, 167. Fast, iii, 8O9. 
Virg. Mn. ix, 395. Cie. Catil. i, c. 2. In the same sense, ov ttoXv 
to ev peau>, Kal 01 arpanoirai, &c.not long afterwards : Photius in 
Exc. Herodian. — 3. but, without Kal following, ev peay is said of 
an obstacle: tL — ev peay tov avppilai: what hinders them 
from being united? Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 113. [v. Dorv. ad Cliarit. 
p. 601.] — and 4. without Kal, to ev peatp signifies difference : as, noXv 
to ev fjeaa), there is a great difference. And, with allusion to a 
race, ov /uiKpu :w plow, by no small distance or interval, by no small 
superiority: Heliod. iEth. vii, c. 10. — 5. ev fieaw, publicly, openly, 
in public: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 495. Plut. in Caes. p. 721. v. 
Dorv. ad Charit. p. 547. 'E>' peau, near, at hand, ready: Theocr. 
Id. xxi, 17. Xen. (Ec. v, 7. Anab. iii, 1, 21. See Ter. Ad. iii, 
4, 7. and cf. Bergl. ad Alciphr. iii, 3. p. 235. — 6. fxeaos, with two 
genitives, may be rendered between: Trjs be ev KcplvOp pay^rjs, Kal 
rrjs ev Aex«'V> pteaos apyiav EbfiovXlbris : Aristid. pro Quatuorv. 
p. 474. to. i)[xl(j)wva /neaa twv acpwvwv earl Kal tQv (pwvrjevTUV. 
V. Ov. Met. x, 174. 233. Hor. Od. ii, 19,28.-7. fxeaos, with a 
genitive, signifies in the middle of what is expressed by the geni- 
tive ; as, vavv fiear\v KXvbwvos, a vessel in the midst of the 
waves: Gregor. Naz. Carin. de se ipso, v. 52. So Matth. xiv, 24. 
v. Virg. JEn. ii, 508. x, 56, 379. xii, 564. — 8. [The example under 
Visrer. v 



42 Moipa— Mtyas. [Chap. III. § vii. 

this head has nothing peculiar to the word /ukcros.] — 9> ota p-kvov, 
in a parenthesis, Sch. Time. e. g. ad iii, 20. hut kv raj bio. peaov 
"Xpuvy, is, in the mean time : Herodot. Ur. e. 27- — 10. pkaos bt- 
KacT>)s, Tbuc. iv, 83. an arbitrator, an umpire: v. Ov. Met. v, 564. 
peaos 7ro\iTr)s, Thuc, a citizen of middle condition; between the 
richest and poorest. Micros, a middle-aged man : epya viuv, fiovXal 
be picrwr, ev-^ai be yepovnav, v. attributed to Hesiocl. — 11. pecrov 
Xapflaveiv, to take by the middle; also, to intercept: Plut. -napaXX. 
'EXX. kcu 'Pwp. p. 305. 307- 

VI. Moipa. — 1. whatever is allotted or appointed by providence : 
Odyss. t, 592. JEsch. Dial. i. extr. [p. 653. 1. 33. ed. Basil, prim.] 
Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 18. Odyss. v, 171. — Hence, by consequence, 2. 
whatever is just, right, Jit, decorous, kv poipa, and Kara polpav, 
rightly, properly, duly, becomingly, Horn. Od. x> 54. Od. 1, [352.] 
Od. [v, 48.] Od. 0. [496.] Od. p, 35/— 3. state or condition of 
life, Plato Cratyl. p. 398. 1. 20. and estimation or repute. See 
Plato Crit. p. 51. 1. 10. — 4. Molpai, Parcce, the deities presiding over 
fate. 'E»> poipa, with a genitive, is used in the same manner as kv 
pipet above, R. 3. 

VII. Mj/Seis followed by pyre — ju>'/re, and two substantives, with 
the first only of which it agrees in gender : piqbepiav pyre yapiv prjre 
avbpa, &c. Dernosth. de Fals. Leg. 

VIII. Mrr^avrt, possibility. Ovbepia fir}X av 'H » w ' tn an infinitive, it 
is impossible, or it can by no means be, &c. el ovv unwary ns 
yevoiTO, &vre ttoXiv yeveadai kpacrrwv, &c. if therefore it were 
possible, if it could by any means come to pass, that, &c. Plato 
Symp. e. 6. c'f. Plato Apol. c. 15. Phaed. c. 36. Hence aurj^aria, 
perplexity, dilemma, straits, and aprj^aviiv, to be unable : YElian, 
V. H. i, 3. 

IX. Interrogatively, ris pnyavri ; hoiv is it possible that ? &c. With 
or without a negative : see Plato Ph<sd. [p. 28. 1. 35. ed. Basil, 
prim.] 

X. MiKpdv and piya, or fieliov, are elegantly joined, both in affir- 
mations and negations: kTrr]peaS.wv kpol avvey&s, teal pucpa Kal 
(xelCb), in every possible way: Dernosth. in Mid. pyre tl Xvne'toQai, 
pyre ijbeerdai, pyre piya pyre aptKpov: in any degree, much or 
little: Plato Phileb. p. 32. See Plato Apol. S. § 7, 6, 10, 13. 
Sept. Num. xxii, 18. v. Bergl. ad Alciphr. ii. ep. 4. p. 260. and 
Schwartz, in Anim. ad Jo. Olear. de Stil. N. T. — So, ouS' early, ovre 
pe~i£ov, ovt eXarrov iprjcpiapa ovbev, Deniosth. pro Cor. 

XI. Mitcpov, by itself, for pitcpov be~cv, almost , very nearly : wore 
p.1 Kpov o-vvTpififjpat, so that he very narrowly escaped being tram- 
pled to death: Plut. Pomp. In the same manner 6\iyov : SXiyov 
rols eybeica Trapebodr), he was very near being, &c. Lysias c. Alcib. 
See Plato Phzedr. p. 258. 1. 44. oXiyov iracrai, nearly all. 

XII. Meyas and ttoXvs, though in concord with nouns, have some- 
times an adverbial sense: piyas avfccrdai for peyc'tXws, Dernosth. 
01. ii. Tlvdcjvi, Qpaavvopivw, Kal iroXXw piovri Kad' vpwv : behaving 

1 See also Horn. II. a, 286. II. ir, 367.— J. S. 



Rule 6 — 13.] Necm/cos — Ohelos. 4,3 

ivith insolence, and inveighing against you without moderation : 
Demosth. pro Cor. et7rore iroXvs ay av irveoi, with excessive vehe- 
mence : Philo de Legal, ad Caium. Meya, in the neuter, is joined 
adverbially with adjectives, as, fieya aXfiios, very rich : Herodot. 
Er. 24. iElian, V. H. viii, \J. fiey afxelvwv, greatly superior: 
Horn. 11. \p, 315. fiey' apiaros, by far the best: II. (3, 274. and with 
verbs, as in Honi. Boeot. v. 29 1." 8 — and in the same sense, ra jite- 
yaXa aotybs, — ra fieyiara ufyeXeHv, Kara being understood. 

XIII. NeavtKos (literally juvenile) is applied to every thing vehe- 
ment, excessive, immoderate : veavtKi] onovbi], ardent zeal: Hero- 
dian i, 7, 3. yeavi-Kr) biafoph, a vehement controversy : Plut. Num. 
and veuviKios paiveoQai, to be furiously or desperately mad : ISA. 
V. H. xiv, 37. 

Nduw, abl. Terpanobos v6[xy, after the manner of a beast : Plat. 
Pheedr. p. 250. 

SECTION VIII. 

Rule I. 'Obbs, a journey : iv bbw e'tvat, to be on a journey : 
Synes. Ep. 44. rj rov TlXaruivos els ^iiceXiav bbbs, JE\. V. H. xiv, 
33. els bbbv eXdelv, to go on an embassy : Eustath. I!. A. 

'Qbbv iroieT.v, bboiroielv, and bbbv bbonoieiv, to form or make a road: 
bboiroii] rreie y av avrovs, n ko\ el avv TeBpiTrirois fioiiXbivro airievai, 
Xen. Anab. And irpooboiroie'iv, figuratively, to pave a way for, to pre- 
pare : 7rpooboTToiw ool tovto, I show you the way to it, [facilitate 
by preparation.] That which is prone, or has a tendency to any 
thing, or is prepared for it, is said TrpooboTroieltrdai. 

'Obbs is said of a way of life : iEsch. Dial, iii, 8. Also of death : 
v. Hor. Od. ii, IJ. [v. 12.] Cf. Dorv. ad Char. p. 522. 

II. IIpo bbov, obvious i also advantageous, or contributing towards 
anything. 

III. 'Qbov Trcipepyov is by the way, by the by, by way of digression : 
Cic. ad Attic, [v, 21. vii, 1.] 

IV. In the dative, bbS fiablSetv, wpo'ievai, and the like; to keep a 
due course : bbuj els oXedpov fiabicovtn, they are going straight-for- 
ward to destruction. Willi kv : ev bba j3abi£eiv, aller par chemin : 
but bbaj 0abi£etP simply, is to conduct one's self virtuously and 
wisely. Ka9' bbbv irpo-^wpeiv , to proceed regularly or prosperously, 
Lucian, de Gynin. 

V. 'Qbbv iXdelv, (which is commonly to travel or go : M\. V. H. 
vi, 5.) epyeadai, or levai, is sometimes, to form an ambuscade, to be 
posted in ambush: as bbbv eXdefxevai," Horn. II. a, 149- [151.] 

'Obbs, Eustath. observes, is used in contradistinction to a pitched 
battle, and bbbv eXdelv signifies, to go foraging, or reconnoitring, or 
to take the height of an enemy's ivalls, &c. 

Ohelos. — ohelov, a characteristic, a peculiarity : rbv rpoirov eyvw- 
aav, Kai tojv dXXwv oiKeiuv e[nreipoi eyevovro, Plato Phjedr. p. 232. 
in fin. 

» See II. a, 78. Odyss. \, 484.— J. S. ° Which the Scholiast interprets, eh 

n The true reading is supposed to be ivsSpav KareXdelv. — J. S. 
ai/To?s, iii, 2, § 15.— J. S. 



44 Oikia — Ofos. [Chap. ill. § viii. 

{)kia, a house ; oJkus, goods, personal estate ; oIko>6jjios, a steward ; 
okoropos, said of a woman, a houseivife : Lysias pro Erat. 

VI. Olos, (corresponding to toiovtos, expressed or understood,) 
with an infinitive, as: toioiitovs arQpionous, o'lovs fieduadtvTus dp^eia- 
6at rotavTa, ola, &c. men of such abandoned characters as to get 
drunk and dance in such a manner, as, &c. Demostli. 01. ii. See 
Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 37. ii, 9, 3. iii, 11, I. and Schwarz. ad Theophr. 
Ch. c. 1. also Plato Pliard. c. 28. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 16". Mem. i, 4, 
6. With a finite verb : toiovtovs oloi tyaivovrai, &c. Xen. Mem. iii, 
6, 16. cf. ad Xen. Cyrop. i, 2, 3. 

VII. For ooos, with yjpovos : ovre n)v 'EAXaSa Kpan'iaas to'ls oirXots 6 
^iXimros, olov KaraS,evlai kcu rtdaooevoai ypovov eayev '. sufficient 
time to subject and tame them : Plut. Alex. 

In the following unusual forms olos appears to he redundant : el 
pev yap ris uvfjp ecrnv ev avrols, olos eptreipos iroXe/xov K(u ayuviav : 
for if there is among them any man experienced in war and engage- 
ments : Demosth. Ol. ii. el pev toi 7]v uvt iXoyiKos olos avt)p, 
but if a contentious man were present : Plato Theaet. p. 197- but in 
reality there is an ellipsis — (toiovtos) olos (koTiv «n)/>) e^ireipos, &c. 
Sometimes olos, agreeing with a substantive, has afier it an accusative 
of another substantive expressing some quality of the former; as, 
Inrep oluiv ovtwv 'ABrjvaiwv t))v ciyaptarlav, for the Athenians, 
so ungrateful as they are : Lucian, Dem. Enc. i. e. v-rrep ovras 
ayapioTtov oloi elotv ol 'Adr)i>a~ioi. — Sometimes, by attraction, it is, 
with its noun or pronoun, put in the same case as its correlative 
toiovtos, although ordinary syntax would have required another ; as, 
yapi£6jjievov o'la) a o\ 6\vbp\, obliging such a man as you : Xen. Mem. 
ii, 9, 3. i. e. avbpt TOtoi/T(f, olos av el. 

VIII. Olos for us, as: d\\" oloi navTes ye cnrpaypoi'es kol (piXo- 
Trpnyfioves Tvyyavovaiv, but as all idle people are apt to be busy med- 
dlers. For ws, how, i. e. in how great a degree: olos peyas kcu 
he iv bs drhwos riywviadr) ; how great and dreadful a battle was 

fought! Lys. in Orat. Fun. [p. 98. 1. 11. Reisk.] 

Olos put alone, to indicate qualities or character indefinitely : ov-e 
T<p TroXepiy kneXOoi'Ti ay avaKTriviv e%ei, (for -rrapeyei, v. not. ad Greg. 
Cor. ed. Schaef. p. 863.) v<f o'lwv Kanonadel, oure, &c. neither to an 
enemy who has invaded her does she afford a pretext for indignation 
on account of the character of those by whom he suffers, nor, &c. 
Time. ii. c. 41. intimating that it could be no disgrace to be over- 
come by the Athenians. — Kcu olos, like is que, or et is, in Latin, 
in the sense of kui ravra : ttoXXui pev cnreydeiai poi yeyovaai, cat 
ola i -^aXeTrwrarai Kai fiapvraTai: I have incurred many enmities, 
and those too most rancorous and oppressive: Plato Apol. c. 9 — 
privatas causas, et eas tenues, agimus, &c. Cic. ad Div. ix, 21. 

IX. Otos, ready, ivilling, prepared ; as, olcis elpt virep iraTpibos 
Kivbvieveiv. — Prone, apt; olos peTatyipeiv to. aKevt], &c. Theoph. 
Eth. Ch. [c. 10. p. 55. 1. 5. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1 738.] Tvy\avet ov olov 

- avaneideadai, is of a nature to be easily persuaded : Plato Gorg. p. 
493. Xoyot olot els tu biKao-Ttjpia, suited, accommodated, to: Plato 
Euthyd. Olos, and olos re, able: olos Te Xtyew, able to speak. [A 
shorter phrase for the equivalent and more regular one, -otouros wots 



Rule 6 — 1 3.] OTos. 45 

Aeyetv. re is a remnant of antique language, signifying/ere, as I he 
Latin que.] — In llie middle of a sentence : 7r6Xeis biroaas eanv olos 
re ws rrXeiaras atpeicrBai rov avXXoyOv ruiv , KyaiiLv : as many as he 
possibly could: Paus. in Ach. p. 418/ In the neuter olov re, 
possible: ob^ olov re earn, it is impossible ; [in the beginning of a 
sentence ecru b' ov-% olov re, Isocr. Paneg. p. 131.] and in other cases, 
e. g. the genitive : y bvpuiro anoveiv t/c rov pij ol ov re ; could he hear 
after previous inability to hear? iEsch. Dial. -nep\ nXovr. p. 72. 
and in the plural neuter: xoipabes rroXXai elai, hi uv ob% ola. re 
eon irXeeiv : through which it is impossible to sail: Herodot. ii. 

X. Qvhkv olov, or prihh olov, preestat, it is better: aXX' ovbev 
olov eor' aKovaai rwv ewQv : but it will be better to hear the verses ; 
there is nothing like hearing the verses : Aristoph. Av. 966. ovbev 
yap olov anoveiv abrov rov vofiov, car il n'y a rien de tel, que 
d' entendre la lay meme : Demosth. in Mid. [Nihil velat is ovbev 
X^ipov with an infinitive; it may be as icell to, &c. See Schol. 
Aristoph. Nub. ad v. 97. p. 79. I. 50. of Bekker's ed. printed for 
Priestley, 1826. and ad v. 145. p. 82. 1. 5.] 

XI. Ovx o\ov, and yu?) olov, not only not ; 0V X 0l0V &<f>e\e7v bv- 
vo.lt av tous tyiXovs, ciAA' ovb' avrrjv cru>£etv : she would be so far from 
being able to benefit her friends, that she would be unable even to 
save herself: Polyb. So pi) olov in b. v. — See Wessel. ad Diod. S. 
iii, 18. 

XII. Olov alone, for instance, for example ; and in the same sense 
olov bi) Xeyu, or (pr^u, and olov n Xeyia. Olov, and olovei, for waei, 
wcravel, wairepei, loanepavel, as it were, as if. And olovirep el 
following ofjoiov, Xen. Cjrop. i. c. 19. "Ofioiov is sometimes fol- 
lowed by warrepavel, or wcnrep av el, as in iEschiii. Ep. xi. and 
by us, or waet, as in iEschin. Dial, de Mort. c. 14. ob% o/ioioi — 
ical, it is not the same as ; or, it is one thing to, &c. and another 
thing to, &c. Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 225. q 

XIII. Ola, neut. plur., and old ye, and ola hi], for are §/), utpote % 
quippe : ola bi) e/jjoaXovros rov vbaros, seeing that the water had 

Jloived in, the ivater having flowed in: Herodot. ii, p. 111. B. 
avrbs — rrjv vT](rov, ola bi) Oeos, ev/japws bieKOG/urjvev : as being a god : 
Plato Crit. p. 113 v. Soph. Aj. 1042. eiri aravpo'io fxipov rirXrjKas 
eirianre'tv Ola fiporus' (in thy nature as man ;) rpirdry be rnjXas Xiires 
'A'ibovTjos Ola deos : (in thy nature as God ; as being God ;) Greg. 
Naz. carm. xiii. Ola, in such a manner: ola rijv vavv del kvkXui 
wepuaraTai Ka\\r) navroband, Aristid. Panath. oV ayopeveis,* in such 

P " At sequente substantivo dativi ca- 9 Tb irpay/jia '6iioiov eb~6ttei fioi, Kad- 

sus, pro intelligere, &c. ponitur. Piat. direp av e? ris, &c. Lucian, Reviv. 

Ion. el yap rexvy dids re ?j<T9a, si arte va- p. 408. A. ed. Salnmr. 'dpoiov ois ei 

leres." Hoogeveen. — but in that passage, ris, Lucian, Reviv. p. 411. E. o/xoiov — 

[which is in p. 3C1.1. 15. ed. Basil, prim,] Sxrirep av e't tls, Demosth. in Lacr. 

rexvr) does not depend on oTos. — iravrl p. 932, 1. 15. Reisk. Lucian, de Merc. 

S-7j\ov,'6rirexvri Ka\ iinffT rj (xtj irepl'OfATipov Cond. p. 489. D. o/xoiov Ibcrivep eX 

Xeyeiv aSvvaros eT. el yap rexvy (Xeyeiv r is, Arislot. Rhet. c. 20. Lucian, Her- 

scil.) oXos re faBa, ical irepl rS>v aKXoov mot. p. G03. C. 613. A. — J. S. 
Toir]Tu>v atravrw \4yeiv dlos r av tfada. * See the Abridgm. of Bos, p. 73. in 

—J. S. Aayi£ofj.evos. 



46 'Opyif— "Oaos. [ClIAP. III. § ix. 

a manner do you speak, (in a bad sense,) or on account of ivhat you 
say: Horn. di. p, -I7.9. a, 388. See also Mom. II. c, 758. In a 
similar sense daaa Q. Cal. Paral. ix, 424. 

The following is a summary of the uses of the particle olov : — 1. 
as, followed by ovriv, so : Plato Phacdr. p. 225. — 2. as, for example: 
Plato Phaedr. p. 340. — 3. about; olov beau arabiovs, Thuc. iv, 
5)0. — 4. in what a manner ! how ! Horn. Od. (3, 230. Aristoph. Pac. 
33. 

XIV. 'Opyi), commonly anger, sometimes means rpoiros, natural 
disposition, manners, affections, desires, feelings: ov rrj alrij dpyfj 
avanetdo/Aerovs re 7ro\epelv, Kal ev rw epyu) irpaaaovTas, Thuc. i. 
[c. 140.] p. 92. — [dpyn and rpuTros are however distinguished by 
Herodot. vi, 128. See Theogn. v. 958.] tus dpyas bpotovv, to as- 
similate men s manners or dispositions : Thuc. iii. p. 227. Hence 
evopyijrujs, moderately : Thuc. i. c. 122. 

XV. In the plural, dpyas eirupepeir, with a dative, to comply with 
the ivishes of a person ; to gratify : ' AaTvoypv — t wupepovra dpyas 
Tiaanfepvet, Time. viii. c. 83. [p. 253. 1. 11. ed. Bekk.] andCratinus 
(cited by the Scholiast of Thuc. I. c.) says, rijv MovaiKijv anopearovs 
eirt^epeii' dpyas fiporols awQpoai. 



SECTION IX.— "O^. 

Rule I. In the plural, for the relative os : twv aayoXovuevwv irepl 
t>)i' 'FAXaba, off 01 fieXXovaiv els atcpov eXavvetv Tfjs yXwrrys : as many 
as; all zvfio. In this sense it is mostly subjoined to iras ; and the 
verb substantive is often understood; as, wavQ'' daa d?wa yepaala 
Kal evvbpa Kal ntr/va. to iraXaidv 6j.io<pwva fjv, Philo Jud. de Coilf. Ling, 
p. 25 I . for irt whatever case iras may be, oaoi follows in the nominative ; 
as, Toiis ev ovpavw Tvavras oaoi TrXavwres teal airXavels aarepes, 
Philo Jud. de Monarchia i. And so, when, instead of a genitive 
following partitive words, a nominative is put, with which oaoi agrees ; 
as, ov tis toi tov fjtvQov dvoaaerai, daaoi 'Ayaiot, of all the Greeks : 
for 011 tis 'AxaiiLv, Horn. II. 1, 55. In the same manner 6-rrdaos 
is used, but less frequently: dtcdaai tov aajfiaTos v-mipeaiai ?/ rj/s 
■^vxvs, Hippocr. de Insomn. paulo post init. 

II. Whence k(f daov (or daa), Trap' daov, Kad' daov, SO far forth as, 
as far as, inasmuch as, &c. ko9' daov av a\Co, Kara Toaov-ov fiot}- 
dfjaco : as far as I may be able. 'E<p' daov is put before superlatives, 
to increase their force ; as, vttvos e^' daov rjbiaTos, the sweetest sleep 
thai can possibly be: Lucian, in Navig. And so daov alone: daov 
Tci-friara, Eurip. Tro. 295. 

III. Flop' daov signifies also except that, bating that. 

IV. Dap' daov signifies also wherefore, on which account ; and els 
daov, so far forth as ; in as far as. 'Es daov is also joined with 
superlatives to augment their signification : ev kvkXw nepidrpaaaovaiv 
is daov fiaicpoTarov, to as great ail extent as possible: Arr. de 
Exp. Al. ii. c. 19. 



Rule i— 10.] "Oaos. 47 

V. Hap" 8aov, contrarily to, beside: ^py'iaaaOal tlvi nap' llaov 
(or irap o) ■ne<pvice, to put a thing to a use for which it is not natu- 
rally or properly suited; trap" oaov el, unless; nap" oaov bel, 
beyond propriety. 

VI. 'Oaov and oaa, with eVt and a dative, signify reach of ability : 
ucpeXofievTii' »;/.ms ■yjjijfiara noXXa, oaov en airy, as far as in her 
lay : Lncian, Asin. In the same sense, oaov, or b'aa, ye ijtcet en epe, 
or els epe, or els oaov jjfcw bwapetos, to the extent of my power. "Oaov 
and is as far as one may judge from : oaov an 6 too avpnoaiov, rev 
Yl\arwva pot boxels Xeyetv : as far as I can conjecture from your 
using the word avpnoaiov, [included in avTiavixnoaiaS.it} preceding]: 
Lncian, Lexiph. [p. 955. D. ed. Salmur.] 

VII. "Oaos is added to other words, when it has an augmentative 
force; as, pvploi oaoi, irXelar a oaa. ^pijpa-a eXafie da vpa a- a 
oaa, Plato Hipp. M. p. 282. 1. 27. v. Hor. Od. i, 27, 6. ox Xos 
VTrep<pv})s o aos, Aristoph. Nub. 750. npolza embibovs nXeiaTrjv 
oarjv, Heliodor. vi. 8. So after a substantive: nXyOos oaov 
IxQvwv, Athen. p. 224. B. V. Casaub. ad Athen. p. 395. In the 
same way SjXikos : (plXepyov bot,ai Kal ^prjarov, — davpaarov fyXiicov, 
Demosth. pro Phorm. p. 605. 1. 34. [p. 957- 1. 28. ileisk.]— and us, 
Eurip. Iph. A. 943. v. Bruuck. on Aristoph. Lys. 1148. 

After an enumeration, nal aXXoi oaoi, Kal aXXa oaa, signify and the 
like. 

VIII. "Oaa Kol/je (for Kal epe,) elbevat, is as far at least as I know ; 
oaa kclfjol boicelv, as fur at least as it appears to me. So oaa Kqpe 
buiaaOai. And ye, of which Kal alone in this phrase seems to have 
the force, is sometimes added : ovy^ oaa ye kujA bpav, Lucian, in Jov. 
Trag. 

IX. "Oaov, as long as, as far as, as much as, and the like, (accord- 
ing to the purport of what precedes it,) with an infinitive of a pur- 
pose, motive, or end; as, nepiepetve j^povov, oaov KaTaaTtjaat tcl 
Kivovpeva tuiv npaypaTwv : he waited long enough to, &c. aXXijXuiv 
bieaTijaav oaov ovic ev ep(3oXa1s yeveadai tuiv vaawv, so far as fiot 
to be within reach, &c. vepopevol re ret avruiv eKaarot, oaov anoSfjv: 
bestoiving just so much culture each on their territories as enabled 
them to live: Thuc. i. [c. 2.] Kapno(popi^aui oaaov enianelaa i aoi, 
rpaye : I shall bear fruit enough, villain goat, for wine to pour on 
thee when thou art sacrificed: epigr. attributed to Evenus. The 
form is fuller in Arrian : tooovtov icade^eis tT/s yijs, oaov e£apKe~c 
evTCTatydai rJ aw/xan : you shall possess as much of the land as 
suffices for the burial of your corpse: Exp. Al. vii. c. 1. In the 
following, efcanv, or something equivalent, seems to be understood : 
Trivovaiv oaov apnaaai, the dogs drink as much as they can take 
by snatches : M\. V. H. i, 4. vaawnov, oaov rolai Tpia'l baK-vXoiat 
Xafielv, fieXm pl£as : as much as one can take up with three fingers : 
Hippocr. de Morb. p. 496. 

X. Wpoeyeiv evQiii e£ ap-^fjs ou)( oaov XavOareiv, to become at once 
too eminent to be concealed: Aristici. Pan at hi p. 202. [from Bud. 
p. 479.] The construction seems to be such as if he had written, 
npoeyeiv oh roaovrov ware XavQaretv. 



48 "0<tos. [Chap. in. § ix. 

XI. "Ooov re in the more ancient writers, as Homer/ and Herodo- 
tus, and oaov alone in the more modem, occur for about: oaov re 
rpiGtv ijpepiwv bbbv cnre^ovTas, Herodot. v. c. iv, 122. [See on Sect, 
viii. Rule 9- oTos re.] oaov ej3bofjf)KOVTa arabiovs, Arrian, i. p. 36. 
1. 22. oaov bv 7/ rpla vrahiu, Plato Pha?dr. p. 229. And with 
t$ redundantly: ooov ks -^iXiovs, Pans, in Ach. p. 421. I. 35. 

XII. "Oaov, only : b(iba Tis iippevnv Xafiwv, o oov VTr)]veynev, elrn 
aveupiirai: one having taken a lighted torch, only just puts it 
under, and then withdraws it again: Plut. in Publ. See Plalo 
Epigr. 3. Diosc. Epigr. 4. Tlieocr. i, 45. xxv, 73. Arist. pro Quat. 
p. 319. tt\))v oaov Xoya), except in mere words only, (opposed 
to reality,) Pans, in Arc. p. 457- and p. 46'2. oaov y av avros 
p>) TTOTi-^avwv xepo7»', only not touching it myself: as far as I can 
without using my own hands to do it : Soph. Trach. 12lfj. 

XIII. "Oaov avTiKa, oaov ovirw, oaov ovbe-Kw, oaov ovk i'jbr), jam jam, 
forthwith: oaov air Ik a rov rrpayparos a\popai, I will presently 

set about the affair ; eaupevov oaov ovbenw, on the point of being ; 
about to be immediately : Herodian, i. c. 13. oaov ovk ifbri cnrijX- 
6ev, il ne fait que de parlir ; s t6v oaov ov napovra iroXepov, the war 
which is on the point of commencing : Thuc. i, p. 26. See Dorv. 
ad Char. p. fj(J2. seq. ed. Lips. 

XIV. The expression is applied to other things besides time : as, 
oaov ovk avroTTTrjs yevopevos, having been almost an eye-witness ; 
all but an eye-witness. 

XV. With oyehbv, redundantly: o%ebbv oaov tjkovtos, Euseb. 
Praep. 13. 

XVI. "Oaov, fjXUov, olov, onolov, between two substantives, agree 
with the first rather than with the last ; as, Ttayos oaov, or fjXiicov, 6 
baicTvXos, the thickness of a finger. 

To specify quantity, oaov is put absolutely in the neuter : — 1. be- 
tween two substantives in the same case, without regard to number 
or gender; as, fxilfts rov oirbv aiXejiov oaov rpi&fioXov, having 
mixed as much as three oboli of benzoin: Hippocr. de Nat. Mul. 
p. 570. rpt(36Xovs oaov Koy^nv, lb. and with an ellipsis of 
the first substantive, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 15. — 2. with the first sub- 
stantive in the genitive : biKTiipvov KprjTiKov oaov ofioXbv, Hip- 
pocr. lb.— 3. with a participle : Xevtco'tou Kaprrbv, oaov iv ro'ts rpial 
SaKTvXois \aj3«v: seed of white violet, as much as you can take in 
three fingers : Hippocr. lb. — 4. with an infinitive; see an example 
at the end of Rule 9. 

"Off a, for the purposes of, in the capacity of, for, as: ry Xo'^w be 
— oaa ciKpoTToXei — e-^pujvTo, Pans, in Arc, p. 527- vvkti pev oaenrep 
iipepo: expijro, Xen. Ages, vi, 6. 

"Oo-os, with a substantive, is sometimes equivalent to a superlative 

r B69pov 6pv£ai (Saov re irvyovaiov gone but an instant. Ne vous etonnez 

cvda Kal evOa, Odyss. k, 517. — J. S. pas de voir Ie Vicorate de la sorte : il ne 

s I take these Greek words to mean, fait que sortir d'une maladie qui lui a 

he is all but gone, he is on the point of rendu le visage pale. Muliere, Prec, Ri- 

going ; whereas the P'rench given by Vi- die. sc. 12. — J. S. 
ger signifies, he is just gone, he has been 



EtJLE 11 — 16.] "Ocros— OaTs. 49 

adverb: oaov ra^os, with the utmost speed: Soph. Aj. 1009. 

"Oatd in the dative, with or without er, signifies while: oaf be 
olroi ovveatriKaaiv, kv roaovTf, &c, Paus. in Messen. p. 228. 1. 23. 
Aiso until : ev oaf V av iraXiv eXduai, Xlri^/jra p^re bf/aai — prjbeva, 
fir/re, &c. Thue. iii. c. 28. 

With words of time it may sometimes be translated every, or by 
an adverb: <p6povs airofcpetv oaa errj, to pay tribute every year, or 
annually: Arr. de Exp. Al. i. p. 55. 1. 36. and iii. c. if. iv. c. 8. 
&aot fxrjves, every month, monthly: Demosth. in Timocr. p. 480. 
I. 32. [p. 744. 1. 25. Reisk.] oaai fyftipm, Thuc. Viii. 64." or in 
one word oarjpepai, Aristoph. Plut. 1007 . [1006.] Arr. Exp. Al. iii. 
c. 26*. every day, daily, oaai vvxres, Lucian, Philops. p. 479- B. 
every night, nightly: auvbu)yop.ev aXXr/Xo/s oaai re fjpepat ml 
oaai vvktzs, Damasc. in Bibl. Phot. p. 568. The phrase appears 
fuller in Horn. Od. £. 53. See Hor. Od. ii, 14, 5. 

"Oaov oaov is used for a very little: Aristoph. Vesp. 213. aweipov- 
mv oaov oaov rrjs x^P as y they sow ou t a little modicum of the land t 
Arr. Ind. s. 29. fiucpbv oaov 6aov t Hebr. x, 37. See Wakefl 
Silv. Oil. voL v. p. 146. s<j. 



SECTION X. 

KuLE I. Ovpos, or ovpios avefios, (called by Homer Aibs 
vvpos, and 'iicfievos ovpos,) a fair wind: tear olpov <j>epeadai, to sail 
before the wind. 

II. In the same sense, is ovpov Karaartjiat, ovptta irXf xprjaaadat, 
££ ovpias (irvofjs viz.) nXe'iv, and, in one word, ovpiobpopelv, and Karov- 
puiaai. Also ovpla Belv, Aristoph. Hence enovplcu), to propel with 
a fair wind? and figuratively, to succeed (v. transitive;") and 
€7rovpia$uj, Lucian ; and xarovpow, Polyb. [1.] to spread the sails to a 

fair wind. [This is Budaeus's explication. Viger adopts Suidas's, to 
sail prosperously ; making it a verb neuter.] 

III. The Greeks sometimes say the sons (iralbes) of persons, when 
they mean the persons themselves ; Ihus, p/jrdpwi', larpuv, (ptXoa6<pu)v, 
ypa<peu)v ira'ibes, for rhetoricians, physicians, philosophers, painters. 
Avarr'jvwv tt alb es, unfortunate, unhappy persons ; KeXrwv wa'ibes, 
Gauls. So Kwwv iralbes, IE\. V. H. i, 29. QerraXuiv iralbes, 
iii, 1. Ttalbes AijXtW, iv, 28. but in all these last passages persons 
are spoken of as relating events which had happened in former times, 
and had been handed down to them by their forefathers. 

Hals, the concrete term, is sometimes used for iraibia, the abstract ; 
esc j/ truth l, in boyhood. And so peip&Ktov : baupvop eV avrf apeJvat 



1 The true reading is d^riftepat. See it is a verb neuter : rpe%€ vvv, rpe'xe vw, 

Bekker's edition — J. S. Karh robs K6patcas iirovpiaas, Thesm. 122G. 

* 'AW' oSti TavTt] abv <pp6vi)jjL irrovpi- — J. S. 
aas, Eurip. Androni. 611. In Aristoph. 

Viger. G 



50 rid$. [Chap. hi. § x. 

ev fie tpa iciy enro&dvovn, having died in youth: Pliilostr. de Vit. 
Soph, in Hermocr. 

IV. Eis irarrav, (-^pelur or the like). 'fli be\e(t(rf)e\s b bFi/jos, els 
Traaar ijbi] ridatrbs avvdls eyeyorei : for all purposes : Pint, in Pomp. 

1. With the article, ncivres is used to signify the extreme or utmost 
number of what is mentioned ; (equivalent to to crvpirav, Plot. Lycurg. 
p. 41.) as rpeTs oheras tovs it arras avre^^yero, he took with him 
three domestics in all: Allien, vi. eftnuootai paXiara ol navres, 
Tliuc. iii, 85. ret ukv Travra yeyovu)S err) Trevr^KOvra cat e£, 
Plut. in Cres. us elvai rds Trdaas beta, so that they (the Sibyls) 
were all together, or in all, ten: Ml. V. H. xii, 35. See Clark, 
ad Horn. II. n, l6l. k, 570. Burm. ad Grat. Cyn. l6\ But when 
the article is omitted, the word signifies either all without excep- 
tion, as, Movaai krvea waaai, all the nine Muses, every one of 
them: or, when things of different kinds are mentioned, it signifies 
that the number stated is to be taken as meant of each kind ; as, 
KTYjvea re yap to. dvai/ja Travra TpiayiXia eQvae, Herodot. i, 50. 
V. Wessel. and Valck. ad Herodot. iv, 87. 

2. "Awaai, with all zeal or care : v anaoi yap rjdeXe tovs 7ralbas rfjs 
ev 'Pwjuj7 bialrrjs yjpxiarris airoXaveiv, Herodian iii, 13. — 3. in the 
accus. neut. plur. elliptical ly : ri yap f/fjilv botcel Tpefetv rbv ovov tov- 
tov, Travra KaTaTrLirTorTa ; tumbling down every where, or always : 
Lucian, Asin. [p. 134. A. ed. Salmur.] irdna b 1 er/ra 'Prjibiivs, in 
each mode of contest : Horn. II. e, 807. In a H respects, Aristoph. 
Nub. 1432. Ran. 1248. Theogn. 441. 1159. MA. V. H. xii, 25. 
■reavT ixvaXtus, utterly void of courage or spirit: Soph. El. 297- 
[301.] Fully expressed, Kara Travra, Act. Ap. xvii, 22. — 4. Travra 
yap i)aav rj rpa%e~tai irerpat, — >} \pa/u/uoi fiadelai : for all was craggy 
rocks, or deep sands ; for there was nothing hut, &c. Philo Jud. de 
Vit. Moys. i. — 5. Sometimes iras, in concord with a substantive, is 
equivalent to the adv. iravrufs', as, 7rdffa avayicri piaelv tovs 
alriovs, you must unavoidably ; you cannot but, &c. Epict. Ench. 
c. 38. and c. 18. Aristoph. Pace 373. anas Kivbvvos, Pind. Nem. 
8. irdaa j3\aj3n, (iEgistbus,) utterly pestilent: Soph. El. 297* 
[301.] Tray Tovvavriov ettriv, it is quite the contrary: Plato 
Soph. v. Virg. /En. v, 800. See Brunck. ad Soph. El. 301. 
Phil. 927. — 6. t6 ndv TreXayns, the open or mid sea. — 7- for 6X0 s : 
T7jr (paTvrjv eovtrar -^aXKerjr iraaav, Herodot. ix, 70. — 8. bia rravrbs, 
always: Soph. Aj. 704. Herodot. i, 122. — 9. es to rrav, omnino : 
iEsch. Choeph. 6'S2. 939. Eum. 84. — 10. iravra elvai tivi, to be 
every thing to a person; to be all in all to him : Herodot. iii, 157. 
vii, 156. v. Berg. p. 236. ad Alciphr. ii, 3 — but with the article, 
7jv re 01 ev rip Xoyf to. rravra r] Kww, is, and he talked of nothing 
else but of Cuno : Herodot. i, 122. — 1 1 . 7rds for wavTobanos, ttovtoIos, 
of every kind: oiutvolffi re naeri, Horn. [II. a, 5] — 12. to irdv, the 
•vulgar, the common herd: Pind. Ol. ii, 153. w 

v This interpretation of Hoogeveen's, '"Add: — 13.ets ttav TrpoeArjAvde /xox- 
omni studio vel cura, appears very ques- Grjpias, for els -rraaav juoxfljjpiac, De- 
tionable. — J. S. mosth. Ol.iii.p. 29.1. 17. Reisk. els ira.v 



Rule 4 — 7-] YWU/jos— TlXeov. 51 

V. Ytkoifios or 7r\w7^uos. — e.ri ttXoi prntv ovftov , Apyji yap fit> jjcto- 
irwpov : the time for safe navigation being not yet passed : Philo in 
Legat. So in the compar. Time. i. p. 5. [c. 7.] and, TrXwipibrepa 
eyeie-o nap aWr/Xovs, their intercourse by sea was rendered easier 
and safer: Time, i, [c. S ] HXSupos, (of a place,) safe for naviga- 
tion ; ttXih/jios vavs, sea-worthy : [Time, i, 29.] 

VI. UoXireta, political conduct ; measures of a public man : De- 
mosth. pro Cor. [p. 257. I. J. Reisk.] 

VII. UoXiis, in great force, having numerous forces : ttoXvv pev ev 
yfj, iroXvv be ev daXaaar) : Plut. de Fort. Rom. FIoAOs is also said of a 
person much spoken about : ttoXv v per tov 'AXe'favbpov Kal fyiXtirnov 
kv Tals biu0oXa~is cpeptov, perpetually naming, (or, objecting to me) 
Alexander and Philip in your calumnies: jEsch. c. Ctes. [p. 
6\5. 1. 5. Reisk.] cf. iEsch. in Timarch. [p. 165. 1. 7- Reisk/] ooi 
be ttoXvs plv b KuXXIvt paras, Callistraius will be an ample topic : 
Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 892. 

lloXvs, with a gen. much, a great part : 7js (x^P as ) «ye"' k«* <p£peiv 
earl iroXXrjv, Demoslh. Phil. iii. p. 50. 1. 13. In the plur. with 
the article and a gen. most, the greater part: vricnwTOJv tovs 
ttoXXovs wKtaav, Time, i, 12. Xen. Anal), v, 6, 19. HeXorrov- 
vi'iaov to. TroXXa, Time, i, 2. and the superl. in the singular has 
the same sense: liueXias ro irXelarov, Time, i, 12. 

TlXeoi', for irXeoveKrrjpa, adva?itage : ri TrXeov tov rei-^ovs i\v \ 
where was the advantage of the wall ? what use in the wall? Aristid. 
pro Quat. p. 315. ovbev TrXeov avrJ yiyverai, t>)v Kpiaiv enro- 
(pvyorri: he has gained nothing by his acquittal: Arr. Exp. 
Alex, iii, 27. See Isocr. Paneg. [p. 98. 1. 1. ed. Battie. Cantab. 
1729-3 e ' s tcivtov Ttepirpe^eiv pvpiatcis, ovbev TrXeov irotovvres '. 
to no purpose, without advancing: Plato Theaet. 01 ttoXXo], the 
multitude. YloXvs is said of what exceeds, or is superlative in 
any respect : y Txo-aphs ttoXvs, rushing with a vehement tide: see 
Virg. iEn. vi, 659- ttoXv tcanbv, extremity of evil: Time, ii, 51. 
ttoXvs XaXuiv, talkative to excess: BL\. V. H. xii, 14. TToirjms earl 
ti TtoXv, the meaning of iroirjais is very comprehensive: Plato 

eXdiiv, having undergone extremity of tcixvtSs /j.oi r)v oikuv eV SrifioKparia, if 

suffering: Demosth. in Conon. p. 1261. it were not my paramount care, my chief 

1.5. — 14. to ttclv, adverbially, ivholly, solicitude, above all other considerations 

entirely , altogether • 3> to KaXov irodopZo-a, with me, all in all to me : Solon's lett. to 

rb irav Xldosl Theocr. Id. iii, 18. imp- Cross, in Diog. Laert. — J. S. 

prifiaTtKais, o.vt\ tov 8i6Xov, Scliol. — 15. * XIoAvs fj.lv yap 6 $l\nnros gctou, for 

iravT ex eiJ > you comprehend the matter there will, be a great deal about Philip, 

thoroughly; you take the thing exactly : (in Demostlunes's defence of Timarchus, 

Aristoph. Av. 1460.— 16. iravTOs p.aXXov, viz.) — J. S. 

most certainly, indisputably : Plato Pliaed. v Ovtco 0' r)v ttoXvs, Sio-t', so mighty 

p. 28. 1.37. ed. Bas. prim.; really, in- ivas he, &c. Aristoph. Av. 488. ovtcos 

deed, Piat. Plisedr. p. 196. I. 6. — 17. r)v na\ eXeirdai Kal KaTacppovr)(Tai ttoXvs, 

in TravTOs, by all means, indispensably ; so great was he both in, &c. Diog. Laert. 

Xpil eft iravTOs i) tov oiavefjiovTa 'IXiwv in Aristipp. ttoXvs yap, ttoXvs, Kal 

exeiv, i) ttjv Upop.y]Qiws p.epiSa (pepeaOai, ToXp.t]p6s iffTtv &vQpwwos : immoderately 

Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 485. c. ed. troublesome : Demosth. adv. Boeot. p. 

Salmur. So QairavTos, Lucian, Reviv. 1024. 1. 3. Reisk. 

p. 416. E. ed. Salm. — 18. et p.T] irepl The following phrases may be added: 



52 Tipdypa — Irj/ueloy. [CHAP. fir. § xi. 

Symp. &pa iroWi), late: Mark vi, 35. iro\vs for ttoWukis, CalKm. 
Dian. 27 '• Heliodor. vi, 4. 

VIII. TIpay/ia. — Awry ovbev eoTtv en irpdyfxa npos Tas avvQi]Kas 
ravras, he has no longer any thing to do with, &c. any concern in : 
Demosth. eav be \pevbfj, ovbev bq irpay pta ; no matter ; it does not 
signify: Plato Symp. irpfjyp\a pievToi ovbev k-TroiyaavTO, they 
cared not, they concerned not themselves about it : Herodot. Er. c. 
63. ol ev irphyjiaai, those entrusted with public affairs, with the 
government of a state: Thuc* 

Like xprj/^a, it is said of any thing that surpasses : Hnve\67reta be 
Meya vpayfia, Eubul. ap. Ath. Deipn. xiii. p. 559." an admirable 
or excellent woman. 

IX. Upa^is, in a forensic use: tx\v vpa^iv elvai e£j evos koA a/Mbolv, 
a form added in some legal instruments, to signify that the parties 
are bound jointly and severally, each to be bound and liable for 
the whole. 

X. Upa^is, stratagem, trick, intrigue, [and so Ttpdyfia, Greg. 
Cypr. in Ep.] and irpafyKOTte'tv rtva, or ir6\iv, &c. to circumvent, 
outwit, trick, a person ; to take a town by artifice.* 

XI. FIpd(T)(>jjua, ornament, glory: Hapbeis, to irpoaj^rjjjia rijs — 
yyefjovias, Plut. in Alex. 

XII. Tlpooyriiia, mask, screen, pretence , color, pretext : v. Time. i. 
p. 64. 

XIII. In this sense it is often put absolutely, and opposed to to 6' 
akijdes : ostensibly, so and so, but in reality, &c. — In the same 
manner npotyaaiv fiey is opposed to rp b' aXndeio:, as in Aristid. pro 
Quat. p. 309- and to epyw be, as in Paus. Cor. p. 132. 

XIV. Ta TrpbJTa for v Trp&ros : 'iadi tu>v 'Adqvalwv ra irpwra f 
Lucian, in Tim. V. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 147. Brunck. act 
Eurip. Or. 1251. Hec. 784. 



SECTION XI. 

Rule I. To confirm any tiling which has been said, the Greeks 
use the words (rnpie'tov, reicufyHOV, cnrobeifa, fxaprvptov, &c. with be 
in an unconnected position, at the commencement of the next sen- 
tence or member of a sentence; as, Trpbs jxev xpnjiaTwv KTT)<nv olbe- 

Gpaavs el iroWov, Aristoph. Nub. 905. culty ; without tr. or d. : Xen. Anab. 

i.e. irdvv, Suid. ir6\\' cttI ttoWoIs vi, 3, 3. So &vev irpayp-dTtav, Demosth. 

ufxvvaiv rov Ai6vv<rov Mr; ttuttot', &c. 01. i. p. 14. I. 28. wvov/xevos rififjs 

Aristoph. Vesp. 1046. oath upon oath. — fipaxeias peyd\a irpdy/xara, great pos- 

J. S. sessions: Plut. in Crass, p. 997. 1. 20. ed. 

2 So yeve<r0ai ev ro?s irpdyp.a<ri, Plut. H. St. — J.S. 
in Thes. p. 16. 1. 5. en*. St — J.S. l KKeopevovs ire-!rpa£iKoiriiK6Tos 

" Ironically: ourotrl 8e Adtcpiros <pao-n- avrovs, having- overreached or outwitted 

Xlrr)s, fieya irpayfia, 'laoupdrovs /xadrj- them: Polyb. ii, 46. irpa£tKoirr)o~as 

fi\s : Demosth. adv. Lacr. p. 928. 1. 6. rov 'AtcpoicSpivdov, having got possession 

Under this word may be added, els of it by stratagem: Polyb. ii. 43. and in 

to Trpaypa, to the purpose: Demosth. Polyb. i, 18. it is an intransitive verb. — 

pro Phorm. p. 961. 1. 8. ovv irpdynao-iv, J.S. 
— &vev vpaypdruv : with trouble or diffi- 



Rule i— 5.] Iw/jia— T«. 53 

irwirore 6 bijfJLOs eairovbaae, irphs be bo^rjs, ws ovbe rrpos ev twv HtXkwV 
TeKfii)ptov be' ^pr/fiara fxev yap 7r\et<7ra Twv 'EjXXtjvwv wore a^wv, 
ra 7ra»0' vnep <j>i\orifiias avijXwoev , &c. a proof of it; as appears 
from this, &c. Demosth. adv. Androt. [p. 617. i. 12. ed. Reisk.] 
Aristot. Etli. vi. c. 5. jueya be arjfielov ews pev yap, &c. 
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 353. — Sometimes those words are not used 
so elliptitally, v. Herodot. Pol. 221. Aristid. 1. c. p. 247. Plato 
Apol. S. p. 40. ArjXov be, rw, &c. Aristot. Eth. vi. c. 2. In the 
same sense Xenophon uses ebf/Xwuev, Cyrop. vii, 1, 30. cf. Mem. 
i, 2, 31. In the like unconnected position, ro be pabtovpyrifja' end 
yap, &c. but the knavery was thus; when, &c. Euseb. Praep. Ev. 
p. 220. 

Iwfia signifies a person, an individual: iEsch.inTira. p. 173. 1. 28. 
Virg. JEn. ii, 18. v, 318. Eurip. Med. 24. vfipeis opwrres els to. eXext- 
depa aufiara yivofxevas, Dinarch. c. Deniosth. p. 94. 1. 54. [Here 
the body of the person is the part chiefly regarded ; as it is in iEschyl. 
Prom. 865. and in Lycurg. adv. Leocr. c. 30.] Kara owfia, indi- 
vidually : Kal cvWf'ifibrjv airavras, Kal \wpls eicaarovs Kara aw\xa, 
iEsch. in Ctes. p. 405. I. ult. Reisk. Iwfxa, a slave, Tob. x, 1 1 . [v. H. 
St. Thes. iii. 1213. B.—J. S.] 

Sai^a, a corpse, a carcass: v. Pind. Ol. ix, 52. Nem. ix, 55. Horn. 
II. iii, 23. xviii, l6l. xxiii, 169. 

II. TeXos, a troop, Herodot. ix. c. 42. — Magistracy, public office 
or station: e%w twv flaatXewv, Kal twv uaAiora ev reXei, Thuc. 
i, 10. 

TeXos be, es reXos, /cat reXos, and reXos alone, signify at last: He- 
rodot. Er. c. 66. Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 51. 1. 11. Lucian, Dem. 
Enc. p. 923. Xen. (Ec. 17. § 10. Thuc. i, 109. Xen. Cyrop. 
i. p. 25. and ii. p. 42. And in the same sense to reXevralov, 
Lucian, 1. c. p. 902. PJato PliEed. p. 91. I. 35. and ra TeXevrala, 
Demosth. 01. ii. p. 6. and mepas, iEsch. in Tim. p. 119. 1. 29- 
[p. 84. 1. 13. Reisk.] and repfia, Phocyl. 131. — But to reXos, 
and bia reXovs, sometimes signify, wholly, utterly, absolutely : Pho- 
cyl- [v, 47.] Xen. (Ec. 17- § 10/ 

Te-^vT)- Traarf re^ijj is by all means, d with all possible speed: Ari- 
sloph. Eccl. 530. 366. Ideln Texvy,* openly, without disguise: 
Herodot. Call. c. 57. See Larch, (vi. p. 120.) 

III. Tis has sometimes the article before it; see Ch. I. R. 19. 
and Aristoph. Av. 1039- Nub. 773. But 6 be tis is some other, 
another: Aristoph. Av. 1444. "Ey/wo-i be br) ti tovto ; but what is 
this which they have? Plato Phaedr. p. 259. V. Lucian, de Sacr. 13. 
t. i. p. 536. 

IV. Tts for 7ro7os, as, tis yap lyw irpbs toctovtovs ; what am I 
against so many? See Hist. Susann. v. 54. 

V. Various particles are subjoined to tis, expressive of the wonder, 

c Add TeAos, a market toll: Aristoph. KaBear-fiKee 4k tijs lOe'njs {openly, avow- 

Acliarn. 896. — J. S. edhj) AaKtSaifiovioicri. iroAe'^ios. ix, 36.) 

d See Aristoph. Thesmoph. 65. — J.S. KaraSS^as aiirovs lOeir) rexvp anoAnruv 

* (In which sense Herodotus some- avrbv, (in good earnest.) ix, 56. — J. S. 
times uses the phrase in ttjs ifcnjs: 



34 T.s. [Chap. hi. § xi. 

ignorance, &c. of the inquirer; as, r/$ apa, rls wore, ri S//7rore, 

TL brjTU, &c. 

VI. Ti yap u\\o — *i with a verh : Alex, ri yeA^s ; Diog. ri yap 
a Wo, y ayef.uliaOr}t', &c. why because I recollected what the Greeks 
did, to be sure: Lucian. [Dial. Mart. p. 253. C. ed. Salrnur.] — and 
ri yap av a\\o ; it is unavoidable ; how can it be otherwise? is some- 
limes put at the end of a sentence. 

Kal ri yap, in a word, to be brief: Lucian, Tox. p. 609. — TV 
yap ; serves as an affirmative answer: to be sure, certainly, Quidni? 
v. Eurip. Or. [v. 476. Pors.] — TV with a subjunctive mood ex- 
presses a doubt as to what shall be done, when doing is practicable ; 
as, ri <pu> ; With an optative and ac, it expresses a doubt whether any 
thing can be done at all; as, ri bijr' av rip.e~ts bpujiev', Soph. Phil. 
1393. what then can we do? i. e. I fear we can do nothing at all. 
But the poets frequently omit the ay, as /Esch. Choeph. 392. Soph. 
Ant. 604. — Sometimes ri is to be supplied from a preceding interro- 
gation: iEsch. Eum. 791. 821. Eurip. Ion, 1446. 

VII. TV yap, el nr/, and ri be, el fxi), in answers, what but. How 
did your wife appear to attend? &c. ri be, el fit) vKia^ve'iTo ye eni- 
/ue\))uea6ai ; why so well that she promised, &c. Xen. CEc. p. 844. 
and in the same manner presently afterwards. 

VIII. "AWoTL e is used in questions ; as, eiUon $ wepl nXeiarov 
•noiy, onus ; &e. do you not esteem it of the greatest importance? are 
you not very solicitous that? &c. Plato Apol. p. 24. 1.30. aXXori 
?} ol Tavry oliceovres AlyvK-iojv ireivynnvmv ', Herodol. ii. c. 14/ And 
without i] : aWori ovv, r)t> b' eyio, ovbe larpus, Kad' ouov larpds, rb ru> 
larpio Gvjx<pepov oKOTrel ; Plato de Rep. i. p. 242. [When >) is omitted, 
the interrogation is in aXXo ri alone ; not in the other words of the 
senteuce.] 

IX. 17 interrogative is used in a form wherein doubt is expressed 
as to a proper appellation : to ri a e'iiru) ; how shall I find a name bad 
enough for thee? Aristoph. Nub. 1381. [1360.] u> ri av el-nuv ere ris 
6p6ws itpoaei-not; 0/ what name can be applied to thee bad enough 

for thy deserts? Demostli. pro Cor. p. 3l6. init. 

X. 'A\\a ri jxi\v ; ivhat else then, if not that? said by an interro- 
gator when a prior question has been answered in the negative : 
Plato Symp. c. 23. cf. c. 25. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 23. Theocr. Id. 
viii, 15. 

But sometimes ri p/»'; is an affirmative answer: to be sure, of 
course: Plato Soph. c. 5. Phaedr. p. 229. cf. ib. p. 272, 273. And 
ri yap ov; and ttws yap ov ;s have the same use. 7 ' 

€ "AAAoti (or &\A.o rt) occurs in such h Hoogeveen wrongly translates t[ oZr 

interrogations only as are used to elicit an tovto; in Plato Hip. M. p. 298. [3-18. I. 

acknowledgement or concession; never in 51. Bas. prim.] by Quid ita? The whole 

such as are employed merely for the sake passage stands thus : Socr. &ireipos el tov 

of information. — J.S. avSpbs, Si 'lirirla, ois ffX^rKids icm, Kal ov- 

f Add Xen. Anab. ii, 5, 2. iv, 7, 4. — Ser paSlws airodexi^vos. Hip. ri ovv 

J.S. tovto, S> Scfj/cpares ; (what matters that ? 

* Socr. a\\h p.)]V evvofxos y' 7) Aa/ce8cu- what does that signify?) to yap opO&s he- 

p.wv. Hipp. ttS>s yap ov; most assuredly : y6p.evov avaynri avTy airodexeadai., ?*) p.11 

Plato Hip. M. p. 346. 1. 36. Bas. 1. airo5ex°M e ' f "f' -KarayeXaaToi thai. — J. S. 



Rule 6 — 14.] Tis. 55 

XI. Tts is elegantly added to many words, imparting to them 
somewhat of its own indefinite signification ; as, ttoIos tis, Aristopli. 
Nub. 763. [755.] Plato Soph. 1. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 296. was 
ti; fieya ti, ovbev ti, scarcely at all, or not at all: Herodian, i. c. 
l6. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 42. u^iKpuv ti. tto\X(3 tivi yeipav, Aristid. 
Or. Plat. iii. p. 405. -noWoj tivi irpu>TOs, lb. p. 402. biraaov ti 
bmpepei, how much it differs ; roia&e tis, Xen. Mem. i. 1, 1. Cf. 
Plato Symp. e. 2. 

Tts is often understood ; as in Soph. (Ed. R. 314. Aj. 154. (Ed. 
R. 6l2. 517. Xen. Symp. v, 2. cf. Xen. Ages, i, 22. and Fiscli. 
ad Well. p. 294. ; and especially before genitives used partitively ; 
as, Kay yajurj wot clvtos, 1) tmv ^vyyevwv, rj tujv 0/Xwv : and if he, or 
(any one) of his relations or friends marry: Aristoph. Nub. 1125. 
[1112.] See Soph. El. 1323. Act. Ap. xxi, 16. and Hor. Od. 
iii, 13, 13. 

XII. Tts indefinite is found in interrogations. See Demosth. Phil. 
i. [p. 43. 1. S. Reisk.] t\s evbm; is any one loithin? iEsch. Ch. 
652. 

Tt for 0, Vi, that which, what: Mark xiv, 36. cf. vi, 36. viii, 2. 
Matth. xx, 22. 

XIII. Tts, on Fr., one, i. e. any person : AaKeba! fiova irokeav 
p.6vi]v ov irpoboQe~iaar~—evpoi tis av, Paus. Ach. p. 415. See 
Horn. [II. jS, 271.] jEsch. Eum. 154. Theogn. 184. Instead of tis 
and a verb in the 3rd person, a verb alone in the 2nd person (as in 
Latin) is employed : Horn. II. e, 85. 

XIV. lids tis, every one. navd' emcra, every one of the parti- 
culars, Basil, ad Domit. In the same sense, avros etaoros irpu- 
tos eairevbev ap$ai paxus, each, every one, Pans, in Mess. So 
■names 0001, and izas 6 with a participle, Luke x viii, 14. John 
xviii, 37. xix, 12. Also eeaoros tis, and aiiros tis. Tts alone is put 
for etceteras, each, every one:' vvv tis, u> orpaTtuiTai, — eireiyeaQa : 
Plut. in Fab. v. Xen. Cyrop. vi, 1, 6. vi, 4, 20. Abresch. ad 
iEsch. iii. p. 85. Brnnck. ad Soph. Aj. 245. Tts, though construed 
with a verb in the third person, sometimes signifies the person speak- 
ing; as, iToi tis Tpe\perai; Aristopli. Th. 603. — Tts and ti for a 
person, and a thing, of importance: Epict. Ench. c. 18. Act. Ap. 
v, 36. Theocr. xi, 79. In this sense it is opposed to ovtis in Pind. 
Pyth. 8. to ovbeis in Epict. Ench. c. 31. (see Aristoph. Eq. 
158. For obbels in this sense Lucia n uses to fiijbev, Mort. Dial. t. i. p. 
282.) and sometimes fieyas is added torts in this use, Act. Ap. viii, 
9. See Ov. Fast, vi, 27- — Aeyeti' ti, to say something of weight 
or moment ; something to the purpose : Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 12. /Esch. 
Socr. Dial, ii, 7, 23. Soph. GZd. R. 1475. Trach. 865. to which is 
opposed ovbev Xeyeiv, Plato Apol. 17. [which, however, seems some- 
times to mean to be of little weight: Eurip. Suppl. 595. v. Her- 
mann's addenda ad vs. 6l2. iEsch. Agam. 176.* ex Schutzii conj.] 

* This is an imitation of Horn. e3 p.zv Dr. Blomfield conjectures, 0. a. 8e7|tzi 
tis S6pv 6ri£d(Tdci>, &c. II. /3, 382, 383, tt. to. " non se quidquam fuisse ostendet." 
384.— J. S. —J. S. 

* For ovSlv av \Qat irpiv &v, (v. 164.) 



56 Ta—Xu f Hs. L Chap - ni > § *>'• 

— ^ ■Ex etv Tl > '° be rich: JEsch. Dial, ii, ]3J r\ elbiyai, to have 
much knowledge or wisdom: Plato Apol. 6", 7, 10. rl elvai, to be 
of great account or consequence: Id. ib. 33. rl ttohuv, to be well 
employed: Id. Sympos. 

T('s for itoios, Soph. Tracli. 31 1. v. Valck. ad Fragm. Call. p. 23. 
Tts sarcastically substituted for av : rovr els uviav rovirns 'dpyerai 
Ttvi, somebody will suffer for these words, i. e. you, Teucer, (to whom 
Menelaus is speaking,) shall repent of them: Soph. Aj. 1133. v. 
Lucian, Dial. Meretr. 3. p. 285, 6~1.* 



SECTION XII. 

Rule I. Ton-ovrov, thus much only : l rorrovrov vireiwibv, adding only 
this: Demosth. So rocrorbe,* Herodot. ii. p. 111. — Tooovtov is fol- 
lowed by oaov, v. Herodot. vi, 137- oh tovovtov — iretifjevTes, 
ooov 0o/3ou/uerot : not so much through persuasion as fear : Thuc. i, 
88. "JLrepos tooovtos, as much again: erepov togovtov ^poyov, 
Isocr. Paneg. p. 141. 

II. <bdovas, grudge. <f>66vos ovbels expresses readiness or willing- 
ness : d\\' ovbels <pdovos, (in answer to a request,) and willingly 
too; with all my heart : <f>dovos ovbels, <5 IdXiov, (in answer,) ^wil- 
lingly, O Solon : Plato Tim. p. 23. 1. 36. So ovbels (pdopos, w levoi, 
(in answer,) Ceb. Tab. [p. 8. 1. 6. ed. Simps. Ox. 173S.] a fievroi 
Tvyyavk) aKt]Kows, <j>dovos ovbels Xeyeir : Plato Phaed. Also Plato 
Soph. c. 1. 

Xapts. — \uptv ^xeiv," 1 or elberai, is to be thankful, or grateful ; 
with a dative of the person, and a genitive of the thing; as, qw ooi 
Xapiv rovrov: v. Deni. pro Megal. p. 34. I. 14. Xapiv (or x&P L ~ 
ras) airobiborat, (Dem. Ep. ii. p. 111.) or reXe'iv, to make a return 
for a kindness. \apiv airocrrepelv, to be ungrateful: Plato Gorg. p. 
520. I. 26. 6<pei\a) aoi \apiv tovtov, lam indebted, or obliged, to you 
for this, ev x«p tn > as a favor, a^v yapiv,for your sake : see Ch. I. 
R. 11. 

i But 6X etSTt ' in Aristopli. Nub. 723. m In Aristoph. ovo'ep.lav e%w ye r$ 

is, have you got any device yet ? — J.S. piy xapiv, is, I have no enjoyment of 

k Add; Tis, in a very eniphatical life; my life is a burden to me: Lys. 

sense, for any person or thing whatever, 865. and rots Se aniois x&P lv ovSefiiav 

without any exception : irpqorepovs yev4<r- o?5' icrBlcov, is, / have no relish of my 

6ai rtvbs, Demosth. de male ob. leg. p. food: ib. 8C9. — On this word the follow- 

352.1. 8. 3> yr\ ku\ 0eo(\ nal rovro to ing phrases maj be added: eirel ovk &pa 

dffe'jSTjjtta %\o.tt6v Vivos 7jye7o-0€ ; Dem. tis X&P IS ^ ep M-apvaadai, Horn. II. i, 

in Androt. p. 018. 1. 5. v. et adv. Lep. 316. i>irio~xeTO Pond^aeiv fierti fieyd- 

p. 284. 1. 17. T7, why, wherefore: An- A-ns x^P lTOS: ver V readily, very uil- 

stoph. Plut. 252. — J.S. Ungly: Polyb. E. L. 31. vejxeiv xapi"> 

1 Not much unlike this is its sense in to gratify, (with a dative,) Aristoph. Av. 

Plut. Ly sand. &<p9-n irvpbs p\v obh~ev epyov, 384. virovpyelv %apii/, Aristot. Rliet. 

ovb" ix vos too-ovtov, not so much as a res- ii. 9. iroWijv x&P lv K-aTaOe/xevot, 

tige : p. 804. 1. 22. ed. H. St. but I having received it as a great benefit, for 

conjecture, &. it. p. o. epyop ovS' ix vos which they were to be ever ready to make 

ro aoxiTov. — J. S. a grateful return : .Ssch. in Ctes. p. 432. 

* See Ch. V. § ii. R. 7. [cf. ix. 6. I. 12. Reisk.— J.S. 
§ 12-14.] 



Rule i — 8.] Xapis — Xp?j/m. 57 

Xapis, grace; the free undeserved favor of God; in the N. T. 
but exwjMv yapiv in Hebr. xii, 28. should be rendered, let us be 
thankful; let us cherish gratitude. — npos \apiv, for 'ivEKa or 
\api.v : [see Ch. I. R. 11.] npos x^-P lv Aoywy, Soph. Tr. 178. Ant. 
30. v. Brunck. 

III. Xetp. — eiv- ^eipos (or ^cipiTn') ^/o^eo-Sat, or ?7ote7^ ey x^P* 7 ' t x ^ t X r l v t 
to fight hand to hand: whence ?/ ec xe<pos> or (xword&rjv, or lie pvord- 
crews, or Ka7<z ava~aaiv, or poetically ai/7-o<7x € ^of, puyj\, close fight : 
(TvarubrjV yap ovarjs ttjs fidx^s, tcai tQv TrXrjywv en x ei P° s yu'o/nefwv, 
Diod. S. xi, 7. See Demosth. in Panath. t. i. p. 243. Hermann, ad 
Soph. Aj. 27. in Erf. ed. niaj. So es x e 'P ns » Soph. Tr. 44L. 
v. (Ed. C. 975. 

IV. T?/s KoivoXoylas etc x ei P° s yevofitevqs, at once, on the spot: 
Polyb. v. 

V. Xeipwv v6fxos, n blows; fighting; employment of force or the 
sword: v. Wessel. add. ad Diod. S. t. i. p. 277. Musgr. ad Eurip. 
Bacch. 738. vtto x e ~'P a > under power, subjected: Soph. El. 1090. v. 
Thorn. M. p. 896. 

VI. 'Ev y€p aLV > (nearly the same as kv x €t P^ v vofiy,) in battle; 
ivhile engaged ; in the affray : tovs juey kv x e P aiv airkKTeivav, tovs 
be $u)vras eXa/3ov. 

VII. Xetp&v abiKtov (ip£at, or Karap^ai, to be the aggressor,? Xen. 
Cyrop. i. c. 30. to begin hostilities, Maccab. iv, 40. and apxeiv 
abiKwv, (neuter,) HL\. V. H. i, 14. ets x e 'P as ^ va >- is said of an 
amicable meeting, as well as of a hostile encounter. ? 

VIII. Xpeos. — %pewv airoicoircu, (nov<B tabulce,) an iniquitous ex- 
tinction, by an order of government, of all private debts without just 
payment. This was called cretoayQeia also, and xpeuKo-xia. 



SECTION XIIL 

Rules I. II. 111. Xpjj/xa (like irpayfia, Sect. X. R. S.)is said of a 
thing that surpasses in any way : as, avos xP^/^a A«eya, a huge boar: 
Herodot. CI. c. 36\ QavfiaoTov rl xpfjjua napdevov, a most beau- 
tiful virgin: Charit. xP'?/ 1 " iroXXwv vewv, a great multitude of 
ships: Herodot. Er. c. 42. Qelov k-KioKoicwv xPVf* a , divine para- 
gon of bishops! Euseb. Pr. Ev. i. to xP'lM" r ™ v kotvoiv Saov I 
what an immense number of labors! Arisloph. Ran. [1278.] so Nub. 
[1.] See Aristoph. Vesp. 927. [933.] Heliod. iEth. x, 23. Aris- 
toph. Plut. 895. tE1. V. H. ii, 13. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2. kXacpov, kqXov 
ti xP'7/^a fal fxkya, Xen. Cyrop. i. See Cic. ad Att. i, 12. [in Sen. 
p. r. 6.) Seneca Ep. 95. [p. 602. 1. 19- ed. Lips. Antverp. l6l5.j 

_ n Similar to this is the English expres- s Add, els x^ayr) o-vvrjtyav, (yavv sc.) 

sion, club-law. — J. S. close : Eurip. Heracl. 430. (in manibus 

'ICVb xeTpa, offhand; al once: Aristot. terra, Virg. Geor. ii, 45.) but Valck. 

Meteor, ii. c. 9. So sub manum, Sueton. and Heath read us %• 7« ff.~rovs rpo- 

Aug. 49. — J. S. earuras abruv els ras x^P as hapPdvau : 

P Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 635. 1. 27. taking them in hand ; expostulating with 

in Euerg. p. 1141. 1. 8. 1143, 18.— J. S. them inprirate: Poljb. i, 70 J.S. 

Viger. H 



58 Xpvffot— "ilpa. [Chap. hi. j 13. 

Ov. de Pont, ii, 37- Phaedr. iv. fab. 7. Spanh. ad Callim. h. Dian. 
100. Fiscli. ad Well. iii. p. 2SS. seq. 

IV. (V.) Money employed, or put out at interest, was called evepya 
XPVfJ-ura : unemployed, apyit-^. The interest or profit, epyov or Ipya- 
aia. Hence epyacieadai, to be employed in money-making ; to increase 
one's fortune : Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 37. xpt'ifiaatv epyai.eo-dai, De- 
mosth. pro Phorm. p. 605. 1. 32. to turn money, elpyaouTO ev 
ai/To'is, (the five talents,) traded with the same: Matth. xxv, 16'. To 
XP>lf* a , > n l ' ie singular, is said of a particular sum of money : Act. Ap. 
iv, 37. The principal, or capital, was called to up^ulov, to. apyala, 
apyaiov baveiov, apyaiov Ke<paXaiov, and KecpaXatov, ^Eschin. C. Ctes. 
p. 289- 1. 12. and this last is used simply for a sum of money : Act. 
Ap. xxii, 28. The interest, 01 tokol : v. Athen. Deipn. xiii. Surplus, 
or odd money, to irpoabv, or to irpos. 

V. (VI.) "Arifxa xPW ara , the fortune or goods of those who were 
artpot, i. e. excluded from public offices and honors, and devoted 
by the laws to ignominy : xP i lf JiaTct eiritipu, the contrary. Those 
first mentioned might be seized by any one with impunity. 

VI. (VII.) Xpvcros ev vofiiafxaTi, or ws vopiajxa, or eTrtcrrj/jos, coined 
gold; XP' &<fypos, gold bullion; xP va ^ s ev icaraaiceva'is, gold plate ; 
XP- Iv vXy, or ws vXrj, gold in bars or ingots ; xP Vff0S ws Trpofi6o~K.ri{ia, 
golden vessels or plate. The same expressions are used of silver: 
Plut. in Pomp. Philo de Legat. ad Caium, and de Provid. 

VII. (VTII.) Xupa, rank, character or predicament : t(Lv ovk ovtwv 
e^oi/trt x^>pav ' — & X^PQ T0V evebpevovTos aXwvai. 

VIII. (IX.) Tots fxev ottov 'iTV^ev eKacrrov (car«/3e/3\j7ra«, rots be ev 
X<°pq eKdirta TeTb.yp.eva ice'irai : in their proper places ; in order : 
Xen. (Ec. iii, 3. cf. Cyrop. iv, 5, 37- 

IX. (X.) Kara x^P av ^X eil '> or P-eveiv, r or ctTpepelv, to remain un- 
disturbed, unremoved, in statu quo. X<l>pa, dignity, rank, honor, 
station, {locus,) Polyb. i, 43. Jos. Arch, vi, 10, 1. Xwpa, the 
country, in contradistinction to the town, Xen. Hier. x, 5. Polyb. i, 
1, 72. Htrodian vi, 4, 11. cf. Graev. Lect. Hes. c. viii. p. 38. 

X. (XI.) "flpa, proper time, full time, high time. 5 "£lpa, puberty, 
maturity, marriageable age : i']bi] b' eh avbpbs &pav yKovarjs Tfjs Koprjs, 
Plato Crit. p. 113. 1. 32. Marriageable girls are said iv Spa yevea- 
dai, Herodian i, 2, 3. 

The following uses of &pa, signifying time, are to be noticed : — 1. 
Spa tFjs fifxepas, a twelfth part of the natural day : Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 
4. Herodot. ii. p. 153. ed. Wess. — 2. wpa ti]s vvktos, a fourth part 
of the night: Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 4. which is called also ?/ tyvXanri. — 
3. Spa, midnight: Sapph. fragm. ap. Hephaest. * (mktos a/AoXyos, 
Horn. Od. b, 841.) — 4, Spa pr)vbs, one part or division of a month ; 

r 2/C€7rTeoj/, TrSrepov Set rovs /xev &\Xovs ti tot &vBpes ovk ^kovctlv ; &pa 8' i)f ni- 

vSfiovs, ots im roh aSLicovo-i r\jv w6\tv \an lb. 877. Sipa xrot, & fie\rto , Te, tov 

vfiets aveypdipaTe, aKvpovs eluai, rSvSe de Kpoicrov ira?5a waideveiv : then, my worthy, 

Kvpiov $) tovvomt'iov, TovTov (i\v Xvffai, you had better teach Croesus's son: Lu- 

Kara, X& P av Se [tevetv robs ixWovs cian, Vit. Auct. p. 361. D. Salmur. — J. S. 

eav: Demosth. in Timocr. p. 701. 1. 16. * P. 6-5. 1. 11. in the ed. of Dr. Gais- 

— J. S. ford— J. S. 

' "n p a. jSaSff en/ j Aristoph. Eccl. 30. 



Rule 4-10.] THE PRONOUN. 59 

one of the three decades, into which the Greek months were divided: 
Xen. Mem. iv, 7, 4. — 5. wpa eviavrov, one of the four seasons 
of the year, "ilpat in the plural: -javTa oaa wpai tyvovcri, Xen. 
Anab. i. p. 39. ed. Hutch, min. — 6. wpa, by way of eminence, 
the spring: Polyb. ii, 9. and the summer: Galen, de Fac. Alim. ii. 
Cf. Greev. Leer, ad Hes. "Epy. 31. — 7. wpa, proper season, fit time: 
>/ tov anupov tipa, Xen. O2o. xvii, 1. Cf. Trill. Obs. iv, 28." 



CHAPTER IV. 

ON THE PRONOUN. 

Rule I. Periods are elegaully terminated by the pronouns eyw, 
ijfiirepos, vjjerepos, ovros. V. Ceb. Tab. [p. 40. 1. 2. ed. Simps.]" 
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 227- 1- 6.] lb. [p. 228. 1. 12.] lb. [p. 260. I. 6.] 
[V. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 245. I. 29. Aristoph. Av. l627<] — 2v 
terminates in St. John iv, 19. cf. viii, 48. 

II. In the Greek, as in some other languages, the datives of pri- 
mitive pronouns are sometimes elegantly or emphatically redundant : 
[ioi, v aoi, w iijjuy, Soph. Aj. 2l6. vffiv, Soph. GEd. R. 1401. — Qui 
Mi hi, ubi ad uxores ventum est, turn [demum] fiunt senes : Ter. 
Phorm. v, 8, 21. 

III. A possessive pronoun sometimes agrees with a substantive 
signifying something with regard to which the personal pronoun im- 
plied in the possessive is passive or the object, not an agent or source; 
as, evvoia. yap kpw rrj ay, for I shall say it out of my good-will 
towards you: Plato Gorg. p. 486. I. 5. abs xodos, my longing 
for you : Horn. Od. A, [201.] Trpovoiq rrj arj, through forecast for 
your welfare; out of precaution used on your behalf ': Eurip. Andr. 
660. e/ui] bwpea, a gift bestowed on me: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 32. 

IV. A possessive is transferred from its proper substantive to 
another: -by e/u.by wbiywy irovov, my pain of labors, for kp&v, the 
pain of my labors: Eutip. Plioen. 

V. Words are often put in apposilion or in concord with the geni- 
tive of a personal pronoun implied in a preceding possessive, or to 
which personal genitive that possessive is equivalent in signification ; 
as, rap hiapiracovai tov KUKobai fiovos. So Aristoph. Plut. 33/ 

VI. Avrbs is sometimes employed as a reciprocal pronoun : cara- 
(f>vyi)i> airy — TTopHoiro, he might provide a refuge for himself: 

1 Add: avatraveadat. Kad' & pay, early, 6 /jl^j wpcuvt Ari/JLucrTpaTos, Aristoph. Lys. 

betimes: Polyb. i, 45. t\ks iroWrjs 391.— J. S. 

&pas, late, in the evening; Polyb. v, 8. ™ "E<p7jv iydi closes sentences in almost 

ovtws iv 8>pa, so early in the morning: every page of Cebes. — J. S. 

Aristoph. Eccl. 395. is ras wpas, for v Aristoph. Eys. 707. Nub. 116. 

ever: Aristoph. Ran. 380. Sipa, age. Acharn. 458. — J. S. 

See Plut. Alcib. p. 350. 1. 1. H. Steph. V Aristoph. Nub. 206. Eccl. 136. Ran. 

Ages. p. 1126. 1. 19. Mr] upaiaiv 'ikoito, 1119. — J. S. 

perdition take him! Lucian, Dial. Me- x "H/xeTepoy ay efrj iro.vely ical lao-Qai 

retr. p. 734. D. Salm. fx\\ tbpas 'IkoictO', ra roiavra, t5>v Kcd is To5e avra. irpo- 

Aristoph. Lys. 1037. rivxovro /u?j tbpav ayay6vT(ov : Lucian, Jup. Tr. p. 206. 

QefjLi<TTOK\£ovs yeviadai, Plut. Themist. D. ed. Salm. — J. S. 
p. 223. 1. 6. and elliptically., as an epithet: 



60 THE PRONOUN. [Chap. ir. 

Euseb. Pracp. Ev. 1. vi. for eavry. And on the other hand, ov, o<, e, 
eavrov, are often not reciprocal ; as, eld' ws bnovv i^bi' eavry iroielr, — 
for avrq) : Demosth. in And rot. 

VII. 'ILavruv in the first person, for ifiavrov, Isocr. in Busir. Tn 
the second person : ovrio iratheveu rovs eavrijs <f>l\ovs, thus thou in- 
structest thy friends: Xen. Mem. ii.y Avrfjv in the second person, 
St. Luke xiii, 34. Suas for nostras is in Ov. Ep. v. 4(5. See Fisch. 
ad Well. p. 172. In the phrase avrbs k<xC? uvrbv, or auras rrpbs avrbv, 
the pronoun is used without respect to person. Avrt) tt/ws abrrjv, in 
the first person, alone, by myself: Soph. El. 281. [285.] In the 
third person, avrrj ca0' avrt)v el\iKpivi)s t] biavoia, the under- 
standing free and disengaged from external objects: Plato Phaed. 
c. 10. cf. c. 12. 14. &c. 

VIII. Avrbs encMTTos is the same as eicaoros alone : Herodot. vii, 19. 
viii, 124. Demosth. rrepl avfxuop. and avroeicaoros has the same mean- 
ing ; but avQeKaaros(i\\i. 6 avrbs trapa or ev eKaarot,) signifies, austere, 
rigid, severe, rigorous, strict : avdeKaarbv riva ko\ ttikoov, Dion. 
Halic. ad Pomp, (speaking of Thucydides.) 

IX. 'O avrbs [Attic ; and in epic poetry even without the article : 
v. Scha?f. ad Greg. Cor. p. 303.] the same: Kara rbv avrbv rovrot 
rponov ev 7re7rot/j*cdra rffv iruXw, Lucian, Tyr. a\a\puv eoriv ardpottro) 
ravra Travyeiv rois atypovevrarois rwv dqplwv, Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 5. s 
v. Em. and Drakenb. ad Sil. xv, 400. and Cort. ad Sail. Cat. c. 
80. rraaa yvvi) — ?/ avrt) kanv, all women are the same: Plut. Conj. 
Prase, p. 144. elvai /.it) rtjv avrijv rals rv%ov<rais yvvai£iv, not to 
he the same as ordinary women : ib. airb rijs avrfjs mreiadai, from 
the same table : Synes. Hence Kara ravra, after the manner of, 
like ; with a dative : KaXovirai — Kara ravra "E,\\t)<tiv, Paus. in Ach. 
p. 410. ytiXa viveiv Kara ravra ro'is fipetyecnv, Lucian, Alex. p. 530. 
And ro avrb, by itself, so, in the same manner, following KaBairep in a 
simile: Plut. Apophth. Avrbs, for the soul of a person, in contra- 
distinction to his body; (to the e'ibwXoi' in the infernal regions; Horn. 
Od. X, 602.) — for the body, opposed to the soul, Horn. II. a, 4. — 
for a person, opposed to his possessions, Od. r, 329- 332. — or to 
others present, II. 6, 4. r, 302. — or for something as distinguished 
from what surrounds or is near it, Od. y, 171. — or for the whole 
as distinguished from its parts, II. n> 474. — of a person as acting 
without cooperation, II. 6, J 5. p, 48. rtjv avrbs tyiXeeatcev, with 
whom he was in love, and whom he ivished to love exclusively, without 
any rival: II. 1, 449. Avrbs, emphatically, for even, very, (in the 3rd 
sense in Dr. Johnson's dictionary ;) Iliad i, 450. /x, 429. *'> 614. — 



^ C. 1. § 30. where I find (ravrTjs.— repeated, and governing the accusat. of a 

J. S. relative : 4iroiT]aev 'hi' '6irep Ka\ 6 fia<ri\evs 

z So ziroi-nffev hv ravrb r$ |8a(n\e? : iiroir}<rev : for the verb is never the sub- 

he would have done the same as the king stantive verb, but aiways one involving 

of Persia did: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. both a copula and a predicate: where it 

p. 383. 1. 16. Reisk'. It is to be observed is otherwise, there is no idiomatical pecu- 

that in this idiom the dative is equivalent liarity in the phrase. See Aristoplu 

to the nominative of the same noun or Plut. 253. — J. S. 
pronoun agreeing with the same verb 



Rule 7— 10.] THE PRONOUN. 6\ 

or instantly : avSpovaev — abrfj avv (popmyyt, he started up imme- 
diately , just as he was, with his harp in his hand: II. t, 195. It 
indicates love, tender feeling, and affection, Od. £, 141. Airos, 
voluntarily, spontaneously : II. p, 251. a Alone: 11 II. v, 729- Hence 
avTot kirpeu," we are alone, and therefore may speak our minds freely : 
v. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 250. Heusd. Spec. crit. in Plat. p. 30. 
Heindorf. ad Plat. Parm. p. 220. Hence it signifies apart or 
familiarly: Od. tj, 237. r, 104. y, 19. 327. 1, 33 1.7,288. 0, 396. It is 
added to a name for the sake of explication : H. Cer. 1. Sometimes, 
on the contrary, the name is added to the pronoun for the same pur- 
pose : II. a, 143. It is used for the sake of contradistinction, like 
hie and ille : II. y, 282. ^Eschyl. Prom. 440. v. Heindorf. ad 
Plat. Lys. p. 4. and it is so used in all persons, and without the 
addition of a primitive or personal pronoun : v. II. v, 252. 448. 
Od. /3, 374. It is sometimes a reciprocal, II. 1, 342. Od. k, 27- 
and is added to a personal pronoun, where there is a reciprocal 
sense, either in composition, as in Soph. [GEd. R. 1080.] or sepa- 
rately, as always in Homer. It is sometimes a relative pronoun, 
him, her, it: in this use it has less emphasis, and the nominative 
is never employed. It signifies the same ; d in which sense the 
article is always joined to it by Attic writers, but not by epic. v. 
Schaef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 303. 'Tiro to avro is, about the same time: 
so Kara to aii-6, at the same time. Avto fxovov, merely, nothing else 
but : v. Valck. With an ellipsis of avv it answers to our English 
phrase and all: noXefiiojv 7rX?j0os ahrols ouXois e\aj3ev, arms and all ; 
avTo'is avbpaai : — avTW Ttp tVjrw KaT€novTiaQr]. e 

Avrws (so it is always to be written in Homer) signifies, — I. just 
so; in the same manner; the same: Soph. OZd. R. 951. Hence 
£>oavT0)s (<is V av-ws in Homer,) and wb' avrws, Soph. Tr. 1048. — 
2. with reference to a past state, still: II. a, 338. with reference 
to a present state, just as I am, just as you are, &c. II. e, 255. II. 
[a-,] 198. Hence — 3. rat au-ws, even so, i. e. nevertheless : II. 1, 598. 
and \p, 620. (where it may be rendered, gratis, gratuitously.) 
Hence — 4. merely ; nothing else but: Od. v, 379. and with a verb, 
ir, 313. — 5. without reason, rashly, at random: 11. £, 55. p, 143/ 
Od. b, 665. /u, 284. — 6. in vain; to no purpose : II. o, 128. 513. 
ir, 117. a, 584. 

X. (XII.) Avtos enters often, and sometimes elegantly, into com- 
position with other words ; as, avreiruyyeXTos, self-invited ; one ivho 
does anything of his own accord, without bidding: Demosth. pro 

a So avrSdev, of his own accord ; oflre d See Avistoph. Pint. 253. and Br. rav- 

ai>T6dev Biovoeiro irapaXafiflciveiv irao' rb tovto, the very same thing : Aristoph. 

ifiov rijv vaxv, out, eVeiSij — ■hvay KacrOr} Pint. 153. — J. S. 

iirl t^v va.vv airUvai, ehd&v 7)Qi\t)ffi fiot e Add, avrov, hue, hither: Aristoph. 

SiaSe^aaBai am-hv : Demosth. adv. Polycl. A v. 663. v. Dindorf. e'£ cu/ttjs, imme- 

p. 1215. 1. 28. Reisk. So Plut. in Arat. diately : Tlieogn. 231. and in one word 

p. 18S7. 1. 20. ed. H. St.— J. S. e|auT?)s, Polyb. xiii, 5. avrb tovto. See 

* Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 123. 1. 16. Toup. ad Longin. Fragm. v. — J. S. 

Polyb. vi, 48. Theocr. Id. y, 19 J. S. / Where it may be rendered unde- 

c See Aristoph. Ach. 504. Thesm. 472. servedly.—J. S. 
— J. S. 



62 THE PRONOUN. [Chap. iv. 

Cor. [p. 247. 1. 24. Rcisk.] — (abroK^Xevaros, Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 475.) vavs avTavbpos Karen ovrioOr), together ivith her crew; 
vhtas ai/ravbpovs, with their inhabitants : Plul. irupaXX. 'E\X. ical 
'PwjU. p. 306. 'liriros uvrtxpoprus K(iTeKpr}[Avicr6r), load and all; ckw- 
-KtjKarovv Kvirapiaoois avToicXubrus tea) ahrOKVfiOts, for oars they used 
cypresses with their branches and leaves on: Lucian, Ver. H. i. [p. 
741. E. ed. Salmur.] avre^ovo-ios, one's own master ; to avre^ovmoy, 
uncontrolled liberty or power ; avroKetyaXos, a primate ; uvti)koos, an 
ear-witness; avTonrTjs, an eye-witness, Plut. I. c. p. 310. whence 
avroxl/la, and avroipei: avr6fioXos,£ a deserter to the enemy, or one 
who comes spontaneously ; avrovofins, avroreXrjs, avrobiKos, indepen- 
dent ; avdobios, fresh from a journey; avrvKXriros, self-invited; 
avrobibcLKTos, self-taught ; abrovpyds, one who works with his own 
hands, Palaeph. Fab. 3. h avro^eip, one who executes anything with 
his own hands, Aristoph. Av. 1135. especially (in which sense avro- 
davaros also) homicide: Soph. El. 958. 1022. Hence avrayeip (as 
well as avTotyovos, avrodavaros, avroKrovos) signifies a self-murderer ; 
whence the adverb avro-^eipi. avToirpoawTrns, one who does any thing 
in person; avrayyeXos, one who brings intelligence himself: v. 
Niceph. Greg. § 62. Ammon. p. 2. and Valck. avderrrjs or avro- 
evrvs, the same as avro^eip, Soph. 02d. ft. 106. avToxpn^a, adv. in 
reality, indeed; avTo^ma btaicovos, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 36'0. 
abrofioet, at the first assault, with the mere shout of onset: Thuc. 
ii, c. 81. aiiTodev, see on THE ADVERB, avdrjfiepov, (poetically 
avTfjixap,) on the very same day, the selfsame day ; [avrijs &pas, in- 
stantly /forthwith : Plut. Inst. Lac. 34. Herm.] avreperrjs, one who 
rows on occasion, although rowing is not his proper and regular 
function: Thuc. iii, c. 18. [i. c. 10. vi. c. 91.] avruavOpwiros, the 
specific essence, or abstract idea, of man: Plato, v. Aristot. Eth. i. 
c. 6. avroroavTo, ipsum illud ipsum :' Plato Alcib. i. So with proper 
names : AvOofirjpos, a very Homer ; Avrofiopias, a very Boreas, 
another Boreas : Lucian, Timon. * 



B One who come b of himself how tn e SiKaioaivrj, Chrys. iii. p. 611. 1. 19. 

enemy, and is not brought against his avTodu!-, Aristoph. Pac. C07. avroada- 

will, as a prisoner of war. — J. S. vourla, Chrys. iv. p. 235. 1. 35. avro- 

h Eurip. Or. 910. Pors.— J. S. fa}), Chrys. ii. p. 579. 1. 1. avroda- 

1 That which is itself supremely or ktos, Plut. Moral. § 434. A. avroQripiot/, 

really, by way of eminence, p. 225. 1. 3. Chrys. iii. p. 16. 1. 39. avroKeAevoTcos, 

ed. Basil, prim. — J. S. Chrys. v. p. 995. 1. 6. avToKiQivos, Chrys. 

3 The following also will contribute to i. p. 30. I. 42. avro\6yos, Orig. c. Cels. 

show into what a variety of compounds p. 79. 1. 32. avrofi,aKapi6Tns, Clirys. iv. 

avrbs enters. The passages and interpre- p. 325. 1. 31. avronavia, Chiys. i. p. 61. 

tations I have given in the new edition of 1. 19. avTop-arl, Chrys. v. p. 846. I. 31. 

H. Stephens' Thesaurus. avrayperos, aui-o^Tcop, Simonides. avroveKpbs, Chrys. 

Simonides. avroaXrideia, Chrysost. t. ii. vii. p. 93. I. 22. avToir^y^, Chrys. ii. p. 

p. 587. 1. 15. Sir H. Saville's edition 608. 1. 14. avrSnoios, Soph. (Ed. C. 

Orig. c. Cels. p. 135. 1. 55. Cantab. 1058. 698. avTOiriicpia, Chrys. iii. p. 840. 1. 32. 

avTo$aai\evs, Clirys. iii. p. 30. 1. 36. avropi^a, Chrys. ii. p. 608. 1. 14. avro- 

avToaMpas, Chrys. t. v. p. 564. 1. 26. <rb.p%, Chrys. viii. p. 9. 1. 23. avToaiSapos, 

avToyeevva, Chrys. ii. p. 457. 1. 26. Eurip. Hel. 361. avTOffofyia, Chrys. vi. 

afadSopos, Plut. Moral. \ 694. B. avro- p. 97. 1. 26. avroTpayiKoirWriKos, De- 



Rule 11, 12.] THE PRONOUN. 63 

Avrds is sometimes substituted for t>s, when a repetition of Ss in a 
case different from its preceding one would be required by regular 
construction: ov bi) eiriTpexpojjiev wv (jxxfxev ta'ibeadai, icai belv avrovs 
avbpas ayadovs yeveaOai, yvvaiica /jnfieladai, Plato de Rep. iii. p. 395. 
1. 34. v. S. John xv, 5. Revel, ii, 18. xvii, 2. 1 Cor. viii, 6. 
Avtos occurs in various forms of tautology : see Mattli. viii, 23. 
Luke xix, 26. Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 51. cf. Matth. iv, l6. viii, 5. ix, 
27. v, 40. John xv, 2. xviii, 11. Revel, vii, 9. Act. Ap. vii, 21. 
v. Jens, ad Lucian. t. i. p. 296. So Cic. pro 1. Manil. c. xiv. [§ 40.] 
OI is in like manner superfluous in Paus. Phoc. p. 660. and atyiai 
in Paus. Cor. p. 90. Avrds is defective, when its antecedent noun is 
referred to two verbs requiring different cases. See Isocr. Paneg. 
p. 98/ 

XI. After tovto, this, the conjunction on, that, is very frequently 
placed; as, olbe tovto kclXws etcelvos, on, &c. he very well k?iows 
this, that, &c. Demosth. Phil. i. ovk ayvow tov6\ on, Demosth. 
Ol. 1. Sometimes on precedes tovto, as in Aristoph. Av. 1176. 
and sometimes on is the last word of the sentence : ov iravaofiai, 
tovt "nrb v Sri, lb. 1408. Sometimes, tovto being last in collocation, 
the article to, with some particle, precedes on, or ws: as, to be, 
uts KXeofavTos — o-ofos eyevero, — tovto r\bri iJKovcras : iEschin. Dial, 
de Virt. v. Nepos in Alcib. c. 6. Virg. Eel* iii, 35. Cic. CatiL ii, 
c. 8. 

XII. (XIV.) Ovtos is sometimes added, when the construction 
would be complete without it, for the sake of explication (especially 
after digression); as, 'AptaTobrj/jif Tetceiv r?)v yvvaiKa, rrj ovofxa 

elvai 'Apyeirjv, * Tavrrjv be reiceiv bibvfia : Herodot. Er. c. 52. 

v. Ter. Heaut. [i, 1, 82.] Cic. pro Mil. c. 26. [Cn. Pompeium, 
— hunc, &c. § 70.] — or for the sake of emphasis, as in Demosth. pro 
Cor. [p. 268. 1. 15. Reisk.] (j>a/j.evoi tov varraTOv alet airoyey6/j,evov 
rwv fiacriXewv, tovtov b>] yeveadai apiOTOv '. Herodot. Er. c. 58. 
v. Lucian, Macrob. p. 828. For the sake of emphasis it is repeated 
in St. James i, 25. Instead of an addition of ovtos, there is some- 
times a repetition of a noun ; as of a proper name in Paus. Lac. 
p. 162. 1. 27. and of two proper names in MX. V. H. viii. c. 9. The 
case of ovtos, when thus added, is not always the same as that of the 
antecedent word to which it refers; as, ras be aXXas, — ravrais — 
•nponBeaai ayuiva : Paus. ill Lac. p. 185. 1. 10. 

Ovtos is defective after several propositions followed by be ; as, 
Kal aXXa noXXa teal 7ravro7a eyevero ryai fxayrfoi, ev be bf] Kal, Sic. 
understood. rovreoiai, Herodot. Terps. c. 95. ava iraaav fiev dXXrjv 
'EXXaba, ev be (ravrrj) kol wept 'lojvirjv, Herodot. Er. c. 86. The 
pronoun is expressed after ev be in Lucian : ev be bri rovrois (piXoao- 
<j>ovs Tivas, de Parasit. See also Lucian, t. i. p. 438. 1. 63. ed. 
Amst. 



raostli. pro Cor. p. 307. 1. 25. avro(p6v- Chr. itceivos avr6s ; PI. avrSraros. An- 

rr)S, Soph. El. 272. avroxohri, Chrys. iii. stoph. Plut. 83. aMrara, Cic. Att. 1. 6. 

p. 840. 1. 32.— J. S. ep. 9.— J. S. 
* Add, that aMs has a superlative : 



64 THE PRONOUN. [Chap. iv. 

A pronoun is understood after ku\ npos in Eutrop. Metaphr. v. 
c. 6. after avv be in Theogn. 724. and after avv re in Orph. Hymn. 
[Ivv is used adverbially with be or re : see Nic. Ther. 628. 650. 843. 
853. 86.9- 881.] So xwpis be, for \u)pis be rovruiv. 

XIII. (XV.) Pronouns, and more especially ovros, are now and 
then found hi irregular positions, in which they occasion some degree 
of obscurity; as, einyeipi]reov bfjQv e^eXeadai r>)v biafioXi)v, fjv 
v/j.els ev ttoXXu) \povo) ^X ere ' Tuvryv ev ovrwal oX'iyo) xP"' 'V • P'^to 
Apol. S. for eTrifc vfi. ev ovr. 6\. yj>- Tavr-qv e%. r. b. i)v b[A. ev -k. yp' 
e^ere/ In Act. Ap. i, 22. rovrojv is removed to the distance of two 
verses from rwv avveXQovrwv avbpwv in v. 21. to which it refers. See 
Nepos in Pelop. c. 2. 

XIV. (XVI.) Kcd ravra /xev bri ravra is equivalent to, so much for 
this, at the conclusion of a subject, or head of discourse ; but ml 
ravra alone is used for aggravation or exaggeration ; and that too; 
and that:" 1 av be poi botcels ov irpooeyeiv rov vovv rovrois, Kal ravTa 
ao<p6s u>y : but you seem to me to pay no attention to these things ; 
and that too although you are wise: Plato Gorg. p. 508. See Demosth. 
contr. Phorm. [p. 922. 1. 6. ed. Reisk.] Id. Epist. iii. [p. 1485. 1. 18. 
R.] Id. pro Phorm. [p. 958. 1. 14. R.] v. Hoogev. Praef. ad Doctr. 
Partic. p. 9." Kal ravra is found, although rarely, at the end of a 
sentence : YIepiicXeovs be ovk efeiaw, redvTjKoros kuI ravra '. but you did 
not spare Pericles, and that too after his death: Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 504. In this kind of phrase ovros is not always put in the neuter 
plural : it has sometimes the gender, number, and case of a preceding 
noun to which it is to be referred : yvvaaeds, Kal ravrrjs vecpas, 
Heliodor. iEth. c. 1. elvai kXevQepotai J) bovXoiai, Kal rovroiai us 
bpanerrjai: Herodot. Er. c. 11. fiaaiXea rbv a^tyfievov emarafxevos, 
Kal rovrov abeXa\ov iralba rov kfxov : Heliodor. iEth. x. c. 23. See 
also Herodot. CI. c. 147. 

Tovro with verbs of naming is of the same import as so: rovro 
yap eicaXelro, for so he was called: Lucian, Ver. H. i.° So Lucian 
in Conv. [p. 856. D. ed. Salmur.] 'ApKrroreXrjs ras vvv 'UpaKXeiovs 
arijXas KaXov/uevas, npivrj KXrjdijv ai rovro, (prjal Rpiapeu KaXeladat. 
avras : Ml. V. H. V. c. 3. 

When ovros is employed to represent the subject of a proposition, 
it is put in the neuter, although the predicate be a substantive of a 
different gender; as, rovr eariv ari/xla, Epict. c. 31. This practice 
is different from that of elegant Latin authors with regard to their 

1 P. 7. 1. 42. ed. Basil, prim. Almost bor? Thomson, Spring, 367.— J. S. 

every one must be sensible, I think, of B See Aristoph. Ecc!. 401. Xen. Anab. 

the superior energy of the arrangement i, 4, 12. Mem. ii, 3, 1. Demosth. de 

chosen by Plato.— J. S. Reb. Cherrh. p. 103. 1. 16. R. In Phil. 

m Ye defraud; AXDTHATyourbrethren: iii. p. 114. 1. 3. p. 117. 1. 29. de Rhod. 

1 Cor. vi, 8. The consideration of— so libert. p. 197. 1. 12. Tribuno plebis 

small a standing force on our own side, (jucestor non paruisli, cui tuus pejesek- 

and that too in a country destitute of tim collega pareret : Cic. ad Div. xv, 21. 

forts a7id strong places, &c. Addison on —J. S. 

the War. And the plain ox, shall he ° XaXeiraivovres t<£ ~2Kiv9apcp, {rovro 

bleed, — and that, perhaps, To swell the yap inaAuro) : p. 738. E. ed. Salmur. 

riot of tk' autumnal feast Won by his la- —J. S. 



Rule 13, 14.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. 65 

pronouns in such cases ; yet there are exceptions : see Virg. Mn. iii, 
173. Ovid, Her. Ep. ii, 56. iii, 8. Curt. ix. c. 10. § 24. 

Tovro sometimes involves the meaning of several preceding words; 
as in Plato de Rep. iv, 421/ 

Ovtos for 6 belra ; an indefinite person : Kal av, cat ovros, redp)j- 
leaBe, Antonin. els ecivr. iv. c. 6. 

Tovrois answering to oh, and rw to rovru : Demosth. pro Cor. 
[p. 266.1 12. R. and p. 26"S. 1. 15.]* 



CHAPTER V. 
SECTION I. — On the verb, with respect to kind 

OR FORM. 

Rule I. Verbs, having an active form, have sometimes a passive 
[or reciprocal] signification ; as, a\iaicu>, {to take, to capture, to 
convict, to condemn,) chiefly in its preterperf. eaXwfea, and 2 aor. 
i}\u>v, or eaXwv, Att. v. Arrian i, 1/ v. Hindenb. ad Xen. Mem. ii, 
5, 5. Abresch. ad iEschyl. I. i. p. S6. Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 
1041. Or. 296. et Soph. CSd. C. 74. 

II. 'AvaKafjnrreiv, to be reflected: tci be els ciXXr]Xa avaKufXTrrei, 
Aristot. Metaph. i. 

III. 'AvriXapfiaveiv, to be restored to health, strength, &c. Theophr. 
v.* 

IV. 'A»ra7ro£/5wjUt for cipranobibofiai.' 

V. 'ATraWarreiv, to be freed, to be discharged: tccifxpei re noXkaius, 
xal aTraWc'iTTei pyov, and come off more easily : Aristot. Probl. 
§ 5. v. Bud. p. 318. Faesii OScon. Hipp, in IncaXXaTreiv. 

A^w and avt,ai>u> are sometimes intransitive: ifv^riaev \\ nXdrrj, 

P 'Apybs 5e Kal a/j-eAris yevfiaerai fJ.a\- iEsch. in Tim. p. 107. 1. 9. ed\ca virb 

Kov avrbsavrov; (irAovrrioas x vT pebs, sc.) KrjarZv, /Esch. de Fals. Leg. p. 197. 1. 1. 

IIo\u ye. Ovkuvv Kaniwv x VT P^ s 7'T^- I" a passive form as well as sense : Ari- 

rai ; Kal rovro, e<pri, iro\v. p. 401. 1. 6. stoph. Vesp. 893. yEscli. c. Ctes. p. G25. 

ed. Bas. prim.— J. S. 1. 3.— J. S. 

9 Add ; ovk, S> 'yaOol, ravr ecrrl 7rw * 'AvaAa/ifidveiv, to be renewed : Plut. 

ravry: matters are not yet in that state, Mor. t. ii. p. 961. 1. 9. Wyttenb. in 8vo. 

are not arrived at that : Aristoph. Eq. irpoaaveiA-ncpvlas ^S?j rrjs Swd/xeus, the 

843. els rovro, to such a pitch or degree ; army hating now recovered from its fa- 

with a gen. els rovr' eh^AuQe rod vo- tigues and sufferings: Polyb. iii, GO. — 

juijew/ v.iitw Kal Xeyeiv Kal ypd<peiv e^eivai J- S. 

irav '6,ti av BovA-nrat, &are, &c. De- ' The following passage is not liable to 
moslh. in Androt. p. 598. J. 14. R. the objection, groundless as it is, of Hoo- 
Tavra is an answer to a command, and geveen to Viger's from Plato : el to Kara- 
expresses obedience: tkiJt', 3> Secnrod^ Sapddveiv fxlv ei'/j, to 5 1 aveyelpeoQai fiij av- 
Aristoph. Pac. 275. So Vesp. 142. 851. TcnroStSo i-n, yiyvSy.evov Ik rov KaOevSov- 
The full phrase is ravra BpSi : crirevo'e ros, &c. were not opposed to it as correla- 
rax*us, Isic. ravra dpu. Aristoph. Eq. the : Plato Phaed. p. 28. I. 29. ed. Bas. 
495. — J. S. prim. Add, el yap /at] ael avrmroSiSoiri 

r XlapayeynpaK&s, f) irapavolas eaAaiKc&s : Ta erepa rols erepots yiyv.6jj.eva, wcrirepel 

convicted 0/ imbecility; /Esch. c. Ctt'S. kvkAoi nepuovra, aAAa eiideld ris ei'77 tj 

p. C42. 1. 10. R. ahoivai ^evdo/w.prvpiuiv, yevecns, &c. Id. ib. p. 72. 1. 10. — J. S. 



Viger. 



66 VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. § i. 

Clem. Alex. Adm. ad Gent. p. 30. rjvlrjrrev u Xads, Act. Ap. vii, 
17. 6 \oyos tov 6eov tf-v^ave, Act. Ap. vi, 7. v. Luke ii, 40. 

BnXXw also and some of its compounds are used intransitively or 
as reflexive: fiaXX' es KopaKas, go to the devil. u 

EiffjGuUu, to run in, to burst in, to make an irruption, to in- 
vade: bin be rTjS QeawptOTibos 'A^ep^. 7rora/jos peoov eafiaXXet es 
avryi', Tbuc. i, 46. els tj)i — Aai:e.bai/joriu)v y^wpav elaefiaXov, Di- 
narch. c. Demoslh. p. 101. So e,u/3a\Xw, Air. Exp. Alex, i, 1.* 
So enbiSomi, to discharge itself, to disembogue, v. 11. ■KOTafius TXaii- 
kos eKbibwaiv es daXuaaav, Pans, in Acli. p. 431. s " 

'ETTibiborai, to make a progress, to advance: Plato. Cratyl. p. 410. 
in fin. Isocrat. Paneg. in fin. [p. 191. 1. 8. ed. Battie, Cantab. 172.9.] 
Demosth. Phil. ii. p. 49- 1. 45. Plato Hipp. M. p. 283. 1. 43. Hero- 
dian iii, 13. Isocr. ad Demonic, p. 8. Nicocl. p. 64. emblborat, 
to be recruited by food : Hippocr. Aph. ii, 31. 32. speaking of the 
body. eiribibioKev ev rrj nuXet to dfxoXoyelr irorr)povs elrai : it has 
become very common: Aristot. Rliet. i, 15. p. 76. 01 e7n§e§a//cores 
avro'is, overweening, arrogant persons, swollen with pride: Schol. 
Aristopii. Nub. 36 1 . [p. 95. I. 20. Bekker's ed. (for Priestley 1826.)] 

So the simple verb : 6 5' fjbovjj bovs, but he, having resigned him- 
self to pleasure ; having indulged his desires : Eurip. Phcen. p. 112. 
[v. 21.] 

VI. The 2 aor. and preterperf. of 'la-r^m, and especially of its 
compounds, have a passive sense ; as, Kara <rr j/va t els ap^v, to be 
placed in office, in authority or command : Isocr. for KaraoTaOrjvai. 
And Ka6eaTr,Ke, it is established: KaBearrjKe rdyafla — elvai, are ac- 
customed to be, usually are: Tliuc. iii. c. 43.* v. Polyb. v. p. 378. 
Demosth. 01. i, 14. ii, 0. iii, 7. Ka0/e?u> is very frequently used 
as a verb neuter ; and KafnrTu, Rom. xiv, 11.^ and kXIvu), Luke ix, 12. 
eKtcXivw, 1 Petr. iii, U. 2 Aeinu) has sometimes a passive sense, 
especially in a grammatical use: Xeinei >> els, the preposition els is 
understood: Schol. Aristoph. ad Nub. 1083. [1070. p. 121. of Bek- 
ker's ed. printed for Priestley, 1826.] ra errojueva Xeivet, what fol- 
lowed is lost. Aeiirei alone in the margin of a book signifies that 
there is a chasm or vacuity from part having been lost or destroyed. 

™ 'Es nSpttKas alone, pest ! the deuce! voring him, being softened in his favor ; 

Aristoph. Vesp. 852. equivalent to to 8el- Plut. Ag. et Cleom. p. 1473. H. St. 

va, says Brunck. (see note on chap. 1. rrjs &pas irapafjih' ovens, on the arrival 

§ xviii.) v. Aristoph. Acli. 864. — BctAAco of spring : Polyb. E. L. 35. — J. S. 
with a middle signification : (paia /3uhe?v x It occurs as a verb neuter in Ari- 

ijxdria, to put on mourning : Polyb. E. L. stoph. also : orav pkv 7) Aipvn Karao-Tr}, 

93. — J. S. Xa/Apdvovo-ip ovSev : when the lake is still 

v Add, pdxo/.iai p,6vos a.vTi/3el3A7]Kcbs, or undisturbed, they catch nothing; Eq. 

J ivill fight opposing myself single-handed : 865. — J. S. 

Aristoph. Eq. 767. irapaPdAA eiv els v V. Soph. CE<1. C. 86. avoxapirTeiv , 

ir6\iv,to goto: Polyb. xii, 3. irape^a- to walk backwards and forwards : Diog. 

Ae KpdvTopi, he became Cravtor's disciple: Laert. in Aristot. p. 165. 3. 19. in Zenon. 

Diog. Laert. in Arcesil. irapaPaAelv p. 239. 1. 31. ed. H. St. form, minim. — 

XlAdrcavi, Id. in Aristot. 7rape'/3c.Ae 2a>- J. S. 

Kpd.Tti, Id. in Antisth. 7rpo{idAAe iv, to 2 Add airoKAiveiv , Soph. (Ed. R. 1192. 

be before in a march, Polyb. iii, 51. — J. S. — J. S. 

■" Add , dlov tvdib'ovs to> "AytBi, fa- 



Rule 6 — 12.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. 67 

'ATroXeiTrto is a verb neut. in Isocr. ad Dem. p. 11. and eXXe/n-w in 
Epict. Ench. c. 12. and with a gen. e\Xe<7rw eman'j/jijs, J want, or 
am deficient in, knowledge : Plato Theag." 

VII. Me-aflciXXetv, to be changed: peteflaXev (vbwp) els aepos 
Ibeav, Plato Tim. p. 60. v. Jos. Ant. Jud. i. c. 11. § 4. jueva- 
j3aXXeu> irpos, Pliilo de Leg. ad Caium. But fxerafiaXXeadat is 
commonly the same as avTo/jo\e~tv : v. Plut. in Alex. 

VIII. TlapaKiveiv, to move indecorously : Aristoph. Ran.* to be mad : 
iroXXoi [lev vtto TrapuKetc ivrjKor b)V buKpdelpot'Tai, for TrapaiceKLvrjfxe- 
vwv, Xen. Mem. iv.* Ylapoiveiv, to be mad-drunk. JlKrjQbvw 
occurs in a passive sense: iroTn/iol irXriQ vvovres, swollen, full: 
Plut.<* And afievvvjii in the preterp. e<jfii]Ka, e and the second aorist 
errfiijv in Horn. II. 1, 467. 

IX. Xrpe^»w is used intransitively, especially in the first aorist: Act. 
Ap. vii, 42. and the compound ewaiaarpecpeiv/ to return, to double, 
to be rallied ; and vTroorpetpeti', the same. 'Yiroarpecpeiv is also, in a 
rhetorical sense, to double, as it were, in speaking ; to return upon 
what one has last said, and make a parenthetical remark upon it 
before proceeding in the course previously commenced : Hermogenes ; 
who gives as one example, rov yap <S>ii>KiKov avmavrus iroXenov' ov bt 
e/ie" oh yap hi) e'-ywye eiroXi-evSfxrjv ttw tote' npwrov jxev, &c. Demosth. 
pro Cor. [p. 230. 1. 27. Reisk.] 

X. iTeiyeiv, to be arrayed in martial order. [!rel%eiv in this 
use is not passive, but intransitive, as it always is : to march in array : 
II, X, 331.] 

XI. IvvaTTTb) is reflexive, when it signifies, to adhere firmly : 
Theophr. or, to encounter, to engage, to conflict ; as, awairreiv rols 
voXe/Aiois" a. els ras %elpus, Polyb. a. els f-iayyv or els irvXep-ov. 
And so Trpoajjlfai, to approach or advance close to ; to arrive at. 

XII. TeXeti', to be classed or ranked with or under, to belong to, 
to be reckoned or enrolled among : at es to 'Aj^akop reXoverat iro- 
Xeis, Paus. in Eliac. i. reXelv els avbpas.z Tpe^w also, and its 
compounds, are used as intransitive; as, Treptrpeiru), Hesiod, Theog. 
58, See Curtius iv. c. 6. 29. vii. c. 1. Virg. Mn. i, 108. Suet. 

a Add SiaXe'nreiv, io be placed or stand efferre : Casaub. to go beyond or pass 

at intervals : '6<sov irhedpov Saab irlrvai the gate. — J. S. 

SiaAeiirovaats, Xen. Anab. iv, 7, 4. d KadoAov ir\y\Qvvovra irpbs rb SiaKiv- 

irpoAetireiv, to faint or swoon : o? 'y&i, Sweveiv, ivholly bent on fighting : Polyb. 

irpoAeiircc, Eurip. Hec. 438. Pors. ex- iii, 104. See Soph. (Ed. C. 930.— J. S. 
plained iKAeiirco, Paraphr — J. S. e 'O \{>xvos airea^^Kei, the lamp had 

6 In Brunck's edition v. 644. aitSiret been extinguished: Plato Symp. p. 193. 

vvv, ¥iv /j.' viromvriaavT IS-ns : writhing, I. 17. ed. Bas. prim. — J. S. 
flinching: said by Xanthias about to be f'Orav 6 pikv reivn jSiaiws, 'O 5' iirava- 

ftogged by iEacus. — J. S. arpifpeiv SivnTai, KairepeiSeaBat ropps : 

c Not simply by men furore percitis, as Aristoph. Ban. 1102. wrongly, I think, 

Viger translates it, but by men mad after translated, refutare. Add, avriarpefeiv, 

something ; in the third sense of the to be reciprocally predicable : irdvTa Se 

word in Johnson : iroAAol fx\v yap Sia, rb ra irpbs t\, irpbs hvr tar picpovra. Keys- 

naAAos virb twu eirl rots wpaiois irapa- rai : Aristot. Categ. c. 7. — J. S. 
kzkivi)k6t<>>v SiatyQeipovrai, {are debauched, s The compound SiareAeTj/ is frequently 

not occiduntur): c. 2. §35. Add, airotu- used as a neuter : see Xen. Anab. iv, 5, 

vuv, ^Eneas Poliorc. c. 10. pedem porta 9. i, 5, 27. — J. S. 



6s VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. [Chap. v. § i. 

Claud, c. 22. Gt-ll. ii. c. 28. iv. c. 6. Virg. G. i, [l63.] JFm. x, 362. 
G. iii, 365. 

The following may be added to the foregoing verbs : &yetv, to go : 
Xen. Anab. iv. p. 220. John xi, 7. Trpoouyeir, (0 approach: Act. 
Ap. xxvii, 27. trvvayeiv, to be impending or brewing : /El. V. H. iii, 
9/' enaxveti', to be recruited or restored: Act. Ap. ix, 10.' afi- 
eifteiv, passively, Hippocr. kot tijrpetov p. 67I, 14. avatyepeiv, to be 
restored: Hippocr. irepl yvv. p. 26'8. 22. cf. Aphor. ii, 43. buiva- 
Traveiv, to rest: Hippocr. Aph. ii, 48. vi, 18. Some active infi- 
nitives are put in a passive sense after certain adjectives; as, p(ju>i> 
tyvkaoaeiv, Eurip. Med. 320. bviaros Karat'oriaai '. i]hvs ibelv : noXets 
x'oXcTrai Xafielv : ufros ukovocli : v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 386. and 
534. Locella ad Xen. Ephes. p. 239- Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 100. 
Many intransitive verbs are used as transitive : rj%ev \epa, Soph. Aj. 
40. vrerpa Xafiirovaa creXas, Eui'ip. Ion, 235. '1/uepa peiTU) yaXa, 
Theocr. v, 124. v. Reisk. in Misc. nov. Lips, vi, p. 520. Dawes, 
Misc. Crit. p. 495. Abresch. ad Tlioni. M. in e\7ri$u). Bruuek. ad 
Eurip. Or. 1427. Nicepli. Greg, post Hermanni librum de emen- 
dand. rat. Gr. gr. p. 350. § 188. Neuter verbs as passive; as, 
redvriKev v<f vfiwy, he was killed by yon : Plato Ep. See Xen. 
Hier. x, 4. Agesil. ii, 4. tKirinreiv vwo twos, to be driven into exile 
by some one. v. Valck. ad Eurip. Hipp. p. 287. B. Bauer. Lect. 
Time. p. 17. Vechn. Hellenol. i. c. 6. Cuper. Obs. ii. c. 20. 
And middle verbs as passive: fuaprvprjuerai, it will be testified: 
Xen, Apol. 26. wcpeKijnn, you will be benefited: Xen. Mem. 
iii, extr. [iii, 7, 9-] fvXa^erat, will be kept or guarded: Xen. 
CEc. iv, 9. /v-«ToyeAoo-erat, will be laughed at: Plato Phileb. c. 33. 
cf. Kust. de Verb. Med. § iii. And, vice versa, passive verbs as 
middle : e7rifieXrjdr}tr6iievai for eTTi/ueXrjffofjtei'ai : Xen. Mem. ii, 7, 8. 

XIII. TSie aorists, especially the first, of verbs in ofxai, which 
have no active voice, have generally an active, though sometimes a 
passive, sense; as, from biaXeyo/xai, bteXexdrjv, I discoursed ; from 
iaofiat, to cure, ladeh, with both an active and passive sense ; from 
Trapabe-^ofxat, to receive, Trapabe-^Oeh in both senses ; from Qeaofxat, 
e6ec'i0r]i>, I viewed, or was viewed. So e7r£jue\r/0>7icu for eiriiieXyjaaadai, 
Xen. Mem. i, 13, 11. i, 4, 13. ii, 10, 2. The same observation 
applies to the preterperfect also of those verbs ; as, TtenoitivTai ti)v 
eiKova, for Trenoiriwai, Paus. in Eliac. p. 310. evTedeifievos ra 
Xpi]/AaTa els rijp vavv, having put the goods on board the vessel: De- 
mosth. adv. Phorm. p. 58Q. [p. 917- I. 8. Reisk.] v. Cic. pro Mil. 
c. 13. [§ 33.] and P. Manut. ad 1. It is particularly remarkable that 
verbs, which in their active voice have a neutral or passive significa- 
tion, have often in their middle of passive voice an active significa- 
tion ; as, from rayeveiv, which is neuter, (iEseh. S. ad Th. 58.) 
Tayeveodai, to send a person to a post or station. 

XIV. By a very elegant idiom, a noun, which, if the sense only 
were regarded, should be the subject of a verb subsequent in the 

h "tirf^dyeiv, to escape, to go forth: * 2we7n<rxue<J' is intransitive in Poly b. 
Aristot. Probl. § 5. qn. 21.— J. S. vi, 6.— J. S. 



Rule 13—16.] VERB ACT., PASS., AND NEUT. 69 

construction of the sentence, is governed by some other verb pre- 
ceding in the construction ; as, davfia$u) aov, on 6 uvtos $>v anvrui oet 
biareXels : for OavfiaSco, on av — btareXe'is, I admire your being 
always consistent : ri\v re yrjv, oiroar) early, elbePai, literally, to know 
the land, how much it is: Xen. Mem. iv. [7, 2. knoivs the mea- 
sure of the land,] 6 MiXwv top KiKepwva beiaas, fiij — -%elpov btayw- 
viarjrat: for beiaas fiy) 6 KiKepov^. b. Milo fearing lest Cicero might 
plead the ivorse : Plut. in Cic. p. 8/8. 1. 30. tovs Kptras, a Kepbavov- 
aiv, — /3ouAo/jeafJ vfnv (j>pa<mi : for a. ol Kpirat Kepb. Aristoph. Nub. 
[1099. Bekk.] See Aristoph. Nub. 145. Acli. 649. v. Ern. ad 
II. xx, 310. Vaiek. ad Eur. Phoen. p. 555. Latin writers have 
imitated this idiom : see Ter. Eun. iii, 5, 18. Hor. Od. iv, 14, 8. 
h 35, 9. 

XV. Verbs are often used in such a manner as to form direct 
phraseology, rehearsing the very words of some person as spoken or 
to he spoken, when the tenor of the sentence leads one to expect 
oblique or -.indirect recital : uKovere, ws aatyws brfXol, Kal biopielerat, 
on ravra eyij n eirotr] Ka iikovtwv 'Adrjvaiwv : Demosth. pro Cor.- 7 
that he did these things in spite of the Athenians ; literally, that I 
did these things. So in St. John i, 19- it is said that the Jews sent 
Priests and Levites to ask John who he was; and the Greek words 
are, ha eptor^atoatv avror, av rts el; and in v. 20. John is said to 
have confessed, upon being so questioned, that he was not the Christ : 
in ihe Greek, Kal wfioXoyrjaev, oti ovk el fit eyw Xpiaros. See 
Demosth. pro Cor. [242. 1. 19. ed. Reisk.] Plut. in Alex. [p. 1228. 
1. 1. ed. H. St.]* 

XVI. (XVII.) A verb in the singular number is sometimes con- 
strued with a substantive in t he plural; as, ovk eve^ecpveTo rols fiev 
at rpix es > T °1 S beret irrepa : for ere^eepvovro : Aristot. v. Pind. 01. 
xi, 4. sq. Manetho iv, 354. Eurip. Bacch. 1348. v. Hermann, 
Comment, de nietris Pind. ad Olymp. viii. This is the ordinary 
construction when the noun is in the neuter, although there are ex- 
ceptions : see Horn. II. /3, 135. Revel, i, 19. 2 Petr. iii, 10. l But 
the Attic writers never join plural verbs with neuter substantives in 
the plural, except when animate beings are spoken of: see Pors. in 
addend, ad Eurip. Hec. 1149. 

A verb is often put in the singular before several plural nomina- 
tives, if the nominative immediately succeeding it be singular; as, 
avrepel QiXnnros, Kal 'Avrtyerr/s, Kal 6 avnypatyevs, Kal rives aXXot : 
Demosth. adv. Androt. p. 704. (v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 487.) and 

i P. 239. I. 12. Reisk. where e'-ycb Fals. Leg. p. 353. 1. 24. vdari <j>avrao-(a 

means Philip, of whom Demosthenes is rpa\eia p-eXera hri\4yeiv '6n tpavraaia el, 

speaking, not Demosthenes himself. — Epict. Ench. c. 5. where Wolfius very 

J. S. unnecessarily proposes to read earl for 

h Add, ol 8' elirov, Zn ttcavol ea/iev els el. See also Epict. Ench. c. 11. — J. S. 

t)]v x®P av sfi&dWeiv, &c. Xen. Anab. ' In the passage in Ceb. Tab. [p. 37. 

v, 4, 4. Tavra irdvTa note? 8t}Xoi>6tl ovSev 1.12. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] irdvTa (icaita) 

&\\o ii'SeiKvi/ievos r) Stl eyon ovdev ireTrov- aico\ov9ovo~iv , these evils are represented 

6a: Demosth. in Mid. p. 579. I. 5. Reisk. as living forms. See I. 9. So in the passage 

where eyk means Midias, not the speaker, of St. John's Gosp. x, 27. animals are 

Demosthenes. See also Demosth. de spoken of. — J. S. 



70 THE INDIC., IMPER., Ac. [Chap. v. § ii. 

after several plural nominatives, if (hat immediately preceding it be 
either singular, or neuter plural ; as, ftpovTiu xal aaTpairai icai pv^unKpa 
KareXanfiave, Charil. p. 46. I. 19- bak-pva kcu bei'iaets kcu dpFjvos 
eyevero, Diod. S. xx, 72. v. Dorv. ad Charit. p. 271. 

There is often an irregular transition from one number to another; 
as, TepTrvas rvpavrois ybotas, brav 6c\t], viz. 6 rvpctrvvs, or Tvpuivos 
tis, Eurip. Suppl. 453. v. Heindorf. ad Plat. Gorg. p. 195. Protag. 
p. 499. and Herodot. Melp. c. 22. — and, with reference to eicaaros 
understood, in Galat. vi, I. which is expressed in a like change 
of numbers in yEl. V. H. i. c. 31. or there is a confusion of 
numbers; as, "li\iou /uapTvpofieada bpuia & hpq.v u\> fiovXofiat: Eurip. 
H. F. 858. where, if grammatical rules, rather than the object of 
the thoughts, had been attended to, the expression would have been 
either /uctpTvpo/jLui bpiLaa, or /unprvpu/ueda bpu>t>res. See Pors. Suppl. 
praef. ad Hec. p. 38. v. Ter. Eun. ii, I. [19.] Ov. Trist. i, 3, 10. 

The Attics often put the plural for the singular: see Valck. ad 
Phoen. p. 363. Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 493. 524. and the tra- 
gedians especially do so for the suke of emphasis : Brunck. ad Eurip. 
Bacch. 543. ad Soph. CEd. R. 366. Antig. 565. 

A verb is sometimes joined with several substantives, with one 
only of which it can be properly construed : Hesiod, Theog. 640. 
v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 395. sqq. 



SECTION II.— On the idioms of the indicative, impera- 
tive, OPTATIVE, AND SUBJUNCTIVE MOODS. 

Rule I. — The indicative mood is sometimes put for the optative 
or subjunctive ;* as, ovbkv" 1 TrtoiroTe avrrj ovre elira, ovre £iroir)<ra, e^' <£ 
rjrrxvvdr) : for av ala^vvBeir), at which she might have felt shame : 
Xen. Mem. ii. (So the Latin authors: see Piaut. [Amph. Prol. v. 
17.] Ter. Andr. v, 1, 26. 18. Ov. Met. x, 635. i, 679. Virg. Mn. iv, 
19. Ov. Trist. v, 5, 42. Juv. x. [123.] Virg. JEn. xi, 112. Suet. 
Caes. c. 52. Cic. in Mil. c. 11. [§ 31.] Virg. JEn. ii, 55. Hor. Od. 
iii, 16. 3.) And when a future indicative follows el, what is sig- 
nified by that tense is often spoken of as dependent on some person 
not signified by the nominative of the future; as, e'iirep tis vplv 
irpouelei tov vovv, if you would have people attend to you ; if you 
would make people regard what you say to them through your am- 
bassadors: Demosth. 01. i. [Ol. ii. p. 21. I. 26. ed. Reisk.] 

II. (VI.) The imperative is often used (as in English,) for the pur- 
pose of caution or instruction rather than of command; as, /jrj yap 
o'iecde, Demosth. passim. See Eurip. Iph. A. 734. and Markl. 

III. (VII.) The imperative is sometimes equivalent to the future 
indicative ; as, (Tradqri, you shall stand; your statue shall be set up: 

* So in Italian : S'io fossi giu stato, io Stradiotto Greco. G.uicciabd, 1. x. 
ti mostrava Di mio amor piu oltre die le '" OvSeirconoTe ai/rrji' ovr etna, otr 

fronde. Dante, Parad. c. 8. La quale e-n-oirjaa. ovSev, i<p' £ ??. Memor. ii, 2, 9. 

ignoranza continuava medesimamente, — J. S. 
— se per sorte non fosse stato preso uno 



Rule 1—5.] THE INDIC, 1MPER., &c. ?i 

Plato Phaedr. p. 236". 1. 14. (like Virgil's aureus esto, EcS. vii, 35.) 
oltrda vvv a fiot yevead<o ; do you know now what I must have done ? 
what things are to he done for me? Eurip. Iph. T. 1203. d\\' 
olo-fJ' o bpaaov ; but do you know what you are to do? ivhatyou must 
do? Aristopli. Pac. 106"l. To understand tlie nature of these latter 
phrases, we must consider them, as if the imperative were placed 
first: bpaaov, (or iroirioov, Eurip.) ola& 6; Bentl. ad Menandr. p. 
107. Keen, ad Greg. p. J. seq. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. R. 5+3. Pors, 
ad Hec. 229. 

And on the other hand the future indicative is often used for the 
imperative; as, dW ovv rr po/xrjvvaeis ye tovto fxrjbevl rovpyov' 
KpvQrj be icevde : Soph. Antig. 84. v. Eurip. Here. F. 792. Musgr. ad 
Eurip. Ion. 1357- Matth. v, 21. 48. And so in Latin, Virg. Mn. ii. 
[547.] Cic. ad Div. v, 12. Hor. Ep. i, 18, 96. Curt, viii, 14. And 
with a negative the future indicative is used interrogatively for the 
imperative; as, ov% oaov rayos Xoypijaerai tis; go, some one, with all 
haste ! Eurip. Andr. 106*2. oh navvy — Xeywv ; cease to say : Hero- 
dian ii, 1. And in the same manner the present tense el, which has 
usually a future sense, is used in Sop!). Philoct. 9J5. v. Zeun. ad 
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 22. or Hoogev. de Partic. p. 903» 

IV. (VIII.) The optative mood is not put for the indicative, as 
some have believed. In the passages in which it was thought to be 
so employed, it makes no affirmation, as the indicative does, but 
speaks of things as supposed. If I say e'Xeyes, on Zeis n)v biKaioav- 
vt]v eire/j-ipe, I indicate that I myself also believe that Jupiter did 
so: but if 1 say e/Veyes on Ztvs 7-/71' b. wefiipete, (Plato Protag.) I 
merely state the supposition of him who said so, whether true or 
false. So those words of Xen. (H. Gr. ii.) Avaavbpos be <&i\oK\ea 
7rpGiT0V cpwn/aas, os tovs 'Avbpiovs na\ Kopirdiovs Karanprj \xvi aeie, 
ti e'ir] cifyos iradeiv, &c. are thus translated hy Gail : Lysandre 
demanda a Philocles, quel supplice merit ait un homme qui aurait 
precipite du haut d'un roc les Andriens et les Corinthiens : and 
Hermann approves of the translation. 

The optative is put for the imperative :* -^apols at' e'law avv rax e <> 
go in quickly: Soph. El. 14-9S. The Attics join the optative 
with av in the sense of a future; as, fievoip av, I will remain : Soph. 
Aj. 88." 

V. (IX.) The subjunctive properly expresses possibility, without 
any indication of thought or expectation about that possibility : ovk 
e^w ottoi t pctTThifiai, is, / have no resource to which I can betake 
myself ; but ovk e^w orroi TpaTro(fir)i> av, is, I have nothing to ivhich I 
can hope or expect to have recourse. Tpairoi^v without av can be 
joined with a past tense only ; ovk ei%pv owoi rpairoifj.r]v. 

n T?7 8' Iffrhv (TT-fiaaiTo yvvy, irpofiaKoi- is in the second aorist, if it have a distinct 

t(Jt6 %pyov : Hesiod, 'Hfiep. 15. deoir av. second aorist ; otherwise it may be in the 

Run! Away! Aristoph. Eq. 1161.— J. S. present tense, but is more frequently in 

With respect to the older poets, the first aorist. Every schoolboy knows 

whenever a wish or a prayer is expressed that ^ yiyvono, or jut? riyxavoi, would 

either by the simple optative mood, or not be Greek. Edinb. Rev. Feb. 1812. — 

with firj, el, ude, el yap, effle yap, the verb J.S. 



72 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § iii. 

In ri Xeyu ; tI ^; and the like, subjunctives are not put for in- 
dicatives; but, except when there is a signification, peculiar to the 
subjunctive, that something ought to be done, I hnoio not, I am in 
doubt, tell me, or somewhat equivalent is to be understood : v. Her- 
mann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 1Q2. On fiuvXei ei-rrco see Hemst. ad 
Lucian. t. i. p. 26'7. The subjunctive mood often expresses doubt 
or irresolution ; as, emwjiev ?/ oiytifiev ; ?*/ ri bpuao/iev ; Eurip. Ion, 
758. a/\\« b>'iT eXdto ; Eurip. Or. 778. v. Valck. ad Phoeu. p. 277- 
ad Hippol. p. 247. Diatr. p. 211. ad Herodot. p. 332. 

In the first person plural only it is employed in exhortation ; as 



SECTION III. — On the infinitive mood, 

AND CERTAIN TENSES. 

Rule I. All the different cases are joined, according to circum- 
stances, with the infinitive mood. When the construction is not in- 
fluenced by any word preceding in a different case, the accusative is 
generally employed ;P and sometimes an accusative is to be understood 
with it, even when a different case of the same word has preceded ; 
as, heofxai iifxcop — to. hUaia ^ir)(f)iaacrdai, evdv fxov pevovs on, 
&c. Lys. adv. Theorem, p. 364. ed. Reisk. (v. Markl. ad h. 1. and 
p. 620.) When the word joined with the infinitive is to be under- 
stood of the subject of the verb upon which the construction de- 
pends, it is put in the nominative. The following example exhibits 
both an accusative of a word not signifying the subject of the prin- 
cipal verb, and a nominative of a word which does signify it: to fxev 
/uvpuiKis fivplovs KEKvpvxQai. TrnpaXe'nrio, kcil to ttoXXolkis avros 
ioTetyavibadai 7rp6repoi> : Demosth. pro Cor. ? If ever an accusa- 
tive is used, when the subject of the leading verb is indicated, it is 
always wiih the accompaniment of a reciprocal pronoun : evofiiSov 
iiovroiis irpwTovs yeveadcu itavTwv avBpwTuov, Herodot. ii, 2. He 
might have said ki'6/jnS.ov ttp&toi yeveadm, but not eyofii^ov Tzpurovs 
yeveadai without ewvrovs. On the other hand, a nominative is some- 
times found where an accusative might be expected ; but then it is 
referred to a subject existing in the thought, and not in the expres- 
sion : etrrat typevos col tovto KrjXrjrijpioi' Tijs 'HpaicXeias, wore fi)']Tiv 
elaihiov 2rep£«t yvvaiKa KeHvos cwt\ gov nXeov : Soph. Tr. 574. i. e. 
KrjXridijaeTui 6 'HpaKXijs, &c. v. Clark, ad Horn. II. i, 170. Dorv. ad 
Char. p. 230. ed. Lips. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 303. The Latin poets 
have imitated this Grecism : v. Horat. Od. iii, 27. [73.] Ep. i, 16. 

P UpofX7]d4ajxe eluai <p?is ) Lucian, Prom, your master : Lucian, Vit. Auct. 382. D. 

es &c. p. 14. A. — J. S. (pTjal yap ovtos a/j-elvbiv yeyevrjaBai ffrpa- 

2 $7l[i\ — 5a>peu)V ditcaios elvcu rvyxd- Triybs ifiov : Lucian, Dial. Mort. p. 

veiv, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 243. ). 6. ed. 248. E. See Lucian, Contempl. p. 324. 

Reisk. (p-rijA ojxoios ehcu avroj, Lucian, A. Time, ii, 81. p. 339. 1. 9. ed. Bekker. 

Prom, es &c. p. 14. A. ireio-w ehai 5e<r- — J. S. 
ir6r-ns, I tvill convince you that I am 



Rule 1—5.] THE INFINITIVE, &c. 73 

[30.] r Examples of Ibe dative with the infinitive may be seen in 
Aristoph. Plut. 286. Xen. Mem. i, 1,9. and (Ec. xi, 6/ and in Latin, 
Cic. ep. 16. ad Brut. [p. 2169. I. 15. ed. Verburg. form, rain.] Hor. 
Art. Poet. 372. V. Em. ad Xen. Mem. i, 1, 9. Bach, ad Xen. (Ec. 
i, 4. and Dorv. ad Char. p. 52. 

II. (III.) The infinitive is often equivalent to the Latin active 
supine ; as, iiKoveriv acTrageoOat, they come to salute.' So Virg. JEn. 
i, 531. An infinitive of one verb of motion is thus placed after 
another verb of motion : Horn. U. b, 199. X, 616. Tob. v, 16. 

III. (IV.) Sometimes the active infinitive may be interpreted by 
the Latin passive supine; as, koXos Ibelv, puhher visit; or by an 
adjective and substantive; Xzvtcbs Ibelv, albo colore: Plato Phaedr. p. 
253. lavQbs Ibelv, flavo colore piscis : Oppian, Hal. i, 156. 

IV. (V.) It comes after ev kciXw, (caXX/orw, beovri, batata, irpov!]- 
kovti, and the like : vvv yap ev KaXw (ppovelv, Soph. El. 3S4. i. e. to 
(pp. earn- kv kqXS, for now is the right time to consider, (or to act 
prudently :) when the genitive of the article is sometimes joined with 
it; as, eartv ev icaXu) tov woielv. 

V. (VI.) It is used instead of a participle, or of the indicative mood 
or subjunctive, with w$ or the like : boKelv e/.(ol, as I think : (for e/jtol 
hokovr, or ws e/uotye boKel,) Soph. El. ws e/uol bviceeiv, Herodot. 
oaov ye /j.' elbevai, as far as I knoiv: Aristoph. Nub. 1254. ehaaai, 
if one may decide by conjecture: Soph. CEd. R. 82. <bs eUaaai, 
Herodot. i, 32. avveXovri elire'iv, to be brief: Demosth. Piiil. i. p. 15. 
ios rvwa) Xafle'iv, to define or describe loosely or generally, icith 
less precision : Theophr. Char. i. de Plant. Demosth. de fals. leg. 
p. 402. 1. 21. Herodot. i. 6*1. Aristoph. Eccl. 450. Demosth.de 
fals. leg. p. 355. 1. 28. Lucian, Tim. § 19. Demosth. c. Aristocr. 
623, 26. Aristot. Rhet. i, 2. Dion. Hal. iv, 409. Demosth. ad 
Phil. Ep. p. 66. Herodot. ii. p. 12. 1. 12. p. 50. 1. 3Q. p. 49. 1. 32. 
ws eVos elnelv, to speak, compendiously: Plato Phaedr. c. 25.| 29- 
Infinitives of comparison are frequently thus put for a participle, 
though not an impersonal one ; as, Tndi]Ki>)v a KuXXirr-os alcxpos clAXw 
yevei (jv^fiaXelv : the most beautiful of apes is ugly compared with 
another species of animals : Plato Hipp. M. p. 289- 

Aety with /uiKpov, or oXiyov, is put absolutely or parenthetically, 
for almost, nearly ; as, vXlyov be'iv kjxavrbv eire\u66/ur)v, I almost 
forgot myself: Plato Socr. Ap. [p.. 7- 1. 2. ed. Bas. prim. e/uavTov.] 
nareftaXov yovv, fiiKpov belv: Lucian. v. Isocr. Evag. p. 474. 
Dem. pro Cor. 231, 30. rioXXov be'iv is the contrary ; as, u, noXXov 
be'iv, e'iirot tis av : which any one would be far enough from saying. 



r The following is an example of a and with an ellipsis of net, Demosth. adv. 

genitive with the infinitive: tio-Qo^v ab- Lept. p. 494. I. 1.— J. S. 
tuv 5ia rfyv tcoi-qcriv olo/j.ivoov nal ra\\a * An infinitive signifying purpose or 

<ro<pwT&T(i>v eivat avdpcinrwv, a ovk end; equivalent to the subjunctive with 

W: Plato Apol. S. p. 9. 1. 13. ed. 'iva: iyw Se Kv\ixvt6v re croi koX <pdpna.Koi> 

Basil, prim. — J. S. SiSoi/xi, Tew roitjtv avTiKVTjfjLtots eAKvSpta 

_* Evxojxai — 7}(ui> — yeveadai — irtaro'ts neptaAe i<peiv, Aristoph. Eq. 907. — 

(hat /cat y3e/3aiois done'tv Biapeveiv, De- J. S. 
mosth.'adv. Lept. p. 464. 1. 26. ed.Reisk, 

Viger. k 



74, THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § iii. 

To express the same sense, be'iv is sometimes made finite, anil another 
infinitive is put after it; as in Dem. pro Rhod. lib. p. 7,9. vXiyov be 
beu> Xeyeiv. v. Thuc. ii, 77. Pint, in Demosth. p. 849. Isocr. 
Evag. p. 476- and 456. and for fwcpov tbetjoev, /wcpov aweXnre is some- 
times elegantly substituted ; as in Plut. Cees. p. 719. 

VI. (VII.) It is sometimes, like the English infinitive, equivalent 
to the Latin gerund in dum : as, ebwicev avrrj irpo'iKa t^tir ru enn 
tci Kvirpia, M\. V. H. ix, 10". v. Theogn. 1164. Lys. j»ro Polystr. p. 
666. [1. 2.] Reisk. and Virg. Mn. v, 248. 26'2. 307- 538. ix, 362. 
v. Abresch. ad Cattier. p. 34. Casaub. ad Ath. i, 7. p. 24. 

VII. (VIII.) In indirect or oblique speech, as it is termed, (as 
when one states the substance of what another has said, and does not 
repeat his very words,) the infinitive is put after ws instead of the 
indicative; as, ws Ibe'iv tov ' Aya6Wn, M when Agatho saw him: 
Plato Symp. c. 2. v. Herodot. i. p. 5. 1. 18. ed. Camer. cf. i. p. 
IS. 1. 35. 

The following uses of the infinitive after ws are also to be remarked : 
ws olov eiireiv, as for example : Epiphan. Kara alpea. i. p. 17- tovtw 
araatv tiv\ ws tyw 'boKovv 6pg.v, rev^eiv ev aXXrjXrjacv : these, as I 
thought I perceived, were commencing a dissension among themselves : 
iEschyl. Pers. 187. Here, instead of the proper word erev\oi', an 
infinitive is employed, depending on us ebuicovv opav. v. Erf. ad Soph. 
Ant. 732. Latin authors have imitated this construction : see Cic. 
de Off. i, 7. 22. de Or, iii, i, 3. 

There is sometimes an ellipsis of an infinitive. 1 ' 

VIII. (IX.) The infinitive is used to express what is decreed or 
ordered ; as, to \prjfiufia tovto ypafyk) irXelv enl tovs tottovs, ev oh av ?) 
0/\(7T7ros : Demosth. pro Cor. i. e. a psephism ordering to sail, &c. 
and it is sometimes substituted for the imperative mood :* as, e'itceTe, 
jun§e Oeo'is fxev eatvejxev Ifi fxcc^eadai : II. e, 606. eav tis cnro- 
KTe'ivn Tvpavvov, Tij-ias Xap.fta.veiv, Mceris in v. Xa/ufiaveiv, from 
Aristoph. Av. It is used also to express a wish ; as, w 'Lev, etcyerea- 
6at pot 'Adnvalovs TiaaaQai ! O Jupiter, that 1 may be able to avenge 
myself on the Athenians ! Herodot. v, 105. — or admiration, indigna- 
tion, or other emotions ; as, ah ravTa bpaoai ! that you should have 
done these things ! when the article is often added: Aristoph. Nub. 
816. or the article and be : Aristoph. Nub. 269. Av. 5. 7 '. Ran. 741. 

IX. (X.) Different tenses are often promiscuously used by the 
best Greek writers : this is so remarkably the case with regard to the 



w Apollodorus's friend is relating what eddppei is used as a transitive: neither 

Aristodemus had told him ; that he, Philip placed any confidence in them, nor 

Aristodemus, had gone uninvited to Aga- they in Philip. There is an ellipsis of an 

tho's; evQbs 8' ovv, ws Ideiv tov 'Aya- infinitive in such phrases as ws <piAe?, and 

Scava, w, <pavai, 'Ap«7To8jj/ae, eis KaAbv ola or ouroia (piAel. — J. S. 

?IK.eis ottcds a-wSenrvhans: p. 177. I. 4. ed. * So in Italian perpetually : e. g. 

Basil, prim. — J. S. Non aspettar mio dir piii, ne mio cenno. 

v There is no ellipsis of an infinitive in Dante, Purg. c. 27. — Dante,, perche 

Viger's example, ovth QiAittttos idappei Virgilio se ne vada, Non piangere, &c, 

rovTOvs, otitf ovtoi wlknriTov : Demosth. Id, ib. c. 30. 
01. iii. [p. 30. 1. 15. ed, Reisk.] but 



Rule 6—10.] THE INFINITIVE, &c. 75 

tragedians, that Porson (ad Hec. 21.) says they seem to have studied 
variety in using them indiscriminately, v. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. 
p. 295. Valckeu. ad Hippol. p. 167. Bnmck. ad iEsch. Prom. 1036. 
ad Eurip. Med. 1141. ad Hec. 21. ad Andr. 804. Abresch. ad Xen. 
Eph. p. 241. Ern. ad II. b, l6l. and Callim. in Apoll. 14. Dorv. ad 
Char. p. 268. Duk. ad Thuc. p. 125. Hiudenb. ad Xen. Mem. iii, 
4, 4. Wopk. Lect. Tullian. p. 279- Clark, ad I!, a, 37- 

The preterimperfeet is sometimes put for an aorist. Its proper 
signification is of an action or state not past or over at a certain 
former time, or of what was wont to be or be done formerly, but no 
longer at the time when the tense is used. 

X. (XL) The aorists are used as a present tense signifying usual- 
ness l as, /jiiKpop 7rra7<7/uct ave-^airiae icai bieXv ae iravra, a small 
miscarriage usually throws back and breaks up every thing: De- 
mosth. 01. ii. [p. 20. I. 27. ed. Reisk.] as re kci\ aXicifxov avbpa (jjoflei 
icai cKpeiXero viKr)v 'Prj'idiws. Horn. II. it. [6'8Q-] In other cases in 
which an aorist is said to be put for a present tense, there is a real 
indication of the past, though difficult to be expressed in another 
language: elirov, edictum volo : Eurip. Med. 272. vneiwov, impe- 
ratum volo: Eurip. Suppl. .1170. Karuicreipa., misericordia tacta 
sum: Iph. A. 46§. w The present and the aorist in other moods 
than the indicative differ chiefly in this, that the present signifies 
something of considerable duration or often repeated, the aorist some- 
thing quickly despatched or done but once : ypd\pov fit'fiXov cannot 
- be said, since the performance requires time : bos rriv x e 'P a can, 
because the thing can be done in a moment. 

The future sometimes signifies possibility : w fiXraT, et ris <j>ffoyyov 
elaanovaeTai Qvrjr&v Trap' "Aiby, ao\ rdh\ 'llpaKXeis, Xeyo) : if any one 
can hear, &c. Eurip. Here. F. 490. It has been supposed to be put 
for the present* in many passages in which it will be found to retain 
its own proper signification: in the Medea of Eurip. when the chorus 
has informed Jason of his children's death, he answers, (v. 1310.) 
oifxoi ri XeHets; what will you proceed to tell me after this com- 
mencement? v. Hec. 515. 710. 1114. ed. Pors. This signification 
is very manifest in the following passage : Neopt. Trap' ovnep eXafiov 
ra.be ra rug, uvdis TtdXiv — . Ulyss. w Zev, ri Xe'£,eis; ovn ttov bovvai 
voeis; Soph. Phil. 1233. 

The preterperfect of some verbs has a present sense ; as, ■aefo^-qjj.ai, 
I am afraid, Thuc. i, 144. beboaca, Theogn. 38. tceKXrjficu, Eurip. 
Hec. 550. and of such verbs the preterpluperfect is used as a pre- 
terimperfect. V. Thom. M. in ebeboitceiv, p. 264. 



*" There is a marked distinction be- 1. 1. — J. S. 

tween the present tense and second aorist * So in Italian: MANDAN: II tu- 

in Lncian's Gallus : $[m\v yap rbu EvKpd- multo svani. Artas. Fia vero? e come? 

rrjv — airoOviifficeiv, elra,irpoaKa\taavTa. Metastasis, Artaserse, iii. 10. and in 

/ue, Kal SiaQrixas Qefievov, — iMKpbv hriffxdv- French : Lis. Ah miserable pere, que 

ra, airodave'iv : p. 245. B. ed. Salmur. feras tu, quand tusauras cette nouvelle ? 

The Malic aorist was used, says Eusta- Sq. Que sera ce? Moliere, L'Am. 

thius, to express a wish for the speedy Med. i. G. 
accomplishment of one's desires, p. 37. 



76 THE INFINITIVE, &c. [Chap. v. § Hi. 

XI. (XIII.) The second aorist in boi>, and the prelerperfect in ko, 
of verbs of t lie fourth conjugation, arc scarcely in use. Instead of 
them the first aorist is most frequently employed. 

XII. (XIV.) The aorists and preterperfects * passive are sometimes 
used for the same tenses of the active or middle voice : biaXexQv- 
vai for biaXQaoQai, to have conversed; evXnfitiQrji', I acted with 
caution ; IpyaaOeis, having wrought ; biavorjdels, having thought or 
intended, Thuc. i. bwqdiji'ai, to be able ; KarioKTloQrfv, I have shown 
pity or compassion, Eurip. Iph. A. 686. tyrjQHTfievbtv, having de- 
creed, Thuc. i. bcbwprifxevris, having given, 2 Petr. i, 3. V. Steph. 
de dial. Att. p. 65. Markl. post Suppl. Eurip. p. 281. Fisch. praef. 
ad Well. Gr. p. xii. seq. 

XIII. (XV.) Of verbs in ew the future in eata is more frequent and 
elegant than that in i'iau> ; and the e is commonly retained in (he 
tenses derived from it: e7raivew, -reauj, -ve/ea, -vedqv. Even from 
evp{)Gu> cotnes evpedrjv, and from kpnaw kppkQr\v ; -f- and the poets even 
prefer lengthening a syllable by doubling the characteristic letter to 
exchanging this e for n : thus KaXeaauro, Horn. II. a, 54. ^.u-^eaaa- 
pevta, 11. a, 304. 

XIV. (XVII.) Of passive verbs, that have both aorists, the second 
aorist is oftener used than the first; as, irXijTrofxai, eTrXayrjv oftener 
than eTr\j]%dr]t>. [eTr\ayr)v with respect to mind, 1 was dismayed ; 
kirXi]yr]v with respect to body, I was struck.] 

The first aorist middle in both an active and passive signification is 
very common ; but the second has much oftener an active than a 
passive signification ; as, eiX6/j.r)v, I took, or chose; seldom I was 
taken, or chosen : from aipeopai. 

A transition is often made from one person to another : from the 
first to the third in Mark xi, 32. from the second to the third in 
Ps. cxliii, 9, 10. Eccl. xlviii, 8. from the third to the first in Acts 
i, 4. xvii, 3. from the third to the second in Luke v, 14. Macchab. 
i. sub fin. Acts xxiii, 22. See Xen. Cyrop. i, 4. extr. [In all these 
passages there is a transition eilher from oblique or indirect phrase- 
ology, or recital, to direct, or vice versa.] v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 89. 
and 347. p.. 253. 273. ed. Lips. Hermann, ad Eurip. Hec. 1253. and 
Raphe!. Annotatt. philolog. ex Xen. ad Act. i, 4. 

[Before proceeding to the idioms of some particular verbs individu- 
ally, it may be proper here to speak of two classes of verbs. One of 
these is of verbs which always end in l$w, and signify similitude or 
imitation ; as, XifieviSetv, to be like a harbour, Polyaan. iv. Hence 
verbs so terminated, and derived from proper names, signify, to be 
of the side, or party, or sect of, to favor, to follow: as, McueSoj/t- 
£eiv, Pint, in Demosth. fyiXnnriZetv, ib. p. 854. 'lovbatSeiv, ib. p. 
864. 1. 23. krinooQevLZeiv, ib. p. 872. 1. 49- But 'EXXqviSetv (^sch. 
c. Ctes. p. 299. 1. 11.) is to speak Greek; and 'EXXrjvlgeodai airo 
Tivbs, (Thuc. ii, 68.) to learn of him to speak Greek. The other 



* ovtu TroXXa teal p.eyd\a kcu fx&xW - Bas. 1. — J. S. 
ysVij Ka.Tu8e8ov\c>}f>i.4v7) ^v t\ TlepoSiv t ifyt6y Plato Theast. p. 79. 1. 10. ed. 
hpxh. Plato, Menex. p. 367. I. 2. ed. Bas. 1.— J. S. 



§ iv. Rule 1—5.] OF THE VERBS Ayavfv, &c 77 

class is of verbs appropriated, or used eitiT^beibis ; as, noie'tv is 
used peculiarly of the performances of poets ; Xe ye iv, of orators ; 
avyypcicpeiv, of historians ; laropT] a a 1, of geographers ; bibaa- 
Keiv, of preceptors; biaXeyeadai, of Socratic philosophers, who 
were expert in interrogating and answering ; a vpflovXeveiv, of sena- 
tors, &c] 



SECTION IV. — Of THE VERBS ayairav, arepyeiv, cntoxPW, 
aoiraSeaQai, iiyetv koi (pepeiv, cnroXavetv. 

RULE I. The verb ayairq.v sometimes signifies to prefer ; as, aya- 
irqv to. bwpa dvri twv Kotvfj nam ro'is "EAX?j«7< av/Mpepih'Twv, to prefer 
bribes before the common advantage of the Greeks: Demosth. pro 
Cor. and with wpo : ay cnrTjaai ri]v tjttciv itpo rfjs eXevBeplas, Plut. 
in Camill. 

II. It signifies also to rest satisfied; to be content ; to think one's 
self well off; ovk ayenras o& ear/Xos virepfu'iXoiai ped' fiplv balvvaai ; 
Horn. Od. <j), 2S9- and with el or i'jv : yycnra be, el bvvairo — tyjv 
X^'puv abij(orov biafvXaTrew, Xen. iii. Hist. (Ec. xi, 10. With an 
accusative: ayenrav rii naXai vevo pta peva. With a dative: 
ayenrtliv to~is vnap-^ovaiv ayaOo'is, Lysias. And with a dative go- 
verned by a preposition: e7ri rots ev rrj TroXtreict zadeaT w aiv 
ayaivcjv. With a participle : ovk aya-n 5 s pera Qojkuovos atrodvy- 
okuv; x and with an infinitive ; dyajrwv — rows al-%paXu)Tovs — enro- 
Xaflelv, Herodian, iv. sub fin. and ii, 15, 8. 

III. Nearly synonymous with ayairav are arepyeiv, arpepetv, fjav- 
■%a$etv, evaapevlSeiv : of which arepyeiv has the same constructions 
as ayaircjv. 'Arpepe'iv and i]av\a.S,eiv are generally construed only 
with e7rt and a dative case : evaapevi^eiv with a dative case alone. 
'AaTrageadat, besides its signification of kissing or saluting, has the 
following, — 1. to love, Xen. Ages, xi, 3. — 2. to be content or satis- 
fied ; with an accusative of the thing with which one is contented : 

Max. T. Diss, xxi, 1. — 3. to embrace, or choose, as a cause or party : 
tci 'Po>paitov aanaieadai, Plut. Cees. c. 23. — 4. to receive willingly, 
to entertain ; aarroieadai to pvdubes, Lucian, de Conscr. hist. p. 696. 
— 5. to praise, Lucian, Muse. enc. p. 531. y — 6. to receive as a scholar 
or disciple, Plato in Thcag. p. 92. 

'Attoxp/>, to content or satisfy, with a dative of the person 
satisfied : el yap riavylav eyeiv i]deXev, airoyjpTiv evlots vpCov av fioi 
boKe~i\ I think some of you would have rested satisfied : Demosth. 
Phil. i. p. 19. 1. 45. 

IV. "Ayeiv forms circumlocutions with 5m and a genitive; as, 
ayeiv riva bia riprjs, to honor a person ; a. bia (ppovribos, to take 
thought about ; a. bi albovs, to reverence. 

V. With a dative and ev it signifies to esteem, reckon, or regard 

x th 8e — ayairas — robs apye\6cpovs to show that it does not signify to praise. 
nepirpcoywv, Aristoph. Vesp. 672. — J. S. — J. ?. 
y The passage referred to seems rather 



78 "Ayeir, 'Aicoveiv, &C. [CHAP. v. § iv. 

as; thus, tows <j>lXovs kv abeXtyols &yeiv. And so with napa and 
an accusative ; as, 7Tfip' obbev, irapii ttoXv, Trnpu wXelov, &yeiv. And 
with a genitive case alone ; as, twv bwbeica. dewy 'HpaxXea iiyovoiv, 
they reckon Hercules one of the twelve gods : Arr. Exp. Al. ii, \6. 

VI. Also with an accusative it signifies to account or esteem ; as, 
rets be twv upyovTuv (a/uaprius) fxeyaXas yye, Xen. -Ages. 

VII. "Ayeiv kcu <pepetv, (applied both to persons and things,) to 
harass, to plunder, to spoil, to ravage: ayeiv ku\ <j)epeiv roi/s 
TwXe/Ltiovs, ha< Kara yrjv, (cai Kara OciXarrav : Isocr. in Archid. ayeiv 
Kul <pepeiv x { 'V ar > Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 50. 1. 12. v. Horn. II. e, 
484. Virg. Mn. ii, [374.] 

"Ayeiv and its compound Imayeiv signify also, to lead to prison ; 
as in Polyb. v, qy. a!lc l E. L. xiii. Isocr. in Amart. p. 594. Plut. Cses. 
14. and, to lead to execution: Xen. H. Gr. ii. p. 321. ed. Bryl. iEl. 
V. H. i, 30. Lycurg. Or. p. 198. 12. ed. Reisk. Arr. Exp. Al. vii, 8, 
7. So ducere : v. Gesn. in Thes. 

'Akovw has after it a genitive of a person : aKovetv fxov, Plato 
Euthyph. p. 3. 1. 39. An accusative of a thing: ravra liKovaas, 
Plato Apol. S. Both together : atcovaare /uov (Spa^ea, Dinarch. in De- 
mosth. p. 98. 1. 38. v. Plat. Apol. S. p. 17. 1. 8. It has sometimes 
a genitive of the thing with 7rep<, Plato Phsed. p. 6l. 1. 36. and even 
without 7rept: amove bij fiaXa KaXov Xoyov, Plato Gorg. p. 523. init. 
v. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 41. 

When dfcovw signifies to he called, it may take a nominative both 
before and after it : z koQXbs cikovu>, Time. v. Hor. [Ep. i, 1(5, 17-] 

'AtroXaufiavio is said of contrary winds : to detain or impede: orav 
Tvytjuaiv 01 iivefioi itnoXafiovTes avrovs, Plato Pheed. p. 58. [p. 22. 
1. 27. ed. Bas. prim.] 

VIII. 'AwoXavw, both in a good and bad sense, to profit or suffer 
by, to get, takes after it,— l. a genitive of the thing alone. — 2. a 
genitive of the person alone. 

IX. — 3. a genitive both of the thing and of the person. — 4. an 
accusative of the thing alone ; the accusative expressing good or 
evil. 

X. — 5. an accusative of the thing, and a genitive of the person or 
thing, or of both together. 

XII. — 6. In any one of these constructions an accusative of what 
the good or ill regards, governed by fl-pos, is sometimes added ; as, 
Tfjs iLwKpciTOvs irpos avrbv evvolas Kai <piXias ov fiiKpa Trpos bo^av 
a7ce.Xa.vaev : he gained no small advantage with respect to reputation 
from the friendship and goodwill of Socrates towards him : Plut. 
Alcib. 

XII. — 7- With a genitive alone of a person or thing, it signifies, to 

x See Demosth. pro Cor. p. 241. 1. 13. Adonises and Hyacinthuses. Milton has 

ed. Reisk. i<r6kbs cucouw is cited by H. imitated this idiom : Or HEARST 

Steph. in his Thes. as from Theocritus, thou rather PURE ETHEREAL 

'Akovco takes other cases also before and STREAM? Whose fountain loho can 

after it: del 'A8uivib~as avrovs ical 'Tenth- tell? Par. L. iii, 7. See Hor. Ep. i, 7, 

6ovs aKoveiv, Lucian, de Merc. Cond. 37. — J. S. 
p. 494. B. ed. Salmur. they must be called 



§ V. RULE 1 — 5.] BovXo/uai, yevv^p, &c. 7$ 

make sport of: noXvp he ^popop oi/rw KaTeipupevaafxepot icai cnroXav- 
aavres rov apdpwnov: Plut. Pomp." 



SECTION V. — Boi/Xo/ucu, yevpyp, Ttureiv, yivecQai, yiypwoKetp, 
biayjt>pe~iv, biwKeiv, (pevyen', e7zet,ievai. 

Rule I. EovXo/jiai sometimes signifies, to intend, to aim or en- 
deavour, to effect: y be (pvats fiovXerai pep tovto woieiv woXXaKts, 
ov fxivTot huvarai, Aristot. Polit. i, 4. See al-io Polit. ii, 6. and Rhet. 
ii, 23. also the passage cited from Plato, under ftovXijpa, chap. iii. 
Sect. iv. R. 4. itetyvKe yap )/ A.vaiov Xefys ej^eip to ^apiey, fj be 'lao- 
Kparovs fiovXerai: for the diction of Lysias is naturally graceful ; 
that of Tsocrates affects to be so : Dion. Hal. fiovXeadai, to signify, 
to mean: to pep Tfjs Trjdvos ovk evvoZ t'i fiovXerai, Plato in Cratyl. 

Tevpqv. As yevva.v is not only used properly of males, but impro- 
perly of females ; so rkretv, commonly appropriated to females, is 
sad by good authors of males also: ^.bovcnv—r^p "Hpau yevrrjaa- 
oQat top "H0 a mftov, Lucian. *Nav<riQoop — KaXv\pcj— -y eivaTO, Hes. 
Theog. [1017- See v. 1019- 1007. 962. 978.] top uQavaros Tenero 
Zeis, Horn. II. fi. See Iliad e, 151.* 

Under the verb yheodai the following phrases are to be remarked : 
€7ri ttjs ypw/xrjs yiyveodai, to be of opinion that ; yipeadai eTt ttjs 
eXiribos, to be in hopes. 

II. Teveadai but <p6j3ov, to be in fear ; y. St opyrjs, to be angry ; 
bm fitas yeviodui ypwjj.i]s, to be unanimous: Isocr. Paneg. p. 134. 
Sia ttoXXGip fiaOrj/jLarcjv yepo/uepos, having been conversant in many 
kinds of studies : Lucian, Macrob. p. 831. [642. E. ed. Salmur.] 
[Many other verbs, as elvai, ep-^eaQai, fioXelr, j^tapeip, are used in 
phrases of similar construction and meaning, v. Valck. ad Phoen. 
p. 177. and 526.] 

III. YeveoQat eirl with a dative, to be placed in authority over, to 
have command of : bibaaKaXovs be'i Kal ap^opTcis erri tovtois yevea- 
dai, Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. v. Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 101. 1. 46. 
also to be under the protection of; to trust to ; as, ye po/uep os eir' 
avSpeiorepois, avrioravTW icarey&Xa. With em and an accusative: 
e?r' a/xfoTepa yiypo/uepot rals yvwjj.ats, being opposed in their senti- 
ments ; taking opposite sides in the debate: Thuc. i, 139. 

IV. YIpos icaicov to npayfxa /uoi eyepero, the affair turned out badly 
for me ; vpos ciyadov, the contrary. 

V. With irpds, ep, em, and a dative : to apply to, to be engaged in : 
irpoTepos npos toJs 7rpayfjatn ylypevBai, Dem. de Chers. p. 36. 1. 44. 
yiyveadai ep Xoyois rtpi, to be engaged in discourse with a person : 
Plato Theag. p. 130. 1. 12. But ev to'is wpaypao-i yeviaQai, (Plut. 

a 'AiroXaieu/, to delude, Plut. Moral. &pi<TT0P, &c. Eurip. Suppl. 1092. -n-arphs 

t. iii. p. 370. 1. 6. of Wyttenb. edition in ip x e P ff h T °v TtudpTOS. Id. ib. v. 1133. — 

octavo.— J. S. J. S. 

* "0<rm (pvreicras, Kal peapiav renltiv 



80 ViyveoQai, &C [CHAP. V. § V. 

Tlies. p. 8. 1. 43.) is to be at the head of affairs, to have the govern- 
ment of the state. Sometimes it is followed uy 7rep«ai,d an accusative, 
in the same sense as npvs and a dative : Ceb. Tab. [p. \J . I. 3. ed. 
Simps. Oxon. 1738.] 

VI. KaXws yiyvovrai, they are well, or in a good condition: Plut. 
and impersonally, yiverai /.toi icaXHis, it is well with me. FiyreuOat, 
without caXws, is peculiarly said of sacrifices,* when they are favor- 
able. Fiyreadai is said also of things in general, when they succeed, 
are brought about, or accomplished: see Thuc. vi, 74. iv, 131. 
Plato de Rep. iv. p. 502. de Le«g. vii, 801. 

VII. With and and a genitive, it signifies, to have finished, to be 
fresh or on the return from, to have done ivith, &c. mo twv icpwv 

yevofjeru)' and rrjs -nvpas yevojxevos, Plut. Alex, yevo/nevos and twv 
wjoo^ewv eiceivav, Plut. Themist. Sometimes with this construction it 
signifies to be apart from ; not to associate with: Xen. Mem. i, 2, 
25. So aito 6v/j,oii eivat, to be disagreeable ; ano ckottov, beside the 
mark or purpose : v. Schsef. Melet. crit. p. 51. and adnot. ad Greg. 
Cor. p. 210. s. 

VIII. 'EKnobib}' ylveudai, is, to disappear, to abscond, to be removed 
or put out of the way. 

IX. YevkaQai eavrov, or ev eavrw, or ev eavrov, is to come to one's 
self; to return to one's senses ; to be one's self again: see Demosth. 
Phil. i. [p. 42. 1. 10. ed. Reisk.] c v. Heind. ad Plat. Charm, p. 62. 
Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 950. and in add. ad Aristoph. Vesp. 642. 
yevetrdat Tiros, is to be in a person's power. 

Yiyvecr&ai is used also, — 1. with a substantive to express peri- 
phrastically the signification of some otlier verb ; as, kw\vti)s yiyvea- 
Oai, to hinder, Thuc. iii, 23. <£vyas ylyveadai, to be exiled, Plato 
Pheedr. p. 241. e%apvos yeveaQai, to deny, Lucian, t. i. p. 394. ed. 
Amst. v. Plato Phsedr. p. 229- [p. 196. 1. 24. ed. Basil. 1.] John ix, 
22. And, with a nominative expressed or understood, in a phrase 
significative of perplexity, destitution, desperation : ovic e^oi'ves o re 
yevwvTui, Thuc. ii, 52. [p. 296". 1. 5. ed. Bekk.] — 2. with a geni- 
tive of price or value : noWov apyvpiov yiyveadat, to cost, or be worth, 
a great deal of money : Xen. (Ec. p. 869. — 3. with a dative, for, to 
be present : to bai/jiuriov 0>}s eravrw eKaarore yiyveoQai, Plato Eu- 
thyph. p. 3. [p. 1. 1. 30. ed. Bas. 1.] and, synecdochically, with 
an accusative of the part present : yeve&Qe Sjj fioi — rrjv biaroiav — ev 
rw deaTpo), i. e. imagine yourselves present in the theatre: iEsch. c. 
Ctes. p. 296. [p. 540. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] — 4. with au accusative 
and an infinitive after it, for, to come to pass, to happen : Theogn. 
639. Aristot. Polit. viii, 3. § 15. Luke xvi, 22. Act. Ap. xxi, 1. 
xxii, 17. and with wore before the infinitive: Xen. Cyrop. viii, 2, 2. 
— 5. with an adverb: x w P' s ylyveadai, to be divided: Xen. Cyrop. 
iv, 1, 18. See viii, 7, 20. John vi, 19. and 25. — 6. with a pre- 



6 TlyvecrOcu is said also of a divinity stoph. Lys. 634. — J. S. 

favoring or sanctioning an enterprise : c See also Demosth. 01. ii. p. 5 

aurbsydp ixoiyiyveTairris deols ixBpas 1. 27. ed. Reisk. Xen. Anab. i, 5,15. 

Tca,Ta£ai T^cSe ypabs ttjv yvdOov. Ari- J. S. 



Rule 6—1-2.] Yiyv&aKeiv, &c. 81 

position: nepl bojfxariov ykyovev, Eustatli. v. John vi, 21. — 7« 
with a participle, periphrastically : p) npobovs ?'//ias yern, do not 
betray us: Soph. Aj. 589. v. Philoct. 773. Plato Phsedr. c. 20. 
21. 62. d 

FiyiwcTKeiv signifies to decree, (whence kyvtaafieva, decrees,) to 
resolve, to determine: eyvw Kivbvveveiv, Plut. v. Aristot. Poet, vii, 
26. e 

AmreXety, to continue, with a participle ; as, ypwuevoi biareXov/iev, 
we continue to use, or using : Isoer. c. Soph. See Plato Ap. S. p. 31. 
1. 7. or an adjective; as, biare\u> evbaifiwv, Xen. Ages, i, 37. x, 4. 
Cyrop. i, 5, 10. Mem. i, 6, 2/ 

Aiacpepeiv. bietyepofxev ovbev ec7r\?}£et r&v bp&vrwv, we were no less 
astonished than the (other) spectators : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. £)1S.£ 

X. Ata-^iope~iu, said of money, is, to be current, to pass : Lucian, de 
Luctu. [p. 430. D. ed. Salmur.] /( 

XT. &.iii)K€tv sometimes signifies, to travel rapidly, to post: tSdice 
fiotiQi'ivwv, Plut. Pomp. 2 

Sometimes, (both of persons and things,) to seek the company of, 
to pursue or follow J as an object of desire, emulation, imitation: 
rovs evyvu)fiovas biwuetv, Xen. bevrepa XeKrpa biainei, seeks to marry 
again: Epigr. Gr. biwtce fiaoiXetav e7rtr?j§eu/mra, Isocr. Sometimes 
it is, to persecute; sometimes, to shun or repel: Xen. Ages, iii, 1. 
Anacr. xxxiv, 5. cf. P. Victor. Var. Lect. xxxvi, 71. 

XII. Sometimes it means to accuse, to prosecute; as, biwiceiv riva 
<p6rov: and sometimes biKTjv is added : Isocr. adv. Callim. p. J33. and 
(pevyeiv, on the contrary, is to be prosecuted, to be defendant: <j>ev- 
yov-i b'iKr]v biro Kdrwros, Plut. Cic. p. S78. 1. 37- 'Awotyevyetv is, £0 
be acquitted. 

Avvaadai irarra, to be omnipotent; bvvaadai bio ofioXovs, to be 
ivorth, to be of the same value as, two oboli ; rrjv avrrjv bvyarai bov- 
Xtucrw, amounts to the same subjugation ; carries the same subjuga- 
tion or slavery with it : Thuc. i, 141. [p. 210. 1. 1. Bekk.] 



a Add, yiyv6p.evov apyvpiov, money concern one's self about : v. Casaub. ad 

raised by the sale of things: Xen. Anab. Epict. c. 34. o~La<pepeu/, to spend, to pass, 

v, 3, 5. t« yvyv6\x.zva., the proceeds : lb. (of time) : riiv re vIikto. k«k«s KhaXw Si-ff 

"vii, 6, 30. robs yiyvop.zvovs Sao-ixovs, the veyKev, Plut. Alex. p. 1274. 1. 1. ed. 

tributes established or due: lb. i, 1, 8. — H. St. to get over: u Sioicrei vvitra t^5. 

J. S. Eurip. Rhes. 600.— J. S. 

e Add, yiyvdidKiiv, to knoio carnally: h In allusion to this sense, Polyb. says, 

Ae'yeTcu 6 @ovk6\os 77)v Kvirpiv yvoovo.i, koX rb p.lv irapa. rois aWois 5 iax<0p^v, 

Z-tiKov6tl alffxvvcu, Schol. Theocr. Id. i, laws ob dav/xaaTlv, that the fraud should 

107. — J. S. pass with others : xvii, 30.— J. S. 

/ Add, biareXelv, to complete, to finish, * See Xen. Anab. vii, 2, 11. — J. S. 

to accomplish: avTovpyeiv diravra ical J "There dined with us an Irish knight, 

SiareAeif a fiovKono, Aristot. de Mundo, one Sir John St. Leger, wbo follows the 

c. 6. absolvere, Bud. — J. S. law here, but at a great distance." Swift, 

s Add, ovSlv Siacpepm /xol, with an infi- Letter, November 17, 1711. Here fol- 

nitive mood, / have no objection: De- lows is used, with reference to "the law" 

mosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1239. 1. 14. ed. in the twelfth sense, and with reference to 

Reisk. In the same sense, ob o*ia<p4pop.ai '' at a great distance," in the tenth sense, 

with an infinitive, Dem. Philipp. iii. p. of the word in Johnson's Dictionary (Mr. 

112. 1. 29. Sia^p^dai, to care about, to Todd's edition).— J. S. 

Viger. L 



S2 THE VERB ei/tf. [Chap. v. § vi. 



SECTION VI.— On the verb elpl. 

Rule I. "Eanv os is put for tis, some one, eanv, or elmv, oi, or 
o'lrtves, for some, eanv ols for to some: and so in all cases, numbers, 
and genders: oItov re KareKbfxic!,ov, — teal elotv ol kcl\ ^pi'jfiara, and 
some brought money too: Time, vi, S8. fiovkojievovs eanv a 
elire'iv anetcreivav. i]v 6 ri ical — eredpavaro rfjs r6\fxt]$ rov'Apioftvrrrov, 
the boldness of Ariovistus was somewhat broken : Plut. Ca?s. p. 717. 
v. Thuc. i, 12. ii, 13. 26. iii, 92. Air. iii, 14. 23. and Fisch. ad 
Well. i. p. 343. seq. See Hor. Od. i, 1, 19. and 3. Propert. iii, 7, 17- 

II. "E<ttiv ore, (and esrf}' ore) sometimes : alcnrep ovv e-^prjro 2w/,par?js 
e<TTiv ore: ./Elian iv, 11. but it generally occurs in the beginning 
or middle of sentences. Ouk eanv ore, never: Heliod. HL\\\. and ova 
eanv btrore, Dio. v. Ter. Pliorm. v, 7. So eanv £>s, in some manner. 
"Eanv oVws, it is possible that: Soph. Aj. 379- Eurip. Phoen. 1658. 
ovk eanv orrtos ov% bfiovoriao/jiev, we shall be sure to agree: we 
cannot but agree in future: Isocr. Paneg. p. 150. v. Heliod. iEth. v, 
l6. and Hor. C. iii, 1, £). eanv onov, somewhere, in some places, 
sometimes; and interrogatively ; eanv ottov av rrapuv fjyavaKrrjaas : 
did you any where, (or in any stage of the proceedings) though 
present, express any anger? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 31 6. 

III. El fit, in different persons, numbers, and moods, is often under- 
stood ; and early especially after avdyKt], beivbv, ehbs, obbev olov, (see 
C. III. § viii. R. 6.) v. Schaef. in Mel. crit. p. 43. s. 

IV. So after ihs Xoyos, as it is reported: olbev ^aXe^cc, there is no 
difficulty: Plato Hipp. M. p. 200. 1. 20. v. Plato Apol. S. p. 28. 
1. 10. Aristoph. Eq. 213. Isocr. Nicocl. [p. 94. 1. 4. ed. Battie, Can- 
tab. 1729-] 

V. "Ean be' at the beginning of a sentence, for eyet be ovrojs, now 
the matter stands thus: Demosth. de Chers. p. 36. 1. 5. [p. 91. I. 7- 
ed. Reisk.] 

VI. "Ean ftdXtara tovto beos, this is chiefly to be feared : Demosth. 
Ol. i. and so with other substantives and ovros, as eXnts, Kivbvvos, 
&c. 

VII. r Rv for kariv* Thuc. ii, 6l. [p. 305. 1. 4. ed. Bekk.] So 
■Xpijv, ebet, npoarjicev, eVXeo and ewXero, &c. for the present. 

VIII. E'irj with an accusative and infinitive after it: eirj, — to fivdw- 
bes vTMtcovaai, may the fabulous prove tractable and obedient, &c. 
Prut. Thes. 

IX. Elev, the third person plural, is used in transition to a fresh 
topic or head from one despatched or done with : so much for thai : l 
v. Plato Apol. S. c. 22. extr. or in introducing a particularisation 



k Aristoph. Ach. 767. Lys. 445. l See Demosth. in Androt. p. 597. 
Vesp. 183. 1509. Ach. 157. v. Brunck. Ii 17. in Boeot. de Nom. p. 998. 1. 9. 999. 
ad Aristopb. Thesm. 74.— J. S. I. 17. 1003. I. 11. ed. Reisk.— J. S. 



Rule l— 13.] THE VERB elfxi. 83 

or further developement of what has already been said more gene- 
rally : well then: v. Plat. Ap. S. c. 3. It may be rendered well 
then also when it is used in allowing, or not disputing, the validity of 
an objection urged, and proceeding in consequence to modify by 
interrogation or otherwise what one has to say further: v. Plato 
Phaed. c. 64. or when, a thing being granted, or taken for granted, 
one proceeds : v. Plato Crit. c. 7. Symp. c. 4. It is used in first 
accosting persons, especially before asking a question, like well in 
English : Plato Crit. c. 66. /Esch. Choeph. 717. and before a question 
asked through impatience to hear further: Discip. e^des be y fj'fiiv 
helwvov ovc t)v eaizepas. Streps, eiev. tc ovv irpbs tcLXQit eiraXafii}- 
naro', well; what did he contrive? &c. Aristoph. Nub. 176. It is 
used also hy persons answering when called : eiev y', dcovw : well, I 
hear: iEsch. Choeph. 655. Aristoph. Pac. 663. 

X. The infinitive ehai, especially with hwv, is often redundant in 
Attic authors : m rov be aywva ovk ev rw KoXirip eiciov elvai Troirjaofiat, 
Thuc. ii, 89. with etcovaa, Plato Pheedr. p. 252. init. with eKovres, 
Plato de Rep. vii. p. 518. Xen. Cyrop. v. p. 120. 

'Ekcjv is used without elvai in Xen. Anab. ii. pp. 281. 303. 345. 
Luc. Dom. 595. Demosth. 244, 10. 

Elvai is redundant with other words in Herodot. vii, 143. iv, 33. 
ii, 44. Lucian, 767. and Bis Ace. 322. Xen. Anab. i. p. 260. 
Leuncl. Long. Past. i. p. 14. 9. v. Thorn. M. p. 290. seq. H. Steph. 
de dial. p. 26. Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 164. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. 
C. 11S9.^ 

XI. Elvai is added to the phrase formed by to and I™ with a 
dative ; as, 70 e7r' eiceivois elvai, as far as in them lies ; as far as they 
are concerned: Thuc. viii. [48. p. 205. 1. 15. ed. Bekk.] v. Lysias 
in Agor. 481. in Ergocl. 825. It is also added to signify an end or 
purpose: Horn. II. e, 315. A, 20. 

XII. It signifies relation, especially of a child to a parent ; as, 
HfxiKpov narpos elvai xpaai tov NtKoarrparov, they say Nicostratus is 
the son of Smicrus: Isaeus. (paal pev ovv elvai Qpa(xv/.ia^ov Ni/cd- 
cTparov, that Nicostratus is Thrasymachus's son : Id. [And in such 
phrases tcuXelcdai is sometimes used bv poets instead of elvai : as by 
Pind. Pyth. iii, 118. Eurip. Rhes. 298. Soph. El. 365.] So the 
participle: YlToXeuaiov na\ EvpvbtKt)s olaav, being the daughter of 
Ptolemy and Eurydice. 

XIII. Also of a slave to his master ; and it is used with a genitive 
more generally to denote any kind of possession, whether proper or 
figurative; as, ^j) tov Xeyovros 'iaQi, Aristoph. Eq. 856. So Soph. 
CEd. R. 917. See 1 Cor. iii, 22. Demosth. ad Pantoen. p. 982. 
1. 3. ed. Reisk. vfiiliv ahrwv bvres, being your own masters, not in- 
fluenced by others: Demosth. p. 456. 1. 9. 



m "'Eickv ehai non est simpliciter \by choice ; if you can help it.} Veretamen 

sponte, sed quantum quis sponte quid cum pleonasmo dici credasapud Herodot. 

faciat. ov5e prjv <pi\ois ye, ovSe ^evois eKcvv re elvai Kal Seivov eirwvros ovdevbs, 

entiiv elvai yeAcara irapexeis ■ Xen. Cy- vii, 104." Hermann. See also Herm. de 

rop. ii, 2, 15. id id quidem sponte facias. Ellips. et Pleon. § 210. 211.— J. S. 



84 Eine'iv, <ic. [ClIAP. v. § vii. 

XIV. Eivai, that it be lawful ; (the words of a law;) Demoslh. in 
Timocr. [p. 712. I. 22. ed. Rehk.] 

XV. Elrai, to remain in existence, to remain safe, to be preserved : 
Demosth. <le Pace." 0eay?;s earl, Knl crwcjercu : Heliod. JElh. VI, 5. 
[See note q below.] 

XVI. Eivai els, with an accusative, to make a progress in, to ad- 
vance in : ° Greg. Naz. Or. xxvi. 

With a dative, to be advantageous : p ri tovt earai rrj woXet, De- 
mosth. adv. Lept. p. 46'3. 1. 5. and with npds and an accusative : 
Demosth. p. 1241. I. 23. 

With irepl and an accusative, or kv and a dative, it signifies to be 
occupied in: irepl aw/xuTos laatv eaufxevov, Plato Pheed. p. 248. 1. 39. 
ev yetopyiq. eivai, JE\. V. H. i, 32. 

XVII. Sometimes a third person singular of elp\, and a dative case 
and a participle agreeing with it, are put instead of a nominative 
case and some other verb with which that nominative would agree ; 
as, eneihi) naai (juv\of.ievois i)v, Dion. Hal. iii. p. lpfj. for e. -iruvres 
eftovXovro. e'l aoi ybo/xeya earl, Plato Phaed. c. 24. So with npoa- 
heydfjievos, Arr. Exp. Al. i, 23. with a^Qopevos, Xen. Cyrop. iv, 5, 10. 
and by Homer with uapevos, II. £, 108. This idiom has been 
imitated by Latin authors, Quibus bellum volentibus erat : Tacit, in vit. 
Agric. v. Macrob. Saturn, i, 7. v. Vechn. Hellenol. ii, 9. Dorv. ad 
Char. p. 439. sq. Markl. ad Max. Tyr. xiii, 5. Keen, ad Greg. 
Cor. p. 173. Wessel. ad Herodot. i, 90. p. 4(5. iv, 120. p. 334. 
Valck. ad viii, 101. p. 666. Yiveadui is used in the same manner: 
Heliod. JElh. ii, 29. vii, 11. 

Sometimes in the later Greek authors kcu eir), expressing a wish, is 
added to eau, or earl re: (as in Latin, est mihi, sitque, precor, in 
Ovid, Fast, vi, 21 9. and in Mart. ep. ix, 18.) Psell. in vit. Const. 
Due. Philostrat. in Aspas. ex conject. Valesih? 



• SECTION VII.-— Of THE VERBS elrce'tv, eXirLZeiv, i&pxeadai, 
efyevai, eoffca, ej(w. 

Rule I. Elirelv in Attic writers is sometimes redundant : ical tov 
'Aarvctyrjv GKU)\pavrci elne'iv, oby^ bpqs, (pavai, <Ls KaXws olvo)(pei; Xe- 
nopii. Cyrop. i. Rat elirev, w 'lipanXeis, &/,?}, Plato Rep. i. p. 337- 
v. Plat. Theag. p. 129- Sometimes & participle of one of the taulo- 
logous verbs is used : 6 be — elite ^as, Herodot. Er. c. 67. 



» P. 61. 1. 13. ed. Reisk. where for not in carat.— J. S. 
ware ehai Reiske has printed aS>s re ehai 1 Add, ovZev el/.u, I am undone, I am 

from his own conjecture. — J. S. ruined: Aristoph. Vesp. 997. and obiter 

Viger appears to be in error here, elfi eyui, it is alt over tvith me: Aristoph. 

el Kal 1X7] aiirol roaovrov i)aa.v els aperr)V, Ach. 1185. but ovSev el in Aristoph. 

seems to mean, even although they them- Eccl. 144. is, you are of no importance, 

selves were not so very eminent in virtue, you are nobody, ehai jxera ywainos, said 

— J. S. of sexual intercourse : Aristoph. Plut 

p The intimation of advantage is in rl, 1081.— J. S. 



Rule l—<?.] 'EXa75«, &c. 85 

II. It often signifies, to give one's suffrage for, to decree ; as, et7re7f 
(pv\aia)v t to decree a guard: Demosth. [de Chers.] p. 103. 1. 10. 
eel. Reisk. eba>Kav avrS r>)v ap^i/v, Aevntov fyiXimrov y v w /j. y] v ei- 
ttovtos, on the recommendation of Lucius Philippus ; Lucius Phi- 
lippus having authorised the measure by speaking and voting first 
in favor of it : Plut. in Pomp.' 

'EXtti^w and eXnofxcu properly signify merely to expect, or to think, 
and are therefore used in speaking of evil/ as well as of good ; as, 
f.i€jiaTr}v avfxtyvpav — i]Xtcl£,ov TzeiaeaBai, Lys. Or. Fun. p. 505. v. 
Herodot. Er. c. 100. Horn. II. v, [v. 8.]Oppian, Hal. i, 88. also 
Virg. JEn. iv, 41Q. ii, 658. x, 2£1. xi, 275. Catull. carm. 83. 

HI. 'E^epxeadai and k^ievai are sometimes used absolutely, for, to 
march, to go forth to war: Demosth. 01. ii. [p. 21. 1. 18. and 25.] 

IV. "Eoiko. sometimes indicates inclination or intention : eon: a be 
Kal vvv viroicara(3ri(7ea9ai, and now too, I think I shall go down — Je 
pense queje men vais descendre: Lucian, in Charon, [p. 328. B. ed. 
Salmur.] 

V. "Eoikc, with a dative, it is fit, becoming, consentaneous.* 

VI. 'tis eoiKe, parenthetically, a kind of slight affirmation ; it seems: 
6 yap bfi yjpovos eKelvos ijveyKev avdpwwovs, — (lis eoicev — inrep<pve7s, 
&c. Piut. Thes. [p. 6. 1. 27. ed. H. St.] So, iraiav yap, ws eoa-e, 
xecpaXrj tovs ei'Tvy^avorras 6 Tep/xepos, a-rrisjXXvev : for Termer-us, it 
seems, killed those, who fell in with him, by strokes of his head : 
Plut. ib. [p. 10. 1. 5. ed. H. St.] In these two passages, the phrase 
is nearly equivalent to, as the tradition is, as appears from history 
or report, v. Plut. Thes. [p. 24. 1. 8. ed. H. St.] 

VII. In the following passage also, in which ws eoa-e signifies much 
more than appearance of truth or probability, it may be rendered by 
it seems : aXX' ovk i)v ravra, ws eoiKe, to'is 'Adrjvaiois Trarpict, ovS' 
aveKTu, ovb' e/jcpvTci, Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 295. 1. 24. ed. Reisk.] 

VIII. And in the following: fxeXXuv be Ibiov fiiov iravTos, ws 
eoiKe, Xoyov bibovai ri]iiepov : Demosth. pro Coron. [p. 227- 1. 25. ed. 
Reisk.] [The necessity of entering into a justification of all his past 
actions was apparent to Demosthenes from the accusations of iEs- 
chines.] ws eWev, it is plain, as is manifest : Plato in Conv. [p. 
1'76. I. 17. ed. Bas. 1.] forsooth, it seems, ironically : Demosth. pro 
Cor. [p. 298. 1. 23. ed. Reisk.] 

' 'EmXaftfiareGdcu, with a genitive, is, to seize, to lay hold on, to cen- 
sure or reprehend, to get, to gain, to come upon. 

IX. "E^w is joined with many adverbs in various modes of con- 

r Of the compounds of €Lir€?y,Karenti?y, 1350. 1. 11. ed. Reisk. inrenruv for irpo- 

to inform against, to accuse, (Aristoph. enrelis, Aristoph. Plut. 997. Vesp. 55. — 

Pac.377.) is sometimes simply to tell; as J. S. 

in Aristoph. NuK 224. 1278. Plato s TovtI /xa Ai" iy&> rb kcmov ov ttot 

Theag. p. 239. 1. 26. ed. Bas. 1. Trpoaei- ij\iri(r' &u : Aristoph. Av. 956.— J. S. 
•new, to say in addition, to add : Demosth. * la the passage cited by Viger from 

in Aristocr. p.395. 1. 26. ed. Hervvagianas Demosth. OLynth. ii. [p. 18. 1. 10. ed. 

secundaB : hut Reiske, p. 628. 1. 13. has Reisk.] it appears lo have its proper and 

irpowrwv.- — Trpoeiiteiv rvA <\>6vov, to give ordinary sense ; resembles, or is like, and 

one notice of a prosecution against him for is to he rendered, is like the effect of. 

murder : Pseudo-Demosth. in Neser. p. —J. S. 



86 "Ex eu '- [Chap. v. § vii. 

struct ion; as, iibwurios e?x €n '» t° be unable: v. Arr. Exp. Al. i. 
c. 26. us '&kcu7tos eroifxorriTos J) j3ov\}'iaews eoye, according to the 
degree of readiness or inclination of each : Pint. Camill. nvrws 
c'xw rijs yi'w/jrjs, this is my opinion: v. Lucian, Demosth. Enc. p. 
890. tovtwv oXiywpcos eyeiv, to neglect these things: Demosth. 
Phil. iv. p. 60. eyeiv bfiolws Till, Herodot. hi. 24. InreyBCJs 
eyovTes npos civtov, bearing ill-will towards him: Herodian i, 12. 
kyiXws e'x € '> and KaWiara eyet, are expressions by which an offer or 
invitation is civilly declined :" Athen. Deipn. xiv, 12. Theocr. xv, 
3. like recte and benigne. v. Ter. Eun. ii, 3, 50. Hor. Ep. i, 7, 
]6. and 62. KaXws e^ei, with a dative, is becoming or honorable 
to : Xen. Mem. i, 3, 3. 

X. With prepositions eyeiv forms various circumlocutions : a/u^i 
or irep\ ti eyeiv, to be occupied about something ; eye.iv bia (j>povTi- 
bos, to think or study about: Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 907. bia 
oto/jlcitos eyeiv, to mention frequently : Athen. Deipnos. xiv, 3. eyut 
ae kv opyjj, I am incensed against you: Thuc. ii, 18. eyeiv kv 
aiTtats or hi ahias, to blame. knl ccpiai eyovTcis, being hostile or 
adverse to them: Herodot. Er. c. 49- 

And with participles also: aiyuivra eyeiv, to keep silent : Arrian 
iv, 8. but chiefly with participles of aorists : tov \6yov be aov Trakai 
Oav/jLaaas ej(w, / have long been wondering at your discourse: 
Plato Phaedr. p. 257- 1.21. v. Hesiod, Op. 42. -KTii^avTes elyov, 
they kept cowering: Eurip. Cycl. 406. eyei irepavas, he has 
done or perpetrated : Soph. Aj. 22. properly, he is in the state or 
condition of one who has done or perpetrated. — In such expressions 
regard is had both to the time of the participle and of eyeiv. v. Valck. 
ad Phoen. p. 267. seqq. 

Sometimes a participle of eyeiv is joined pleonastically with a 
finite verb; as <p\vape~is eywv, you trifle: Plato Gorg. Xripels 
e'xwi', you prate idly: Cratin. See Aristoph. Nub. 509- Plato Phaedr. 
p. 340. 

XI. With irpos, or els, eyeiv is, to relate to: ks tovtov tov uvbpa 
eyet to fjiavTevfj.a, Pausan. El. i. b'oov eyei irpos kfie, as far as I 
am concerned. 

Xlf. "Eyeiv, to cause or create: eyeiv tydovov, to move envy: 
iEschyl. Prom. 865. tuvt 6pyi)v eyei, these things excite anger: 
Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 57. 7rpay/Ltara eyeiv rtvi, to give him trou- 
ble. (But, without a dative, 7rpay^ara eyeiv is, to have trouble: Dem. 
de Class, p. 74. Plat. Theaet. p. 174.) See Hermann in addend, 
ad Gregor. Cor. ed. Schsef. p. 863. 

XIII. TloXvv r'ibri tov ypovov eyw, fxi] irpos avTOV kiriGTeiXas, is, it is 
now a long time since 1 wrote to him: Chrysost. in Ep. 

XIV. "Eyeiv is sometimes nearly equivalent to scire, to know : 
ovti yap otcojs /3o?j0u) eyu), ovt av onws fxi] (3or]d)'iow eyw, Plat, de Rep. 
ii. abb' 6 ti ypi) voielv e£ere, Demosth. p. 425, 10. ed. Reisk. 

XV. "Eyeiv forms circumlocutions with many accusatives ; as, 

* So irdvv KaKus, without e^e:, Ari- 5G8. and Ka\as alone is a civil refusal in 
stoph. Ran. 512.- and KaWiar, iiratvw, the same comedy, v. 888. — J. S. 



Rule 10— 15.] "Exetv. 87 

airoXoyiav ex eLV > for axoXoyeiadai, 3L\. V. H. ii, 39. fiiov e\eiv, 
for fitwvai, lb. iii, 29« yvwjurjv e'^eo', for ytyp&fffreiv, (to decree or 
determine,) lb. iv, S. 5et7ryov e'x«v, for Set7r»'e7j/, lb. iii, 39. 
h v s t v ^V p a ex eiv > ^ or ^w^'" y X e ^ ,/ > ^ys. P* 746". ed. Reisk. enlboaiv 
e^euf, for e7ribibovai, Xen. CEc. xx, 23. epyov ex eiV > f° r epya^erx- 
Qai, Xen. Mem. ii, 10, 6. Ages, xi, 12. Kaipbv e'xetv, fo 6e se«- 
sonahle or opportune : Thuc. i, 42. Kaicdi> ex eiv > to he diseased; 
to be faulty: Plat. Gorg. p. 478. \6yov e'xeiv, to be reasonable: 
Plato Phaedr. p. 62. bvo/xa e'xetj', to be called ; to be represented, 
(falsely; and in opposition to being in reality ;) Herodot. Pol. c. 13S. 
<pvffiv e'xei*', to be natural; to be probable: Demosth. 01. ii. 
Herodot. ii. 

With some accusatives it has a reciprocal construction ; as, for 
instance, either fivvxfav 4 ! xw, or fio-vyta e'^et f*e, Herodot. Er. c. 135. 
v. Odyss. I, 215. Iliad y, 342. /3, 2. Plat. Apol. c. 27- 

With accusatives of art, science, and the like, it signifies to know ; 
6 rfiv apidjj.r)TiKi)v exiov, he that understands, or is master of, arith- 
metic: Plat. Ion. p. 531. rr\v (jxovijv aKptfietTTepav e'xety, to under- 
stand the language more exactly : Ceb. Tab. [p. 44. 1. 8. ed. Simps. 
Oxon. 1738.] 

With an accusative neuter of an adjective in the comparative de- 
gree, it may be translated by esse, with an ablative in Latin ; in 
English by an idiom not unlike the Greek ; as, eXaeaov ex eiv > '° ^ ave 
the worst of it: Thuc. iii. c. 5. In the imperative, e'xe bij is, attend 
now, mind now ; e^e br), tcui fxoi robe etVe, Plato Io. p. 535. [" Non 
male Ficinus vertit, animadverte quid velim." Hermann.] To fikv 
7ex»'»?s re am drex^tns Xoywv irept, luavois e^erw, let this suffice : Plato 
Pliaedr. p. 274. 

"E^etv sometimes signifies, to be rich: Lysias p. 579- ed. Reisk. 
Soph. Aj. 157. Demosth. p. 1123. v. Aristoph. Plut. 596. and 
1 Cor. xi, 22." 

"Exeodai, with a genitive, signifies, to lay hold on, to keep hold of : w 
ixovrat tov ottXov, M\. de N. Anim. V, 3. tovtov exopevos f]yov/j.at 
oiiic civ Trore ireaelv, Plat. Phaed. p. 100. 1. 40. To cleave to, to adhere 
to, to apply to: rwv fleXrlarwv e'xov, Epict. Ench. c. 29. v. 
Tbeogn. 31. <piXoao<plas exo/ieros, Plat. Ep. 7» P- 340. 1. 33. 
/ladrjfiaTwv eixero, Aristid. Or. Fun. in Eteon. p. 136. rrjs 7rXr]yfjs 
e'xerat, he applies his whole attention and care to the stroke he has 
already received, io the neglect of his guard against succeeding ones : 
Demosth. Phil. i. p. 51. [I. 26. ed. Reisk.] To buckle to, to set 
about: rfjs bbonroplas e'ixero, Herodian ii, 11. rf/s lepovpyias 
ex^f^eda, Heliod. iEth. x, \6. To cherish; exerrdai tovtuv tG>v 
avbpGjv, Plat. Ep. 6. To follow closely and unremittingly for the 
purpose of fastening upon; to pursue with constant scrutiny in 
order to expose, stigmatise, fyc. exeadai twv abiKTjpaTwy tov ^tXimrov, 
Demosth. pro Cor. p. 251. To be attached to or connected with, 

v Add, ttov <rxh<Tnv Sonus ; Aristoph. w Also, with a genitive of a person, to 

Ran. 188. a nautical term : what port (or spare, to keep one's hands off: Aristoph. 

land) do you think you shall make? For Av. 1336. — J. S. 
■kuvt' %x eis see note w > P» 50. — J. S. 



88 "Hku), &c. [Chap. v. § viii. 

and therefore to participate in the character or qualities of; rdis 
uXijOeias expH&vois ireiOofjevos, Euseb. in Hierocl. c. 12. To depend 
on, to be in the power of; aev b' exerat bovvai fliov i)b' acpeXe'adat, 
Horn, in Terr. Matr. v. Horn. II. i, 102. Plat. Protag. p. 324. To be 
next in order, time, rank; ret e^u/ieva rwv elprifiivwv, Heliod. jEth. 
v, 1(5. v. Xen. CEc. vi, 1. ev Tf k\op.iv^ eviavro), 1 Machab. iv, 28. 
t'X«juevas fJLOv aadi'/aij, [l] Esdr. iv, 42/ 



SECTION VIII. — OF THE VERBS iJKO), kot aXafi fiut'OJ, tce~tf.iat, 
Xai'dcivw, f.ie\X(j), I'lxato, vo/ui^oj, oiba, iidt, ot/aui. 

Rule I. "Hew is joined with participles present, past, and future : 
iJKei fepwv, he bri?igs: Isaaus. ijKev avaarpexpas, he returned: De- 
niosJh. i]Kia ovfifiovXevawv, I come to counsel or advise: Demosth. 

II. With 7r6ppw, ev, and enl ttoXv, a genitive following : Troppw rfjs 
yXiKias ijxwv, far advanced in years. Trvppo), or ev, or e#t noXv, ttjs 
Traibelas ijicetv, to make a great progress in learning, ev i'jiceiv twv 
Xprjfju'iTUJi', to be rich : Herodot. 

QeX<o, and edeXw. 'EdeXto has sometimes the sense of fxeXXoj : He' 
rodot. ii, 11. ii, 14. also of bvpafiai : Herodot. i, 74. avXeiot be t 
k\eiv ovk edeXovai dvpai, Solon, v. Plat. Phaadr. p. 230. 1. 35. and 
Hor. Art. Poet. 89. Also of soleo, e'iuda, Herodot. Polyh. 157. 
Plat, de Rep. vi. p. 503. v. Bach, ad Xen. Hier. i, 30. and Hindenb. 
ad Xen. Mem. iii, 12, 8. QeXto is used in speaking of the meaning 
or purport of words, or of the nature of things : rl QeXei to enos eh>at ; 
Herodot. Er. c. 37- v. Act. Ap. ii, 12. xvii, 20. 

KaraXafifiuveti> is sometimes used impersonally : 'E7rw7rea kolt- 
eXafiev cnroduvelv, Paus. in Cor. p. 95. it came to pass that Epo- 
pens died. [See H. St. Thes. ii, 571. g.] 

Kelodai is said of laws enacted: rols robots to~is Kei/j.evois e/3o>j- 



x The following significations of deri- bring it about : Polyb. iv, 52. iirexew, 

vatives and compounds of l^o) are worthy to purpose, to design : Diog. Laert. Anax- 

of observation : <rxvf ia ' T ' i t eiv > to dance , to imen. to restrain, to repress, to repel: 

cut capers: Aristoph. Pac. 324. tira/jure- Aristoph. Vesp. 338. Pac. 1121. to 

Xeiv, to cloak: Plut. Sert. p. 1046. 1. 13. hinder; to prevent : Polyb. ix, 1. to 

ed. Steph. auex^v, to solemnise, to cele- sue for, to canvass for, to aim at: Ari- 

brate: Aristoph. Thesm. 948. to inhabit : stoph. Lys. 490. to cease: Aristoph. Eq. 

Soph. CEd. C. 674. to emerge from, to 915. to persecute: Horn. Od. t, 71. 

escape: Soph. CEd. R. 174. ■Kpoo , av£x eiV > Karifyeiv, to dwell: Theogn. 262. to take, 

to wait, to remain quiet: Polyb. v, 17. to take down: Polyb. ii, 32. to last, to 

Trpoaai'exeo'dcu %fjv, to endure to live : Po- hold, to continue : Aristoph. Pac. 944. 

lyb. E. Peiresc. p. 106. avoQerai gov Sia/caTe'xeu', to take possession of : Polyb. 

twv ira-Tpiioiv xpV^-Tcay, will contest with iv, 55. irpocexeti', to have besides ; to 

you al law the right to them: Aristoph. have in addition: Plat, de Rep. vii. p. 

Av. 1658. c«rex eiJ/ > to receive: JEsop. 438. 1. 1. ed. Basil. 1. irpoo-ix^ lv A*/*^*"* 

Fab. 47. Plut. t. i. p. 165. 1. 21. 219, 22. (an accusative instead of a dative) to 

iii. 1248. 1. 17. ed. Steph. Siex^iy, to re- make; to sail into: Po]yb.n,9.Trpo4xety, 

move, to put away : Plut. Alcib. p. 352. to be more ancient, to be before: Diog. 

1. 10. Sie'xew toss xe?pas, to be anxiously Laert. in Cleob. p. 34. 1. 8. ed. H. St. — 

desirous of a thing ; to exert one's self to J. S. 



R'ULE 1—4.] Aavflavw— -MeXXw. S$ 

Qow, Lysias c. Frum. icaXws nei/uevovs vofxovs, Lucian, Abdic. Hence 
<S. hi) TzsTcpiDjieva Kelrai, Orph. Argon. 104. Keladai e'is ri, to be des- 
tined or inevitably appointed to it: 1 Thess. iii, 3. Philipp. i, 17. 
But Keiadai els ittuxjlv, &c. Luke ii, 34. is to be appointed or set as 
the cause of it : Kelerdat kv farepw, to be manifest ; kv atyave'i, to be 
obscure or uncertain : Time, i, 42. Kehat ry noXei otojxu, the name 
given to the city is — : Plat. Cratyl; r« auirripia iroXews /cetrcu kv 
avTf, rests with, depends on : v. D inarch, c. Demosth.* 

III. Aavdara) is often joined with a participle ; when the latter 
may be translated, as if it had the same form as the part of Xavdario 
with which it is joined, and the former by secretly ; without discovery 
or observation ; as, eXadev vTreKfvywv, he escaped without observation : 
— or by, without perceiving it, or being sensible of it ; as, eXadev els 
fiiffovs e/jLireGfov rovs 7roXe^u'oi/s.* kXaOofxev tj/ias avrovs Ttaihtav ovoev 
&ia<pep6vTes, Plat. Crit. p. 49. 1. 11. we differed nothing from chil- 
dren, without being aware of it ourselves. In the following passage 
the participle is understood : eiratov rrj fxayaipq. 6 tl bvvaifitjv Xavdd- 
veiv (naiwv viz.) : Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 53. s And other verbs are found 
in a similar construction : as, -^pverf ttclttosv fx ov yiyvwaiceis, Aristoph. 
Nub. 909. eiriarajxevos -naXai kite Kpvirrov, Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 14. 
Sometimes Xavduvoj is followed by on and another verb; as, ov Xav- 
davets fxe, ort Xeyeis ravra, &c. Xen. Mem. iii, 5, 24. v. Xen. CEc. 
i, 19. and Hindenb. ad 1. pr. — or kcu : as eXadov <ccu cnriKretvav, for 
kXaQov airoKTeivavTes. — or be : v. Iliad %» 277 '• Sometimes the con- 
struction with the participle is reversed, the participle employed 
being one of Xavdavui : etcirXovv iroielrai Xadibv ttjv <J>v\uki]v : for 
■noiovfjievos eXade, Thuc. i, 65. irpovXeyov XwdavovTes, Herodian 
ii, 14. 

Other verbs, especially such as signify continuance or conclusion, 
are construed, as Xavddva) is, with a participle; as, fiavdavwv btareXel., 
he continues always learning: v. Plat. Gor#. p. 49 1. 1. 25. XaQwv 
avros envrbv, having forgotten himself : Euseb. Pra?p. iii. 

IV. MeXXw in its ordinary sense is always followed by an infinitive ; 



v Here some unusual senses of several to close ; ^v\\dp.j3av avrov rb ar6/u.a, stop 
-compounds of Xafifidvo) may be men- his mouth: AristoprT. Ach. 926. viroXap.- 
tioned : 5ia\ap.^dveiv, to share, i. e. to ffdveiv, to understand, to take one's mean- 
receive in shares: Xen. Anab. v, 3, 5. to ing : Plat. Gorg. p. 307. 1. 33. etl. Basil. 
seize or arrest : Plut. Arat. p. 1893. 1.31. prim. viro\ap.j3dvea6ai, to be thought or 
ed. H. St. to seize by the middle: Ari- judged of as to character: Demosth. in 
stoph. Eq. 264. to intersect or divide: Aristocr. p. 623. 1. 5. ed. Reisk — J. S. 
Polyb. v, 59. to fence off, or fortify; z The construction of this phrase has 
Polyb. i, 42. to deliberate, to consult: been imitated by Virgil : sensit medics 
Polyb. iv, 25. to determine, to resolve: delapsus in hostes : JEn. ii, 377. — J. S. 
Polyb. iv, 5. to be assured or convinced a An infinitive is sometimes substituted 
of: Diog. L. in Zen. p. 240. ed. H. for the participle ; as, p.^ AavOdvcao-iv 
St. iK\ap.pdveiv,tolearn,to acquire the — ras peylffTas Kal KaWiffTas irpo'ievai 
knowledge of: Polyb. ii, 39. i^eAa^eu rip.ds : lest they heedlessly lavish and 
&rav, (Ionic) gets or receives: Diog. throw away, &c. Polyb. v, 90. e\adev 6 
Laert. in Biant. p. 32. 1. 15. ed. H. St. Bpovros «otoi irvhas epx e ^0ai irpbs 
tulit: Is. Casaub. ovXAafiQdveiv, to r6irov eXdSri, Plut. iu Brut. p. 1804. 
join, to connect (one word with another): 1. 2. ed. H. St.— J. S. 
Aristoph. Eq. 21. to squeeze together, 

Viger. M 



90 MiXXut — NiKciw. [Chap. v. § viii. 

as, fxeXXio noielv, I am about to do. fxeXXw KiQapictew, M\. V. II. 
iii, 32. ovofiaaai (UeWw)/, Lvs. p. 412. cd. Lond. fieXXovriov aXwiai 
Xt/jy, JEl. V. H. v, 20. virep fxeXXw iraQelv, ZEsch. Proai. 626. fxeXXui 
v/ids btba£,eu>, Plat. Apol. 6". 

V. The infinitive is sometimes understood : as in tu piev e/.ieXXev, 
cos eboKei, tlov beivtov, tu b' i')br} 7raprjv : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 292. 
1. 15. ed. Reisk.] yevrjtreaOat, LTVLifiriaeo-dni, or the like. In /jijbets 
(pdoi'U) to fxeXXov ukovctt), Demosth. in Lept. Xe^dijrreaOui. 

VI. The infinitive suppressed is sometimes that of a verb pre- 
ceding in the sentence ; as, tus pev knopdow, ras be €LieXXoi>, (iropdi/- 
oeiv viz.) rals be yiretXovv tlov iroXewr, Isocr. in Hel. Laud. — or fol- 
lowing, as in Thuc. i, 134. [p. 195. 1. 3. ed. Bekk.] and Athen. Deipn. 
iv. p. 166. 

VII. Me\\fa> sometimes signifies, ivhal must necessarily come to pass, 
what must be, ivhat ought to be, what is to be : cod efxeXXev, wcnrep 
ehos, els adpoovs flaXXiov, ciei twos Tev£eoBai oko-kov, he could not but 
hit some mark: Dion. Hal. v, 24. v. Horn. II. £, 125. Od. a, 232. 
b, 181, 377- a, 137. x» 322. Pyrrhus, in answer to the soldiers 
who called him an eagle, r.i yap ov LieXXio, rols v/j.erepois onXois, &mtep 
wKVTTTepots, alpopevos ; how can I but be one, raised on high as lam 
upon your arms as upon wings? Plut. in Apophth. — In the Phredo of 
Plato, Socrates, to one saying odev be cnreXinofxev, k-rraveXQwfxev, e'i 
col ijbo[xepw kaTiv' answers, aXXa I'lbofievcp ye' ttuis yap ov fxeXXet ; how 
can it be otherwise? 24 extr.— v. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 405. Xen. 
CEc. xviii, 1. and Bach, ad 1.*' 

Tt eiieXXov KeXevtreiv ', 1) t'i ov^ovXevaeiv avTrj Trotelv ', what could 
I bid, or what advise the state to do ? what ought I to have ordered, 
&c. Demosth. pro Cor. beticvvei, iroiav dboy avrovs bel (3ubl$eLi', el 
<no$etrdai [xeXXovcnv kv rw /3/w, if they are to be preserved, &c. Ceb. 
Tab. el fxeXXei opdws bioiKe'icrdai // koXis, if the republic is to be rightly 
administered. 

VIII. (XI.) MeXXetv signifies to be dilatory, to delay : fxeXX-qreov 
ovbev ere, Plat. Grit. p. 108. 1. 40. v. Aristoph. Plut. 606. Acts 
xxii, 16. And in this sense it is used of things which are de- 
layed : e-^Bpav ov fxeXXovaav, Thuc. i, 42. to. xpZ/uara jifi fxeXXiiveiv, 
Julian, ap. Herodian. ii, 6. and to fxiXXov, delay, backivardness, pro- 
crastination, Eurip. Or. 426. Thuc. i, 84. 

IX. (XII.) Nncq.v is sometimes to gain a cause ; to have a sentence 
or verdict in one's favor: sometimes simply to excel: Horn. II. xviii, 
252. The accusative i'//fijv is put after it: Horn. Od. xi, 544. also 
an accusative of that in or by which superiority or victory is gained ; 
as, viklxv 'OXv/iiria. navra (aedXa) kvltca, Horn. II. iv, 389- viklov 
bpofxov, Pind. 01. iv, 34. xiii, 42. 01 pwropes, 01 vhclovtcs ras yviofias, 
who have a majority in favor of their counsel; whose votes, or 
counsel, prevail : Plat. Gorg. p. 456. vlkcjv \pr]<j>i<T/iia, to get a pse- 
phism or decree proposed by one passed. 

6 See Aristoph. Nub. 1301. Ran. 208. ed. Reisk. hitta rb, Ttu9ia — t£ re6plvircp, 

Vesp. 460 J. S. Pseurio-Demosth, in Neser. p. 1356. 1. 5. 

« Demosth. in Theocr. p. 1342. 1. ult. —J. S. 



Rule 5—14.] No/i/Su— Oiba. g\ 

X. (XIII.) The suffrage or counsel itself is also said to conquer or 
prevail, vucqv : i\v yap UepiicXeovs yi wyur/ wporepov veviKnKvia, Thuc. ii. 
V efii) (yrui/ATj viz.) vikj., Plat, de R.ep. iii. p. 397. 

In this sense it is sometimes put absolutely with an infinitive 
after it ; as, ws b' ovv eviKa (peiiyetv els rr]v A'iyvnrov, when, there- 
fore, the majority were in favor of escaping to Egypt: Plut. Pomp, 
p. 660. [p. 1205. 1. penult, ed. H. St.] 

XI. (XIV.) Nikqv and eKviKqv signify to prevail, to obtain, as a 
custom, a report, an opinion, &c. in which sense they are sometimes 
put absolutely as impersonals : tov eiri 'lXtu> (underst. 7r6Xefxov) 
KXtjdrjvai TpmKov, ical ov% 'EXXijiikov, k%et>i.Kr)oe : Paus. Messen. 

The verb Kparelv has the same significations and constructions as 

XII. (XV.) NopiSetv is sometimes to institute or establish by law; 
to practise or observe by law or by custom ; to use : ol "lwves en teal 
vvv vofiigovirt, celebrate by custom, ((he Bacchanalian rites, viz.) 
Thuc. ii. tovs fioiypvs vofxiSovat noXXal tuiv noXewv vrjiroiva atro- 
Kreiveiv, sanction by laiv : Xen. Hier. iii, 3. Hence ret vevopnafxeva, 
the institutions of a state; irapa to vevo/uio-fieiov 'Pw/xalois, Sozom. 
viii, 10. j'o/i/eW iTnroTpotpias, Pind. Isthm. ii, 55. v. iEsch. Choeph. 
1003. (999. v. Abresch.) Virg. Mn. vii, 690/* ^w^v vo/uigovTes, 
Herodot. ii. With a dative; r£ vofxiafian rofxliovai, use: JEsch. 
Dial, ii, 24. v. Thuc. ii, 38. and Abresch, Diluc. Thuc. p. 193. 
vo/ui£eo6ai, to be in use: Plat. Gorg. ottws twv vofxiSo/ueruv rvyuoi, 
i. e. evayia\iaTb)v, vevop.iajxeviov, Demosth. p. 733. ed. Reisk. v. and 
p. 1399. 'SofitSovra Xeyeiv in Plat. Pliaedr. p. 257. 1. 32. is, to speak 
in earnest ; to say what one really thinks. 

XIII. (XVI.) Olba, I know, is used instead of the present elbu, 
and the compound avvoiba instead of avveihu) or avveibofiai : v. Acts 
xxvi, 27. In the second person olada : v. Plat. Gorg. p. 486. 
Olb' on is used parenthetically, and is generally preceded by el : 
ijKovere [xev ovv, ev olb' on, Kat v/xels 'laerovos bvo/ua : Xen. H. Gr; 
vi. v. Demosth. de fals. leg. p. 201. 1. 37. eXtofxai n wv, ev olb' on, 
Kenedy ovtidv : Plat. Apol. 27. where there is a confusion, very com- 
mon in Greek authors, of two distinct phrases; viz. eXwfiai n twv 
Kaictov, and eXwfiai n tovtwv, a ev olb' on koko. can. Ev does not 
always precede olb' on thus used : Aristoph. Lys. 60. Demosth. 
Phil. ii. p. 28. Aristid. Or. Leuctr. p. 91. Olb' on often concludes 
a sentence: v. Aristoph. Vesp. 1339- Pac. 364. Plut. 890. Eurip. 
Phcen. 1611. 

XIV. (XVII.) And in the same unconnected manner ev 'iadi and 
ev 'iad' on are used, both in the middle and at the end of sentences. 
See Xen. Cyrop. v, near the beginning. Alo-xvvolprjv av, ev "10Q1, 
eV uvt(3 : Lucian. Ev 'iaff on concludes a sentence in Aristoph, 
Plut. 183. 

d With an infinitive: ovrw 5irj7e7<r0cu puTTevofievovrraph To7sAlru\oh, obtaining 

vonlfyva' ol ao<po\, Aristoph. Vesp. 1196. or prevailing as legitimate: Polyb. E. 

An infrequent use of vofMicrreieiv may be Peir. p. 77.— J. S. 
noticed here : tov x a P a KTripos tovtov vo- 



*)2 KarayivuoKeiv — Aeyeiv. [CHAP. V. § ix. 

OTSa is used periphrastically ; as, hvfaa beiKhv 0\o8a <pvyav, Antipat. 
Thessal. xxvi. and for solere, to use or be wont : pavls vbaros — <cai 
Trerpav olbe [can] KaiXaiveiv, Aristaen. i. epist. 17. v. Barlh. ad Claud. 
p. 85)2. and Abrescli. ad Aristam. p. 336". and punQaveir, Casaub. ad 
Athen. p. 718. 

XV. (XVIII.) Olftai, parenthetically, is used both seriously and 
ironically, like credo and opinor ; it may sometimes be rendered uti- 
que, nimirum, to wit ; prof ecto, truly: ohias, ol/iai, ical ttXowv ra 
KVLTiadev Irr^vporara elvai bel : Demosth. 01. ii. e 

XVI. (XIX.) O'iet, the second person, is often equivalent to 
obsecro, tandem, pray : ovk citottov, o'Lei, fiynaerai ; ivill he not, I pray 
you, think him a person of strange and preposterous notions? Plat, 
de Rep. vii. 



SECTION IX. — Of THE VERBS Koraytiw/cetv, Xeyeiv, ofioXoyetv, 
6<p\iaK(ivetr, TrapnTTc'iyai, ■Kaayeiv, irepCibeiv, 7repiop<jiv. 

Rule I. KaraytvwaKetv, with a genitive of the person and an 
accusative of the thing, signifies to condemn in, to pronounce or 
think guilty of, to judge worthy or deserving of:f as, KaraynwirKw 
aovKoWiivajxaQiav. Kartyvwv vpiwv pqQvfiiav, Chrys. ad pop. Antioch. 
And otpXiaicaveiv with an accusative of the thing is used in the sense 
of the passive KarnyivdxTKeadai ; as, tjXiktiv tiv tbcpXrjKOTes irapuvoiav 
?itc, what an opinion of folly you would have incurred : how sense- 
less you would have been thought: Demosth. Ol. i. alayyvriv uxpXrj- 
kcltc, Demosth. adv. Aristocr. p. 660. So Philipp. i. p. 52. y&Wa 
6<pXioKavovai, they incur derision: Chrysost. 

Sometimes, however, KarayivuxTKeiv has an accusative of the person, 
and a genitive of the thing ; as, tovtov [xfj KarayivwaKeiv <povov, Lys. 
pro Erastoth. 

-Aeyw sometimes exaggerates or extenuates : pi-qhepds ovtos ev amy 
TroXefiiov Xeyu), and I mean too ivithout any enemy in it: Demosth. 
01. i. [p. 17. I. 1. ed. Reisk.] ? ovbev Xeyeiv, to be of no weight, 



* The following passages, in which ol/tai / But Karayvobs rod yepovros robs rp6- 

is used airoffTaTiKws, or im connectedly, irons, in Aristoph. Eq. .46. is, having made 

where there is not opinion merely, but ah- himself thoroughly acquainted tvith the 

solute certainty, are worthy of notice : disposition of the old man. — J. S. 

iKelvos ixeu, (Philip) %v, olfiai, aujxa s Aiyca, I mean ; that is to say: De- 

Zxwv, Kai tyuxh v V-iav • Demosth. de fals. mosth. adv. Eubulid. p. 1306. 1. 1. ed. 

leg. p. 412. 1. 2. ed. Reisk. ob yhp, Reisk. The following uses of Aeyw and 

ol/xai, Si irdiriTe, tducas out<£ olvoxoel : Xen. its compounds may be added : \eyeiv, to 

Cyrop. i. See Plat. Men. p. 337. 1.48. furnish with a bed; to dismiss to rest; 

ed. Bas. Land Brunck, Supplem. Emend, \el-ov vvv jue T&x i0 ~ ra > Horn. II. u, 635. 

ad Aristoph. Lys. 1256. I suppose, and Koifiiffov sch. and intransitively, to lie 

1 trow, have a similar meaning ; and are down ; epx*° vvv <rvcpe6v5e, fier' &\\wv 

similarly used in the second person, when \Qov eraipaiv : Od. k, 320. Sia\4yetv, 

a figurative question is proposed about to select, to cull, to choose out ; Polyb. v, 

what can he doubted neither by the in- 8. SiaKeyowav rty cnrty, clearing out the 

terrogating nor the interrogated party. — ■ orifice or passage, to make it ivider : Ari- 

J. S. stoph. Lys. 720. ava,\£ye<r(>xi, to he re- 



RULE 1 — 4.] 'O/ioXoyeTv— 'OfkioicaVeiK. $3 

force, or importance: Eurip. Suppl. 595. v. addend, in ed. Her- 
manni ad v. 612. iEschyl. Agam. 176, ex Schutzii eonj.f Ov Xeyw 
is a form by which one, who has said'any thing ominous or dangerous, 
desires it may be unsaid : el b' eVeari ve/ueats, ov Xeyco : Soph. El. 
1467. v. iEschyl. Agam. 880. Eum. 869. 

'OfxoXoyeJy, to promise, to accept an invitation : wjuoXoyjjera §' els 
rr\aepov irapkaeaQai, (viz. to supper at Agatho's,) Plato Symp. With 
6/j.oXoye'iv signifying to agree to anything, crvy^iapeHy, cvfx(ftii)ve~iv, 
avvrldeedai, avfifiaiveiv are nearly synonymous. 

II. '0(p\itjK&veiv and ocpXeiv are put singly for, to be condemned, to 
be cast : ear be 6 (pevyuv v<fXr], but if the culprit be condemned: Plato. 
And with biKtiv'. bebia^xev fir) otpXiofiev biKrjv, Isasus p. 101. 'EpfjfirjV 
biKtjv cxpXetv is, to be cast for failure of appearance: Antiphon. p. 
711. ed. Reisk. And with ciatrav : wcpXe rr)v biairav, the sentence of 
the arbitrator teas against him: Densosth. adv. Aphob. v. Dion. 
Hal. Isseo p. 362. Sometimes a genitive of the thing only is added ; 
as, ofyXfjGat beiXlas, to be condemned of cowardice : Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 237. 

III. Public debtors at Athens were said dfyXiaicaveiv -w bqfxoaia : 
and a judge, who imposed a line to be paid to the commonwealth, 
was said irpocTifiq.v roj bqfioaltp. 

IV. The second aorist of ocpeiXw is used either alone or with el, eWe, 
aide, ws, to express a wish ; and is varied in number and person in 
accordance with the subject; as, &<peXe £rji> Bpovros, O that Brutus 
were alive! Plut. iraQovnav a pjjror' w<peXov, when that had befallen 
them, which I wish had never befallen them: Demosth. pro Cor. et 
yap wtyeXov, etpr], would that I could, said he: Plato de Rep. iv. 
[p. 408. 1. 9> ed. Bas. 1.] eW &(j>eXe uoi Ktibefj-wy rj ^vyyevijs elvai ris, 
would that I had some protector or relation! Aristoph. Vesp. 731. 
With a'ide, Iliad a, 415. ws &(peXes avToff oXeadai, O that thou 
hadst there perished! Horn. II. y, 428. wcfseXe with an accusative 
and infinitive, Lucian, de Dea Syr. 25. It is to be remarked that 
&<l>eXov is used only in wishing that something had been, were now, 
or may be hereafter, which was not, or is not, or will not be : 
&(j>eXov davelv, I wish I had died : but I did not die : &<peXov ui) irjv, 
I wish I were not alive: but I am alive: ju?) yap &(peXov aQavaros 
eaeadai, 1 wish I were not to be immortal: but I am to be so. And 
this is the case of the past tenses indicative of other verbs when 
joined with particles expressive of a wish ; as, eW e^rju, I ivish it 
were permitted: but it is not permitted. In wishing, on the con- 
trary, what may come to pass, the optative mood must be used, for 
dxpeXov cannot ; and the optative singly, or with el yap, or with et 
alone, (Soph. (Ed. R. 863.) or with ws or tcu>s olv, is used only when 
one wishes something of which he really hopes for the accomplish- 
ment, because he believes it to be possible. But whenever e'ide or 

peated, to he often mentioned: Xen. Anab. course: Aristoph. Plut. 1082. Eccl. 890. 

ii, 1, 12. aTroA4yea6ai, to resisn, to give said of a woman, Plut. in Solon, p. 162* 

up: Plut. Pomp. p. 1152. 1. 16. ed. H. I. 31. ed. H. St.— J. S. 

St. 5taAeye<r0aj, to have carnal inter- t See Note * p. 55. 



9i llapteravai. [Chap. v. § ix. 

aide is added to the optative, it expresses a wish that something: were 
how which is not, or may be hereafter, which most probably will not 
be. See Odyss. xx, 01. vii, 331. xiv, 440. xviii, 201. And e'ide 
with an infinitive has the same force : see Antipater Thessal. 
Epigr. 35. Orph. Argon. 1164. (1157-) Crinagor. in Epigr. 20. It 
may often, however, be not altogether a matter of indifference 
whether we use an optative with eWe, or HxpeXov with the same par- 
ticle ; for, as uxpeXov, even when used with regard to the present or 
future, has still the signification of a past tense, it cannot but indicate 
something which has already taken place to prevent the accomplish- 
ment of the wish, as in the foregoing examples ; whereas, of itself, 
the optative with e'ide indicates only the improbability of such accom- 
plishment, as in the example Od. xx, 6l. Penelope wishes for some- 
thing which, however possible, is nevertheless quite unlikely to come 
to pass. Had she had any expectation of obtaining what she wished, 
she would have used el yap, or some other particle. 

V. (VI.) "OcpeXov, with o, is not varied in person and number: are 
otyeXov ye /cat {]/xe~ts, and I ivish we did also : Julian. It is used for 
e'ide, I wish, and is joined with an optative, as Ps. cxix, 5. with the 
imperfect indicative: ofeXov ye fxrjbe l\v irpoebpia* Greg. Or. 28. 
with a future, Gal. v, 12. with an infinitive: /u?/re \be~iv oipeXov, 
Herod, i, 111. "flpeXe also is sometimes joined with an indicative: 
w<f>eXe fii'ib' kykvovro doal vees ! Callim. Epigr. xviii. v. Arrian, 
Diss, ii, 18. On wfeXov and '6<peXov see also Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 
147- seq. interpp. ad Mcer. p. 285. seq. 

VI. (VII.) Of 7rapiaTr]/jii and 7rapiaTafxai the following senses are to 
be observed ; to7s bacaarais roy tyevyovra Trapaarrjaai, to produce or 
place the culprit before his judges ; rw avaficirr) tov 'imrov irapa/rrrjaai, 
to bring the horse up to the rider. h Tlupaorijaai yrwfxrjv, bu^av, to 
convey or instil an opinion ; biaXoyicrfxoy, to suggest a thought ; 
y£sch. de fals. leg. p. 324. KapaarfiTui evKcupiav, to afford an oppor- 
tunity ; 7T. Qappelv, to inspire confidence ; /Esch. c. Timarch. Xoyov, 
to introduce or give occasion for discotir^e ; opyrjv, to excite anger;' 
Demosth. in Mid. p. 537, 22. bpni)v, ardor, alacrity, Polyb. iv, 5. 
iricTiv to'is cikovovgi, to produce belief in the hearers: Polyb. iv, 30. 
inroxpiav, to arouse suspicion ; (pofiov koX bios, Demosth. in Aristocr. 
p. 6*54, 24. and more generally, to prompt, or suggest to the mind : 
Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 226\ 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] and with an infinitive, 
ibid. [p. 228. 1. 4.] 

VII. (VIII.) Uapiaraadai, to produce : fxaprvpas TcapiaravTai, they 
place their witnesses by their own side -J they have them in readiness 
to give their evidence : Isseus p. 75. v. and p. 207. 



fi Tlapaffrrjffai \e/jt,j3ov, to get or provide J See Lncian, Nigr. p. 25. c. ed. Salmur. 

a boat : Polyb. E. Peir. p. 106. com- Xen. Anab. vi, 1, 14. vii, 8, 2. irapa- 

parare : Ernesii. — J. S. aTt\o-a<rda.i, to place by one's side, in order 

' 'Eirl roaovrov trapiarv) to Tr\r,dos, so to give a greater solemnity to a pro- 

enraged was the multitude : Polyb. E. L. testation or oath, or to make it more valid 

41. adeo concitata est multitudo : Is. Ca- or credible : irapao-T^ad^voi rovs TraiSas, 

saub. Em.— J. S. — itiffriv Imduvai rjdi\Ti<rav kkt' iKtivav : 



RULE 5 — 8.] Ylapiffrdvai. 95 

IJapioTaadat is also to attend or stand by, as a public officer or ap- 
paritor by a magistrate, as a partisan, as an advocate, &c. with a 
dative of the person attended: see Demosth. de fals. Leg. p. 3t>fJ. 
adv. Steph. p. 1120. Also to come into ones mind: see Eurip. 
Rties. 780. (and so daep^eaOai, Eurip. Ipli. A. 1374.) irapioTarai 
pot tovto iroie.lv, it comes into my mind to do this ; whence ei; rod 7ra- 
pt(TTG.fxevov Xeyeir, to say what comes uppermost ; to speak extempore. 

VJII. (IX.) Also to be courageous ; as, ovtoj irapeorn rw Qvpu, ws, 
&c. so full of spirit and promptitude was he, that, &c. whence na- 
paarr,fxa and irapaoraois,* boldness, presence of mind, [and to irapeoTr]- 
kos, audacity, assurance : Aristoph. Eq. 399- J- S.] and TTapacrrartKos 
uvrjp, abounding with alacrity, spirit, presence of mind : Polyb. xvi, 
4. Also, to reduce to subjection ; as, d)v o'ucovpevnv irapaarijaaadai, to 
subjugate the whole world. 

YiapiGTaaQai is said too of what is within a person's power or 
ability : v. Eurip. Androm. 231. 

It signifies also to persuade, to incline, to impel, to incite: wapec- 
r?7<7aro tov veavianov icpbs to Koivunelv, &c. Polyb. Exc. Leg. S5. 
irapaffTricrao-Qai tovs aKovovras els to fid Wo v ahrw avvayavaKrelv, 
Polyb. ii, 59J 



Demosth. in Aphob. iii. p. 860. 1. 17. ed. 
Reisk. See Demosth. adv. Eubul. p. 
1305. 1. 11. in Aphob. iii. p. 852. 1. 15. 
Lucian, Philops. p. 466. ed. Salmur. — 
J.S. 

k Jlapdaraffis, perturbation, alienation 
of mind : 8ia ttji/ TrapdcrTaaiv ttjs Siavolas 
oppoovTes inl rb vfix<=<rdai ii> rots SirAois 
aireirviyovTO : Polyb. iii, 85. irepixapys 
olaa. trpbs ras 8vpas cm^vTa, na\ /uer& ira- 
paarrdo'eas rjffird^eTO tovs peaviaKovs '• Po- 
lyb. x, 5. leetitia cum stupore: Ernesti. 
—J. S. 

1 Add, irapto-Tao-Oai, to show: Polyb. 
E. L. 144. to occur, Plut. Moral, t. iii. 
p. 157. 1. 10. ed. Wyttenb. 8vo. and 
also the following senses of ia-Typi and 
some of its other derivatives and com- 
pounds : itpiv &v ye <ttS> Tp4x<j>v, before I 
cease running : Aristoph. Ach. 176. 'larrf 
fSSeiov Snpbv, she weighed beef fat : Ari- 
stoph. Vesp. 40. iiriaTaBpeveiv, to dis- 
turb, to annoy, to bother: Plut. Moral, 
sect. 778. b. ed. Wyttenb. ttjs ap&tfls 
eKeyero aradfi^o-aaQai tovs aaTepiaKovs, 
to have marked the situation of: Calli- 
mach. ap. Diog. Laert. p. 9. 1. 1. ed. H. 
St. aTadjxao-Qai, to conjecture : Soph. 
(Ed. R. 1111. airaviffrao-dai, to depart: 
Theogn. 528. KaT^avao-Trjvai, to resist : 
Plut. Phocion, p. 1370. 1. 10. ed. H. St. 
<Twe£avaaTrjvai, at the same time to op- 
pose or contend with: Plut. Ca?s.p. 1303. 
1. 29. Steph. iiraveo-T-fiKr), shall have 
been built : Aristoph. Av. 554. iiravicr- 
Ttxcrdai, to rise against, with a datives 



Aristoph. Av. 1584. also to attempt to 
violate, Theopomp. ap. Polyb. E. Pei- 
resc. p. 20. ed. Ern. airoo-rfio-aaOai, 
to weigh : Demosth. adv.Timoth. p. 1199. 
1. 24. ed. Reisk. airoaTaTuv, with a ge- 
nitive, to desert : Aristoph. Av. 313. to 
differ, to be unlike: Soph. QEd. R. 
743. i^acpicrTacrBcu, to decline, to stand 
aloof from: Soph. G2d. C. 561. trwe- 
■KiiTTrja-ai, to attend, to be attentive: Polyb. 
ii, 58. and transitively, to render attentive : 
Polyb. iii, 59. KuraaTrivai, to be calm or 
tranquil: Aristoph. Eq. 865. Kade<ni]- 
Kacri, are stationed: Aristoph. Av. 1161. 
irepuffTaadai, said, not of several, but of 
one, to harass, to tease, to molest, to pes- 
ter, to worry : Diog. L. in Menedem. 
p. 96. 1. 26. ed. H. St. irpotaravw, to 
take care of, to attend to, to supply, to 
make offerings to : Soph. El. 1378. 
■npoiffTavai irpbs to p.}], with an infinitive, 
to be an obstacle to, to serve to prevent or 
hinder : Aristot. Probl. sect. ii. probl. 38. 
avviffravai, to present a person to another 
as surety for a debt : Demosth. adv. Spud, 
p. 1029. 1. 26. p. 1032. I. 27. <r. ras n- 
pas tov o-'iTov, to raise or enhance the price 
of corn: Demosth. in Dionysod. p. 1285. 
1. 6. avo~Triva.i, to be fully formed; to be 
complete or perfect : Longin. § xi. v. Toup. 
to confront, to engage, to stand against in 
conflict: Aristoph. Vesp. 1031. owtt)- 
adpevos epya, having constructed or fabri- 
cated works (for a siege) : Polyb. v, 71. 
inroo-Trjvai, to give place to, to yield to : 
Horn, II. a, 160.— J. S. 



96 ttaer^eiv — Uepube'iv. [CHAP. V. 

IX. (X.) Ua(Tx eiv ls sometimes to be treated, or used, to have done 
to one: ov5' av otiovv 7raa^»j rts vtt' avrHtv, not even if one be ever so 
ill treated by them ; whatever usage one may have received from them : 
Plat. Crit. c. 10. With ev : tXdrrwv 6 ttu8ojv ev tov Tn>n)aavTos, he 
that has received a benefit is inferior to him who has conferred it : 
Aristot. Eth. Witii ciyaQuv : tis e\n\s vno rovruv ayaQuv neioeodai ; 
Lysias : whence uvrevTvaQeiv, to have a kindness returned to one ; ami 
ai'TevKoiijaai, to return a kindness. 

X. (XI.) To be in any state of mind or feeling : vfjoiorarov Ttao-yu) 
•n-pos rows tyikoaotyovvTas, uxrirep Trpus tovs \pe\XiSofj.epovs, Kai irai^ovTas '. 
Plat. Gorg. 

XI. (XII.) To do: Aristoph. Nub. 814. m tI ixv tis Ttadot npos 
aidpu)7Tovs /jirire epyu) /u/yre Xdyw ireiadijyai bvvafikvovs ; what can one do 
with, how can one act towards, men, &c. ? Galen. eiraOov r\ 'O^piKov, 
they acted, in a manner, like Homer himself: Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 250. v. Schol. ad Eurip. Hec. 614. Spanh. ad Aristopli. Plut. 603. 
and Valck. ad Eurip. Phoen. 902. 

XII. (XIII.) Both persons and things are said to suffer, ir&fT^iv, 
whatever of any kind happens to them : n ovbev beivov Traayere a-iro- 
povrres, it is no wonder that you are perplexed or at a loss : Ceh. 
Tab. [p. 6. 1. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] v. Ml V. H. lib. ult. 
c. 47. And the phrase rl iradeiv especially signifies to die or to 
perish: Thuc. iv. p. 97. whence wados, death or slaughter: He- 
rodot. i, 13. But H iradiov may often be rendered why ; as in Aris- 
topli. Nub. 400/ TV fxadcjv is a similar phrase : q ri yap fiadovr' is 
tovs deoits vfipi£eroi> ; Aristopli. Nub. 1510. [1489. Bekker's edition 
printed for Priestley, 1826.] This latter form is used in oblique or 
indirect phraseology as well as in direct, 6 ti being substituted for ri; 
when it may be rendered, because : troXv fievrot, etprj, bu-aiorepoy tov 
vfjiirepou Trarepa rvTrroi/dt, o ti fiaQiov aotpovs vlels ovtios e<pvrrev : for 
having begotten such wiseacres of sons : Plato Euthyd. c. 64. p. 
1299. a. Tt afyos elfxi wade'tv 1) a7rorterai, o ti /xadwv kv rw /3/w ov% fjcrv- 
%Lav iiyov; Plato Apol. c. 26. p. 36. b. v. Plat. Euthydem. c. 30. 
Eupolis ap. Stob. serm. iv. p. 53. 

XIII. (XIV.) "O tl xPV iradelv rj cnroT'iaai is an Attic and forensic 
expression for, what punishment must be suffered or fine paid : kitd- 
yeiv Tifirj/na, o ti %p>) 7radetv 1) anoTioai, to impose the penalty , whether 
corporal punishment or fine. 

XIV. (XV.) Ylepi'ibe'tv and irepiopav, (and irepioipeodai for the 
future,) to see without endeavouring to prevent, to suffer, to permit ; 
ttjv t(Lv 'P(i)[jLai(i)i' apyfiv fit} irepiibelv kppijifjievrfv, Herodian ii. 
tooovtovs TtLv avfxtxaxwv tt € p to p q.v b o v \ € v o v t a s, Isocr. Paneg. ov 
7repi6\pera( /u 6 Oelos aviinrov, Aristopli. Nub. bvvafxty irpoa- 
XafieTv 7repi6\pe<Tde, Thuc. i. 

m Ti yap wdOw ; for what can I do? P Tt vaBoyffai, e'i'irep veepeKai y' e'urlv 

Aristoph. Lys. 884. So ireio-oixai, Nub. a\7j0c3s, 6vrjTa7s s'i^acn yvvai^iv ; Aristoph. 

791. Eccl. 911 — J. S. Nub. 341.— J. S. 

" See Aristoph. Nub. 461. Pac. 701. a V. Aristoph. Plut. 908. Demosth. 

—J. S. adv. Lept. p. 495. 1. 19. ed. Reisk. Id. 

See Aristoph. Eccl. 1105.— J. S. in Steph. i. p. 1113. 1. 4.— J. S. 



§ x. Rule 1—6.] Ilotelv. 97 



SECTION X. — OP THE VERBS iroie'tv, woieiadai, irparreiv, 
irpoatroieiaQai. 

Rule I. Yloie'iv and epyu$e<rdai are used in speaking of benefits or 
injuries ; as, Kaicuis or noXXa kciku or KaXa tov e^dpov iroieiv or epyn- 
c?e<T0ru : and iroielv and 7rparreiv thus used have sometimes a dative of 
the person : Dinarch. adv. Demosth. p. 13. Lys. adv. Eratosth. 
p. 417. Demosth. pro Phan. p. 855. Id. ad Phcenipp. p. 1045. 
Lys. adv. Agorat. p. 472. Xen. Hell. iv. p. 540. Isae. pro Nicostr. 
p. 78. M\. H. Anim. i, 58. Acts ix, 13. xvi, 28. And troielv 
and bpyv are sometimes put singly for Kanonoiriaai, to do harm, or 
injure, Eurip. Med. 289. Anacr. Od. xii. Demosth. p. 968. 855. 
Xen. de Re Eq. vi, 4, 5. v. Cuper, Obs. i, 9. 

II. Yloiuv is often joined with icaXws, ev, and other adverbs, and 
followed by a participle ; as, ev iroiets be nal a-v cppaguv, but hoivever 
you do well in speaking of it to us: Aristoph. Pac. 1311. icaXws 
eTToirjons Trpoenriou, you did well to mention it btf ore-hand: Xen. 
Cyrop. i. p. 16/ v. Acts x, 33. 3 John v. 6. or with a 
neuter adjective, followed by an infinitive and to, as aaXov enon'ieare 
to (tuhjcii Ttjv vija-ov, Demosth. pro Cor. 

III. Ume'ip Tiva avovqTov with a genitive, to deprive one of the en- 
joyment, fruit, or advantage of what is expressed by the genitive: 

Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 275. 1. 5. ed. Reisk.] 

IV. AiabaccKTiav voieiv, to have recourse to a trial by law : De- 
mosth. in Timocr. [p. 704. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] 

With a noun signifying time iroieiv is to pass, to spend: v. Acts 
xviii, 23. xx, 3. and Casaub. ad Act. Ap. xv, 33. ovb' eiroiriaav 
Xpovov ovbeva, nor did they stay any time, linger, loiter : Demosth. 
p. 392. 

V. Uoieladai is sometimes, to adopt: vlov kirou'ioaTo ae,* iEsch. p. 
212. i)v enoirioaTo fxrjrepa, whom he adopted as his mother: Plut. 
in Alex. In Isseus, de sort. Apollod. [p. 159. ed. Reisk.] iroieiodai 
and Troir}<jis are found unconnected with any noun signifying the sub- 
ject of adoption. 'Eiciroie'iv is, to give in adoption,' Isseus, whence 
eKTroir](ns : the opposite of which is elffiroirjeis. 

VI. Tloie'iv or YVoieiadcu followed by a preposition, or an adverb, 
forms many periphrastical phrases; as, tovs yueMoj/rcts ecnaodm 
civev 6\pov v on) ere iv, to deprive of their dish: Plat. Hipp. M. 
p. 290. noielv and oipews, to send or remove out of sight; e'ieia 



r The signification of kp.\Zs noiuv is adv. Plioenipp. p. 1045. I. 15. where tov 

remarkable in the following passage : elal Troirjaa^euov is opposed to tov (pvaei ira- 

y.iv is to. (idXiffTa. ai/Tol irXovawi, na\ Ka- Tp6s. — J. S. 

Aws no iovci: and I wish them joy of it ; ' But in Aristoph. Pac. 708. eKiroieta- 

and I rejoice that they are so : Demosth. Bai is to procreate : Tainy (oiT&pa. personi- 

in Mid. p. 582. I. 20. — J. S. fied) %uvouta>v, Ikwolov aavTw QoTpvs, ge- 

' See Horn. 11. i, 491. Plut. Moral, iterate or breed out of her for yourself.— 

$ 834. B. ed. Wyttenb. and Demosth. J. S. 

Viger, N 



98 n<>it~ttrOai. [Chap. v. ^ x. 

iroifjtrat, to include, to inclose, to receive within itself, Palaeph. 50. 

eKirobu)i> TToielaOat, to put out of the way ; to despatch, to destroy : 
Isocr. ill Evag. eVw tF)s yvadov iroirjcrfti rov ha.KTv\ov, to introduce 
or insert within: Xen. de Re eq. vi, 8. irotelaOui ks <pv\a.K})v, to 
imprison: Thucyd. iii, 3. iroie'iv kv ala^yvr], to disgrace: Deniostl). 
de Cor. p. 332. 1. 37« iroieioBai kv airly, to blame, to accuse: Paus. 
in Ach. p. 411. iroie~iv kv fxkcrw, to surround, to inclose, to hem 
in : Time, i, 6*2. iroieladai kv vojiw, to sanction by law, to reckon 
lawful: Herodot. Clio c. 131. ivoieiaQai kv oXiyupio:, to neglect: 
Thuc. vii, 3. iroieladai kv vpyij, to be angry with: Demostli. OI. i. 
iroielcrQat kv bevrepa ru^ei, to make a secondary concern ; iroieiv kv 
y/ipiTi, to gratify, to act acceptably: Plato Phasdr. c. 64. iroieiv 
kv x € P aL T1 i y f*&XQ v ' 1° figbi hand to hand: Air. Exp. AI. ii, 10. 
iroie'iaBai kv viro^iq., to suspect : iEsch. adv. Tim. p. 35. iroielvdat 
evros, to encircle, to receive into the middle: Thuc. ii, 83. itoielv 
t£ 'iaov TTuvras, to reckon or treat all alike: Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 505. iroieiv e'ijw, to put forth or out : HL\. V. H. x, 2. Acts 
v, 34. Xen. Cyrop. iv, 1, 2. iroieladai kxi tivi, to put into his 
power or possession : Plut. Thes. iroieladai irep) eavrov, to seize: 
Isocr. Panath. p. 552. iroieiv iroppwrario, to remdve as far as possible : 
Isocr. in Nicocl. p. 66. Appian, Bell. Parth. p. 267. x w P' s iroieladai, 
to remove out of the way of, to free from. 

VII. Uiareis iroieladai irpbs tlvcl, to give assurances to one, to bind 
or pledge one's self to him: Athen. viii. c. l6. Polyb. v. 

VIII. UoielaOai and its accusative may often be rendered by one 
verb of signification similar to the accusative; as, yvw^rjv iroieladai, 
to think, to judge, to intend, to resolve: Arr. Exp. Al. iv, 27. 
Thuc. i, 128. ii, 2. kirihei£iv iroieladai, to show: Plato Phaed. c. 
47- p. 99. d. c. 110. ed. Heind. [p. 39. 1. 52. ed. Basil. 1.] ica- 
raarpofijv iroieladai, to overthrow, to subdue: Herodot. Er. c. 27. 
Kepbos noieladai, to gain, to make a profit by: Plut. in Cic. opyijv 
iroieladai, to be enraged at : Heliodor. jEth. ix, 2. (pvyi)v iroieladai, 
to fly : Thuc. iii, 33. And in the active voice: iroieiv qrrav, to be 
conquered : Polyb. xi, 2. 7rote7i' vbiAp, to rain: Aristoph. Vesp. 26l. 
Theophr. in Garrulo ; and -iroieiv verov, Aristoph. Vesp. 26*3. and in 
the active voice with adjectives, in a similar manner : k^alperov iroieiv, 
to except: Plato Ep. ii. iroieiv eicdera to. (3pe^r], to expose: Acts 
vii, 19. v. Hor. Serin, i, 4, 59. Ov. Met. v, 4S0. Ter. Heaut. ii, 
3, 100. 

IX. (X.) Xapiv iroieladai is to be grateful or thankful : Demostli. 
de fals. Leg. p. 212. 1. 25. 1 

X. (XI.) Yloieladat {/(/>' eavrov or kip' eavrw, to bring into one's power ; 
to reduce to subjection. And iroieladai eavrov en klpva'iav, to get 
himself into power : Herodian i, 9- But els eavrov iroiov/.ievos ra 
tovtwv a/iapTt'ifiaTa, is, taking them upon himself, making himself 
answerable fur them: Demostli. 

XI. (XIII.) "Epyov iroieladai is, to make it one's business, to endea- 
vour earnestly : Plut. Thes. Plat. Tim. So 7ra.v } and iravra, iroieiv, 
onus, to spare no exertion, to use all means to — : Plato Phaedr. p. 
252. I. 44. de Rep. vi. p. 4S8. 



Rule 7 — 14.] rioteTffflat. 99 

XII. (XIV.) YloielaOat, to account, to esteem, to reckon: evrv^fxa 
7roie~icr0ai tuv Kmpov, to reckon the opportunity a piece of good for- 
tune: Plut. Pomp. 7rOjU7n)i', aW ov o-vfupopav to 7rpayfja Troiovfieros, 
Greg. Naz. Yloie'to-dai, to pretend, to lay claim to : tovto to fiadr]- 
[xa iroLovfxai beivos eivai, Plat. Theag. p. 128. 1. 17- efiavrov iroicviie- 
vos to jxaOr^fxa ehat ws evpnfia, Plat. Hipp. Mill. p. 372. 1. 27. 

XIII. (XV.) 'E£w\?? rai Trpvu)\7] woie'tv, is to destroy utterly : De- 
mosth. pro Cor. [p. 332. I. 21. ed. Reisk.] 

XIV. (XVI.) lioteTt- tivi Toy \6yov, to give, or to be, to him the 
cause or occasion of his discourse: Aristid. Panath. But iroielodat 
Xoyov tov fxi] tl di'oj/rws ?} fxaviKtas enreiv, is to take thought or care 
not to, &c. Philostr. de vit. Apoll. v, 35. And ttoXvv Troielcrdai \6yov 
AperFis, is to hold it in great esteem: Philostr. in Heroic, c. 1 1. 

As the signification of Troielv is so general, it often becomes a sort 
of relative verb, and stands for any other verb, to avoid its repetition ; 
as, jjis (bwctfuews) ii/mels oirorav tcpeiTTU) biafiipamo/jiev, (fjv fSovXrjdei'Tes 
pabiw av irooiaatpev), &c. Isocr. Paneg.* where it is remarkable that 
the relative ($v) is referred to bwcifxews, instead of being put in the 
neuter (c) and referred to the action expressed by the verb. Some- 
times iroielv, or bpq.v, (for they are both so used) represents a verb 
(or verbs) following instead of preceding ; as in this passage of 
Tliucyd. in which it is to be observed that the verbs represented by 
bpaTe, and following it, are, by attraction, made to correspond with it 
in form, instead of being put in the infinitive, as the construction 
would otherwise have required : ttws ov XPV ^avras afxvvetv ab-w, Kal 
pi), o vvv vpeis bpare, — tov koivov tyjs aoJTrjpias atpietrde, Kal ifie — 
bt airias e^ere : ii, 60. 

Aljua Troie'iv, npaTTeiv, or bpqv, to shed blood ; to slay : Polyb. xv, 
31. Eurip. Or. 406. 1140. cf. Cuper, Obs. iii, ip. 

Timely with an infinitive, to grant, or to assume, or to suppose, for 
the sake of argument : Xen. Anab. v. p. 555. Also to force, to make, 
to cause to : k-Koino-av 'Ayijcr/Xaov eiraraywpriaa.i, Xen. Hell. vi. 7re- 
7rou/(care tovs p/jTopas fieXeTqv Kal <pi\ooo(peii', Isocr. de Pace 317- w 

* So in English, and in other modern ally, to be allowed, to be in the power of; 

langunges : — Italian ; a chi conosce i ifiol ovKer' eKiro^ei @ovAeveo-6ou, it is no 

modi tuoi, come FO io : Boccac. Giorn. longer in my power to — : Diog. L. in 

7. Nov. 5. — French; Ah ! que j'ai de Theophr. p. 179.1. 25. ed. H. St. form, 

depit que la loi n' autorise A changer de min. iKTroirjaei KaTavoeiv, Pulyb. ii, 24. 

niari comme on fait de chemise: Mo- iKxotelr x a P& e0 ~Q a h Id. xvii, 9. iniroi- 

liere, Coc. Inaag. sc. 5.: jouir de ses elcrdai, with an infinitive, to make or cause 

pleurs comme il fait de mes larmes: to: Aristoph. Ach. 255. i/j.iroLuo-dp.i, to 

Tlu Corneille, Ariane, iv. 3. be mentioned in poetry : Aristoph. Av. 

w On Troielv and some of its compounds 1301. fieraTroielv v6p.ov, to alter, to per- 

ihe following additions may be useful : vert : Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 6-40. 1. 2. 

iromv els Twa, to make verses on : Ari- 13. ed. Reisk. Trepnroieladat, to make 

stoph. Ran. 1044. ttoluv and izoieio-dai money, to save: Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 38. 

used equivalently in the same sentence: irpocriroLe7o-6ai,to make one's own, to con- 

Hesiod, Op. ii, 325. iroieicrdai drjTa, to ciliate: tou ^rjfiov irpoo-Kowv, Aristoph. 

lake or hire a servant : Id. ib. 220. ttol- Eq. 215. to take to the use of, to put on, 

(Tadat <piXov, to receive into one's friend- to wear ; ir6Sa %vhivov TrpoaewoiricraTo, 

ship: Id. ib. 332. iKiroieiv, imperson- Plut. Moral, p. 953. 1. 12. ed. Wyt- 



100 Tipdrreiv, &C. [CHAP. V. 

XV. (XVII.) flparretv is sometimes to act with a view to some 
certain end ; to use means, to take measures; to endeavour to bring 
about: eirpaoaev bra) Tpurro) rd-yiara rols fiev ty/jfiriaerai, twv be 
aTraXXu£erai : Time. iv. Kopirdlwv Ttpanaovrwv virus Tifiwprjawrrat 
avroiis, Id. i, 56. e'$ re HeXoTrovvrjaov eirpaaaev, onr) wfeXeid tis yevrj- 
aerai : Id. i, 65. 

XVI. (XVIII.) And as a verb transitive also it signifies, to endea- 
vour clandestinely, to plot, to betray : Trpdrreiv uddobov rw KiKepwvi, 
Plut. in Cic. Trpdrreiv rijv twv Qrifiaiwv tcardXvcriv, Denioslli. Phil. i. 
So Andocid. p. 92. tovtois errparrov Trjv iroKtv, Polyb. iv, 17- cf. 
xiii, 2." 

XVII. (XIX.) Tlpdrreiv, to obtain by supplication; to sue for: 
"Trparreiv Ttapd twv Oewv dyadbv, Isocr. ad Nicocl. Trpdrreiv ri rrpos 
(or es) rtva, is to treat or transact about something with a person : 
irpa£avTes irpbs avrbv rfjy. Xijipiv rfjs voXews, Thuc. iv, 114. and, instead 
of the accusative, nepl is sometimes used with a genitive. 

Ta Koiva Trpdrreiv, is to be in office, to administer the government 
of a state: Demosth. ep. iii. p. llfj. I. 5. and in the same sense 
Trpdrreiv ra Trpay/jara, Ly9. p. 483. Tlpdrreiv intransitively, is to 
succeed: Horn. Od. y, 60. to which is opposed inrpatcrelv. E5 
Trpdrreiv is to prosper, 7 " and the contrary Kanws Trparreiv.* Tlpdrreiv 
nvi, fxerd nvos, or vnep nvos, is to be of his party or side, to favor q. 
him : Demosth. Phil, iii, p. 126. Isae. Or. de sort. p. 96. Dinarch. 
c. Demosth. rrpdaaetv nvi rt, to get something for a person, by 
using influence, power, &c. Soph. Aj. 445. Trpdrreiv, to sacrifice: 
v. Cuper, Obs. iii, 13. 

XVIII. (XX.) TipdrreaOat, to exact from, to take of, to demand of: 
Ttpdrrerai rovs c'itvv e^dyovras rpianoaryv, he takes a duty of one 
thirtieth from those who export corn : Demosth. in Lept. rbv Eu- 
pvfxebovra ^pijfiara enpuZ,avro, they levied a fine on Eurymedon : Thuc. 
iv, 65. errpdrrero en paXXov irapa twv ^eviov, Ml. V. H. xiv, 
35. and in the same manner the active Trpdrreiv is used : Demosth. 
in Androt. p. 617. Lucian, Vit. Auct. [p. 373. c. ed. Salmur.] Luke 
xix, 23. 

XIX. (XXI.) Aia7rewpd-^dai is to be ruined: r\ biaireirpaKrai ra 
twv Kapxriboviwv, otherwise it is all over with the affairs of the Car- 
thaginians : Plut. in Fab/ 

tenb. 8vo. to accept conditions, De- F. 728. In the same sense Tcpdaaw ri 

mosth;- in Euerg. p. 1142. I. 11. ed. AvrrpSv ; ib. v. 1114. And KcucSis Ttpdo-- 

Reisk. — J. S. aou occurs in v. 1113. and irpdaaetv 

■>> See Polyb. iv, 16.— J. S. kuk&s, v. 1220.— J. S. 

w So xpVO"rov rt irpixTTfiv, to meet ivith x Add, ttoAAo, irp&Treiv, to be meddling: 

some good fortune: Aristopb. Plut. 341. Aristoph. Ran. 749. Siawpdrreiv, to de- 

Qdppec Trdvr ayada ireirpdyajxev, take flower: Plut. Moral, t. ii. p. 654. 1. 9. to 

heart: we have come off most fortunately ; destroy : Soph. Trach. 786. SiairpuTTecr- 

we are in high luck : Aristoph. Ran. 302. 6ai, to obtain : Xen. Anab. vi, 2, 11 . avv- 

— J. S. SiairpaTTeiv, to co-operate in accomplish- 

* The difference between Trpdrreiv, in ing : Isocr. Paneg. p. 113. ed. Battie. 

this use, and Spyv, is plainly marked in iKwpdrreiv, to destroy : Soph. CEd. C. 

the following passage; irpoaSSKa Se, 5pau> 1659.— J. S. 
nanus, Kaitov ti wpd£eiv. Eurip. Here 



§ xi. RULE 1—5.] UpotnTotelcydai — TideoBai. 101 

XX. (XXII.) YipoairoielaOni, to pretend, is often used ellipfically, 
so that what is pretended must be collected from the preceding 
words : opa firj tovtwv f.iev eyflpos fjs, efxoi be wpornToirj (viz. e-^Bpbs 
elvat) : it is to these present, I doubt, that you are really an enemy, 
and that to me you only pretend to he so: Demostli. pro Cor. See 
also the same oration, p. 270. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. 



SECTION XI. — Of THE VERBS avyicpOTelv, avpprjyvvvat, avpQpovelv, 
Ttdevai, rideadai, Tvy^aveiv. 

RULE I. IvyKpoTelv, which signifies properly to collide, to clap 
together, (and perhaps to Jorge out, or unite metals: v. Schol. 
Theocr. ad Id. xv, 49.) signifies also to collect, to compact, to unite 
into one body, and also to form or qualify by instruction or exercise ; 
as, ovytcporelv arpaTihv, a. ttotov : to raise and form an army ; to 
collect, and regulate the compotation of, a convivial party. avyKe- 
KpoTTjjjiepoi ra tov 7roXe/uou, thoroughly disciplined in military affairs : 
Demostli. Ol. ii. and cvyKetcpoTri/jeva 7r\i]p<l>/ja.-a, well-disciplined 
crews : Polyb. i, 16. cvyKpo-eiv xopbv, to form a chorus ; to collect 
dancers and singers into a company, and teach them to move and sing 
in unison: Demostli. in Mid. p. 250. avyuporelv crvrotpoolay, to or- 
ganise a conspiracy. 

It signifies also to clap, in testimony of approbation ; 6 Ivpatcooios 
rrvt'etcpoTelro, Xen. Symp. viii, 1. and hence, to encourage, to sti- 
mulate: ovvetcpoTOW a\\os a\\ov fit) a-rroKafiveiv, Philo de vita Mos. 

II. (III.) IvfiQpovelv is sometimes, to arrive at length, by reflection 
and observation of circumstances, at a probable conclusion about the 
meaning of an oracle : Plot, in Themist. Ivfi^ake'tv also, and avp.- 
fiaWeodat are used in a similar sense : Paus. in Mess. 

III. (IV.) TiBeoBai, irpoaTtQeaQai, KaraTideadai, avyKaTmiBeaBai, 
with a dative, signify to assent, to agree in opinion : els eywye /*a- 
Xicrra ridefxai, Chrysost. ad Thessal. ii. 01 5' a\\oi TrpoaeTiBevTo, 
kcii KareKovfiovvTo {conformed) Trdvres els r?)i> iicelvov yrw/j,r]v : Pint, in 
Fab. p. 191. 

IV. (V.) Tideadat, with an accusative and an adverb of manner, 
signifies to manage, to administer, to conduct ; as, air e£ovai(os, or 
avroKpciTopiicios, tov TroXe/Jiov TiBeoBai. O'ieoQat yjp>l T >1 1 ' Qpdvrjtrtv to. irav- 
ra, 07rws av avrrj iibij y, ovtw TiQeoBai, Xen. Mem. i. Also (if inter- 
preted literally) to make for one's self; as, TtBeuBai pvrjji-qv rivqs, to 
make one's self a remembrance of something ; i. e. to remember it. 
defievos ayvafnrTov voov, having assumed, or having, an inflexible or 
obstinate mind : iEschyl. Prom. l6~3. 

V. (VI.) Tidivai and ridecrdai signify with logicians, to assume, to 
suppose, to hold or teach as a principle or doctrine, to assert as a 
position ; as, ol to Kevbv elvat riBevres, or ol to Kevbv TiBifievot, without 
elvai. 

TiOeaOai tov aywva, to institute, appoint, arrange, or give to the 
public, as a spectacle, the contest or competition : Greg, de Mart. 



102 TiOeoOm. [Chap. v. § xi. 

VF. (VII.) TiOeoOai is, to account, esteem, reckon; as, bevrepov 
■%p)) TiOerrdai rfjs typoiytrews t>)v vyieiav, we ought to reckon health but 
second to wisdom: instead of which, rWeaOai (or notelaOat) ev bevTei>a. 
Tc't^ei with a genitive, is said : v. Pint, in Demosth. p. 852. I. 14. 
Meyci or apikpuv Tidijfii or rldepai. Nap ovbev Ttdeodat, to reckon of 
no importance, to disregard: (with an infinitive in Flut. Demosth. |>. 
352. I. 43.) 7ra|0a tto\v, the contrary. So ev ovbevbs pepei, or ev 
ovbevi XcJyw, or vttu Xoyo), riOeaOai : and ri)s Tpaywbias Troir/Tus ovbe ev 
Xdyw Tidr}<nt>, does not even reckon them as anything ; makes no ac- 
count at all of them: Aristid. Or. ad Capit. p. 550. els evep- 
yerrlas nQevai /uepos, to reckon as a benefit: Id. pro Quat. p. 
326. els \6yov TtOerai, lb. p. 345. And TiQevai in this sense is some- 
times used elliptic-ally, as pfj tis avrdi — rideiij twv irrpmr]yG)v, lest 
any one shottld reckon him among the generals : Ibid. p. 251. 'Ev 
Ka\(p, ev alayjpw, TiQeodtu, to esteem honorable or disgraceful: ev 
oirovbrj Tideadai, to account deserving of serious attention or solici- 
tude ; ev abihr]/j.aTi Tideadat, to regard or consider as a wrong or 
injury: Time, i, 35. e£ 'iaov pev eytay ovbeTTOT av Oeiqv A.l<ryJ rT ) v 
YlXarwvi, I icould never put JEschines on a level with Plato : i. e. / 
would never reckon them equal: Aristid. pro Quat. And in the 
same sense tic -napaXXi]Xov ndevat, Athen. Deipn. penult, p. 647. 
In the following passages also ridevai may be translated to account, 
to esteem : to be pr'j-e naXai tovto Treirovdevai, wecpyvevai re Tiva fip.lv 
(jvpiia-^iav, — ri/s Trap eiceivwv (the gods) evvolas evepyerrjfx av eywye 
Oeirjv : Demosth. Ol. i. to iroXXa cnroXwXeKevai — rf/s fjpeTepas ape- 
Xeias (epynv, viz. or the like) av tis de(r) btKaiws : Ibid. 

VII. (IX.) A circumlocution consisting of TiQevai, a preposition, 
and its case, is often employed instead of some one verb; as, 
TtOerai els pvtjprjv for pepvijadai, to remember ; els 6py>)v, (or opyt- 
ieadai, to resent: d\\' ov Tiderai ravra Trap' vplv els aKpifiT] 
fxvripr}v, ol/b\ fjv wpoafjicev, opyfjv: Demosth. pro Cor. [But TiQeadat 
els ti, of a person, is sometimes, to be destined or appointed to some- 
thing: see KelaQai, Sect. viii. R. 2.] e|w Xayov Ti6e/jai QutKiwra, 
I except Phocion: Plut. in Demosth. p. 852. Trpds kuXov rideadat, 
to approve ; airb KaXov TiBeoQai, to disapprove, npus otwvou rldeadai, 
for olwrlSeodat, Athen. Deipn. i. p. 13. 

VIII. (XI.) TideoQai tci ovrXa, is — 1. to stand armed: QeaQe tci 
orrXa ev rajjei ws Ta^tara, Xen. Anab. vii, p. 395. tovs aXXovs eice- 
Xevae Tavra Trapeyyvav, kai rideuOai to. oirXa, alios (duces) jubebat 
eadem ad suos cohort atione uti, ac milites ordinare: y Xen. ib. 
avelwev b Ki'jpv^, e'i tis fiovXerai ^vpjJLay^elv, TiOeadai 7cap' ahrovs to. birXa, 
quits se rangeassent avec eux en armes: Thuc. ii, 2. avv avTols 
OTrXieleadat, Schol. 

IX. (XII.) — 2. to encamp, to fortify a camp: Oipevoi be irXnaiov 

y In this place, I believe, as in Xen. abstain from using them: rfj <pa.Aa.yyi 

Anab. i, 5, 14. it means, to stand in arms Sietr^op^eVrj irepl rV Slw^iv HBpovs eVe- 

with the men under their command. In \dcras, rtvayKaae ra HirXa, Geadai, nal 

the following passage, and also in Xen. AafiAwras opKovs avrip avarpareveiv : Plut. 

Anab. i, 5, 15. t« '6-nKa eiaOai is, to in Euraen. p. 1069. I. 3. ed. H. St.— 

stand peaceably under arms, to desist or J. S. 



Rule 6—12." 



Tvyxfiveiv. 



103 



avrStv Ta oirXn, having measured or marked out a camp: Dionys. 
Hal. v. p. 311. So Tliuc. ii, 2/ nXiyov OT~i<pos, eh opovs Kopvajriv 
Ttva avahpafibv, Kal Oe/Jievoi' evravda to. oirXa, {and having fortified 
a camp there,) ty/v kniovoav vvktcl biffxeve : Dionys. Ha!, viii, 549. 
v. Time. iv. p. 282. viii. p. 620. 

X. (XIII.) — 3. to besiege, to sit down before a place : Trpbs alri'iv 
T>)v iroXiv Toiv M.iXr)olw}>, Kparovv-es i\br], ~a owXa riOerrai '. Time, 
viii, 25. irept fjiipos rov rely^ovs to. oirXa xaradeodat KeXevoas, 
Heliod. M\h. vii, 1. v. Herodot. i. c. 62. 

XI. (XIV.) Karar/0ea-0ai i:\eos, bulav, and the like, to acquire: 
Ttfxrjv or Srifxiav, to pay a Jine ; ^apiTas or \upiv tiv\, to please, to 
gratify a person ; els or irpos Ttva. djv yapiv or ti)v evepyeaiav, to 
confer a favor or obligation on one ; opyijv es Tira, to vent one's 
anger against a person: Xen. o-irovbiji> irpos nva, to be zealous for 
him, to interest and exert one's self in his behalf. 

XII. (XV.) Tvyxaveir, to chance, to happen, is construed with 
a participle; as, ecpij rv^elv rare ewv apa Arj/jiapyjrw, he said that 
he happened at that time to be with Dimarelus: Herodot. viii. 
eTvy^f'uopey TrepiTrarovvres, we happened to be walking : Ceb. Tab. 
Sometimes the construction is reversed, the participle being that of 
Tvyyaveiv ', i'liirep Tvy^arwv virea-^Ofirjv, i. e. i/i'Trep vnoayonevos rvy- 
Xa>'io, a Soph. CEd. C. 1490. v. Eustath. ad II. b, p. 505. and Keen, 
ad Greg. Cor. p. 35. Sometimes, but rarely, TvyxavuH- is joined with 
another participle ; as in Aristot. poet, i, J. 

With various particles; as, el ovrws erv-^ev, it may be, may be, per- 



2 See Wessel. ad Diod. S. xii, 60. 
xx, 31. Add, 6e7vai Aelou, to make or 
render smooth : Aristoph. Pac. 1086. ri- 
Bevai Tr65a, to journey, to travel: Aristoph. 
Thesm. 1100. rtQiuai vopov, to make a law 
for others ; rideadai vofxov, to make a law 
which binds one's self: Xen. Mem. iv, 
4, 19. aGerelv, with a dative, to disbelieve, 
to discredit : Polyb. xii, G. with an accusa- 
tive, to violate: Polyb. xv, 17. irpocrava- 
tiOzvcu, to ascribe, to attribute : ALsop. 
Fab. S2. Genev. 1628. ZiaQiaQai \6yovs, 
to pronounce, to deliver, to utter: Diog. 
L. in Socr. p. 57. 1. 28. and in Zen. p. 
240. 1. 1. ed. H. St. form. min. inri- 
0eo-0cu, to describe, to set forth: Diog. 
L. Prooem. p. 3. girir'tOeo-Gai, to set upon, 
to attack, witli iirl and an accusative : 
Polyb. ix, 7. ft 5' inr4<rx*o, iro? tcara- 
6-fjo-eis; but what vnll become of your 
promises? Soph. (Ed. C. 227. K ura- 
04aQai dv/xbi/, to put off, lay aside, or 
resign, indignation: Aristoph. Vesp. 567. 
Traparideo-Qai, to quote as authority : "Ep- 
pi-nirov irapaTide/Aevos, Diog. L. in My- 
soii. p. 40. 1. 28. irapadeo-eai tovs 
ira78as ah-rtp j3ov\6/Aevos /coi -rov oIkov, to 
commit them to his care: Plut. in Cat. 
Utic. p. 1404. 1. 19. ed. H. St. &vn- 
irapa.Ti.eeva.1, to set against in an account, 



to reckon for a counterpoise: Menand. 
Fragm. TrporideffQai, to set forth, to re- 
present : Polyb. ii, 19. to arrive at a con- 
clusion or conviction : Polyb. x, 31. to lay 
out a corpse in a public part of a house, 
ready for burial: Aristoph. Lys. 611. 
Demosth. adv. Macart. p. 1071. 1. 1. ed. 
Reisk. awTidevai, to judge, to collect, 
to infer : Polyb. E. L. 81. ffwrldeadat, 
to give charge of, to commit or intrust : 
Polyb. v, 10. E. L. 67. evauvdeTeTv, to 
observe compacts faithfully : Polyb. E. L. 
35. virepdzadat, to surpass: Polyb. ii, 63. 
xv, 4. See Plut. Moral, t. ii. p. 308. 1. 
15. ed. Wyttenb. Svo. '6rav vTrodri tls 
virb toi> d(p6a\p.bv, Bx'w tpaiverai, (si sub 
oculo presseris rem objectam, geminari 
videbis : Gaza.) if you press an object 
under the eye, you will see it doubled : 
Aristot. Probl. Sect. iii. qu. 20. virodeo-- 
6ai, to pledge: Plut. in Cat. Utic. p. 1398. 
1. 23. ed. H. St. to suggest, to advise : 
Aristoph. Av. 1362. Eccl. 1154. irpo- 
xnrorideaQat, to promise: Longin. sect. i. 
— J. S. 

a Porson differs from Hermann here, 
taking rvyxdvwv t0 niean, if I obtained 
what I asked. "Sensus est, quampromisi, 
si ipse a Theseo id quod peterem conse- 
querer:" says he. — J. S. 



104, Tvyxayeiv. [Chap. v. 

haps: Aristot. Etli. iii. c. 8. el rvypi, if il should so happen, if it 
had so happened. el o'vtu rvypi, suppose for example, say for 
instance: /Eschin. c. Ctes. p. 2S0. I. 14. [p. 432. I. 7- ed. Reisk.] 
and so el ti>x<>i without ovrto : Schol. Aristopli. ad Av. 1069. *Ac 
Tv\r}i perhaps : aipobpa ye ijiOnrre reus eXtrimv, av rvyi] '. Demosth. 
Ol. ii. p. 21, 3. Reisk. fii) oKvei avpirepityeptaQai atirw, kclv ovto) Tvyjj 
avveirtarevulai, and if need be: Epictet. c. 22. fivitcu av rvxy, when 
occasion requires: Demosth. Ol. i. i'i*u> bk 6\iyov varepov, eav Tvyu>, 
if chance permit, perchance : Plat. Theag. p. 12.9- I. 17- 

XIII. (XVI.) With ri and av : orav fikv noiuiatv 6 ti av tvx*1 
eaaaros, Tapa\h r<s Qaiverai : when they do not act in concert, but 
each dues separately whatever chance may direct: Xen. 02c. viii, 3. 
With ov, vTtov, ann, and av or icai : ov-% onov av tv^oi, not every where 
indiscriminately. And with ovov alone : oirov 'irvyev emorov icara- 
fiefiXnrai, any where, at random : Xen. Q£c. iii, 3. So 6'jtjj rat rvyrf. 
"Ottt] tvxoi, wherever he chanced to come : Arr. Exp. Al. vi, 4. and 
ov: ov Tvyoi rijs TroXews aXvtjv, wandering about the city wherever 
chance might lead him: Atlien. Deipn. v. p. 193. ex Polyb. With 
onodev : oTroOev av rvxr], oitodzv 'irvyev : from all quarters without 
distinction ; from whatever place it might chance : Scylax in Peripl. 
And ibs : ws frvxe, at random, at hazard, just as it happened, neg- 
ligently : /El. V. II. xiii, 19. xii. extr. 

XIV. (XVII.) Tuyyaveiv is often used in speaking of what is 
ordinary or trivial, what may be met with any where or at any time : 
vl TvxpvTes avdpwirot, low mean men: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 415. 
vwo twv rv^ovruv alpedevres, elected by the common people: Xen. 
Mem. iii, 9, 10. ijt/Xa to. rvyovra, such as may easily be met with any 
where: lb. i, 1, 14. /jin-pol Kal 01 rv^ovres Qofloi, trifling alarms 
and of every -day occurrence: Lycurg. p. l64. [ed. Reisk.] Hence 
the signification of small : kclv to tv%ov elcnpeprjrai, if ever so little be 
carried in: Polyb. iv, 20. [if ever so little mud be carried by the 
rivers into the Pontus and Palus Maotis. — J. S.] ovbk rbv rvxavra 
Xpovov, not even a short time: Polyb. i, 70. 

XV. (XVIII.) Tvyxnveiv signifies to get, whether good or evil, 
with a genitive; as, Tvyx^veiv twv TtponnKovTwv, to get one's deserts : 
Isocr. in Evag. p. 389- Tvyxaveiv twv bmalwv, to get one's rights ; 
Tvyx^veiv Ttfxwptas, to meet with punishment : Plato in Gorg. Some- 
times without any case ; as, el be ^o) rvyx^y, but if she obtain not 

justice or redress : Dion. Hal. iii. p. 138. 1. 21. Tvyyaveiv, signify- 
ing to hit the mark, to hit, is joined with an accusative in Horn. II. 
e, 582. And in Eurip. Here. F. 5J. where it signifies to meet with, 
to incur, a genitive is put after it, and afterwards an accusative 
instead of another gen. in apposition with the first.* 

Erfurdt on Soph. Aj. 9. has shown, in opposition to Porson, who 
follows Phrynichus, that Tvyxavetv, without a participle of elvat added 
to it, is put for elvai by good authors. 

* The construction of rvyxdvfiv with been in the thoughts of the writer. — 
an accusative may be accounted for by J. S. 
supposing \<xyx&v<;iv } or the like, to have 



§ xii. Rule 1—3.] 'Y/3pt£w, 'Ywapxw. 105 

XVI. (XIX.) 'EmTvyxaveiv, without government, is to conjecture 
successfully : Plut. in Pericl. 155. a. J 



SECTION XII. — Of THE VERBS v(3pi$u, virapxio, viroGTeXXo/uat. 

Rule I. 'YfipiSeiv is — l. to be too much elated by good fortune ; 
to be proud and insolent on account of prosperity : y£I. V. H. viii, 
15. Aristoph. Plut. 564.-— 2. to indulge in the vices commonly bred 
or fostered by plenty and luxury ; as fierceness, petulance, violation 
of chastity, contumely, injuriousness, mockery, ridicule, &c. which 
are all denoted by the word vfipts : see IEA. V. H. i. c. 19.— 3. 
'Yfipiieodai in the passive has sometimes the preposition els after it 
governing an accusative of that as to which the action of the verb 
is suffered ; as, vfipiSofievovs els Tralbas kcii yvvalkas, being injured 
as to the chastity of their children and wives ; having their children 
and ivives violated: Dem. de feed. Alex. p. 87. 1. 18. v. not. ad 
Lucian. t. iii. p. 580. Kust. ad Aristoph. Plut. 900. Markl. ad 
Lys. p. 17. and 149. ed. Reisk. — 4. A thing is sometimes said ifipi- 
$,eoQai, which is subjected to the wautouness of luxury ; in Xen. 
Cyrop. ii. p. 56. a plain garment, not gaudy with purple, gold, and 
the like, is said to be ohbev ri v(jpi<Tjj.ev7i ; whence rot vftpiafieva is 
interpreted to. ciyav TroXv-eXrj : 2EI. V. H. i, 31. c 

'Ynap-^u) is sometimes, to begin, to be the first, either in a good or 
bad sense, and is put — 1. without any case; as, Ti^uipeladai tov 
vitap^avra, Deinoslh. in Neaer. p. 519- I. 30. 'Afivveadai also is 
opposed to it when thus used in a bad sense : Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 259- Thuc. ii, and avrevKoielp and ap-evepyere'iv, when it is used 
in a good sense. 

II. — 2. with els or npbs governing an accusative of the person, and 
with a genitive of the thing: u>v es Kvpop vTrrjpfav, Arr. Exp. Al. 
iii, 27. XP e ' as rtl/ ° s vvapfai Kal (piXavdpwnias npos avrov, Plut. Pomp. 
— 3. with a genitive of the thing, and a dative of the person: 01 
VTrrjpZav rrjs iXevdepias anaay rjj 'EWdSt, Andocid. p. 71. Reisk. 
— 4. with one accusative of the thing, and another of the person, 
governed by els oc irpos : £ia ras evepyeaias, as V7rrjp'£av els v/ias, De- 
mosth. de Fals. Leg. 

III. — 5. with an accusative of the thing and a dative of the per- 
son : ras evepyeaias as hjie'is v7n/p£are 'Ajivvrq, JEschin. de Fals. Leg. 
— 6. with a participle of benefiting or injuring: v/ms ohhev ttwttotc 



6 To succeed, to answer: el tmrvyxd.- fortunate or wretched in, Eurip. Bacch. 

voito, if the plan should answer, should 508. Sievrvx^, t° he perpetually fortu- 

succeed : Lucian, de Merc. cond. p. 465. nate, Menander, Fragm. — J. S. 

a. ed. Salmur. Add avrirvyxdveiv, to c Add, vfipifecrdcu, med. without go- 

get in return, with a genitive, Theogn. .vernraent: to grow wanton and injurious : 

642. avvTvyx&veiv, with a genitive : Aristoph. Eccl. 660. also Kadufipifau 

Sophocl. Phil. 320. viroTvyxdveiv, to without government, Soph. CEd. C. 1535. 

reply, to answer, Piut. in Ages. p. 1121. — J. S. 
1. 8. ed. H. St. ivSvcrrvxeiu, to be un~ 

Viger. o 



106 YffoarlWopajt. [-Cm a p. v. 

vwiip^afxev tcaKuis Troioiivres, Xen. Anab. v. [5, 7-] All that lias been 
said of inrapyus applies equally to Tcpavnupyw. 

IV. 'Tnap^eti' will) a dative, signifies, to favor, to be on the side 
of: b)~i\6s lorn — ko0' vfxCJv vnupZuv eKeivG), Demosth. de Fi.ls. Leg. 
vTT«p£et vf/iv »/ t/o) ttuXis, Xen. Anab. v. It is also put for elvai, and 
that too with a genitive case after it: <pvaews ayaQi]s vnapfou, Xen. 
Mem. 

V. 'lVfip^fd' sometimes signifies, to be permitted, to be possible, to 
be in the poiver of, to be necessary : top arparbv biavwKavaai ov-% 
vnrjpZe, it teas not permitted, or practicable : Pint, tovs vei;poi/s — 
bia rc'i^ovs edairrop, uxnrep iinripy^e, as well as circumstances allowed, 
as ivell as they could: Thuc. And with a dative: v-nupyei rrj 
4^v\y Evhaljiovi e'uai, it is in the power of, &c. Plato Phaed. c. 29. 
vwrip^ev ai>rb> *; <pevyetp ij vedxwai, he ivould have had no other alter- 
native than exile or death: iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 273. 1. 26. 

VI. 'YnoareXXo/jiai signifies usually — 1. to fear or dread: Tijs 
fSovXrjs — rr)p ArjfAabov hvvafxiv V7rooT€iXaf.ieprjs, Dinarcl). p. 93. 1. 53. — 
2. to humble or submit one's self ; to crouch : evXa(3>)s wv vmarkX- 
Xero, Philo/ 

VII. — 3. to remit or relax somewhat of one's full force or power ; 
to suppress or soften something of what one could say : ovbep vnoarei- 
Xajueros fxiXXu) ■noieiadai tovs Xoyovs, Isocr. de Face, ws vrpos 7re7rpa- 
Koras eavToi/s Ka\ arocnwrarovs avOpwTrovs, /U7]bev VKoaTeikafievov '. De- 
mosth. de Fals. Leg. finbev vnoarei^Xafxevf irpos iifipiv, Demosih. in 
Mid. having proceeded to the extremity of outrage. viroarelXaadai 
irepl (Lv v[xiv ev/ucpepetp yyovpiai, Demosth. Ol. i. In this sense a 
treacherous advocate is said vTrooreXXeodai. 

VIII. It is sometimes followed by a partitive genitive ; as, vno- 
(TTeXXeadat tijs -rrapp^uias, to remit in some degree one's freedom of 
speech or boldness : rfjs rpocpfjs vnoiTTeXXecfdai, to subtract from one's 
food: Aristot. in Problem. 

'YTTOvreXXeodai sometimes signifies, to be inferior: top Ylbv vno- 
arAXXecrdai too Flarpos, Greg. Naz. Sometimes, to be deprived of 
part of ; to be shortened of: vTrocreXXeadai twp ayadOiv, Aristot/ 



d This sense, says Hermann, is derived o-reAAw, as Hoogeveen remarks, is, to fit 

from that of the active viroaTzXheiv, or adapt to any purpose, to furnish out, to 

which is properly a nautical term, to let equip. The following senses of some of 

down or furl the sails of a vessel: see its derivatives and compounds may he 

Hermann, ad Eurip. Hec. p. 165. faro- remarked: o-varoXio-ai, Eurip. Or. 1433. 

o-reWeiv in Polyb. and Plut. is, to go un- Pors. ffvppdtyai, Schol. avao'TeWzadai, 

der ; vnb tV irapoepetav inroffTeiAavres, to gird up, Aristoph. Eccl. 268. to d/'s- 

Polyb. iv, 12. vireo-TaAKeio-av inrb top semble ; to conceal one's disposition, 

\6<pov, Polyb. x, 29. vireo-reiAe to7s Polyb. E. Peir. p. 27. ed. Ern. St«- 

oxvpoirdTOis rod Tavpov, Plut. Demetr. p. ariAXeiv irphs, to differ with; to be at 

1671. 1. 7. ed. H. St. Hence figura- variance with ; not to concur with: Po- 

tively, 'lepoop uir o ffrelAas kavrhv imb lyb. E. L. 9. StaaTeAAsiv, to loosen, Plut. 

t)]v "Pwp.aioiP GKz-n-nv — aSeeis ePacriAeve, in Anton, p. 1741. 1. 3. ed. PI. St. 

Polyb. i, 16. and the sense of the mede eKareWeiv, to adorn, to decorate, Soph, 

verb noticed by Viger in the text. See (Ed. R. 1269. KaTaareAXeiv, to put in 

Diog. L. in Xenocr. p. 141. 1. 18. ed. H. place, to re-adjust, Eurip. Bacch. 931. to 

St. — J. S. inwrap, to cover, to shelter, to protect, 

e The primary sense of the simple verb Eurip. Iph. A. 934. to accoutre, Ari- 



RULE 1 — 8.] ^aivofxai, 4>e,ow. 107 



SECTION XIII. — ON THE VERBS (palvopai AND (pipiv. 

Rule I. Qaivopai has often a signification of certainty and reality 
rather than of mere appearance : ebei rovrwv rua ku>\vti)v <t>avrjvai, 
Demosth. pro Cor. ovk (nrtarwr vp~iv, &s ye poi <paiverai, Id. ib. 
\6yos (pait'Ofxevos, clear, evident: Polyb. xvii, 1. Frequently with a 
participle; as, (paiverai airodavior, he died as we find : Plato Pheed. 
[p. 22. 1. 19. ed. Bas. 1.] aBav'afrov ye f] ipv^fj (paiverai ovaa, Id. ib. 
c. 63. See also Demosth. de fals. Leg. p. 378. and in Epist. p. 
1470. ed. Reisk. In this sense it resembles efcrageadai, to be mani- 
festly found ; to be found by unquestionable evidence or proofs. 

II. Ta lepa are said (paiveadai, when they afford favourable pre- 
sages : Pint, in Aristid. p. 329. e - 

III. Qipeiv is sometimes, to concern, to import, to be of consequence 
or moment: piya yap ri (pipeiv olofieQa Kal 6\ov els iroXireiav, for we 
think it of great importance, or rather, all in all to the state : 
Plato de Rep. v. iravra ra npbs evbatfxoviav (pipovra, Plato, con- 
ducing to. 

IV. XaXeTTws (pepeiv is, to be troubled, vexed, grieved, chagrined: 
e7ri rovrois — \a\ertibs e(pepov, Piut. Pomp. ^a\e7r<5s (pipu) rols wapovoi 
7rpa.yp.ua1v, Xen. Anab. i. ^aXenaJs etyepov ru> rroXipu), Xen. H. 
Gr. v. 

V. (VI.) The imperative (pipe is used in the singular as a particle, 
with all persons of both numbers, and with the subjunctive, impera- 
tive, and in interrogations with the indicative, moods ; signifying, well, 
come, now then, well then, pray, tell me now, &c. as, (pep* "ibw ri nal 
rrpa^eis pe, Lucian, Vit. Auct. (pipe bt) rrepl rov \pr)fiaparos e'irro}, De- 
mosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 414. <pipe, el aol boicel, — yevwpeda cwrrjpes 1 
M\. V. H. i, 30. (pipe S>) vvv, el KaKov eapev, ri yapeW ijpas ', Ari- 
stoph. Thesm. 795. [788.] (pipe yap, kl'qiv fjplv (pvaeis 'imrwv ayadiov ; 
iEschin. Socr. i, 10. 

VI. (VII.) ®epe, followed by an infinitive, is, suppose, put the 
case ; as, 0e'pe eKXelipai to ovopa T] rb prjpa, Apollon. Alex, i, 3. 
(pipe rtXeiovas evbs aypov erriKparelv, Id. i, 30. $epe elrreiv is used for 
olov, for instance, for example, so to speak ; as, fjbe f) yvwpr} Travruiv 
apa rwv (ptXoa6(pu)v earl, (pipe elnelv, rov FLKaroovos ev KparuXw. its 
era avayovori, (pipe elneiv rov Ai'a : Porphyr. laud, a Steph. in Thes. 
[t. iv. S2. e.] And with wv : ws (pipe elrre'iv, Nazianz. ib. so to speak. 

VII. (VIII.) The same words (pipe e'nrelv are used in anticipating 
an objection ; as, (pipe elneiv, aXka. vnepiityavos elpi : but you will 
perhaps say that I am haughty : Dionys. Hal. Arch, iv, 36. 

VIII. (IX.) Even singly (pipe sometimes means, for instance ; as, 
ml vovs, 6 (ppovifaetos oiKeios, a.(ppaivei rroXkatcts Kara, ri avpfieprjKOS, 
naparpaTreis ev vnepfiaWovaais, (pipe, awparos ctppwariats : and even 

stoph. Tliesm. 256. irepwTeWeiv, to to cherish, Demosth. ia Timocr. p. 744. 
palliate, to extenuate, Polyb. E. L. 93. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.— J. S. 



108 4>fyw. [Chap. v. § xiv. 

the mind itself, which is naturally allied to sense, often grows foolish 
from some accidental cause, being unhinged, for instance, by ex- 
tremity of bodily diseases: Euseb. Praep. vi. p. 247- b. Sometimes 
olov is joined with it : ttoWcis — evpoiiev vnoOtiKas' olov (jiepe, ev^ijs — 
wept : as for example : Clem. Alex. Paed. iii. p. 260. 

<l>epetv signifies also to ravage, to spoil: eajepov yap ctWrjXovs, 
Thuc. i, 7. 

IX. (X.) The passive ^petrdai with eSor ko\ws is to be prosperous 
or successful ; with kcikHis the contrary ; as, ev (pepoLievos ev orparif- 
yiais, Thuc. sncws cj>epo[.iev(j raj NW^, to JSicias going on very 
badly or unsuccessfully : Pint, in Alcib. yvovs — Ttiraacpepvrjv ainov 
eJi'ai tov (cokws (pepeadairu avrov, having discovered that Tissaphernes 
ivas the cause of his affairs being in a bad state : Xen. H. Gr. iii. 
p. 501. 

QepeaQui often governs an accusative; as, <peperrdai hu^av, Tifxi)v t 
&c. to acquire. Qepeadai ret wpwra, to be highest in rank or office : 
Paus. Acii. p. 415/ 



SECTION XIV.— Of the verbs (pOaveiv, 

^uipelv, iyywpeHv* 



bveiv, yaipeiv, -)(paadai 



Rule I. Qdavu) has always a signification of anticipation, of doing 
or suffering something beforehand, or of celerity or ease : v. Horn. 
II. i, 503. It is commonly joined with a participle in place of an 



/ Add, Qepeiv, to elect, to create: &v . 
Xopiiybv, § yvjj.va.ffiapxov, ^ eaTtdropa, % 
&\\o ti tcSc aAAcav (pepwai : Demosth. in 
Begot, de Nom. p. 996. ). 24. ed. Reisk. 
(pzpeiv, neuter, Soph. (Ed. C. 1694. 
eXwrrov (pepeo-Qai, to have less credit, po- 
pularity, esteem, &c. Plut. in Pomp. p. 
1152. 1. 13. ed. H. St. ava<pepeiv, to 
■produce: Plut. in Gracch. p. 1523. 1. 4. 
to end in, to tend to, Plut. Moral, sect. 
808. b. ed. Wyttenb. avcupepeardat. is said 
of a writing which is in the hands of the 
public : Plut. in Ages. p. 1102. 1. 4. but 
if the true reading in that passage be ava- 
tpeperai yovv iiri(TT6\iov avTcp, (instead of 
en/rod, the present reading,) ava<pepeTai 
may be translated, is ascribed or attri- 
buted, airocpepeiv, a forensic term, to ex- 
hibit, to put in : Demosth. adv. Callicl. 
p. 1280. 1. 19. ed. Reisk. (On dia<pepeiv 
see the note on C. v. § v. R. 9.) Sia- 
cpopeTv, to tear in pieces: Aristop'n. Eq. 
294. ffvvdicupepeiv, to transact or conduct 
in conjunction with others : Aristoph. Eq. 
597. to bear or undergo with another: 
Plut. Ag. et Cleom. p. 1509. 1. 17. ed. 
H. St. Id. in Brut. p. 1810. I. 16. to 
keep (as a secret) in concert with one 
another, Plut. in Brut. p. 1809. I. 17. 
elo-fiipeo-dai, to draw into itself, into Us 



stream, (said of a river,) Horn. 11. X, 495. 
*K<pepeu>, to produce, to bring forth : Eu- 
rip. Androm. 622. ittcpepeiv tov ir6\ep.ov, 
to commence hostilities, to begin offensive 
warfare : Liban. argum. or. Demosth. 
irepl o-v/jL/xop. — iiupepeiv intransitively, to 
get the start, to be foremost : Horn. II. ty, 
759. cf. 376. iit<popeiv tov (uadbv tjliuv, 
to carry off, to bear away : Aristoph. 
Vesp. 1118. iKcpepoiivdelo-eai, to be di- 
vulged : iEneas Poliorc. e. 22. ifupe- 
psaBai, to be in, to be inherent in : Longin. 
§ x. v. Toup. im<p4peiv, to repartee: 
Aristoph. Eq. 837. KaTacbepetv, to demo- 
lish : Polyb. iv, 65. KtzTacpepeiv aiiTou 
iroWa, to utter against: Plut. Moral, t. i. 
p. 253. ed. Wyttenb. Svo. KaTafepza-dat, 
with a genitive, to rush upon, to attack : 
Eustath. p. 91. 1. 19. p. 100. 1. 10. napa.' 
<popuv, to bring: Aristoph. Av. 839. ire- 
pupipeiv, to transfer: Plut. Mor. t. ii. p. 
303. 1. 13, o-vLnrepKpepeo-dai, with a da- 
tive, to be well acquainted with: Polyb. 
ix, 14. to treat of or handle rightly: Id. 
iii, 10. o-viupepeiv, to agree with, to tally 
with: Aristoph. Eq. 1233. imoipipeo-Qat, 
to decline, to wane : Longin. § ix. v. Toup. 
inrocptpeadai. tovtols, to be guided by these 
persons: Plut. Mor. t. iii. p. 445. 1. 3. — 
J. S. 



Rule 1—4.] Qdavw. 1 109 

infinitive ; as, fxrj eij)6r)0-av irepibvcavres avrbv, they did not strip him 
before they left him through fear: Antipho p. 631. [I. 20. ed„ 
Reisk.] e<pdaK€vai abirnvvres, to have been the aggressors, to have 
committed an injury the first : Demostb. pro Cor. p. 239- tyQavovoi 
b' eir avra Karaipevyovres rw X6yu> — ol to'is epyois TrXe'iarov cnre-^ovres : 
they readily fly to them, [to. koivo. ical <piXavQpo>Tra r£>v ovo^arwv] or 
take refuge in them: iEschin. in Ctes. p. 639- [ed. Reisk.] The 
compound vnocpdavoj is construed in the same manner. — The participle 
fyQaaas is found joined with another participle : <p6aoas avros rnv 
TlepmXov apirarras, Herodot. vi, 65. g 

II. (IV.) Sometimes <pdavu and the participle joined with it are 
preceded by ovk, and followed by mi ; as, ovk e<bdt]fxev eh Tpoi$.r\va 
eXQovres, ical Toiavrais voaois eXritydrf/jLev : no sooner had we arrived at 
Trcezen, than we were seized with such disorders: Isocr. in iEgin. 
v. Isocr. Paneg. p. 113. b. Demosth. adv. Macart. p. 1073. [ed. 
Reisk.] and Lucian in Dial. Menipp. et Tant. [p. 265. c. ed. Salm.] A 

Sometimes instead of ovk some other particle precedes ; as, cat 
fjioXts <pdavei, &p6voicnv efxireaovaa, fir) y^afxal ireae'iv, Kat tis yepaia — 
avu>X6Xv£e: Eurip. Med. 1169- v. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. p. 207- 
sq. Musgr. et Heath, ad Suppl. 1218. 

Sometimes the participle joined with fdavw is followed by >) signi- 
fying before, with an infinitive ; as, (pdairjre yap av -noXXaKis avbpairo- 
burdevres y\ riva nvQeadai f)/j.iwv, for you would be made slaves over 
and over again before any of us could hear of it : Herodot. Er. c. 
108. avvTiQevruL (pQacai ri bpaaavres 1) iraBeiv, they agreed to be 
beforehand in doing something ere they were overpowered : Hero- 
dian i, 17, 16. 8 

III. With an infinitive it usually signifies, to be able: oh yap 
(pdavet Ttpoaavajiaiveiv 6 Xoyos, cannot ascend: Philo de Legat. ad 
Caium. 

It governs an accusative of what is left behind, or not waited for : 
<pdacras 7ov Xoyiv/jthv, Demosth. adv. Mid. p. 526. [See another ex- 
ample in note g.] <j>8avei be re Kat rbv dyovra, gets before: Horn. II. 
xxi, 26l. 

IV. (V.) The optative of <pdaveiv with ovk and av appears to be 
sometimes employed to signify the certainty of some future event; 
as, ovk av cpdavoi r^s KUKovpyias riaiv onroTivwv, he will not escape 
punishment for his transgression.-? The same form may frequently 



s By a reverse of construction the par- veiv signifies to get to a place before 

ticiple of (pddvce itself is often joined with another person, it is followed by f) without 

some other verb, the sense remaining the an infinitive : ecpQns rrefrbs i&v ^ iyh avv 

same ; as, avecp^ds, pe tpddoas : you opened vrjt jj.eXa.ivri ; hace you got hither sooner 

before I could knock: Aristoph. Plut. 1102. by land than I by sea? — J. S. 

— J. S. J He will quickly be punibhed, &c. I 

h ov yap e$0rj /xoi cu/i/SaiTa r\ arvxia, believe that all the passages in which 

Ka\ evObs — tovtoiv rives — ewexetpricrav dia- <p6dvetv occurs, may be explained by its 

(popriaai r&vdodev : Demosth. adv. Eubu- primary meaning of anticipation or ce- 

lid. 1319, 9. Reisk. scarcely had the mis- lerity : thus, when in Eurip. (Heracl.720.) 

fortune happened to me, when, &c. See the servant says to Iolaus, oirAwv (iev ^Stj 

Aristoph. Nub. 1384. — J. S. t^S' opas iravrevxiav. (pQdvois 5' a.v ovk 

* In Horn. Od. \, 58. where >pQ&~ av roloSe ffvyKpvirrwv de^us, he means to 



110 fyveiv, Xaipetv. [CHA P. V. S xiv. 

be rendered, forthwith, instantly ; as, ovk av (pQavots Xeyu>v, tell me 
immediately: Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 11. ouk ui> ty&npoire aKoXovQovvres, 
follow me instantly : Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 1. where Ernesti observes 
t hat this sense results from the primary one of anticipation ; because 
he who wishes to he before another must necessarily use speed. See 
also Demosth. adv. Timocr. p. 745. [I. 4. ed. Reisk.] etadv. Aristog. 
p. 783. [p. 782. 1. 16". ed. Reisk.] Plato Symp. c. 11. Pha:d. 
c 49. 

<bueti> sometimes signifies to have naturally , to possess from nature ; 
as Herodotus says of the crocodile, yXCoaoav be p.ovvov Orjpiojp ovk 
fyvcre, ii, 68. So fpevas (fweiv, Soph. El. 1463. CEd. C. 804. 
The preterperf. necpvKevai signifies elegantly, to be constituted, gifted, 
qualijled, adapted, inclined, by nature; as, vvrto ravra itecpvKe, De- 
moslh. irefvKe yap >/ Avoiov Ae£ts eyeiv to ^aplev, rj b' 'Io-o/cparovs 
fiouXerm: for the diction of Lysias is naturally graceful; that of 
Isocrales affects to be so: Dionys. Hal. de Ant. Or. a\\o 7rpos 
aXXo 7T€^u(cer, Epict. Ench. c. 36". netyvKe fiiae'ir, Plato Phaed. p. 
80. 1. 5. 7re0u/ca yyefjoveveiv. 7re<pvKe yap 7rpos tovto nav e?woj', rot 
pXafiepa tyevyeiv: Epict. Ench. c. 38. 

Xaipu) is elegantly joined with a participle; as, kv ynvi fiovXet 
ao(pla, — ?) Trai'ovpyta, ?} otiovv yaipeis 6rofj.a£u)t>, or whatever you like 
to call it: Plato Hipp. Min. p. 369. b Tijv TiTavo/ua-^iav iroitjaas, 
e'ir E,vfii)\6s eanv b Koplvdtos, ?] 'Apicrlros, j) 6'oris bifitOTe x al P ei ° v0 ~ 
)ua5o/.teros : or ivhatever the name may be which he prefers: Athen. 
vii. p. 277. See Plat. Phcedr. p. 273. I. 29. e'xaipe KoXaKevo/uevos, 
he delighted in flattery: iEsch. adv. Ctes. p. 627. v. Hor. 
Epod. 2. [v. 10.] Ev(ppaiveadaL has the same construction as 
yaipeiv. k 

When yaipeiv signifies to escape with impunity, its participle is 
generally used, but not always : AW ov ti -^aipujv bis ye 7n]/xoras 
epe7s, Soph. (Ed. R. 363. ov ti yaipijatav y eaei, Aristoph. Vesp. 186. 
See Soph. Antig. 75S. Phil. 1299- Herodot. ix, 106. The same is 
expressed by yeyrjOibs, Soph. (Ed. R. 368. and for ov xn/jowr, k\ouW 



inform liim that he cannot arm himself tention of doing anything quickly : thus, 

more quickly than the exigence requires ; aAAa jjAvtoi, <pdvai, rd ye a\r)9rj ■Kapir\\xi, 

that all his despatch cannot outstrip the koX /ceAeuw Xiyeiv. Owe Uv (pddvoijxi, elireTv 

necessity of the occasion. So (pwevuv tqv 'AA/ci^iaSrjv : Plato Symp. xxxi, 7. 

■jraldas ovk It' Uv cp&dvois, Eurip. Alcest. I think it therefore unnecessary to adopt 

665. you cannot too soon beget other the novel supposition of Hermann, that 

children to cherish your old age and (pddvco is properly cesso, desino. — J. S. 

bury you ; for as to me, I renounce you. A When x a ' l P eLV nas i ts ^ rst sense, la- 

So in the passage from Xen. ovk. tw tart, says Hermann, the construction may 

fddvois xiycav, you cannot forerun my be reversed, and a participle of x a ' l P- lv 

desire of hearing, however quickly you used ; as, for x a ^P els K\lovo~a, Euripides 

may tell me. And by its signification of might have said x a ty ova? aKoveis, (Med. 

celerity may be explained this same phrase 1130.) and as Horn, says 6 §' edQaro 

when used interrogatively, as in Aristoph. x ai P a>v '• Dut when * l h as lts second tense, 

Plut. 874. And when the formula had once gaud ere, lubentiits facere, amare, solere, 

become usual in the second and third per- its participle cannot be used: x ai P 0Vres 

sons to enjoin or express celerity, it was ovo/xd^ovai must not be said, but x^pwvw 

natural enough that it should be employed bvufidfrvTes may. — J. S, 
in the first person also, to express an in- 



RULE 4.] Xpaadai. HI 

is often used, as in Soph. CEd. R. 41. [401.] — The verb x ai P e "'> and 
not its participle, is used in Aristoph. Plut. v. 64. ovtoi, /xh rrjv 
Ar//uriTpa, ^aiprjaets ert : and in Aristoph. Eq. 235. On ov ^aiptov, 
see Toup. ad Theocr. viii, 40. and ad Longin. xvi. § 3. 

Xalpetv signifies also to be content: Soph. Aj. 113. It is used in 
bidding adieu : dXX' 'idi j^aipwv, go, and farewell: v. Eurip. Phoen. 
92S. Ale. 81 6. Hence figuratively, noWa elmvra x a ^P eiv T f aXq- 
6el, bidding a long farewell to truth: Plato Pbaedr. p. 272. i. e. 
utterly neglecting it: tov Ma — x ai P £LV ecirras, Aristoph. Plut. 1186. 
ce fxovov eiri\pr)(j)i£<i>v, tovs (iXXovs ew x n '-P eLV : taking your suffrage 
alone, I shall pay no regard to others: Plato Gorg. p. 476. And in 
bidding adieu to what is hated, it rather assumes the nature of an 
imprecation : rrjv cr>v be Kvirpiv 7ro'XX' eyw xaipeiv Xeyw, Eurip. Hip- 
pol. 113. xatp&Th) ttuXis, Eurip. Phoeu. 926. ya' l P eiv KeXeiuiv ttoXXcl 
tovs 'A^apreas, Aristoph. Ach. 200. 

Xaipeiv is a form used in the beginning of letters, like the English 
greeting: v. Lucian, pro laps. int. salut. p. 1 97. Schol. ad Ari- 
stoph. Nub. 609. Plut. 322. Diog. L. iii. p. 223. and Interpp. ad 
Thorn. M. 

Xpaadai, which is properly to employ as a means or instrument, 
is construed- -1. with a dative of what is employed, and an accusa- 
tive of the use, purpose, or end ; as, 7roXXa teat 'ttuvtoIo. expnaaro 
avTols, he employed them for many and various purposes : Aristid. 
pro Quat. p. 404. eyto be ovk e'^w ti xp>/<70juat TOiS T°vrov fxap- 
TvtTw, but I know not what to do with his witnesses : Demosth. c. 
Pliorm. p. 5f)0. 1. 44. v. Aristoph. Pac. 229- and 1239. ovk o.p e^ois 
a ti xp>;<7aio oavT(5, Plato Gorg. p. 485. I. 10. on ovk clp e^ois e&Xdojv 
o rt xpu> oeavTu, that if you had gone out of the city, you would not 
have known what to do with yourself, whither to betake yourself : 
Plato Crito c. 4. — 2. with an adverb and a dative : toIs Kivbwevovaiv 
ael Kexpfi^evos eirieiKws Kat tfuXavdpuTrios, behaving with indulgence and 
humanity to those who from time to time were put upon their trial: 
Plut. in Cic. p. 865. 1. 33. xP'l°^ at evyrw/uoiws eavrtS, to behave 
reasonably and fairly : Xen. Ages, ii, 25. aveyKXi'iTws wpos enrav- 
ras xpijaQe rw av/xfepovTi, follow your interest without accusation by 
anyone: Demosth. de Feed. Al. p. 87. I. 7- [212, 9- ed. Reisk.] 
ws aroXfjibis xP^fievoy ro~is Kaipols, as not having spirit to make use of 
opportunities : Polyb. iii. rw ipevbeadai Kal firjbh vyies Xeyeir eroijuios 
XPnrat, he employs falsehood and misrepresentation without scruple: 
Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 98. — 3. (4.) with ti in the following 
phrases, in which the dative governed by xP^^ cu is not expressed : 
*rape)(Wjue^ r/fids avrovs xPV a ^ aL KsJpw o rt av berj, let US offer ourselves 
to Cyrus to be employed in whatever may be required: Xen. 
Cyrop. viii. c. 1. eiriTpeirovTes 'AXe$ay§p« XP^ a ^ aL °' Tl fl°vXotTO, 
giving full power to Alexander to do what he pleased with them : 
\. e. surrendering at discretion : Arrian iii, 23. xPV a ® aL T0V ®' "' Tl "- v 
avros (3ovXr)Tai, to do whatever he will ivith them ; to use his own 
pleasure with respect to them: Isocr. Panath. c. 39- p- 254. ed. 
Coraii. — 4. (5.) with a dative only ; as, xPV^at t$ 0ew is, to consult 
the oracle of a deity : Arrian iii. c. 4. Apollo is said by Lucian 



112 Xiopelv. [Chap. v. § xiv. 

e£a7rar£v rovs ■xpw/ue'vovs ahro), Dial. Jan. et Laf. — 5. with the same 
construction as in number 1. but signifying to answer : ttclvv edavfiacra 
e'i ti e'£ei tis ^pyfraaQai rw Xoyf avrov, Plato Phaed. p. 65. 1. 10. 
to'is 6' kv rip napovri Xeyu/Jierois ov% e£e«s (i re \pi)(yr\, Plato Euthyd. 
p. 287. '• 15. It may be observed that this is only a virtual or a 
consequential meaning; the literal signification being the same as that 
of the passages in number 1. — 6". with a dative of a person repre- 
sented as speaking, or quoted or cited ; as, Jj avros Xeywv y dXXw 
Xeyorn xpuj/jLevos, either speaking in his own person, or using that 
of another: Proc. in Plat. Polit. p. 389- Flirracw els fxiKpa cat 
ovk a£ia \6yov yprjactfieros, citing Pittacus as authority in trifling 
and unimportant matters: Pint, de Herod, mated, p. 858. — 7» 
with a dative of a defect, or vice, or other evil; as, apadla xpiiffde, 
you show ignorance, or act with ignorance : Thuc. i, 68. rijv 
fi£Qr)v biafdeipeiv to. re aujfxara Kal rets i^u^as T & v \PM\ikvtoV) (avrrj, 
viz.) that drunkenness destroys both the bodies and the souls of those 
who are addicted to it: Prod, in Plat. Remp. p. 3o9- 1. 50. yeipwvi 
Xpricafievov, having met with, or contended with a storm: Demosth. 
de Cor. p. 341. 1. 12. rw xeipi'i, <p ey^prjaavro 'A^atoi : Thuc. iv, 
120. — 8. (9-) with a dative, and signifying to utter: Kpavyrj re Kal 
oXoXvyrj ^piopivr}, Thuc. ii, 3. — 9- (10.) with a dative alone, and 
signifying simply to have : 7roXews ovre ieools ovre KaraoKevals ttoXvte- 
Xe<n yprjaanevvs, a city which had neither temples nor costly build- 
ings: Thuc. i, 10. Trpoyovois fiamXevcnv e^pi)aaro, he had kings 
for his ancestors ; his ancestors were kings : Aphthon. in Progymn. 
v. Cic. Catil. ii. c. 8. [§ 18.] Corn. Nep. in Attic, [c. i. 1. 3.]— 
10. (11.) with a dative, and signifying to observe: r&J rrarplo) v6\ug 
Xpwfxevm brt/joala. reacts iiroirivavro, Thuc. ii, 34. 

V. (VIII.) Xuipelv is joined with bia and a genitive ; as, Sta li<povs 
seal <p6vov ywpeiv, to attempt to make a way by sword and slaughter ; 
to resort to the sword and slaughter : [Herodian,] hC vtco-^iwv /ce^w- 
pr)K.Ms avtjKevTwv, having incurred the most violent suspicions: Philo 
de Legat. ad Caiuni. With eVt and an accusative : eVt to fieXnov 
Xwpel ra Trpayfiara, affairs are improving : eVi irXe'iarov rrjs naibeias 
ywpelv, to advance very far in learning: or with Kara Xoyov, as, 
affairs are said k. X. ^wpelv, to be going on as people wished: 
Polyb. ii. 

VI. (IX.) With a preposition and an accusative, or with o/We 
and a dative, or a dative alone, in a military sense, to advance 
against, to meet, to face : efiovXero fiev els rot oVXa ^u)pe~iv rols (pevyov- 
aiv evavTiuos : he wished indeed to advance against 1 the enemy in the 
opposite direction to his own soldiers who were running away : Plut. 
in Romul. [p. 52. 1. 12. ed. H. St.] vfxocre \wpe~u> ra izivhvvf, to 

face the danger; x u ? e ~ iv T0 ~ IS 'Efipaiots eh paxnv, to advance against 
the Hebrews to battle : Joseph, p. 74. 

VII. (X.) With an accusative, signifying to hold or contain, and 
figuratively, to admit or be capable of: \pvKn)p nXewv 1) oktw KorvXas 

1 Viger translates eh ra SirXa, x u P e ~ u > armed men, as, ra. '6irka for owXirai in 
armatus occurrere : but to. '6w\a signifies Xen. Anab. iii, 3, 6. iii, 4, 16. — J. S. 



Rules— 8.] THE PARTICIPLE. 113 

\iopwv, Plat. Sjmp. p. 214.™* /JtTjbe rrjs ijXiKias ^wpoi/ffrjs eytcXrjpa rot- 
omov : or with an infinitive, when it signifies to be able : ova kavws to. 
6ela vofjrrai ywpovuev. Xwpeu' is sometimes to spread : bofcu b' e^oipet 
— av' 'EWyvoji' Irparov : Eurip. Hec. 114. — To flow ; kywpei e/xov 
ra bdicpva. 

It is sometimes used impersonally; as, vv x&>pe7 yeveaBai tovto, it 
is not possible, &c. when it has often a dative ; ov y(wp^ H ot irepiira- 
tovvti, there is not room for me to walk. 

VIII. (XI.) The compound eyy^opelv is much oftener used imper- 
sonally ; as, icadoaov av ey^wpfj, as far as may be allowed or prac- 
ticable ; eft yap eyyupei, for there is still time enough : Plato Phaed. 
c. 65. (in which sense Xen. says, 6 ^povos ky-^wpe'i, de Re Eq. xii, 
13.) Sometimes with an infinitive preceded either by an accusative : 
ov yap av uiira eve^wpet naica elvai, Plato de Rep. iii. p. 408. or by a 
dative : if ovk eyywpel. etc veas ev irovijpa'is Tpv^als redpa<pdai, Id. ib. or 
by both at once: j? ovk eyywpel. kok))v yevofjLevrjv — ev tl Qepaireveiv : 
Id.ib. 



CHAPTER VI. 

THE PARTICIPLE. 

SECTION I. — On participles in general. 

Rule I. Participles are often joined elliptically with the particle 
ws, in the accusative ; as, eh ra opt) Karetyvyov, ws 7rpos tuvto. ye ov% 
i\lpvTa 'AXe^avbpov: they fled to the mountains, in expectation that 
Alexander would not come thither: Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 24. v. 
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 220. 'Ary^e b' opdbs Xaus eh epiv Xoyiov, 
'Bfie'ts /uev. ws vicwrra beanorrjv efiov, 01 b' w$ eKelvov °. Eurip. Phcen. 
1469. we maintaining that our master was the conqueror, they that 
Polynices teas ; avrbs eiropevdr) irpos — 'lovv wv, ais etceivf Trpoo7]Kov, 
ovti arparriyf, KoXaaai rovs eaXwicoras : considering that it belonged to 
him as prcetor to, &c. Plut. in Caes. 2. Or in the nominative, 
agreeing with the subject of the leading verb ; (see Ch. v. § iii. 
R. 2.) as, ev oXiywpcq knoiovvTo, a> s, orav kleXdioatv, rj ovy^ vnofxevovvTas 
ctyas, T] pqblus \r)\p6fxevot (3la: they made light of it, as expecting 
either that the enemy when out in the field would not withstand 
them, or that they themselves would be able to overpower him by 
assault: Thuc. iv, 5. Trapa<rKeva£ov avroQev us narayeXaad n- 
crofievos, ws KaTafXLJKrfaouevuiv aov iroXXwv, ws epovvrtav on, &C 
make up your mind at the outset to be laughed at, &c. Epict. c. 29. 
where the genitives absolute of the participles after ws are to be ob- 
served. The case of the participle is sometimes determined by that 
of some preceding word, although not in the nominative; as, teal 
epws eveireoe toIs naaiv o/xo/ws eKirXevcrai. rots fxev yap izpeofivTepois, 

m In the mede, l{ x»«S xvpyveTai, he him: Aristopb. Nub. 1238. — J. S. 
(Pasias) will take six choce of salt to salt 

Viger. p 



114 THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. ^ i. 

ws fj KnTct(TTpe\pofteyois t(f 5 en-Xeov, rj ovbev av cnpaXe'iaav fieyaXrjv 
huvafiiv. as thinking either that they should subdue, &c. Time. 
vi, 24. 

II. Participles neuter are put without ws either in the accusative 
with an ellipsis of kuto. ; as, to ye bouovv e/jiol, at least as / think: 
or in that or other eases absolute ; as, aireifii iraXiv, kneivtp boicovv: it 
so seeming good to him, since it seems good to him : Epict. ap. 
Arrian. iii. c. 26. bo'^av be rrtpiaiv hveveyiceiv es to ^prjUTrjpiov to kv 
AeAipoTs, bibtiHxi MeSoeri f/Tlvdia fiaatXeiav t>)v 'Adnvaitov : they having 
determined, when they had determined : Paus. in Ach. p. 398. 
So boicij aa v, Eurip. Suppl. 129. hehoypevov, Thuc. i, 125. oirires 
ovTht nepl [.iiKpuiv Kivbvvevofxev, e£o> abeuis noXXa KeKTTJcrQai : when it is 
in our power, &o. Isocr. Paneg. p. 132. So Demosth. adv. Phorm. 
p. 588. Eurip. Iph. T. 688. Heracl. 7- Hel. 1174. Here. F. 940. 
Plat. Synip. xiii, J. ical irapbv eipiivnv liyeiv, ovba/uov top TroXe/jov 
irporipeiTo : and when it teas in his power to remain at peace, &c. 
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 248. So apiafxevov, Wessel. ad Herodot. 
p. 244. beov, Demosth. de Cor. p. 353. I. 40. c. Phorm. p. 585. I. 
45. bezant', Aristid. pro Quat. p. 342. and Ep. de Smyrn. 
p. 295. biatyepov, from biafepeiv, to concern or he of importance ; 
ey^wpovv, from ky^wpelv, to he practicable or possible; elp-qfihov, 
Aristoph. Lys. 13. evbe-^ojjevov, it being possible ; evbv, Lilian xiii, 
38. %kov, Eurip. Ale. 292. /nerbv, Paus. in Ach. p. 398. ira- 
paa^or, — ev Traparr-^bv, when a good opportunity is afforded: Thuc. 
i. c. 120. v. Lennep. ad Phal. Ep. p. 30. sq. irapaTvybv, when 
an occasion presents itself ; when it is practicable : Thuc. i. p. 51. 
irpoaijicov, it being a duty, or incumbent, &c. Aristid. de Quat. 
p. 463. TrpoaTaydkv, it having been ordered: Lysias in Nicom. 
[p. 837. I. 5. ed. Reisk.] avy^pnGev, it being permitted, if it were 
permitted: Arr. de Exp. Al. i, 18. ^prjadei', Tuuc. iii, 96. The 
participle ov is understood, with bvvcnbv, Plat, de Rep. vii. p. 519- 
with avyyovov, JEscbyl. Ag. 893. v. Keen, ad .Greg. Cor. p. 15. 
69-317. Dawes, Misc. Crit. p. 125. Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 
277. Fisch. ad Well. iii. p. 389- seq. 

III. (VI.) A Greek participle may sometimes be rendered in 
English by a preposition and substantive ; as, viKq.v rows tplXovs ev 
Trmovvru, to get the better of, or surpass, friends in beneficence : 
Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 35. K.ap%r)boi>iovs eviKwv vaujua^ovvres, they 
conquered the Carthaginians in a sea-fight : Thuc. i, 13. or by 
the conjunction because, and a past tense of a verb; as, to be avfifia- 
Xfas ovofia v7repeftr](Tav, ovk e-mXeX^apevoi, aXXa rat ttjv eipxjvnv avay- 
KaioTepav 1) KaXXlu) viroXa/jfiai'oi'Tes elvai, they made no mention of 
alliance ; not through forgetfulness, but because they considered even 
the peace itself as more necessary than honorable : iEsch. c. Ctes. 
p. 284. [p. 460. I. 1. ed. Reisk.] 

IV. (VII.) Participles in conjunction with certain pronouns and 
particles ; as, rls, olos, ottoIos, oaos, irSts, irbdev, &c. form phrases 
which cannot well be literally translated; as, airoXe'ts trv ; tis &v ; n 

» And without interrogation : 5e7 3e &pX ei T0 ^ xaKus Xeyeiv : Demosth. pro 
fit Sftijai, rls tiv /cat rlvwv, paSlws ovrws Cor. p. 269. 1. 14. ed. Reisk. — J. S. 



Rule 2— 5.] THE PARTICIPLE. 115 

you ivill do for me ? and who are you, to threaten me with that ? 
Aristoph. Nub. 890. [8S3. Bekk.] tivos 'iveKa ravr enpaTrev 6 
<LH\nnros kcu tI flovKofxevos : and with what desire or purpose ? De- 
mosth. de Cor. p. 338. 1. 10. rl ttoiovptwv vp.wv airas 6 j^povos 
hieXijXvdev ovtos ; what have you been doing while all this time has 
passed aivay ? Demosth. 01. ii. obb' vnep ola TretroL^Koruiv ai'- 
6pu)ira>v KtvbweiJcreTe biaXoyiaap.evoi, nor taking into your consideration 
what had been the former conduct towards you of the men for whom 
you icere about to engage in war: Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 259. •• 2. 
ed. Reisk.] eyfo aoi £evia.v 'We£avbpov ; nodev XctjSovTi, r) nQs d£<tt>- 
QevTL ; I object to you the friendship of Alexander ! by what means 
could you obtain the friendship of Alexander ; or how could such a 
person as you be thought worthy of it? Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 242. 
1. 20. ed. Reisk.] So, out be Tfjs aperTjs, w KaBapfi'a, rj rols aols, tis 
/LieTOvaia ; [?} KaXwv] rj fxrj toiovtmv tis biuyvwais ', irodev Xaj36vTi, ?) 7r£is 
aliwQevTt ; Id. ib. [p. 26'9- 1. 27- ed. Reisk.] ri ervfijoovXeviov iirolet 
fieXrlovs 'A^drjiaiovs, r) ttCjs ciyiov Kai Tpetyuv etc vewv evdvs ; or by what 
mode of nurture and education from their youth? Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 268. Polemarch. Kivbvvevonev ovk opdws tov tyCXov Kai eyQpbv 
Qeadai. Socr. ttms defievoi, u> noXepap^e ; in defining them 
how? Plato de Rep. i. p. 334. ij3\a\pe fie 6 belva to Kai to -rroajaas, 
such an one injured me by doing so and so: Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 267. tbvto Xeywv boKe'i i/iol icaXws Xeyeiv, in saying this he seems 
to me to say ivell: Piat. de Rep. i. p. 331. In some such phrases 
as the preceding, participles have erroneously been thought to stand 
for verbs ; as, e. g. ov for early, in Plato Euthyphr. c. 12. Xafiovres 
for eXaftofiev, in Plat. Phaed. c. 19. Xafiovaai for eXafiov m Plat. 
Pha?d. c. 21. vo/ui£opTes for ropigovcn, in Xen. Symp. iv, 53. 
Whereas in such passages either a verb actually expressed is to be 
connected with the participle, as (ptXelrai (and also naaxei) with ov 
in the first passage, or one understood" from what has gone before ; 
as, eiricTTafxeOa with XafiovTes in the second passage, avapipvriaKovTai 
with Xafiovaat in the third, and eirifiovXevovai with vofiiiorres in the 
fourth. When a verb on which the participle may depend, is neither 
connected with it in the construction of the sentence, nor to be 
assumed from the preceding words, the verbeJvai must be understood ; 
as, 74 5' ov orevovres {f/fiev,) ov Xa^orres (e'iij/uev) tffxaTos p,epos ', in what 
part of the day, wherever we might be, did we not groan ? iEschyl. 
in Ag. 56i. vid. et 1520. 

V. (XI.) A participle in the plural is sometimes placed in concord 
with a noun of multitude in the singular; as, >; noXis airaaa KeyyvoTes 
ctKovovm, the whole city listens with gaping attention : Lucian, 
r)Xdov be els to lepov diiaaires irav to TrXfjQos, all the multitude having 
sacrificed came to the temple: Xen. Ephes. i, 4. v. Acts v, 
16. 

So in the passage, in which Hoo- eyas: Plat. Fhasdr. p. 228. I. 36. deltas, 

geveen says a participle is put fcr an instead of being put for Sel^ov, depends 

imperative, ztsaaTov ityelfis dleifu, ap£d- on the second person of dieipi under-. 

y.ei>os airb rod irpwrov. Socr. Aei£ew 7s stood. — J. S. 
irpaiTov, & (ptXSrrjs, rl &pa % iv Trj apiarepa 



116' THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. § i. 

VI. (XII.) The case of a participle is not always that which the 
case of some preceding word expressed or understood would 
seem to require; but an arbitrary transition is maiie from one case to 
another; as, ovbe rols avibtujAtvovatv kv reus arvvlats at,iovTi marTevetv, 
ws klm:aTMVT(is : nor even in those who adhere to them i?i adversity 
do they think fit to confide, judging them to act deceitfully : Aristot. 
vv irpoaeKTfOV vfTiv rols tovtwp Xoyois, eibvras, &c. you must not attend 
to these mens discourses, since you know, &c. Demosth. 01. 
Ireov av e'trj Oeatjofxevovs, we must go and see: Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 
i.P v. Brunck. ad jEseh. Prom. 217- ad Apoll. Rhod. i, 356". ad 
Aristoph. Lys. 179. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 33. Sometimes a par- 
ticiple in the genitive precedes a nominative case with which it should 
regularly have agreed : ravra e'nrovros avrov, ebo^e ti Xeyeiv rw 'Acr- 
Tvayei : Xen. Cyrop. i, 4, 20. 

VII. (XIII. XVI.) A participle is sometimes equivalent to an 
infinitive mood ; as, aKonov/xevos evpiaKov ovbafiuis av aWws tovto 
biairpn^anevos, I found, on consideration, that I could have effected 
this by no other means : Isocr. iVa oaa v7reo-%6fur)v ap-^o/uevos tov 
Xayov, bei£u) Treiroirjicws, that I may show that I have done what I 
promised at the commencement of my speech: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. 
Xv7njpos 'itrd' 1 &v, let me tell you you are troublesome : Aristoph. Ach. 
455. vid. 459- a»d Soph. El. 294. The participles in these pas- 
sages are put in the nominative because they are to be understood 
of the subjects of the verbs. [See on the Infinitive Mood.] See Her- 
mann, lib. ii. de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. p. 145. The following are 
some of the verbs which thus take after then) a participle in the 
nominative, referring to their subject : ayykXKeiv, Theodorid. Epigr. 
18. ayvoeiv, Phalar. p. 308. albeladat, Soph. Aj. 507. aiayyreoBai, 
Id. Ant. 540. avey^adai, Eurip. Med. 38. apveiodai, Id. Ale. Il6l. 
av-^eiv, Id. ib. 678. heiKvvvai, Or. 800. Med. 548. br^Xovv, Soph. 
Aj. 472. hiabeiida&ai, Herodot. viii, 118. etc/uuvOareiv, Eurip. Bacch. 
39. ere)et£aff0ai, Id. ib. 47. evroeiadai, Eurip. Hippol. 435. ktyiveyeo- 
Bai, Id. Med. 74. kneiyeodai, Herodot. viii, 2. (which presently after- 
wards in c. 3. is joined with an infinitive.) einXavQaveaQai, Eurip. 
Bacch. 184. KaT€xciv, to remember: v. Casaub. ad Athen. i, 5. p. 
lp. [xavQaveiv, Lucian, Dial. deor. xvi, 2. t. i. p. 244. Herodot. 
iii, 1. bjioXoyeiv, in a strange construction, in sentent. gnomic, v, 
438. iavTov ovbels ofxoXoyel tcctKovpyos Stv. UaveaOai has almost 
always a participle; seldom an infinitive: see Schsef. ad Schol. 
Apoll. Rh. p. 223. TretpdaOai, Herodot. i, 77- Troieladai /xeya, 
Herodot. ix, 111. TioieiaQai Xoyov eAaccrw, Id. vii, 156. noieiaQai 

P The accusative is common with verbals mosth. 01. ii. p. 21. I. 24. ed. Reisk. 

in 4ov : t'bv* $ov\6 /j.svov, &s eoucev, ei>- ovda/j.Sis airicrT7]Teov — Oeccpovvras inrb tt)v 

daifxova elvai auxppocrvvriv fj.lv 5mokt4op v\piv, &c. Polyb. iv, 41. ^reiSc^ (pwpdo-ris, 

Ka\ acrKTjTe'oc, hcoAaaiav Se (pevKTeov: airaXenrreoi', l-nihiyovra ecp' eKaOTCpovToos: 

PJato Gorg. p. 326. 1. 6. ed. Bas. 1. ^ M. Antonin. ad Seips. xi, 19. The cir- 

yap tovto fxkv, to %tjv dirSoov 5tj XP°" V0V > cumstance, that a verbal, in iov is equiva- 

t 6 v 76 us aA-qdas 'dvSpa evKTeov iaTiv: lent to Ss7 with an infinitive, explains 

Id. ib. p. 328. 1.5. fieyaAriv Sslktsov this construction : e. g. fxeyaArjv fciKvuvai 

rrjv /xeTa0oAr]V, eler (pepovT as, e£i6v- 7]j.ias SeT ty/v p-tTaQoAiiv, eicrtyepovTas, &c. 

ms, airavTa iroiovvTas iToip.ws: De- — J. S. 



Rule 6-9.] THE PARTICIPLE. 117 

7repi irXeicrrov, Diod. S. i, 51. inro/jeveiv, Herodot. vii, 101. ^atVeiv 
arijieia, Soph. El. 24. Such verbs, however, have sometimes aa 
accusative of the participle with a reciprocal pronoun : awels kv 
a<{>vKr<p e^dfievov eavrbv, Lucian, D. deor. xvii, 1. t. i. p. 446. and 
also without a pronoun, when the verb is in the infinitive, depending 
on another impersonal verb, so that it cannot have a nominative of 
its subject; bel yap ttoXiv Ttjvb' eKfiade'iv, areXearov ova ay tuiv 
knuv fiaK-^evfiarwp: Eurip. Bacch. 39- If b.c~i had not been used, 
the construction would have been ttoXis eicfxaOrjaeTai dreXeerros ovaa. 
v. Valck. ad Eurip. Pbcen. p. 93. ad Hippol. p. 211. ad Herodot. 
p. 194. Brunck. ad Eurip. Bacch. 184. Also in the dative, when 
the verb impersonal governs a dative, and the participle is to be 
understood of the same person as that dative; as, av/j(3e(3rjKe to'is 
irpoe orriKoai 7tpwrovs eavrovs ireirpaicoaiv rfadijadat, Deuiosth. 
pro Cor. [The construction might have been, /caret tv-^v tivol oi 
TrpoecrrrjKOTes Trpurovs eavrovs neTrpaKOTes rjodoi'ro.] And in the dative 
sometimes after verbs of consciousness, because they govern a 
dative denoting their subject ; as, avvoibev eavrw obbev wv biaire7rpaK- 
Tai bvvafxevw (ppaaai, iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 306. 

In the following the participle for the infinitive is in the accusative, 
because it is not to be understood of the same person as KarafiaQwv : 
KaTa/nadiov ovbapibs aiirof av aXXws tcls Trpbs tov k^Bphv biaXXayas 
Troir)crafievoy: having understood (when I had understood) that he 
could by no other means have been reconciled to his enemy. 

Sometimes with the participle for an infinitive the neuter article 
IS joined : ev einoai arabiiDf paXiara j-ierpu) Trjs daXctTrrjs bieipyerat to 
/ii) i'i7reipos ova a, it (Sicily) is excluded from being part of the con- 
tinent by, &c. Thuc. vi. init. 

VIII. (XIV.) A participle is sometimes equivalent to a finite verb; 
as, ws (j> a /j. e v 7] , Kal Kepboavvy ?/yj?crar' 'Afl;/i?j : Horn. II. ^, 247. v » 
Theocrit. iv, 60. avacrravres fcara^^f'o-acrQe, stand up and condemn 
me: Demosih. pro Cor. bia tovt 6bvvr)Qe\s, elr 'laws Kenai itvpeT-mv, 
for wbw}]Qri '• Aristoph. Vesp. 583. - 

IX. (XVIII.) On participles in general the following remarks may 
be added : — 1. A participle with ei/j.1 is sometimes used instead of the 
verb of the participle alone ; as, on awoibas re XeXvicores elev, gal 
abiKolev : Thuc. i, 6j. ovbev yap bia<pepei to avQpioTros vyiairiav 
eaAv rj to ardpwiros iyiaivei, Aristot. Metaph. iv, 7. P- 80. 5. v. 
Dorv. ad Char. p. 624. Vechner. Hellenol. ii, 9. Hermann, ad 
Eurip. Hec. 1153. Pors. addend, ad Hec. 1169. With Ihe 
article before it, a participle following el/j\ is more emphatical than 
a single verb : kirl to. Kpavea X6<povs kiribeeaQai Kdpes eiai oi Karabei- 
lavTes, the Carians are they who showed how to fasten crests on 
helmets: Herodot. Clio, c. 171. byava aaiiiai ovtol elai oi Troajaa- 
fievoi npioTvt, these are they who first made handles for shields : Id. 
ib. tyiv Tvpavviba 6 -rravaas eifx) eyib, I am he who put an end to the 
tyranny : Lucian. — 2. A participle of a verb of naming, instead of 
being placed between an appellative and a proper name, (or a noun 
serving for one,) comprehended in the signification of that appella- 
tive, is often put with the article in concord with the proper name 



118 THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. § i. 

(or its equivalent), the appellative being wholly omitted ; as, upbv, 
to fori kv ttj @epdiri"n KuXovixerrj, a temple which is in the town called 
Therapnte : Herodot. Er. c. 61. iSamXeveiv rwv KaXov^ivuiv Ae- 
Xeywv, over the people called Leleges : Pans, in Ach. p. 402. 
ep Tals eiriypcKpo/iievais Xpeiats, in the piece entitled Chrice : Allien. 
Deipn. xiii. p. 577. 

3. A future participle after a verb of motion is rendered in Latin 
by a future participle in some passages, in some by a supine in 
urn, and in others by ut and a subjunctive mood ; in English by 
an infinitive mood : ws ep\ouat (ppaawv, as I am about to say : 
Herodot. ii. tuv epx"/* 01 Aifr"»', which I am going to speak of: Id. 
ib. ep^ofiai aipTiyrjcjonevos, I am going to relate: Fausan. orav 
apidfjiiaujv 'itj 6 aptdfxriTiKos, addresses himself to reckon : Plato Thea:t. 
p. 198. 1. 42. rovs ahiKovvras (iiyopev) — trapa revs hiKaarhs — hitcriv 
bioaoi'ras, to be punished: Plat. Gorg. p. 478. es AeX^ovs xpnao- 
pevos Ty xpiivrriplu) iropeverat, to consult the oracle: Herodot. Er. 
c. 70. v. Valck. ad Phoen. p. 280. ad Herodot. p. 6'42. 1. 28. 
Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. 542. 772. Abresch. ad iEsch. t. ii. p. 32. 
— 4. Of a verb which takes idiomatically a nominative case instead 
of being used impersonally, the participle also is used personally, 
agreeing with the noun which migLt have been the subject of its 
verb; as, fia aiXrjas — aivobeiKvvixevovs &s elcri "EMr/res, kings shown 
to be Greeks: Herodot. Er. c. 53. — 5. Verbs and participles often 
mutually change places, the construction being reversed ; as, for xpeii- 
vovTCLi Xeyorres, xpevbofievoi Xeyovaiv : \l>evb6fj.evot be ae <paai Aids yovov 
Alyio^oLo EIj'cij, Horn. II. e, 635. v. Cor. de dial, p. 35. et Keen. — 
6. A neuter participle with the article is used for a substantive ; as, 
to bebius, fear, Thuc. i, 36. t6 biatyepov, the price or value, Epict. 
Ench. c. 32. to biaXXaaa-or, difference, disagreement, Thuc. iii, 10. 
to dapcrovv, confidence, Thuc. i, 36". to tcaXtis KTapevov, a slaughter 
well performed: (cited by Hermann, without the author's name:) 
to ice^rds, the opening, the aperture, the open mouth : Lucian, 
Timon. t. i. p. 129. [71' A. ed. Salmur.] to 7repte\ov, the air, Heliod. 
JE\h. iii, 13. Sometimes, but rarely, a participle so used is not in 
the neuter: 6 Keta-qfxevos^ a master ; f] KeKTrjfxevq, a mistress, Lucian, 
Dial. Mer. ?/ etfiap/ievrj, and ireirpwuevq, fate, Epict. Isocr. ad 
Dem. — 7. Participles are often used instead of adverbs; as, XaQibv, 
airoKpvnTwv, eyKaX.virTofj.evos, secretly , privity , underhand; ap^o- 
peios, at first ; TeXevTwv, at last; Tvyvv, perhaps: and with govern- 
ment: biaXnr u)v xporov, eneoKonei tovs irobas '. after a time he 
examined his feet : Plato Phoed. — 8. A participle sometimes retains 
its nominative case instead of assuming that of some word with which 
it ought regularly to agree ; as, i^avauras ebo^e pot, when I had 

9 Andromache, in Euripides's play so it even conveys an imputation on her own 

entitled, v. 75, says to her child, S> rinvov, chastity. Ke/cTrj^e'cos ought to be sub- 

KTevovai <re Ataaol AafiSvres yvires' 6 oe stituted. 6 KOCTrifiivos Trar^p, thy father, 

KeKX-rj/xei'os Xlar^p «t' iv AeAQolat rvy- my lord, my master. She was the slave 

Xa-vei /xivoiv. As Neoptolemus was really of Neoptolemus, and had spoken of her- 

the father of her child, there is no reason self as such in v. 64. — J. S, 
why she should use the word KZK\T\p.h'os : 



Rules*.] THE PARTICIPLE. 119 

arisen, I thought, Sec. Lucian, Dem. Enc. [p. 915. B. ed. Salmur.] 

cnrrjvrt)cre yap avrw tov 6<p6aXfxbv eiCKOTrrjvai — Xidf fiXqdels : he hap- 
pened to have his eye struck out by a blow of a stone: BL\. V. H. 
xiii, 23. v. Brunck. ad Soph. EL 480. — 9. It retains it too, 
although it cannot be in concord with the subject of the following 
verb ; 'AfitdwKtjs ovKeri rjverr-^eTO (3Xe7reiv avrbs etrl rvcpXu rw AtiySci- 
/uibi, aXXa Tv<j>Xwaas Kal aires eavTOV, afufx'irepoi KaQqvrat : but having 
put out his own eyes too, both sit: Lucian, Tox. p. 642. [88. c. 
ed. Salmur.] — 10. Sometimes a participle, instead of taking the case 
of a preceding substantive to which it refers* is put in the genitive 
absolute: ovk i\v ac a/jtyiXeiCTOs avQpwwois epis, warpiba fiev bibov- 
t<i)v avrS 'luiviKrjv KoAo^wfa, ?) Kvfirjv, &c. Lucian, Demosth. Enc. 
p. 889. — 11. (12.) A participle with its substantive is put in the 
genitive absolute, instead of on, the same substantive in the nomina- 
tive, and a verb agreeing with it : obbeva b" 1 oiovrai aludrjaeoOat, 
Tvpavvihwv civt\ brj/jOKpaTiwi' Kadicrrafievwv, Kal rwu woXtreiwv KaraXeXv- 
fxh'iov : that despotisms are established in place of democracies, and 
the governments subverted: Demosth. de Feed. Al. p. 88. for on 
Tvpavvlhes a. b. tcadiararrai, rat at iroXtrelai KarnXvovTai. — 12. (13.) In 
the genitive absolute also with another word instead of that word in 
the nominative agreeing with the verb of the participle : izoKepovvTai 
yap, aaaipuis biroTepwv up£,avTwv : /of they are engaged in war, while it 
remains uncertain which began it: Thuc. iv, 20. — 13. (14.) After 
a parenthesis, a participle, which had been put before it in the 
genitive absolute, assumes sometimes by anacoluthon a different 
case, required by a following verb or participle; as, biafiavriov 

be iroraj-ibv KaXovjievov AlpKnv, ( ) b lafiacr iv ovv tyjv AlpKrjv, 

oiKias epeiiua rrjs Ylivbapov — {(palrerai,) &c. Paus. in Boeot. p. 578. 
1. 19. And the participle so assuming a different case is sometimes 
not the same, but one of kindred signification: exovrwv be aaBev&s 

i']biq twv HiKvu)vin)v, ( ) bia ice i /Jievois ovv abvvarcos kiriye- 

vofxevos aetafxbs bXiyov t)]V ttoXlv eiroirjfrev arbpwv epr]p,ov, Paus. 
Corinth, p. gj. So fir^wQevros, Polyaen. ii, 14, 1. v. Dorv. ad 
Char. p. 30S. 354. — 14. (15.) A participle is put in the nominative 
case absolute instead of the genitive: de&v be 0o/3os, rj avdpuntov 
v6fj.os ovbels airelpye, rb fikv, Kpivovres ev b}ioif rat oefieiv Kal fxfi, — 
rujv be aiuaprrj/jarwi' ovbeis eXiri$cjv — av n)v nfxwpiav avnbovvai : 
and neither fear of the gods, nor any law of men, restrained them ; 
with respect to the first, men judging that it signified nothing 
whether they behaved piously or not, and as to their crimes, none 
expecting to live to be punished for them: Thuc. ii, 53. These 
nominatives appear to have been used from the author's having pro- 
ceeded as if he had written, detiv be <p6j3y »j avdpiairwv vofup obbevl 
eipyovro. — 15. (l6\) Participles are sometimes used to express a 
condition or terms; as, irol b' ' 'Ay a fx&fivwv "A£«a bwpa bibuicrt fieraWrj- 
lavTt xoXow, if you shall have ceased from your wrath ; on condition 
that, &c. Horn. II. t, 26l. v. Abresch. ad iEsch. vol. ii. p. 47. 
Dorv. ad Char. p. 227. 257. — 16. (17.) Several participles are in 
some passages assembled without the intervention of conjunctions; 



120 THE PARTICIPLE. [Chap. vi. § ii. 

as, in Isocr. Panalh. p. 497« Mark xii, 28. v. Reiz. ad Lucian. 
Tox. c. 2. Forst. in ind. ii. partic. Platonis. 

A participle will) a genitive is employed as a substantive by the 
most ancient poets, and the later sophists, but very seldom by Attic 
writers ; as, to^ojv ev elbo)s, QaXuTTrjs yeyvfxraafievos. 

A participle must sometimes be taken as equivalent to a finite 
verb, in order to give the sentence in which it is found any gram- 
matical connexion : rpla fiev ovra Xoyov u£ia tois "FJXXtfai vav- 
riKa, — ' tovtwv b" el nepiuxpeade to. bvo els to avro e\6e~iv, &c. the Greeks 
have, in all, three navies that are worth mentioning : if you suffer 
two of these to be combined, &c. for rpia piv eon: Thuc. i. p. 27. 
[" Videor mihi posse contendere, participium, nisi ubi aut casu abso- 
luto ponatur, aut verbum elfit, (idque plerumque, nisi semper, in prae- 
senti tempore) intelligi possit, rarissithe poni pro verbo finite" 
Hermann. "I think that I may maintain that a participle, unless 
either where it is put in an absolute case, or where the verb elfit 
(and that generally, if not always, in the present tense) may be 
understood, is most rarely put for a finite verb."] 



SECTION II. — Of some participles which appear 

TO BE REDUNDANT. 

Rule I. Certain participles often appear to be redundant, as 
avvaas, airiwv, e-^uv, Kitfi&ti, tyepuyv. "Hi-^ero airtcjv : Aristid. pro 
Quat. p. 248. cis eKpctTtjcre QiXnnros, w%er' evdvs amwv : Demosth. 
pro Cor. p. 246. 'Airiibv adds a signification of celerity : v. Valck. 
ad Callira. p. 26l. Huschke Anal. p. 77. seqq. 

II. With the same signification of speed or despatch, avvaas is 
added to verbs: Xey avvaas, 6 n (prjs irore : Aristoph. Pint. 349. 
eK Aatcebaifiopos fxerei, avvaas re ; Aristoph. Pac. [275.] "idt, irepaive 
cv, AloyyX, avvaas: despatch, JEschylus, quickly: Aristoph. Ran. 
[1171.] and with dairoi added, Aristoph. Nub. 1255/ This signi- 
fication of despatch is very apparent when by a reverse of construc- 
tion avvaai is the verb, and the participle that of some other verb; 
as, in Aristoph. Av. 242. Vesp. 1163/ 

III. The participle exwv is often joined with verbs of delaying, 
shuffling or paltering, trifling, fooling, sporting, mocking or deriding, 
talking or acting absurdly, &c. as, ri bijTa biarpifieis ejfww ; why then 
do you delay? Aristoph. Eccl. 1143. [1151.] ri bfjra eywv arpecpr) ; 
why then do you keep dodging to balk my wishes ? using subterfuges 
and evasions, and not telling me what I wish to hear : Plato Phsedr. 
p. 236. [p. 199. 1. 9-ed. Bas. 1.] Xrjpe'is eywv,you talk nonsense: 
Aristoph. Av. 341. Ran. 512. Lys. 945. irola vnobi^aTa (pXvapels 

* See also Aristoph. Plut. 229. 648. 1159.— J. S. 
974. Nub. 181. 506. 1253. Equit. 71. * See Aristoph. Plut. 413. Av. 241. 
119. Ach. 570. Vesp. 202. 398. 847. — J. S. 



Rule 1—5.] REDUNDANT PARTICIPLES. 121 

e^wv ; what nonsense do you keep talking about shoes? Plato Gorg. 
TraiSets e'xwv, you are joking : Lucian. [Valcken. and Hermann 
think with Greg. Cor. (p. 63.) that Xypels eywv is said for e-^us Xr\pm\ 
The difference in meaning, says Hermann, between Xrjpe'ts and Xrjpe'is 
e^wc, is that Xrjpels is, nugaris nunc, you trifle or talk nonsense 
at this time, Arjpets e'xwv, nugator es, you are a trifler.] * 

IV. In a similar manner Xafiwv is added to verbs : Kai fxoi Xeye 
rrjv ypaffjv Xa/3wv, prenez-moi cette accusation, et la lisez : Demosth. 
pro Cor. v. Athen. Deipn. i. p. 13. Herodian viii, 4, 26. Xa/3u>i> 

eavrbv $x eT0 > Plut - in Cic - [P* l6%7- '■ 18 « ed * H> St *3 v< Plaf - 
Phzedr. p. 260. 1. 25. Horn. II. xii, 451. So eXijp is used : v. Horn. 
II. a, 356. 

V. Oepwv is in the same manner joined with verbs which signify 
some sort of motion in whatever manner ; and it conveys a sense 
of voluntariness, vehemence, precipitancy, fatal impulse : v. Hemst. 
ad Lucian. p. 349. seq. It has an accusative after it either 
expressed, as in most places, or understood, as in the first of the fol- 
lowing: hiwKOfievr] yap wo rfjs 'ArTiKijs, fepovaa (iavTr/v or ti)v eavrijs 
vavv) ivefiaXe vrfi <ptXirj : she violently attacked a friendly vessel: 
Herodot. viii, 87* e«s tovto (j>ep>j)i> Trepieanqtre ra irpayfiaTa, to this 
state, by his rash and wilful conduct , he reduced our affairs : iEsch. 
c. Ctes. p. 474. ed. Reisk. tovto) (to a slave unfit for any ordinary 
employment) cpepovres vrrofiaXXovo-i tovs vloiis, [wilfully, recklessly,] 
Plut. Trep. iraib. ay. rrjv yyeptoviav Kara yrjv apbrjv cpepiov avedrjice 
0/?/3cu'ots, [precipitately and hotly,] Msch. c. Ctes. p. 535. [ed. 
Reisk.] abucijoas be QiXimrov, KciKeWev cnrobpas, vTreflaXev eavrbv 
cpepiov Qrjfiatois, [suddenly, all at once,] iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 482. 
[ed. Reisk.] ftaXXov (poftrjdeis ovyyevi) Kai irpoafarov tyQovov, opyfjs 
rraXaias Kai flamXiKTJs, ravry cpepoov vnedrjicev eavrbv : voluntarily , by 
choice, advisedly: Plut. in Themist. <t>ep6fxevos also occurs with 
a signification of impetuous motion : onus be rives roiis 'Adijvaiovs bta- 
cpvyoiev, (pepo/xevot eaitrvKTOv is tovs Alyivrjras '. Herodot. viii, Ql. and 
so in ix, 102. As to cftepwv, and iiywv also, which is sometimes used in 
a manner somewhat similar, see Horn. Od. p, [345.] II. p, [799.] 
Od. v, 96. Od. a, 127. Horn, in Boeot. v. 65. [II. /3, 558.] II. x» 
350. II. xP, [596.] 

fbeuywv also is added in a similar manner : olyovTo cpevyovres, 
Herodot. ifX €T0 Qevyujv avv rrj arparic} iraay, Air. de Exp. Al. iii, 7- 
oi-xpvTo cpevyovres awoXiirovres r?)v iroXiv, Herodot. Er. c. 33. for 
tyvyov, ecpvyev : the verb oixecrdat adding a signification of speed, 
says Hoogeveen. So cnrobpas $x eT0 > Aristoph. Eccl. 196. and 
rpex^v : irplp t))v epirju KaXe'icrd', cnr ay £,aifjr]v rpex<ov : Aristoph. Nub. 
778. where rpix^v conveys a notion of celerity : abi cito, et sus- 
peude te: Ter. Andr. i, 5, 21. 

_ * " Mihi haec stat sententia, parti- e£tv, sive \ripe7s, ix® v ovtus, sc. \ijpwv : 

cipium %x mv s i c verbo finito subjectum, deliras, et quidem non uno dido insano, 

habere vim graviorem quam in priori sed habitu et vitio mentis. Nam ex eiU 

genere [\ripSju exeis e. g.] tempus hujus de naturali corporis habitu proprie usur- 

verbi finitum ; et v. g. formulas \npus patur, unde et ?£u dicta est." Weiske, 

£x«" proprie sensum esse \-npus Kara Pleou. Gr.— J. S. 

Viger. o 



122 'ATToXeXeifjifxh'os, &c. [CHAP. VI. §iii. 



SECTION IK. — ON THE PARTICIPLES anoXeXetfifievos, apyp- 
fievos, (Sov\6jj.eios. yiyvofievos, e^o/uei'os, kvbeyj'ifxevos. 

Rule I. From cnroXelireodat, which signifies properly to be left 
behind, and {hence, not to understand or comprehend, (nXelaTOv b' 
a.7roXeiTroi'rai tov Karavoe'iv avras, Plat, ad Peniicc. v. and Demosth. 
adv. Leoch. p. 10S3. [Reisk.] where it is opposed to irapaKoXovBelv,) 
the participle airoXeXeip-iievos signifies ignorant: tijs waibelas tcivtijs 
ovtc av kyio Qaveinv an-oXeXeifx^evos, ignorant of this branch of learn- 
ing : Isocr. irepl avTiboa. 

'Ap^dfieros is elegantly put for kv upyrj ; as, ap\6p.evos el-rrov, as I 
said in the beginning of my discourse: Isocr. ad Nicocl. [p. 6l. 

1. 10. ed. Batlie.] and Time, iv, 64. 6 Avaias apyofxevos tov 'Epw- 
tikov, Lysias, in the beginning of his amatory discourse: Plat. 
Phaedr. p. 263. 1. 39. apxdfxeios xal bia reXovs, in the beginning, 
and to the end: Plat. Soph. p. 237. i-belv tci 7rpayuara ap-^ofxeva, 
in their commencement : Demosth. de Cor. p. 347. 

'O fiovXo/jeros, any one ; any one who chooses : k£e~ivai rw flov- 
Xofxevo) rwv 'EXXr/vwv, iEscb. c. Ctes. p. 284. ypafeadu) 'Adrjvaiiov 6 
fiovXvfjievos, Demosth. in Neaer. p. 51^. '• 44. 

Tiyvofxevos has various significations. — 1. The first and most simple 
is (HI. VIII.) of what is done, i. e. what really is: v. Heind. ad 
Plat. Thezet. p. 346. yiyvo/xevr) aperri, real virtue ; tci yiyvo/xeva Xeyeis, 
you say the truth : Plat. Theaet. p. 175. 1. 18. ravra yevoiieva eXeye, 
Herodot. ii, 28. e/xirXews oh yiyvo/xivwv eX7cibwv,full of vain hopes. — 

2. (IX.) Of ivhat is gotten or acquired by or for any one: Qrjfialovs 
ffyelro (Philip) civti twv avTois yiyvo/xevwv, tci Xonra kdaeiv oirios (3ovXe- 
rai irp&Tretv avrov : Demosth. Phil. ii. p. 26. 1. 12. — 3. (IV. V.) Of 
what arises or is made up upon some certain account or reckoning : 
airob&aeiv to yiyvo/xevov apyvpiov, Demosth. c. Lacrit. p. 592. to 
yiyvo/xevov (the wages) etc tovtov airofepuv, erpecpe tov Aeirlav : Lucian, 
Tox. [p. 65. A. ed. Salmur.] kv tcus yiyvofxevais fj/xipais cKpiKvelrat 
7cphs to. fxedopia twv 'Aarevptiov Kal Mrjboov : in the requisite number of 
days ; in the usual number of days required for that march : Xen. 
Cyrop. v. p. 141. [4, 51.]— 4. (I. III. VI. VII.) Of proportion, rate, 
share, due or proper quantity : yiyvoixevrj Tifxrj, a proper or just 
price: ytyvo/xevat rtfioi, honors due, Demosth. de Cor. Trier, p. 1230. 
[ed. Reisk.] So yiyvofxevrj \apis, and yiyvoiievov Tl/xr)fxa, a penalty 
due, Demosth. adv. Timocr. p. 726. [ed. Reisk.] £k be tov kfxov 
voliov to yiyvofievov Kara tyjv ovaiav 'imoTOv Tidevai, the due proportion 
or rate, according to the amount of his property : Demosth. pro Cor. 
p. 26l. 1. 1. ed. Reisk. ttcivtcs 01 kXtjpovo/xoi to yiyvoiievov eKOfxitravro, 
received their share : tovs bpoixeas to yiyvofievov nt irXnpwKevat, the due 
or legitimate course: Aristid. Panatb. Hence of what is suitable or 
befitting : ob bitcaiav obbe yiyvo/xevtjv X CI P IV a-Ziwaovm KOjxiS,euQai f 
Demosth. adv. Nausim. p. 635. [p. 992, 3. ed. Reisk. Hermann 
reads oibe ti)v ytyv. £•] trpoKeiTai yap (Athens) avr dXXov <pvXa.K7T]piov 



§ iv. Rule 1 — 3.] 'Ovopagoty, &e„ 123 

Tfjs 'EXXctbos ttjv ytyvofiivrjv rafyv £"xpvaa, Aristid. Panath. al dvaiai 
at yiyvofxevat, Dinarch. adv. Aristog. p. 81. ed. Reisk. sacrifices 
befitting Aristogiton : unless the meaning be simply sacrifices per- 
formed. 

II. (X. XII.) 'Evbeyofxevos is sometimes practicable or possible : 
Tals iybey^o/xeyais €KoXacrai> rtf.tujplais, Antipho. In this sense it is 
joined with superlatives, like ws and on: t] iroXis tcoivwria ris eon twv 
hfxoihiv, eveney be £wrjs rfjs evbe^o/bLerns aplorns : for the sake of the 
happiest life possible : Aristot. Polit. vii. 

III. (XL) It has a signification of plausibility or probability : 
erbey^ofiei't] vp6(pa<ns, a plausible pretext : eybe^ofieyoy eynXrijia, 
a probable charge or accusation. 

IV. (XIII.) To kvbeyofievov, is power, ability, possibility ; as, Kara 
to kvley^pixevov, to the extent of one's ability, ox as far as may be pos- 
sible: which is expressed also by ek twv kvbeypixevwv, Thuc. and by 
the adverb evbexo/xevtos, Polvb. v. 

V. (XIV.) In the writings of philosophers it signifies contingent, 
(see Aristot. Eth. vii, l.) ivhat may or may not happen of itself ; and 
is opposed to what is necessary, what is in our own power, what is 
our choice/ 

'E^ojueros.™ After an unfinished enumeration, teal raXXa to. tovtwv 
kypneva, is et ccetera, and so on. See Antonin. els eavr. i, 3. ex- 
pressed also by rat ra utcoXovda. tovtois, or teal ra e'£ijs tov eitovs. 



SECTION IV. — On the participles of the verbs ovo^aCo), 

■nape^oj, -Kepieyja, 7roiw, reAevraw, rvyyavw, vizapyu, elpl. 

Rule I. 'Ovo/.xa5toj>, preceded by an adverb : oh yap to. pri/xara ras 
olicewTrjras e<pri flefiaiovv, jxaXa aefxvuis oyo/na^wy : as he very pompously 
expressed it : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 237. 1. 11. ed. Reisk.] 

II. 'O irapaay^ojv, and to Ttapaayov, opportunity, occasion: ev navn 
tm Ttapa^xovTi, on every occasion: Aristid. Panath. Katpos is ex- 
pressed with 6 Trapaa^v in the following passage : ws apiara t<5 ratp&J 
Tore Trapaa-xpvTi juj) xpnaafxevos, offering, presenting itself : Plut. in 
Caes. p. 711/ 

III. 'O nepiexuv, literally, that which surrounds, clips, embraces, 
is put for the air or atmosphere ; as, bvaicpaoiai tov TtepteyovTos, bad 
temperature of the air : Plut. Alex. So xpaoews tov itepLe^pvTos, 
Id. ib. w 



* 'Ei'8ex4' te, ' os (fvvivaff/ibs, usual, com- ing been unwilling to take or subdue Na~ 

mon, ordinary, Aristot. Hist. An. v, 2. — bis, when he had an opportunity , had the 

J. S. power, of doing so: Plut. Flamin. p. 688. 

u A4ye rb ex^evov, recite what is 1. 21. ed. H. St. — J. S. 
next, what follows : Demosth. adv. Pan- w It is here satisfactory to observe the 

tan. p. 974. 1. 27. ed. Pveisk. equivalent knowledge of Greek shown by most of 

to heye tos tcpe^yjs in 1. 14. and to Aiye our newspaper writers, who constantly 

Tan6XovQov, p. 973. 1. 26. — J. S. call the air the surrounding element : 

v 'EAe'tv irapao-xbv, ovk iBeATjcrus, hav- though some may be inclined to consider 



124 Uoiwv, Ac. [Chap. vi.§ iv, 

IV. V. VI. A participle of ttojw with raXws forms a phrase ex- 
pressive of the approbation or satisfaction of the person using it, 
[see the note on the verb voiti, Ch. v. § x. R. 2.] and is to be va- 
riously rendered according to the occasions on which it is employed : 
v-rrep ttoWw)', wv, icaK&s iroiovvres, eyovoi, fiacpa avakioxovret '.' [the 
property which I am heartily glad they possess:] Demosth. Or. i. 
[Ol. i. p. 17. 1. 9- ef, « Reisk.] ol deal, KaXws iroiovvres, owcravres t>)v 
ttuXlv, uirobebtbicacriv hp.lv: Demosth. ep. i. p. 108. 1.40. [Here the 
expression is significative of the good will of Demosthenes towards 
the Athenians, shown by thankfulness to the Gods for benefits con- 
ferred on them. p. 1465. 1. 4. ed. Reisk.j v. Hor. Serm. i, 4, 17. 
KaXQs TToiovvTes -naat to~is ev T<xi$ alriais birjXXd^drjre, very properly or 
prudently: Demosth. Ep. ii. p. 111. 1. 34. [In the two following 
passages the phrase expresses satisfaction or gladness :] raXws toLvw 
iroiuiy a.7r6XXvrai, Aristoph. Plut. 864. av pev KaXuis itotovaa TedvrjKas, 
you have done ivell in dying; it is a very good thing that you 
are dead: Heliod. /Eth. ii, 11. The phrase is sometimes preceded 
by teal, and sometimes negatived by ov. Sometimes ra hiKaia or 
to hiKaiov, ret mdrjKovra or to kuQTjkov, is added ; as, KaXuis ye Kal 
to. biKata ttolwv. In a similar manner ev iroiZv is used : ev ye av 
ttoiGjv, in answer to xapl.S.opaL 001, Plato de Rep. i. p. 351. See 
also Plut. Conj. praec. p. 142. 1. 13. and SpOios voiwv, Julian, 
Misopog. p. 353. and eZ ojpovwv, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 431. and 
KctKios 7rotwi> is opposed to KaXws or ei woiujv : v. Heliod. iEth. 
vii, 27.* 

TeXevrwv, literally ending, takes an adverbial sense ; as, TeXevrivv- 
res o'iot'Tui crotpojTaroi yeyorevat, at last they imagine they have become 
extremely vjise: Plato. Phaed. p. QO. 1. 21. TeXevrwv irapa\aj3u)v to 
fiifiXiov, &c. at last having taken the book: Plato Pha'dr. p. 228. 
1. 12. v. and Plat. Pheed. p. 89. I. 40. Phsedr. p. 254. 1. 11. In 
the same sense, but with a different construction, aTraXXarropai is 
used : elwojv airaXXaynQt, say at last: Plato Gorg. p. 49 1. 1. 25. 

VII. Ti/)/w>', the partic 2 aorist of Tvyxavw, often signifies, com- 
mon, ordinary, trivial, trifling; as, rvyovres avQpwnoi, men of the 
common herd, everyday persons: (so 6 kviuiv, any one, Soph. (Ed. 
R. 393.) fj Tvxovaa £ri[xia, any, or a common, penalty: to Tvybv 
nrcutrpa, ever so trifling a miscarriage : Demosth. epist. ad Phil. 



the expression not as a graecism, but as condition than they : Dem. adv. Lept, 

the offspring of that laudable abhorrence p. 490. 1. 16. — J. S. 

of vulgar language, to which we owe, rf«- V To these participles may be added 

routing element, iorjire; watery element, avvixoiv : to avvi%ov, what is of chief or 

for water ; interesting female, for shop- paramount importance ; rbv tSitov rovrov 

lifter; being launched into eternity, for dobs, eXvo-e jx\v to yeyovbs ey/cA^/xa irpbs 

being hanged ; having the vital spark ex- rrjv olnlav, licavty 8e iricmv irapeo-x ero T vs 

iinguished, for dying, &c. &c. — J. S. irpbs t& peWovra Koivwvlas' Tb Se <rvv- 

x So, tjjs 8e <pi\wdpwirlas ($i\iirirov) *X 0V i (^ M * 'above all) SpixrjT-fipiov irapea- 

— vfxeis, Ka\oos iroiovvres, robs napirovs Kevaaev 'AvriySvc^ irpbs rbv Kara Aa/ceSat- 

KeK6fuff6e: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 304. J. povicov irSXefiov : Polyb. ii. 52. quod 

26. ed. Reisk. fyie?s, KaXws iroiovvres, maximum est: Em. ra avvexovra rGiv 

aixeivov ineivctiv irpdrreTe, you {at which I eyypairr&v i)v ravra, the principal ar~ 

sincerely rejoice) are in a more prosperous ticks: Polyb, iii, 27,— J. S. 



Rule 4— 12.] T^y, &c. 125 

[p. 154. 1. 12. ed. Reisk. See the note on the verb Tvyxdvw.] 
bwa/Lieis oh ras Tvxovaas, no common miracles, i. e. very extraordinary 
miracles: Acts Ap. xix, 11. ov tjjv rvypvaav q)iXavdp(i)7r iav , no 
ordina7i/ kindness, (or no little kindness, as our translation has it :) 
Acts Ap. xxviii, 2. 

VIII. In the neuter, ro Tvybv is by chance or luck; and Tvyov, per- 
haps: (and Tvybv 'lows together in Attic writers:) rvybv b' av Kal to. 
Trparela ovyywpriQeirjuev, and perhaps even the first rank might be 
conceded to us : Synes. Ep. ad fratr. tv%6v piev allot rfjs 7roXea»s, 
tv\6v be (TTrovb-p, whether — or: Arr. Exp. Alex, i, 10. rvybv [xev, 
on ov irioTov ebonei,- — rvypv 5e, on — o-(paXep6s i]bn 7]v Ylapfxeviwv : 
whether because it appeared not credible, or because Parmenio was 
now not to be relied on: Id. ib. iii, 26.* 

IX. Of the participle of vndpx^ it is to be observed that to. virap- 
Xovra signifies, means in one's power, or present circumstances: 
opare and tS>v inrupxovTwv otw rpoira) kuWigto. ajjivvelcrde clvtovs, Thu- 
cyd. vi. Ipwv be 6 Nt/c/as ro arpdrevpa dOvfiovv, ws etc tliv inrapxov- 
tu>v, kQapavvk re koi irapefxvdelTo : as well as the state of their affairs, 
as circumstances, would allow : Thuc. vii. ofxws be, ws en twv virap- 
\6vTwv,iboKei xprjvai fir) evbibovai : as far as their means, or condition, 
would allow: Thuc. viii. x e 'P ovs elvai rwv vwapxovrwv, not to 
make the most of one's means, ox favorable circumstances: Dem. 
Ol. ii. p. 18. 1. 12. ed. Reisk. and in the singular: to be vvv vndpxov 
irepl o-e toiovtov eanv, the circumstances or state in which you are 
placed: Plato Ep. iv. p. 320. I. 28. Kara avrov to virdpxov, Ari- 
stot. Eth. i, 10. In the same manner, ra itapearwra, iEschyl. in 
Prom. 216. in Ag. 10fj2. 

X. (XI.) 'Yirapxovaa Tipf), a fair or just estimation or price : a 
vTrapxuv tempos, the time in general of any event or incident : iva 
irpos top virapxavra Kaipbv eicaard OeupfJTe, that you may consider each 
transaction with reference to the time at which it took place : De- 
mosth. pro Cor. 

XI. (XII.) *£lv, the participle of elfil, signifies living, alive: eariv 
avTave\pi6s tov vvv ovtos 'A\Kij3idbov, Plat. Etithyd. p. 275. 1. 11. 
and 6 jut) S>v, he who is dead ; tov yap ova ovra a?ras e'iwQev eiraivelv, 
all are accustomed to praise the dead: Thuc. ii. and ol eaofievoi, 
those about to live hereafter ; posterity : Horn. II. (3, 119. The verb 
elvai itself is sometimes to be living: Heliod. iEth. iv, 12. Matth. 
ii, 18. and to elvat, life, Heliod. iEth. i, 29. ix, 6, 27- v. Tibull. 
iii, 5, 32. Virg. ^En. vi, 870. 

XII. (XIII.) The same participle signifies also an unimpaired or 
undecayed state: dpxv ovaa, a magistracy still in vigor and power ; 



2 The following is a better authority t<£ crvyKGipevcp XP^ VC P> ra wroKeipeva rots 

for rvxhv, perhaps : izoia yap irp6<pacris, ris davelo-a<nv e|e<TT« viroduvai, Kal airo56a0ai 

avdpcamvTi Kal perpia <ncr$is cpaveTrai rSiv ttjs inrapxova-r]S riprjs : Demosth. adv. 

■jreirpaypzvwv abrcp ; bpyrj vi] Aia. Kal yap Lacrit. p. 926. 1.24. ed. Reisk. pretio 

rovro, Tvyhv, Ae'|et : anger forsooth; for, quocunque, quicquid id est prelii, says 

perhaps, he will say that : Demosth. in Reiske : for any price they can get. 

Mid. p. 527. 1. 15. ed. Reisk.— J. S. Perhaps, for the then price s the current or 

a 'Ea,v 8e pyj avoo'WLV (to apyvpiov) iv market price. — J. S. 



126* THE ADVERB. [Chap. vii. § i. 

and with a negative, extinct, abolished, or pretended or false : uptes 
vufioi, laws in force ; ovk optcs, abrogated, repealed; oloa biKr], a 
cause in which the matter itself in dispute is tried, or a cause not 
yet decided ; and /.n) ovrrci biKn, or y ju/) ovaa, without bii.rj, a cause 
decided or done with, or in which a decision of no validity has been 
given. Hence, one against whom a sentence had been given on 
failure of appearance, was said rrjv /jij ovrrav uvriXayyaveiv rivl, when, 
within two months, he instituted proceedings against his adversary 
to have that sentence or verdict set aside/ 

XIII. (XV. XVI.) *fl v is sometimes real, true: obbev aXXo fxoi 
hoKovtJtv ol tu Toiavra Xeyovres, r) tt\v VTvoQeatv, Trept rjs fiovXeveade, 
oii)/i t))i> ovuav Trapiffravres vjxiv, iifiapravety : to err, in making the 
subject of deliberation appear to you different from ivhat it really is : 
Demosth. 01. iii. [p. 28. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.] Hence to ov and to. 
oPTa, truth : Kara(JKe\pofiepovs, el ra ovra e£ayye\Aerai : to see whe- 
ther the truth were reported: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 7. and 6 &>v 
Xoyos : — ov tov ovra eXeyev 'A^atois \6yov, the truth: Paus. in 
Ach. p. 419. to. 6)'Ta Xeyeiv is also, to say lightly : Plat. Theast. 
p. 179. In the dative singular r£ ovri is the same as optws, a-e^vdis, 
in reality, in truth. Ta oVra is sometimes, goods, possessions, 
property: tovs (pvyabas be avTaiv Ka.Tie.vai eir\ rots ^fjiaeai tu>v ovtiov, 
ore etyvyov : to return on the terms of having half the property they 
possessed when they were exiled: Arr. de Exp. Al. ii. c. 1. 



CHAPTER VII. 

THE ADVERB. 

SECTION I.— On the terminations of certain adverbs. 

Preliminary observation. — Adverbs of place take after them a 
genitive, either of more general signification, or more particular; as, 
irov yfjs ; in what part of the earth ? TcavTayov yijs, in every part of 
the earth : evTavQa Tfjs ijireipov, at this part of the continent : Thucyd. 
i, 46. nov tov TrpoawTTov ; in what part of the face? oOev ane^Ldas 
jue tov Xoyov, Aristoph. Nub. 1410. c Adverbs of time also take a 
genitive: dj/e riys ij^epas, late in the day: in Thom. M. oipe tov 
lieToirwpov, late in the autumn: Lucian, Tox. p. 49. see also 
Dionys. Hal. Arch. viii. ISA. V. H. ii, 23. Matth. xxviii, 1. Ttr^viKa 
ti~)s fifiepas ; what time of day ? Aristoph. Av. 149S. evTavQa. tov 
caipov, then. 

Rule I. Adverbs signifying in any particular language generally 
end in ot\ ; as,'E/3oat<7r*, in Hebrew ; 'EWr/vtort, in Greek ; Tw/xaVort, 
in Latin ; and this form is preferable to 'EjS/jcukws, &c. 

6 'AUti rriv firj olaav avr iXax^v itfiv ejusmodi, quae irrita sit, et pro nulla haberi 

ouTij? 5-fiirov, Demosth. in Mid. p. 543. debeat, ideo, quod sit illegitima : says 

14. ed. Reisk. Midias had failed of ap- Reiske. — J. S. 

pearance (oi/it a-K^vra) in a cause before c But '66ev is not to be joined with 

the arbitrator, and therefore eprt/xov SxpXe \6yov : ene'iffe 8', '6dev aireffx^s fie, tov 

SiKTjv. Exceptione agere sententias dicta? \6yov ^eVei^i : v. 1390. ed. Bekk,— -J. S. 



Rule 1—5.] THE ADVERB. 127 

II. Adverbs in bbv have a peculiar elegance; as, ayeXrjbby, in 
troops; fiorpvbbv, in bunches; kiravafiXr)bbv, over the rest of one's 
clothes; \ew\ tovtovctl be elpivea e'/yuara Xevna eiravafiXrjbbv tyopeovot, 
Herodot. ii. superinjectim. H. St. in ind. Thes. L. Gr. — J. $.] 
o/.iodvy.aboi', unanimously, Acts Ap. ii, 1. cToiyr\bbv, in rows; ovot<x~ 
bbv, in close fight, hand to hand; auprjbbv, in heaps; retyeXrjbbv, 
after the manner of clouds ; tpopjjr)bbv, in the form in which a kind 
of mat was platted: Thuc. ii, 75. [£v\a. — <f>opfir)bbi' avA toix^v 
TtOeires, oiroos fi>) Sta^eoiro e-rrl ttoXv to x&fxa : p. 327. 1- 5. ed. Bekk. 
<pcpfir)bbv) \piadt)b6i>. (f>op^j.bs yap \plados, outis evaXXaZ, e^wv to TiXey/na 
ear/: Schol.] napavTabbv, standing by: Horn. II. o, 22. Theogn. 
470. TceptaTabbv, standing round, all around: Q. Calab. x, 402. 
Pseudorph. Arg. 3l6. Karwuabbv, across the shoulders, over the 
shoulders: Horn. [II. \p, 500.] yvwfxribbv eirwdavopTo, suffrage by 
suffrage, vote by vote: Dionys. Hal. Arch, viii, 43. 

III. And so those in t\ or el : clkovit), without labor or difficulty : 
(literally without dust, used by athlefee :) Herodian ii, 14. unbpuTi, 
easily, (without sweat :) Horn. I!. 0, 228. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 9. cnrovnrl, 
without labor: [fifjvat £' intovrju, Plut. Alcib. p. 357- I. 20. ed. 
H. St. — J. S.] a ixeTaaTpe-KTl, without turning round, without looking 
behind: Xen. Symp. iv, 50. Phil. J. de Confus. ling. p. 255. 
aipotyrju, silently, without any noise, in Antonio, els ccivt. ii, 6. 
figuratively, without boasting; ay eXaarl, without laughing: Plat. 
Euthyd. p. 278. 1. 41. abaKpvrl, without weeping or tears: Hero- 
dian i, 4. acrrerajcrl, without groaning : Msch. Socr. dial, de Mort. 
c. 2. oi'atjuwrl, without blood: (and avatjuwrel,) Horn. [II. p, 497' 
Od. a, 148.] a/iaxnTt, without a battle or fighting : Dion. Hal. 
Arch, viii, 43. axponobqA, on tiptoe: Lucian, D. Mort. actcap- 
ba/uvKTt, (or aaicapbafxvKTe),) without winking : Xen. Cyrop. i, c. 27. 
ovofxavTi, by name: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 15. TtavoTpaA, or iravaTpariq., 
(TravdTpaTirj, Herodot. i, 62.) with the whole army. 

IV. Of those in ei are the following : akXavcrTel, (or aicXavtJTi,) 
without weeping; avrofioet, at the first shout or onset ; avTo\pei, at 

first sight ; iravavbe\, (or itacravbei, Thuc. Xen. Cyrop. i, 22. or 
Traa&vbl, Xen. Ages, ii, 19.) with utmost force or exertion ; ■jzavbyjiiel, 
publicly ; and, without exception of any of the people : Thuc. i, 73. 
one and all ; atcripvKTe\, without proclamation by a herald: [without 
intervention of a herald or messenger with the caduceus or symbol of 
peace: Thuc. ii. p. 219- 1. 3. ed. Bekk.] afiaxel, without battle 
or fighting: Thucyd. i, 143. dro/cet, without interest: Dio Ivii. 
iravoiKe\, with the whole family : iEschin. Socr. Dial, nepl nXovr. 
p. 26. 

V. Of the termination brjv, and having an acute on the penultima, 
are, avebrjv, which signifies first, laxly, loosely : and thence, at full 
speed, without check: iEschyl.Choeph.8O6. and remissly, negli- 
gently : Soph. Phil. 1153. and at full liberty, without restraint; 
eneibav fiovXwvrai avebr]v rols Trap' avrols %vyyeveadai ao(j)i<TTa~is, Plat. 
Protag. 342. 1, 24. and with impunity; arebnv e^ecrat bwpa Xa/x- 
fiaveiv <ca0' Ifiwv, Dinarch. c. Demosth. p. 98. 1. 12. and largely, 
fully, at large; avebrjv eTrlcnce\(/at Kara iraotiv tuiv emoTriLiGiv, Plato 



128 THE ADVERB. ^ [Chap. vii. § i. 

Hipp. min. p. 368. 1.10. anfio\c\ht}v, violently, with great force : 
Herodot. iv, 131. {with force directed upwards; so as to throiu 
upwards: Mom. II. (p, 364. also with procrastination, with delay. 
— J. S.] apbrjv, on high, aloft ; also utterly, as apbrjv e'^oXodpevaai. 

VI. 'Apiariybrji', ivilh selection of the best: Polyb. vi, 8. Like 
this is Tr\ovrlvbr)i>, by choice of the richest ; ov yap fjiovov apiaripb-qv, 
uXXa ical rrXovrivb^v o'corrai beiv alpeiodai roiis apypvras '. not only 
on account of pre-eminence in worth, but on account of pre-eminence 
in wealth also: Aristot. de Rep. ii, 11. and Xoyabqu, with selection 
or choice ; Xuyabrjv (pipovres XiQuvs, Thuc. iv, 4. 

VII. Bcibr)v, step by step, slowly ; Polyb. iii, 65. opposed to bpo/xo), 
Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 62. The compound avafiab-qv, with the feet 
stretched upwards, the head hanging down : d Aristoph. Ach., where 
however by arafiabriv we may understand a higher place, and by 
Karafiabqi', a lower. 

VIII. kiappyb-qv is expressly : btappqbrjv cnrayopevojv, roiis virevdv- 
vovs //>) oreipai'ovv, iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 275. 'E7nypa/35>jv, of the same 
signification as Xiybqv, kmXlybriv, eTvf^avbrjv, ctKpodiyws, is super- 
ficially: v. Horn. II. <j>, 166. and Eust. p. 1229. 

IX. 'EmTpoyabqu and kiribpoixabriv, on a run, whence figuratively, 
eiribpofxabrjv Xeyetv, cursorily. TJapabpofxabrjv has the same sense as 
kinbponabriv ; but nerabpofiabrjv is in pursuit, by running after : Mom. 
II. e, 80. KctTaXoyabr)i> is in prose: Arr. Exp. Al. i, 12. Plat. 
Symp. p. 277. 1. 14. 

X. Kpi/fibt)i> is secretly, and is sometimes used like an adjective; 
as icpvjjbijv korlv fj xprifos, secret : Demosth. 

XI. WpoTpoiT(xbr\v, precipitately I rrporpoirabqi' <pofieeo-9ai,fuirelvau 
de route: Horn. rrpoTpoTrdbqv (pevyeiv, Xen. Mem. i, 3, 13. Plat. 
Symp. p. 221. 1. 21. Arr. de Exp. Al. iii, 28. 

XII. Y.TTopabr}V is SCatteringly : as anopdbqv eKetrro : aitopabqv 
oIkovgiv, Isocr. Paneg. p. 94. 

1.vXX}]fibt)v is, in sum; also, without any exception, one and all: 
roiis iepels Kai tcls iepelas virevBvvovs elvai KeXevei 6 vofios kcu avXXqftbqv 
anavTas : iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 276. 'YnofiXnbqv, by interruption, while 
another is speaking: Horn. II. a, 292. 

XIII. Qopabrjv, by being carried: el — fiXenoiev ae <popabqv tov ito- 
Xe/xov eiacofiicofjievoi', Lucian, Dial. Alex, et Phil. 8 

XIV. <t>vpbr)v, promiscuously : yybqv and Ke^yfievus, at random. 
As adjectives are sometimes used adverbially, so adverbs have 

often the sense of adjectives : as, ?/ rrapavriKa ijbovi), present pleasure : 
r\ wj aXtfdws yf), the true earth: Plato Phaed. c. 58. 01 yvno(.b) s 
fiX6(jo<j)oi, the genuine philosophers : Plato Phaed. c. 11. aa(paXa> s 

d Tn Aristoph. Ach. 410. ava$6$i)V vvv\ 8e ireivuv, avaPaS-nv ai/avavop.ai. — 

iroie'ts, 'E£bi> Karafidb'Tjv ovk erbs %<s>- J. S. 

\ovs iroieTs. ava0. is on a lofty seat or * ^opdSrjv virb Terrapin? KeKOfxia^ivov : 

throne : in pomp and state. But in Ari- Lucian in Gall. p. 242. c. ed. Salmur. — 

stoph. Plut. 1123. avaPdb~rju is, with the ira p.01 (pdoyyct. Teirerai <popdb~r]v ; Soph, 

legs stretched out, and one crossed over (Ed. R. 1310. in auras sublata, Brunck. 

the other, in the posture of an idle lazy — J. S. 
person, or of one who has nothing to do : 



§ ii. Rule l — 3.] 'AkjoijSws, &c. 129 

elvai, to be safe, Demosth. Ep. iii. p. 1485. 1. 4. [ed. Reisk.] xaXe- 
trus be avrols i] apaaracns eyiyvero/ but the removal (quitting their 
dwellings in the country and going iuto the town) was grievous to 
them : Thuc. ii, 14. fii) pabiws — oucnjs rj/s airoy^wpijaews, not being 
easy: Time, iv, 10. v. Cic. pro Rose. Amer. v. [§ 11.] and Vechn. 
Hellen. i, 12. 

The idioms of some adverbs, both separately and conjointly, will 
now be considered in alphabetical order. 



SECTION II.— ON THE ADVERBS eticptfiws, iiXXm re nai, fifta. 

Rule I. 'A<cpt/3u)!>, besides its ordinary meaning, accurately, with 
nicety, signifies— 1. rigorously, severely. 

II. — 2. exactly enough ; just as much as may be necessary, and 
no more: to be icpavos irpos rfju irXr)yi)v ciKptfiws ual [xoXis avrea-^ev, 
tjjerre tGiv Trpwrwy \pavcrat rpi\(H)v ri)v irrepvya rfjs noiribos, the helmet 
just, and but just, sustained the blow : Plut. in Alex. 

III. — 3. parsimoniously, sparingly: as a.Kpij3eia is used for par- 
simony or frugality by Plut. in Pericl. 

"AXXws re mm'. The primary and proper signification of dXXus is 
■ — 1. otherwise, in another way or manner, by other means: some- 
times, for other reasons, on other accounts, as i]v be ti bey drjpiov 
eVe/ca entfcaraiie'tvat, f/ aXXus ftovXrjdwcn biarpixpai irepl rijv Qrjpav : Xen. 
Cyrop. i, 2, 11. — 2. It signifies, rashly, unadvisedly, at random; 
ws ervye, as Hesych. interprets it : to. — opdws fiovXevdevra. — rw rovs 
eviaravTas &XXws ypfaaaQai bieXvpapdr) : Demosth. Ep. i. p. 1466. 
[ed. Reisk.]? — 3. Hence, in vain, to no purpose, fruitlessly : as 
&XXh>s Xeyeiv, Plato Phaed. c. 64/'— 4. in other respects, at other 
times, independently of something superadded : 6 6' ayrivwp kar\ ical 
iiXXws' vvv av puv ttoXv fiaXXov ayi]vopir\aiv ei'ijicas : Honi. II. i, 6Q5. 
— 5. merely, absolutely, nothing else but; ol b' avriXeyovres, oyXos 
aXXws kcli fiaaKavia KaTecpaivero: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 348. [ed. 
Reisk.] ip/ovvTO elvai tijv ovyypa<pi]v aXXws vdXov Kai (pXvapiav, De- 
mosth. p. 931. [adv. Lacrit. ed. Reisk.] 2 — 6. besides, moreover, 
&XXu>s kcu oypXri eon, Theocr. xxi, 34. aXXws re, and besides, Soph. 



/ It is strange that Zeunius should have 8' ovv eveica rat/ret epcoras ; Venus : &X\a>s 

translated these words, difficilis ipsis erat iipS/x-nv, it was a random question; Tasked 

restitutio. Thucydides gives a reason for no particular reason: Dear. Jud. p. 

why the removal was grievous to the 162. E. ed. Salraur. See also Plut. Moral. 

Athenians: Sick to ael eluQevai robs ttoA- t. ii. p. 111. 1. 14. ed. Wyttenb. 8vo. — 

Aoi/s ev rots aypoh SiaiTaodai. p. 242. ed. J. S. 

Bekker. — J. S. * Tf KivvpSfied' ciAAws ; Aristoph. Eq. 

s Secius, prave, perperam, says Reiske. 11. &\\ws, Si 'rav, liter eveis ; Aristoph. 

"AAAcos here appears to have reference to Pac. 1113. — J. S. 

dpOcos, otherwise than rightly. In the * Oi/'tco yap av rjfxels Sitcaicas KarayeXdi- 

following passage, it is, at random ; vva- fieda, els aWcas euxcus '6p.oia Xeyovres : 

rbs aXXcos irK.avdjp.evoi rives eirnvyxdvov- Plato de Rep. vi. p. 430. 1.41. ed. Bas.l. 

civ avrrj, Plut. Sertor. p. 1056. 1. 19. ed. See Toup on Longin. § vii. — J. S, 
H. St. and in Lucian : Mercur. tIvos 

Viger. r 



130 "Afxa. [Chap. vii. 

CEd. It. 1110. Hence— 7. ctWws re Kal} especially ; literally, both in 
other respects, or on other accounts, and — . liXXais re travTws Kal 
Knaiyvi]T»is nuTobs, you ought to gratify them, both for other rea- 
sons, and because they are your father s sisters : iEsch. Prom. 637. 
roXfinriov rb uXifies eiiteiv, ilXXws re Kal 7repi uXnOelas Xeyovra: 
Plato Phaedr. p. 247. aXXws re rat el, Plato Kp. ix. ttuvtwv airo- 
arepeladai Xvirnpbv eoTi cat ^aXenbv, ctXXws re kuv inr' e^Opav rw tovto 
<rvfxfiah>r) : Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 227- 1*8. eel. Reisk.] dXXws re cat 
evreibr} is ovbeva ovbev evewrepiciov, Thuc. ii, 3. ohc ai]bes, dXXuts re 
Kal T})fbe rijv &pav. Plato Phaidr. p. 229. When cat is thus added 
to ilXXos 7e, the first member of the phrase, ciMws re, has respect to 
what we pass by without consideration or specification, and the 
second, cat, to what we urge or dwell on as most important; but in 
the form aXXws re, without teat, the principal consideration is signified 
by dXXws, the first member, relating to what is passed by or not dwelt 
on for the present being omitted and understood. So that a\Xws re, 
(literally, and besides, and moreover,) carries in effect the same signi- 
fication as aXXujs re cai, although by a different form of expression ; 
and where cat follows so separated as in aXXws re el Kal, and the like 
forms, it is not to be considered as a part of the phrase transposed, 
but as having no reference to dXXws re : ctMd yap av (pain ecc'iorry*" 
twv \pv\wv ttoXXu erw/xara (cararp//3etv, aXXws re el cat iroXXa ern fiiwn X 
Plato Phaad. p. 87. d. (133. Heind.) especially (literally, and more- 
over, and over and above) if it should live, too, many years ; tovs /o) 
fiondelv havovs, aXXws t eav wpbs tovtw cat dpaoe~is wai, navTa rpoKOV 
KwXveadai : Xen. Mem. i, 2, 59* o\\us re eireibi) irepl twv yvpvatrlwv 
twv tT]s tp v X^ s a-fificrfinrovariv, especially since, &c. Isocr. ad Nicocl. 
[p. 59. 1. 13. ed. Battie.] iiXXws re ovbk Koa/jlav olaav, Julian, Cses. 
p. 7« aXXws re ovbe wpnv eyw, &c. Id. ib. p. 30. 

IV. "A/xa is elegantly joined with a dative case; as, apa rw catpj, 
as soon as an opportunity offered, or, seasonably : a/xa r« 7rpw't, with 
the dawn; a/xa ry ecnrepa, on the arrival of the evening ; a/xa ttj 
a/tapr/a, in the very commission of the crime : Antipho Or. p. 664. 
[ed. Reisk.] a/xa rw yeXwrt, Plut. in Caos. p. 712J 

V. Also with a verb in the infinitive mood instead of a substantive: 
01 yewpyol 7roXXoarw pnvl twv Girepparwv rr)v erriKapwiav Kop.iS,ovrai, 
cat oi»x dpa rw KarafiaXe'iv : and not as soon as they have sown them : 
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 270. 6 lefir/pos a/xa t<5 (3aaiXevs avabeix- 
dfipat, — bia (ppovribos eaye : as soon as he was made emperor : Hero- 
dian iii, 2, 9. a "d with an indicative mood followed by cat and ano- 
ther verb expressive of something following immediately on what 
is signified by the first ; as, a/xa biaXXaTTOvrat, cat tT]s ex&pas rfjs irpo- 
yeyevypevns etuXavdaiovTai : as soon as they are reconciled, they for- 
get their previous enmity : Isocr. Paneg. v. Lysias p. 820. [1. 9-] ed. 
Reisk. v. Virg. Mn. xi, 864. Sometimes there is an ellipsis of the 
verb, as el o'ierai, fjplv napa twv Qewv, a ev^bpeda, yeveadai av Kal 

J "A/to yap r<§ Artftoo-Bsvei Kal o xoprjybs the choregus was outraged : Dem. In 
vfipi£€To,for at the same time with De- Mid. 525, 8.— J. S. 
mosthenes (in the person of Demosthenes) 



§ iii. Rule i.] 'AfxeXet. 131 

a/j.a, the moment we pray, together with our prayers : [Kal t't/ua r« 
ev^eadai j/juas : ] .ZEschin. Socr. Dial. Trepi ttXovt. p. 50. and some- 
times re is added to ciaa, as a/ia re SmWarroj/rat, (fat, &c. 

VI. With a participle, kch following with another participle ; as, 
a/na yeXu>i> re rat epvdpiuJv, .ZEschin. Dial, ii, 11. or with fiev before 
one participle, and be before another following : &pa fxev ™ Krr/fjiMvi 
\api$.6nevos, cijia be tov Nai/cwcXea riLv fiera ravra eveKev vwoTroiovfxevos, 
at the same time, and — : Heliod. iEth. v, 16*. Or with one parti- 
ciple, a verb following without rat : as &fta yap rotavra cnretXaiv nXr)- 
yrjv evereivaro niKpav, with these threats he at the same time struck, 
&C. cfyza yap rw tov awfiaros avdei Xt'jyovrt, — o'iyerai cnronTafxevos : 

for as soon as the bloom of personal beauty begins to fade, he flies 
away at once: Plato Symp. p. 183. 1. 42. So a/ua t$ airy a<c//a- 
cWrt, Thuc. iv, init. "A/ia is elegantly used for re before rat : <jo<pdv 
a.fj.a rat 'EXXqvtKov epyov, M\. V. H. i, 21. for aocpov re rat, &c. "A/ia 
fxev precedes and is correlative to npos be in Herodot. viii, 51. 

VII. "Ajua repeated designates celerity : a/ta enos, a/ua epyov, 
dictum, factum; no sooner said than done: v. Virg. ZEn. i, 635* xii, 
268. 

"A/xa is sometimes redundant, as una with cum in Latin : fxvdoXoyia 
yap, a.va$f)TT)ais re rujv iraXaiwv, fxera tr)(o\fjs ap £ttI ras troXets 
epx^Qov. Plato Critia p. 10. 



SECTION III. — ON THE ADVERBS afieXei, avTiKpv, avTiicpvs. 

Rule I. 'A/teXet is properly the imperative of a«eXe7v, and there- 
fore signifies primarily, be not anxious ; set yourself at rest ; make 
yourself easy ; take heart: see Aristoph. Nub. 48S. Ach. 367. Lys. 
172. Nub. 875. 488. 1208. Thence, as other imperatives, e. g. aye, 
0epe, it takes the nature of a particle of exhortation or encourage- 
ment; and is also affirmative. It may be rendered, according to 
circumstances, doubtless, certainly, truly, to wit, in reality, &c. 
Kal eav vvv evpwfxev, afieXei ovk 6)(Xj]p6s eaofxai trot — : and if we find 
it now, then, you know, I shall no longer give you trouble by inter- 
rogations: Plato Hipp. maj. p. 295. I. 18. afxeXet Kal ravra eWe 
fitiXavfjfxaai twos $.G>a elvai fiovXevtra^evov : in truth these things also 
resemble the contrivances, &c. [in answer to an enumeration of 
several instances of Providence in the constitution of animals ; so that 
afxe^ei expresses a confession.] Xen. Mem. i, 4, 7. r/^iov yap tov 
■nXovTov Karacppovelv bibaaKovra, rrpwrov eavrbv Trape%eiv v\pt]X6repov 
XTifx/xuT^v afieXei Kal Trparriav ravra biereXet: and in reality, in fact, 
he constantly acted on this principle: Lucian, Nigr. t. i. p. 65. 
[p. 39. A. ed. Salm.] afieXei irepiepyla bofciev elvai -jrpoairohjais Xoywv 
Kal 7rpa£eiov f.ier cvpoias, in reality : Theophr. Ch.* 



h TlvQSfievos 8e avOis aodevus %X elv av ~ Ka ' KaBiaas ntap avrcp, ^aro rr\s x ei P^ s ' 
rbv, e0a5t£ei> btySpevos : Kal twv Ka\a>v eicelvov 5e elirdvros, '6ri vvv 6 irvperbs airo~ 
tivi 7Tfpl dvpas anfivTriaev doeAQbv 8e, Kex&pflKW, 'AME'AEI, nafilov, e<pri, Kal 



132 'Avniepv. [Chap. vii. 

Sometimes it has an ironical sense, forsooth. It is used to intro- 
duce an instance of any thing ; for example : oiov a^eXei teal ro tov 
IloXvbufiavTus iTori <f>atji ovfififjvat, such, for example, as, &c. Aristid. 
de Quat. p. 422. 

II. (VI.) 'Ai'Tixpv, over against, vis a vis, and avriKpvs, openly, are 
sometimes, by orators and poets, used one for the other. [KaravTiKpv 
tTjs 'Ifirjpias, Diod. S. v, 17 '. Herm.] l 

III. (VI!.) Botli, but, oftener avriKpvs, are used by Homer for 
quite through, through and through; as, amKpvs be bC av-^evos 7]X0ev 
aKbiKT] : (which is expressed by biafiirepes and biaxpu also.) So in 
Thuc. olo/ievoi TrvXas (tov rei^ovs or ri)s woXews) rets dvpas tov oIk^jxu- 
tos elvai, Ka\ avriKpvs biobov es t6 e£w : and that there was a thorough- 
fare, a way quite through, to the outside of the town: ii, 4. 

IV. (VIII.) "AvriKpvs, as a military term, signifies in front, in the 
van, and is opposed to Karornv, in the rear : ol fiev avriKpvs eirwvres, 
ol be Karomv : Dion. Hal. iii. 

V. (IX.) It may sometimes be rendered undisguisedly ; as in ov 
Kpvipa ml bi evXafleias rrjv eavrov yvio\XT)v airo(paiv6fj.evov, aXX' avriKpvs 
kcii dpaaews : Dion. Hal. viii.™ Sometimes by the adjective palpable, 
or glaring ; as in avriKpvs biafioXij ravra, (underst. kariv :) cest une 
pure calomnie que cela. n 

VI. (X.) In later writers it has a signification of proportion, rela- 
tion, or conformity : ras uev dXXas ycipiras ov tG>v irpay/uaruv avriKpvs 
elvai avfiflefirjicev, equal to, on a par with, in proportion to : Aristid. 
in Exord. Panath. to. vvv ye, avriKpvs tTjs HioKparovs /j.eyaXo\pvxlas, 
ov% iipiraoe tov Kaipov PovXtuiiov: but now, matching (or rivalling) the 
magnanimity of Socrates, he did not seize the opportunity , although 
suffering extremity of hunger : Themist. Or. ix. 

VII. (XI.) It is sometimes, in truth, in reality, properly, truly: 
[evidently : manifestly :] irapadeuevov be tov deov fxovov avriKpvs ovra, 
Euseb. Praep. 1 1 . avriKpvs XpionaviKws, aXX' ov^l 'lovbainQs $wv 
avairefyvev : Id. Demonstr. i. 

Sometimes directly, straightforward : ra^ora avXXafiuvres, ayow- 
aiv avriKpvs ws atroKrevovvres : Lys. adv. Agorat. p. 497- [ed. Reisk.] 
kciXXiov i)v avriKpvs irapa r<3 KaXXnrTrw KaraXnre~iv to apyvpiov, De- 
mosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1242. [1. 22. ed. Reisk.] 

VIII. (XII.) It signifies also expressly : i\ji)<pia[xa avriKpvs nep\ tov- 
tov tov ovofiaros yeyparrrat, Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 381. ed. Reisk. 



iixol irepl dvpas airibv vvv air-fivTTjKe : Plut. he insinuated that he well knew the ra- 
in Demetr. p. 1644. 1. 3. ed. H. St. ture of his son's confinement, hinges on 
Antigonus, having heard another time the word afiehei. — J. S. 
that he (his son Demetrius) was ill, went l Tuv Tipvravioov KaravTiicpv, Aristoph. 
to see him, and on his arrival met a beau- Eccl. 87. — J. S. 

tiful youth at the door: as soon as he had m Eoxovrai ye irXovreiv &VTinpvs, Ari- 
entered, he sat down by him and felt his stoph. Plut. 134. — J. S. 
pulse. The fever has now left me, said n J AvriKpvs, evidently, manifestly : So- 
Demetrius. WHY TRULY, (ox MAR- k??v— avriKpvs p-qdev Aeyeiv : Aristoph. 
RY,) answered Antigonus, a beautiful Thesm. 442. absolutely: {SXiireiv yap bv- 
boy going away did meet me at the door as Tixpvs Sonets ft' "Apijv : Aristoph. Plut. 
I was coming in. Here all the plea- 32S. kov dioioovr &vTiKpvs rwv 'Epa- 
santry of Antigonus's answer, by which kMiSoov, Id. ib. 384.— J. S. 



§ iv. Rule 1.] 'Apaporm, &c. 133 

ypatpas, &uirep vvv Xeyio, vols pij/xacnv ovtuss avriKpvs : Demostll. ibid, 
p. 220. uvTiKpvs vitea^ovTO, Dion. Halic. V. bpiaas avTtupvs tijv 
ahiav Tfjs biKrjs, Id. iv." 



SECTION IV.— Of THE ADVERBS apapoTios, apri, cnrapr), ews 
apri, apriws, are%vws, arpepa, arpepas, av, avdts, aire, avTiKa. 

Rule I. 'ApapoYws, derived from apapibs, the pret. middle of apco, 
to fit, to adapt, signifies first, aptly, fitly , congruously : ware peff 
rjbovijs apapcTws avro) vrnqpeTeiv, Plato Phaedr. p. 240. 1. 32. next 
firmly : eorwras iv TrpofioXrj, kui pevovras upaporws, bej^eadai tovs tto- 
Xepiovs : Plut. in Pomp. p. 656. and in Caes. p. 729. and Diod. S. 
says that a certain very ferocious beast of the ox kind moves its horns 
and ears at other times, Kara be ras pc'iy^as 'iarrjaiv apaporios, b. iii. 

"Apri signifies — 1. time but just past ; a little while ago: avyper 
apri Xaipe<pQvra IwKpaTqs, Aristoph. Nub. 154. ws cnro yvpvamoio 
KaXov irovov apri Xiwovoi, Theocr. ii, 80. and in this sense it is joined 
with any tense except a present future. Most of its compounds 
retain the same signification; as, aprtyXvtprjs, recently sculptured: 
Theocr. Epigr. iv, 2. apTiyevedXos, recently born, new-born : Orph. 
Arg. 384. — 2. now, at this time, with a present tense only : apri 
Qvpas virep ohbbv apeifieaBat nobl, Theocr. ii, 104. V. xxiii, 26. xxv, 
l63. apTL yevemabiov irepl to aropa tlos KporcKJxas re, Theocr. xi, 
9. So Xen. Anab. vii, 4, 7- evbov yap avrjp apri Tvyxavei, Soph. 
Aj. 9. v. Eurip. Ale. IO69. apri be iJKecs ?j naXai; Plato in Critia. 
v. Aristot. Phys. iv, 13. — 3. "Apri repeated serves to connect mem- 
bers of sentences : eiraivwv apri pev is to ttaXXos, apri be is Tas 
■Kpa^ets ko1 tov ttXovtov, now, — now : Lucian, Dial. Diog. et Alex. 

"ApTi is joined with numerals, as jam is in Latin: "Opvides Tpirov 
apri tov eayaTOv opBpov aeibov, Theocrit. xxiv, fj3. 

The compound airapn is, from this time, henceforth: tovs xpV^ovs 
fiovovs — unapTi nXovTrjcrai -Koti^aw : Aristoph. Plut. 388. So in the 
New Testament, Matth. xxiii, 39. xxvi, 29. because the Hebrew 
nn^D is so used : but ems apri, till now, up to this time, appears 

to be used in the New Testament only to express the Hebrew 
nnyiy, which is rendered by the Septuagint, em tov vvv. 

'ApTiws is, a little while since, just now : i([>8appevas yap dpr/ws 
evpioicopev Xee'as abacas, Soph. Aj. 25. Socr. airoXel KciKtara. Streps. 
a\\' (5 'yaff, airoXtoX' dpr/ws : Aristoph. Nub. 724. [7l6*. Bekk.] . 

Texvr) signifies two things, art or skill, and craft, artifice, or fraud: 
hence two adjectives, a.Tex v0S > unskilful, and drex^s, candid, open, 



'Earl BcSkiSos xpyvfd>s &VTiicpvs Kiyuiv has cited under Rule 11. In all the uses 

els toss NecpeAoKOKKvyias, Aristoph. Av. of avriicpi) and &vTiupvs it is very easy to 

962. expressly. So the word signifies also trace a relation to the primary meaning, 

in that passage of Isasus, (de Haguiae over against or opposite, derived from the 

Hered. p. 282. Reisk.) which Zeunius preposition avrl.—J. S. 



134 'Arpt/aas, &c. [CHAP. VII. § iv. 

guileless. From arex>os comes the adverb arfyrws, inartificial fy, un- 
skilfully, clumsily; and from dre^i'iys the adverb arexvws, which 
signifies — 1. guilelessly, openly, candidly, sincerely: tovto be arrXuis, 
Kai dre^fws, kcu 'laws evi/Ows, ej^w nup ifiavrw : Phil. Phzcd. C. 49. — 
2. really, truly : ootyov ye tout), teal yepovTi irpootyopov e^e.vpes a.Te\v(os 
<pdpfi(iKOv (TTpayynvplas : Aristoph. Vesp. 806. d\\' a.Te\ywi, uxnrfp 

6 UptoTevs, Trurrobanvs yiyiy : Plato, Jon. p. 541. — 3. absolutely: 
(f>ev ! ws ovbev arexvws byies eanv ovbevos ! Aristoph. Plut. 302. ovb' 
av bieXexBetrjv dre^vdis rols aXXots, Aristoph. Nub. 424. Bp&vruiV 
arexvws 6 ti xPy£° vtTl > Aristoph. Nub. 452. v. Nub. 437. Also 
precisely, just : >)) At" eywy ovv utex^ws enadov tovti wore, Aristoph. 
Nub. 407. also plainly, evidently: KaTibelvol,ews, dre^»ws, Ka.ipq.biws: 
Plato Euthyphr. 5. 

II. 'Arpeyuas and urpe/Lia have nearly the same signification; the 
latter is used by writers after Homer, as Eustathius observes, but by 
Homer only when the metre requires it, as in II. o, 318. They signify 
not only without motion, steadily : and gradually or gently ; but 
also accurately, regularly, in due order and place, methodically ; as, 
toIs XpoviKols bonel. fiaXXov Qovicvbibi)S ovfxfepeadai, naiirep ovbe avrols 
arpefxa (Tvprarrofieyois : although the chronology itself is not accu- 
rately adjusted : p Plutarch, in Themistocl. p. 125. 

III. "E^e arpe/jas is a phrase used by Homer and Aristoph. keep 
still: Nub. 200. — stop: ex' arpefxas'.avTOv oryd'' eiriax es T0V bpofiov : 
Aristoph. Av. 1200. Hold, (to a. person speaking:) &kovoov ?'/cV nave 
twv TracpXaafxarMp' e^' a-pe/ua : Aristoph. Av. 1244. q Stay, make 
yourself easy : ex arpe/jas' Knt tovto yap ia.aofxa.1 aoi : Lucian, Charon, 
p. 141. "Ex eiv * s joined with a-pepta also : a-pe/iiav e^etv, to remain 
still, Xen. Cyrop. vi. p. 165. 

Av, (which Hoogeveen conjectures to be properly the neuter of 
the adjective ays, i. e. avros iu the dialect of the Lacedaemonians 
and Cretans,) signifies — 1. els tovttiow, backwards, back ; as, av epv- 
aav, Horn. II. a, 459. they bent back the neck of the victim : and 
av epvovra, drawing back the string of the bow : Horn. II. 6, 325. — 
2. once more, to give another example, on the other hand, on the 
contrary : Tavra juev 6 nap' ifxov Xe£eC rols be Trap" v/jlwv vfieJs av eiria- 
TeXXere 6 ti vfuv boKel cvfxcpepov elvai : but you on the other hand, or 
also, instruct your ambassadors, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 30. ovbafiws 
ye TaTrtt) efiavTov eis ttjv twv apx Glv fiuvXofjievwv rd£uv — ovbe eh ttjv 
bovXeiav av (on the other hand) efxavTuv tuttw : Xen. Mem. ii, 1, 

7 and 11. v. § 13. ovb' eanv oiibevl twv rjfxeTepwv exdpwv Tpoiraiov 
ovbev ckj>' rifxtiv yj/Tiv b' av (on the contrary) airo 7roXXwv : Demosth. 
adv. Lept. p. 4S0. [1. 20. ed. Reisk.] See Plat. Phaedr. p. 251. de 
Rep. iv. p. 420. Aristoph. Vesp. 57/ — 3. It is put for -naXiv, again : 

P Perhaps arp4fj.a has here its ordinary to interrupt another. — J. S. 
sense : the chronology was not settled on r In Aristophanes, a Boeotian being 

such a firm basis as to remain undisturbed asked whether he will take back from 

and uncontroverted. — J. S. Attica earthenware, or apuee, (a kind of 

i In this sense Plato often uses the small fish,) in exchange for iiis own goods, 

phrase, when in liis dialogues something answers, aepvas r) Kepafiov ; aAA' %vt e/cer 

occurs to one speaker which induces him ah\' '6 rt Trap' afilv p.i) 'art, ra5e 8' ah iro\v : 



Rule 2—6.] AZOi, AbrUa. 135 

see II. a, 540. <j>, 394/ for be : Horn. II. A, 3(57. flnd v. 10S. where it 
answers to fjev. It appears to be put for br), then, therefore: Horn. 
II. /3, 493, 618/ 

AZdi is, in that place, there: e. g. Horn. II. e, 296. But aZdis (al- 
tis in the Ionic dialect, or in the language of Homer,) is — 1. back, 
back again, II. k, 62. e, 257. — 2. (3.) on the contrary, contradic- 
torily : elireiv — ws (jXajSq re eari rw epwueva kui kpCovri, Kal avdis, uis 
fieytaTov tu>v ayad&v Tvyyavei ; Plato Phaedr. p. 263. — 3. (4.) again, 
a second time: aXX aZdts aZ rvnTtjcro/uai, Aristoph. Nub. 1382. Md.\' 
avdis (and paX' av) is a phrase used when what immediately precedes 
it is to be considered or understood as said twice, by which means it 
becomes more emphatical ; as, o'lfxoi yuu\' nZdis, v. /Esch. Choeph. 
876. iboii jua\' avdis rovdi' erepov there again! another blunder! 
Aristoph. Nub. 670. as if one should say, there, there! — 4.(5.) 
hereafter, at a future time: nav /d) irapavTiK, aZQis elai ^piici/iot: 
Eurip. Or. 907. ovb' aZdis aZ <re aKw^erai Uavotdv : Aristoph. 
Ach. 854. Hence eaavdis or es avdis, to a future time: ras ibias 
biaipopas es avdis avafiaXw/ueda, Thuc. iv, 63. 

tlpuira fiev — avrts be, Herodot. viii, 60, 2. not of time, but par- 
litively. AZdis, as well as av, answers to fiev preceding : Soph. Ant. 
165. 

Of uvt€ the same may be said as ofay. It signifies rursus, again, 
even in Attic writers, as in Aristoph. Lys. 66. Like aZ and aZdis, 
it answers to fiev preceding. See Horn. II. a, 237. Od. x> 6. and so 
in Attic writers. 

IV. AvTUa in its most common acceptation is, forthwith, presently ; 
in which sense it is opposed to vvv by Plato ; vvv fiev — rfjv evbalpova 
itoXiv irXarrofxev — • airim be n)v evavriav (ncexpofieda : de Rep. iv. p. 
420. and when the interval between the present time and that signi- 
fied by airiKa is to be represented as exceedingly small, fiaXa, or 
hri fiaXa, is often added to amiKa : dp' oiad'' on aiirovs yfids avrina fiaXa 
bei)oei fxayeadai ; Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 8. [v. Demosth. in Aristog. p. 
778. 1. 25. ed. Reisk.] u 

V. VI. But it signifies also present, at the present time; as, 6 
avrina (j>6f3os, at ain'ra ffbovai. And so the compound 7rapaur/ca : rr)u 
irapavTitca iiovyLav, Demosth. de Feed. Alex. p. 215. [ed. Reisk.] rrjs 
TcapavriKa iibovfjs, Id. Ol. iii. p. 34. [ed. Reisk.] 'Er 7w 7rapavTttca, 
at the present time, for the present. In this sense it is opposed to 
what signifies any thing future ; ovtios >/ irapavrix ybovy) ical pamiLvr\ 
fie'iciov ttr^uei too nod' varepov avvoiaeiv fieXXovros ! Demosth. Phil. ii. 



Ach. 903. ^5i/ troKKovs ixBpovs e%eiv ; Aristoph. Eq. 207.— J. S. 

ovW av a.<r<pa\4s: Demosth. de Fals. Leg. ' A3 is also an interjection ; alas! av 

p. 181. ed. Herwag. ii. p. 409. I. 25. ed. rd\as avrip, Saris uaicbv toiovtov aynaAi^e- 

Rei^k. -who adds ou between ex ei " and tou : Simonides. — J. S. 

ovd'. — J. S. « Avr'iKa, at some future time ; ano- 

* Otov av oeSpaKev epyov, oTov av, <pi\ai, fher time : ahA' el /ueV rivos &\Kov Set 

T<58e ; Aristoph. Thesm. 703. i. e. in irphs rovrois, oh Atyei s,evo(pwv, Kal av~ 

addition to his former exploits. <5 Spdiacv Tina Qean iroielv a 8e vvv tip-nice, done? 

yap eari fiaupbv, 6 r' aAAas av fiaKp6v : jxoi us Taxiffra \f/7](pio-ao-9at &pi(TT0V elvai : 

and a sausage again (or too) is long: Xen. Anab. iii, 2, 22. — J. S. 



136 Avrddev. [Chap. vii. § v. 

p. 72. [1. l()« ed. Rcisk.] to fiev avriKa, bbfTfia-^ov' to be fieXXov, 
evKaraywvtarov av yetotro : Tliuc. To vvv beivbv, e. g., is simply 
the evil present when spoken of: to rrapbv beivbv, the evil present 
at any time, whatever that time may be, without any signification of 
either the transitoriness or durability of the evil. To avriKa, or to 
icapavTiica, beivbv, the evil present at any point of time, but of no 
duration, and about to pass away very speedily. 6 S' avritf ribvs, 
Kal biboiis ttoXX))v ycipiv, elaavris e/3Aai//e : Eurip. Suppl. 414. Avtiko. 
is used, like li/xa, with re and Kal, for, as soon as: avriica re rbv 
eydpbv ewpaice, Kal npbs biaXXayas &puY)<rev, no sooner did he see his 
enemy, than, &c. 

VII. AvriKa introduces an example or instance of any thing that 
lias been said ; for instance ; as for example : v ebibaaKe be Kal /Jte^jit 
Srov beoi efiireipov elvai eKaarov irpayfxaTOS tov 6pdu>s Trenaibevfievov. 
avriKa yewfxerpiav uej^pi fiev rovrov c^tj beiv fiavdaveiv, Zoos, &c. Xen. 
Mem. iv, 7, 2. v. Ern. and Hindenb. also Xen. (Ec. xix, 18. Cyrop. 
iii, 1, 29. Callim. in Jov. 76. Particles are sometimes added : 
avTka yap, el fiev elpi]vri boKel, &c. Xen. Hier. 7« and iEschin. Dial, 
ii, 24. avrUa ye 6 fiev "H\ws ovroal, ovb' ooov Kvy)aaaQai to ovs (<pao~l) 
a\oXi]v ixyiov : Lucian, Bis accus. in init. Also avriKa ye toi. — ec ris 
avriKa bij udXa e'iiroi, us, &c. Demosth.adv. Aristog. p. 778. [1.'25. 
ed. Reisk.] m Also avrUa bij rrov. v. Markland. ad Lys. p. 647. and 
855. ed. Reisk. et ad Max. Tyr. Diss, xxiv, 5. Casaub. ad Athen. 
p. 604. 



SECTION V. — Of THE ADVERBS avroQev, elra, erreira, e>7rjjy. 

RULE I. AvroQev signifies — 1. eij avrov tottov, thence: b rrarrip b 
rsbs <j>X er0 avr b9ev : (ec tov bev/juorripiov) Demostll. adv. Androt. p. 
614. [ed. Reisk.] irodev, JLvdqpe, <j)alvrj ; answ. vtto fiev rrfv Kara- 
Xvaiv tov rroXeuov, Ik rrjs cnrobrjuias' vvvl fievroi avrodev: from home 
here in the town: Xen. Mem. ii, 8, 1. — 2. e£ avrov tov ypovov, 
at once, suddenly, off hand: Tiros avrodev e£ ebpas Kal dvfiiKuis <priol, 
&C. Polyb. E. L. 6. avrodev avappixpas tov errl ueytorwv Kivbvvov '. 
Plut. in Publ. p. 111. 1. 11. [directly; not indirectly and by stra- 
tagem, as Solon acted.] — 3. e£ avrov rov irpayfiaros, without prepa- 
ration or study ; extempore : ev biKaviKy ibea Xoyov, kclv eaKevaofievos 
T]Kr\s, irpocnroiov avrodev Xeyeiv : Hermog. b uev ovv Ar}fii]rpios avrodev 
eK ~ov 7rpofiej3rjK6ros eft? : Polyb. vii, 3. Hence — 4. it is used in 
speaking of what is obvious; at hand, in readiness, of what is easily 

" Exempli gratia, ac primo quidem, Div. vii, 19.— J. S. 
[statim : nos gleich. Hermann.] atque ut w Perhaps aWtKa S77 (id\a here is, sud- 

inde ordiar : Brunck. See Aristopb. denly, this very instant ; as in Demosth. 

Thesm. 151. Av. 16G. 378. 574. 1000. in Tiraocrat. Kal fiijv, et avriKa St; /idAa 

Plut. 130. " Cogitare debebis, nullam Kpavy)\v aKovo-atre irphs rep dMaar-npiw, 

artem literis, sine interprete et sine aliqua elr e'iiroi ris, ws avecpKTci to Seffixurfipiov, 

exercitatione, percipi posse: non longe 01 8e deo-fiurai (pevyovaiw &c. p. 764. 

abieris : (i.e. avriKa) num jus civile ves- 1, 20. ed. Reisk. — J. S. 
trum ex libris cognosci potest ?" Cic. ad 



Rule 1,2.] Elra. 137 

done or obtained : eiclv ahiai biTrai' /uia fieu uvrodev kcu Traaiv 
■7rpo<pavi']s : Polyb. iv, 39- avroQev be ovv tovto, tcai ovk etc fxaKpov 
bceXeyfyfiev : Euseb. Prsep. i. ical to avroBev be irpbs evimuv icaaiv 
avOpunots TrpofiefiXriijevov : Id. ib. 

It signifies also, from the very circumstances of a case, or from the 
very thing itself : rare be avroQev ebeiKwro, on baifxovojv epya j)v to. 
TeXovfxeva: Chrysost. torn, v.* 

II. (IV.) E!ra, which properly signifies succession, then, next, 
afterwards, is often used, and commonly with some anger, in intro- 
ducing a question, observation, or the like, arguing absurdity, incon- 
sistency, improbability, heinousness, &c. and founded on something 
preceding, from which elra implies an inference: eh', (<3 ri av elwojv 
ok tis opdiLs Trpoaeinot ;) eartv ottov bv irapwv, Tr)XiKavrr)v irpa^iv ical 
av/jfia^iav, — bp&v a^aipov/nevov fie rr\s nbXews, r/yaycuTjjercts ; seeing 
me then, as you say, depriving the state of such an advantage and 
alliance, did you on any occasion (for you ivere present) express any 
indignation ? Demosth. pro Cor. p. 3l6\ [p. 232. 1. 20. ed. Reisk.] 
norepov ae tis, Ala^ivq, Tfjs 7rdXews e%dpbi>, r\ efibv eivai (pfj ; kfibv brfXo- 
voti. elra, ov fxev i\v Trap' kfiov hiKnv — Xujie'iv, — e£,eXnres' ov b' eyw fxev 
adaios, — rrj noXet b' — avaytcr) tu>v ye br](Xoaiq ireirpaynevbiv uerelvai Tfjs 
bo^ns, evravda a.Tn']VTr)Kas ', opa fxi) tovtwv ue> eyQpbs ys, epos be icpoa- 
•n-oiy : Demosth. ib. [p. 268. 1. 29. ed. Reisk.] epfip6rTr)Te, elra vvv 
Xeyeis; to a supposed physician, who, after the death of a patient, 
should say what ought to have been done: wrongheaded fool ! and is 
it now that you tell us of it? Demosth. ib. p. 308. [I. 5.] ed. Reisk. 
ciXX' abiKws r)p^a ; elra Ttapiov ore fie elarjyov ol Xoyiaral ov KaTijyopets ; 
[Demosth. de Cor. p. 266. 1. 8. ed. Reisk.] See also Demosth. ib. 
[p. 259- 1. 23. ed. Reisk.] raura bi] ToXfias Xeyeiv epfaviLs ijbrj 
irpbs i]fxds ; elr eyu> aov (peioofiat', and shall I then spare you ? Ari- 
stoph. Ach. 311. iEacus to the shade of Xerxes, elra ae, d> ku6- 
ap/ua, t] 'EXXas ecpptrre — ; and was it you then, miscreant, such a 
contemptible shadow as you, that Greece dreaded? Lucian, Dial. 
Mort. t. 1. p. 413.? v. ^1. V. H. i, 34. and (V.) without interro- 
gation : elra tovto aev ovy\ Xeyei to ^(pio-fta' el be, &c. et cependant, 
and yet: Demosth. pro Cor." 

Etra expressing a consequence : KXrjn'jp el/xi vrjaiwrucbs, ical bvko- 
(pc'iPTtis, ical Trpayfio:robi<pr}s' eha beofiat Tzreph Xafiiov kvkXJ irepiaofielv 
tus noXets — : therefore, in consequence, on that account : Aristoph. 
Av. 1424.* 



* It seems sometimes to mean sponta- v Praxag. xiyois av. Mul. elra irplv 

neously, of one's self : otfre avr66ev Sievo- ttielv \4yw ; Aristoph. Eccl. 132. what! 

elro irapa\afji.0dv€tv 7rop' ifj.ov t^v vavv, speak before I have drunk ? S> rptaKaKo- 

out', e7rei8^ — 7]vayKacr87] iirl -tt}v vavv airii- ^aifiwv, elra Aevubv a/xirixet ; and do you 

vat, i\6a>i> TjOeXriae fioi Staoe^aordai aiiT7]v : put on white ? and yet do you put on 

Demosth. adv. Polyd. p. 1215. 1. 28. ed. white? Aristoph. Ach. 1024. — J. S. 

Reisk. avT69ev re r$ /3a<n\ej 8ia/ceiyU«/<{> z Elra tup irpSrepov yeyevriiiivwv av- 

irpbs clvtov oiKtlws ivirvxe, Ka\ depairevo- Spwv ayadaiv /ue'ftvijtrat : and yet, notwith- 

/j.4vcf> ypa<pcus /cat 7riz/a|ii' airb ttjs "ZKXa,- standing : Demosth. de Cor. p. 329. 1. 

80s : kindly disposed towards him of him- 26. R.— J. S. 

self without additional extrinsic motives : a A participle and elra, instead of a 

Plut. Arat. p. 1887.1. 20. ed. H.St.— J. S. verbund ical, serve to unite two members 

Viger. - s 



1S8 "Erreira, &c. [C'HAP. VII. 

III. (VII.) "EireiTa is properly next, afterwards : hence it signifies 
a consequence, either with or without interrogation: el jxev bt) erapov 
ye KeXevere ii avrov eXeadai, Tlws av eVetr' 'Obvarjos eyio deloio XaQoi- 
W, Horn. II. k, 242. and in Od. a, 65. eiteira refers to what 
Minerva had previously said, el b' irebv b>) rovrov (/xvdov viz.) and 
trnovbris ayopeveis, *■£ upa b>) rot eiretra [then, an inference ;] deal 
<ppevas tiXeaav avroi : Horn. II. jj, 36. When it is thus used inter- 
rogatively in the beginning of a sentence, it has a greater emphasis, 
and expresses wonder, indignation, or other emotions of mind, like 
elra : eireir htrb rappov rovs deovs vireptypove'ts ; and do you then ? &c. 
Aristoph. Nub. 226. eireir, w narapare, — av fxev — TraXaea epya 
eXeyes, — ef.te be, w rptrayiovtora, — to rives <ppovr)ua Xafiuvra avafiatvetv 
eirt to /3>7juo ebet ; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 297- '• 21. ed. Reisk.] eiretra 
bfjrn ju' e^evliere ; and yet, notwithstanding that the mistress of the 
house was lying dead in it, you received me and entertained me with- 
out mentioning it? Eurip. Ale. 822. see Eurip. Hippol. 330. 440. 
eiretra iralbas j^pi) ojvrevetv teal rpetyetv ; and yet, after all this, are 
people to beget and rear up children ? Aristoph. Vesp. 1128.* 

It sometimes signifies so, therefore, (things being so,) connecting 
the different parts of narration: evff A'ias fxev eiretra kqt aairiba 
■naiToa ei(TT}v vvfy: Horn. II. o, 49. \p, 818. See II. a, 505. v, 586. 
Od. a, 106. 

It is placed between a participle and verb in the same manner as 
elra : (see the notes on elra :) fxi'i [xoi <pQovi]ar}r\ — el itrwybs wv, eiretr 
e.v 'Adtjraiois Xeyeiv fieXXta : if I being a poor man, yet, nevertheless, 
am about, &c. Aristoph. Ach. 497. c 

"Efxnijs (which is the Ionic form, the Attic being eLinas and ejuwa) d 
signifies, however, yet, notwithstanding, although, nevertheless; and 
has always reference to something previous : alel fxev o'ieat, ovbe ae 
\{]6(j)' irpyjfai b' e/j.wrjs ovri bvv)]ueai\ Horn. II. a, 563. eiroucreipto 
be viv, bvarrjvov gpnras, aaiirep ovra bva/ievfj : Soph. Aj. 122. See 
II. e, 191 • ovk av eytoye ae — KeXoifirjv 'Apye/otcriv it/uvveuevai, j^ct- 
reovcri -nep ep7rns : Horn. I!, t, 514. cf. Od. 0, 360. efjtirrjs yuot 

roiyoi fxeyapojy icaXai re fxeaobiiat (paivovr 6<pdaXfxo~is waet rrvpbs 

aldoLievoto. 7] fiaXa ris debs evbov — : Horn. Od. r, 37- YET it IS 
so; the walls, fyc. do appear to me of flame, ALTHOUGH, (or 



of a sentence into one : tv 6 (TvvSovXos /xoi to rpifidviov, Xv afupiecrw tov avKocpdv- 

crK&Tpas avrov ras ir\7]yas eir avepoiro : rr\v rovrovl. Just. yu?j b~rj6'' lepbv ydp 

Aristoph. Pac. 745. — J. S. ean tov XIXovtov ird\ai. Car. ewe it a 

b See Aristoph. Plut. 1148. Nub. rtov KaXKiov avareQ^aerai, % irepl irovrjphv 

1249. Thesm. 637. — J. S. &vb*pa ko\ Toix<apvx ov > and where I pray 

c Yet, nevertheless, notwithstanding : can it be better suspended as an offering, 

ovk eaS" tineas ov vavrias er, S> £eve, Sffrts than, &c? Aristoph. Plut. 938. — J. S. 
y' aicovaas Zti redv^Ke Upcoreas, eireiT d 'AAA.' ep.iras ecpepe Katchv a\ts, &tskvos 

ipwras, ev8ov ear %\ '^dmios : Aristoph. &v : Eurip. Ale. 909. fj.edvaifj.ev eixiras 

Thesm. 884. tovto Stjt' ovk ayx^vrf, 5' o# ris hv xpaiaeie fiov : Eurip. Cjcl. 

K&iretr' iyca 55jt' evBaSl arpayyevopai ; 533. <pv\a.Ka TevKpov tyxcpl <ro\ Xefyco, rpo- 

Aristopli. Ach. 126. See also Av. 126. (prjs &okvov efiira, Kel ravvv TyKca-nos 

Sometimes when used interrogatively, it olxfel: Soph. Aj. 565. ex em. Erf. — J.S- 
may be rendered by and : Car. 80s o~v 



§ vi. Rule l.] 'Enel. 139 

NOTWITHSTANDING THAT) I did not think so, or doubted 
about it at first. e See Od. o, 214. II. y, 196. 



SECTION VI. — Of THE ADVERBS eyre*, erceibr), eirav, eneibuv, 
e7rtet/cws. 

Rule I. 'E^ei signifies — 1. after that, when; (also, from the 
time when, since: v. Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 138.) /3>/ £' ap' oveipos, 
enel tov fivQov liKovae : Horn. II. /3, 16. v. II. 1, 92. and when used 
in this sense in oblique phraseology or narration, an infinitive some- 
times follows it: 2fo/0as yap tovs No/za5as, ewe/ re afyi AapeTov eafia- 
Xe~iv es T))i' ^wpjjr, /xera ravra fiefiovevai uiv rltraadat : Herod ot. Er. c, 
84. and in the same circumstances eireibr) also is followed by an infini- 
tive :/ kneibri be yeveadai eirl rjji ohla rrj 'Ayaduvos, but that when he 
arrived at Agathon's: Plat. Symp. c! 2. [p. 177. 1. 2. ed. Bas. 1.] 
In conjunction with ra^tora, evdews, and the like adverbs, it may be 
rendered, as soon as ever. — 2. because, seeing that, since, for : /uijj /tie 
kteIv, ewet ov% ouoyaarptos "Esropos elfxi '. Horn. II. <f>, Q5. dappei, 
{ufjrep, enel rols Xeovaiv avro'ts i]br] ^wtjOtis eifii : Lucian, Dial. Ven. 
et Cup. In this sense it is often used very elliptically : in the 
Ranee of Aristoph. Bacchus and his slave Xanthias having exchanged 
clothes, they are both scourged by iEacus to discover by the effect 
of the lashes which is the real god ; Bacchus, on receiving a stroke, 
exclaims, "AirdXXov, os itov ArjXov r) YlvB&v ex^isl Xanth. flXytjaev 
ovk ijnovaas ; Bacch. ovk eyu>y, enei 'ianfiov 'lirvtljvaKros avefufxvrjcr- 
KOfi)]v. Here eVet refers not to the words immediately preceding it, 
ovk eytvye (IjXyriGa,) but to some understood, 1 exclaimed "AttoXXov, 
&c. because I recollected an iambic of Hipponax. Socr. a\X', w 
Tr6vr)pe, ravra y* eW ovk appeva. Streps, ovk appev' vjuv eariv; Socr. 
obbajjiuis y. kirel ttws av KciXeaeias kvTvywv 'Afivpia ; Aristoph. Nub. 
689. After e7ret, el ravr eoriv appeva is to be understood. So el 
abiKos eirj [y] is to be understood after en-el in Rom. iii, 6. and et 
bvvairo TeXeiwoai, in Hebr. x, 2. 

It is thus used elliptically before the imperative mood also ; espe- 
cially when what is spoken of appears so certain that the person 
addressed may be defied to dispute it : to yap " ovk e-%(o ti xpwfiai," 
ti Trore Xeyeis, d> Aiovvaobwpe ; 7j brjXovort, ws ovk ej(0) e£e\ey£at avTov ; 
kirel (for, if that be not the meaning of the words) ei7re, ri 001 aXXo 



' I have followed Hermann in this in- had said these things, — &\\o (jlIv obSev 

terpretation. There is the authority of airoKpidrjvai rbv irpo<p^Ti]t/, &c. Plat. Al- 

Hesychius however for the signification cib. ii. p. 231.1. 51. ed. Bas. 1. AeyeTtu 

irdi/Tais, prorsus, omnino, assigned to e/x- — tiinaarcus avrbi> eliteiv, '6ri v6p.os icriv 

•nrjs by Zeunius : and in the passage here — • iirepuT-rtaas Se, ei S'lKaios abro'is koX 

referred to, Hesych. explains efj.Trr)s wcrel Ka\a>s %x wv & v6nos (pcdverai, iireiS)} 

by Trdvrus 6/jt.olws. — J. S. <j>rjaat irdvras tovs StKaaras, elire7v '6ti, 

f — Soksiv updrunov sfoai, irefiipavras &c. Demosth. in Timocr. 766. 1. ed. 

■npls"Amiu>va, iicuvov iirepcoTav. — eneib'T) Reisk. — J. S. 
eipr}K4vai Tavra, and that when they 



140 'Ewetb)). [Chap. vii. § vi. 

tfcoel tovto to pijfict, tv " ovk ^w o ri yprioonai toIs Kayois." Plat, ill 
Euthyd. p. 287. 1- 21. And presently afterwards, eirei airoKpivai,for 
(if it be not so) answer me, &c. So «rel bibatyv, Soph. El. 353. 
cf. Aristopli. Vesp. 517- 

'E^el is frequently joined with various particles; as, e7rel apa, 
otherwise, as a conseque?ice your children are unclean : 1 Cor. vii, 14. 
'Eirei ye, since truly : Sferrijju', knei ye rovb' etyairTOfxm toitov : Eurip. 
Hel. 563. eneiirep, seeing it is so, that — : Eurip. Hel. 1253. l675. 
Plato de Rep. v. p. 452. eireiirep ye, since truly it is so, that — : 
Plat. Phacd. p. 114. evel ovv, seeing then, since therefore: Hebr. 
iv, 6. eirei rot, for really, for in truth: Eurip. Heracl. 508. 744. 
and interrogatively : eirei toi o'iei fxe o.vtov ovrws ixv wore Kopvfiavnaaai, 
(Is — ; Lucian, Epist. Sat. t. iii. p. 408. 1. 86. As to eirei roi ye, 
Zeunius says that eirei reasons, rol confirms, and ye urges ; and he 
cites Demosth. Phil. i. [p. 40. 1. 17. ed. Reisk.] but the reading in 
that passage is, it seems, rather doubtful ; [see Reiske's note ;] and 
Porson affirms that the Attics could not employ toi ye without the 
intervention of some other word : for which reason, in Eurip. Suppl. 
879* instead of e7ret toi y ovbev alria (a£ia) iroXis, he reads eirei toi 
Koblev a^la iroXts, on the authority of Mss. See Pors. ad Eurip. Med. 
675. 

It is observable that, after particles of time, and especially after 
eirei, the Greeks frequently insert in the apodosis or reddition (in the 
chief correlative proposition of a sentence) the particle be in such a 
manner as to produce an anacoluthon, to render the parts of the sen- 
tence not grammatically consecutive ; as, opcj, opq ravr' cut -)(p6vos, 
eirei fxev erepa, to. be ■nap' fifiap avdts av^wv avw. Time sees, sees 
always, these things ; after adverse events have occurred, changing 
for the better those which immediately succeed: Soph. (Ed. C. 
1453. So e7ret ibv — , bie^eXQovTas be — : Herodot. ii,. 32. enel be 
— eboKov/.iev ovk av aXoytos rw 'Pw/uvXip irpoaa.vafirjvai' — (jkottovvti be 
fjtoi — etpaivero, &c. Pint. Thes. 1. e7ret be irpos Kivvav — , etc b e 
tovtov, &c. Plut. in Pomp. p. 1134. [I. ult.] ed. H. St. See Her- 
mann, ad Horn. h. Ven. 229- p. 107. ad h. Cer. 409. 

'Eireibi) signifies — 1. after, after that, ivhen ; with an indicative 
mood ; as, eireibi] yptstfjievois a/ieivov to airobveadat tov avyKaXvn-eiv 
irai'Ta Ta Totavra etpavw, kcii to ev toIs ocpdaXpols bi] yeXo'iov kfyppvr) : 
Plato de Rep. v. p. 452. v. Eurip. El. 20. Thuc. i. c. 11. and c. 
13. With an optative mood eireibi], like all other similar words, 
is construed, first, if the words contain the thought either of a person 
different from the speaker, or of the speaker himself, but of which he 
speaks as of that of another : i]deXei> elaievai, eireibi] ctvoix^in ' he 
wished to enter when the doors should be opened. So»;0e\oi', /wished, 
may be said. Secondly, if what is signified is not a certain time in 
which something was done once for all, but a repetition of something 
wont to be done ; the reason of which is, that the optative requires 
some one of many things, or repetitions of things, to be contemplated ; 
not one certain and determined, but any one whatever: irepiefxevofxev 
ovv hcaarore €(i>s avoL^deh) to bea/xwTijpiov — . ave^yero yap ov irpui'i. 
Eire ib fj be avotxQeir], ijdfieu napa tov 2wKpar?7 : but when it was 



KULE 2—6.] 'Eirdv, &C. Ill 

opened, we used to go in to Socrates: Plat. Phged. c. 3. [p. 23. 1. 6* 
ed. Bas. l.] With sucli words as ehdews, Ttt-^iara, it signifies, as soon 
as ever: eTreibr) evdews tjoQovto, immediately on their perceiving : Xen. 
Hell. iii. eiretbrf ra^iora eyxpariis eyevero tov apyvpiov, the moment 
he got possession of the money: Deinosth. eTreibr) irpwra toid)v ev 
opeaai \6\onrev, from the time when first — : Horn. II. a, 234. — 2. 
Seeing that, since; always with an indicative mood: eTreibr) Xoyov 
bvvafxis rvy-^avet xj/v^ayuiyla ovva, Plato Phaedr. p. 271. eTreibr) 
TervxriKare biatyepofievio, iEschin. Dial, ii, 13. v. ii, 26". iii, 6. 'ETret- 
bliwep, since truly : eTreibrjTrep o'l y e/jTrpoedev Xoyoi oh irepl tovtov 
boKovai (rot elpr\<jQai, iEschin. Dial, ii, 12. 

'Ettciv is compounded of eVet and av, (see Iliad 5, 412.) and there- 
fore in the Ionic dialect, which puts t]v for av or eav, it hecomes 
kni]v. It signifies time only, after, after that, (postquam) when, 
and, like eneib)), is joined with an optative mood, — 1. when mention 
is made of another's thoughts or sentiments, as in Horn. II. w, 226. — 
2. when those of the speaker himself are mentioned, as in Iliad r, 
208. In direct speech, when one certain act or thing is indicated, it 
must be joined with a subjunctive; as in Iliad to, 716, where dyd- 
ywixt is to be substituted for the common but false reading, ayayoifu. 
See Hermann, de emend, rat. Gr. Gr. ii, 32. p. 263. inav be appua- 
Tj?jua 7i (TVfxj3y,7ravra tcive'irai : Demosth. Ol. ii. [p. 24. 1. 5. ed. Reisk.] 
2ot to yepas ttoXv /xeiSov, eyw b' oXlyov re tyiXov re "Ep^o/i' eywv £tt\ 
vrjas, eirrjv KeKcifiw 7ro\ejut^wv : Horn. II. a, l6S. V. Matth. xi, 8. 
Luke xi, 22. 

'Eiretbav, compounded of eTreibr) and av, signifies time only, ivhen, 
postquam, after that. It is conjoined with an optative mood in the 
same circumstances as eTreibr) and enaV. ottois ovv fir) cnroXrj fiaariyov- 
fievos, eireibav o'ikol e'lrjs : Xen. Cyrop. i, 3, 18. This is said, as it 
were, according to the thoughts of him to whom the words are ad- 
dressed. 

II. (V.) 'EmeiKws, besides its ordinary sense, fairly, moderately, 
signifies — 1. well, thoroughly : tovt\ fiev emeticus av y e£eirloTa(rai, 
Aiistoph. Vesp. 1241. [1249.] [tolerably well, competently, passa- 
%•] 

III. (VI.) — 2. very: teal yap r)v orevbv emeticHs ravrrj, nal bvtrfiarov 
Xuplov: Xen. HeM. v. [pretty, rather, somewhat.] 

IV. (VII.) — 3. conveniently, luckily, or ivholly, altogether : oh p)i> 
d\\' eirteiKus tov&, oirep bvcrfxaj^wrarov eon rwv QiXittttov tt p ay fxcirwv, 
ml fieXTiarov rifiiv : Demosth. 01. i. cela va le mieux du monde. 
[nearly, pretty nearly , fere.] 

Sometimes tolerably well: eirel av£Xafiev eavrbv, ical eirieiKws eu-^e 
to crwfxa : Demosth. speaking of Philip recovering, [ws yap — 6 $paa- 
Twp — aveXaflev avrbv, nal ea^ev eViet/cws to aSifxa : Pseudo-Demosth. 
in Nea?r. p. 1364. 1. 27- ed. Reisk.] 

V. (VIII.) — 4. satis, in a considerable degree: to fiev aZfia ovk 
ehdvs ovbev TTeirovdev, aXX , eTieiKws av^vbv eirifievei -^povov '. but Iflsts a 
considerable time, for a pretty long time: Plato Phaed. 

VI. (IX.) — 5. circiter, about, pretty nearly: Xafifiiivovaiv nZv 
fiev In-new, els tovs eTriXsKTOVs, emeiKws to rpirov pipos : Polyb. vi. 



142 'EntnpooQev, &c. [Chap. VII. § vii. 

This sense Plutarch in Lycurg. expresses by ttov fiaXiara : heal ttov 
fjiaXtara X' Kal p. 

VII. (X.) — 6. candidly, sincerely, without disguise or deceit: 
ovkovv tooovtov [xep hfJ-~ lV *' s T v npoadev ireirepapTai' o yup err/xep, ewiei- 
kws wfxoXoyqrai : Plato Alcib. i. [for we have pretty nearly agreed 
as to what we are ; for we have come to a tolerably satisfactory con- 
clusion as to what we are.] 



SECTION VII. — ON THE ADVERBS eiri-rrpooBep, elye, fj, ft, (WITH 
THE PARTICLES ANNEXED TO THEM,) AND »/§»/. 

Rule I. 'EirlTrpoaBep elvat, with a dative, is the same as eiwrpoa- 
6e~tv,z i. e. to obstruct the light, or the view of an object ; and gene- 
rally, to obstruct, to stand in the way of : eotice itavTt\ ^aXevbv elvai, 
Kai bvaBfjparop ioTopla raXrides, otuv ol fjev varepop yeyopores top ypuvov 
eiriTTpoaBev ovra. ttj ypuaei tuip irpuy/uaTwp e^iocn : Plut. in Pericl. 
'EniTrpoadev is used also in signifying preference : tt)p ihiav eyBpav 
eKinpoaBep "Koieiv too tu>v oWmp eva^ij/xopos, to pay more regard to his 
own private enmity than to the glory of others: Polyb. E. L. 74. 
to twv fiaaiXewp XvnireXes eTriirpooQev yiveoBai too Ibia trvfifepovTOS, 
that the king's interest was preferred by him before his own: Id. 
ib. 41. 

E£ye, composed of el and ye, is a word of approbation or com- 
mendation : evy kiroiy)uas avajurycras fxe, you did well to remind me: 
Plat. Phaed. c. 4. eiye, on f.ie virefivrjaas : it is lucky that you put me 
in mind: Thecphr. Ch. irepl XaXtds. In Aristoph. Strepsiades, 
on hearing that he ought to call a hen aXenrpvawav, exclaims, 
aXeKTpvaivav l evye, vri top 'Aepa ! excellent, by the Air! Nub. 667. 
It is sometimes used ironically ; as by Socrates to Callicles, who 
praised a life overflowing with every kind of pleasure : evye, w /3eXrtore* 
biareXei yap tiowep ijp^w, &c. well done ! bravo ! in Plato Gorg. 
p. 494. 1. 24. 

Ewre (yvre Ionic) signifies — 1. as; just as: icapiraXifitos avehv 
TroXtijs aXos yyvr 6\iiyXr), Horn. II. a, 360. v. II. y, 10. <f>, 9,37- — 2. 
when, h after : Kq,rrBXu~iatv e^aipes, evre ae icai tovtwp juoTp' eireflaXXev 
exeiv. Theogn. 356. v. Hes. Op. 430. 448. 564. Theogn. 840. 

II. (II. III.) 'TI is — 1. a disjunctive particle : 6.XX' J) 7rcipa<f>poi>e7s 
ereor, 7} KopvfiavTiys : either — or: Aristoph. Vesp. 8.' Traoa pep av- 
Qpwirov i^«x') (pvaei reQearai to. ovra, rj ovk av -f/Xdev els robe to cwov : 
otherwise it would not have come, &c. Plat. Pheedr. p. 249. *7 beipop 
ye av e'irj, otherwise it would be a very hard or grievous thing: 
Demosth. adv. Boeot. — 2. expressive of deliberation or doubt : /uep- 

s See Toup on Longinus, § 32. — J. S. in giorno, come la neve al sole, si consu- 

h Evre x i ^> v &s tis KaT€TareeTo,Theocr. mava. Decam. Giorn. 10. Nov. 7. — J. S. 

Id. vii, 76. a simile borrowed from Ho- * *H Kal Kara yrjv,?) teal Kara 6d\ao-<raP 

mer ; &>s Se x i ^ v Karar-finer' ev anpoirS- kffffaiBrivai, if) koI kot' a/x^Srepu : Herodot. 

\0KTif opeaffip, — dis rrjs rfjKero na\a ira- vii. — J. S. 

pyjia ; Od. r, 205. So Boccac : " di giorno 



Rule 1—3.] *H, &c. 143 

ju»/p<£e 5' C7re«ra Kara typeva teal Kara dvfxbv, T] Trporepu) Albs v'tbv epty- 
bovTroio biwKot, rj oye rwv irXeovwv Avkiwv curb Qvfibv eXoiro : whether — 
or: Horn. II. e, 671. (This form 7) — rj is almost peculiar to epic 
poets; Attic writers make ?^ correlative with -nb-epov or el preceding.) 
TJjs Troias fiepibos yereadai rijv noXtv efivvXer' civ ; Trorepov rijs ovvai- 
rias ru>v (TVfxfDefiriKOTbJV reus "EXXtjai Kaicuiv, r) rrjs irepiojpaKvias ravra 
ytyvbfieva ; whether — or: Demosth. pro Cor. So Xen. Cyrop. iii, 

I, 12. o<ppa bau>fj.ev el erebv KaX^as fiavreverai r)e /cat ovk\, Horn. II. 
j3, 301. Sometimes it has no preceding correlative : ecjs nXovrelv, t) 
irevrira Ttoiels ', Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 12. V v'iet ra fj.eya.Xa abucrj/jiara, 
&c. Plato de Rep. vi. p. 49 1. — 3. Comparative: aXXov tov, rj 
tovtov ye eVeica, eiprjvris vvv e7rifli/aeire ; other — than: Xen. Cyrop. 
iii, 2, \7> arparriyol TrXeioves ?) fieXrioves, more numerous than good : 
Aristoph. Ach. 1077- *H is often thus used without any other word 
denoting comparison ; as, rl bei/ras (underst. a.XXo) rj /nr) 7rdd<o rovro ; 
Plato Apol. 27. biaXeybfxevos rivets Xoyovs (und. aXXovs) rj ovanep 
evda.be: Plato Crit. c. 15. v. Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 0. So [xaXXov is to 
be understood after fiovXeo in Theogn. 145. after rreivij yap in 
Aristoph. Vesp. 1262. after deXurv in Mace, ii, 14, 42. after bebacaiw- 
.uevos in Luke xviii, 14.-' and fie'iZov in Ecclesiastic, xxxix, 11. xli, 12. 
Luke xv, 7. — 4. That is to say, namely, that is: ris av alayjw eirj 
ravrrjs b6£a, rj boKelv y^prifiara nep\ irXelovos iroieladai rj cpiXovs ; Plato 
Crit. c. 3.* — 5. ,V H is sometimes redundant after comparatives. See 
Steph. de dial. p. 28. Koen. ad Greg. Cor. p. 36. Fisch. ad Well, 
iii. p. 351. Toup. ad Longin. § 18. Markl. ad Lys. p. 370. ed. Reisk. 
Erf. ad Soph. Ant. IO77. ed. min. 

*H followed by oh (IV.) is interrogative : 1) ov^ bpas, onrov epyov izpoa- 
rarreis ; Plato/ In composition, r/aet — -f/be or Ibe signify whether — 
or — ; or — or: see Horn. II. t, 105. — o^p" 1 ev yiv&aiags r)/jev debv, r)be 
Kal ai'bpa : that you may clearly discern every one, god or man : Horn. 

II. e, 128. 'Hb'e, preceded by /uev or re, (or. by \xev re together, 
Orph. h. xiii, 8.) or ecu, signifies and: see Horn. II. -q, 379. 1, 99. 100. 
/1, 6l. e, 822. "Httov is either perhaps ; or perhaps: vvv jj.ev ovrtjs 
ovk eyw elnelv. bfjXov be ort rivu>v aicrjtcoa, i\irov ILuncpovs rTjs KaXfjs, i) 
'Avaicpeovros rov oo<poi>, rj ecu <rvyypa<pe(i)v rivutv : either, it may be, of 
Sappho, <tc. Plat. Phasdr. p. 235. "Hroi is sometimes either truly ; 
or truly: it is very commonly followed by f), as in Eurip. Or. 1197. 
On this form, and on r/roi — tfroi, and 7) — >'jroi, which are very rare, see 
Schaef. ad Schol. Apoll. Rh. p. 321. Sometimes nimirum, nempe : 
Horn. II. e, 724. 842. <p, 90. Od. b, 77 . m 

III. (V.) T H, contracted from the Ionic ea or r)a, i.e. r)v, is used — 



J See Hermann's treatise on Ellipsis, yap Sfivvr' ; % a-idapioicriv, tixrirep iv Bv- 

p. 707.— J. S. Savrit? ; Aristopli. Nub. 249. ed. Bekk.— 

4 This has some resemblance to a French J. S. 
idiom in which que is employed: voila m In the last cited passage it is cer- 

une belle merveille que de faire bonne tainly, truly: in the others the affirma- 

chere avec bien de l'argent ! Moliere, tion expressed by it is extremely slight, 

L'Avare iii, 5. — J. S. and intended, perhaps, merely to obviate 

' It may be here added that fj by itself abruptness of language.— J. S. 
is sometimes used in interrogation : 7$ 



144 T H?rou. [Chap. vii. 

1. affirmatively, or for the purpose of asseveration. — 2. interroga- 
tively. — 1. it yjyr)mbs avrjp noXi'rqs y early airaaiv, truly, realty: 
Aristoph. Pac. 909." with other particles: ?] yap, for truly. *H 
yap av (VI.) is a conditional formula, in which >") affirms, yap gives a 
reason, and av relates to a following verb : ovribavolaiv avaaaeis' >) 
yap av, 'Arpeibrj, vvv varara Xwfiyaato : Horn. II. a, 232. r) yap, 
for assuredly (understand, if it were not so, were it otherwise,) 
Xwfii'jaato av vvv varara : you would now have committed an outrage 
for the last time. So, ravra /jev ov tyavep&s irpoaedrji^e ru pi/yuara* ?j 
yap av, vironrevaavres avrov elvat e^Opov, eepvyov : for (underst. if he 
had,) they would assuredly have suspected him for an enemy, and 
have fled: Chrysost. de Provid. ii. T H fju)v is a form of solemn 
asseveration : " tifioaev, ?) prjv wpafciv aboXws rijv elpijvrjv : Xen. H. 
Gr. iii, 4, 6". v. Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 47. 

r Hnov expresses a great assurance of certainty ; as, (VII. VIII.) 
y'jTrov ^aXe7ra»s av rovs aXXovs avdpcjTrovs netaai/jii, on ye [xt]be vfids 
bvvafjai neideiv : undoubtedly I should have great difficulty in per- 
suading others, &C fjirov av, w 'AyXa'iraba, el ye nXaietv erreipufjieda 
ae note'iv, otyobpa av r/fi'cv efie/j<pov : doubtless, o Aglaitadas, &c. 
Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 13. and in the middle of a sentence : el irepl 
rSiv avbpo(j)6v(i)v rwv ybr) Kenpifievwv roaavrn anovb>i yiverai, f/vov irepi 
ye rov pjjre eaXwicoros, fxrire Kareyv(i)a[xevov, rravbeivov ypaQeiv : as- 
suredly : Demosth. in Aristocr. In arguing from what is less cogent 
to what is more so, 7j irov, if what precedes is affirmative, signifies 
much more : (IX. X.) as, el riov a\pv^wv ovbiv eo-0' oaiov iq.v aicpirov' 
■tjTrov rov avOpwTTOV ye ovra uvvaiov /cat beivbv avev Xoyov koi \p>'i<pov 
iroielv eicborov : Demosth. in Aristocr. ortov yap oliciaat rroXets oloi re 
yeyovaaiv, y)rrov (3ovXr)devres impels noXXovs av tottovs roiovrovs bvvrjdelr)- 
fiev Karaayeiv'. Isocr. de Pace. But if what precedes is negative, 
i)nov may be rendered much less: ovbe rovriov em^eXrireov earl rrapep- 
yus' iirrov riov wept rov fiiov ufxeXrjreov : Plut. in Pol. praec. where it 
is equivalent to a^pX^ ye, which is sometimes added to Jjttov in this 
sense. 

2. The second use of >) is interrogative : 7j olv olds re earai — 
ri)v opoiorrira — biayiyvwaneiv ; Plato Phaedr. p. 262. With yap: 
(V.) ii yap, <I) 'I-rnria, ov ravra 7]v a eXeyes ; is it not so, Hippias ? 
Plato Hipp. min. ?) yap eariv ws aXrjduis rijvb' a.(piynevos ^dova ; 
what do you tell me? is he really arrived in this country? and 
is he really come ? Eurip. Or. 736. [729- Pors.] Sometimes uncon- 



" On ?i Btj\ov see Toup on Longin. to you by our mutual love, that T would 

sect. iii. — J. S. rather, so help me God, descend into one 

Not unlike so help me God. "Opens common grave with you, when you had 

5', ovtcos exovcra vp6s ae waizep av olada, done your duty as a brave man, than live 

iwofxvvoi aoi tV «pV ku\ a))v <pi\iav, i) to witness and to share in your disgrace 

u.T\v iy&> fiovheadai &f u.era aov, avdpbs and infamy: so ardently do I aspire after 

ayaQov yevop-evov, kolvtj yrjv iTrieaaaOai all that is great and honorable, as the 

fXttWov ii) £"jjv per' alaxwofievov alaxwo- desert both of you and of myself:" — the 

fxiwr}- ovrws iyi> Kul ae twv KaWlarccv na\ words of Panthea to her busband Abra- 

epaurV f/|fwKa : " nevertheless, great as dates in Xen. Cyrop. vi. — J. S. 
you know my affection for you is, I swear 



§ viii. Rule 1—3.] "Hbt), &c. 145 

nectedly at the end of a sentence: ri b>j obv ovros a/uap-ai>ei, ical 
arexvov notel, XeKreov' i) yap ; must not I? Plato Phsedr. p. 263. 
beivol, ws eoinev, etffi Kara tov cov \6yov, kch iroXvrpoKoi' ?'; yap ; are 
they not? Plato Hipp. min. It is to be observed that 7] yap is used 
in many sentences which take an interrogative form merely for the 
sake of emphasis, as they in reality involve an assertion : Callicl. ouc 
alcxpvrj els TOiavra iiytov tovs Xoyovs, a> Hibxpares ; Socr. ?) yap eyw 
ayto ei'Tavda, & yevva~ie ; i) etcelvos, os av <prj avebr]v ovtw, tovs x a ^? ov ~ 
ras, 07Tb)s a.v \aipwaiv, evhaifinvos eivai ; and is it I, pray, who bring 
them to this subject? &c. Plato Gorg. p. 494. 

"Whri is joined — 1. with a present tense, to signify time fully ar- 
rived : ov fxopov ifiri irapeffriv, a\Xa Kal 7raXa« TrapeXijXvOe : Demosth. 
Phil. iv. v. Matth. iii, 10/ — 2. with a past tense, to signify some- 
thing past at an indefinite time: >; Spa i]br) 7rapi)X9ev, Matth. xiv, 15. 
v. Horn. II. a, 251. — 3. Sometimes it signifies the term of commence- 
ment : icavTevQev fibr) irarayos ffv tu>v aaicibuyv, Aristopb. Ach. 538. 
v. Matth. v, 28. — 4. It designates a remote indefinite past time: r/Sq 
yap nor eyw teal apeioaiv, rieirep vfj.lv, avbpaaiv <bfitXr}(ral before now: 
Horn. II. a, 2(5l. — 5. With a future tense it signifies something about 
to be almost instantly : avrap iywv em vfja doijv icareXevaofjiai ijbrj '. 
Horn. Od. a, 303. cf. II. X, ?60. flore is often joined with it 
in denoting a more remote time, and vvv in denoting a less distant 
time.? 

KaXws with a genitive, opportunely ; rijs re yap 'IraX/as KallaceXlas 
(caXws 7rapa7rXou Ke'crat : for it ( Corey ra) is situated commodiously for 
the passage to Italy and Sicily : Thuc. i, 36. In the same sense it 
has a dative with a preposition after it ; rfjs re 'I-uXias teal liiceXias 
KaXios ktyaivero avrols y vijaos ev TtapairXi^ neladai : lb. c. 44. 



SECTION VIII. — ON THE ADVERBS fxaXXov AND fjiaXiara. 

Rule I. MdXXov be is a correctional form; or rather: as, 7]v 
Tta~Ls, jxaXXov be fieipatdatcos. In this sense, to make the expression 
more emphatical, <«u is often added : amxvTwv to d£/w//a, H]v r/ye/uo- 
riav, Tr/v kXevBepiav, -nepieiXeTO, paXXov be ical ras TroXireias, oautv 
j/bvvaTo : Demosth. de Cor. p. 321/ 

II. With del it signifies more and more ; as npovx&pei icad 1 rj^epav 
del fidXXov. v. Tibull. i, 8. in fin. Hor. Carm. Sec. 67. 

III. It is sometimes superfluously added to a comparative: ttoXv 



p Plut. in JEmil. Paul. p. 471. 1. 20. turbulent audacity in Metilius.— J. S. 
ed. H. St. — J. S. r Lucian uses fxaXiOTa for /xaWov : 

? MeTiAios <5 Siifxapxos iirl tov $-fifiaros ofei pXv yap ev iraideiq ical aiirbs ilval tis 

Karaaras iSnfJ.7iy6peL, /xeya\wct>v tov Mi- Sdl-eiv, airovlirj <rvvcavov/j.evos ra KaWiara 

vovkwv, tov Se QafSiov KaTTiyopZv ov p.a- tSiv Pi$\la>if. — fiaKiffra Se aide to. K<i\- 

haiciav, ouS' avavSplav, a\\' ^5rj 7rpo5o- \i<rra wvy,a\\a Trio-reveis rots ws erv%ev 

trlav : Plut. in Fab. Max. p. 325. 1. 28. tttaivovirt: Adv. Indoct. p. 536. A. ed. 

ed. H. St. Here it is not so much the Salmur.— J. S. 



maturity of time that is signified, as of 
Viger. 



146 Mu\iW, MaXtora. [CtlAF. VII. 

pdXXov erotfiorepov, IsfCUS. KpelrroP elvai reOvuvai fjtdXXov, Isocr. Hel. 
Laud. p. 41 7- So in Latin, potius malo, Cic. and Corn. Nep. v. In- 
terpr. ad Justin, iii, 2, 7. 

IV\ YlavTos pAXoc is a very strong affirmation ; unquestionably, 
beyond all doubt : s eon yap, e(j>r), w$ epol boKel, irai'Tos fxaWov ovrvj : 
Plato Phaed. C. 17- tmvtos paXXov llpa ^v^*/ addi'urov /cat uvojXeQpov '. 
lb. c. 56. ij nat'Tos fjtaWnv ovrws e\ei, uonep rore flfuv eXeyero; Plato 
Crit. c. 10. and in answer, iravros ye fxaWov : Id. Phaid. c. 11/ 

V. MaXAo*' is often defective after certain verbs, when rj alone 
follows them : u as, fiovXofjal oe inrievai, y itapovra pa8vpe~ii'. And so 
after BeXio. redvavat vopi£ovoa XvotreXe'tv T] $rjv ; Andocid. Or. de 
Myster. p. 62. ed. Reisk. It is elegantly construed with the genitive 
of the participle beov : paXXov toD beovros, more than is Jit : Plato 
Gorg. p. 4S7. 

It takes ri after it : ecpvXdrrnnei' civ &oirep to dpyvptov, teat fxdXXav 
Ti; and somewhat (i. e. in some degree) more:' /Eschin. Dial.de 
Virtut. 

VI. Of fxaXiora it is to be remarked — 1. that to. pciXtora signifies, 
especially, principally, chiefly.™ 

VII. — 2. MaAtara, especially with numerals, signifies nearly, pretty 
nearly, almost exactly ; as, ev TeooapaKw-a paXiora ij^epais, Time, 
ii.* In this sense the enclitics 7tjj, ttov, toi, ttws, are frequently joined 
with it. See Wessel. ad Herodot. viii, 65. p. 647. 

VIII. — 3. MaXiora fikv and el be pf) are often used correlatively ; 
when pdXio-a fxev relates to what is sought or required in the first 
place, and preferably, el be uri to what is considered only as next 
best to that : onws fxaXiora pev virepj3aXe~iode icai ijpds Kal rovs trpooQev 
evKkeia' el be pi), 'lore, a»s vpiv, ai/ pev viKwpev vpds apery, >/ v'iKr\ 
aloyyvr\v tyepei, ij be firra, eav ijrriopeOa, evbaipoviav : Plato Menex. 
p. 247.^ 

IX. — 4. MdXiora, sans faute, without fail; enl be~nrvov, olpai, 
icXrjdels es n)v voTepaiav, pdXiora i\lfa, e<pi] : Lucian, in Charon. 

cra<pa>s. ov prjv a.X\', el rovro rowvrSv 
eon ra. pdXiora, however, even if it is 
ever so certainly so as he says, o vS/tos Se 
Xeyei ravavria, &c. Demosth. in Androt. 
p. 595. 1. 9. ed. Reisk — J. S. 

x MoAiffTa avpiravra ravra. els efifio/i-f)- 
Kovra pvas irapaZeSwicaoi : Demosth. in 
Aphob. i. p. 815. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. rovrwv 
rrjv rip)]V airoarepet pe, paXiora raXav- 
tov : Demosth. in Aphob. ii. 839, 19. — 
J. S. 

v After el Se pr], one would have ex- 
pected something of the following pur- 
port, " that you may at least equal us and 
them." An example more obviously ap- 
propriate is in Demosth. de Cor. napa- 
naXecovciv avrbv, paXiora pkv rfyv vrpbs 
rjuas opSvoiav Siarrjpuv Kal ras ovvQ-i)Kas, 
el Se prj, irpbs TO fiovXevoaodai Sovvai 
Xpivov ii) ir6\ei : p. 282. 1.18. ed. Reisk. 
also in Demosth. in Mid. p. 5G4. 1. 3. ed. 
Reisk.— J. S. 



s This appears to be the meaning in 
the anonymous example of Viger, iravrbs 
fxaXXov irapa. tovto 7] vikt] juefl' i)p.S>v ye- 
voit av, which he translates, hoc modo 
fucilius qvam alio quolibet, &c. I think 
he should have translated it thus : hoc 
modo, certo certius victoriam consequi 
poterimus. — J. S. 

' Tco ovtl yap iravrbs u.a\\ov ra, ye pi\- 
para ovk e^efxadov rr)v pevroi oiavoiav 
oX e ^ 0v aTrai/Tcoy — Sieipi : Plato Phsedr. 
p. 196. 1. 6. ed. Bas. 1. really ; I assure 
you. — J. S. 

u See Hermann's treatise on Ellipsis, 
p. 707.— J. S. 

v Hoogeveen translates it adhuc magis ; 
that, according to Hermann, is not the 
signification ; but he does not say what 
is. I have given what appears to me to 
be the meaning. — J. S. 

"* In another sense : iyh Se otopai p\v 
oiixi Xeyeiv avrbv raArjOrj, paWov Se oiSa 



§ ix. Rule l.] Mera#. 147 

X. — 5. It is often joined with the dative plural of the article, and 
preceded or followed by bfioiws, to signify equality as to something 
superlative: eivovv eve evprjarere rw rrXriQei rols fiaXtcrd' oLioiws, you 
will find me as hearty a friend to the people as those who are most 
so: Demosth. de reditu suo, p. 1473. 1. 11. [ed. Reisk. Epist. ii.] 
So on the contrary rols tJKiura b/uoitus, or bfxoiws ro'ts rJKitrra, equally 
with those who are least so, may be said. Nearly the same is ex- 
pressed by us ovbkv xpfifia : see C. ill. § xiii. R. 4. A phrase of a 
similar import is ev ro'ts fiaXtora, as, ev rots fxaXtara aotpos eanv, he is 
among the wisest. MaXtara however is not construed with ev ro'ts : 
the phrase is to be understood thus, ev rots roiovrots ovat naXttrra 
rotovros : for where a declinable superlative is used, we find it in the 
case and gender of the noun to which it relates, 2 as ev rots wpwroi 
be 'Adrjvaloi rbv mbrjpov Karedevro, Thuc. i. 6. And 70ts, it seems, 
is to be considered as neuter, since it occurs with feminine nouns 
also: rijv btciXetcrov aKptfiovva (?; Xefys 'laoKparovs) ev ro'ts iruvv (a 
superlative is not indispensable in 1he phrase) rrjv koivtiv Kal avvrjdea- 
TaT-qv, Dionys. Hal. de Isocr. 2. The sense of the phrase therefore 
is, among the things which are such, eminently or chiefly such. 
The following are examples : to lepov rovro ev ro'ts fidXtara ap^a'tov, 
Paus. in Ach. p. 403. volios ovros TleptrtKos ev rots fxaXiara i/7r' uvtuiv 
^vXarroiievos, M\. V. H. i, 31. Kal ov% rJKiara 'Adrjvattov ae, aXX' ev 
ro'ts fiaXitrra : Plat. Crit. c. 14. ev ro'ts fxaXwra. 'AOrjvaiwv eyib wlio- 
Xoyr}Kbjs rvy^uvu), lb. "Ewk parous epaarijs wv ev rols {xaXurra rwv Tore, 
Plato Symp. c. l. a 



SECTION IX. — ON THE ADVERBS fxeratv, fiixpt, priv, fxbvov ov, 
fiG)V, vat, vyj, vvv, ot, oiixot, olye, bfiov, bfjtws. 

Rule I. Mera^v is elegantly joined with participles in any case, 
with the signification of inter and gerunds in dum in Latin, and of 
while, during, in the middle of, &c. in English : fxeratv iraa^utv ev, 
"KoXe/ne'tv irpbs avrbv eneyeip-qce : while receiving kindnesses : Isocr. in 
Evag. p. 396". ebdvs e^avaaravres fxeratv betirvovvres : in the middle 
of supper: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 284. ed. Reisk. rt's civ eir/ rotovros 
larpbs, bans ru> vonovvrt (Jtera^v acQevovvri fjtrjbev ovfiflovXevoi ', during 
his illness: JEschin. c. Ctes. p. 306. 1. 28. KXetros — bv <xu rw 
boparth) bieXaaas fxeratv betirvovvra e<p6vevaas, Lucian, Dial. Alex, et 
Philipp. 

Mera£v Xoyuv (in its common signification inter dicendum, during 
talk, while talking,) is sometimes a propos, by the by: ctXXa 



2 The scholiast however explains eV 145.) irepl rlvuv xph fid\urra marevuv 

rols hy ev tovtois, p. 11 . I. 4. ed. Bekk. $ irepl uv '6 re 0ebs avaipei, Kal no\\o?s tS>v 

— J. S. 'EWrjvcev (TvvSoku— ; Isocr. Paneg.p. 110. 

Add that ixaKiara appears to be used 1. 1. ed. Battie. — J. S. 



sometimes for paKkov : (see note r, p, 



US Mexp*. [Chap. vii. § ix. 

fierulv Xoytov, -ires elaiv ot woXe /.louvres tKelvoi ; Luciau, ill Charon. 
So in Mort. Dial. t. i. p. 27 1. in fi»- arap, J trulpe, fuera^v \6yuv, 
dp' ov robe })i' ro berbpov, t(/>' on-ep >'/ye$ ?//^a$ ; Plato Phanlr. p. 230. 

II. Mera£v, w?7/t ; /uera^u row ^uvarov ro (jurerov ey^ovres, Plut. in 
Thes. p. l. [p. 4. I. 5. ed. H. Stepli.] 

To fiera^v oafi&arov, the following or next sabbath : Acts Ap. 
xiii, 42/ 

III. (III. IV. V. VI. VII.) Mexpt and a X pt, (which latter, according 
to Eustath. p. 1062. 1.52. is derived from /iexP«>) before a consonant, 
pe%pis and c'l^pts before a vowel, (Mceris says /ue^pt and a^p* without 
a are Attic,) are used in signifying the extreme or furthest bound or 
limit of things ; as, /j*XP 1 rou ^aporTos, until the present time ; pexP 1 
Tiros ; till when ? k^^iaaaQe, tovs /ut"X ot n &*" re Kai TerrapaKOPra krwv 
avrovs efjifiaiieiv : that such as were under forty -Jive years should go 
on board in jierson, and not serve by substitutes: Demosth. Ol. 
iii. a XP l r '? s OaXdoarjs, as far as to the sea ; to. irepl to aw/xa fxey^pi 
Xoeias ti)s \lvyfjs TrapaXu/jifidveiv, so far as they may be requisite for 
the benefit of the mind, and no farther : Epict. c. 46. fteXP 1 7C " 
biKaiov, as far as the rules of justice allow: Thuc. iii, 82. pex? 1 
tov fiwfxov <piXos, to the utmost length allowed by religion ; ex^p/jae 
fieXP 1 ju^rpw'ou (povov, he went the length of murdering his mother: 
Herodian i, 3. ft^XP 1 "? s K( ^l Jlr l s T ^i s eavrov 'EXXtjiukci bpav, to observe 
Greek customs even to the cutting off his own hair ; iElian vii, 8. 
/uexpts fjfjiov, to our time : pexP 1 T) i s ^ W '7 S > 1° ^ ne en d °f ltf e » F^XP 1 
tov Xoyov, or tov Xkyeiv, as far as words go; fxexpts ov > until: 
v. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 35. iii, 5, 27. Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 118. ed. 
Reisk. eyeveTO be i] biwtis pexP 1 ^pos to. oprj, quite to the mountains : 
Arr. de Exp. Al. c. 6. /care&iu>£a^er axpi Trpbs tovs (ptjXeous, Luciau 
V. H. i. f*exP ls ^ ws eyerero, until it was morning: Plato Symp. 
p. 220. I^xpi- ttov Kul eTTibaKpvaat, even to tears ; fikxP 1 & ev P°> quite 
hither, as far as this ; juexpts ei'Tai)6a, hitherto, to this place ; fiexpts 
exOes, until yesterday ; juexP" 'Iva \pavcreie, until: Callim. in Dian. 
28. ^XP l ^oppu), a long way, to a great distance, or for a long 
while : i*exP L ^painr, until the day before yesterday : Synes. ^XP l 
alj/xepov, until to-day. 

Mexpt, while, as long as: ^XP l h^ oXiya i]biKov{xriv vtto tovtovi, — 
ov fiapews e<pepov : Luciau, Jud. Voc. f*exP l F-^ v krriboE,os i)v bfjuos 
'iva xetpororr/iretv, Plut. Publ. It signifies duration also in juexpt 
fxev ovv tivos £7re7xe tov vearlaicov f) tov vrarpbs fivi]/J.r), during some 
time, for a while : Herodian i, 8. 

Mexpt, except: t&v aXXwv i\br) juexpi rin&v bovXevovTO)v, Thuc. 
p. 18. I. 3. ed. Camer. ; but the signification of the word in this 
passage is easily reducible to the first head. 

(VIII.) Between fi.exP LS an( ^ a genitive, ov is sometimes added 
redundantly : pexpis ov Tpoirewv twv depwewv, until the summer sols- 



8 On this passage of the Acts Cappellus same sense. Add, that jxeralv appears to 

cites Joseplius de Bell. Jud. vi, 6. and mean afterwards in Plutarch, Moral, vol. 

De Dieu cites Clemens Rom. in his Ep. i. p. 960. !. 13. and p. 961. 1. 2. of Wyt- 

to the Corinthians, as using /uera£u in the tenb.'s ed. in 8vo. — J, S. 



Rule 2, 3.] Mt)i-, MdXts, &c. 149 

t ice : Herodot. ii, 19- fc' a * t" 1 ' tovtio t<5 Trvpyu dXXos nvpyos lirifte^tfkf, 
Kal erepos fiaXa exl rovru>, h*XP is ov oktoj nvpyiov : as far as eight 
towers, to the amount of eight towers: Herodot. i, 181. In such 
passages the writer appears to have changed, iu going along, the 
mode of construction with which he set out : intending e. g. to say 
pe^pis ov oKrib irvpyoielirl, for the last three words he afterwards, with 
greater hrevity, substitutes oktu> vupyiav. 

It is to be remarked that jxexpis does not occur in the tragedians : 
see Hermann's preface to the Hec. of Eurip. p. liv. c 

Mijv is — 1. confirmative; auxppwv fxi)v o ye toiovtos, (the true 
philosopher, who bestows all his care on his mind,) kcu ovbafxfj fiXo- 
Xpr][.iaTos, Plato de Rep. vi, p. 485. Orest. cat fir)v rob' epfas, bis 
Oavelv ov yaZo^m. Pylad. a\\' oib' eycb prjv: Eurip. Or. 1116'. 
— 2. adversative : boKe'i debs uev avrjp ovba/xuis elvai, de'ios fiijv : Plato 
Sophist, c. 1. and it is opposed to /je»' in the same chap. [p. 96. 1- 13. 
ed. Bas. 1.] 

MoXis usually signifies, scarcely, ivith difficulty: whence it is 
joined with other adverbs of kindred meaning ; as, ayairrjTws cat 
fi6\is, aicpifluts teat fxoXis, on which see Bast, and Schaef. ad Greg. Cor. 
p. 169. s. Next, it may be rendered at length: fiiaodels ttoXXcl kciv- 
Tifias, fxoXis eBvaev avrr'iv : Soph. El. 575. Then, for a little 
while; a\\', w yepaie novs, eirioTtevaov fibXis : Eurip. Troad, 1275. 
[perhaps, although with difficulty.'] 'laws yap Sc fioXts -Kpofiaivova 
V TV X T l> Graty KaAws: Eurip. El. 402. Ov fioXts is, non parum ; 
not a little, very, quite: 8eXovuav ov poXis icaXels, Eurip. Hel. 341. 
v. jEschU. Ag. 1091. Eum. 867. 

Movop ov, or fiovovov, and fibvov ovyl, or fiovovovyi, signify very 
nearly, all but: ovs cv [xovovov irpoaicvve'is, Aristoph. Vesp. 514. 6 
— Kaipos fiopoyov^l Xeyei (pwvijv cupiels, Demosth. 01. i. 

Muc, compounded of ^uj) interrogative, and ov\>, (or the Ionic 3>v,) 
is an Attic particle of interrogation, in Latin an forte? It is occasion- 
ally joined with each of its component parts, with /uj) pleonastically ; 
and commonly, though not always, the questions asked with it, as 
well as with juj), involve a negation : ri be ; ol ry\v ijbovriv ayaBbv 
opiz.6fievoi, fjitov fir/ ri iXarrovos irXavr)$ efinXeoi twv erepiov, ?) ov Kal 
oiroi avayicagovTai b/ioXoyelv ayaOa elvai Kal Kara rai/ra ; again : are 
they, who define good as being pleasure, involved in at all less error 
and inconsistency than the others? or are not they also obliged to 
confess the very same things to be both good and evil? Plato de Rep. 
vi. p. 505. c. [p. 432. 1. 49- ed. Bas. 1 , d ] eav be Lv evl eyyevrirat abiKia, 
fiwv yu») aTToXe'i rr]v avrf/s bvvafxif, ?i ovbev y\Trov e£et ; M.t]bev t\ttov 
eyerw, tyr/ : will it lose its force? Plato de Rep. i. p. 351. and with 



c Add &XP IS > quite, entirely : aficpoTepa avu&aivei Si] avrols, oJ/xai, 5no\oye7>' aya- 

Se Tevovre Kal oorea \aas avails &xpts 6a. elpai Kal kuko, Tama. This I mention 

air7]\oiir)<Tey, Horn. II. 8, 522. Ka06\ov, because Hermann professes to give the 

Schol. — J. S. passage entire, remarking that Zeunius 

d Where the latter part of the passage had taken it from Hoogeveen in a mu- 

stands thus, 3) ov Kal ovtoi avayitd^oi/rai tilated state. — J. S. 
SfioKoyuv ydovas thai KaKas; 2<p6dpaye. 



150 Ncu. [Chap. vii. § ix. 

oh: rl \pfiv 7roi€~tv e/xe; iiwv ov% oirep evotovv ', Plato Ep. iii. p. 31 6. 
In the following verse it is joined with its second component pari, 
and the question, like the foregoing examples, is figuratively nega- 
tive: fxHiv ovu boKels aov tppovriaai n'c' ayye\u(' ; Eurip. Androm. 81. 
In the Eq. of Aristoph. /iwc without any other particle is used in a 
question which indicates an inference which might be drawn from 
something preceding, but which is not so drawn because the premises 
are not believed, and the question therefore implies a negation, and 
is in fact answered in the negative: Demoslh. ot/uot, rt nor eo-0', on 
cavrov ov cpys alxov ; tyveibevat ri fioi boKeis cravTw KaXor. iiiLv ek 
KaXwv el KayadiLv : Isiciar. fxa tovs Oeovs, e'tfi e/c irovqpibv y\ vers. 
185. In Aristoph. Plut. 372. an affirmation is implied in the ques- 
tion ; fiihv oil KeicXo(pas, dXV rip-rraKas ; and in Eurip. Hec. 754. the 
thing is affirmed about which a question is asked with puv, as in 
iEsch. Suppl. 309. with ]xi\. 

Nat, yes, is — 1. an affirmative answer to a question. And when 
the question is merely figurative, va\ assents to the affirmation or to 
the negation implied in it, as the case may be, and echoes the senti- 
ments of the interrogator: ovkovv opduis, e<pnv, w 'Abeifxavre ; Na), t)b' 
os : yes, rightly : Plat, de Rep. v. p. 44.9. ^v^v b' avrr/v avbpei- 
otcitijv ical (ppovt/xioraT^v fJKiar av ti el,wQev iraQos Tapd^eie re ical aXXm- 
waeie; Nat: yes; it is so; the soul cannot be disordered and 
changed by external agency: Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 3S1. — 2. an ex- 
pression of assent to what has been said without interrogation : eVei- 
bav toLvvv eiairaT&VTes viias Xeywtrii', o»s 7rpoayeypmrTai ev rw vofxa) 
e^elvat oT€(j)avovi>, eav i^r)<pi(jr)Tai 6 bijfios, airoixvr\iiovtveTe avrols virofia- 
Xelv' vai : /Eschin. adv. Ctes. p. 281/ And of affirmation or en- 
forcement of one's own words: vnl, vai, Tev^eo bwiia, kvov — : Cal- 
lim. in Cer. 64. — 3. of obtestation, supplicating, enjoining, conju- 
ring: vai epx ov t Kupte 'Irjaov, even so, come, Lord Jesus : Rev. xxii, 
20/ vai, abeXfe, kyw aov dvaiLtrjv kv Kvpia : yea, brother, &c. 
Philem. v. 20. — 4. of affirmation in an oath: as, rot /ua Am, Plato 
Euthyphr. c. 5. v. Horn. II. a, 235. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 27- When 
any thing is denied with an oath, ov is substituted for va\, as, ov 
jua yap 'AiroXXwra, Horn. II. a, 86. So that vai is no essential 
part of the oath, nor is it in itself juratory.^ — 5. of concession, fol- 
lowed up by an objection introduced by aXXa : vai, tyrjaiv' aXXa to 
roii KetpaXov tcaXov, to /jrjbejjiav ypafijv (pevyeiv : Demosth. pro Cor. 
p. .3 10/' — 6. The assent or affirmation is sometimes strengthened by 

€ The assent in this passage is followed vai is Doric for v)], as in Aristoph. Lys. 

by a qualification : virofiaAelv, Not, efye ere 81. 893. as it is also in vai Aia, and 

ris &AA.?} trSXis GTe<pavo~i' el Se 6 otj/xos 6 vai rbv Ato/cAe'a, the words of a Megaren- 

'A6r)va(wv, airoSiSeiKrai aoi, &c. p. 437. sian in Aristoph. Ach. 767. 774. — J. S. 
1. 11. ed. Reisk. See, 5. and the note. h So, km p.01 AeyeTa. ^rj^icrixara. "V?n- 

— J. S. <pi<rfiaTa." Not' a\\' avTidiairAenei irpbs 

f The following is an example from an tovto evdiccs, &c. iEschin. in Ctes. p. 

Attic writer: vaiK.1, vai, Ka-Trja-o, kolt-ijcto, 422. 1. 6. ed. Reisk. and, eVex u paf« ras 

vaiKl, vai, rvydrpiov: Aristoph. Thesm. oiiaias 5 vo/xoderris ras tuv inrevBvvcev, eats 

1184. — J. S. &y \6yov airoScixn tjj iroKei. vai- a\K' effrt 

s In vol Ti> ffiw, (Aristoph. Pac. 214.) tis &vBpwTros, os ovre e'lXrjcpev ovSev twv 

mentioned by Hoogeveen and Zeunius, Snifxoalbiv, &c. Id. ib. p. 414. 1. 6. — J. S. 



Rule 3.] N»), Nv, NDy. 151 

the addition of other particles; as, val by, Horn. II. a, 286. val firjv, 
Oppian, Hal. iii, 482. i. e. ovrws bij, Hesych. 

Ni), though apparently formed from va\, differs from it in never 
occurring either without a case/ or in conjunction with pa, and it 
always affirms, concedes, or asserts: vr/ tov Aia, Aristoph. Ach. 
751. vr) AlaJ Kal tov 'AttoXXoj, Demosth. Phil. iii. vfi rrjv "Aprefiiv, 
(the words of a woman,) k Aristaenet. Ep. xi. vq rovs Oeovs, aXr/dF]— 
epio: Demosth. Phil. ii. 

It appears to be sometimes used ironically : l nXr/v el /ui} tovto 
\eyovrrt, vrj A/a : Demosth. de Chers. [p. g\. I. 26. ed. Reisk.] 

Nv m and vvv are used in poetry only, and appear to signify — 1. an 
indivisible point of time, as in Horn. 11. -^, 485". and e, 311. at once, 
instantly. — 2. illation : -nice b' en ' 'Apyeioiai kukov jSeXos' ol be vv Xaol 
6v7](jkov ewaaovTepoi : wherefore the people, &c. Horn, II. a, 383. 
awcroy vvv avrov, (the gold) /u^6' epa twv nXriviov '. preserve it then — .* 
Eurip. Hec. gg6. [982. Pors.j 

Nvv signifies time either actually present, or bordering on the 
present. Its use with a present tense is so common that there is no 
need of any example: with a past tense its meaning is lately, just 
now; ovkovv onep vvv npovQejxeQa atcexpuadai — anemeov : Plat. Phaed. 
p. 25$. and in this sense bij is often joined with it ; wv vvv br/ eXeyov : 
Id. Phaed. c. 16. v. and c. 19. 22. <&c. Eurip. Heracl. 235. With a 
future, presently, forthwith, immediately : ihttcitov bij ae npoirepovo-t 
vvv ol eniriibeioi, Plat. Phaed. c. 4. cf. Iliad e, 279. John xii, 31. 
Nvvl differs from vvv in no other respect but in being construed with 
a present tense only: Eustath. ad Horn. p. 1840. 

Nvv, when employed in inciting or urging, is joined with the im- 
perative mood: Xeye vvv, Aristoph. Vesp. 30. aye vvv, 'iwfxev : Id. 
Pac. 851. Tridoi vvv, Eurip. Or. 1101. 

It is often placed in contraposition to certain preceding words; as, 
to 7rp\v, Tore, or other particles signifying past time : Eurip. Or. 



* It is without a case in Lucian : x a ~P e > conducting them : Dial. Char, et Menipp. 
3) irdrep 'Epfirj. Mercur. vtj Kal av ye. — J. S. 

Dial. Pan. et Merc. X a ^P € » ^ Ev<popJ3e, m Ni/ is found in many passages which 

^ "AiroAAov, ^ '6 ti av ideAys. Pythag. admit neither of these significations. Eus- 

V7) Kal ffiye : Dial. Menipp. et JEac. tathius regards it as a mere expletive: but 

— J. S. Demetrius Phalereus remarks that such 

i N-J; Ai'a is usually a very slight affir- particles are not to be employed like the 

mation,like truly. See Xen. Mem. iii, 11, chippings and rubbish of masons, barely 

14. iii, 3, 2. iii, 6, 2 and 7. iii, 8, 7. to fill up spaces ; and cites an observation 

iii, 11,3. Longin. § 33. — J. S. of Praxiphanes, (§ 57.) that some of the 

* In Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 3. vr] Ala is little words in question used to be em- 
said by a woman, but it signifies no more ployed with such effect as to produce an 
than truly. — J. S. expression of moaning and lamentation, 

1 It is ironical in Lucian, where Menip- as in tea! vv k' 65vpo,u4voi<Tiv eSu <pdos 

pus, in reply to Charon's demand of his ijeAioio, el fii/, &c. [Horn. II. \f/, 154.] 

fare, says, 6 'Epfiris virep ifiov aoi airo^Tta, This perhaps is a little fanciful ; see Horn. 

8s fie Trapsb'uKe vol : and Mercury an- Od. i, 79. However this may be, it is 

swers, vfy Aia, bvaip.r\v el fxeAAta ye Kal often much more easy to perceive that 

xmepeKTlveiv raiv veKpwv : truly I should be the construction would suffer by the ab- 

in a thriving way indeed, if I am to pay sence of a particle, than to define exactly 

their fares too for the dead, in addition to the effect of its presence. — J. S. 



152 0<, Olye, &c. [Chap. vn. 

1096. to a future tense : ruvra fiev fxoi elaavdts — biriyi'/irri' vvvi be 
-—ireipU) tjcityeaTepov dire'iv : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 7. to el fiev, Eurip. 
Or. 1134. or to et alone, Aristoph. Vesp. 710. cf. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 
3. el yap — vvv b" — : Thuc. iv, 104. John xv, 24. viii, 40. ix, 41. 
xviii, 36*. 1 Cor. xii, IS. xv, 19." 

Ot, a particle of lamentation, is usually joined with a nominative: 
as, o< kyw, Eurip. Or. 1018 and 134-7. seldom with an accusative; 
as, 61 k fxe bei\!]v ! Epigr. cited by Steph. [Thes. Ind. 1524. d.] 

Of 01 and the dative /uot is compounded o'ipoi* woe is me, alas. It 
occurs — 1. without any case following it; as, oifxotl ti b' difioi', 
Oi'Tjrd tqi ■neirovtiapev, oifiot ! Eurip. in Beller. ap. Suid. v. Ari- 
stoph. Vesp. 845. — 2. followed by a nominative : Aristoph. Vesp. 
1145. Plut. 851. 881. 931.— 3. by a genitive : Aristoph. Plut. 389- 
Lncian in Pise. t. i. p. 573. in Catapl. p. 642. — 4. Sometimes 
ip/jot, or rather « /joi, occurs for o'ifiot; as (with a genitive) in Eurip. 
Phoen. 1545. Apoll. Rhod. i, 290. — 5. Mot is repeated: w /tot /not ! 
Ib. 1465.— 6. It expresses joy in Aristoph. Nub. 771. but in the 
mouth of a rustic." 

IV. (IX.) Olye with /8\e7rw, or a word of similar signification, is 
literally, which way, or towards which, I look. In Aristides, olye 
j3\e7r(jt>v, with an eye to which, with a view to which, &c. Panath. 
p. 92. t. i. ed. Jebb.P 

V. (X.) 'Ofj.ov, together, is sometimes nearly, about: bjxov nevra- 
Koaia errj, Dionys. Hal. Ant. R. iii. p. l6'3. 1. 39- erwv bfxov ti 
■xet'TctKoaiwv, Id. ib. viii. p. 530. 1. 18. v. Demosth. adv. Aristog. 
p. 785. 1. 23. ed. Reisk.? 

"0/.io)s is thought by Hoogeveen to be properly the same as 6/uotws: r 
see 1 Cor. xiv, 7. Next it signifies, although, nevertheless, yet, 
notwithstanding: (see Eurip. Or. 679.) and commonly answers to 
kciitoi, Kaiirep, el cat, ws, &c. in a preceding member of the sentence. 
Those particles, however, are often absent ; as, — 1. in a sentence con- 
sisting of one member only ; els to. fxt]bev 001 ^p^aifia, oyuws eic TroWijs 
rrjs ireptovvias ayaXtaiceis : Lucian, adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 115. — 2. when 
a participle goes before : Aa/j.a^os /xev rnvra elnwv, opus irpoaeQeTO 
teal avros rrj 'AXtcifiiabov yvwfirf : Thuc. vi, 50. — 3. when d\\' opus 
follows : Kat yap ot (TTparriyol, <o (j>i\e' d\\' Sfxws to Ke<pa\aiov avrwv 
pabiws av e'Lirots, &c. Plat. Euthyphr. c. l6. in which passage the 

n Add vw[xev\, now truly ; for the pre- 1 'Op.ov, at, near, close to ; iyu> jx\v tfdrj 

sent: tovs dirXlras vvvpevl avzXojxtvovs Kal iraKai vetbs bpov (TTii%oov av %v aoi 

GUittTC amzvai ird\iv, oif/caSe, ffKoirelv 8' o ttjs c/xtjs, et fii], &c. Sopliocl. Phil. 

ti av irpoypdcpoofxev iv rots mvaiciois : Ari- 1218. 'Opov is to be joined with vehs, not 

stoph. Av. 448. — J. S. with trot, for the person indicated by aoi 

* According to Weiske, ofyio: is not a was not to go to the ship with the 

compound word, poi being not a dative, speaker. — J. S. 

but a mere elongation. Pleon. Gr. — r 'Opus, in like manner, equally, to- 

J. S. gether, has a circumflex on the last sylla- 

O'4tot expresses anger also : ofy*', &s ble. See the treatise of Cyrillus or Phi- 

TeOf^let, Aristoph. Ach. 590. — J. S. loponus. 4s pev Uvras aaivei opus oi/prj 

p Whatever obscurity there is in the re Kal ovaaiv uptporepoio'iv, Hesiod, Theog. 

passage arises from olye (which is a rela- 771. eS Se e/caaTa adavdrois Stera^ev 

tive word) referring to something follow- 6/mws, Kal iirecppatie rtpds : Id. ib. 74. 

ing instead of preceding it. — J. S. ' — J. S. 



§ x. Rule l— 3.] "0*rij, "Ow*. 155 

ellipsis, according to Hoogeveen, is as follows: a.XX\ el <ccu no\\a 
jcatK<i\aot ffrpctrriyolairepyaGovTat, ojj.ws,&c. see Plat. Phoedr. p. 240. 
de Rep. ii. p. 365. — 4. when vpu>s be follows : Ceb. Tab. p. 219- 
[p. 44. 1. 5. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] — 5. when o/jios §' ovv follows: 
S/iiios 5' ovv iravra ravra yaipeiv eaaas i)Xdov, Plato Ep. ill . — 0. so 
before ofxias fxerrui, however, which very often begins a sentence ; 
e. g. Demostli. adv. Nausim. p. 991. [1. 21. ed. Reisk.] 



SECTION X. — On otrt), owov, oirws, ottotuv, otciv, ore, ovtw, 
pabiws, tifpa, iraXiv, irep, Trpiv, pa. 

Rule f. (I. II.) "Otttj may be considered as a dative agreeing 
with 6Sw understood. It often answers to tuvty] (bbu, viz.) preceding 
or following; as, to. Trefil Al<vva VTrapfcei rctv-r] ytyvofxeva, oirr/Trep av 
avrbs edeXrjs : Plat. Epist. vii. p. 359. v. Plat. Ep. ad Dionys. p. 315. 
Phsedr. p. 246. orrn av b Xoyos, wanep irvevpa, ^>epjj, tuvtyj Ireov '. 
Plat, de Rep. ii. It may be rendered — 1. in the part where, where- 
soever, in the way in which, where : ony boKul, elae(3aXov els to arpa- 
revfj,a — : Thuc. ii, 100. ov icai ol pvuKes ano(nraona.Ta avcMpvauJai, 
owrj av rv^uai rTjs yi}$: Plat. Phaed. c. 6l. which way : Horn. II. ij, 
507. — 2. whither, whithersoever : ire/japei 6' OTnrtf ere Kpabir) dv/uos re 
KeXevet, Horn. Od. £, 517- ireptayovras orrn av avrai beiKvvwatv, Ceb. 
Tab. c. 6. tovt rfbri, onn aTrofii'iverai, abriXov : Plato Phsedr. p. 3. 
what it will come to, in what it will end. Uo7 and iiiroi denote mo- 
tion towards a place, as iro~i fxoXw ; whither can I go? but -try and 
o-rry signify both that motion towards a place, and also at the same 
time remanence in the place towards which the motion tends, as irrj 
crw; whither can I go and stay? Hence Euripides uses both words 
together : vol., tcqI (pepofxat; i. e. properly, towards what place, to what 
place, am I borne? See Schol. Eurip. ad Hec. 1075. and Hermann, 
ad Eurip. Here. F. 1236. — 3. How; in what way; in what 
respect ; by whatever means ; as, /j.a6e~iv, oiry e^ei : Plat. Phaed. c. 35. 
Xeye, oiry bi) ov% iicaruis, sc. (jmiverai elptjudai : Plat. Phsed. c. 26. enei- 
vov tov KaXov e'ire irapovoia, e'ire Koivutvia, e'ire brry b>) icnl birus rrpovye- 
vofxevt] : Plat. Phred. c. 49. "Ony denotes the means, orrws the manner. 
See Plut. de Anitn. Procr. p. 1023. vvv ae, o-rry re Kal onus e^w, 
TtfxCj : HL\. V. H. i, 38. o-rry av rrapeiKy, ai//o/<tu tov -rcpayfxaros : by 
whatever means it may be practicable or possible. 

II. (III.) "Ottjj ovv or b-rry av, or in one word biri]br]ovv, birnbt'iTrore,, 
or birr)br)TroTovv, is, by any means possible; by any means what- 
ever; by some means or other, whatever they may be ; as, ireipuoofxai 
o-rry ovv to ayBos airoaeiaaoBai. 

III. (IV.) "Ottov — 1. signifies where : yv ft epmq., b-rrov elftl, Xeye 
raXndrj, on en\ ro'is bpiois: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 31. v. Plut. in Public. 
p. 100. in fine. Matth. vi, 21. — 2. whither, the place to which: 
John viii, 21. xiv, 4. and it may be noted here that the Greeks 
are accustomed to put, by attraction, adverbs of motion for those 
of rest: ^wpelv xpeiov °n° L X® oros ^4 >a, ' T£ X^aojxev befxas, Eurip. 

Viger. u 



154 "Oirws. [Chap. vii. ^ x. 

Ipli. T. 118. i. e. as Poison lias remarket!, eKe'tve oirov. See Pors. 
art Hec. 1070. and in another manner in Ipli. T. 113. bpa be y 
t'iatit rpiyXOtfuvv, biroi Kevbv be/aas Kutteu'cn, which Seidler rightly ex- 
plains, oirov Kevov eortv, utire evrnvdui be/jas Kadelvat'. v. Seidl. ad Ipli. 
T. 348. — 3. In argumentation it is, seeing that, since: ijirov uvtos ye 
■jroWa ex ei > orrou "Y e k " f " hP L ^ >v eKc'trrrcj) ronaura bebtoKev '. Xen. Cyrop. 
viii, 4, 31. Kai ri aot toy 'Qpfea f/ rov Neai-floi' Aeyw, oirov Kai K<id' 
il/xus avroiis eyivero tis, &e. Liician, adv. Indoct. t. iii. p. 111. v. et 
p. Il6. and Liician, in Timon. p. 103. — 4. "Qimv /ue» — oirov be, is, 
there — here; in some places — in other places; partly — partly: ar 
ouv ciirb rf/s fiorabos ctp^a^ievoi, roiis btirXaaiovs Kai rptirXuaiovs ev fiepei 
rtdJi/nei', yeryi^ovrai ktna 76 e£i)s, oirov (1 e v {there, i. e. oirov fiev 
btirXaiiovs Ttde/jtev) to bev-epov, urn to reraprov, na\ oyboov' oirov 
be (here) -pirov, Kai evvarov, Kai etKoaroeflbopov : Plut. de Anim. 
Pmcr. p. 1027» XtprQv re yap yeybvaat Kai iroraputi' — oirov fiev 
e K-Xeldieis, — oirov be olov airobpatrets Kai Karabuoets : Plut. de Def. 
Or. T)]v avdpioirivqv aatfeveiar — eKfepoperrjv oirov fiev els betaibut- 
fioiinv Kai rvtyov, oirov be els oXiyiopiav tuip Beiajv Kai ireptcpporrjatv : 
Plut. in Camill. c. 6. extr. Sometimes oirov fiev is not followed by 
oirov be, as oirov fiev — irepl be rets ea^artas, &c. Diod. S. iii, 34/ 

'Oirovovv is, any where: beapbs &a bruovv, Giare fieveiv birovovv, 
irorepos layypoTepos eartv, ctvayKij ?/ eiridvpia ; Plat, in Cratvl. p. 403. 

IV. (V.) "On-ws, derived from irws, signifies — 1. as, in the same 
manner as, accordingly as; how, in tchat manner: prj-eov ao\ — 
ovrws, oVws olds re el: Plato Phaedr. p. 236. V. et p; 228. el elbo- 
ras, on, birtvs oc v/ie7s vvvl irepl avrwv yvuJre, o'utlj Kai rov aXXov 
yjyovov >/ iroXis avro'is -^pr/aerat : Lysias adv. Alcib. i. p. 520. [1. 5. ed. 
Reisk.] birtus eyw irpos belirra, b irapeXr)\vOu)s pov foios uiras fiap-vptov 
av yevoiro'. Lsician, in Lapith. t. iii. p. 434. v. Iliad /3, 252. Ari- 
stoph. in Pac. 131. — 2. in order that, that: eiripeXeladat bet, oirws 
<ru>ai re e&ortat at b'ies, &C. Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 1. oiru/s pev ravra 
eE,ere,epol peXi'iaet: Id. Cyrop. ii, ], 15. 

In both these significations birus, when a thing present is spoken 
of, takes a subjunctive mood after it:' avros aot ^vpirpodupijaopat 
belfat birws av pe bibd£r]s (now) irepl rov baiov, Plat. Euthyphr. C. 13. 
ovk k\ti) eywye oirws e'iiru), I'd. ib. c. 12. See the example from Lysias. 
ravra aot airb iroXXwv oXiya irapeQejirjv, oirws /uadrjs, (now) olov avbpa. 
irapuXnribi', AifiXov eariys '. Lucian, ill Lapith. p. 437- oirtos, a. pev 
iiynOu eart, irotwpev : Xen. CEc. vi, 11. 

When a thing is spoken of as the thought of any o»e, owws pro- 
perly takes an optative ; and that usually after past tenses, because 
then the optative can signify what is past, inasmuch as it indicates 
the thought to have been present at that preceding time denoted by 
t lie past tense : oh% ottojs wfeXy'iaat ri]v iroXtv bieioijOr), d\\' oitojs ri 
Kepbaivoi : Lys. adv. Phil. p. 881. [I. 15, ed. Reisk.] et iraiv iroXvv, 



* "Oirov, in which : ySov 5' virb <pt\op- — J. S. 
viQlas irdvrfs fieKi), tiirov xeAiS&i/ fy ' See Aiistoph. Lys. 384. Vesp. 1525. 

tij 6/x7T€iroiT)/LteV^, v) 7rr)veAoif/, -J) X'h" T< *, — J- S. 
^ irepuTTepa, &c. Arktupli. Av. 1301. 



Rule 4.] "Ottws. 155 

€<j>ri, \povov eaKOTrei QiXoxparris, ottws av apima evavTtwQeit) rfj elpyjvrj, 
ovk av, &c. Demostli. de Fals. Leg. p. 345. ed. Reisk. tovt eirpaTTor, 
— oirws TCt^iara Kal KctKiar airoXoi/j.e6a '. Aristoph. Ach. Jb6. cf. Iliad 
<p, 548. Plat, de Anim. Mund. p. 99. jEschin. Dial, iii, 1. [p. 647. 
1.37. in tiie 1 Basil, edition of Plato.] In the passage cited above 
from Lucian, (Lapitli. p. 437.) if fiaOois were substituted for /jaBrjs, 
the sense would be, that you might ham ; i. e. with the design at 
that time that yon might learn. 

The indicative of the future (as the optative) is construed with 
ottws, when something is to be signified, which is contemplated as 
future at the time denoted by the principal verb. Wherefore that 
tense occurs in construction with a present, and a fulure, and a past, 
tense: eroifxai elatv, eaovrai, i)aar, Trpa.TTf.iv ottws euerai." — 
yjprjpLCiTwv fiev ovz a I (J\v vr) €Tnp.eX<':fieros, onus ooi earai Cos ttXeIct- 
ra : Plat. Apol. c. IJ. fiovXevcro/j e8a nepl rwv tekvwv, ottws otl 
fleXnara it atbevao fxev aiVa : Xen. CEc. vii, 12. eirefiovXeveode 
ottws jui'it ayadov fxrjhev iprjoi & e vde, ttdXXwv re evbeels eaecrOe: 
Lysias adv. Erat. p. 413. [1. 7- ed. Reisk.] cf. Xen. CEc. iv, 
9. Mem. iii, 2, 1. Cyrop. ii, 1, 15. L\s. adv. Erat. p. 416". 
[I. 9. ed. Reisk.] adv. Ergocl. p. 821. [I. 3. ed. Reisk.] Plat, de Rep. 
iv. p. 421. Eurip. Med. 322. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2. ab biiiio. Thuc. 
iii, 4. extr. 

The indicative of a past tense must of necessity be used with ottws, 
when a purpose or design is spoken of, which was entertained but not 
carried into effect: ovkovv iyj>rjv ere FIr/ya<7ov £tii£ai irrepbv, ottws 
tipaivov ruls deuls rpuyiKWTepas : Aristoph. Pac. 135. you should have 
mounted Pegasus, that you might have appeared more grand and 
pompous: i. e. by which being done, you would have appeared, &c. 
but he did not mount Pegasus; wherefore he did not appear more 
pompous. These rules apply to ottws when fit/ is joined to it : £ine- 
firfcrav irpwra piev to, fjiaKpa Tti^r) eXelv 'Adtjrotovs, ottws pr/ eTrij3orjd>i<rw(Tii' 
€K Nt crams 01 YizXoTrovv^aioi : lest, &c. Thuc. iv, 66. aXX' ottws jit) 
oi>X olos t eaofiat, viz. fiXenrear, but I doubt I shall not be able : Piat. 
de Rep. vi. p. SOD."' 

When ottws means as, (sicut,) it properly takes an indicative, but 
in oblique phraseology a subjunctive and optative. 

In the second sense above mentioned, ottws is construed, hut very 
rarely, with an infinitive : bel r/^as TreipaoQai, ottws ws fteXnara to, 
TTponljKOvra biairpa-readdt : Xen. (Ec. vii, 29- cf. Xen. Hist. Gr. vi, 
2, 20. Diod. Sic. t. ii. p. 467. and 408. and Wessel. on the latter 
passage. — 3. (VI.) Before ottws in both senses, opa, or <pp6vTiE,e, or 



"After an imperative, Aristoph. appearing more pompous. Although con- 

Tkesm. 285. after a future indicative, silium cepit would have been a more 

Aristopli. Ran. i 120. — J. S. proper expression than consilium habuit, 

v Trygffius, to whom the words are (the words used by Hermann,) yet there 

addressed in Aristoph. was so far from can be do doubt about his meaning, 

having had any design of mounting Pe- — J. S. 

gasus, that in answer lo them he gives a w Mr) 8ea>v Kivet (ppivas, — ottws pr) aov 

reason why it would not have done. Nor yevos — irav avaarpfyu Ainu) : Aristoph. 

does it appear that he had any design of Av. 1239. — J. S. 



156 'Onorav. [CHAP. VII. § x. 

&ye, is understood, and it takes an indicative of the future after it : * 
ecu ottu>s fxoi fj>) epels, and take care you do not tell me : Plat, de Rep. 
i. to. <r«5\t' oinos be'tei KaXws, Aristoph. Vesp. 1217- See Pint. 326. 
Pac. 1017, 76. Nub. 489. Lysias Apol. p. 24. [I. 5. ed. Reisk.] — 4. 
"Ottos; is used in answers to questions asked with -mos, relatively to 
that word, and instead of a repetition of it: Streps, irws fie yjpff 
KnXeli' ; Socr. oirtos ; t>)v KapboirTjv : how ought I to call it? how? 
why, r))v Knpbo7TT]v : Aristoph. Nub. 677. v. Aristoph. Vesp. 48. 
Thesni. 210. — 5. for ws or on: dW 67710s fiev eyto a^dofiai Tpe<pcov 
v/ias, fjtjb' vKoi'oel-e: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 20. — 6. with a superlative: 
avrol b' avtoKifravQ'' ottios avwrarw, Aristoph. Pac. 206". i. e. aviOKiaarro 
ovrws, oTuos 01 avioTurio avoiKi<E,ovTai, as in Latin, ut qui maxime, &c. 
— 7. (8.) It is put for lireicr], after, after that: 1 ' hj(fjs & ontos fjKov- 
aav, ovbels dpyas 7jv : Eurip. Phoen. 1155. cf. 1464. and Horn. Od. 
b, 109. — 8. (10.) (V.) Oi>x o-uis, ob-% on, ov\ olov, may each be ren- 
dered, sometimes not only, sometimes not only not, and sometimes 
much less ; although properly ou^ onus is ovk epoj oVws, — ov-% on, ovk 
epio on, — and av% olov is ov to'iov olov. See Tyrwhitt. ad Aristot. 
Poet. p. 12S. and Lennep. ad Phal. p. 235. ov yap onus firj to 
awfia vj3pi$ecrdai tivos — ujeade yjnfvai, dXXa Kai, &c. for you not only, 
&c. Demosth. in Mid. p. 386. [p. 518.1. 1 1. ed. Reisk.] ovfnTaons 
tF]s iruXeios koivovs bel yoreas -ovs TrevrjTas yyeladai. Kai TrpocijKei rovroirs 
ov-% owcos, iav r\ ttoXis bibuxiiv, afeXeadai n : [not only not to deprive 
them of any part of what the state gives them, — but, &c. two accu- 
satives after ayeXeadai. Zeunius has mistaken the sense :] d\\' el 
Kai firjbey i\v rovnov, aXXodev aKoixeiv omos firjbevos ovres evbeels trepi- 
otydtjtTovTat : Demosth. Phil. iv. p. 142. [I. 6. ed. Reisk.] dW ovy_ 
vinos vfilv tCov avToft n eirebioKev, (he not only has not, &c.) a\Xa Kat 
tu>v v[X€reph)y ttoXXci vfrjprjrai : Lysias adv. Nicom. p. 862. [p. 863. 
1. 13. ed. Reisk.] So ov% onus ^cipiy avrols e\eis, dXXa fitcrdwaas 
ceavrbv Kara rovnavi TroXtrevn : not only not: Demosth. pro Cor. 
p. 331. in fin. obbe fj.vrjfiovevcreiv lofirjv tov Aia, o^ oirws {much 
less) Kai rrjXiKavTa ayavaKTi]rjeiv : Lucian, Prom. Clytamin. ovkovv 
'OpearrjS Kai av iravcrerov ru.be. Electr. TTeiruvfxeO' fjpels, ov% ottws 
ue TTavcrofxev : nedum ; so far are we from being able to, &c. instead 
of being able to, &c. Sophocl. Ei. 796. — 9. "Ottws with a genitive 
and e^w : ottivs >/ 'Adqvalot bvvaueios, 1) AaKebaifiovtoi e^niev 
rvxvs: prout ; according to the degree of power of the Athenians? 
or of good fortune of the Lacedemonians: Aristid. Or. in Rom. 
p. 352. z 

'Qirorav, ichensoever, when, compounded of oirore and av, is never 
joined with an indicative mood, except in the future. It is construed 

x Xcfrtrccs 7tot' i^afiirpevcro/xei' tovt iiuev J. S. 

Kav8r]\lov, Aristoph. Lvs. 289. Kai rovd' z Add ft-iras, in ickatever manner, in 

Sttojs ix^ tyevcrtTai' ^.rjS' — avaSucrerat : De- what manner soever : iyi> TrapeAriAvOa, 

niostli. Epist. i. p. 1466. 1. 17. ed. Reisk. Tnarevaiv ovk avrbs a£lu>s rav ti/juv irevpay- 

■ — J. S. nevcw elirelv 5w7]creadc,i, aWa to. irpay- 

y MeTa Tavff, ottoos (when) vcpv kyevzW para, '6irws av tls elirri, SiKaia (pafelcdair : 

vlos oiirool, — irepl rovv6/xaros — iXoidopov- Demosth. Prooeiu. p. 1454. 1. 6. ed. 

pedai Aristoph. Nub. 63. ed. Bekk.— Reisk.— J. S. 



RULE 4.] "Orav, "Ore. 157 

- — 1. with an optative, when a thins; is spoken of as the thought of 
some person, and so orav is construed in jEschyl. Pers. 448. Also 
with a past tense of the optative, when a thing is spoken of as having 
often occurred: oirorav yovv avayKaadeirj i-iet', a7roXet<p6evTes 
ttov, — aairelv, ovbev f/crav ol aXXoi irpbs to Kaprepely : Plato Symp. 
c. 35. — 2. with a subjunctive : a fiiadov crpareoovrai, birorav tis abrwv 
benrat: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, J. (WoTav rt tuv e/cet 6/W«aa 'ibaaiv, 
eKtrXi'iTTorrai : Plato Phaedr. p. 250. — 3. with an indicative future, 
Iliad <p, 341. [Hermann observes that in this example fdey&fxat 
may have been put for (pdeylw^xai, the vowel having been shortened 
in Homer's usual manner; as in 1/j.eiperat for IfieipnTui, Od. a, 41. 
and in crrpecperai for p-pe^r/rat, II. fi, 41.] 

"Orav is compounded of ore and civ, wherefore the poets for orav 
commonly say ore Kev v. Iliad t, 498. It is usually construed with 
a subjunctive mood, but with an optative also in the same circum- 
stances as biTOTav. It signifies — 1. whensoever, as often as: aXX' 
orav tis Xeyn, on, &c. Plato Symp. c. 21. v. c. 11. and 13. — 2. as 
long as, John ix, 5. — 3. since, because: fxdXiara orav to juev tuxlgtov 
y rwy ovtwv, Aristot. de Mund. c. 4. This is a very rare signification. 
— 4. It signifies generally and indefinitely, and is answered by Tore : 
orav nepl to <pavTa(T/j.a avrov a.TravTq,v 0d)yuev, — rore Ttorepov -ipevbij oo£d- 
e?etv Tr/v 4 >V X*1 V hpu" <{>i}<rofxev, &c. Plat, in Sophist, p. 240. 

"Ore designates a certain and definite time ; and — 1. it is usually 
construed with a preterperfect or aorist indicative; as, od' rJKo/uev 
Ev/3o«evfft fiefiorjQrjKOTes, Demosth. Ol. i. p. 11. [I. 10. ed. Reisk.] 
ore 'ihev avrov, Athen. Deipn. xi. p. 505. ore be iiyytaev 6 icaipbs, 
&c. Matt h. xxi, 34. — 2: Sometimes with a present : >) vvv, ore ovtws 
6£,€ids oot viraKovu) : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, fj. — 3. With an optative or sub- 
junctive it signifies, whensoever, as often as, if ever or at any time: 
eicaXei be ccti erifia, o~e Tivas 'ibot toiovto tl 7rori]<Tai>Tus, o navTas efiov- 
XeTO TTotelv : Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1, 30. v. Horn. II. c/>, 323. — 4. It often 
signifies, since, seeing that: ore b)) tovto 6 "Epws eauv del, Plato 
Symp. p. 20G. ore to'ivvv tovO' ovtws eyei, Trpoay'jKei irpoQvpiDS eQeXeiv 
iiKoveiv : Demosth. Ol. i. [p. g. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] — 5. 'Ore fiev, ore be, 
are put for itore pev, ttots be, at one time, at another time: ov yap 
ore jutv aXXois, ore be aXXots, ueyuierat reus yv>(als 6 iraph tov deov 
■Xpvaos, 6.XX' del ~o~is avrols : Aristot. Polit. ii, 5. v. Apoll. Rhod. 
i, 1270.* And in the same sense, ore p.ev, aXXoTe be, Iliad X, 64. 
cf. II. a, 599- and -ore fiev — uXXotc be, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 20. and eV0' 
ore, — ore, Soph. Aj. 56. and rore — dMore, Soph. El. 739- Some- 
times ore jiev is omitted before ore be, as in Iliad p, 178. and also ore, 
or rore, or aXXore, before aXXore, Soph. El. 752. Trach. 11. Eurip. 
Hec. 28. — 6. "Ore /jij is put for el /u?), unless, except : Horn. 11. v, 
319. 7T, 227. Od. ir, 197. 

'Oirine signifies — 1. forasmuch as, seeing that, since, with an indi- 

See Aristopli. Plut. 567. Ljs. 770. xP^lt laT ' iirpdrTetrBe' rore 5' &s irapaZ6vTo$ 

— J. S. dt&Kere : Demosth. in Nausiui. p. 989. 1. 

* So tots /xev, rorh Se : rore f.iev yap, 6. ed Reisk. — J. S. 
us ovk o.iroStddi'Ti, S'ikols £\ayx<LveTe, *c«l 



158 Ouoi/Vybivos. [C» AP. VII. § x. 

cative mood : inr/ire npiis lijj.Cu ?j\0es trpeo-ftevinv, Xen. Anab. vii, 7, 6. 
oicvre ye naiTes vapaKaXovai pie, &c. Id. Symp. iv, 15/- 2. whenever, 
as often as, with an optative, especially of t he present tense ; d (more 
be \pey6vTu>i> J) eiruwovvrtav thus ctKOvoi, ov% j/rror yero unraptat'Odveiv 
raiis tuiv \ey<ivru)y rponuvs ?) nepi wv Xeymev '. Xen. A^es. xi, 4. — 3. 
AvriKu — 07T(Jre ar, as soon as ever: uvtiku [xuXa TtapeaovTai, owure av 

KpaTwoi : Xen. Cyr. iv, 2, 37. 

V. (VII.) Ouru), or uutois, even before a consonant, then at last, 
then and not before ; e Trpoo-ev^'i/ueiui Oeuls, — h'vtu> btefiauov to. vpia: 
Xen. Cyrop. ii. init. 

VI. (VIII.) The meaning of uv.ht is often rendered less determinate 
by the addition of ttws or -kov ; as cjru> thus, in some such manner as 
this ; nearly in this manner. 

VII. (IX.) T/js7s be (tv-u> ttws drev itp(\y]xdrwv Xaptfie'ivere eh tcls 
copras, so ohne Umst'unde : [but you receive the public money simply, 
unconditionally , without rendering any service in return :] Demosth. 
i. Philip, [p. 14. I. 28. ed. Reisk.] (See note g in the following 
page.) 

VIII. (X.) Ovrws in some phrases, as in ov-ws ovaio, e. g., is used 
in a sense similar to that of the Latin made animo, having reference 
however to what precedes ; as, ovrws ovaio avye rr/abe rrjs tyiXoirovias, 
courage ! go on and still further increase this diligence and in- 
dustry If 

IX. (XI.) It sometimes answers to c/Vws or Cos preceding : <j>i]/ji 
oeli' bjias vols '0\vv8iots ($or)>)fAv , nt-u virws tis Xiyti tcaXXiara Kai 
rax'ffra, ovtojs apkonei fxoi'. Demosth. ()!. ii. 

X. (XII.) With pqbiajs : — dp' ovv pqbiios ovrn) Traprjirnpiev, tovs eiri- 
rvftor-as fxvQovs anvveiv rovs ira'ibas ', thus recklessly: Plato ii. Rep. 



e Uavra p.lv &vep(0irov ovjo, itpoaZoxviv 
Set, 6-n6re kcu iych p\v vcp' vp.u>v airlav 
ex» — : Xen. Anab. vii, G, 9. 

d Since, seeing- that, with an optative: 
f) Be Sjoi'/crjfris {family expenditure, house- 
hold expenses,) o-vx"hi OTT0T6 Seoi rov- 
t6v re kcu avT7}v rpecpeiv, teal iraiSdpia 
rpla, — kcu 6epairalvas Bvo, koX o!k4tt)u 3;a- 
kovov, &c. Pseudo-Dcmosth. in Nea±r. p. 
1359. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With a past tense 
of the optative : 6tt6t€ ti atceudpiov rov 
Becrtr6rov vcpeAoi , iyd> ere XavQdveiv eiroiow 
del: Aristoph. Plut. 1139. With the JEol. 
aor. Aristoph. Plut. J 019. 1 aor. pass. 
Plut. 1145. 2 aor. act. Ar. 512. 1 aor. 
mid. Eq. 1343 — J. S. 

* napa<r%<W aacpaXeiav cnreXBe'iv, ovto> 
TrpoaT&TTSiv (pevyeiv, bpQSis eX 0V ecrri: 
Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 644. 1. 8. ed. 
Reisk.— J. S. 

/ Ovtoos ovaio is sometimes a form of 
entreaty, being properly a conditional 
good wish: ®eop6iroXl, (prffftv, outods 
ovaio, X^P LV ov fwcpav alrovo-n Bbs, penBhv 
dvrenriiv : Lucian, de Merc. Cond. p. 492. 
A. ed. Salmur. ovtws ovaio, irapaXa- 



fiovcra r qiti poi : Id. Dial. Mer. p. 709. 
D. and in the plural: liteTevai, avrifioKSi 
■xpbs irai^wv, irpbs yvvaiKoov, irpbs rwv 
ovtwv bp.1v ay aQSiv ourws ovaiffOe rov~ 
Toiv, p.)) irepiiSrire p.e — : Demosth. in A- 
phob. ii. p. 842. 1. 9. ed. Reisk. With the 
first person of the same verb ovtcos is used 
in a form of protestation, the phrase being 
still properly a conditional wish : Sxrivep 
avap.vn<j8e\s vpbs ttjv infw t&v vUiev, ovtcos 
bvaipyiv, e(p7i, toiitcm, eirij3a\^p cvrdlv t)]V 
X&pa, &s b.Xy)Qri Trpbs ere epco : Lucian, 
Pliiiops. p. 489. A. Thus sic is used ia 
Latin : Sic tua Cyrnceas fugiant examina 
taxos, Y irg. Eel. ix, 30. and so in English : 
So may kind rains their xital moisture 
yield: Pope. In a similar sense the Ita- 
lians use se ; Deh, se riposi mai vostra se- 
menza, Piega' io, lui, solvetemi quel node 
Dante, Inf. c. 10. Cotal m' apparve, s' 
io ancor lo veggie Un lume, &c. Id. Purg. 
c. 2. E, st? per pioggia mai non si disteni- 
pre II tuo bel corso, aita in qualcha parte 
11 rozzo stil. Sannazzabo, Egl. — J. S. 



Rule 5—14.} "Ocbpa. 159 

Oi>x ovrws — ujs '. (Twariov, ei itore, irpb cvojxwv fjXlov KarciKXivofievos , 
ov-% ovrto bin cKT^okiai', us hia ro fruif.ia : not so much through occu- 
pation, as, &e. Pint, in Cic. p. 864.5 

XI. (XIII.) 'Pybiios without vvrw occurs in this sense : vtuv vfieis 
o ti av rvxy pqbitos xpriQigrirrde, Demosth. Phil. i. 

XII. (XIV.) 'Aypov TaXavTov p^bi'ivs aliov, an estate worth full a 
talent, or well worth a tahnt : L>sias. 

XIII. (XV.) 'Pqbiws e\etv, to be well; pqov eyeo', to be better. 

XIV. (XVI.) 'Vqbiov, followed by if, for fxjov : pc/biop mofievos 
av-ov K'iTiiXvrreiv rifv buictfuw iroXe/uovvros, ij to (Tthfia. XifipeaOai <pev- 
yoiros : Pint, in Pomp. 

"O</>0rt, a poeticle particle, is — 1. whilst, as long as: aXX' ayer, otyp 
(V J'ljt dot] ftpcLais ts 770ffis re, /jivrjaofieda (Spiofjrjs : Hoin. Od. k, 1/fJ. 
If duration not yet finished, and of which the end is uncertain, be 
spoken of, otppa is joined with a subjunctive ; as,.o0pd ris cwn, &c. 
Theogn. 1139. cf. 971. If past duration, with an indicative; as, o<ppn 
j.iev es TroXffxop irwXevKeTU bios 'A^iMeus, ovbe-rrore, &C. Horn. IS. e, 788. 
and Tocppa, so long, is generally to be understood as answering to it. 
See Iliad i, 5l6. — 2. until; in which sense also Ti'xppu, expressed 
or understood, corresponds to it: v. Horn. II. a, 509- >', 141. cf>, 
55S. e, 557' Opp. Hal. i, 1 66- iii, 551. and 573. Sometimes ocf>pa 
answers to br\^a, a long time, preceding, as in Horn. II. e, 5SS. — 3. 
that, in order that. In this sense, like other particles of the same 
signification, it is usually conslrued with the subjunctive mood, if any 
thing present is to be indicated : aXXu trot, w fjtey araibes, a^i eairo- 
fxed', otypa av-^aiprjs: Horn. II. a, 15S. But with the optative, if a 
thing be spoken of as the thought of a person, and if a past tense 
goes before: eyeivaro — ovpavov aarfpoevb' — ci^p' eirj /uo/a'ipf acri Oeols 
ebos avfyaXes ulei : Hesiod, Theog. 128. However, a subjunctive mood 
also is construed with it after a past tense, either with or without ai> 
or k£v : [i. e. if what is spoken of in the subjunctive still continues :] 
with key, as in Apoll. Ill), i, 852. without it, as in Pind. dt'ipevcre 
— oypa eparai, Pytb. iv, l60. and in Apoll. Rh. evrve — cxpp' — vootov 

S In addition to what has been sail of veovs; Socr. &~oi:a, S> Oav/iidcrie, ass ovrw 

ovrws, it may be observed that it has some- y' anovaai : Plato Eulhyphr. p. 1. 1.28. 

times a signification of simply, barely, ed. Bas. 1. ovroi /xlv a,Tri8avov d filv 

merely; when words are to be taken in orpefiAwQels, s.evocpwv, ode, 'lirmas, oStoj: 

their most common or limited meaning ; in the ordinary manner, without the acldi- 

when things are spoken of in the strictest tion of torture: Lysias in Agorat. p. 478. 

sense, excluding every thing unessential, ed. Rei-k. TrpeaQevr^v 4k /JovAtjs riva 

or unusual, or not necessarily or ordinarily Xafi^dvojxev, yvc&pifiov ovr coat, with 

concomitant: avdypayf/uv arifiovs elvou. whom ire had a mere common acquuint- 

rovro 5' icrrlv ovx h v <* v ovrwai ris (p-q- unce, art 8' r\v roiovrns ovk elSSres, De- 

aeiev artjj.iav,~\. e. not ariixia. in its ordi- mosth. adv. Zenoth. p. 885. I. 5. ravTnv 

nary acceptation; Demostli. Phil. iii. ]>. to fxev irpu>Toi> ovtqictI viveiv, (in an 

122. 1. II. ed. Reisk. ion 8e tovto, ov- ordinary manner, without the accom- 

Tacrl p.lv o.Kov(rai, on the mere hearing; paniment of the indignities afterwards 

without scrutiny, \6yov two. %x ov ' 6 » Se mentioned,) rjvdyKa^ov, — ws oe -rrporjei ro 

ris axjTO aKpifiws Qerdtrsie, ipevSos Uv %v irpilyixa, kcu oieBep/xaiyovro, &c. Demosth. 

Qaveii) : Id. adv. Lept. p. 4G2. 1. 11. So, de Fals. Leg. p. 402. 1. 20.— J. S. 
tj ita\ iroiovvru ak (prjoi StaipQelpnv robs 



l6o UuXiv, &c. [Chap. vii. § x. 

6\ecr(TT), i, 15. [It is construed with a future indicative after either 
a present or a past tense] 

YlaXiv, (in later writers naXi,) is — 1. back, backwards: Horn. Od. 
»;, 143. v. Galat. iv, 9. hii^vai ndXiv, to give hack, to restore : 
Horn. II. n, 1 l6\ term iraXiv, Od. 1, 225. and ijicetv iraXiv, Aristoph. 
Ach. S20. to return. — 2. again, anew: Horn. Od. r, 533. — 3. con- 
trariwise, oppositely : ovti oy ciXrjdea cine, ttclXiv b' oye Xutero 
fxvQor : Odyss. v, 254. cf. Iliad h, 357- opyinrm re aZ tvoXXovs afia 
beii'ds avi/p yey ore, ko.1 vaXiv otpyovf.ii.vovs enybutv KtjXelv : Plato in 
Phsed. p. 26'7- v. Ceb. Tab. p. 176. [p. 16'. I. 8. ed. Simps. Oxon. 
1738.] 

Hep appears to be akin to the preposition -n-epl, and to signify 
nearly, about, [rendering t he sense of words to which it is joined less 
determinate, and resembling sometimes the addition cunque in Latin.] 
Examples may be seen in Iliad ty, 410. 441. Od. p, 13. a, 353. 
Plato Phred. p. 235. Iliad 1, 301. Aristoph. Ach. 1049. 559. 
II. b, 259- Theogn. 270. This meaning, or effect, continues in 
its compounded state; as in wairep, ynep, oirep, biorrep, &c. [The 
following German interpretations are given by Hermann, immer, 
immerhin. Xeyei, enrep Xeyei, btKata ttuvtu : was immer er sagt, ist 
gerecht : [Aristoph. Ach. 559-] ynep e<x e > w * e er a uch war : [Xen. 
Cyrop. iii, 1, 4.] wo-rrep, ivie audi, wie dock, wie etwa ; e'itrep, wenn 
under s ; evda nep, wo immer; oxpe irep, e/unrjs ijXvdev : immerhin, 
(\. e. zwar,) spat, dock kam er : [Apoll. R.h. i, 251.] av S' tiXkovs 
7rep Uavaxaioiis eXeaipe, erbarme dich immer (doch) der andern, [yet, 
at least: II. 1, 301.] It may sometimes be taken as an adversative 
particle, and be rendered although: see II. a, 275. <p, 63. 

Tlpiv. — 1. The primary meaning of nplv, which is very common in 
poetry, seems to have been, hereto/ore, formerly, before: irplv fiev — 
vvv be, Iliad ft, 112. and bi) is opposed to Trplv in 11. e, 472. iras 
TtoinTris yiyverai, Kav afjiovaos rj ro Trplv, ov av epios axprj-ut : Plat. 
Symp. p. 196. It is joined with a genitive: Trplv wpus, before the 
proper time: Pind. Pyth. iv, 76. ov irporepov u.<pe~icrav Trplv ov i/yue7s 
e\pr](pi(7aade, Demosth. Feed. Alex. 217- [1. 17- ed. Reisk.] 2. It sig- 
nifies before that, or ere; and in this sense is followed by ?/ with 
either an infinitive mood, ju?j5e ypafyeiv vofiovs Trplv ?/ TrapaXaf3f~iv 
Kadapav, Plat. Rep. vi. p. 501. v. Matth. i, 18. or an indicative, 
\prjy Toivvv A.eirr(vrii' fxri irporepov ridevai tov eavrov vofiov Trplv ij tov 
■xaXatbv tovtov eXvae, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 4S6. [1. 13. ed. 
Reisk.] or with an optative, if a thing is spoken of as the thought of 
any one, fxrf Trporepov Qctvai $,nrovvTi urji'vireiv Trplv ?y oi set) ev 'Aicpo- 
Kopivdtp yevotro vbojp, Pausan. cf. Acts xxv, 16. or with a sub- 
junctive ; see St. Luke ii, 26. But rj is often omitted, either 
before the infinitive; as, eicirobiov airei/jii Trplv TrX-qyas Xafielv, 
Aristoph. Vesp. 1316. arroQi'^aKei Trplv tov ayyeXov — atyi iceadai, 
Plato Euthyphr. c. 4. cf. Eurip. Phcen. 82. Matth. xxvi, 34. 75. 
John iv, 49. viii, 58. xiv, 29. or before the indicative, rrjv b' eyw ov 
\vati), Trplv /jiLV Kal yfjpas eireiaiv : Horn. II. a, 29- [In this passage, 
as in Iliad a, 283. Trpiv piv kvvcs apyol ebovrai, Trplv, as Hermann 



§ xi. Rule 1—3.] Ilws. 161 

observes, is prius, i. e. facilius, (we should say, sooner,) eher soil 
das geschehen.] or before the optative, when a thing is spoken of 
as the thought of any person, kev or av following itpiv ; or before 
the subjunctive, av following; as, irplv av tL bpaays ; Soph. Aj. 107. 
v. Antig. 181. In poetry tt/Av is repeated, the last, according to 
Euslath., being always joined with an infinitive ; see II. (3, 348. 
a, 97. There is one passage (Aristoph. Pac. 11 12.) in which the 
last npiv is joined with a subjunctive. 

'Pa is apa shortened of its first letter, and has the same signification. 



SECTION XI. — ON THE ADVERBS ttws, ttov, ra^a, to, AND ON 
THOSE WHICH EXPRESS APPROBATION OR DISAPPROBA- 
TION. 

Rules I. II. ITais, A hoxv, is an adverb of manner. It is used — 1. 
in interrogation ; as, et7rep fiaWet roi/s emopKovs, wws brjr oby\ 2/juwj'' 
eveirpriaev ; l Aristoph. Nub. 498. ttws ov koj. bict tovto, Kal bia rav tTjs 
KaKwaews vouov, alios earn davaru $riuih>di]vat ; how can he but be? &c. 
Lysias adv. Agorat. c. 24. [p. 510. 1. 6". ed. Reisk.J v. Plat. Phaedr. 
p.* 243. Demosth. Ep. 3. p. 118. init. [p. 1485. 1. lo". ed. Reisk.]-> 
T\ws yap; and nws yap civ ; are used elliptically after negative sen- 
tences ; as, Tiov api(7T6v6vrwv ovk av av irore yevoio' tcQs yap ; (or ttuis 
yap av ;) 6 ye Trpbs bvTivaovv KaTaTreirTT)yws dvbvvov, i. e. ttu>s yap av 
yevoto; And ttu>s yap ov ; after affirmative sentences; as, etcelva uev 
a£ia j^apiTos ical enaivov npivw ttSjs yap ov ; for how can I judge 
otherwise? of course I judge them so: [from Demosth. de Cor. 
p. 325. I. 20. ed. Reisk.]* l 

III. ITws, even not interrogatively used, retains its accent, when it 
signifies in some certain manner, emphatically ; as, ov xpeyerai 6 



h Pisth. irZs yap av tovtovs 5o/ce?s 4k- i. e. Kiav, exceedingly : Eurip. Tph. A. 

(pvye'tv; Euelp. ovk oIS' Vitus av : Aris- 1590. v. Aristoph. Plut. 742. It is used 

toph. Av. 355. — J. S. in a figurative question instead of an 

* n<2s ov Kal ^o(poK\4ris avTe\af$ero rod assertion in Aristoph. Nub. KavTavda 

QpSvov ; ' how came it to pass that — why ? irws otecrde fiov ttjv KapSlav 6pexSe7v ; upon 

Aristoph. Ran. 787. Chrera. Kal ircas this my heart was ready to burst with 

<psvyovo~i a airavTss ; Paup. '6ri fieATiovs anger ; '6/j.ais Se rov Qvp.bv SaK&v, ecprjv, 

abtovs noiw: Aristoph. Plut. 575.— J. S. &c. vers. 1350. ed. Bekk. and also in- 

i n&Js ov reriKpcorai ; Demosth. Ep. ii. stead of a direct expression of a wish ; ttws 

p. 1483. I. 2. ed. Reisk. ircSs ovv ovk av ovv Trpbs toIs ayadols tovtolctiv i£ei- 

aro-Kov — ; Id. ib. p. 1479. 1. 17. — J. S. pout', 'Sirens en -7rpocr/xd0&) p.$] x w ^ os elvai 

h 'Svvaywvlfco-dai §L\iinrq, deivbv p.\v, Tea <nceA7j ; Aristoph. Thesrn. 22. Tries 

£> yrj Kal Oeoi- irais yap ov; Kara rrjs ira- av av fxoi \4£eias ape Xph ^4yeiv ; Eurip. 

rpidos : Demosth. de Cor. p. 273. 1. 28. Hippol. 346. Has, at what price ? vcos 

— J. S. ovv 6 Tvpbs iv Boiutots &vios ; Aristoph. 

1 The following senses of ir&s used in- Equit. 480. How a yoke of bullocks at 

terrogatively may be added: ttSos SoKets, Stamford fair? How a score of ewes now? 

a figured question, expressive of admira- Shaksp. P. 11. Henr. IV. iii, 2. Ilaiswith 

tion ; KaK rcov aio'loiv fiarpaxovs iwoiei, an optative and av : Kal TtSis iff aypfy drjr 

irios SoKels : most cleverly : Aristoph. Nub. &«/ eAdoip.' is -ndhiv ; Aristoph. Lys. 912. 

881. KaAxas, ttws tioKus X a 'P WJ/ > %<M* — J» S. 

Viger. x 



16'2 Uuii, T«x«- [Chap. vii. § xi. 

a7r\ws cpyi^ufiepos, aXX 6 nu>$ : Arislot. be'i yap irws pev elvai koivcis 
Kryaeis, o\ws b' Ibias: Aristot. de Rep. ii, 5. And when in this sense 
7rws pet — n-wx be are opposed ; in one manner, in another manner ; 
or in some respects, in other respects, Themis t., custom retains I lie 
circumflex, although analogy requires irtos pev, ttuis be, and try pev, 
■ktj be, partly, partly ; ore pkv, ore be, -Kore p.ev, irore be, m (Procl. in 
Plat. Tlieolog. I. i. c. 4.) and the circumflex is retained also when nws 
signifies hoiv, in what manner, without a question ; as, ei))rovv — to 
nibs areXojtnv avrbv, Luke xxii, 2. cf. vers. 4. and 1 Thess. iv, 1. 
Acts iv, 21. But when it signifies indeterminately, in some manner 
or other; some how; in a manner; it hecomes an enclitic, and 
loses its accent ; as eyw be tovtov tov rpoirov ttws elp? uel, Aristoph. 
Plut. 246.™ irepiep^erai yap ttus uel ij/ulv o av virodwpedu, Plat. Eu- 
thyphr. p. 11. "AXXojs ye ttws, /Eschin. de Morte c. 1(5. p. 370. 
apuxrye ttus, in one, or some, way at least: Plat. Phaedr. p. 228. 

Ylov signifies — 1. where? as ttov yrjs kar'iv ', — 2. whither; ttov gov 
to Qeov eKe'tvo ypiro/jov cnreXijXvde ; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 3. So in the 
New Testament, ttov is often used for tto'i," as John iii, 8. vii, 35. 
xvi, 5. viii, 14. — 3. (IV.) for irCos : ttov be rraibeias aoi depis pvtjadi]- 
vai; Demosth. pro Cor/ Tlov retains its circumflex accent even 
when used materially, as, to yap ttov ai-o re kari rt, Kai en ciXXo tl beT 
elvat wapa tovto : Aristot. Physic, iv, although analogy would require 
it to be written ttov. 

Uov as an enclitic — 1. signifies anywhere, or somewhere: noWr/ 
e\7rts, — iicel, e'iirep ttov aXXodt, Krrjaacrdat tovto : Plato Phaed. p. Gj. 
See Iliad e, 193. p, 446. ovbe kuXov evravda ttov Kelardai, Lucian, 
Dial. Nept. et Nereid, ecet be ttov 6 "Apyos flovKoXe'i, Id. Dial. Jov. 
et Merc. — 2. It is used in speaking of things with some degree of 
uncertainty and caution, probably, perhaps, as I guess, if I mistake 
not, &c. voawv ye Ka\ irovwv — etc prjviparwv ttov deaiv ev rial yevope- 
rwv, Plato Phaedr. p. 244. See Iliad <f>, 83. e, 473. [II. /3, llfj.] 

The primary signification of ra^a is quickly, speedily, soon. q See 
Horn. Od. a, 251. Polyb. Exc. Leg. 6. This is its only sense in 
Homer. Next it signifies perhaps, and is used as synonymous with 
'laws by Plato in Phaedr. p. 205. de Rep. v. p. 451. Aristoph. Vesp. 
280. iEschin. Socr. Dial, i, 2. To augment its signification, it is 

m Reizius says that irore yikv, irore 5e it signifies, why, wherefore ; iro7 \evicbv 

ought to be suhstituted for tots fiev, Tore 'lirirov; Aristoph. Lys. 193. trot yap Kal 

Se, in Xen. Symp. viii, 5. but I have %pr\v avajxeivai ; lb. 526. also how, i.e. 

already, in note b p. 157. given an ex- how do you mean? ixav Bepfibv fy; — trot 

ample of rore jj.ev, rore Se, so used, from Bepp.6v ; lb. 383. As an enclitic it is put 

Demosth. in Nausimach. p. 989. 1. 6. ed. for irons : a\\' erepa iroi ariceirreov, Ari- 

Reisk.— J. S. stoph. Eq. 35.— J. S. ; 

" I have given this example of irccs as P Kal (ity et ris imeivo viroXafifidvet' 

an enclitic on the authority of Brunck's ttov 8e yevoiro av ravra; ri KtaXvei nape 

edition. In Viger the verse is cited as a Xeyeiv rls 8' av airoKrelvat. XapiSimov ; 

proof of a signification of irois, which it Demosth. in Aristocr. p. 638. 1. 17. ed. 

has not, at least in that verse. — J. S. Reisk. — J. S. 

As 7rot is only thus incidentally men- 9 Taxa 8' eiffofxai 'yd: Aristoph. Lys. 

tioned, I shall take the occasion to ob- 1114. aiirbs yap Qetaiv rdxa: Id. 

serve that, besides its common meaning, Thesm, 66. — J. S. 



Rule 4, 5.] Tews, T fl. l6"3 

joined with other equivalent words ; as, 6 fie? yap nept irai'ra abtKos, 
rax a.y, el tv^oi, koX tovtov r/bcKei : Demosth. pro Phorm. p. Q6\. 
[1. 15. ed. Reisk.] rii^a §' av "i<rws ovk edeXoi, Aristoph. Vesp. 
1447- '""X' "'' wov €v /" e ^ a ' s — •Xafiovre ras \pv%as atypovpovs — : 
Plato Phaedr. p. 256. v. Aristaen. Ep. x. — On to.\ av see Schaef. 
ad Greg. Cor. p. 44/ 

Tews signifies — 1. SO long, as long as: bebeadw reus, ews av eKx/077 : 
Demosth. c. Timocr. p. 721, ed. Reisk. Tews fxev av eppwpevos y tis, 
ovbev eiraiadaveTat rwr — (radpwv : Id. Ol. ii. p. 24. [I. 3. ed. Reisk.] 
— 2. before, at first;' ol be arpariwrai Tews fxev eXeyov ws Eevotywv 
o'i^oiro, — etre) be avrbv rjicovra elbov, &c Xen. Anab. vii, 55/ 

IV. (V.) T H is used in calling, or accosting. It is sometimes joined 
with the pronoun ovros in the nominative, w ovros, hark ye; and 
sometimes omitted before it, as clkovgov avrri, Alistoph. A v. 1199- 
1243. [ed. Bekk.] and the pronoun without w is sometimes joined 
witb the proper name" of the person called to, as, 6 QaXrjpevs ovros 
'AiroWobwpos, ov 7repi/jierets ; you Apollodorus of Phalerum, will 
younot stay for me? Plato Symp. [p. 176. 1.3. ed. Bas. 1-.]" It 
is joined also with erav, making by aphaeresis wren', or wrav, or w 
'rav, <o 'rap, friend, my good fellow. When t3 is construed with a 
substantive and adjective together, whichever of these two is most 
emphatical, is placed next to w. See Hermann, ad Horn. h. Apoll. 
14. Schaef. Melet. Cr. p. 114. Erf. ad Soph. Ant. 738. ed. min. 

V. (VI.) Those adverbs, and other words, which express assent or 
dissent, may be noticed here. Of the first class are, aXrjdrj, true ; 
aXridetrrara, most true; ar ay Kri, of necessity ; avayKr) yap ovv, cer- 
tainly, for it cannot be otherwise: Xen. Cyrop. ii. p. 39- [and i\ yap 
avayicr}, Xen. Anab. i, 6, S.] avayKti fxev ovv, it cannot be otherwise ; 
avaytcaio-arov fxev ovv, it must be so undeniably ; yap ovv with some 
word preceding, iEschyl. Eumen. 374. Soph. Phil. 766'. Eurip. 
Bacch. 920. El. 290. brjXabrj and brfkovvrt, evidently, of course ; 
eytoye, 1 do think SO; elicos ye, ehos rot, eoiice, tctvbvvevei, (fiaiverai, 
€jjL<paivet ovtws ex eiy > ^ seems probable indeed, it appears so; efiotye 

r Taxeoos for rix a : rjQpoiaOricrav it pea- ' Tews is also, in the mean time, mean- 

fielwv rrArjdos ctarb rrjs c EAAa5os, 'oaov ov while : fiovAecrde Srjr' iyw reus birrw rh 

raxeos irpdrepov: Polyb. Exc. Leg. 46. icpea ravrl fievwv, v/xe7s 5' ire ; Aristopli. 

Ernest, as hardly ever before : temere, i. e. Av. 1689. (1687. ed. Bekk.) and so in 

fere. The comparative darrov sometimes Pac. 846. Eustathius on Iliad a, 193. 

means, formerly, before : <pi\oao<piav 5e explains reus, irpbs rb rrapbv, and in the 

rrpuros uv6fia<re Tlvda.y6pas, — Oarrov de following passage that seems to be its 

iicaXuTO aocpia: Diog. L. Proosm. p. 5. meaning; airopuv 6 Stj/mos emrp6irov, ko.1 

1. 9. ed. H. St. form, minim, also in yvpvbs uv, rourov reus rbv &vb~pa, Tvepie^w' 

Diog. L. in Biant. p. 31. 1.21. In the a an- 0, for the present: Aristoph. Pac. 

superlative us ra-xurra, as quickly as 687. — J. S. 

possible: Aristoph. Lys. 266. 747. 1009. "And sometimes with another pro- 

1188. Thesm. 662 J. S. noun; afar) (rb, trot arpefet ; Aristoph. 

s Before: reus /xev ovv, a\\' r)ixi- Thesm. 610. — J. S. 

Kdiws, efSoo-KSfiTiv vvv h* — , Alistoph. v Another form is, ovros, Si airoi, Ari- 

Thesm. 449. So Ran. 989. Plut. 834. stoph. Av. 274. the ellipsis of which may 

at first ; reas jx\v olv eKpivofied' 1 ' elra rcf be supplied from v. 406. iu> enoi^, <re toi 

XpivV koivt) lvve(ir]iLev > Aristoph. Nub. krAw. — J. S. 
66.— J. S. 



164 Qukow, &c. [Chap. vii. 

hoKel, it seems so to me, that at least is my opinion ; eon ravra, it is 
so ; dav[xaordJs, surprisingly so ; kcu yup eon tovto ye, yes, or / do, 
for it certainly is so ; Kal /uciAa bi), without any doubt ; Kal opfjws ye, 
and rightly too; Kal ovbev ye KwXvet, and nothing hinders, and 
there is no reason why it should not be so : Kal itaw ye, entirely so ; 
Kofxibri akv ovv, yes quite so ; /uaAa ye, certainly ; /laXiora ye, most 
certainly ; va\, a\ndtj ye, yes, it is true ; r>) At", eywye, I do truly ; 
iipdws, rightly; ovrus, just so, thus; Truv-uirnciv fjiev ovv, and most 
unquestionably too ; iravi/ aev ovv, certainly ; TravreXios fxev ovv, and 
completely so too ; irdvrwv /uaXiora, beyond all doubt ; 7rws yap ov ; 
and 7rcJs f ov ; to be sure ; [see ttcSs, and t lie notes.] o'jjubpaye,most 
entirely ; t'i \xi\v • aXXct ri \iy\v ; to be sure, why to be sure ; vneptyvm 
bi), inrepfvQs /uiev ovv, exceedingly, wonderfully ; tyrjfil eyw, I affirm it. 
Sometimes assent is expressed by a repetition of a preceding word ; 
as, to ov%v6>v icnl aAAwi> Trpoobeqoerai — * it is answered ov%ru>v pev 
toi: Plato Rep. ii, 371. and to npwTov 7jv — ■ l\v yap: Id. Theast. or 
by a word not before expressed, but agreeing with a preceding one ; 
as, dp' ovk avaytct] — ; is answered by 71-oAAj) ye, (amy/07 viz.) Plat. 
Parmen. 

VI. (VII.) Of the second class are, abbvarov, impossible ; ijKiord 
ye, not at all ; kuI ttws, how can it ? to be sure not ; /ud A/a, followed 
by dAAd, (when the formula is both negative and corrective,) or 
by some particle of denial : Pisthet. juwv evBv XleAA?jVjjs TrereoQai 
hiavoel ; Sycoph. /ud At", dAAd KXr'jrrjp elfii— : no indeed, I am a sum- 
moner : Aristoph. Av. 1422. see also 1427. pa &i' ovk iywye, not 
I, faith;' (lit At" ovk e/xoiye boKel, no indeed, I think not ; w ov yap, 
and ov yap olv, no, I grant, or agree ; x ovbafxGn, by no means; 
ovbau&s onwffovy, by no means whatever; ov bfjra, no indeed: Eurip. 
Heracl. 508. Hel. 1244. ovb' birwonovv, not in any degree, not by 
any means ; ovk eoiKe, and ov tyaiverai, it seems not; *ovkow eywye, 
no indeed, I do not ; (but ovkovv, therefore, is affirmative.*) ov ud 
rbv A/a, no, by Jove ; ov poi boKe'i, I think not ; ov ttciw, not at all; 
7rJ5s yap, how can it? See ttws, and the notes. *Ovkow is the same 
as ovk ovv. 11 — I. Men. 00ns be Ttfiq, ujjrep' ; Orest. evbal/.iwv efv. 
Men. ovkovv ov y. you therefore are not so. Orest. ov yap fx 
avbdvovoiv at Kami: Eurip. Or. 1606. [1623. Pors.] — 2. Kauol yap 
i\v iroff ovtos £%0iOTos, — dAA' avrbv e/iiras ovr' eyw roiovbe poi ovkovv 
aTifiaoatfx av : I would not indeed, or / would not on that account : 
Soph. Aj. 1336. — 3. ovkovv oveibrj rabe kXviov pvoei reKva ; will you 
not then, &c. Eurip. Or. 1238. [1236. Pors.] — 4. ovkovv yeXms fibtoros 



w With respect to jua being not negative Greek particles when thus cited apart 

in itself, Zeunius refers to Em. on Xen. from the sentences to which they belong 

Mem. iii, L3, 3. add Brunck on Aristoph. or refer: in these answers, yap and yap 

Lys. 465. as to its not being affirmative, odv refer to the interrogator's anticipation 

In the following passage I suppose vi] that the answers would be what they are. 

should be substituted, h>&yKi\v olaav av- These particles are never used in this man- 

ro7s Kal vavfiaxelv Kal ire^ofiax^", Kal /xa ner in answer to questions really put for 

Ata reixoixax^iv : Plut. Alcib. p. 376. 1. the sake of information. — J. S. 

19. H. St.— J. S. y See Aristoph. Plut. 342. 889. also 

x It is a hopeless task to translate 71. Thesm. 226. — J. S. 



I xii. Rule l, 2] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 165 

els exdpnvs ye\$v ; and is it not, &c. Soph. Aj. 79. see v. 1051. 
Eurip. Orest. 1622. 

Ovkovv" signifies therefore, without interrogation ; although this 
signification arises from the negation contained in it. 

In order to understand rightly the passages in which ovkovv occurs, 
it will be necessary to remember that the Greeks have a peculiar 
mode of beginning sentences with interrogation, and ending them 
without; as, 0I0& o bpaaov, i. e. bpaaov — olaB 1 o ', oiaff ws yeveaQw, 
i. e. yeveaOw, olaQ' ws', When, therefore, one says, ovkovv, orav 5/) fxij 
adevw, neTravfTO/.ini, (Soph. Antig. 91.) this is virtually, irenavoonac 
ovkovv ; shall I not ? So ovkovv to fxev re)/i'7js re Kal are^vias \6y10v 
7repi tKavws e^eru), (Plato Phzedr. p. 274.) is, licavws e^erW ovkovv ; 
and ovkovv a\Xa to biaby/ia eatrov fie e\eiv, (Lucian, dial. mort. x. t. i. 
p. 366.) is, u\Xa to btabrj/ua eaerov fxe e%eiv' ovkovv; will you not? 
Now he who puts a question for tiie purpose of urging a concession, 
as nonne? forms a conclusion on what goes before; and in many 
passages it would be a matter of indifference whether such a question 
or the word therefore were employed ; hence it comes to pass that 
ovkovv may often be so translated. 



SECTION XII. — Of adverbs which have a peculiar 

ENERGY AND AGREEABLENESS IN NEGATION; AND EX- 
PRESSLY OF THOSE OF WHICH pri IS THE FIRST IN CON- 
STRUCTION. 

Rule I. A negative adverb is sometimes put after a verb, with 
which it is construed, instead of before it; and in this case it is 
sometimes the last word of the sentence, and used elliptically : v. 
Pind. 01. vii, 86. e/xe be "Awros Kal MeXiros airoKTe~ivai fxev bvvavrai, 
fi\a\pai b' oh' (bvvavTai, viz.) Epictet. Ench. 

II. Two or more negatives are used in Greek to deny more empha- 
tically ; as Cicero's words, (de Fin. iii. c. 15.) quamquam negent 
nee virtutes nee vitia crescere, although they deny that either virtues 
or vices increase, may be rendered in Greek by a like plurality of 
negatives : Kai toi ov <paoiv ovre tcls operas ovre tus KaKtas av^dveo-dat." 
rclXAct tGiv fxrj ovtuiv ovbevl ovbajj.fi ovbafi&s ovbe/iiav KOtvaviav e'x ei • 
Plat. Parmen. [p. 154. 1. 7- ed. Bas. 1.] fir)be cip£ar« apxtiv [x-qbejxiav 
[jitjbeTroTe, firire evbi][xov, \xi]Te hirepupiov, &c. iEschin. in Tim. p. 183. 
J. 3J. ov yap eoTiv Sorts bivBpuyiros owdijaeTai, ovre (either) ifxiv, 
ovre a\\o) ovbevl {or any other) jrA?;0ei yvrjaiws evavnovfievos : 
Plat. Apol. c. 19. So ovk ovk, to deny more emphatically : see Erf. 
in addend, ad Soph. Ant. 5. and, yuj), fivriarevo-avres, fxijb'' a\\od' 
bjjLihiiaavTes, vorara Kal irvfxaTa vvv ev8a.be betirvriaeiav : may they sup 

z See Aristoph. Plut. 425. ovkovv 8^- quamquam in the passage of Cic. § 48. 

ttov, but, you know : Aristopli. Plut. 549. sed, quamquam negent, — atlamen putant, 

— J. S. &c. It should be a\\' fytws, e* Kal, &c. 

a Kai toi does not express the sense of — J. S. 



160' NEGATIVE ADVERBS. [Chap. vii. § xii. 

here now for the last time ; never, since they have once become 
suitors, assembling in any other place : Horn. Od. b, 684. and in the 
same manner of one who has wrought a masterpiece, and can add 
nothing to his fame, /u?}, Te^vrj(7afievos, fiqb' uXXo ti Te-^prjnairo : 
Od. X, 6l2. So fi)) is repeated to increase the urgency of deprecation : 
fir) /at) Kit\e(TT)s, Aristoph. Vesp. 1409. /*>} fu) ravra Xeyu>/j.es, Callim. h. 
in Cer. 18. ' v. Virg. JEn. xii, 189- 

Sometimes, however, although seldom, a plurality of negatives 
affirms; as, fjtr) ovv bia Tavd\ wv iifxas ovtujs i^tiirarrjcre, /j)) boTU biKtiv : 
let him not, therefore, because of that, go unpunished for the de- 
ception which he has practised against us : Demosth. And ov% iJKiara 
is very much, or very greatly. 

III. A negative is used interrogatively for affirming more emphati- 
cally ; as, 70 be ye /jr)v irtis ov oa<j>u>s 7rpos to yevva~iav eyv*a ; who can 
doubt that this resolution was magnanimously formed ? or that this 
sentiment was a magnanimous one: Xen. in Ages, ovk eyw ae 
elbov kv rut KriTry fier avrov ; John xviii, 26. And with a future tense 
interrogatively for commanding : ov navarj fiapfiapu;a. fjfxlv qbuv ; 
Lucian, Lapith. t. iii. p. 445. i. e. cease to sing, &c. ovk ana^eis 
ebQvs ec tov avfiirorjiov ti)v yvvalm ; Plut. Apophth. p. 180. 

IV. *M>) ov, pi] ovk, and fxi) ovy\, with a participle or a noun, 
signify unless : ovk av ovv a^iOTtiaTOs e'irjv Xeywv, firj ov-^i irporepov airos 
<j>avels, olos elfit: Lucian, Catapl. t. i. p. 645. See Soph. CEd. 
R. 12, 220. al 7r6\eis ttoWoi k<x\ ^nXewai Xafielv ul tu>v $w(cewy, jxij 
ov xpovu) kci\ TroXiopKiq.: Demosth. de fals. leg. p. 379« '• 6. By using 
the two negatives /uj) and ov, the writer has made the passage signify 
that those towns might be taken ; but that there would be need of 
time and siege : had he used /j^ alone, he would appear to have 
reckoned it certain that neither time could be spent, nor a siege 
decreed, and therefore to say that the towns, since tliey could not be 
besieged, could not be taken. Examples with juj) alone may be seen 
in Soph. Trach. 592. Eurip. Heracl. 283. Troad. 402. ^schyl. 
Prom. 503. Xen. Anab. vi, 4, 19. 

V. Sometimes kcl\ is added ; as, ov yap av"Ecrwp avr/pedr], /*?) ovyl 
kcu Tpotas avTf (rvfjnreaovarjs. 

VI. These particles are sometimes construed with an infinitive : 
enl yap rij 'Eperp<ct to ^wpiov ov, abvvaTa i)v, 'AOrjvaiwv eyovTtav, fir) 
ov fieyaXa (HXaitTeiv ir'ai 'Eperpmr cat Tr)v aXX-qv Evfioiav : Thuc viii, 
60. tKore Traviv ala^yvrjv elvai, fii) ov vvcnrovbaieiv : Xen. Anab. 
ii, 3, 11. ovre fir) fiefivT^adai bvvafiai avTov, ovre fiefivrjfievos fir) ovk 
inaivelv : Xen. Apol. Socr. in fin. ovk avaTiQefxai fir} ov KaXws Xeyea- 
Oat, Plat. Meno p. 89. d. vofiovs 'Abpaareias albiaerai, firj ovyl 
fxiKpov ti fiepos aitobaaaaQai t<3 "^apLuafievw to TroXXaTrXaaiov : he will 
reverence the laws of Adrastea, and will not omit to impart, &c. 
Synesius ad Euoptium. ovbe deXto TrpoXiire'iv Toye, fir) ov tov efiov 



* Cum conjunctive) et optativo et indi- ticipio et imperativo, ad rem certo ne- 

cativo, ad rem cum dubitatione affirman- gandam, ^ ; ad certo affirmandam, fti/ 

dam, fifi ; ad negandam cum dubitatione, ov usurpatur. Hermann* de Ell. et Pleon. 

Ia)]ov dicitur : cum infinitivo autem et par- § 213. — J. S. 



Rule 3—9.] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 167 

uTova^'iv Trarip" dBXtov : and not, without, &c. Soph. El. 136. 
viovrai vfias iteioeiv, ws 6 Avaidetbrjs — a.Trea\er av /uj) ovk evdvs tov 
irarpbs KaTabtatTijnai : that Lysithides ivould have refrained from 
immediately deciding against my father : Demosth. arlv. Callipp. 
p. 1240. 1. 17- [ed. Reisk.] In general it may be said that ^u>) ov has 
more of douhtfulness, mildness, delicacy, less of decision, of positive 
asseveration, than /u>) alone : see iEschyl. Prom. 106. Xen. Hist. 
Gr. v, 4, 32. Cyneg. v, 31. de Rep. Lac. vi, 2. Demosth. Ep. v. 
p. 1490. 1. 15. Xen. Mem. iv, 8, 9- Soph- Aj. 727- iEschyl. 
Ag. 1178. Soph. Trach. 621. 225. (Ed. R. 236. Xen. Anab. iii, 
1, 13. Cyrop. ii, 2, 20. Soph. (Ed. R. 1232. Plato de Rep. i. 
in fin. p. 354. B. Soph. Ant. 96. Of this passage in Plutarch, (in 
which fir/ alone is joined with an infinitive,) eibelv be rjjs (iceivov 
irapovoias ra irpayfinra, jx)) tijv aplaTt]v eyeiv btadeirtv, the meaning is, 
that nothing but his presence xvas required to put affairs in the 
best possible state : Vit. Cic. p. 8S2. 

As to other moods, /ji) alone, with the subjunctive, optative, and 
indicative, expresses apprehension of an affirmative, pi) ov, of a nega- 
tive : bebottca fjjj Qavi], I fear he will die; ebeboiKeiv p) Qavot, I 
feared he would die; beboiKa pi) Tedvvue, I am afraid he is dead : 
[v. Aristoph. Nub. 493.] beboiKa fxij ov darrj, I fear he will not die ; 
ibebotKeip /jti) oil davot, I was afraid he would not die; beboiKa fu) ov 
redvrjice, lam afraid he is not dead. With an ellipsis of a verb of 
fearing or doubting : /uj) ov^ clott) ?} »/ opdfj irpbs aperr/v, lest this be not 
the right road to virtue : Plat. Phaed. c. 13. So, aXXa juj) ov tovt y 
yciXenbv, davcirov eic<f>vyelv, aXXa ttoXv yaXeTtuTepov i:ovr}piav : Id. 
Apol. c. 29. 

VII. M?/ and ov are placed before some verbs, which in interpre- 
tation they must follow. Those verbs are chiefly Xeyw, (pr}fu, tyaaicw, 
7rpocnrotov/uat, d£iw, btKalto : as, 01 fiev (paariv tovs 0eous abucelv ciXXi)- 
Xovs, oi be ov tyacuv : but others say they do not : Plato in Euthyphr. 
c. 9* ovk efr) avrbs, akX etcelt'ov arpaTij-ye'iv : he said that not he 
himself, but, &c. Thuc. iv, 28. See Horn. II. rj, 391. eav be p) 
irpoawoLiirai v/nas aKoveiv, but if he pretend not to hear you — : iEsch. 
in Ctes. [p. 590. 1. 4. ed. Reisk. hfiSv..'] So, bel be, d r'lbkritrav, fjij 
TrpooTroielodai: to put up with it, to appear not to be sensible of it : 
Thuc. 

VIII. So before djjtw : vfias, w arpaTiwrat, ovveicaXeaa, ovk a^tiLv 
ra prj beiva ev oppubla e\€tv' for afyibv ovk, &c. Demosth. [not from 
Demosth., but from Thuc. ii, 89. p. 352. 1. 17. ed. Bekk. bpdv 
ifxas, to avbpes fTTpaTtwrat, Tretyofiti/uievovs to ttX^Bos tG>v evavTitoV, \vve- 
KaXeaa, ovk c\Ztu>v to. fiij b. &c] And before dvwyw, I order, fre- 
quently in poetry. 

In antitheses some preceding word is omitted before pfj ; as, e<pr) 
bta<pepeiv ra tov epujv-os ?) ra tov /ji), (epiavTOS, viz.) Plat. Phaedr. 
228. 1. 34. tis ovv TpoTros tov KctXtos re Kal fif\ ypa(j>eiv } for Kai fif) 
KciXuJs yp. Id. ib. p. 258. 1. 35. 

IX. Mrj yap ye, and (at) yap §>), are deprecatory formulae ; as, tovs 
evarade'is irpoaipelirdat to. /3e\riora b baifiiov ovk a<patpi)ereTai' fit) yap by) 
Kal Tfjs yvw/ATjs rjptov Karia^vaeiev : for God forbid, or far be it from 



168 NEGATIVE ADVERBS. [Chap. vii. § xii. 

us, that she [Fortune] should prevail over our determinations; ris 
ov-fti. Karerrrvaev av aov ; p) yap rijs wuXeujs ye, firth' efxov : Demostli. 
pro Cor. [p. 295. 1. 9- ed. Reisk.] See Musgr. ad Eurip. Tro. 212. 
[210.3 

X. So also p) 5>7ra : * p) bijra, u> iravrmv efiol wpocTcjriXearare : 
Synesius. Sometimes at the end of a sentence : oh* av rrore irarpo- 
boOelaav Karaiayvratfii r>)v evbofyav' fit) btfra. And with a pronoun 
after it there : pjtJe y eXarrovs (jxZ/iev avrovs ruiv avrnraXurv yevecrOaf 
p) b)~]Ta iifieis ye : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 432. 

XI. * Mi'iti, p'/nye, p/rt br), p/rtye br), ovroi ye, ovrotye br), fit) on, 
firjon, fir) on ye, p) on br), fiyrotye, fit'jroiye br), signify much less, 
much more, not only not, &c. cyw be koli kv ro'is Oearpois opw rovs 
dywviGTas vizb rdv iraihiov Trapotyvofievovs, fir'in br) vrro ye twv <j>iXwv : 
much more by friends: Plato ad Dion. Mtjti ye bq, Demostli. 01. ii. 
kyw be ovb' dXXov rivii ij^iovv av ravra 6veibi£eiv, pyroiye br) YiXarwva : 
much less Plato: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 368. pyri yovv, (f. p/7-01 
y ovv, Herrn.) iElian, H. A. iii, 23. V. H. xii, Q. xiii, 1. fieyaXas 
01 irpeafivrai ras Sqfiias kirayovai, kuv en? oXiyurv fiaprvpwv rovro iraQr) 
ris, ovn ye (ovrot ye, Herm.) ev rqXticovrois decirpois : Lucian, Anach. 
ii, t. ii. p. 890. abbe onoaoi rives avrols elaiv ol fiaaiXels, efieXXov 
evpijaeiv, fir) on n)v arpanav, much less the army : Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 429* a «oX \6yto kanv ciKoveiv ovtc emrepnes, fir] on br) epyo) : much 
more: Plato Pheedr. p. 240. With d\\d following: ok av fifiels 
aoQaXws epyaCoifieda ju?/ on ti)v tovtojv, ctW ovb' av rqv ijfierepav '. we 
could cultivate safely, not only not the land of these, hut not even 
our own, or we could not cultivate safely even our own land, much 
less,&c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 2, 21. oibevi av p) on irpolica. boiqs, d\\' 
ovb' eXarrov rqs alias Xa/3wj/ : Id. Mem. i, 6, 11. And interrogatively : 
av yap av TtpoaeXQois fir) on irpds rroXiv, aXXa rrpbs olriav, ortov Ktvbvvos 
Ttpooeanv : iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 298. 

The difference between fir) and ov is that ob denies a thing itself, 
fifj a thought of a thing. Hence ov is used absolutely, and indepen- 
dently of any foregoing verb either expressed or understood ; c ovk 
ean ravra : whereas with p) there must be either expressed or under- 
stood some verb significant of thought, suspicion, will : p) ravra 
yevnrai, viz. (pofiovfiai. p) rovro bpaorjs, viz. opa. Sometimes it is 
rather the thought or will itself that is understood, than any par- 
ticular verb expressive of it ; p) icevde. From this primary and 
constant difference between p) and ob is derived the distinction made 
by grammarians, that ov denies, and p) forbids. Ov roX/iqaeis, is, you 
will not dare, to one who we know has not audacity enough to do 
so and so; p) roXfiqcrets, is, dare not, to one who in our opinion is 
audacious enough to do what we know the former will not do. 
Hence it appears too why p), not ov, is joined with conditional par- 



6 The following is an example from a * On p.r)re followed by p.r], and ovre 

much better author : /it] o~rJT, 8> iravres by ov, see Schffifer on Bos, note 7, under 

6eo\, jiwjSels ravff vp.Zv iirivivamv : "De- the word K6\ttos. — J. S. 

mosth. pro Cor. p. 332. 1. 18. ed. Reisk. c v. Aristoph. Eccl. 1000. andBrunck. 

—J. S. -J, S. 



Rule 10, 11.] NEGATIVE ADVERBS. 1G9 

tides ; el fit), eav fit), orav fii), on /it) : for by their very nature these 
particles indicate that something is proposed as a supposition or 
thought of some one. And in the same manner the relative vs is 
used with fit), when we intend it to have a hypothetical signification ; 
ris be bovvai bvva-ai erepw, a fir) e^ei avros ', Epict. Ench. 31. i. e. 
who can give things to another, if he has them not himself? Had he 
said, a ovic k\ei avros; the sense would have been, the things which 
a person has not himself, how can he give to another? 

When fir) is joined with participles, as is very frequently the case, 
the sense is properly, if there he such: v. Soph. CEd. C. 1154. b 
■marsviav els civtov oh KptveTat' 6 be fit) iriffreixav ijbt] Keicpirai, on fir) 
treirictTevKev els to brofia rov fxovoyevovs vlov tov deov: John iii, 
18. 'O fir) ■Kiarevhrv, is, if any one believe not ; for fit) indicates an 
imagination or supposition about some person or other not believing; 
but 6 oh 7n(TTevb)v would be meant of some certain individual who 
would not believe: v. Eurip. Bacch. 251. Polemo pro Callim. 47. 
p. 1(5, 13. (122. ed. Orell.) and on ov netriarevKe would have been 
intended of some one person in particular; whereas on fir) TretricrTevice 
is said as the thought or imagination of some one, whether it be said 
about a person who really did not believe, or about a person supposed 
to have not believed. EtSes, <*5 TaXt'ivi], \des, ola etvoittaev ri"Epis wapa 
to belnvov ev OerraX/a, bion fir) xai ab-r) eKXrfdrj es to avfiiroaiov ; 
Lucian, Dial. Panop. et Gal. Here fir) is used to signify the reason 
as existing in the thoughts of Eris, instead of stating it barely as a 
matter of fact ; which would have been done if ov had been used, and 
not fit). But as a thing may often be expressed in either manner, it 
is not strange that in places exactly alike sometimes ov is found, 
sometimes firj. In these cases much depends on the custom of any 
author. Lucian e. g. is fond of putting on fir} even where he might 
properly have put on oil. In Aristoph. Thesm. 1$. fir) is not put 
for ov : it refers to the preceding order of Euripides ; and the nega- 
tion is not simple and direct, but regards thought; for aicovco and 
bpu> are subjunctives. But even in direct phraseology, the Greeks, 
when they do not simply deny a thing, but indicate that it appears 
deniable, employ fir]. See Lucill. epigr. 102. in Brunck, Anal. t. 
ii. p. 338. Pausan. ix, 1, 3. Hence fir) comes very frequently after 
verbs indicating the thought of any one : see Pausan. ix, 8, 2. After 
some verbs, which in their nature signify nothing but what depends 
on thought or will, fir) is almost always put, ov scarcely ever; as, 
after ofivvfit, even as to something past: Xen. Anab. vii, 6, 18. 
v. Horn. II. t, 258. seqq. II. o, 34. seqq. Mr) is put with an indi- 
cative of the future, 11. k, 329- seqq. And what is strange, ov 
is construed, although very seldom, with this verb ofivvfit, even 
with respect to something future: Theocrit. xxi, 59. v. Eurip. Hel. 
841. 

As to the use of fir) and ov in opposition of negations and affirma- 
tions, it may be easily understood by recollecting that ov simply 
denies a thing itself, fit) denies it as thought. The Greeks say <pr)s r) 
ov ; not <p>)s I) fir) ; for this reason, that they do not say (pt)fii fit) elvai 
tovto, but 01/ (j>i)fit eJrai. <prjs ?} ov ; therefore is, (jtrjs r) ov (pr)s ; - 
Viger. Y 



170 NEGATIVE ADVERBS. [Chap, vir. 

Mi), as a prohibitory particle, is construed with an imperative of 
the present tense, and a subjunctive of the aorists : d p) o'lov belv f/fxas 
ovrio KtiXovs ofdaXfiovs ypafew, Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 240. See Brunek. 
ad Aristoph. Lys. 1036\ Soph. (Ed. C. 731. El. 71, 1275. Aj. 
ipi. Hermann, dissertat. de praecept. quibusd. Atticist. p. 4 — 8. 
And fn] with the imperative of the present is properly used in com- 
manding to desist from what one is already doing: v. Od. -rr, 168. 
but often however in commanding not to begin, which is the peculiar 
province of the imperative of the aorist, which yet the Greeks very 
seldom employ, the Attics almost never, but instead of it they use 
the subjunctive of the aorist, which always signifies that something 
is not to be begun, Od. o, 263. For examples of the aorist impera- 
tive, see K0211. and Sclraef. ad Greg. Cor. p. 15. seqq. Moreover the 
present is used of something continued, as fii) fiaXXe-e : the aorist of 
something quickly over, as firj fiaXys, when the throwing of one 
weapon is spoken of. So in the imperative of the third pers. iEschyl. 
S. c. Th. 1044. M>7 is prohibitive with a future indicative also, 
especially with interrogation ; p) my ar£%ei, p-qbe. beiXLav apeis ; 
Soph. Aj. 75. v. Soph. Tr. 1183. and Eurip. Heracl. 272. which 
verse ought perhaps to be taken interrogatively. Also elliptically with 
an infinitive : ftr) anoppenfievdai, ciXX' enl ttciuijs op/xfjs to biKaioy uno- 
btbotai: Antonin. els eavr. iv, 14. In expressing a wish fxij is joined 
with an optative : fit) yap a'tbe baifioves deiev fi acpwvov rrjobe tyjs apas 
en, Soph. CEd. C. 864. Further, by accurate writers, and espe- 
cially by the Attic poets, it is joined with the subjunctive mood after 
a present tense; as, otcvw pn) fxaraios jj/luv t] orpuTela yevnrai, 
Demosth. OI. i. p. 14. beboiK ey&> pi fxot /Je/3>/K?j, Soph. Phil. 493. 
ex cod. ap. Brunek. for bebotica. has the signification of a present 
tense. With the optative after a past tense; "Hprj be /jiey avcre, 
7repibbei(7aa 'A^tX^fV, /u?/ fxiv cciroepareie peyas ttoto/xos fiadvbivtjs '. 
Horn. II. 0, 329- With the indicative of any tense, when something 
is signified, which really has been, is, or is about to be : beibcj pu) bi) 
TTavra dea vrifxep-ea elirev, I doubt the goddess told all things true : 
Hon). Od. e, 200. rvi> be (j)o(3ov/j.eda fit) a/iiporepwp fip:aprr]Kafiey, 
Thucyd. iii, 53. See Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 342.* 

Sometimes, when the mind of the speaker is agitated, no verb is 
expressed with ju>y : /ujy* aXXa. /not bos ev fxovov kvXiokiov/ do not send 
me away 1 do not refuse me; or the like : Aristoph. Ach. 457. 

M>) is often subjoined to the particles iva, otzws, e<j>' £re, &c. 
v. Aristoph. Vesp. 70. 141. Ach. 722. Thuc. iv, 8. iv, 4. It 
is sometimes an interrogative particle : fxr/ nt) boKovfiev aot ovk cimy- 
Ka'ia emora bteXrjXvdei'ai ; Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 486. And in indirect 
interrogation, or inquiry, and when it signifies whether or not, it is 
joined with a subjunctive when something present is spoken of, with 
an optative when something past ; but with an indicative also when 

d v. Aristoph. Lys. 733. Thesm. 870. with p^ : viz. epireiroi-fiKri. — J. S. 
and Brunek.— J. S. / Kotv\(<tkiov in Aristoph., Brunck's 

e In this passage (1. 11. ed. E-eisk.) a ed, — J. S. 
subjunctive, not an indicative, is joined 



§ xiii. Rule 1.] Ov, 0>>k. 171 

the speaker wishes to intimate his belief of the affirmative; see Soph. 
Phil. 30. Eurip. Ale. 1130. Plato Gorg. p. 67. b. Soph. Ant. 1253. 
Lueill. Epigr. 115. 

M>) is added superfluously after certain verbs ; especially after 
verbs of denying, prohibiting, preventing, avoiding, refraining, &c. 
as, tov Traihiov apvovfiivov /iij a.Tropej3\r]Kevai, the boy denying that he 
had dropped them : Lucian, Lap. t. iii.* airayopevo) yuj) voieiv enK\r)- 
aiav, Aristoph. Ach. l6S. elpye fxrj fiXatjTavai, Piat. Phaedr. p. 251. 
r}b\afi(UTo pi) ou)<2,etv <pi\uvs, Eurip. Or. 1059- Sometimes ware is 
added before fii), when the latter is no longer redundant : uTre^o/xeroi, 
dare p) €fij3a\\eiv nvi, Thuc. i, 49. Some of the verbs after 
which p) is superfluously added may be seen in the following pas- 
sages ; the references to which are arranged according to the alpha- 
betical order of those verbs: Pausan. x, 14. Soph. Aj. 96. Ant. 
443. Aj. 741. Demosth. pro Cor. p. 27S. [1. 24. ed. Reisk.] Eurip. 
Hel. 1575. fragm. Sisyph. i, 10. Eurip. Here. F. 1298. Time. 
v, 25. Thuc. i, 10. ii, 101. Demosth. de Rhod. Lib. p. 193. 
[I. 5. ed. Reisk.] Eurip. Cycl. 265. Soph. Phil. 1303. Eurip. 
Tro. 1146'. Herodot. viii, 144. Eurip. Heracl. 963. and El. 1255. 
v. Bast, ad Plat. Symp. p. 114. Eurip. Andr. 645. Soph. Phil. 349- 
Herodot. ix, 12. Soph. Ant. 442. Herodot. vii, 12. Eurip. Heracl. 
507. Herodot. ix, 78. See Bergl. ad Alciphr. p. 215. and Hermann, 
Obss. Crit. p. 5. sq. M^ however is not always thus added : see 
Soph. Aj. 70. Phil. 118. 

M{]ttot€, compounded of /o) and 7rore, sometimes signifies perhaps, 
or, if at any time: see 2 Tim. ii, 25. 



SECTION XIII. — On ob and ovk, and the particles joined 

WITH THEM. 

Rule I. Ov, or ok, is sometimes put before substantives in 
Greek ; [as we put non before some English words ; non-perform- 
ance: e. g.] ob TrporreoeZavTO bta rijs Aevnabos rrjv ob TrepiTei^iirir, i. e. 
the want of a wall or fortification round it : Thuc. iii, 95. tov <po- 
pov f] obtc ctTroboo-is, the non-payment of the tribute: Lucian, Ver. H. 
i. v. Duk. ad Thuc. i, 37. 

It is placed emphatically at the end of sentences : e/ue ce "Awros 
Kal MiXiTOs airoKTelvat. fiey hvvavrai, (3\d\pat 5' ov : [Plat. Socr. Ap. 
Epict. Ench. c. 79.] ov [xoiboKeT, w 'iTnria' ovk' Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 
292. I. 14. 

* So in Italian : e molto Piu che non 1769. — Nous suivons a-peu-pres les regies 

credi son le tombe carche. Dante, Inf. d' architecture de Vitruve ; cependant les 

c. 9. Per sospetto che il Pontefice non maisons — en Italie — et en France — ne 

insidiasse alia sua vita. Guicciard. I. ressemblent pas plus a celles de Pline 

1. So Metastas. Artasers. iii, 1. — and in et de Ciceron que nos habilleraents ne 

French : dans les premiers temps de sa ressemblent aux leurs. Voltaire, sur la 

formation le foetus vegete plutot qu'il ne Poes. Ep.— J. S. 
vit. Buffon, t. 3. p. 13. ed. Paris. 



J72 Oi<, Ok. [Cuap. vn. § xiif. 

II. Ou yn/> serves for interrogation ; yap in reality assigning a rea- 
son for something preeecling, either expressed or understood : see 
Aristopli. Plut. 856. ov yap ravra fieyirrid eariv ; Plat, de Rej). vi. 
and with some expression of anger; ov yap kyj)7\v yepovra dvbpa. 
dneXOelv tov fh'ov, Trapa-^wptjaavra rols veois ', Lucian. 

III. It is sometimes used without interrogation to confirm a prece- 
ding negation ; as, ovk loorifioi, a> yevvaiorare, ov yap : Lucian, Dial, 
ftlort. 

IV. Ou yap dXXd in Attic writers is for : the expression is in 
reality elliptical, ov denying, yap assigning a reason, and aXka affirm- 
ing something different: 5 /u>) o-Kunrre //, w 'beKty'. ov yiipfaXX e^w 
KaKws : Aristoph. Ran. 58. also v. 498. 1180. and ov ratf dXXd, v. 
527. Phaedr. ov br) to y ehos. Socr. ov yap, d\Xd tovs fj.ev ev ypd/j.- 
fiacn Kr/TTovs waibids ytipiv cirepei re Kal ypax^et : Plato in Phaidr. p. 276* 
See Acts Ap. xvi, 37. 

V. Ov yap rui dXXd has nearly the same sense, ye being added 
after some other word ; and in this phrase rot confirms the negation : 
ov yap rot dXXd tovtov ye tov \6yov ttoWuiv br] Kal iroWaKis a.KT)i:oh)s 
del 8avfj.d£<i), Plato in Euthyd. 

VI. Ov yap, followed by dp, otherwise ; ijv.ov tyikoootpos eariv' ov 
yap av ovnos daeflels tovs Xoyovs biefyjei /caf3' fjfiwv : Lucian, in Tim. 
So ovbev ydp followed by av : ovbev yap i)v av evbatfiovearepov Trpobo- 
tov, Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 241. 1. lfj. ed. Reisk.] 

VII. Sometimes wore is added ; ov yap av wore iroXfiiav rr)v rpocpov 
re Kal fir^repa Keipetv, Plat, de Rep. V. 

VIII. Ov yap av ttov : onios av (jialvrjrai KaXXiaros toIs fxi] yiyvwaKOv- 
aiv ov yap dv ttov to~is ye elboaiv : for he could not appear so, I trow, 
to those ivho doknoiv him: Plato in Symp. [Oi> denies, ydp refers to 
fii] yiyvwoKovaiv, I say " to those ivho do not know him," for, &c. 
Tiov in some degree qualifies the denial. "Av has a signification of 
possibility or feasibility, which is here denied by ov.] 

IX. Ov[j.evovv, in one word, signifies — 1. atqui non, but not, and 
yet not : ov/uevovv 7/v cine'iv erepf, but no one else was allowed to 
speak: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 333. 1. 25. A — 2. truly not; not in- 
deed : 6 QpaavKXijs 6 fiX6ao<pos ovtos eariv ; oxijxevovv dXXos : truly 
no other, it is he himself: Lucian. [in Timon. p. j)3. A. ed. Salmur. 
where ov /uev ovv',~\ iravra yap tov dvbpos davpdctu)' (pvp.evovv biroaov 
elirelv bvvarov) more indeed than it is possible to express: Greg. 
Naz. 

X. — 3. for ovfxevroi ye or ov fxrjv, not however: ovpevovv navra 
ye afaviadfjvai, that every thing however was not consumed: 
Pausan.' 

s Ov and yap relate to something pre- fy'iica ipydaaaBal ri Se'ot naicov 6/j.cis ; ov- 

ceding, aXXa to what follows. See Ari- fievow 1\v elireTv erepy: ivhy no; but on 

stoph. Lys. 55. where p.a A" intervening the contrary he spoke so much that no one 

between ov yap and ctAAa, the sense of else could say a word: p. 274. 1. 16. ed. 

those words is not for, but, no, for (that Reisk. In the edition of Foulkes and 

is not enough) but (rather) &c. — J. S. Freind, p. 87, the meaning of the whole 

h The ovv in this word has reference, passage is utterly mistaken. — J. S. 

as it always has, to something preceding : « Add ovp-zvovv used interrogatively : 

d.p oiiv obV ZXsysv, Ibo-irep ouS' %ypa<pw : ov/xevovv jue irpoceSJ/ccts, otitj Ko96pvovs 



Rule 2—15.] 01>, Ok. * 173 

XI. Ov fir/v, but not ; not however ; ov nrjv ovbe, but not even, or 
but not either ; ov fxijv d\\' ovhk, however not even, however neither ; 
ov fii]v a\Xa, but however ; ov fievroi aXXa Kai, and ov fif/v aXXa rat, 
but however, yet notwithstanding. These forms serve for correction 
or rectification of something going before ; partly denying what has 
been said in too unqualified a manner, and partly introducing what 
is to modify it : ovtw fxev Ttjv A'tyvirrov 6 Kcutrap eyeipwoaTO. ov 
fxevroi sat aXXa (ov fxevroi aXXa cat, Hermann.) rrj K\eo7rdrpo;, rjcrTrep 
eVera Kai e-rreiroXefjiriKet, eyapio-aTo: Dion, xlii. p. 205. ov /x?)v dAXd 
tca'nrep tovtwv ovtws e^ovruv, ecrrtv rj napaKivbvvevoeiev av 6 7roXiriicds 
avrjp a\paodai rf]s KaXov/jtevqs irepiavToXoyias '. Plut. de sui laud. So 
ov fir/v ovbe : ov fxt/v ovb' el ovvayopevovai rots V7r' eyuou Xeyofievois, 
ovb' &s 6p8&s irepl rijs eiceivov bvva/jews yiv&oKovniv : Isocr. Paneg. 
p. 134. 

XII. Ov^ iJKKTTa is an extenuating expression for fxaXiara, chiefly, 
principally , most of all : eyw /jbevroi ov% rjiaara tovtov eveica ras yvval- 
tcas UTreTT€/u\pa, Plato Phaed. c. 66. fiiyas deos earlv 6 "Epws — TroXXayJj 
fxev rat aXXtj, ovy_ ijiaora be koto. Trjv yeveaiv '. Id. Symp. c. 6. rav- 
rais b% <pafiev rat ok, w ^.ojKpares, rats alriais eve^eaBai — * rat ov% 
i]KioTa 'AQrjva'uav oe, aXX' ev rots /uaXiora '. Id. in Crit. C 14. V. et 
Plut. in Cic. p. 856. 1. 40. 

XIII. Ov-% on, ov% 07rws, or jur) on, ftri onus, fiovovov, fiovovovyj, 
often signify not only, or not only not.*' [See Ch. vn. § x. R. 5. and 
§ xii. R. 11.] TavTt] be abvvara efycrovadat ov~% on ra ev rrj Eupw7r?/, 
(not only the nations in Europe,) aXX' ovb' ev rrj 'Aalq. edvos ev, &c. 
Thuc. ii, 97. firi 07vos (?iot only not) opyjuaQui ev pvQp.u), aXX' ovb' 
opdovoQai kbvvaoBe: Xen. Cyrop. i, 13. See Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 230. In the same manner ov-% ws, /uij us, ol>x olov, ifirov ye 
Kai. v. Arrian iii. p. 142. Athen. xi. p. 505. Philipp. ii, 12. 
where {iovov is added, and /u>) \xovov fir/ is in Aristoxen. (ap. Stob.) 
(oare firj /xovov p.rj <2r)re~iv, aXX', el bvvarov, juijoe elbevat ttjv rotavrijj' 
cvvova'iav : Serm. xcix. p. 542. vid. Jacobs, animadv. p. 295. 

XIV. Ov-^bpqs; (literally, do you not see?) is commonly used by 
the orators in a parenthesis and ironically, for olpai, videlicet, for- 
sooth : ciyaOfj be (ov% opas ',) Tv^rf avfj(3e(3t.toKO)s, Trjs efxijs uis <f>avXr)s 
Kctrriyope'is : Demosth. pro Cor. Tcavv yap irapa tovto (ovj( bpq.s ;) 
yeyove ret rwv 'EXXijvwv icpuyjxaTa, el tovtI to prjfxa, aXXa fii) tovtI bie- 
Xexdrjv eyu) '. Id. \bJ 

XV. Olbe by itself may often be rendered not even; ohoi be, ovbe 

elxes, avayvZvai tr' eTt ; so you thought, 152. 4. Non chk mille, ma piu di 

did you, that because you had on buskins cento milia, la basciava. Boccaccio, 

I should no longer know you? Aristoph. Decam. Giorn. 8. Nov. 7. Non sono tra 

Ran. 556. Here oZv has reference to the noi in nuraero d'uomini, non che di cit- 

supposed thought of the person addressed, tadini. Guicciardini, 1. 7. — J. S. 

— J. S. i Add ov repeated, not that not ; ov 

* Non che in Italian corresponds with fici.u ovk £94\ei, not that he is not willing, 

oi>x 'in exactly : Nulla speranza gli con- Kwpa Se fiiv ovk airoAvei' Bion, Id. i, 96. 

forta mai Non che di posa, ma di minor On ov ph, see Em. on Xen. Mem. iii, 13, 

pena. Dante, Inf. c. 5. Fece tremar la 3. Brunck on Aristoph. Lys. 465. On 

terra il compagnone, NoNfcuE la sala, ov fj.7], Brunck on Aristoph. Lys. 704. — 

tanto ando giu grave. Ptjlci, Morg.M. x. J. S. 



174 Ovbe. [Chap. vii. § xiii. 

ypu^avros t/vou, tuvto. iroieiv 7)deXrj/rav : Demosth. pro Cor. See also 
Demosth. 01. i. [p. 12. I. 14. ed. Rcisk.] Mr}be also has the same 
sense; Demosth. pro Cor. [p. 228. I. lrj. 17. ed. Reisk.] 

Ovbe is sometimes repeated for the sake of emphasis: ovbe yap 
ovbe rbv nov eralpov bel TrapeXOelv, Plato in Phaedr. [p. 214. 1. 36. ed. 
Bas. 1.]* 

XVI. M/?iie and oibe are sometimes followed by av t'i n, or bnovv, 
yevoiro, or yevrjrai, or iroirj, or the like, to signify exclusion of all 
possibility ; as, 01 be apuarewt rpo^oi irovf Ka/jupOevres, ovb' av, et ti 
yevoiro, T)]v el, ap^s bvvaiiTO av Xafielv evdvwpiav : not even if all 
imaginable devices were to be tried: Plut. irepl naib. aywy. ws 
ovb' av briovv yevrjrai, irepiawaovros ex rf]s avrov bvvaareias iroXtv, not 
even, let what may happen, not even in any case: Nazianz. ii, 
in Jul. 

XVIT. Ovbe els, firjbe els, and fxrjre eh, are used instead of firfbeis 
and vvbels, as being more empliatical : hfxoiv roivw ovb' av els ovbev &v 
Ibia rtvl bait], ravr aipeXoiro naXiv : Demosth. c. Lept. So yujjSe erepos 
for fjiriberepos, Plut. Symp. 1. ix. p. 742. Sometimes ovbe is put 
twice in the phrase, but with some word between ; as yto) yap on 
rroXts, aXX' ovb' av lbiu)rr)s ovbe els ovtljs ayevvijs yevoiro '. iEschin. C. 
Cte s . p. 280. And sometimes els, or ev, being one of the component 
parts of ovbels, or ovbev, is repeated with its compound : eV re 
ovbev Kareorr} 'ia/xa, Thuc. ii, 51. So Heliod. /Eth. ii, 27. extrem. 

XVIH. Ovb" eyyvs, and fir}b' eyyvs, (which latter is much more 
rare,) signify far from it, nor any thing like it: e-^ei be ov^ ovrta 
ravra, ovb" eyyvs: Demosth. in Mid. p. 389- 1. 30. and ttoXXov ye bel, 
or ttoXXov ye teal be~i, has a similar sense; il s'enfaut Men. Interro- 
gatively in Plato, Leg. vii. ftovXeade £r)fiiav rols ^j) noiovert ypcKJxvfiev, 
rj ttoXXov ye bet ; 

XIX. And also ovbe ttoXXov bel, in which the negative applies to 
what precedes rather than to ttoXXov bel : ov yap ravra cut' eKelviov 
yeyovev, ovbe ttoXXov bel, nor any thing near it ; nor any thing like 
it : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. (j>avrio-erai yap ovbe ttoXXov bel rrjs yevrj~ 
oofxevtjs a£wv alayivris, Demosth. adv. Lept. 

XX. And in a similar signification ovb' oXiyov bel is said : but in 
this phrase the negative is not referrible to any thing extraneous : 
ovbe ye 'iaov karlv abiKrjfxa, ovb' oXiyov bel : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. 

* See H. St. Thes. ii, 1537. D — J. S. 



END OF PART I. 



PART II. 

CHAPTER VIIL 
THE CONJUNCTION. 

Of conjunctions in general, it may be remarked that, although they 
properly connect similar parts of speech, they are sometimes found 
connecting different ones ; as a participle and a verb : Uepuas be olba 
— aya\fxaTa /lev, ko.1 viqovs, kcl\ fiojfxovs, ova eV v6[iu> 7roiev[xei'ovs 
ibpverrdai, dXXd Kal rolai iroievtri fxwpir]v eTri(pepovo~i : (for eirHpepov- 
Tas,) Herodot. Clio c. 31. An adverb with a substantive : Qvaias 
brjpoaiq re kcii ibiurai duovaiv, (for Ibiq,) Paus. in Arc. p. 522. 1. 6. 
A genitive case absolute with a complete sentence or proposition, 
vooot re yap eitt&Sovro kcit du^orepa' t>7« re Spas tov evtavrov tclvttjs 
oiktijs eV j; aadevoiiatv ardpiairoi jUaXiora, feat to ywplov aua, eV w 
eoTparoTrebevovro, eXwbes icai -^aXenov i]v, (for tov ^b)plov e\u>bovs kuI 
XaXen-ov uvtos,) Thuc. ii, 47. v. Ter. Phorm. v, 6, 46V 

SECTION I.— On the conjunction d\Xd. 

Rule I. 'AXXd is sometimes put after fxhv, instead of be : ra fikv 
TroXXd caw dXX* eVi tov AeceXeccou ttoXc/jov, &c. Demosth. adv. 
Androt. p. 597. [I. 25. ed. Reisk.] v. Horn. II. tt; 240. 

It is used both in proposing objections, whether interrogatively or 
otherwise, and in answering them : ri yap (3ovX6/xevot ^ere7re^7re<T0' 
av avTovs ; inl rt)v eipfivrjv ; d\X' VTrrjpj^ev airaoiv. dXX' eiri tov 7ro\e- 
fiov ; dXX' avTol wept elpijvTjs efiovXeveade : for with what design could 

1 Different moods and tenses are often omnem reice et segnitiem amove, at que ad 

connected by conjunctions both in Greek ingenium vetus versutum te recipis tuum : 

and Latin : redval-gs £> Upon', % ko.k- Plaut. Asin. ii, 1, 7. but such a construc- 

rave Be\\epo(p6vTriy : Iliad £*, 164. nunc tion is often required by the sense, as in 

cujusjussu venio, et quamobrem venerim, Cic. Philipp. ii. c, is. §21. and in the 

dicam : Plaut. Amph. Prol. 17. See passage from Homer.— J. S. 
also iii, 2, 24^ quin tu abs te socordiam 



1?C 'AXX«. [Chap. viii. § i. 

you have sent for them ? for peace ? but that was in the possession of 
all before. For the war then ? but you yourselves were deliberating 
about peace: Demostli. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. 17. See Cic. pro Arch, 
p. c. 4. [§ 9.] pro Plancio [c. 4. § 11.] 

II. In answers it often signifies concession or assent ; as, dXX' el re 
Xeyere, Kal noiijauj Taiira, why you say well, &c. Xen. Anab. vii. 

III. Sometimes c'tXXd is, at least : ei fit] izdai bvvarav dXXd caret 
<j>v\as, Aristot. et fit) otuv re 7rept tjfiepav rr/v Trpwrriv, dXXd tt} bevrepa 
ye -netpareov e"£evpe~iv rijv Ibeav tov irvperov : Galen, ad Glauc."' eiri- 
orafiai yap npioTOV fiey 'AQqvaLovs, el teat fir/ iravra. fied' i/iwc elmv, ctXX' 
ovv vrrep ye tFjs eavTwv <ru)TT)pias nuvTa TroiijcrovTcis : Isocr. in Archi- 
dam. p. 144. 'AXX' ovv in Eurip. also, Cycl. 643. [648.] and dXXd 
yovv in Eurip. Iph. A. 90S. re Sometimes et fit), or other words to 
which dXXd in this sense has reference, are omitted, and their signifi- 
cation is involved in that of dXXd :° ■KpoviroXois Xeyw wdelvirvXas Taab\ 
ws av ctXXa 7rat6' efirjv 'Pvo-^/ueff : Eurip. Or. 15f5l. u> deal ira- 
Tpijjoi, avyyeveade. y aXXa vvv ! now if ever : Soph. El. 411. But 
dXXd ye, thus elliptically used, sometimes signifies even : at Aaice- 
haifiovimv firjrepes — dXX' avrai ye atyttcofievai to. rpavfiara avruiv (of 
their sons who had fallen in battle,) eireo-KOTow : iEl. V. H. xii, 
21. as if he had said, they were not accustomed to send others, 
dXX' avrai ye, &c. 

IV. 'AXXd fit), or dXX' ohy), is put for ov he, which would be a 
barbarism: el tovto\ to pijfia, dXXd u?) robi bieXe^drjv eyw : if I made 
use of such and such an expression, and not such and such : Demosth. 
pro Cor. 

V. (VI.) *AXXd yap is sometimes interrogative, but much oftener 
affirmative ; dXXd still retaining its adversative nature, and yap inti- 
mating a reason for the objection or opposition signified by dXXd : et 
eyui fya'ibpov ayvow, Kal efiavTOV eTriXeXrjcrfiai' dXXd yap ovberepa eon 
tovtwv : Plato Phaedr. p. 228. dXX' ov yap 'eireide' (i. e. Xerxes could 
not prevail on Artayntas to receive any thing else instead,) btbol to 
spdpos : Herodot. ix, 109- The nature of these phrases is made appa- 
rent by a small alteration of the puuetuation : ctXX', ov yap eireide, 
bibol to <papos. See Schaef. Melet. Cr. p. 75. sqq. firjKen 'AXefavbpov 
ideXeiv irpo'ievai tov irpoow, dXX' oKvelv yap irvvdavofievov on avTOs 
•rtpoaayoi'. Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, fj. i. e. dXX' otcvelv, Trwdavdfievov 
yap, q. d. eirvvdavero yap, i. e. on envvdavero, on, &c. v. Aristoph. 
Nub. 798. (795.) So sed enim in Latin : v. Virg. iEn. i, 23. Ovid, 

m Et iidf is put after aXXa. in Eurip. Iph. TicratrO' aXXa rep xp6vq> irore "Bifx-Kavras 

A. tv' aXXa. tovto Kardavovo-' exw avrovs : Id. Phil. 1041. ab 5' aXXa 

aeSev fi.vT)fie?ov, el (ij) rols i/iols ireiffQris rovde XPV$ e > ^ ^ * v °-p<reva>v, aXX' iv 

XSyois: vers. 1239. — J. S. ywaiKwv x 6 P ff ''' eKirvevaai /3iov : Eurip. 

n 'Ayddwv, eireity aavTbv eiriSovvai <pdo- Heracl. 565. iav ovv a\\a vvv y' en — 

ve7s, aAA.' i/xdrtov yovv xPVO" ot/ rjfuv rovrot ideX^crrtre CTparevecrBai re Kal irpaTreiv 

Kal (rrpScpiov : Aristoph. Thesra. 250. — &|t'ws vpuv avraiv, — iaois av, lam, &c. 

J. S. Demosth. 01. iii. p. 37. I. 18. ed. Reisk. 

Ti Stjt' av aXXa vvv a' eiraxpeXo'iiJ? See also Aristoph. Thesm. 424. Nub. 

Zyta ; Soph. Ant. 552. r) yvdbo-erai yovv 1364.1369. and Lucian, Dial. Charont. 

aXXa T7)viKav6\ on irSvos trepiffoSs ecrn et Merc. p. 238. B. ed. Salmur. — J. S. 
Ta.v "AjSoi 1 aefietv : Id. ib. 779. rlffaaOe, 



Rule 2—10.] 'AXXa. 177 

Met. ix, 248. Sometimes dXXd yap is followed by be in another 
member of the sentence: see Orph. Arg. 771. Soph. Aj. 167. 
'AXXd br/ is also used affirmatively: dXXd bt) deovsovre XavBaveiv, ovre 
fituaaadat bvvarov : Plato de Rep. ii. p. 365. 1. SJ. [Hereby expresses 
an assurance that the position will not be disputed.] And the Greeks 
have no mode of expressing non antem, but not, and not, except 
dXXd fir/, or (more rarely) dXX' ov. 

VI. (VII.) 'AXXd vfi At'a, but forsooth, is used ironically in offering 
objections, or stating them by anticipation : dXXd, vr) At'a, eice'ivo av 
"taws e'iirot npos ravra : Demosth. adv. Lept. [p. 457- 1- 22. ed. 
Reisk.] and on the other hand, vfj At' dXXd is used in answering such 
objections. 

VII. (VIII.) 'AXXd hri rat is, even, nay even: abeiav eayov cnrievai 
O7rov av fiovXwvrai, dXXd hi) rat Trpbs TroXefiiovs : Liban. 

VIII. (IX.) TlXrjv dXXd, and irXr)v rat, however, yet : TrXr)v dXXd rl 
av 7rd0ot/ut ; Lucian, in Prometh. in fin. but 7rXr)j> dX\' rj, ttXi)v el, and 
TrXj/y eav, are except : ov yltp avBpvirov vyiaciei 6 larpevuv, irXrjv dXX' yj 
Kara ovfifie{3r)Kos : Aristot. Metaph. i, 1. 

IX. (X.) 'AXXd rot, but, but however, but truly: Eurip. Hel. 
750. and so dXXd fir/v. This latter too is but in the sense in which but 
is used in assumption, as in the minor propositions of syllogisms : el 
yap elm (iwfioi, elirl rat deoi' dXXd ju/yv et<rt jSojfiol' elaiv apa rat Oeoi I 
Lucian, in Jov. Tr. [p. 229. c - ef l. Salmur.] 'AXXd fiijv rat is, 
moreover, or but moreover : dXXd /xrjv cat tuiv fiapfiapwv oaoi Ttporepov 
a.(piivia$ov Kat etrraola^ov, — eKovres avrtp irpoffe^wpovv '. Herodian, 
ii, 4. 

X. (XI.) 'AXX' ?) signifies, except, unless, and therefore usually fol- 
lows a negative, or an interrogation implying negation. Ovk — dXX' i) 
is to be explained by supposing a member of the sentence to be 
omitted on account of the doubt or ignorance of the speaker or 
writer ; which omitted member is to be joined by means of rj to a 
preceding one : ohbev 'Apyetot 7rdXat dXX' rj KareyeXwv rwv TaXaiiriopov- 
fieviov, Aristoph. in Pac. 475. i. e. dXX' rj KareyeXurr, rj ova otS' o tl 
eiroinw. the Argives did nothing, but either laughed or I know not 
what they did: which amounts to the same as, the Argives did 
nothing but laugh ; p ovbev dXX' rj TrpoaKwe'iv v7reXa/jfiavov, Lucian, 
Dem. Enc. p. 924. rivos jiev ovv eveic av rts, ws elire'iv, e'w'q, dXX' j) 
7wj> towvtwv iibovwv evetca ; Plato Phaedr. p. 258. 1. 42. v. Demosth. 
Phil. i. p. 45. I. 13. [ed. Reisk.] adv. Phorm. p. 585. I. 47- [p. 909- 
1. 3. ed. Reisk.] jEschin. in Tim. p. 1Q1. 1. 42. [p. 156. 1. 9- «d- 
Reisk.] Herodian iii. c. 10. i, 13. Aristoph. Ran. 1105. 229- Plat. 
Apol. c. 5. Sophist, p. 225. Luke xii, 51. Isaeus de Aristarch. 
Hered. p. 261. [1. 8. ed. Reisk.] Plat. Phaed. p. 97. Apol. p. 34. 
Heliod. v, 2. 

Sometimes when these particles are thus joined, the meaning of 
each is apparently and obvio jsly the usual and ordinary one ; as, epol 
ovbev £7rto-/jjuatVerat, dXX' ?} {but either) tS aufiarif {jlov, rj (or) rw Krq- 

P 'fly ovk wyaQ6v £<tti rb potbtlv. iyib tLViroriy', a\\' t) ttjs QaKrjs imr\r}(Tp.{- 
yap atreddicpvffa vvv. yvd/j-nv i/J.}jv, ovd' vos : Aristoph. Vesp. 984. — J. S. 
Viger. z 



i?8 "Av. [Chap. viu. § ii. 

nihif i*ov, *i r<j> hofaply, &c. Epict. Encli. c. 24.. So Theogn. 485.' 
But dXV jji (V.) is truly, of a certainty, in truth : uXX' j), to Xeyu/ue- 
vov, w avbpes, eyu> ical Trap' 1 vp.lv Kai Trap' erepois TrXeioari, irenovQa to 
Tijs yXuvKos, utottov m\ napabolov irados : Dio Chrys. The phrase is 
sometimes used in questions, j) being then interrogative, and d\Xd 
still adversative; as, to Phaedrus saying nepl tus bUas Xeyerai ko.1 
ypatperai, (>/ priToptKi) re^vr) viz.) Xeyerai be icnt irepi tcis brjfirjyopias' 
eVt irXeov be ouc aKrjKoa : Socrates answers, dXX' ?) tus Nedropos re k<xi 
'OSufTirews reacts [xovov Trepl Xoywv ctKi'iKoas, — ru>v be YlaXafirjbovs upi)- 
koos yiyovas ; have you then heard only of, &c. Plato in Phaidr. 
p. 26l. 

So ciXXa on, and dXXd rj oti, except, except that : o be irapa Trobas 
€Trote~iTO Kivbvvov, ov% erepov i)v, a.XX' 6-1 naaiv iariois r/ vavs e^epero : 
Synes. Ep. 

XI. (XII.) Before verbs in the imperative mood dXXct is hortatory ; 
as, dXX' avotye ty\v Qvpav ! Aristoph. Nub. 183. 01 [xkv avTiKpvs km- 
ovTes, o't be kotottiv, dXX' 'ire avv noXXrj Karatypovijaet en' civtovs : Dion. 
Hal. hi/ And it is sometimes elegantly thus used, when a transition 
is suddenly made from previous discourse to cohortation, its signifi- 
cation appearing to be, but enough has been said, or but arguments 
enough have been adduced: see Horn. II. (3, 139. «, 274. 393. 210. 
337. Eurip. Iph. A. 903. Hel. 1672. 

It sometimes follows comparative adverbs instead of 7} : tov ratyov 
eTTKrrifxOTaTOV (^eXafujSavov), ovk ev w Keivrai fiaXXov, dX\' ev <o j? b6£,a 
avTui* aeifivqaros KaraXeiTrerai : Time, ii, 43. v. Wyttenb. ad eclog. 
hist. p. 423. So biKaioTepov — dAXd — , Thuc. ib. [p. 82. 1. 2. ed. 
Bekk.]* 



SECTION II.— On the conjunction av (for which the 

POETS USE K€ AND Kev,) WITH REGARD TO ITS FIRST AND 
SECOND USE. 

Rule I. *A» sometimes signifies if: it is then to be considered as a 
word distinct from that which will be principally treated of in this 
section and the following ; for in that sense it is contracted from eav, 
and therefore has the a long. It is to be observed that the Attic 
poets never use av for eav, if, but always ?>, and that av, if, is always 

9 'AW' ?), profecto, truly, really : a\\' /xdcrei (jloi ; Eurip. v)) Af &AA' &piar' 

fy Tpix6f3poortss robs \6<povs pov KaT<£(payov ex eL > Aristoph. Thesm. 260. Well: &A.A& 

a\\' fy irpb Seiwou ttjv fii^apKW KareSo- irparr', el aoi Sonet: Id. ib. 216. There- 

pai: Aristoph. Ach. 1111, 1112. See fore, then; noting an inference or conse- 

Brunck, who refers to Valck. on Hippol. quence : tovtI itovr\p6v a\\' virairoKivr)- 

932. &AA' % x a ^ K ' l0t/ exeii' ti <paivei reov : Aristoph. Thesm. 924. v. 598. 

koIKov, Aristoph. L^s. 749. and in the aXKa koI, — : Agath. rj5\ fiev ovv Ke<pa\ij 

same sense, v. 928. — J. S. irepideros, %v eycb twKTcop <popG> : Eurip. 

r Ueivricreis, aAA 5 enaviffrwr Aristoph. vr] top A? a A. A. a tcair iT-fiSeia irdvv, and 

Plut. 539. vfjLerepov evrevdev epyov S> a very proper one it is too: Id. ib. 259. 

vdpes' aAAct Tats &/mu ei<ri6vres ws rd- dAA' '6/xais, yet nevertheless : but yet not - 

Xto-ra rovs \i60vs atpeAKere: Aristoph. withstanding: Id. Ach. 402. Nub. 1363. 

Pac. 426. see v. 510.— J. S. a\\' ovSi, not even : Id. ib. 1396.— J. S. 

* Add a\\h) nay more ; yes : S.p' ap- 



Rule 1—3.] '"Ay. 179 

joined with a subjunctive mood. See Hermann, diss, de praecept. 
quibusd. Atticist. p. 17. 

The conjunction av, therefore, as distinct from the word which 
signifies if, may be considered — 1. in its chief and predominant 
power, that of rendering the meaning of other words less definite and 
determinate; and this power is observable through all its other uses. 
— 2. in its signification of potentiality ; or of fitness or obligation. — 
3. as it is redundant.— 4. as it is deficient. 

II. — 1. As to the first use ofav, (termed aoptoroXoyiKos,) os av and 
the like, when something uncertain is spoken of, so that if any may 
be said, are joined with a subjunctive mood ; and in the same case 
with an optative when what is spoken of is indicated as being 
thought of, or having been thought of, by some one : ootyol fiev avrol 
Xeyeiv yeyovaviv, aXXovs re tcoiovgiv, 01 av bwpotyopelv avrols — edeXojffi: 
Plato Pheedr. p. 266. i. e. if any one be willing to bring them gifts. 
Had he said, 01 av avrols bwpo<popelv edeXoiev, the sense would be, if 
they think any one will bring them gifts ; ct£tw larpos elvat, ical 
iiXXov iroielv, w av rfjv rovrtav eTrierrfj/ir)v irapabaj : Plato Phzedr. p. 268. 

"Os av, &c. may be joined with an indicative mood, when a certain 
thing is spoken of, but of which some part, or of which the nature 
or manner, admits a doubt: Dieae. ri <j>epeis; Bceot. 6V ear av* 
ctyaOa Boiwrols a7r\ws, opiyavov, yXa%oj, xpiadws, OpvaXXibas, &C. 
Aristoph. Ach. 873. why I bring truly all that the Bceotians have 
of any value, if indeed all those things are reckoned valuable. The 
meaning of v. 241. II. p, will appear, on accurate examination, 
to be, certainly the Trojans will get the body of Patroclus, whether 
they be about to offer any other outrage to it, or to throw it to the 
dogs and birds. In this first use av often resembles the Latin addi- 
tion cunque : oaoi av, as many soever as ; o av, whatsoever ; 
ov av and 67rov av, wheresoever, in tvhatsoever place; ore av, when- 
soever ; onus av, in whatsoever manner, &c. 

III.— 2. (III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. X.) As to the potential use of 
av, (which is termed bwrjriKos,) it is to be remarked that it properly 
signifies possibility without actuality. With the indicative mood of 
different tenses : u ravra b', el fiev Traprjv, Xeywv av v/uds ebibaaKOV : I 
would have taught you : Demosth. Ep. iii. p. 117. ovbev av, wv vvvl 
7reTroir}Kev, ewpafyv : he would have done — : Id. Phil. i. ov 6 Mapavas, 
el to. bixaia at Movcrat binaaai tfdeXov, aitebeipev av : would have 
flayed: Lucian, Dial. Jun. et Lat. See Theogn. 436. ical vv k 
en irXeovas A.vki<i)V tcrave bios 'Obvaaevs, el fjifj ap' o£u vorjcre fxeyas KOpv~ 
6aioXos H EKTii)p: would ov might have slain — : Horn. II. e, 679. See 
II. <p, 544. tTjs elprivr/s av bujfiapriJKei, Demosth. pro Cor. With the 
optative : bo^as fjev eyiay' av irov avy^wpoiriv; to. b' erepa ravr ovk civ : 
Plato Phileb. p. 36. I. 31. " ri ovv," av ris einoi: Demosth. 01. i. 

' In Brunck's edition I find oV iarlv icepavvbs ir66ev h.v (pzperar, bat whence can 
ayaBa, tut Bmnck acknowledges the the thunderbolt come? Aristoph. Nub. 
common reading car' hi>, which is that of 395. &AA' ovk &v zo-ti o-vKocpdurov Hy- 
two of his MSS. also, to be as good as fxaros, but there can be no ring or amulet 
that of his edition.— J. S. for the biteofan informer : Aristoph. Plut. 

» With the indicative present : ott' o 885.— J. S. 



ISO "Ay. ' [Chap. vin. 

[p. 13. I. 6. ed. R.] el anioToiriv, ovk av utottos eirjv : Plato Phaeclr. 
]). 229- ovk ay if.ws e'l-q, fie cannot be my son : licrodot. Er. c. 6'3. v/j.1v 
yap, e'iirep Kal ueTplois tcareatcevaarai tu twv vo/jIojv, us twv KaXXio~rwv ay 
e'ir} vofxuiv : — must be, is, &c. Plato de Log. i. tovtm apyvptov fiev irpoei- 
fxrfv ay, <pt\iav 5' ok ac : Lucian, Demostli. Enc. p. 906*. and. interro- 
gatively : av yap av kuijitjv a.TroaT))aais ', av yap av irpoaeXOots — uirou 
Kivbvvos TzupeoTi ; iEscliiu. in Ctes. rjpu)Tr)ae ri e'ir) u^ios iraOelv, is, 
he asked, what punishment he deserved; iipwrqae tL av e'ir} a^tos 
■waOeiy, he asked, what "punishment he might by possibility deserve, 
or might be about to deserve, though deserving none at the time." 
With the infinitive mood ; tJt'fdr)fiev yap kv rrj roiavrrf TroXet paXtara 
av evpelv biKaioavvrjv, Karibovres be Kplvai ay, o iraXai Sirjrovjxev : Plato 
de Rep. iv. p. 421. tL av o'lei aKovaavras elrrelv ; Id. in Phaedr. 
p. 268. See Demostb. Ol. i. [p. 9. 1. 1. ed. Reisk.] With a participle ; 
ov ra 7w uvti biKaia pavdavetv, aXXa ra bo^avra av irXijdei : Plato in 
Phaedr. p. 260. ravra kv krepqis fxev 'laws av wkvovv elire'iv, — ws ovk 
av TTKTTevdeis ck tujv Xeyofxevav : Isocr. in Nicocl. p. 70. 

"Av with the indicative mood of any tense often signifies the doing 
or occurrence of something not at any particular time, but, usually, 
frequently, every now and then, or, as it may happen, on occasion : 
ov ttoXXo. ebelro, /cat yap eKvofi'iios /xfyjaxyvero" 6.XX' apyvpiov hpa^uas 
av ifTt](T e'lKoai els tfiaTiov y\ oKrwyb' av els VTrobrj/xara' Kal Tals abeX- 
^io7s ayopaaat yiTwviov eKeXevaev av — " irvpiov r av eberjdr) fxebi/xvuv 
TerTupuv : Aristoph. Plut. £)83. npos be tov6\ o fxot (3aXot vevpoonabris 
drpaKros, avros av raXas elXv6p.r)v bvarnvos e"£eXKu)v nobu 7rpos tovt 
av. Soph. Phil. 290. w 

The English would often expresses this sense, when the tense 
joined with av is a past one. See also Aristoph. Lys. 510. 518. Pac. 
640. 647. and Horn. II. a, 139. where kcv is joined with a future 
tense. 

An optative with av may sometimes be rendered by an imperative;* 
as, Xeyois av, say on, if you please : Plato in Phaedr. irpoayois av, 
Id. ib. kXvois av, J> Vh£ : Lycophr. vs. 9* x w P 0ls a,/ e ' ffw crvy Ta X ei > 
Soph. El. 1498. But sometimes av is joined with the imperative 
mood itself; as, (ptXyaarov jue av, Aristoph. Ach. 1200. [*Av softens 
the command, and gives it more of the civility of a request.] 

It signifies choice or volition : iroaov av irpia'io, wore tt}v yvvaina 



v The position of Brunck (in his note yv&p.t\v exoiev, evrvxh s ^'1 V *7^ : Eurip. 
on Aristoph. Eq. 400.) that the optative I^fen. 1207.— J. S. 

mood in its potential sense is always ac- Wf Nihil notius usu particulse av con- 
companied by av, may he refuted by many ^Eturali cum indicativo in narration ibus 
passages; e.g. ov /j.y yap n naicwTcpov 'Mfk significatur non tam res facta, quam 
aAAo irddoi/ii, ov8' e'/ kzv toD TraTpbs\^aRs fieri potuit, aut fieri solet : ideo ex- 
airo(pdi.iJ.evoLo irv9oifj.r)v, Horn. II. T,,32'ljKTimiturper/i?r6,/o?'<assean,autperveib«m 
See Od. v, 2-lS. outis — avfy -^-'irve i-lffioleo. 7\yavaKT0W av, indignari solebam, 
<reie yvvcuica, Od. |, 123. ewea'-y^p^Lysias p. 272. [ed. Reisk.] irpuros ripuv 
vvKTas re ical ^fiara x«A./feos &k/j.o>i> omk% rjyeTr av, prajire solebat: [Aristoph. Vesp. 
v6dev Kari&iv SeicdTT) is yalav 'IkoWo 269.] Brunck. ad 1. c. — J. S. 
Hesiod, Theog. 723. d\A.' ovk av /xaxi- x Dem. airirov. CI. iSov. Dera. eioir'' 
o-airo- x*<raiTo yap, ei ixax^a euro : Ari- &v. Run! away! Aristoph. Eq. 1161. — 
stoph. Eq. 1057. el 8' ay.e'tvov' ol 6eol J. S. 



§ iii. Rule l.] "Av. 1S1 

awoXafie'iv ', Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 36. 6 5' etcelvo Xeyuv aXXo av ti fj 
■jtoXiv Xeyoi, must intend or luish to say : Plato de Rep. iv, p. 420. 

Also fitness, obligation, duty : ov yap eyio aeo (prjfxl ^epewrepov 
fiporov uXXov efiuevai — >■ rji ovk av, fiaffiXrjas ava arofi eyjav, ayo- 
pevots : Horn. II. a, 250. 

IV. (XI.) In its potential use ay has sometimes a signification of 
the future, with different moods and tenses ; with the future of the 
indicative ; ^ as, ovk eanv ottws ovk av a^ebov anavra Kaica ireiadfxeda, 
Isocrat. in Areop. 

V. (XII.) With a future infinitive ; evofxiae tovs uev tovtwv oXiycj- 
povvras tv-^ov ay koi ruiv fiei£6vwv KaTatppov^aeiv, Isocr. in Busir. p. 
448. 

VI. (XIII.) With a future participle ; at/r« bij, ws fxaXa (j>tXo<j>povT)- 
tikws av befyuHTOfxevos dirrjVTi](Tev. 

VII. (XIV.) With the infinitive of the present; boKel fxoi ddXa 
irpondels, uaXurra av iroieiv (for i:oiii<reiv) kvaoKeTaQai etcaara, &<tt€, 
birore beotTO, e^eiv av (for e^eiv) •KapeaKeva<T[xevots j^prjcraffdat : Xeu. 
Cyrop. i. fjyovfxat chorus av ovyyvwjjirjs rvyx&vetv, (for Tev^eaQai,) 
Demosth. Phil. i. 

VIII. (XV.) With the aorists of the infinitive : vouiaas ovk av en 
a vfx fii^at (for crvfxfii^etv) avra tovs uiaOocpopovs, Xen. 'E\Ajjj>. vi. ev r£ 
dacpaXel i'/bq eaofxai, ws /xrjbev civ en kukov iradelv '. (for weitjeodai) Xen. 
Cyrop. viii. 

IX. (XVI.) With a participle present: eVel eyvcj ovk av bwa/uevos 
ttjs irvXetjjs Kpare'iv, (for bwrjcrofievos.) 

X. (XVII. XVIII.) As to the participles of the aorists with av, 
they cannot have any signification of the future, but must necessarily 
signify past time. If ever they seem to be used of the future, they 
are rather employed to indicate the shortness of the time in which 
any thing is completed ; for the participles of the present have a 
signification of some continuance or length of time. 

In the phrase ovk olb' av el ireiaai/ut, Eurip. Med. 940. Ale. 48. 
av is out of its place, as it belongs to the optative: I know not if 
I can (or shall) persuade. 



SECTION III. — On the third and fourth uses of av. 

Rule I. — 3. The third use of av, called irapairXripwuaTiKos, or 
expletory, is when it is redundant. This it properly is, only after a 
considerable number of parenthetical words ; in which case its repe- 
tition is of some advantage to the sense: see Soph. Ant. 46(5. In 
other cases of the repetition of this conjunction, the second av is so 
far from being a mere expletive, that it has a peculiar energy and 
grace. Excepting the case of parenthesis, av can be repeated in the 
same member of a sentence, only if the first av belongs to the prin- 

y 'Apes ye tovt' av ey<& iror' o^o^ai ; <p\avpov ipycLtreaQi' <£ri, Aristopli. Nub. 
Aristoph. Nub. 465. ovdiv yap av /tie 1157.— J. S. 



182 "Apn, ? Apa. [CHAP. VIII. § iv. 

cipal verb, and the second to some other word, adjecting separately 
some part or circumstance to what is principally spoken of. Such 
words are not only those particles which admit of some limitation 
of their signification, hut also any predicates. Of the former sort 
are Kal in mv, ov, ttws : of the latter tis, ■n-o'ios, and any substantive or 
adjective whatever. In iEschyl. Ag. 351. ovk av y eXovres audit 
dvddXoiev av, the first av does not belong to eXovres, for the victory 
is not a matter of doubt; but to ovk avBis, qualifying the negation, 
not easily, &c. "Ooris yap i)v exeivov 6 Kravwv, ratf "^ K&/t' av roiavrr] 
X*ipi Tifibjpelv OiXoi : Soph. (Ed. R. 139- Here the first av regards 
OeXoi, the second mpe, perhaps even me. In vs. 44-5. cvdels av is, 
if you shall happen to go away, if perchance you shall depart. In 
vs. 601. the first av belongs to uer' aXXov hpiovros. In vs. 772. the 
first av regards rw (for rivi) j±d$.ovi, to whom who may perhaps be 
•preferable to you? In 857. the first av is referable to rfjbe- in 862. 
to ovhev in 1052. to ?)'§'. — See Aristoph. Vesp. 506. Plato Leg. iv. 
p. 705. I. 13. Demosth. Phil. i. [p. 40. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.] Aristoph. 
Acli. 210. Plato de Rep. iv. p. 420. 1. 25. Aristoph. Vesp. 506. 
Eurip. Or. 710. Plat, in Phaedr. p. 257- 1. 23. 3 

II. — 4. The fourth and last use of av is that which is termed eXXei7r- 
tikijs, in which either something is understood with av and implied 
by that particle, or av itself is defective or understood : roiovros 
e&nv, ws el Kal ur) Ireirotr/Kev, d\\' eiroirjrrev av : yet he would have 
done it, (had occasion offered, or the like :) Synes. ad Fratr. tovs 
£e Kal firi TrXavavras (speaking of informers, underst. ol/xat beiv airo- 
rpoTria^eadai) on awenXacav av, because they would have fabricated 
charges (if they had had an opportunity, or the like.) Synes. 

III. (IV. V.) Of the omission of av itself: pq.ovi Kal noXv raweivo- 
repa) vvv £"x.pb>fieQa rw QiXIttttu), for k\pwp.eQa av : Demosth. 01. i. 
The Attics seldom omit av, if that can properly be said to be omitted 
or defective, which is not necessary or indispensable: for it is not 
true that dV is a necessary particle. It only renders language which 
is uncertain in itself, still more doubtful. Of this its service the 
Attics are very fond of availing themselves; so that they even repeat 
it several times together for the purpose of modifying or limiting 
expressions in various ways. The poets however often omit it : see 
Horn. II. ft, 340. Pind. 01. iii. extr. xi, 21. Pyth. x, 95. iEschyl. 
Choeph. 592. Soph. El. 800. Ant. 604. Aj. 921. Eurip. Iph. A. 
1210. [See note v, p. 180.] *Av is seldom used with a verb fol- 
lowing el with an imperfect or aorist. 



SECTION IV. — ON THE CONJUNCTIONS apa, apa, AND ye. 

"Apa and apa differ in this, that by prose writers and epic poets 
apa is used in interrogation ; by the other poets, and especially by 
the dramatic poets, apa if the first syllable be short, and apa if long, 

z See Aristoph. Thesm. 196. Ran. 572. .'581. Nub. 1396. Ach. 218.— J. S. 



Rule 1—4.] "Apa/Apa. 183 

whether in interrogation or in the signification of therefore ; but in 
the signification of perchance, perhaps, apa with the first syllable long 
will scarcely be found, because, as this meaning is less emphatieal, 
less stress is required on the accentuated syllable in pronunciation. 
It is to be observed besides, that apa used for continuation or con- 
nexion of narration, especially after fiev and be, is most frequent in the 
epic poets, but not so in Attic writers. "Apa, signifying therefore, 
and without interrogation, is never placed in the beginning of a sen- 
tence : but interrogatively, and with the signification of ergone, it is 
so placed : v. Auacr. li, 1. 2. 5. has then? so then? See Hermann, 
ad Aristoph. Nub. 142. 

Rule I. "Ap' ovv is never put without interrogation at the begin- 
ning of a sentence : ap' ovv only is so placed, and that interrogatively. 
See Hermann, ad Soph. Ant. 628. ed. Erf. min. 

II. It is very frequently subjoined to some other word, and has 
then nearly the same signification as ttov, or 'laws : el uj) apa kv t£ 
'HAvcr/w 7reb!(j> to 1*v\i-k6giov ouvenpoTelTo, unless perchance, &c. Ari- 
stid. 

III. It signifies therefore: rjbo^ricrev cipa el ju>) to. ofiota yevvalws 
eveyicoi, Appian. So evvorjaov apa : vouv apa Trpuae^e. 

IV. It is sometimes used ironically; e. g. e£ei ap avdpwiros det 
\a.[ial peirwv ttjv ttoXiv eXe'tv avTofioel, SO then. 

But one of its chief uses is in the conclusion of syllogisms : el yap 
elai fiutfjioi, el a l /cat deoi' aXXa [xi]v elai (Hwfxoi' elalv apa n.al deoi : 
therefore there are gods too : Lucian, in Jov. Tr. 6 Troirjrris //lu^r^s 1 
6 jjufiriTris rpiros airo rrjs aXrjdelas' 6 7rot7jr}}$ apa rpiTOS airo rfjs aXt)- 
deias : Procl. in Plat, de Rep. p. 405. 1. 30. a 

5 Apa is used in interrogation, and usually when an answer in the 
negative is expected, num? but sometimes when an affirmative 
answer must follow; jie? see Eurip. Ale. 341. 771. — 1. By itself: 
dp' ovru) flovXei ij/juv CbpiaQai vvv irepl tov baiov Kal tov avoaiov ', Plato 
Euthyphr. c. 11.* — 2. followed by ?'j : apa to oaiov, oti oaiov eon, 
<piXetTui vnb twv dewv' rj, oti <piXe~iTai, oaiov eariv ', Id. ib. c. 12. — 3. 
With ov and pf). The difference between ap'ov and apa fxrj is that 
ap' ov, nonne, requires an affirmative answer, dpa fj.fi, num, a negative, 
as apa does alone ; but fxi) imparts some degree of dubiousness to the 
question, and that for the purpose sometimes of irony; as, eav be aov 
nrpo(JKaTr)yopi](rii), on bia to ayaadai avrov cat evvoUibs e^eis irpbs avrov, 
apa fjtfj biafidXXeadai bofcis vk e/jiov; Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 34. see Soph. 
Ant. 632/ ap' ob% ovrws ; is it not sol Plato Euthyphr. c. 8. See 
Xen. Mem. i, 5, 4. — 4. Sometimes ovv is added: (see Hermann, ad 
Soph. Ant. 628. in ed. min. Erf.) dp' ovv fj paaiXm) ao<poi>s iroiel 
rows avQpwnovs — ; Plat. Euthyd. p. 292. dp ovv ovk apidfirjTiKt) fxev, 



a "hpa, therefore, then; 8ia tovt ap' b ~*Kp' apfioaei fioi; Answ. v\) A? aA\* 

avrov Kal »ca\' %v ra 5pa.fj.ara, Aristoph. apior' ex« : Aristoph. Thesm. 260. So 

Thesm. 166. apa, truly; ris rwv Kara. 263. — J. S. 

■KpwKTOv h~eiv6s io-Ti tV r4xvr)v ; ap olS' c "*Apa it?j Soks7s (do you think) \vr^pi' 

'Kfivvuv a\\' 'laws apj>^ff€Ta«. Id. Eccl. avrfi Tavra tov <p6vov <pepw, ovk ianv : 

365.— J. S. Soph. El. 446.— J. S. 



184 Te. [Chap. viii. § iv. 

tcai Tives erepai te\vai, \pi\al rwv Trpafcwv elm — ; Id. in Politic, p. 
258. — 5. 7 Apa is sometimes added to otlicr interrogative words; 
as, rls up a tyevywv ovros ', Aristoph. Vesp. 888. [ T Apa is not of 
course interrogative in such passages. See the commencement of 
this section/'] 

V. Although yk, as well as fikv, may commonly be translated gui- 
dem, and although both those particles are of a restrictive nature, yet 
there is this difference between them ; fikv regards whole propositions, 
•ye only parts of propositions. Mev excludes other things, ye distin- 
guishes something as most remarkable among other things, but so as 
not to exclude the latter; wherefore fiev has the particle Se as an 
opposite ; ye has no opposite particle. Hence the distinction effected 
by ye may be so effected in a twofold manner, by mention either of 
what is least, or of what is greatest or most. Of the first and by far 
the most common of these manners, in which ye may be rendered at 
least, indeed, certainly, however, &c. the following are examples: 
(V. VI. VIII.) el pj bXov, fxepos ye: Demosth. pro Cor. p. 317. 
alcr-^vrr], ovbe/uids eXarroyv cfyju/as tois ye auxppoatl Id. Ol. i. [p. 17- 
1. 7. ed. Reisk.] eywye, I indeed, I at least. See Soph. (Ed. C. 42. 
1409. Eurip. Ale. 497. Horn. II. e, 321. Xen. CEc. iv, 2. Eurip. 
Heracl. 273. Here. F. 517. bt) ye, Eurip. Heracl. 632. Suppl. 
162. Iph. T. 493. Aristoph. Nub. 677. 783. el yap y, Eurip. 
Ion, 847. ri ye, ib. 999. av ye, iEschyl. Ag. 348. a *v e'Uys ye, 
i. e. if you shall have said anything : Soph. Phil. 1275. In this first 
signification ye is common in answers approving or assenting to 
something already said, but with some accession or modification : 
Mill, arel^ed', eipo/jai b' eyw. Cr. d£<a y' //juwv obovpos, rat (ptXovoa 
ye nroXiv : Eurip. Ion, 1616. It is also used in answers which deny 
something figuratively by another question: ovk JLvpnrlbrjv knaiveis 
acxptoTarov ; Answ. aofwrarov y' kizeivov', Aristoph. Nub. 1381. In 
the following passages Hermann explains its signification, which has 
an affinity to that in the foregoing ones, by the German noch or doch: 
viz. Soph. Phil. 593. CEd. C. 79. el/ui ye, I call the Sun to wit- 
ness, that what I do, I do against my inclination : but as there is no 
avoiding it, / go, since so it must be: Eurip. Here. F. SfSl . Iph. 
A. 6*64. and with an imperative : et7re ye, Suppl. 842. and arpareve 
ye, in contempt, Iph. A. 394. £uA\a/3ere y avrvv: a command given 
with some degree of haughtiness and indifference : [seize him then.] 
Soph. Phil. 1003. 

The second manner of distinction is that by mention of what is 
most or greatest ; and the first sense of ye under this head Hermann 
expresses by eben or gerade. See Eurip. Suppl. 158. Hec. 842. 
(848.) Soph. Phil. 1035. Eurip. Ion, 36l. El. 976. 

In its second use under this head it is rendered vel, eliam, even, 
very, self: elpo/itjv tovtov el tovs avbpeiovs Xeyoi dappaXeovs. o be kcu 



d T Apd ye. — S,pd ye ttoWwv aya6S>v — then, therefore : ovk Sp' a<j>?jKas, Si 'yaff ; 

cwro<paf/'« o-' cutiov oZaav ; Aristoph. PI. ws avSpelos el: Aristoph. Av. 91. and 

546. Tis t] fiov) iroT io-riv ; Spc£ 7' ayye- without interrogation in Vesp. 839. — J. S. 
Ae? -xp-narbv ti ; Id. ib. 641. 'Apo, igitur, 



Rule 5— 7-] F& 185 

tras ye e^ij, ay, arid even rash too: Plat. Protag. See Aristoph. 
Nub. 399. Eurip. Med. 136l. Soph. (Ed. C. 1278. Ant. 736. 
See Iliad e, 303. a.XX' o'l ye irarepes, even their fathers themselves : 
Xen. Mem. i, 2, 27. avroi re ye avT&v ovvyas re kcu Tplyas Kal 
tvXovs a<(>aipov(nv, Id. ib. § 54. 

Te often follows ctXXa /uj/j', (cat /ur)v, ovhe pij>>, oh firjv, but with 
some other word between pr/v and ye : Pors. ad Eurip. Phoen. 1638. 

Te is repeated in the same member of a sentence, and not inele- 
gantly : see Soph. (Ed. C. 977. Plato Phaedr. p. 241. 1. 36. Mev 
ye are very seldom joined by the tragic poets. Te in this union refers 
to and confirms what precedes, fiev relates to the very thing spoken 
of with it: see Aristoph. Nub. 1380. 1171. 

VI. (IX. X.) The difference between ye hrj and yk toi is, that hi) 
simply confirms what is modified or limited by ye, whereas rol indi- 
cates that what is so modified or limited is opposed in some manner 
to what precedes it: kX&tttov to xpijp-a Tavhpos' oh Kal ao\ hoKei, 10 
'XeKrpv&v ; vr) tov AC, eVt/jvei ye toi : Aristoph. Vesp. 928. he nods 
however certainly ; i. e. although he does not answer that it appears 
so to him too, yet however he nods at least : <pr\al ye hi) might have 
been said, but not §r\a'i ye rot, because there is nothing to which (prjal 
could be opposed : e^ofiev ti irapa/jivde'tadat aiiTov, Kal TreiQeiv rjpefia 
€7riKpv7rr6fievoi, on ovj^ vyiaivei ; Ans. Set ye rot hri : Plato de Rep. 
V. p. 476. d. (iaaav taTiov, &c. Ans. irpenei ye toi hrj, Id. ib. vi. 
p. 504. a. Both the respondents answer in this manner because they 
wish to indicate that if they do not, or cannot do, what is spoken of, 
yet at all events it ought to be done. Neither could have properly 
said elofiev ye toi hi], fiaoavivTeov ye toi hi), but if they repeated those 
preceding words, they must have said eEpfxev ye hq, fiaaavioriov ye 
hi): v. Pors. praef. ad Eurip. Hec. p. 49. (p. 55. ed. Lips.) Soph. 
Phil. 821. Tr. 1107- 1212. Aj. 534. Coll. Pors. ad Eur. Med. 
86'3. Eurip. Phoen. 737- Iph. A. 675. fxerpiov -Kapetryev eavrhv, 
tov ye hi) fie^pi tyjs Kpiaews ^povov : certainly at least till the lime of 
the trial: Demosth. in Mid. 

Te, ye olv, and yovv, may often be rendered for: to. £' u\\a,Ta fiev 
aaafii, traTpls kcu yevos, Kal ypovos' el yovv ti aatyes avTwv i)v, 
ovk ?}v av afxfiXeKTos avdpw7rots epts : Lucian, Dem. Enc. speaking of 
Homer. 

VII. (XI. XII.) Fe ftrjv always signifies, yet notwithstanding, 
nevertheless: fxaKpav yap epiret yfjpvs, e/jKparijs ye fii]v : Eurip. El. 
754. ehos ye toi ttov tovs avhpas opdws Xeyeiv. eirofxeroi ye firjv 
avTo!s, oK€\pb>fxedu tovs eice'tOev, ti wore Kal Tvyyavovai hiavoovuevoi : 
Plato Leg. x. and opposed to fxev : wpoaoiKos yap daXaTva yjopq to 
fikv nap' eKa/TTrjv fj/iepav i]hv, jxaXa ye fxi]V ovtios aXfivpov Kal iriKpbv 
yeiTOvr}fia: Plato de Legg. iv. p. 705. 01 fiev hi] Uepaai ovr<o$ 
k^ovTes 6/j.oae etyepovTO' o'i ye jji)v TroXe/xiot ovceri ehvvavTO fievetv — : 
Xen. Cyrop. iii. sub fin. 



Viger. 2 A 



186 



Tup, A*'/. 



[Chap. viii. § v. 



SECTION V.— On the conjunctions yap and bi'i. 

Rule I. Fop is oflen joined with 5#: ri irore Xeyet b Oebs; Kal ri 
itore alvirrerat ; eyw yap Si) (for I certainly or undoubtedly) ovre 
fxeya ovre cfiiKpbv $vt>oiba efiavr<5 ao(jibs wv : Plato Apol. p. 21. So ou 
yap bi) xpevberai ye, Id. ib. Xeyovcri yap bij — , Paus. in Arc. p. 457 • 
and with rot : b yap rot Xuyos >)i>, 7rep« ov bterpifio/nev, ovk oIS' Svrira 
rponov IptjjTiKos'. Plato Phaedr. for truly: see Soph. Tr. 1228. 
Eurip. Heracl. 436. 534. 7l6. Q06. Hel. 02. Here. F. 101. Aristoph. 
Lys. 46. 

II. It is used ironically; 6 as, ov yap airb rovrtov bpfxrjoas, airaaav 
peXXeis KaTuXafieiv r>)v yupav : you, forsooth, setting out with these 
means, &c. 

III. Tap is used in interrogation,* and may have place in any 
question, because, i" know not, or tell me, or the like, is always 
understood. Whence the Latins say quisnam, and nam quis, ami 
the Germans denn : see Hermann, ad Aristoph. Nub. 1Q2. b S' 
lepsvs avros eorijKei' rj/uayfxeros, Kal avarefivuv, kcu to. £yKara efcaipwi', 
Kal icapbiov\K(Li>, Kal to alj.ia rw (3oj/ju) irepiyewv , Kal ri yap ovk evoefits 
eirireXwis ; Lucian, de sacrif. 13. t. i. p. 136. ri yap irenXoioiv aBXio'v 
Kpvirrei Kapa ; Eurip. Here. F. 11QS/ 0'iei yap, <5 Kvpe, iKavbv eivai 
tcaXXos atdpunrov avayKaCetv rbv p) fiovXofxevov Trparreiv 7rapa rb 
fleXnovov ; Xen. Cyrop. v. Orest. rov yap cHovros ovk eariv racpos. 
Electr. r) £17 y a P aV//p ; Or. e'Ltrep ep:\pv%6s y eyo). Ei. 1) yap ov 
Keivos; Soph. El. 1221. v. Horn. Od. ic, 501. Xen. Mem. ii, 3, 16. 
And with an expression of indignation: rb yap cwriXeyetv roXpa.v 
v/uas, <bs ov Tcavr ear ayaQ' v/jTv bia n)v ireviar ; Aristoph. Plut. ? 

IV". Ov yap is sometimes expressive of great vehemence in interro- 
gation : ov yap eKKOTtfjiat ri]v y\wrrai> eKeirr/v ebei ; ov yap ofieodfivai 
rfjv Kapbiav n)v ruvra. reKovoav ; Chrysost. in c. 15. Ep. i. ad Cor/ 

It often occurs in answers; when it must be referred to something 
not expressed, f as to va\ or ov, e. g. which are usually omitted : ovk 



e Legat. kcu Sijr' erpvxo/xeda — eft apjxa- 
p.a£wv /xaA.9aitS)s KaraKeipievoi, airoWv- 
/xeuoi. Dicasop. cr<p68pa yb.p io~ai£6fi.7]v iy&i, 
irapa ryjv eira-K^iv ev (popvrw KaraKeip.evos ; 
Aristoph. Ach. 71. Valet isludyap nimi- 
rum, et ironicum est : Brunck. — J. S. 

* So : — " To whom Cymocles said ; 
for what art thou, That mak'st thyself 
his days-man, to prolong The vengeance 
prest?" Spenser, F. Q. ii, 8, 28. 

/ Ti)v ei>T)v re Kal veav, Phid. evt\ yap 
effTt Kal vea ris 7]jJ.epa ; Aristoph. Nub. 
1161. ed. Bekk. igitur: et sic semper 
in interrogatione, says Brunck. — J. S. 

s There is no note of interrogation in 
the edition of Brunck, (vs. 593.) and it 
is translated vosne mihi ansos contra- 



dicere — / J. S. 

h Ov yap, by itself, parenthetically, is 
very frequent in Demosthenes ; e. g. 
Sfioi6i> ye (ov ydp ;) rovro rols irporepois, 
&c. in Androt. p. 616. 1. 16. ed. Reisk. 
KaXa. ye (ov ydp ;) tk yeypafx/J-eva — , ia 
Aristocr. 673, 19. eijvovs ye (ov yap;) 
arrAois vpuv — : Ib. 674, 14. '6jxoiov ye (ov 
ydp;) ols efxov Karriyopet ; de Cor. 272, 
14. All these passages are ironical — 
J.S. 

t An ad suam revertetur antiquam 
vilara alicubi honeste tractatam ? At hie 
quidem ante oculos vestros quomodo 
vixerit, scitis omnes. Auct. ad Herenn. 
iv, 4. where there is another reading, 
Nam for At : on which Ernesti say?, 



Rule l — 6.] Flip, A>/. is? 

evdevbe — Xiyerai 6 Bopeas ~r)v 'SlpeiOuiav apnacrat ; Socr. Aeyerat yap : 
Plato Phuedr. p. 229» "Eari yap ovtu is a very frequent answer in 
Plato : and yap is sometimes equivalent to on, because : i'lpero avrbv 
(Zoilus) tis twv 7re7rathev[j.eru)v bia ti kokiLs Xeyei 7rdiTas* o be, noiijaai 
yap Kaiuiis fiovXo/jevos ov bvva/Jiai : Ml. V. H. xi, 10. ov yap trxpXlj, 
J lujKpares : Plato Hipp. Maj. [p. 345. I. 31. ed. Bas. 1.] So Piut. 
de audiend. poet. p. 15/ In the following the answer is interroga- 
tive: (pofie'iTai tis fxerafioXiiv ; ti yap bvvarai x w l°' s fxeTaj3oXf]s yevetr- 
Oai; Marc. Anton, vii, 14. Tap refers to then he is unreasonable, 
or the like, not expressed ; and when it occurs in an answer, it is 
often to be referred to something not expressed : 'AvTifavijs 6 
K(t)/ja)C0TT0tvs ibs aveytPtdOKe Tiva rw fiaaiXel 'A.Xet,avbpo) twv eavrov 
Kwfik>bi(Hi; (b be bijXos tjv ov 7ra.1v ti airobe^ofievos) bel. yap, efrjoev, w 
fiumXev, tov raDra anobe-yojievov inrb avjjifioXbJv TtoXXatiis bebentfrjKevai : 
A then. xiii. where yap is to be referred to it is no wonder you do 
not much approve of what I am reading, or the like; and Herodotus 
begins the speech of Dionysius thus : hirl fypov yap Tfjs anpiis, &c. 
Er. c. 1 1 J 

V. A?) in prose never begins a sentence or member of a sentence ; 
in verse it sometimes does, but not in Attic writers ; it signifies, 
certainly, surely, ivithout doubt, of a certainty, truly, &c. v. Plat. 
Euthyphr. [p. 1. 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] de Rep. v. p. 455. Aristot. de 
Rep. i. p. 185. It also signifies, now: Aristoph. Nub. 700. Vesp. 
1059. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 24. Hesiod, Op. 414. Iliad <j>, 143. 450. 
And in this sense it is joined with jjSq sometimes in the same member 
of a sentence : Eurip. Suppl. 780. Troad. 235. Kvv §/} with a past 
tense is, just now, a little while since: Plato Gorg. p. 455. 

VI. Besides its very common use in continuation of recital, in 
which it is usually rendered igitur, then, (a use common to it and 
bF/ra, and re bi t) ) when joined with /cat it signifies i]br], now, by this 
time, already ?' as, Ta.be b}) naibojv Kal bi] (pOifieviov doTu (pepeTat, 
Eurip. Suppl. 1114. v. ^schyl. S. c. Th. 478. Aristoph. Pac. 942.* 
v. Heind. ad Plat. Cratjl. p. 109. and with a future tense, forth- 
with : £7rt tovtovs fjfxe'is Kal b>] crTparevao/jieda, Xen. Cyrop. iv, 
4, 11. Kal b>) is used also in asseveration, indeed: and some other 
words are often elegantly inserted between these particles ; as, tovto 

Elegans ; intellectapraecedente negatione. F. 1245. — This verse is quoted by Lon- 

— J. S. ginus, § 40. where Toup observes that 

i "Hicovaas avTTJs to Bpaaos ; Answ. it is quoted by Plutarch also, De Stoic. 

i\ev94pa yap eifu, Aristoph. Lys. 379. repugn, p. 1048. and De Comniun. 

See also Ach. 598. — J. S. notion, p. 1003. but he appears not to 

J Tap rot : — t'l 5' av yvvalices (ppovtfiov know whence the verse is taken. — J. S. 
ipyaa-alaro, — KpOKCcra. (popovaai, Kal Ke- h "Ev £ 3e ravra ifiovXevoVTO, Kal 5r/ 
KaWeetrlcrfievai — ; Lys. ravr' avra yap- fiaaiKevs — KcsTe'cTTTjo'ei' evavriav rty (pa- 
rol KaaB' a adxreiu npoaSoKZ, ra. KpoKto- Xayya : Xen. Anab. i, 10, 7. twv 
Ti'Sia Kal ra /j.vpa, &c. why these are the alo~xi<!Tmv iarl, irAvTas avdpunrovs Ifteio 
very things, &c. Aristoph. Lys. 46. — Kal aKovcrai ras [J-lv crv/jupopas, ah Sl v/xas 
J. S. ix?'h a ' aVT0 0* 'dvBpes ovtoi, Ttavra rbv XP "- 

* And sometimes without kuI it signifies vov Kvpias avro7s yeyevrjixevas, ras 5e Seo- 

already. Tiies. "l<rx e vropL- ws /utj, /j.eya peas, as c.vtI tovtwv e\a$ov irap" vfj.au', 

\4ywv, pufyv TrdSijs. Merc. Te/J.u> KaK&v k a I 5 7? KeAvfitvas : Demosth. adv. Lept. 

S71, kovk4t eV8' 'fan T60I7. Eurip. Here. 476,27. — J. S. 



1S8 VUp, A?/. [Chap. vin. 

apa tiZ kXevQdpa irpeirei, Kal tu> biKala> br'i : and a just man too : and in 
the phrases, xal tv br) fxtyioTov, and what too is most, or above all, 
Ka\ tu bi) TrpovpytaiTarov, and what is of most importance, and the 
like. Aj), on account of its augmentative power, and its use in 
amplifying by some accession what has preceded, often follows 
superlatives; as, tcivrjcris yup avrr/ fieyicrTTj b r) to'is "EXXrjatv eyivero, 
Thucyd. i, 1. and also words having the nature of superlatives ; and 
when there is a progressive heightening in representation : Kal 6 
Oe/X!oroic\>7s eTreXdiov ~ois AaKebutfiovluis evravda br) (pavepurs eiwev, 
&c. Thuc. i, 91. So vvv ye br) ttuvtws, Aristid. Semi. sacr. i. p. 506*. 
rove Si), and t6te br) tot€, Aristid. pro Quat. p. 320. Cyrill. c. Jul. ii. 
p. 311. in Latin turn vero : v. Curt, iii, 11. Ov. Trist. i, 3. [77,79-] 
And so ovtu br), then at length. This amplifying or augmentative 
force is apparent also in the form kcu br) kcu, and, moreover ; as, kcu 
br) Kal avomov tovto yeJ 

VII. (IX.) At) is used in exhortation : irpoaye br) Kal cnconei, Plato 
Phaedr. p. 229. see p. 260. and Judith xiii, 11. Also in inter- 
rogation, prithee, now : ttCjs br) ovv tovto Xeyeis ; Plato Phaedr. p. 265. 
■7rov br) jjlol 6 Trals ; Id. ib. p. 243. ret 7ro7ci br) tclvtci ; Id. de Rep. iv. 
p. 421. Xeyets be br) ri ; Id. Phaedr. p. 242. v. p. 259- 

VIII. (XIII.) It is used by itself ironically; see Markl. ad Eurip. 
Suppl. 521. 

IX. (XIV.) It occurs in the phrase avriKa br) ixuXa, immediately, 
at once, presently.* 

Atjttov and brjnovdev signify doubtless, of course; and also ironi- 
cally, to be sure, forsooth : [xe/jivricrde yap brjirov : v. Hebr. ii, l6. 
av brjtrov rrfkiKOS o)v, kcu tutv avbpeiOTaTwv civ trepiyevoio. eKf.lro ye 
br)Trovdev airavTes eirlaTaade: Demosth. de Class, p. 76. 1. 50. p. 187- 
[I. 27. ed. Reisk.] v. Aristoph. Plut. 140. Vesp. 295. 

&fjdev, — 1. signifies awo tov bij (i. e. &. t. vvv) forthwith, instantly : 
Eurip. Or. 1 1 10. — 2. It has an affirmative force, but rather in deceit 
and simulation, than in declaration of truth; v. Eurip. Or. 1320. 
Heliod. iv, 4. Hence it signifies ostensibly in Heliod. and is op- 
posed to to a\r)des '. dpr/vuv ovk knavero, brjdev fxev rwc e?ri aol, to & 
aXrjdes tUv ktf iavTrj : i, 14. See Markl. ad Eurip. Suppl. 521. It 
may often be rendered, forsoot h, as if. 

Ai/ra — 1. appears to be put for br), now; as, Kal bfjra biaXefy/jai 
irpbs ore, Synes. — 2. It is used in exhorting, beseeching," 4 obtesting ; 
Xafiov, Xafiov bf]T<x, (in answer,) yes, do, pray, hold me: Eurip. Or. 
220. 'Lkov br~]Ta } come, I beseech you: Id. ib. 1231. See vs. 92. also. 



1 'AmKviovrai is SctpSts — &W01 re ol once, as an instance immediately obvious. 

ir&VTts ere ttjs 'EAAaSos ffo^KTrai, — Kal 5?) — A-?;, Savoir, To wit, That is to soy; 

Kal 26Awv : Herodot. i. is Alyinrrov SepcwreiW t)\v Svarvxiav, tpKivovs ir68as 

aniiceTO Trapa'AiAaoriv Kal 5 77 Kal is "Zap- ireiro'tVTo. — iiceivo Se ytKotov iiroiw Kpn- 

Sls irapa. Kpoloov, Id. ib. Belftaros si/jll ir7Sas yap KaAXicrras icevelro,- — d>s koA.- 

inroirXecos, &Wa re TroAAa iirL\ey6/xevos, KicrTots imo§j\fj.a(n KeKocrfj-Tj/xeva e'ir] ai)T<p 

Kal 5?/ Kal 6pea>v toi Svo to, fxeytara. ra £v\a, ol ir6Ses 5^. Lucian, Adv. 

Ttavroiv iovra ■KoKi^.iwra.Ta : Id. 1. vii. — Indoct. p. 542. B. ed. Salmur. — J. S. 

J. S. m Mtj 57J0', i/c€Teywo-': Aristoph. Thesra. 

* Sometimes, To give an example at 751. — J. S. 



§ vi. Rule 1—4.] El,"liv. 189 

— 3. in questions, tandem, prithee : Aristopli. Vesp. 1171. And in 
affirmation or asseveration : lo/jcpares, mdevbeis ; ov brjra, ?) 6' os : 
Plato Syrup, p. 218. Indeed, truly : v. Aristopli. Vesp. 13. 



SECTION VI. — ON THE CONJUNCTIONS el, rjv, aV, eav, AND 
THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES. 

Rule I. Et and ijv, in their most common sense, of if, are, like 
av and eav, used convertibly. But the use and significations of el 
are much more extensive than those of the others, as it will appear 
hereafter. 

II. Et is used for eWe, I wish ; either by itself, as in Soph. OZd. 
R. 863. or, as is most usual, followed by yap, as el yap yevovro, — o, 
ri eyw aoi ev Kaipw av yevoifi-qv av j^p^aifxos : would that ! &C. Xen. 
Cyrop. vi, 1, 38.' See Horn. II. /3, 373. Od. y, 205. r, 309- v, 
239- Lucian, Dial. Mer. iv. t. iii. p. 287. in Prometh. [p. 118. 
c. ed. Salmur.] Et yap in this sense is very often joined with &<j>eXov, 
e<p-q, would that — / said he. With respect to the elliptical nature 
of the phrase, see Hoogeveen, and Mark!, post Eurip. Suppl. p. 286. 

III. Et is sometimes used for on, commonly after verbs signifying 
some affection or emotion of mind ; as, dav/ja£w, I wonder ; x at 'i° w » 
/ rejoice; a^dofiat, I grieve or am vexed ; [or the consequence of 
such affection or emotion, as,]~tWpi/w, kXuiu), I lament, I weep : edav- 
jiage be, el fji) (pavepbv avrois ear\v — : he wondered that, &C. Xen. 
Mem. i, 1, 13. See also § 18. and Euseb. Praep. vi. p. 264. kcu tovs 
'ApKabas vfiiv airi'iyyeiXev, ws eyaipov, el 'Kpoaej^ei to~is 7rpay[xacnv i]br] fj 
Thiv 'Adrjvaluv noXis : Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 241. enXaiov, ovk el 
reQvrjlo'uxrjv, Synes. It is put in this sense after eKpivas, and ebiiaKes, 
(you brought to trial, — you prosecuted — because, &c.) in Demosth. 
de Fals. Leg. p. 239- [p. 435. 1. 6, 9. ed. Reisk.] For other examples 
of the phrase see Horn. II. $, 216. Apoll. Rhod. i, 291, 1285. iii, 
815. (where ei may be rendered quoties) Rom. viii, 17. 31. Acts 
Ap. iv, 9. xxvi, 23. cf. Markl. ad Lys. p. 670. ed. Reisk. 

IV. Et fiev is often used elliptically, (ev e'xet, or the like, being 
understood after the member of the sentence in which it occurs,) 
and opposed to el be fii] : el fiev ovv eyw vfias licavuis bibaaico), (underst. 
well;) el be fii), kcu irapa twv irpoyeyevqpLevtov fxavQavere : Xen. Cyrop. 
viii. p. 237. 

Et is used also in interrogation. — 1. in direct interrogation: %e7.ve 
<plX', el kcu fioi v e fie ai] treat 0, tti Kev ecrru) ; Horn. Od. a, 158. et b' 
afi^olf /tera£u Kelrai ; Plato de Rep. v. p. 478. v. Acts Ap. i, 6. vii, 
1. xix, 2. xxi, 37. Luke xiii, 23. xiv, 3. Tob. v, 5. 3 Reg. xx, 20. 
■ — 2. in indirect, an, whether, if ; n el koXws Keijievot, vofioi rvyx«- 
vovaiv, ypwTTiae : Plut. in Lycurg. ijpCjTtiaev, el tovs vojxovs enaivolev : 

" Addison, in some part of his writings, ment to Johnson's Dictionary, published 

(I think in one of Ms papers in the Whig in 1819,1 have given three examples 

Examiner,) censures an author for having from Addison himself, and one from 

used if in this sense : yet there is good Shakspeare. — J. S. 
authority for such use. In the Supple- 



190 E<\ [Chap. vin. § vi. 

Pint, in Cks. p. 713. v. Acts Ap. xvii, ]]. And it has this 
same signification, when a thing is spoken of in any way as doubtful, 
although without interrogation : au<j>a o' obic o\h\ e'i decs ktxiiv, 
Horn. II. e, 133. iittpei, el to. irpoaijKuvra eraorois airobtbovres, 
to vXov KtxXov irowvfxev : Plat, de Rep. iv. p. 420. See Soph. (Ed. 
R. 584. In this sense it is sometimes followed by y, as, ovbe 
oiba, el cKJttKo/.ieros es 'Plojjltjv oj-peXrjcev av ri 'Aycuovs, */ KanStV 
c(j>imv eyerero fxeiSloviov apyr) : whether — or : Paus. in Ach. p. 420. 

V. El in its conditional sense is joined with the optative mood, 
when it is indicated that what there is a doubt about may possibly 
be, or be about to be : el be tis tovs KpnTovvras rod irXtjQovs eir aperi/v 
Trporpeipetev, afjuporepovs av wfeXt)aeie : Isocr. ad Nic. p. 32. el — fieX- 
Xotev fxov KdTuyeXqv, ovbev av eir) arjbes : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 3. Also, 
for greater modesty, when, if propriety of language alone were con- 
sidered,, rjv with the subjunctive would be the right phrase; as in 
/Eschyl. S. ad Th. init. and Dionys. Hal. de constr. verb, in fin. 
libr. v. # Hermann, diss, de preecept. Atticist. p. 11. for *V vv *'h the 
subjunctive expresses expectation that something will be or will not 
be, but el with the optative only doubt and ignorance as to its pro- 
bability. 

It is joined with an indicative, when thai, about which there is 
doubt, is left in absolute uncertainty, as to its being or not being ; 
except that the indicative of the preteriniperfect, preterpluperfecr, 
imd aorists, often signifies that a thing is not or was not. With the 
future, el b' v /ney, ws alei ti fxe'idov twv vttapyovTwv be~i 7rpuTTew, 
eyvuihcos ecrrctt. vfiels §' ws, &e. Demosth. 01. i. p. 13. [t. 12. 
ed. R.] el tovto yevriaerui, ib. [I. 18.] el be Oarepov tovthsv oXtyw- 
pweTe, otcvaj, &c. ib. p. 14. [I. 9.] VVith the present : el yap elcri 
fiwftol, el<r\ teal deoi : Lucian. With aorists, preterperfect, and preter- 
imperfect : el jjtev irepi icaivov tivos upay/JLaros Trpovridero Xeyeir, 
Demosth. Phil. i. [40, 1. ed. R.] See also Demosth. 01. i. p. 2. 
1.18. [11, 13. ed. R.]and 01. ii. p. 6. 1.44. [19, 22. ed.R.Jei pev yap 
vcf fifiujv ireiadevTes aveiXovro rbv 7roAejuoi', Id. 01. p. 2. 1. 11. [11, 2. 
ed. R.] el TrpoOvfxws efior]Bii(Tap.ev avro\, Id. ib. p. 2. 1. 26. [11, \9. 
ed. R.J Sometimes the verb is understood : as, ebiovro re, el firjbev 
aXXo } ctXXa tooovtov ye y^povov Karajxelvnt. avrov : Xen. H. Gl". iv. p. 
532. where noie'iv, or emTpiireiv, efiovXero, may be understood ; if he 
would do nothing else ; or biairparTeadai ebvvavTo, if they could obtain 
nothing else from him ; or the like. For other examples of the indi- 
cative see Horn. II. a, 40. 395. <p, 544. Hebr. iv, 8. 

Ej is joined with a subjunctive mood by Homer, as in II. a, 340. 
e, 258. i, 318. o, lfj. Od. e, 221. tj, 204. ir, 138." by the Ionic writers, 
and by the lyric poets, as Pindar, Pyth. iv, 473. 488. Nem. vii, 16. 
21. ix, 110. Isthm. v, 17. and by writers of the later ages and of 

El tie nev ipydfy, rdxa <re £r)\<&crei rot Kat XPVP-' iyX^P i0V &^° yevyTai, Id. 

aepySs : Hesiod, Op. i, 310. el yap r is Op. i, 3-11. and with av : el 8' av efioi 

koI irivdos ix ow veoKijSei Qvp.w aforai, Id. rifiijv Upla/xos Hpidp.oi6 re iratSes Tiveiv ovk 

Theog. 99. e! p.))— Iloaetidccv— '/) Zeus— edihoiaiv, Horn. II. y, 28S.— J. S. 
iQiXyviv oAiacrai, Id. Op. ii, 285. el yap 



Rule 5—7-] Ei. 191 

inferior character, (see Schneider's index to iEsop ;) but the Attic 
writers do not construe ei with the subjunctive : v. Brunck. ad Ari- 
stoph. Plut. 2l6V 

It is construed with an infinitive mood in oblique phraseology, 
when the purport of words is recited, rather than the words them- 
selves : elvai be (\eyercu) ra^vrrjra ovberl erepo) bjxoiav, ovru ware 
ei fjy) Trpdkafxfiaveiv rrjs bbov rovs 'Ivbovs, ev w tovs fivpjxriKas avXXe- 
yeadai, ovbeva av crcpecov airoawZeodai : Herodot. iii, 105. and so el /.it) 
yiveadai, &c. c. 108. It is also construed with participles ; v. Seidl. 
ad Eurip. El. 533. Add Xen. Mem. ii, 6, 25. Plat, in Phaed. p. 87- 
b. (136. ed. Heind.) Beitrage zur Philologie aus der Schweiz, i. p. 
272. ss. 

Ei is sometimes put for et Kal, although, even though; Aristoph. 
Vesp. 2d7> and so si in Latin. See Ter. Eun. ab ink. Hor. iv. Od. 
15. Virg. Eel. x, 65. 

It is sometimes suppressed : yeyove n Kara <re, eicreivas rr/v x e ~ l P a i 
KOfffjtlws /ueraXafle' irapepyerai, fii) Kare^e' ovmo ijicei, ui) eiriXafie ir6ppu> 
rt)v ope^iv, &c. Epict. c. 21. ? v. Ter. Eun. ii, 2, 21. and Liuacer de 
Emend. Struct, p. 409. 

Eustathius takes ei to be put foret7rw<?, equivalent to oVws, in Horn. 
Od. a, 144/ 

VI. Kal et expresses something hypothetical, even if; ei rat some- 
thing actual, although, notwithstanding that ; Kal el adavaros 7jv, 
even if I were immortal; el Kal 6vt]-6s eifii, although I am mortal: 1 
V. ^Esch. Choeph. 2.96. rov o' eyu> civtios eifxi, Kal et 7rupi ^Upas 
eoiKev; Horn. v. Soph. (Ed. R. 302. but in (Ed. R. 305. et nut 
firj kXvcis rujib' ayyeXwv, is, if perhaps you have not heard it from 
these messengers. 

Et apa, et ye, eiVep, et brj, eiirov, or eav and i)v with the same par- 
ticles, if indeed, if truly, if only, if perchance. 

VII. Et be and eav be signify but if ; and there is sometimes an 
ellipsis after them; as dappei, (pijireie rts av ov yap er ovbev vfipiaQiitrr]' 
eav be, (underst. / should be again outraged) Tore opyieiode, vvv 
(Hpevres ; Demosth. in Mid. p. 415. 1. 50. After el pev also, followed 
by ei be, there is often an ellipsis of the apodosis which should answer 
to the protasis to which el pev belongs; as, d\\' ei fxev bwaovai 



p Also, ad Vesp. 190. Ran. 59-1. For '' Add, that et is put for en-el, since, for, 

examples of various constructions of eisee in Aristoph. cnrevSe Trp6o~0ev is ttSAiv, nal 

Aristoph. Ran. 1374. Eccl. 407. Plut. fioi)6€i r-ff 0e£. e I it6t avry /xaWov f) vvv, 

583. Lys. 149. Av. 1223. Eccl. 191. S> Adxns, apv^nev ; Lys. 304.— J. S. 

Lys. 111. Ran. 533. 585. Plut. 1037. s 'Ev 5e to> Ueve^evop rod nxdruvos, el 

Eccl. 791. 794. Nub. 870. Av. 163. Kal //.sra. waidius rh irpcara yeypairrai, 

197. Vesp. 1405. Ach. 1196. Eccl. 162. roaovrSv y' taropias evecriv, &c. Plut. 

—J. S. in Pericl. p. 300. I. 27. H. St. 6 'Ayi}o-i- 

9 Even with the punctuation here given Aaos, el /eal (jltj (pQovepls i\v, nyde fix^ro 

by Zeunius, ei can hardly he said to be ro?sri/j.cofjt.evoi.s,ci.\Aa<pLA6Ti!J.os SbvocpoSpa, 

omitted, for, if added, it would render the &c. Id. in Agesil. p. 1095. 1. 16. H.St, 

enunciation much less eraphatical : but in fanei/M rjSri, el Kal fxecrai vvicres elaiv: Lu- 

Simpson's edit. (Oxon. 1739.) there is a cian, Dial. Meretr. jMeliss. et Bacch. 

note of interrogation after ae, TrapepX iTa b — J« S. 
and ^net. — J. S. 



192 Ei. [Chap. viii. § vi. 

yepas fieyaOufioi 'A^nioi, apnavres Kara Qvfxbv, ottios ayra^ioy carat* 
ei be Ke fui) bwiooty, eyib be Key civtos eXcjfim : Hon). II. a, 139- After 
eorat, understand KaXws e\ei, or ^^vaofiai, or KaXbv av e'irj, or ii<jvy/iow, 
or the like. So, el fxev brj Tiva nopov e%eis' el be a?), vevurjK eyw : 
Menand. See Aristojdi. Plut. v. 467. And for el be pif, Soph, puts 
el b' olv, Antig. 719. (See It. 9.) After el be also, flovXei or ftovXeoOe 
is frequently understood, as in Horn. II. t, 262. especially when dye 
follows el be. See II. a, 303. 1, 170. r, 108. \p, 58o". 5S2. Od. 
a, 271. After el be (cat avrol, Iliad j, 46. underst. fiohXovTai air- 
tevai. 

VIII. Et //>) commonly signifies unless ; in which sense it frequently 
has euros before it ; as, euros el fit/, vj) Ata, rrpbs ruv virep ' AXovfjoov 
\6yov 6 'AvTHpavtjs cat touto neirai^ev : unless indeed, &c. Plut. in 
Demosth. p. 850. 1. 21. But sometimes it is simply if not ; as, avy- 
yywfirj, el fii] fiera kcikicis, bo^rjs be /uaXXov afxaprla, — roXfjtatfxev : Thuc. 
i, 32. And, as el by itself is sometimes that, (see Rule 3.) so el 
[x>1 is that not: ayavatcrwy ovv 6 OvaXepios, el prj mareverai {that he 
is not believed) iravra Trparreiv evetca rfjs rrarplbos : Plut. in Popl. 

IX. Et be fii) is otherwise : cat ?iv fxev fyfifirj ?/ irelpa' (underst. 
KaXws ay eirj : see R. 7-) ct be juj), MtruXrjvat'ots e'nrely vavs re napa- 
bovvai, icat rel^r) KadeXelv : Thuc. iii, 3. 6 virep v/auiv ypa^as fir) 
iiyeiv kv rip rroXepu) rtpbs tov QiXiirirov oirXa' el be fxij, (underst. tis raj 
vofio) 7rei0apxj/<Tjj) davarw $r)/j.iovodai, arroXuXe *cai vftpicrrai : Demosth. 
de Fals. Leg. v. Matth. ix, 17. But et be ov is not equivalent to et 
be fit). In all the passages in which the former words occur, ov is to 
be referred to some following verb, with which it is intimately con- 
nected in sense and construction : as, el be ov /iot^euo-ets, (povevaeis 
be : now if thou commit no adultery, yet if thou kill, &c. James 
ii, 11. el be rot ov bwaei ebv ayyeXov : but if he will not give, i. e. 
if he refuse — &c. Horn. II. w, 296. v. Apoll. Rhod. i, 904. Thuc. 
i, 121. Eurip. Med. 87. (where Elmsley errs:) Antiphanes ap. Athen. 
p. 99- a. Heroclot. vii, 9. 

Et fir) bia, an elliptical phrase, is, were it not for, but for, had it 
not been for : MiXriabrjv be, rbv ev MapadiLvi, eis to flapadpov ejxfta- 
\e~iv €ipr)<pio-avro' Kat et /xri bia tov Tlpvraviv, eveireaev av '. Plato 
Gorg. p. 516. 1. 41. So Thuc. ii, 18. [p. 249. 1. 11. ed. Bekk.] 
Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 370. [1. 3. ed. R.] lb. p. 395. [I. 6. ed. 
R.] Aristid. Sacr. Serm. i. p. 509. Phil. Jud. Leg. ad Caj. p. 774. 

X. Et §' aye is an expression common in epic poetry, if you do not 
believe, or the like, being understood after et b£. [See the latter part 
of Rule 7.] See Horn. II. a, 524. But sometimes there is no ellipsis, 
and el be is closely connected with dye, forming with it a hortatory 
phrase, explained dye bij by Hesych. : et 5' dye, QecrrvXi, fiol xaXenas 
vocrw evpe -1 {xa-^os : Theocr. Id. ii, 95. 

XL Et be fiovXei, or et fiovXei be, literally, but if you please, 
signifies — 1. besides, moreover: ijye av -rrriyr] ^apieararri virb Ttjs 
irXaravov pel, — et b' av fiovXet, to einrvovv tov tottov ws ayairrjrbv Kat 
ctpobpa fjbv: Plato Phasdr. p. 230. — 2. nay even ; nay, what is more: 
tovs fiey ev Xoyw beirovs, ry trpa^et, tovs 7rpaKTiK0vs be raj \6yot vidians' 



Rule s— 14.] El. 193 

el fiovXei be, Xo'yw fief rovs evboKtfiovs ev Xoyy, irpafci be tovs irpaKTtKh)- 
rarovs virepfiaXuyv : Gregor. de Atlianasio. 

XII. E'iirep differs from e'iye in this, that e'iirep is used when some- 
thing is supposed, but whether the supposition be right or wrong is 
left in uncertainty; e'iye, when something is believed to be rightly 
assumed or supposed. E'iirep boKel 001 may be said to one of whose 
sentiments we are, or pretend to be, ignorant ; e'iye boice'i <roi, to one 
whose sentiments we know : fieyiarov ayaBbv, Koivas fiev ras yvvalicas 
elvat, koivovs be roiis iralbas, e'iirep olov re '. if indeed it be possible : 
Plato de Rep. v. p. 457- So Demosth. Ol. i. [p. 9. 1. 13. ed. Reisk.] 
cf. Rom. viii, 9. Demosth. in Timocr. p. 468. Time, iv, 55. Xen. 
Cyrop. iii, 3, 19. Aristoph. Nub. 226. Ran. 76. e'iirep tov bovXov 
ovtos (epyov earlv) to Srjv /Jt) its fiovKerai, Aristot. Polit. vi. e$ ap^fjs 
yap cii'dyKT) irav to yiyvb\xevov yiyveadai — ' ap^rjs — airoXofxev-qs, ovre 
avri) Trore etc tov, ovre aXXo e£ eiceu>r)s yevijaerai, e'iirep e£ «PX'' S ^ e ' 
to. iravra yiyveadai '. Plato Phaedr. p. 245. since. 1 

XIII. "[lairep yap e?r' aairibos kvkXwv els a.XXi)Xovs efifiefirjKOThJV, 
ire/jnrros els o/ucpaXdv irXr)pdl bta iravrwv o KctXXtaros' e'iirep r/ fxev 'EXXas 
ev fieaa iraat]s rfjs yijs, ?/ be 'Arruj; ttjs 'EXXabos, rrjs b' av iroXetos 
ofitjwfxos (rj dfibjwixos, the Acropolis, Vi«.) : Aristid. in Panath. 
p. 171. Here Vi»er interprets e'iirep, sic ; Hoogeveen supposes an el- 
lipsis of the apodosis answering to the protasis beginning with wairep, 
&c. as (tov avrov rpoirov bta iraawv KaXXiorri etrriv') e'iirep, since, 
&c. 

E'iirfp followed by d\\a, Iliad (j>, 577. 

XIV. Ei7rep apa occurs elliptically in the middle of sentences, or 
members of sentences ; as, to. iravra, ical to itav, ical to reXeiov, oh 
Kara rrjv Ibeav biafepovaiv" dXX', e'iirep apa, (if indeed they do differ,) 
ev ry vXr} : Aristot. de Coelo x. 6 be Zeis — ri fi/jas rivvvrai, aXX' ovk 
(e'iirep apa) (if somebody must be punished) eavrov ; CEnom. ap. Eustb. 
Praep. vi. And el apa is used in the same manner by Diogenianus, 
ib. p. 265. and el ecu apa by Sext. Emp. and so eav apa. 

El b' apa is used elliptically by Attic writers in the beginning of a 
member of a sentence, in the sense of otherwise : irepiatpedels ovtos 
ra ovra, "taws fxev ovic av vfiptSof el b' apa : (otherwise ; i. e. but if he 
should continue to outrage people) eXarrovos altos earat tov [MiKporarvv 
irap' vfxiv : Demosth. in Mid. 

E'j're repeated is either — or; whether— or : el be tis — eiridvfiol 
aKoiietv, e'ire veu>repos, e'ire irpeafivrepos, ovbevl irwirore e<j>d6vr)<ra : younger 
or older: Plat. Apol. c. 21. btacpepetv e'ire cofia, e'ire avbpeia, e'ire 
iiXXy rjrtvtovv aperij : lb. c. 23. cf. 1 Cor. iii, 22. yeXolov, on o'iei 
biafepeiv, e'ire aXXorptos, e'ire ohelos, 6 redvetws : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 4. 
(TKeipai Toivvv tov — Xoyov, e'ire ovrws, e'ire a\Xws e^et : Id. in Phaedr. 
p. 264. v. p. 237. and p. 275. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 1. 7. Demosth. de 
Rhod. Libert, [p. 193. 1. l6. ed. Reisk.] and with ovv : e'ir olv, — 
e'ire: Plat. Apol. c. 15. e'ir ovv aXrjdes, e^r ovv \pevbos : lb. c. 23. 



' In both these passages the assump- cording to Hermann's doctrine, etye should 

tions introduced by efrrep appear to be have been used.— J. S. 
taken as indubitable, and therefore, ac- 

Viger. 2 B 



194 EI, 'EAv. [Chap. vnr. 

c'ire Avalus, jj ns tLWos : Plat. Pbaedr. p. 277* In the same sense 

uvre is repeated : avre ns ets KnXvpfii'jOpnp fxttcpap epireor}, avre els tu 
peyiarov ireXayos peaop, o/jws ye pel ovbev 7)ttop : Plat, de Rep. v. p. 
453. Sometimes the tirit tire is omitted : Xuyoiatp eir epyoiatv, Soph. 
(Ed. R. 517- v. ^scbyl. Choeph. 591. Ag. 1410'. Pind. Pyth. iv, 
138. Sometimes ei is put instead of the first e'ire : /Eschyl. Eun). 
459. 599. el — e'ire, whether — or: Herodot. iii, 35. tdr re — ml, 
for ear re — ear re : Soph. Ant. 327. 

The difference between el and eav (compounded of el and uv) is 
that the use of el is merely logical, and regards thought only : that of 
eav contemplates the issue of things, and regards the event, which 
may prove whether a supposition be right or wrong, a hope or ex- 
pectation well ibuuded or otherwise. Hence eav, and f/r and up 
contracted from it, are said of something future only, i. e. of some- 
thing about which the event is to decide, or to instruct us. Et in the 
sense of whether is used in speaking of something about which we 
simply doubt ; whereas l)v and the particles of the same signification 
(among which are the poetic ante, at/cer) indicate some solicitude, 
and hope or fear about the event or issue of something. V. Eurip. 
Andr. 42. So ri'iKe Tvidr}TUL, a'i.K eXerjm], in Horner. a"ii:e nadi Zeiis 
e^oniau) irep iravai} S'iSvos, Od. b, 34. 'Ear, aV, i}p, are properly 
joined with the subjunctive mood: eav is joined with the optative, 
only when something is mentioned as the thought of some person. 
This is the case in the passage of Lucian cited by Thorn. M. in el : 
for in that passage (Ver. H. ii, 29-) eav KUTa^deirjfxep (which Her- 
mann thinks the true reading) expresses the supposition of a person 
different from the narrator; namely of Rhadamaiithus. In the pas- 
sage of Thucydides cited by Thorn. M. (iii, 44.) [p. 445. 1. 1. ed*. 
Bekk.] where i) appears to be joined with eler, a different punctu- 
ation and interpretation are proposed by Hermann. But a'l jeer is 
sometimes construed with an optative mood in Homer, as in Od. rj, 
315. Very late writers join eav with the indicative mood also, as the 
scholiast of Horn. ap. Pors. ad Od. X, 497« and in the same manner, 
and very frequently, kuv : v. Schaef. ad Append, ad Bastii ep. 
crit. p. 26". and in ed. Aristoph. Plut. p. 38. s. Hermann, ad Aris- 
toph. Nub. 1156. and in lib. i. de metris, p. S6. Brunck. ad Aristoph. 
Plut. 216. 

It is to be observed also that the Attic poets always say ?jv for ear, 
and never av : see Monthly Rev. Aug. 1799. p- 430. 

'Ear is often found erroneously substituted for ar, as in Xen. 
Mem. iii, 10, 12. iv, 2, 29- Id. Hier. i, 14. Demosth. de Fals. Leg. 
p. 436, 8. ed. R. adv. Timocr. p. 733, 4. adv. Euerg. p. 1152, 14. 
Lys. p. 753. [1. 7. ed. Reisk.] Athen. Deipn. ix. p. 399- in fin.' 

'Ear tier, — eav be, elliptic-ally : Plato Protag. p. 328. just as el pep, 
— el be, in Rule 4. 

' Add, offoi iav ideKoitriv — Kaprepe7v : Demosth. adv. Callipp. p. 1237. I. 3. ed. 

Plato in Lachet. p. 257. 1. 46. ed. Bas. 1. Reisk. ot irepioSoi, o-rrov iav ovres T^aio-i 

'6-irov iav S>, Xen. Anab. i, 3, G. icai Kara. irepioUav ttjs tcSMws : /Eneas Coram, 

iav /xev yiv6(TK0>ffi tV fyiv tov avQp&irov, Poliorc. c. 22. — J. S. 
u> eav Se'r/ airoSoiivai, roaovrov /xovov irotelv : 



§ vii. Rule i.] Te, Km'. I£)5 

'Eav re — er'u' re, whether — or, (see R. 14. on etre,) Plat. Euthyphr. 
c. 6. and in Crit. c. 12. ear re — eav re, — r\v re — j\v re in the same 
sentence: Xen. Cyrop. iii, 3, 17. In the same manner ixv re — ay 
re are used ; and rav re Kav re, Etyn). M. p. 202, 19. 



SECTION VII. — On the conjunctions re and rat, and 

THEIR CONCOMITANT PARTICLES. 

RULE I. Te — rat, is both — and: av?)p oijvs re n)»> Stayotar, rat -o 
cio/j-a eppwfierojs e^wi'. Sometimes the part of a sentence, in which 
re and ml occur, is connected with a foregoing part by another rat 
preceding; as, aipoven rsyp Qupeav, Kal tt\v re iri'skiv Karenavaav, Kal 
ra evovra efcTropOtjaav : Thuc. iv, 57. V, 56. See Virg. iEn. v, 
619. Ov. Met. iii, 2(55. When re and rat are joined in the same 
member of a sentence, re is copulative, and rat augmentative, even ; 
as, <j)ddpei be re Kal tov ayoyra, Horn. II. <p, 262." 

Te renders expressions more uncertain ; it answers to que in Latin : 
whereas Kal answers to et : hence oare, <il6$ re, ware, evOa re may be 
explained : see Horn. II. e, 467. Hermann, in Erf. ed. niin. Soph. 
CEc!. R. ad v. 6S8. Theogn. 336*. II. e, 305. oaos re, Od. \, 25. 
ore re, II. e, 500. wuei re, II. t, 447. [H- & 780.] eTret re, Herodot. 
Er. c. 84. es re, Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 11. See also II. a, 218. And 
when re connects, it does so otherwise than rat: for when whole 
members are connected by re, they are so connected, that what is, 
as it were, not necessary, is thus added to what goes before ; which 
is very frequent in the historians, and in disjunctive forms of 
speech ; re — rat (as que — et) is said, not Kal — re, — irar))p avbpiHv re 
Kal dew v. 

The form be re makes expressions a little more uncertain or doubt- 
ful : see Hesiod, Op. 419. Horn. II. (p, 151. Od. x, 306. [See 
note u in this page.] Sometimes be re answers to fxev re pre- 
ceding: e. g. Horn. II. e, 139. <£« 260. When be re occurs in the 
tragedians, it is to be corrected: be y may be substituted in iEschyl. 
Choepli. 488. and Eurip. Hel. 517. Schajfer reads be x>'/ in Eurip. 
Ion, 137S. aud, as Hermann thinks, rightly. 

Kcu re, Horn. II. a, 521. Theogn. 662. 

Te is sometimes used in the same manner as eha and K§ra after a 
participle, then : see jEschyl. Ag. 97. Choepli. 554. and Hermann, 
ad Aristoph. Nub. 180. 

Te often precedes apa in interrogations, as in Horn. II. a, 8. But 
the contraction of toI apa should be written raprt : Soph. CEd. C. 
1442. El. 404. Aristoph. Nub. 1157. 

* The connecting particle here is 5e, which may, and perhaps often does, happen, 

not T€. Te gives a slight shade of uncer- So in those beautiful verses cited by De- 

tainty : for the words do not contain a metrius ofPhalerum, § 106. 

positive, peremptory, assertion of one O'lav to.v volkivQov kv ovpeai irot/xeves &v5pes 

particular actual fact, but a general repre- Yloaal KaTatrrei^ova-i, x a l xa -' 1 AE' TE irop- 
sentation, by way of simile, of something <pvpov &vQos. — J. S. 



1£)6 Te, Kai. [Chap. vm. § vii. 

It is sometimes followed by be instead of re or ecu : Soph. (Ed. 
C. 36*7. 

II. Ka«, even unaccompanied by aXXa, sometimes signifies also, 
even : e/iol rf)v. evvoiav ko.1 i>vv\ irapdoyeoQe, Demosth. pro Cor. v. 
Dem. in Aristocr. [701, 7- It-] 

III. It commences a parenthesis, for the purpose of connexion: 
aWiov be tovtcjv, — (kcii /joi, irpas deuiv, vrav eveKa rov /3eAr«orou Aeyw, 
eaTM -irafjpijaia,) ac : Demosth. de Chers. 

It signifies but, (as the Hebr. 1,) 1 Thess. ii, 18. Acts x, 28. Ec- 
clesiastic, xli, 13. Tob. iii, 10. Rev. ii, 2, 9. 

It is, like be, opposed to jueV : Pind. Pyth. ii, 106. And so rein 
Pind. Pyth. ii, 60. is opposed to per in v. 56. v. Pyth. iv, 443. 445. 
Nem. viii, 51. 53. 

IV. It is used in interrogation or doubt in the beginning of a sen- 
tence, or member : ri epovfiev, eav tis ij/jas avaKpirr)' Kal tis avQputirwv 
to fxr) ov bo^aaei ; Plato Theaet. p. 1 88. I. 37. Kal bwrjadfieda, to 
'Epfiij, bit' byres — ; Lucian, in Charon. 

V. When ov fiovov is followed by a\\a without Kal, there is a 
gradation: in which case the Latin writers also use sed without etiam: 
t/nariov rifjupieaai ov fiovov (j>avXov, iiXXa to ai/TO depovs re Kal ^ei/nwvos : 
Xen. Mem. i, 6, 2. v. ii, 7, 6. Oppian, Cyn. i, 159. 

VI. (VI. VII.) Kal often indicates a degree of doubt, and espe- 
cially after rl irore, or ri alone : ti Trore koj, KaXeaai \pr/ ; Xen. 
H. Gr. ii. p. 468. ri yap Kal fiovXofievoi fieTeirefiiretrd' av avrovs — ; 
Demosth. pro Cor. p. 3l6. 1. 17." The question ri xP'l Xeyetv ; 
merely asks what must be said, without expressing any doubt whether 
any thing ought to be said : but j-/ xP r ) K <*i Xeyeiv, is the question 
of one doubting not only as to what must be said, but also whether 
any thing ought to be said : what must be said, if indeed any thing 
at all is to be said ? e't n irpaaaetv OeXeis is, if you are willing to 
do any thing ; el n ko.1 irpaaoeiv QeXeis is, you will scarcely do any 
thing, but, however, if you are willing to do something. 

VII. (VIII.) Kal is sometimes rendered atque, as : v. Duker. ad 
Thuc. vii, 71. p. 494, 71. Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 50, 2. p. 534. 
Kara ravTct ovtos re i]\r)ae /cat Kidapa Kpovadeiaa, in the same manner 
as: Paus. in Att. Traaijs tv^wv Trap' avrov befyuxrews laa Kal iraibwv 
6 rifiiwraros, as much as, equally with — : Greg. Naz. ov^ b/ioiws 
biatceivTai tt)v e£iv teal ore bylaivov, as when they were well. Similem 
sibi videri vitam hominum ET mercatum eum, &c. Cic. Tusc. v. 
[c iii. § 9-] 

VIII. (IX.) Kal, ac, atque, than : e<rrt yap erepa f] xpripaTioriKfj kuI 
6 ttXovtos 6 Kara (pva-tv, Aristot. i. Polit. 

IX. (X.) In Kal yap kui, Kai tis Kal, the last Kal is even or too: ov 
irapiei aeiwvb debs, Kai Tives Kal airwXovTO TStv aTpaTiwTuiv KepavvwQevT-es : 
Paus. in Lac. p. l6S. Kal yap Kal avrbs TaXavrevofiai tijv yvwfxrjv, 
for I myself also, or for even I myself — : Gregor. So Kayib, or Kal 
eyib, I loo, or even I. 

v ©avudfa 5' avrov ri irore Kal Toi\/u?'j- Timocr. p. 721. I. 27. ed. Reisk. See 
crei Ac^eiy ire.pl robrwv : Demosth. in Xen. Anab. iv, 8, 16. v, 1, 11. — J. S. 



Rule 2— 10.] Te, Kat. 197 

Kal, when : /jS/j be i\v 6\pe, Kai ol Kvpivdiot €£cnrlvr)s irpvfivav eKpov- 
ovto : Time, i, 50. So Xen. Cyrop. i, 26. This sense is very 
common in the N. T. See Acts Ap. v, 7. Mark xv, 25. Luke ii, 
21. Hebr. viii, 8. For similar expressions in Latin see Virg. JEu. iii, 
9. iv, 663. xi, 864. i, 86. ii, 692. iii, 356. v, 858. xi, 296. 621. 
G. ii, 80. iii, 493. Gell. x, 29. and, as in 1 Mace, vii, 23. 
Kal, conformably to the use of the Hebrew particle "), is placed at the 
beginning of both a preceding and following member of a sentence : 
Kal (when) elbev 'lovbas, — Kal e^Xflev, &c. 

Kal is expressive of urgency and earnestness, both in commands 
and questions : Kai jioi avayvwBi to i/>//0i<7ua, Lys. adv. Agorat. 
p. 466. ed. Reisk. Kai fioi KaXei tov ra^iap^or, lb. p. 499- v » P> 
474. [1. 4.] 493. [1. 3.] Demosth. pro Cor. p. 243. [I. 7. R.] ib. p. 
253. [I. 9- R-] k q i tus irarpaav yaiav ov awaai BeXto ; Eurip. Phoen. 
907. v. 1357. Or. 1110. Tab. Ceb. p. 203. Lucian, in Solcec. t. iii. 
p. 575. Virg. Eel. i, 27. 

Kal sometimes intends, or has an augmentative power: os vvv ye 
Kal av Art irarpl fiu\otro, Horn. II. e, 36'2. even with Jove himself : 
o'virto yadov Kal eVa avbpa, &c. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 18. See Theogn. 
342. Iliad ^>, 268. 

It imparts something of indefiniteness to the signification of words, 
as cunque in Latin, and soever in English: juaXa ijbri irapetyvXarTov o, 
tl Kal jieibiaaeie : Lucian, Lap. t. iii. p. 428. ebpaaev 6 tl bfi 
Kal ebpaaev, Heliod. v. init. [See Rule 6. and also Chap. II. 
Rule 2.] 

Kal has sometimes the same meaning as KaiTrep or Kav : 7roX\a fie 
Kal awievra napip-^erai, although: Theogn. 419- v. 1114. Horn. 
11. a, 663. 1, 651. u, 171. Aristoph. Plut. 945. Luke xviii, 7. cf. 
Valck. ad Phcen. Eurip. p. 98, 99. 

It is sometimes explanatory ; [being nearly equivalent to the French 
savoir, and to the English, that is, namely, that is to say ;] avrap 
o /3?/ 7rp6s bwfxa Aios Kal fiaKpbv "OXvfxttov, Horn. II. v, 398. see Horn. 
H. Apoll. 17. and it very frequently connects an adjective with ttoXvs 
preceding: see iEschyl. Ag. 63. Soph. Trach. 1277. Hermaun. ad 
Eurip. Hec. p. \62. w " 

X. (XI. XII. XIII.) Kav (Hermann, de emend, rat. Gr. gr. i, 
8. p. 36. is icai av, and perhaps, although or even perhaps: or Kai 
kav, even if ; or Kai kv, and in. Kav iravTairaaiv enraibevros wv, ro'is 
KO/xiby Trenaibevfievois eavrov avTnrapafiaXXei : even though, tovto be 
kolv Trals yvoit], even a child might know : Plat. Euthyd.p. 279> '• 38. 
V. Mark vi, 56. el Trepl eras re^vr] KaXws i^iaravro Xeyetv, kciv irepl 
Tutv aXXwv anavrwv '. also, or even : Plat. Ion, p. 524. tovtwv /jev 
Kay a\pato, Kav 'ibois, kclv rals aXXais alad^aemv a'loBoio : you can both 
touch, &c. Plato Phaed. c. 25. p. 97 • *>• "aj> pev, eiXafiovfxevos tovto, 

w Add, kcu, and yet, why : Anus : fiZv Koifii^eraL ; &c. Plat, de Rep. ix. p. 462. 

€>e fjjTeTs: Adol. ir6dev ; Anus : Kal t\\v 1. 30. ed. Bas. I. In fact, in reality: b 

dvpav y' ^par-res: Aristoph. Eccl. 977. Kal avvifr-n, Plut. in Theraist. p. 221. 

In place of aAAa: ovxl o /j.ev \av8dvccv 1. 7. H. St. and in C. Mar. p. 772. 1. 11. 

en irovnpSTepos yiyverar tov 8e fxi) \av0d- — J. S. 
vovtos, k a I KoKa^oiiivov, rb ^\v Gnpttcdes 



198 Ken. [Chap. viii. § vii. 

/.») Xeyio -a Trenpayfitva e/uavr<p, &c. and if, guarding against this, 
&e. Demostli. pro Cor. See Plato Euthyphr. c. 10. Epict. c. 18. 
Luke xiii, 9- where the apodosis koXws ?xet, or l^e l'' ie > ' s omitted; 
[see § vi. beginning of R. 4. 9-] ovros e/iol TroXeuel, kuv fxijitd) 
fiaXXij kul ro^evtj: even if, i. e. even although: Demostli. Phil. iii. 
J). 115. Ki'iv yue (jtayrjft enl pi£av, o[j.ws ert Kapirofopiirno : Epigr. 
ttclvtu Kivelrai, Kav pfiy/ua, Kav arpeuua, uav aXXo tl tiHv vtrap^ovTwv 
oadpbv y : whether— or — or : Demostli. 01. ii. p. 24. [1. 6. ed. Reisk.] 
Kav 6i, even if perhaps : ko.v el -aura navTa v-v,\>yev, Demostli. de 
Fals. Leg. Kav a/refietav tl KOTayivioaKy tis tlov Tre-pea^ev^ievLov avry, 
lb. teat biciKplveaOcti Kal avyKpiveoQai, Kal \pv\eadai Kal Oepuaiveadat, 
Kal Ttdvra ovtlo, kclv el fji) ^Qiofxeda tols ovouafftv evtct-^ov, dXX' epy<p 
yovv iravTayov ovruis e-^etv avayKalov : even although perhaps we may 
in some instances have no names for the things: Plato Phsed. c. 15. 
p. 71, 6. 

Kav in the designation of number or quantity, about, even to the 
amount of — : neXTaaTul he /cat ro^orai yevoivr' av tos eirl rrjs r/fierepas 
hwujieus icav e^iKiafj.vpioi, even as many as about sixty thousand: 
Xeu. Cyrop. ii, 1, 6. Kav, even, only, no more than: riv yovv 
eTrirpexpu) avry Kav dnu^ (jyiXijaat '. ae, ovkctl fiefiipy p.oi'. Lucian, Dial. 
Deor. v, 3. 

KaV, at least : 6/j.ws epaaTxiv Kav tovtov ey^io, Lucian, Dial. Mar. i, 3. 
v. D. Deor. v, 2. [128. d. Salmur.] et in Soiree, t. iii. p. 574. 
Soph. El. 81. 

With respect to the construction of me with the indicative mood, 
see Brunck. ad Aristoph. Plut. 2l6\ Hermann, ad Aristopb. Nub. 
1156. and De Metris i, p. 86. 

XL (XIV.) Kat tS),* or /cat £7 Kal, or Kal bf]ra, or /cat brJTa Kai, is 
generally, and indeed, and truly, nay even: Kal b>) Kai aov fjbeios av 
■nvdoifirjv. 

Kal br), with some other word intervening, is often and more, and 
moreover, and — too, and what is more. Xenophon, after saying that 
Astyages had made up a great hunting party to gratify Cyrus, pro- 
ceeds, Kal fia(7i\u:tos brj irapuv uvtos, uirriyopeve fiijbeva (3dXXeiv, Ttplv 
Kvpos efxir\ri(T'ddrj Otjpwv : Cyrop. i, 4, 14. 

Kai bij is employed in stating something supposed for the sake of 
argument : Kal b>) TeQvaac tis ue befcrai ttoXis ; well, I will suppose 
they are dead: Eurip. Med. 3S8. kqI br) bibey/iac ris be fiot r«p) 
jue'j-et ; iEschyl. Eum. 883. and with a participle : Kal brj rpenofievot, 
7roiovs ?i 'nnreas r) TofyWas J) 7re\raoras i] (lkovtiotcis, avev Itttuov bvres, 
bvvalfxeQa av <pevyovras j) Xafielv t\ KaraKaiveiv ', Xen. Cyrop. iv, 3, 5. 
Valck. ad Herodot. vii, 184. p. 591. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. 
p. 129. b. 

XII. (XV.) Kat b>) sometimes signifies at once, forthwith : [see 
Rule 6. Sect. v. of this chap, and the note on the first part of it.] 
ws, eav irpo-epos tis e'inoi ra 7rpo<7oV0' eavrJ irepl aXXov, Kal bi] ravif 
ovrws e^nvra : Demostb. pro Cor. [p. 318. 1. 3. ed. Reisk.] tovovtov 

x On Ka\ 87? «al see the last part of note there. — J. S. 
Rule 6. § v. of this chapter, and the 



Rule 11—16.] 



Kai'. 



199 



v-rrenrwv, err' av-bv rat S>) rpe\popLai : Gregor. So atque, Virg. Georg. 
i. [v. 203.] 

XIII. (XVI.) Kru ironical, followed by ye by : rat bij\6v ye b>) on 
— fiaitofjiai, Plato Symp. sub init. 

XIV. (XVII. XVIII. XIX.) Ralph are joined in Horn. II. t. ves- 
ical fxev tis re Kaatyvrjroio (povoto ttoivtjv, t) ov naibos ebe^aro redvetwros : 
and yet: v. 628. But some other word commonly intervenes between 
them [and then each retains its own usual signification]. Ral pijv 
signifies and truly, and moreover : rat fj.i\v TavraXov elaelbov, &c. 
Horn. Od. X, 582. v. 593. also, but, but indeed, but yet, and yet, 
atqui. See Eurip. Suppl. 1010. and Markl. Iph. A. 1619. Aristoph. 
Lys. 559. 131. Eurip. Iph. A. 20. Kai ni)v, el ri tG>v uWwv, wv vvv\ 
cW/3aXXe Kai biefcrjet, y teal ctXX' oriovv abiKovvra. jue vfxus ewpa — : De- 
mosth. pro Cor. '[229, 25. ed. R.] See Demosth? ib. p. 3l6\ [232, 
25. ed. R.] ib. [249, 4.] ib. [247, 15.] ib. [257, 17-] Kai fn)v 
ical rar' uvto tovto ci.£i6s elfii errairov Tv^e'tv/ Plato Svmp. See also 
Demosth. pro Cor. p. 348. 1. 15. [309, 12. ed. R.] mi pr/v evayx/is 
ae kci^row, atqui, why, I was lately looking for you : Plato Symp. 
[p. 176. 1. 4. ed. Bas. 1.] 

XV. (XX— »XXV.) Rai tol is quamquam ; and yet; however; 
although indeed; koItoi ti <j)t)fjtt.; .tEscliyl. Prom. 101. See Eurip. 
Or. 75. Iph. T. 720. Demosth. pro CoV. p. 341. 1. 49. [294, 13. 
ed. R.] ib. [230, 11. ed. R.] ib. [260, 21. ed. R.] miroi Kai \6yov 
Tiva Karemreipav els tov bij/xov, Plut. in Caes. v. Demosth. de Cor. 
[248, 7. ed. R.] rat'rot av ye, ov-<i> ao<pds wv, ovbev rwi' Trap efxov ber/ai] 
\6y<av: Lucian. 5 The expression is made more forcible by the ad- 
dition of ye : KahoL ye fjir)v ye fxeaovv avrbv, Plato Phaedr. p. 241. 
I. 29. Kairot ye ov twv ev 7re<pVKOT(oi> irepl ravra eis u>v, Greg. Naz. v. 
Aristoph. Ach. 617. 

XVI. (XXVI.) Kai yap rot and rat yap ouvare,/or truly: Kai yap 
toi 77 a(7i to~is "EXX?;(7iv ibei^are eK tovtwv — * Kai yap obv vnoypu<peas 
7rape(TTr]<ict[XT]v : Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 920. 



v Hoogeveen says he doubts whether 
these are Plato's words ; and he has good 
reason for doubting. The passage is in 
Demosth. de Cor. p. 262. 1. 26. ed. Reisk. 
See also the same Oration, p. 250. 1. 22. 
252, 16. 254, 5. 267, 9. 304, 2. and 
Aristoph. Thesm. 1126. Plut. 9jj. Kai 
/*V always begins a sentence, sometimes 
even a book or treatise, as Lucian's piece 
Adv. indoctum, &c. — J. S. 

z More examples of 'the use of Kai toi 
may be seen in the follow ing pp. and 
lines of Reiske's ed. of Demosth. de Cor. 
258, 14. 259, 14. 262, 21. 263, 13. 268, 
18. 272, 28. 274, 10. 285, 12. 298, 19. 
300,2. 301,16. 302, 24.311,3. 314, 
27. 319, 26. 323, 4, 24. 328, 15.— 
J. S. 

a Kai yap roi often signifies, therefore, 
and therefore ; a.W alb's tovto ku?ms e/cet- 



vos, Sti Tavra fitv iaTiv anavra. ra X^P^i 
aOAa tov iro\4fj.ov Kelfxeva ev [teay — Kai 
yap toi, TavTrf xpyvaixzvosTrj yvai/xy, iraV- 
ra KaTtffTpaiTTai Ka\ eX 6t: Demosth. in 
Phil, i, 41, 27. R. %yvoi t\\v ti/jl^v oiixl 
t&5 Kvpiq) tSiv TrpayfxdTcov SeSooKc&s. Kai yap 
toi irpSiTOV fiev 'AficpliroAiv boi\T)v /care'ffTTj- 
aev, — eTt' ovdevl irunroT' eSoiKe xP^A* aTa 
TovAonrov. Id. de Fals. Leg. 383, 23. 
See 384, 25. irepl ttjs fiye/xovlas iirolTjo'e 
Tp ■?r6\ei Tbv \6yov irpos AaKebaifioviovs 
ehai. Kai yap toi /xSvcp t5>v iravTav avT(S 
toot iv T7f (TT7)\t; yiypairTar &c. Id. adv. 
Lept. 477, 25. ' See Demosth. in Mid. 
563, 8. in Aristocr. 655, 7. 689, 9. &v 
tis jSoi'AT7Tat v6\jlov Kaivbv TiOevai, if fipixV 
tov Tpdxv^ ov £X WV vo/j-odeTel' — Kai yap toi 
Kaivovs fj.\v ov ToXfxSxn TideaBai vd/xovs : 
Demosth. in Timocrat. 744, 9.— J. S. 



200 Me»-, \e. [Chap. viii. § viii. 

XVII. (XXVII.) Knt uv and *ai jut), not, and not : 0a/po/uai toIwv 
eyo) ylipnos rerw^rjfcwt rare, nal oil fie/Ji\pews, ovbe rifiupius : Demosth. 
pro Cor. teal fx>) ravra fiova wv eartv eifxapfieir] ; Diogenian. ap. 
Euseb. Prajp. vi. 



SECTION VIII.— On the conjunctions ^ev and be, and 

THE PARTICLES JOINED WITH THEM. 

Rule I. Mev is not put after the relative o$, as quidem is put after 
qui : the Greeks rather say oirrts, oanep, os bi), os ye, and the poets 
oore. 

It is sometimes used without be, in the same manner as quidtm in 
Latin.* 

II. (II. III. IV.) Mev* and be are almost always put correlatively in 
parts of sentences having some reference or opposition to one 
another ; as, ovros fxev r//uas (pevaxigei, i/fxels be vk evqdelas avrbv 
VTrepoTrovbaSetv f]fiaiv olofieda. tovtov be ciXXo fxev ovhev, irepl be rrj 
\eipi xpvoovv ba.KTv\iov tyepeiv : Plat, de Rep. ii. p. 359- ijye'iadat 
rffv vT\aov tcivttjv — aXXo fiev ovbev elvat (5ao~iXei ^priaifirjv, — tT]S o avrfjs 
apyfjs e7rtre/x £ff i ua : Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 49. v. Aristid. de Smyrn. 
p. 292. Epict. Ench. c. 62. QerraXol be vtt avayKt\s fxev, o/xws be 
efxrjbiclov: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 298. ijbe yap yvvri bovXi] fiev, 
eipT]Kei> §' eXevdepov Xoyov. although a slave, yet has, &c. Soph. 
Trach. 62. Sometimes these particles indicate celerity : to fxev 
eireaev, ^ be e%et baaa: M\. V. H. i, 2. speaking of the spider 
seizing quickly the prey which falls into its web. 

It is to be remarked that fxev and be are not always to be trans- 
lated ; and also that they frequently connect different parts of speech ; 
as may be seen in some of the foregoing examples. The following 
may be added: nepbovs fuev evetca, ra /3e\r«<xra b' o'yuws Xeyetv '. 
Thuc. iii, 43. ;Esch. S. c. Th. 765. Soph. CEd. C. 1454. When 
things are really opposed, so that /jev is although, a participle may 
be joined with pev, and a verb witli be. Sophocles has so joined an 
adjective with /iev : a5e7a fiev, avria b' o'lau) : Trach. 122. 'Abelu 
is lubens, willing: atovres fiev, tyepov be: v. Irmisch. Add. ad He- 
rodian. iii. p. 654. 

III. (V.) Mej- and be are sometimes,^CM/ra, — turn, as — so: iroXXa 
fxev ovv eyiaye eXaT~oT>fxai Kara Tovrovt top ay Siva Aiaj^ivov, bvo b\ 
avbpes 'Adrjvaloi, kcu [xeyaXa : Demosth. pro Cor. [226, 13. ed. R.] 
See the beginning of Isocrates's Paraen. ad Demonic. 

IV. (VI.) In enumerations, recitals, &c. these particles are often 
simply connective : iravra fxev ituvov, navra be Kivbvvov vnofieveiv : 



6 In a question without Be following ; affirmation : S'alza, e gridando va, ch' e 

vyiaiveis p.4v ; Aristoph. Av. 1214. why, suo pensiero Di pianger Si, ma non morir 

are you in your senses ? — J. S. da vero. Baldovini, Lamento di Cecco, 

* Mei/, when opposed to 8e, is ex- &c. — J. S. 



pressed in Italian by Si, but with more of 



Rule l— 8.] Mev, Ae. 201 

Xen. edepaneue fiev to. (ruifiara, edepaweve be ras \pv%as : Gregor. 
ws anavTO. fiev y^aXKov, airavra be tyolviica QaiveoQai : Xen. Ages. 
ii, 7. cf. Xen. Mem. iv, 2, 25. iii, 8, 10. Anab. 460, 6. 46-5, 3. 475, 
9. 479. 4S0. Cyrop. 270, 3. 276, 21. 286, 22. 290, ult. 

V. (VII.) Sometimes the opposition expressed by fiev and be is 
carried on with a climax through several negative members, the 
word joined with be in the first member being repeated with fiev in 
the second, and that with be in the second, with fiev in the third : 
ovk eirrov fiev ravra, oi/«c eypa\pa be' ovbe eypa-^a fiev, ovk eTtpeafievoa be' 
ovb' eirpecrflevva. fiev, ovk erreirra be (drjfiaiovs : I did not advise these 
things without writing a psephism about them ; nor write the pse- 
phism about them without going on the embassy; nor go on the 
embassy without persuading the Thebans : Demosth. pro Cor. p. 339- 
1. 10. [2S8, 8. ed. R.] 

VI. (VIII.) The omission of something is frequently opposed to 
the doing of something else : ov to fiev irpos aXXyXovs ayuviieodat 
■3rapaXet7reiv, erepa b' oru kukov ti b&oofiev $rjre7v : Demosth. pro Cor. 
and in that case the first member is to be translated into Latin by a 
substantive in the ablative absolute with a participle passive. 

VII. (IX.) Very often, especially in enumerations or details, be is 
many times repeated after one fiev ; as, bpys iravra^ov fiev £(<pVt 
Travray^ov be QupaKus, navTayov be bopaza, ir&vra be 'linrwv, iravra be 
onXtav, 7rdvra be wnXurfievuiv avbpGtv fieard : Dio Chrys. Or. xii. 
See Athen. Deipn. vii. p. 280. But in divisions, when one of the 
opposed particulars requires subdivision, both fiev and be are re- 
peated : see Ceb. Tab. [pp. 36, 37- ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] 

Sometimes fiev is placed at the end of one head of a discourse, or 
chapter of a book, and the corresponding be in the beginning of the 
next; as in Isocr. Paneg. [p. 103. 1. 1 — 3. ed. Battie, Cantab. 1729-] 
and in Thuc. ii. c. 54. 55. cf. Plut. in Demosth. p. 851. Demosth. 
Ep. iii. p. 117. 

VIII. (X.) In oppositions be following fiev is often to be rendered 
sed, but ; as, atcoveis fiev, ov awieis* be : iu which case fiev is some- 
times omitted; as, el be ov fioLy^evaets, Qovevaeis be — : James ii, 11. 
and in others also. See Horn. II. a, 3. 4. 5. 43. 358. e, 3S. Od. £, 
319. Eurip. Or. 455. Sometimes after fiev some other particle 
is put in place of be: as aXXa, see Horn. II. y, 214. Eurip. 
Or. 562. cf. 138. 1023. Aristoph. Vesp. 480. Thuc. iv, 57. 
Rom. xiv, 20. avrdp: 11. a, 50. i, 400. 701. 0, 514. arap : II. 
<p, 40. avdis : Soph. Ant. 170. fievroi: Aristot. de Rep. i, 6. 
Plato de Rep. vi. p. 511. Xen. Cyrop. iii, 1, 26. firjv: Plato 
Phaedr. p. 268. ttX^ aXXd : Heliodor. vi, 7. nai : II. a, 267. 
Theophr. nepl dypotK. Lucian, Dial. Nept. et Delph. re: Eurp . 
Or. 1317' eireiTU, or rather be is understood with eweira, irpio ra 
fiev, or TrpuiTov fiev, having preceded : Isocr. ad Nicocl. p. 5 6. 
Aristoph. Vesp. 550. Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. Xen. Mem. iii, 11, 
14. i, 4, 11. i, 7, 2. iii, 8, 5. iv, 2, 31. So after el-a, Aristoph. 
Vesp. 1101. Xen. Mem. i, 2, 1. iii, 6, 9. av : Horn. II. X, 108. 

* See the Abridgment of Maittaire, p. 199. note a,— J. S. 
Viger. 2 c 



202 Mer, Ae. [Chap. vin. § viii. 

and there are examples in Attic and prose writers also : aire, Horn. 
Od. ^, 5. and so the Attic writers. But sometimes iuf" is followed 
neither by be nor by any oilier particle instead of it; and in that 
case, either be is to be understood, or that member or part in which 
be should be, is omitted : eyw /uev ouk olbu iroiovs vivas j^pi] puXXov 
ev^atrdai, *) towvtovs arpartwras e-^etv, i. e. / indeed know not ; but 
others perhaps know: Xen. Cyrop. ii, 2, 10. see also iv, 2, 45. 
5, 17. 5, 50. Xen. CEc. xv, 6. vii, 8. The division, in which 
be should be, sometimes precedes ; as, ovrot br) cublKrai, in Plat. Crit. 
p. 43. d. On the repetition of pev in the same member see Dorv. 
ad Char. p. 560. When pev — m), or pev — re, are joined, there is 
properly an anacoluthon, by which a transition is made from the 
disjunction indicated by pev to the conjunction signified by na\ or 
re : v. Pind. Pyth. iv, 443. On the contrary, in repetitions of the 
same thing; as, afaipwv fiev ras bia ^v\div, acpatpujv be ras bi cuppo- 
biaiojv, acpaipuiv be rus bi' aicpoaparuv, &c. (Epicur. ap. Athen. Deipn. 
vii. p. 280.) Karand re are never joined : the reading in Aristoph. Pac. 
162. seems to be faulty. 

IX. (XI.) Mev br) marks the conclusion of a subject or topic : koX 
ravra nev br) ravra, so much for this : Plato. reXos pev br) roiovrov 
icareXafiev rbv 'AXefavbpnv, such then was the end, &c. Herodian 
vi. sub fin. But it generally indicates a transition, be corresponding 
to it in the apodosis or succeeding member; as, ol pev bi] aXXoi 
eyeXurv enl rrj bopvfopla- rrjs eVtoTfXjjs' 6 be Kvpos elirev, &C Xen. 
Cyrop. ii, 2, 10. See also § 13. And in the same manner pev — be~, 
Xen. Cyrop. ii, l, 10. The same particles indicate the commence- 
ment of a topic or subject; but always with reference to something 
premised or prefatory : irarpos pev br) Xiyerai 6 Kvpos yeveadat Kap- 
fivvov, well then, &c. Xen. 7repi pev bi) rwv Iblwv oaa Xotbopov- 
fxevos fiefiXaatyi] pique irepl epov, deaaaaQe, &c. Demosth. pro Cor. 
[p. 228. 1. 13. ed. R. referring to those preceding words, avaytcalov 
elvai vopiBto — fipa-^ea nepl rovrwv irpwrov elnelv.J So ergo, Hor. 
[Epod. ii, 9.] They also serve to connect different parts of narration : 
£irera£av rrj o^drj ras 'iXas rG>v 'Lmrtav. yjrovov pev bi] — rjav^iav r)yov '. 
Arr. Exp. Al. i.'p. 31. 

X. (XII.) Mev roi is significant of assent, affirmation, asseveration : 
i] /ecu epe ovv, i(pr] f] yvvi], beijaei ravra iroieiv ', ber)aei pev roi, ^<pr]V 
eyw, evbov pevetv : Xen. v. Plat. Pbaed. p. 93. a. c. p. ^4. a. 
de Rep. p. 374. de Legg. p. 665. b. 666. a. c blicatov fxevroi av, e'i ri 
poi roiovrov rjpap-TjTai, rfjs ap^s re cipa teal rrjs \pv\ijs cnroaTeprjdrjvai : 
Dion. Hal. iv. p. 239. 1- 17- 

XI. (XIII.) Sometimes pev roi is adversative: Servius, after asking 

* 'E7C6 ; av ]ievroi : Aristoph. Eq. 168. proof of a different sense : ovtos, ere Xeyoi 

ay, you, I say. — rj/Meis vjjms crctxrofj.ev. — fiivroi, ere rbv redvrjK6ra : Ran. 171. yes, 

fyi€?s ; fiiJ.e7s fiivroi, ay, we : Aristoph. you £ say : for, as Hermann rightly ob- 

Lvs. 498. a<ppoves b~e real <pp6vifj.oi So- serves, fxevroi is said on account of some 

Kovaiv &v6pwiroi elvai rives <roi ; Alcib. manifestation of surprise on the part 

efoai fiev roi, Plat. Ale. ii. p. 228. 1. 2. of the dead man. See also Aristoph. Av. 

And this affirmative sense it has in the 1351. — J. S. 
verse of Aristoph. cited by Zeunius in 



Rule 9 13.] Mev, Ae. 203 

whether he had conducted himself tyrannically, says, ris fxev toi tujv 
•Kpo efxov fiaotXewv ovrw fierpios ev kfyvoiq. biereXeo-e ; why., which of the 
kings before me, &c. Dion. Hal. iv. p. 239- I. 22. tovto fxevroi elbdjs, 
ovbev fiaXXov eiriarajjiai onus be~i yewpye'iv : yet nevertheless, but not- 
withstanding : Xen. ov be tb/uoXoyeis tuiv ye vvv ovbeva, riov 
(xevroi e/nrpoadev: but: Plat, in Gorg/ See II. <p, 371- In Eurip. 
Phoen. 910. yueVrot applies to both members of the sentence; how- 
ever, what you now wish, you will presently unwish. In this sense it 
is used in injunctions : fxefivr\ao fxevroi, wsovk abicKpopov ijyrj tov irovov : 
remember, however, &c. Lucian, Lapith. t. iii. p. 450. and is some- 
times correlative with fiev : TreiQov /xev ical rois vdfxois, rois vnb tuiv 
fiaaiXeoJV Keifxevois' laytypoTarov fievrot vdfxov f]yov tov eKeivwv rporrov : 
Isocr. ad Demon, p. 19- ovV avrbs rcavv toi yiyvuio-Kut tov avbpa' — 
dvofxa^ovai fievTOi av~ov, ojs eywfjiai, MeXirov : Plat. Euthyphr. Here 
fiev is not expressed. St is joined with o/xws, Xen. Cyrop. ii, 3, 
22. Ov nh'Toi is used in questions which appear to deny something, 
for the purpose of having it more distinctly or positively affirmed in 
the answers: kv bitcacrrripims ai avribiKot tL bpujaiv ; ovk avTiXeyovei 
fxevTot; rj ri tyiioofxev ; Answ. tovt clvto: Plat. Phasdr. p. 261. c. 
ovk kvdevbe fievrot irodev — Xeyerai 6 Bope«s tt]v 'Slpeidviav aprraaai; 
Answ. Xeyerat yap. lb. p. 229- b. In Aristoph. fxevrot in a question 
indicates the impatience and anger of the speaker at having forgotten 
something: <p&p 'ibw ri fxevroi -xpuirov r)v ; t'l Trpwrov i)v ; ris r)v, kv 
rj fjtaTTOfueda fxevroi raXcpira ; Nub. 7&7- 

It is used ironically; scilicet, forsooth : Aristoph. Nub. 1338. / 
have got you taught in truth with a vengeance. 

XII. (XI V.) MevToiye is tamen certe, however indeed: etr) b' av 
Ka\ aXXos Tts " Ap^avbpos' ov fxevroi ye Aiyinrriov to avvofia : Herodot. 
ii, 08. (j>r]fjL be 6 fxvdos tied avQpunrov tivu $ilvlav to ap-^aloP yeveadai 
7raw KaXijv, XaXov fievTOi ye nal OTWfj.vXr]v : Lucian, Euc. Muse. 10. 
t. iii. p. 97/ See Diod. S. v, 73. But when another word intervenes 
between fievrot and ye, the latter appertains to the word immediately 
preceding it ; as, avrjp ^.TrapTidrrjs, ov fxevroi yeveos ye tov (oacriXtjiov 
eujv : Herodot. viii, 42. 

Te ixevToi has a signification similar to that of fxev toi ye, certainly 
however, Eurip. Ale. 724. (727.) Rhes. 589. Heracl. 593. 637. 
1016. KTe'iv, el bo;ce! aot' bvatcXeuis yap ov Kreve'is' fiaXXbv ye fxevroi 
rois e/jLols -neidov Xoyois : however you will certainly do better to be 
persuaded by my words: Eurip. Hel. 999. 

MevTav has the same significations as [xevrot alone ; for av belongs 
to some verb : biicalws fievrav enredavov, Demosth. pro Cor. v. Soph. 
Aj. 86. and Hoogev. de Partic. p. 697- seq. 

XIII. (XV. XVI. XVII.) Mev ovv is used in transitions, to preserve 

d In this sense it is sometimes correc- Bas. 1. But in the following passage 

tive also, and qualifies : vvv de ra neyio-ra. fxevroi ye has a different sense : jl t.v ovv 

tuiv ayad&v t](uv ylyverai Sta. fiavias- 9eia enrot irpbs ravrd tis, Sre roiavra ttoiwv 85' 

/x4vToi SJtrei StSo/xeV^js : Plato in Phsedr. avaicxwru ; Mnesil. kovttu fiev toi ye 

p. 201. 1. 51. ed. Bas. i. — J. S. ireiravfuu : and what is more too, 1 have 

e Kal Key over 1 ixev ri, ov fievroi ye Saov not yet done: Aristoph. Thesru. 709. — 

olovTM : Plat, de Bep. i. p. 372. 1. 3. ed. J. S. 



204 Ae. [Chap. vm. § viii. 

continuity; often in the beginning of recitals, and, as /xev bf), with 
reference to some preceding words, arid with some signification of 
conclusion from them : iroXXa /xev ovv eytoye eXarrovfxai Kara tovtovi 
tov ayuiva Alrj-^ivov, bvo b\ avbpes ' AQrjvaioi k<x\ fxeyaXa : Demostb. 
pro Cor. [226, 13. ed. R.] Treipuarofxai fxev ovv tl*s (xerpitoraTa tovto 
iroielv : Id. ib. el /xev ovv nepl u>v ebiwKe fxovov, Karr}y6pr}oev Ala\lvt)s, 
&c. Id. ib. v. Demostb. 01. i. [15. 26. ed. Reisk.] After many 
prefatory remarks Lucian begins his enumeration of long-lived per- 
sons : 'ApyavQwvios /xev ovv, Taprrjaitav jjaaiXevs, nevrt'iKOvra kui etcarov 
ert) fiiiovat Xeyerai : Macrob. [635. b. ed. Salm.] For explication of 
something preceding: aypmcrrov fxev ovv Xeyt>), a<p' r/s [xrjbev o-vvreXelrai 
enl t))v (jtvcriv, Aristot. or for confirmation, or support of a suppo- 
sition or presumption : fxvqfxelov fxev ovv ev M-ayvrjo-ia. earl rrj 'Acnavrj, 
Time, i, 138. speaking of a person supposed to have died in 
Asia/ 

XIV. (XVIII. — XXI.) Mev ovv and ixev ovv ye are sometimes, nay, 
yea rather: 01 irapa 001 tovtwv ovbev eniaravrai rroielv ; Answ. iravra 
jikv ovv'. Xen. See Aristoph. Eccl. 1102.^ elirev avrw, fxatcapia »; koi- 
Xia i] fiaaraaaaa ae, Kat ixaarol, ovs edr/Xaaas. Avros be elite, fxevovvye 
fxatcapioi 01 cucovovres tov Xoyov rod deov, &c. Luke xi, 28. and in the 
beginning of an interrogative sentence ; nay but: fxevovvye,u> avdpwire, 
av tIs el, avTaTTOKpivofxevos rw 0ew ; Rom. ix, 20. It may be re- 
marked, by the by, that in the Ionic dialect /xev wv and [xev vw are 
used for /xev ovv : tovto \xev vvv to opos towvtuv eariv, and Tretyvtce fxey 
wv >/ x^ptf avrr] ovra) : Herodot. ii. A This u>v often separates prepo- 
sitions from the verbs with which they are compounded : air u>v 
ebovro, — /car' cov eicaXvxpe, — ev dv enaicrwaav : Herodot. ii. v. Schaef. 
ad Long. p. 417« s. 

XV. (XXII.) Ae is enclitic not only when it is employed demon- 
stratively, as in obe, rjbe, robe, but when it coalesces into one word 
with ro'ios, with tooos, with rrjXtKOS, making rotoabe, roaoabe, rrfXiKoabe, 
and also when it performs the office of the preposition els, or the like, 
as in o'kube, in ayopijvbe : Horn. II. a, 54. in ovbe bofxovbe, Horn. Od. 
a. Hes. Scut. Here. 38. and in such words signifying moral tendency, 
or the final cause; as, fxrtri </>o/3ov§' ayopev, Horn. II. e, 252. 

XVI. (XXIH.) It is sometimes an adversative particle, but : rj 
/xev bovXos, ovk ean tpiXia irpos avrov' jj b' avOpwiros : Aristot. Eth. viii. 
il fiev 6\po7TOir)rtKr) ov fxoi bone~t reyyr\ elvai, rf be larpucri, (underst. boKel 
Te-^vr) elvai,) Plat. Gorg. And in this use it elegantly concludes a 
sentence : eyw 001 ep5> arnorov /xev, vt) rovs Qeoiis, aXrides be : Plat. 
Theag. p. 130. tov aotybv fxr/ elvai jxev enradij, [xeTpiovadfj be : Diog. 



/ Thucydides is speaking of Themisto- Cleon. cmofivl-dfxevos, 3> Arj/x, ifiov irpbs 

cles ; nothing is said about the place of his t\v KetyaX^v airo^iu. Isic. efxov [ikv ovv, 

death. The words immediately preceding ifxov [xei> ovv. Aristoph. Eq. 911. — J. S. 

are, Xeyovfft 54 rives ual eKovatov tyapnaiccp h Add ye /xev, however, however in- 

aizoQavelv aiirbv, activarov vojj.lara.VTa elvai deed: avraicT 'Q.iteavov Ka\ Tr/ovos ei-ey4- 

iiriTe\eo-ai ^affiKet, a imeax^ro. — J. S. vovro Trpeo-^vTarai uovpai' iroWal ye (xev 

e Euelp. eVl ri ydp jot* eneldev tfyes ; elcrl Kal &\\ai : Hesiod, Theog. 363. See 

Pisth. "v b.Ko\ovvoh\s i/xoi. Euelp. 'iva /xev Hesiod, Scut. Here. 260. 171. — J. S. 
ovv KKdoijj.1 (xeyuAa, Aristoph. Av. 341. 



Rule 14—19-] Ae. 205 

L. v. and is put after ov fxovov, with ctXXa sal following it, when 
it requires some preceding words to be understood : as, roiavrrji' e%et 
<pvoiv 7] Tux*?, &ore a bebioKev aipeXeodai, Ka\ raj^ews iraXiv bovvai woX- 
XairXaoia' avdts be acpeXeoSai a bebwicev' ov fxovov be, ctXXa Kai ra irpov- 
7ropxoj'ra : and not only what she has given, but also what one 
possessed before : Ceb. Tab. [p. 41. 1. 12. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] 
See Rom. v, 3. 

XVII. (XXIV.) Ae is sometimes equivalent to yap. Not that be 
is properly put for yap, any more than autem is for enim in Latin : 
but when any thing, in rendering a reason, is so advanced, as to 
constitute a part of the subject spoken of, just as in any recital upon 
the accession of an additional predicate; be and autem may have 
place, because on this very account, that something new is added, 
they indicate a sort of opposition : rbv 5' ov irep e\ei Spinous, 6s Kev 
'ibrjTat, kyyvs ewV ^aXeiros be Atos fieyaXoio tcepavvos :' Horn. II. £, 
41fj. speaking of a tree struck by a thunderbolt : tovt olv bel wpoo- 
elvat' to. b' iiXXa iiirap^et : Demosth. 01. hi. p. 12. 1. 20. [32, 20. 
ed. R.] 

XVIII. (XXV. XXVI.) When a protasis is unusually long, be is 
sometimes added emphatically in the apodosis, to render it more 
distinct from the protasis : oi b' av bofaoiv ctftarws e\eiv, — rovrovs be 
i) TTpooriKOvoa iio'ipa pinrei els rbv Tdpzapop : Plat. Phaedr. p. 1 13. 1. 44. 
[45. 40. ed. Bas. 1.] and in the following sentence there is another 
example. V. Plat, de Leg. p. 898. Ae is repeated after a long 
parenthesis, Soph. El. 783. where Brunck ought not to have ex- 
punged it. On be supposed to be put for bt), v. interpp. ad Greg. 
Cor. de Dial. Att. s. 34. p. 78. ted. Schaef. 

XIX. (XXVII.) The epic writers join Kal be without the interposi- 
tion of any other word, (see Hermann, diss, de aetate Orph. Arg. 
p. 768.) but other writers insert some word between : el p/rwp eorlv, 
o'lovs eviovs eyfo xa\ v/xels be op are : and you indeed: Demosth. 
bicaiov yap avrols, /cat irpenov be ajxa, rrjv tilu)p ravrriv bihooSai : 
Thuc.J See ^Eschin. Epist. v. [p. 671. 1. ult. ed. Reisk.] Arr. 
de Exp. Al. iii. 2. Ml. V. H. ix, 9. in fin. John xv, 27- Acts 
Ap. iii, 24. v, 32. The assertion of Porson, Orest. 614. that rat 
and be never occur in the same member of a sentence in the trage- 
dians, is controverted on good grounds by Schaef. ad Long. p. 350. 
See iEschyl. Prom. 972. Eum. 65. 

Ae often occasions an anacoluthon by being added in an apodosis : 
el oiv eyw iiy) yiyvwoKw, — bue~is be biba£are fxe'. Xen. H. Gr. iv, 4, 1. 
and especially after particles of time, as ore, eVet, ews [see Chap. vil. 
§ vi. R. 4.] after donep, Soph. El. 27. A more unusual anacoluthon 
is in iEschyl. S. c. Th. 751. 



1 'O 7' 'Att6a\wv, larpSs y' &t>, IdoBar the whole army, araKrois oiploiv iiriTre- 

lxto-8o(popu 5 4 : for he receives pay : Aris- oeTcrOou, Id. ib. i, 8, 2. iro.p4xei Se — not 

toph. Av. 584, — J. S. twc 6vo[i4vcov airb ttjs iepas voLiris AcLxos, 

•>' Kai orpaTTiybv 8e avjbv cta-e'8et|e, Kal rwv Q7]p^vop.4vwv 54: Id. ib. v, 3, 10. 

&c. Xen. Anab. i, 1, 1. iSoKow oi —J. S. 
"EAArjves, Kal irdvres 8e, and indeed all, 



206 "On. [Chap. vm. § ix. 

It is employed as a connective particle even when discourse has 
been interrupted by the words of a second person ; as in ^Eschyl. 
Pers. 480. Eurip. Or. 383. ed. Porson. It is used emphatically 
in answers, and wilh something of an adversative signification: eyw 
be ye bexofiat, Xen. Hist. Gr. iv, 1, 18. See Erf. in ed. min. 
Soph. GEd. R. 480. And also in questions ; as, ct7re pot, w Kpirtav, 
nvi>as be rpetyeis, 'Ira, &c. Xen. Memor. ii, 9, 2. Iliad a, 540. 
<p, 4S1. and even when a word has preceded which might seem to 
preclude any necessity for using he : ur'ap <ppaaov fioi tovt civaarpexpas 
iraXiv, irbaov be irXydos r)v vewv 'ILWrjvibtov ; .ZEschyl. Pers. 353. V. 
Soph. CEd. C. 1132. 

It is employed also in expressing indignation : rbv be fiuaKavov ! 
tov be bXeQpovl tovtov be v(5pic,eiv ; hvaitvCiv be ; Demosth. in Mid. 
p. 582. [1. 1. ed. R.] So vero. See Liv. xxvi, c. 18. 21. Ter. Eun. 
v, 3. v. II. a, 540. ([>, 481. 

Sometimes, where be might perhaps be expected, yap is rightly 
used ; that is, when some thing, instead of being opposed to another, 
(in which case be would be used,) is only added to confirm that other. 
See ^Eschyl. Ag. 767. 

The interrogative particle bal (which Hoogeveen supposes to be 
compounded of be and civ) — 1. is used in expressions of surprise or 
wonder: ri bai ; av r'i Xeyeis ; Aristoph. Ran. 1454. cf. Nub. 1273. 
Av. 225. Ran. 558. — 2. ri bai ; is what else then? Chrem. airovaiv 
ovtc apyvpiov 01 yprjaroi. Car. ii bai ; Chrem. fiev 'i-airov ayadbv, b be 
Kvvas Brjpevrwas : Aristoph. Plut. 156". See Aristoph. Plut. 905. Av. 
1451.1640. Nub. 491. Vesp. 1212. Ach. 764. The tragedians 
also use bal in the same manner, although according to Porson, 
Med. 1008. they refrain from using it at all. It appears to be the 
right reading in Eurip. Iph. A. 1444. Cycl. 449. Hel. 1262. El. 244. 
978. But bfi is to be substituted in Iph. A. 1448. El. 1 Il6. TEschyl. 
Choeph. 900. Xen. CEc. vii, 17. — 3. ri bai; is quid porro? [It 
must be rendered variously in English, according to circumstances, 
and, but, well, &c] In Aristoph. Av. the Epops. after inquiring about 
the wishes of one person, proceeds to ask a second, ri bal av ; and 
what do you wish for? 136*. So ri bal av <prj$ ; and you, ivhat do 
you say? l6l5. I676. Xnrapbv to xp^jua rfjs 7rd\ews. ris bal Beds 
iroXwvxps earai; hut what god? &c. ib. 826. In this sense ri bal 
hi] ; well, what next, what further? Plat. Crit. p. 49. c. Gorg. 
p. 474. c. Sophist, p. 234. c. 240. c. Cratyl. p. 406. c. 



SECTION IX. — On the conjunctions on and roiwv. 

Rule I. "On, that, (formed from o and tI,) is used with a finite 
verb and its nominative case, where the Latin writers commonly 
employ an accusative and an infinitive mood :* eTnev, on fiovXerai : 

h In barbarous Latin quia is used in the vulg. translation of St. Matth. dico vobis, 
same manner as '6n in Greek. Thus in the quia omnia, qui irascitur fratri suo, reus 



Rule 1—3.} "On. 207 

Xen. H. Gr. vi. cnrayyeiXare Tf 'Ivbwv flaaiXel ra.be, on fafiev 
TjfieTs, &C Xen. Cyrop. ii. biayyeXelarjs ovv, on voael, <j>rifxr)S : 
Philo Leg. ad Cai. p. 770. See Matth. xvi, 21. But in oblique re- 
cital, when something past is spoken of, the optative mood is used by 
good writers : 01 6' 'IvSot elaeXOuvres eXe^av, on ire/a^eie cr<pas 6 'Ivb&v 
fiaaiXevs, teal KeXevaetev epwrqv, &c. Xen. Cyrop. ii, 4, 7- But 
sometimes after on an infinitive mood follows ; see Acts Ap. xxvii, 
10. Steph. Byz.de Urb. in Tpefxidovs : Plat. Phaed. c. 8. There 
is sometimes an ellipsis before on in this sense ; o be iravriiiv yeXaa- 
rorarov, (underst. rovr ean,) on — ra yeipiara rvy\avo}iev btatyvXar- 
rovres : Isoer. Paneg. 151. on b' aXrfdfj Aeyw, Xafie fxoi ra ipr/pia/iara, 
&c. (underst, "va brjXov rj, or the like,) iEschin. de Pais. Leg. p. 233. 
[1. 7« ed. Reisk.] and sometimes after it : Socr. ovkovv ko.k<3 vrrep- 
j3dXXov to abitceTv kclkiov civ e'ir] rod cibiKe'iadai. Pol. brjXov br) on. 
(underst. to dhiKelv /cariov av e'ir] tov ctbiKeladai,) Plat. Gorg. p. 475. 
1. 3S. So de Rep. ii. p. 381. And the import of brjXovon is no other 
than brjXov, on ravra ovtws e^ei. 'Us on are often joined by Xen. 
v. H. Gr. vi, p. 604. 601. Anab. vi. p. 382. Cyrop. v, 3, 30. 

II. (IV.) "On in this sense is sometimes redundant : o cie yiverai 
tyavepbv on bieawSero, for o be yiverai tpavepbv, eau>£ero : Pseudode- 
mosth. p. 1396, 4. And especially when the words of any one are 
recited in direct phraseology, and not in oblique : ovbe yap efye tcaXws 
elwe'iv, (in, ciXX' e^ovaiv 6 be'iva cai 6 be~iva : Demosth. in Leptin. on 
Xeyets, on irXovaws eljii : Rev. iii, 17. [Here, if the second on were 
translated, the person said to be rich would be Christ himself, the 
speaker of the words on Xeyets : whereas the person really intended 
is the subject of the verb Xeyeis, i. e. the angel of the church of the 
Laodiceans. See Chap. v. § i. R. 16,] 

III. (V.) Sometimes the compound bion is used instead of on, 
that: bion be ra\eojs v<f avrovs Tronraovrai rrjv 1.iiceXiav, irpotyaves r)V. 
Polyb. i, p. 9- See also p. 4. rroXXa rrapabeiyfxara Xeyovaiv — aAAa 7e 
koX bion tpiX6£evos'. Aristot. Pol. viii, 7, l6. In philosophical writings 
on and bion, with the neuter article before each, are sometimes con- 
tradistinguished ; to on signifying the being or existence of any 
thing, and to bion the cause: cip^i] yap to on' teal el rovro (paivoiro 
apKOvvnos, ovbev irpoabei'jaet tov biort : Aristot. Eth. i, 4. 

"On signifies because: cipa to oaiov, on oaiov ean, fiXelrai viro rmv 
BeCov, rj on (piXelrat, oaiov eanv ; Plat. Euthyphr. c. 12. v. Plat. 
Euthyphr. c. 2. Phaedr. p. 237. Apol. c. 7. on — bia rovro, because — , 
therefore : John xv, 19. In this sense also bion is often put for 
on : to (pepofxevov, bion cpiperat, cpepopevov eanv, i) bi aXXo ri ', Plat. 

erit judicio, v, 22. audistis quia dictum (Freeh. 14.) calls the celebrated rant of 

est, oculura pro oculo, et dentem pro an ancient father, may after all mean no 

dente, v, 38. non legistis quia qui fecit more than, I believe that it is impossible : 

hominem, ab initio masculum et faerninam yet there is something very like this rant 

fecit eos ? xix, 4. This use of quia led in Montaigne : C'est aux Chrestiens une 

me to observe in the Supplement to John- occasion de croire, que de rencontrer 

son's Dictionary published in 1819, that, une chose incroyable. Ess. 1. 2. c. 12. — 

credo quia impossibile est, which Addison J. S. 



208 "On. [Chap. viii. 

Euthyphr. c. 12. "On is sometimes why, as in Horn. II. a, 64. as k 

617TOI OTl Tt'toaOV e%tb<TUTO ^o'tftuS ' Att6X\u)V. 

IV. (III.) "On is used in interrogation : ri (underst. itrrtv) on ii/iels 
oi/ic iibwrfirifiev exfiaXe'ty uvto ; Mark ix, 28. Sometimes ri follows 
on, as on ri bi) ; Aristoph. on bi) n ; Plato de Rep. i. p. 343. on 
ri; Lucian, in Charon, p. 141. "On ri is nothing but ri on'. 1 it is 
always used without a verb, as the verb must be supplied from what 
goes before ; wherefore it never occurs except in replies : Socr. 
vQXe'is, anepfY, ovk av biba^aifirjv a en. Streps, bnrj ri ; i. e. ri t on)} 
ovk av fie bibaiaio en', Aristoph. Nub. 7S0. 

V. (VI. II.) "Ort fir) is, except : ev emcrToXals raTs 'EXXrjvtKals ovbev 
r)v ort fir) 'Adrjvat, Aristid. Panath. i. e. properly, ovbev o n fit), 
nothing which was not. cf. M\. V. H. ii, 10. When from this 
original, namely ovbev 6 n fir), on fit) came to be commouly used for 
except, then the construction began to be changed : ov yap i\v Kpr)vi), 
on fir) fiia ev avrrj rrj aaponoXei : for there was no fountain except 
one, &c. Thuc. iv, 26. This would properly be, ovbev 7jv 6 n fi>) 
Kpr/vt) fiia, there was nothing which was not one fountain, there was 
nothing, except that there was one fountain. ko\ ovt eirl dewpiav 
7ra»7rore Ik rijs iroXews etfjXdes, on fir) airaE, els 'ladfiov, ovre aXXooe 
ovbafioae, el fjt{] iroi arparevaofievos : Plat. Crit. c. 14. And in the 
same way on with superlatives, &c. may be explained : evbalfiuiv o»s 
on fxaXiara e. g. was originally and properly said : i. e. His o ti fiaXiara 
ebbalfiov eon. Afterwards, through negligence, and inattention to the 
nature and proper meaning of the particle, on apiaros, i. e. ayadbs 
o»$ 6 ti aptoTov, came to be said ; on fieXnara, in the best manner 
possible; on Ta^tara, as speedily as possible; otws — on fieyioTif 
■npotyaoLS e'irj tov iroXefielv : Thuc. i, 126. ottojs eaovrai on apiaroi, 
Plat. Euthyphr. init. See Plat, de Rep. iv, 420. ypatyiav on ra^os, 
as quickly as possible: Hippocr. Epist. ad Hystan. 

"Ort fir) Kot is, except that, or nay, nay even : tovs eXeyxovs be ov 
ciecfivyev, on fir) ical fiaXXov tovtois eavrov vnodels r)yv6r\aev, nay, he 
even, &c. Greg. Naz. i. contra Jul. p. 479- Also, although, how- 
ever : oaov be els baifiovas <j>epoi, biewrvaafiev, on fir) ko.k tovt<i)v els 
deooefieiav wcpeXr'jfieda : Gregor. Or. xx. 

ItXrjv y on teal is a corrective formula ; except that, only, only 
that ; &GT efioiye boice! rr/s TepTravbpov fiaXXov av fiovcrtnijs ehatrai, 
nXf/v y oTi Kal napeXr)XvQev : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 305. 

Ovbev aXXo on fir) is, almost, all but : ovbev aXXo on fir) woXiopKov- 
/xevoi ev rats vavalv, Arr. de Exp. Al. p. 52. 1. 23. 

In Greek not classically pure on is put for wore, see 1 Jo. iv, 17. 
John vii, 35. Matth. xiii, 13. And for ore, when: John xvi, 
25. 

VI. (VII.) Toivw, which is put in the beginning of sentences, but 
not without some word preceding, signifies, — 1. therefore, then: to 

1 Perhaps in this phrase '6ri is the com- the speaker, heing at a loss how to pro- 
mencementofan anticipation of the reason ceed, breaks off abruptly, and asks t'i ; 
expected from the person addressed : but — J. S. 



§ x. Rule 1.] ! 4fo 209 

fjev Toiwv ev Tij irpeafieiq. irpiiTOv — , Demosth. pro Cor. — 2. jam, 
now: tovtojv toiwv, o fxev curt irpds f]boi'i)v, tovtw beborai, o be -rraaw, 
i)S e-jros elire'tv, evo-^XeT, Xotirov e/xoi : Id. ib. 

VII. (VIII.) — 3. For fxey ovv, atque ; and, now: navra fxev toiwv 
to. Karriyoprifikva dfioiws etc tovtujv av tis 'ibot ovre butai&s, ovt Ik 
uXrjdeias ovbefxids elprjfxeva' fiovXo/xai be kcu Ka0' ev avrwv enaarov e£e- 
raaai : Dem. ib. p. 815. 1. 8. [230, 18. ed. R.] 

VIII. (IX. X.) — 4. It is used in oratorical transitions : tG>v toiwv 
rets 7rctVT)yvpeis KaTaaTrjaavTiov, bucuiws eTratvov/j.ev(x>v, &c. Isocr. Paneg'. 
eireibii toiwv eTrotrjaaro Ttjv elprjvnv i/ ttoXis, evravda 7raXtv aKe\paa6e, 
&c. Demosth. pro Cor. See Dem. pro Cor. p. 347- [308, 5. ed. R.] 
ib. [243, 2.] ib. [260, 6.] ib. [262, 11.] 

IX. (XI.) — 5. Hut, or now : ov toiwv eiroirjaas ovbafxov tovto, 
Dem. ib. p. 3l6. faivo/xai toiwv eyw -^apiros rerv^Kws Tore, Id. ib. 

X. (XII.) It ushers in a recital or topic of some considerable 
length : eyw pev toiwv eypaipa, j3ov\evwv airoirXe'iv rijv rciA^Vrijv rovs 
trpeofiets : Demosth. ib. 



SECTION X. — On the conjunction <bs, and the particles 

CONNECTED WITH IT. 

Rule I. "Iva, uts, onus, oeppa, afin que, in order that, to the end 
that, govern a subjunctive mood in construction with a present 
tense: Xeyw, iV elbfjs : v. Eurip. Or. 446. Phoen. 1095. An optative 
in construction with past tenses: eXefc, tv elbeiris : v. Palaeph. c. 7- 
Eurip. Phoen. 1105. Iph. A. 234. But the subjunctive may be put 
even after a past tense, if what is signified by the subjunctive still 
continues, as in Horn. Od. y, 76. See Hermann, De Emend. Rat. 
Gr. Gramm.ii, 21. p. 212. seq. More negligent writers, also, and his- 
torians, who often speak of the past as present, and writers of later 
periods, do not always join the optative with past tenses, and the 
subjunctive with present. Even ancient and accurate authors join 
the optative mood with a present tense, when they indicate the end 
to be not that something may be done or brought about, but that it 
may be possible to be done or brought about: v. Seidler. ad Eurip, 
El. 59. Further, the indicative of past tenses is joined with these 
particles, when it is indicated that something would have been, which 
is not now, or which is not about to be ; and the indicative of the 
imperfect is used, when it is signified that the thing would have lasted 
or continued : iV 7iv rvcfXos re kcu kXvojv /urjbev, Soph. CEd. R. 1389- 
vtto rjj pwl [xdXiaTa ej^prjv avrovs are<peodai, — iV ots ivXelaTOv aveairwv 
Tijs tfiovrjs : Lucian, Nigr. v. Plat. Symp. c. 10. Demosth. Phil, 
i. p. 47. [I. 18. ed. R.] pro Phorm. p. 958. [1. 29. ed. R.] adv. 
Callicl. p. 1273. [1. 9. 15. ed. Reisk.] it. p. 1434. 1441. 1444. Lys. 
p. 43. [1. 11. ed. R.] and Markl. Id. p. 169. apud Isa3um p. 274. 
317. But au aorist, either first or second, is used, when a thing is 
signified as not lasting, but done and over: H fi ov Xafiibv enreivas 
evOus, ws e£et£a fjn'/wo-e epavTOV avOpibiTouiiv evQev i]v yeyws : Soph, 
Viser. 2 D 



210 'lis. [Chap. vm. § x. 

(Ed. R. 1392. v. Liban. t. i. p. 842, 11. Lvs. adv. Simon, p. 147. 
[I. 13. oil. R.] The case is the Same with regard to the preterpluperfect 
vis to the imperfect : bvo'tv yap Oarepov e^pj/r aiirous, — iva — airqWay- 
fieOa tovtov row b>)payioyou : Dinarcli. adv. Demosth. p. 9- [1. 4. ed. 
R.] The indicative of the preterperfect cannot be joined with these 
particles, any more than the indicative of the present, of which the 
signification is comprehended in the preterperfect. With the future 
indicative these particles are joined, in construction both with past 
tenses and with the present: see Horn. II. <f>, 314. rj, 3.53. Plat, 
de Rep. iv. p. 420. Revelations xxii, 14. 1 Cor. ix, 18. In this sense 
'iva is sometimes elegantly suppressed: ciAAa ri by) iroiuiiuev ; ?} ivepi 
hvtGjv tovtwv fiovXei biafxvdoXoywfxev ', Pint. Phajd. c. 14. v. Anacr. 
Od. xii, 1. xxxii, 24. "Iva and 6(j>pa are by the more recent poets 
very frequently put after verbs of commanding : v. Hermann, diss, 
de set. Orph. Argon, p. 814. It may here be observed that 'Iva, 
besides the signification of that, in order that, which it bears in the 
passages above cited and referred to, has also that of where, and 
whither: cvk apa opdtos e\et Xeyeiv, 'Iva yap beos, evda cat alb Us' aXX 1 
'iva pev albws, evda nal beos, &c. Plato Euthyphr. c. 13. el iiv erepos 
tis tottos avornwrepns, 'iva e^v airayeiv tovs etc bea/jwrrjotov nXe-KTOVTas 
els eaelvov av tovto to Brjpiov airayfiijvai : Dinarch. adv. Aristogif. 
p. 81. See Lysiasadv. Pancleon. p. v 73l. [1. 2. ed. Reisk.] Iliad v, 
478. e, 36"0. k, 127. Air. Exp. Al. v, 2. Lucian, adv. Indoct. t. iii. 
p. 101. Time, iv, 4S. and of ore, ivhen : Aristoph. Nub. 1235. 
John xvi, 2. xii, 23. xiii, 1. 

"Iva ri ; why, wherefore ? is an elliptical expression for Iva ri 
yevit]7ai in construction with a present tense, and iva ri yevono with 
a past. Sometimes it is used with a verb following : iva t'l be tovto 
bpdrov ; Aristoph. Pac. 409- v. Aristoph. Nub. 1194. Matth. 
xxvii, 46. 1 Cor. x, 29. Ivari ravra Xeyets ', Plato Apol. p. 26. 
v. Id. in Symp. p. 205. Sometimes ihe verb is to be assumed from 
what precedes : rets irvpvas KaTatravryai fiovXofxai cnral,aiTaaas. Bl. 
ivari; Aristoph. Eccl. 7'8. In the same sense tbs ri is used: 
ws ri jjl iaropels robe ; Eurip. Phcen. 624. ws t'l bi) robe ; Id. Or. 
79±- 

II. 'f!s and ware often require an infinitive mood : fijuels en viot 
ware togovtov irpay^ia bieXeaOai, we are as yet too young to, &c. Plat, 
in Plot, rt's ovrws avepaaros fjv, ws airoKreiveiv to ku\6v eKelvo fxei- 
paiciov \ m so— as to : Lucian, Dial. Merc, et Apoll. See v£l. V. H. 
xii, 1. flpabvs elfjit teal ^wXos u/u<porepois, ws fxoXts reXelv em to repfxa : 
so that, I, &c. Lucian, Tim. c. 20. See M\. V. H. xii, 35. /nacr-i- 
yovoni aTn)\Xa^€v av tCov toiovtiov, ws //?) (.iidvai /jn'jre rov 'OXpetdv, 
f-u'ire rrjv rov in-nov Kpiivrjv : that they might not; so as to prevent 
their, &c. Lucian, adv. Indoct. c. 3. [53S. d. Salmur.]™ 

"flare, when a negative has preceded, is sometimes so employed as 
to have reference to a verb only which is joined with the negative, 
and not to the negative also : <piXwv be ■%P V ° 0V noXXatas bwpovjjiivwv, 



m See Xen. Anab. ili, 3, 5. — J. S. av tri kuxw ira6eh : Xen. Cyrop. viii. — • 

n 'E.V r<fi d,ff<pa~Ai=l tfori ecro/xai, cos fA-qSlv J. S. 



Rule 2, 3.] 'fly. 211 

ovk elcrebe^aT vltcov, c!We tovs rpoirovs bovXovs trctpacrye'v, yjirji.ia.Twv 
Sev^dels vna : Eurip. Siippl. 875. [obsequiousness and servility are 
the consequence (indicated by Sare) of accepting money, not of 
rejecting it, which latter is signified by ovk and elaetelaro when taken 
together.] See also Ipli. T. 1325. And so after a verb including 
a negation, as airoTvy\aveiv : v. Plat, de Rep. iii. p. 394. e. 

"{lore is sometimes joined with verbs to which one would think it 
was quite incongruous : and in that case, says Hermann, its meaning 
may be expressed by adeo or vel ; as in Soph. Phil. 656. v. 
Thuc. i, 28. viii, 86. and in Eurip. Iph. T. 1379. Hermann 
holds the true and authorised reading to be, Qofios b' i)y wore fir) 
rey£cu v.oba, and there was fear of even running the sheet under 
water. 

'Sis and &G7e with an infinitive are joined with a nominative case, 
when the verb on which the particle depends is understood of the 
same tiling or person as that nominative case : en be npos to fierplwu 
beladai ireTzaibevfievos ovtws, &c~e Tzavv fiacpa KeKTr,fievos iravv pabiws 
ey^eiv apicvvvTo. : Xen. Mem. i, 2, 1. If he had said enaibevae rts, 
KeKTrinevov must have followed. 

In the Attic dialect ws and wore, so that, are joined with an in- 
dicative mood : &OTe Ka\ J&apvaflas avvairij^Qri Trj avTwv viroKpiaei, 
Gal. ii, 13. 

"Slare is sometimes followed by an imperative mood ; when it 
signifies therefore : ware Knl cru, e'i ri obe eXXeiitet, eirafivve: Plat, de 
Rep. ii. p. 362. See Epict. Ench. c. 69. Soph. El. 11 75. And it 
has the same signification, when followed by an interrogative word : 
&OTe ttws etcelvovs fir) irpbs to j3eXriaT0v Xeyetv atTiarai ; Aristid. pro 
Quat. p. 452. And there is another example in the beginning of the 
same page." 

III. 'Sis is elegantly construed with participles in the genitive ; as, 
irepl Qatbos (pi]ty\v 6 KXetTctpy^os ws ciIticis yerofierrjs toxi efnrprjabfjvai to. 
ev YlepaenoXei fiatriXeia, speaks of Thais as having been the cause, &c. 
for, says that Thais was the cause. So, (prifi-q ns ejfiXdev d>s rj/iwv 
avTiKa b>) fiaXa aKoXovdtjirorTwv tu> twv virevavTiwv VTpaTaj, that ive 
zvere about to, &c. v. Plat. Crit. c. 14. Phsed. c. 2. c. 4. c. 24. 
Xen. Mem. ii, 2, 13. So wrnrep, Ceb. Tab. c. 12. It is construed 
in this manner also in another signification, that of quomodo, how : 
eri be Trparepov {cLvafivr)adr]Te viz.) ws eyovrwv twv ■Kpayjia.TWV avrov 
KaTtbe^aade, Isocr. de Bigis p. 689 p 

It is joined in a similar manner with accusatives also, vofiid,wv or 
the like being understood : kcu evyero be 7rpo$ tovs Oeoi/s cnrXws Tayada, 



Add, that ware appears to have the r 'ils is used for o-nus, how, in other 

sense' of vipote in Polybius : yevofievris constructions : fori yap, tori ©-nfiaiovs 

Se fxeyd\r]s e^ovffias irepl rovro to fiepos, raireivovs iroieTw — Kal irdvv ye pqov us 8% 

were Kara t)jv ij\iKiav aKfiaioos %x ovros £J W veipdaofuuvphs vfias eiire7v : JJemosth. 

avrov, Kal Kara, cpvcnv oiKeias StaKeifievov, pro Megalop. p. 208. 1. 9. ed. R. en 

KaOdirep ebytvovs aKvAatcos iirifiovov avrov ro'ivvv, Si &vdpes 'ABtjvcuoi, rfyv StoiKriaiv 

awi&t] yevioSai t^v irepl ras Kvvnyeaias avaipel, ri)v 0' lepav Kal r)]V oaiav. ws 5e, 

6pp.-fiv : as being in the vigor of his age : iyw tppdou: Demostb. in Timocrat. 730, 

E. Peiresc. p. 123. ed. Em.— J. S. 25.- J. S. 



> 



212 'Sis. [Chap. viii. § x. 

hih6vai, d>s roi/s Bend's mWiirra el&oras : Xen. Mem. i, 3, 2. v. i, 2, 
20. Eurip* Phoen. 1470. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 1\. Fisch. ad Well. p. 387- 
se(|q. In Soph. Gvl. II. 5:>6. voftiCuv or the like is latent in ibwy, 
and on it &s with tin- optative depends. 

IV. '[Is, ws ye, ws b>), (is owr, ws yoiiv, sometimes signify for, i. e. 
considered as ; or considered with reference or regard to : 7\v be 
oube abvvaros, ws AaKebaifxdrios, elvely : nor was he ineloquent for 
(i. e. considered as) a Lacedaemonian : Thnc. iv. avrjp, ws bij rare, 
for those times, (considered with reference to the age he lived in,) 
ko/uxpos ttov xn\ aerrelns. And rejiipyov e£,T]Kpifiw<rev ws ye, or ws b>), kut 
avdpwTrov : he finished the work with great exactness for a man, the 
limited capacity and faculties of human beings being considered. 

'lis signifies when, whilst : ws eyewpyewfxev ev rrj Na£«, edfirevev 
eice~i nap' »//i7r : Plat. Euthyphr. c. 4. v. Luke xii, 58. John ii, 
23. When, as soon as: ws & ovk tftieXov, — xeipeiKwfmra fiaXofievos 
irpos 7-J7 iroXei, Kttl fx^nvrffiar'' eVicTi/oris, eiroXwpieei : Demosth. pro 
Cor. [254, 25. ed. R.] mais comme Us ne le von Invent pas, &c. In 
this sense it is elegantly repeated, to express the celerity of an occur- 
rence : ws eltV, ws fxiv paWov ebv j^oXos : as soon as he saiv them, 
immediately, &c. Horn. II. r, Hi. ws elb\ ws aveiraXro : 11. v, 424. 
■%ws "ibov, ws efxcurji', ws /.toi irepl 8v/j.6s laefrQn : Theocr. ii, 82. ws "ibev, 
ws efjavr) : Id. iii, 42. So Virgil, ut vidi, nt peril, ut me mains 
ahstulit errov : [Eel. viii, 41.] 

'[is is often expressive of a wish ; in verse, by itself; as, w Zt;, ws 
XaXvfiwv irav anoXoiro yevos : Callim. Jupiter, ut Chalubon omne 
genus pereat : Catull. v. Soph. El. 126. q But in prose e'ide ye is 
often joined with it, or ye alone, some other word intervening: ws 
et0e ye icai e^ejjLeaai bvvarov i)i>, Lucian. ws e'irj ye rovmv iifiiy eivat, 
&c. Synesius. So the Frencli que: que plut a Dieu ! que fusses-tu 
Men loin d'ici ! 

It is often used also in exclamations, and has an augmentative 
force : ws air/nt paXa rets yvuQovs aAyjyerere ! Aristoph. PdC 236. 
raiid' ws eyavwdnv ! h\. Ach. 7. ws ere fiaKapi8o/j.ev ! Id. Vesp. 1266. 
<pei>, <pev, jSporoTs epwres ws kcikov fieya ! Eurip. Med. 330. 

V. (V. VI.) '[irrel, wenrepei, unravel, werirepavel, (but oftener ws av el 
and wrnrep ar el,) signify as if: ws, axrirep, ws av, werirep av, ws apa, 
werirep dpa, ws afieXei, &erirep aueXei, ws av brjXabi], ws av bfyirov, (or 
crjTrovdev) ws ye, ws bij, ws ovv, wenrep ovv, ws ovv brj, and Aerirep ovv br/, 
signify as if forsooth, ironically. 

VI. (VII.) '[Is has sometimes the signification of on, that : npwrov 
p,ev ovv, ws ovk evejfitsiev, ovs f] iroXis vofjii^ei deoiis, icoiw tot e-^pfjeravro 
TeKfi-qpiw; Xen. Mem. i. 

VII. (VIII.) Like on, it is also put before superlative adverbs 
and nouns in a similar sense : a\\' e£t0' ws ra^iara, as quickly as 
possible: Eurip. Med. 322. i. e. ££,161 ovtws ws bvvarov ra^tora elievai. 
v. Thuc. vii, 60. Fuller in Xen. : 7/Ke irpos rov Kvpov ws ebvvaro 



9 Theocr. iii. ult. is referred to by Her- ireertlov , iced rol Xvkoi S5e ja' eSovn' ws /u/At 
mann, a verse commonly interpreted as roi yAvtcb rovro Kara $p6xQoto yevoiro. 
not expressing any wish : Keierevnai 5e — J. S. 



Rule 4—10.] 'ft*. 213 

rdvfOTa, Cyrop. iii. and, ws ou'iv re /jciXtara KciXav re Kal uyadov, lb. 
w$, or ci'ffov, rayos, with all possible speed. But J>s rayicrra is some- 
times, cs soon as ever; ut primum : ws be fifxeprj Tayiara eyeyovee, 
Herodot. i, 11. pr. So i, 65. 80. 141. 213. And in the same sense 
Polybius says ws daaaov: K.apyr)bovioi yap ws Qolttov KarearricravTO r« 
koto. tjjv Ai/3yjjr, evdeojs 'ApiXKav k^nireareiXav : ii, sub init. 

Sometimes ws and on are conjoined before superlatives, when ovrws 
may be understood : dvfxoeibi] juev br] ypfj iravra avbpa elvat, irpqov be 
ws on /jaXiara, ut quam maxime, [in the same degree as what is most 
so,] Plato, eanv ohros (oiirws,*Reiz.) ct<peXris fief ws on fxaXurra, Her- 
tnogen. speaking of Xenophon. ws on KaXXiura e^eiKaaavres, M\. 
V. H. ii, 13. v. Heliodor. x, 28. 

VIII. (IX.) 'fts is put before some adverbs in the positive degree ; 
rjs (iraibelas) tojv fiev ws d\??0ws TervyrjKorojv ot/§' av els e'iwoi irepl 
avrov [avrov, 270, 1. ed. R.] towvtov ovbev, Demoslh. pro Cor. 
wv Ko.Topdov/jevoji' fieyiGTOLS ai'a/ji(pt<7f3i]T)]TOis vTrfjpyev eivai, ws erepojs 
be ov[xfiafTii)V, to yovv evboKifxelv irepieariv : Id. ib. bi' a bi) Kal fiovrj 
Ty iroXei ws Kvpiojs av ris (pair) aufjfifjvai, Aristid. ill Panath. ws 
KaXios )]fiwf etrrparjiyljKaTe Kal npurepov, ha kui vvv Xafiovres kXnibas 
aKoXovdCjfiev vjilv. ironically; Dionys. Hal. xi, p. 723. 'fls d\/j0ecr- 
repus also is found. 

IX. (X.) It is elegantly put after adverbs in the positive degree 
expressive of what surpasses, of what excels or exceeds in any way, 
as, vrrepfvois fj,ev ovv, efrj, ws fiovXo/.iat '. Plat. PllEedr. dav /Jtacriios 
ws adXios yeyovev, eirel to. fieyiara ribiKrjtre : Id. in Gorg. So, afir]- 
\avu)s ws <Td)6bpa emdvfj.u>. 'fls (or oaov) may be put in the same 
manner after the adjectives Qavjxaaiov, davfiacrrov, apiyavov. 'fls 
follows even substantives in the same manner, ion being expressed 
or understood before it : ye\ws ead' ws ypwjieQa rots Ttpayfxaviv, 
Demosth. Phil, i, p. 17. I. 32. for yeXolov ws, or yeXoiws ws yjj. & c - 
Thus when ws follows a substantive or adjective, Ian is to be under- 
stood : Qavfia, or davfiaarov, (eoriv) ws ■ypa.rai toIs 'ltttiois: when an 
adverb, eyei : Oavfj-amws (e'xet) ws ^pdrai, &c. and when, as in R. 8. 
ws precedes the adverb, the ellipsis is to be supplied in some other 
manner: eppijaei rovs ws d\>j0ws biKaaras, Plat. Apol. p. 41. i. e. obnos 
bacaaras ovras, ws aXrjduis 6vofJ.dS.oi av tis, or the like. 

X. (XI. XII. XIII.) 'Sis, in the same manner as on, is sometimes 
prefixed to the words of a person recited in direct phraseology, just 
as they were spoken, and not in oblique : rti^es ovv i\aav ol napa tovtov 
Xoyoi Tore prjdevres ; why, ws ov bel 6opvj3elcrdai raj irapeXrjXvQevai 
QiXimrov e'tcrw FIvAwV earai yap a-irai'd' ova flovXead' i/ftels : Demosth. 
pro Cor. where ov bel d. &c. are the very words of iEschines : other- 
wise the construction might have been ojs ovk av beoi, or ws ovk ebei. 
In Demosth. Ol. iii. [38, 19- ed. R.] where ws is thus used, there 
is a transposition, the order, as to signification, being ovk eanv ottov 
eyw t i7rov, ws bel ve/ieiv toTs fxribev itowvgl to. tojv iroir)<r6vTojv. 

The following transpositions in sentences where ws signifies quern- 
admodum, as, may here be noticed : e£>Jye be itoXXclkis tovs HvpaKov- 
aiovs ws e7ri arparelav Kal (pvrelav, for e£»;ye r. 2. e7rt (pvreiav, ojs £tvI 



'.214 'fls. [Chap. viii. § x. 

aTpareinv : Pint, in Apophth. So watrep : ayovai yap uywra irevra- 

CTqpiKOV Mrj7T€j> K'li TCtls MoUTfUS, KCll TO)"EpWTl, for 76) "EpW't W(T7T€p Knl 

rals Movants : Id. 'Epwnic. init. ws lurpw, irapabebwuevui aenvrbv rw 
kmorarn: to the trainer, as to a physician : Epict. Ench. c. 35. So 
olouel, /El. V. H. i, 1. And ws in this sense goes before ovrws, (see 
Chap. ir. R. 13.) v. 1 Thess. v, 2. 

XI. (XIV.) 'fts in ihe sense of quod, that, after words signifying 
proof of evidence, as reicptipiov, crr)fxe~iov, anobei'frs, is joined with an 
indicative mood : as, airubeiliv be 7rape<T-7}aa^u?/r, ws 6 belva — uko- 
Xaaros S)v bteriXei : and I adduced as a proof of it, that such an 
one, &e. 

XII. (XV.) In the sense of quemadmodum or quantum, as, or as 
far as, it is oflener joined with an infinitive ; as, w<> (or Haa, or ocrov) 
einaadi, Tenpaipetrdnt, vTroXnftelr : as far as any one. may conjecture, 
&c. ws epoiye boicelv, as 1 think : ws e'nrelv, so to speak : r ws e/xe 
ev ji€jjivT)aBai ra b ep/urjvevs /not e<pr), as far as I well remember, &c. 
Herodot. Ent. c. 87. See Chap. v. § iii. R. 6. Leopard, viii, 21. 
Plat. Socr. Ap. pr. 

XIII. (XVI.) '[Is is very often put for els or 7rpos before accusa- 
tives of persons or animate things, but very seldom before accusatives 
of inanimate things. (See Thorn. M. p. 933. and interpp. Brunck in 
ind. Aristoph. v. ws.) tov bpolov ayei debs ws rbv bf.iol.ov, Horn. Od. p, 
218. 7j yvvr) anrjet Kadevbi'jaovaa ws to naibiov, Lys. adv. Eratosth. 
p. 13. ed. Reisk. k\66vTes o'iicabe ws epe, ib. p. 27. See Polyb. iv, 51. 
Exc. Peir. p. 129. Heliodor. ix, 5. 11. 24. Herodian i, 11. S. 
Lysias adv. Simon, p. 143. [I. 3. ed. R.] Demosth. adv. Aph. i. 
p. 822. [I. 5. ed. R.] Xen. Mem. ii, 7, 2. i)Xd" ws AwTotyaywv avhpwv 
irieipav apovpav, Horn. Od. \p, 311. [v. II. X, 720.] ^Xl/jams ws to 
(ppovptov ayovres, Xen. Cyrop. v, 3, 13. obiter' — eXdeTv ws ovbev rwu 
lepwv. Demosth. in Neaer. 1374, 1. [ed. R.] v. Heliodor. ix, 13. Xen. 
Mem. ii, 7, 2. [v. Ernest, ad 1.] 

In this sense it is joined with prepositions: aireirXeov — ws es ras 
'AQr/vas, Tliucyd. iv. p. lfjO. c-vaKeva&eadai ws els arpareiav, Xen. 
Ages, i, 14. avi'iyovro ws enl va.vp.uyjq, Time. i. p. 12. ed. Camer. 
fjroifiagero ws enl tcis Ittyas, Id. iv. p. 106. v. v, c. 3. vi, p. l6l. 
Trporjye ttciXiv ws e-rri Kopivdov, Polyb. iv, 24. irpoafiyev ws ewi Aa- 
pelov, Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, c. 6. v. i. p. 15. 1. 13. Zosim. i, 6, 7- 
Xen. CEc. i, 6. Acts Ap. xvii, 14. anb be ttjs irapepfioXrjs ws irpbs 
tcis ^eXwvas tcis yw&rpibas ireTtoiqvTO avpiyyes tcmao-eyoi, Polyb. ix, 
34. tyvyov ws wpbs ti)v ttoXiv, Id. iii, 19. And also with other 
words : bioirep ovk ws ews tov peaov vopizovras btareivetv ras ap^as, 
Polyb. v, 32. 

'Cls sometimes signifies eirel, kcii yap, for: Socr. fiovXeL ovv, ev tw 
Avaiov Xoyw Ibeiv ti wv (f>apev areyvov re /cat evre^ror elraf, Ph&dr. 
vravTwv ye irov paXiara' ws vvv ye \pt\ws 7rws Xeyopev, oiitc eyovTes 
iKara napabelypara : Plat. Phaedr. p. 262. v. Eurip. Phoen. 12&7. 

r Here another phrase may be noticed : raves ; Her. kukcov ywaiKuv e'icroBos (S 
Or, tras oSj/ to5', sis etiroi tis, ifyfidp- aird Maav : Euvip. Androm. 930. — J. S. 



Rule n — is.] Hs. 215 

Or. 1103. Sopli. El. 370. Usually in the beginning of sentences or 
members: ws vvv ye ovber gov yevoir av evTeXearepov, S. Chrvs. in 
c. vi. ep. ad Rom. 

XIV. (XVII.) r £1s is put before etao-ros : 01 b' ovv ws eKaaroi 
"EXXijj'es, Kara iroXets re oaoi uKkrfKwv tyvieoav, kcl\ Zv/nravres vorepov 
n\r)6ei'res, [ovbei> 7rpo twv 'Ypoixwv hi aadevetav nal afufcinv aXXyXuiv 
adpooi evrpagav.] Thuc. i. p. 3. [e. 3. p. 7- ed. Bekk.] i. e. pro se 
quisque, ws eKaaroi Tvy\aiovm or ervyov. tiui ol fxer eirXafiiBrfaav ws 
eh-aoroi, Thuc. v, 4. v. Schaef. ad Lamb. B. Ellips. p. 602/ 

XV. (XVIII.) '[Is fxev, — ws he are put in different members of 
sentences: eXafot twv X6<pwv irodev vireptyavevres aOpooi, ws jxev evjueye- 
Oeis, ws be wioves, ws he irpodvfjioi irpds a<pny{]V : Greg. Naz. Or. de S. 
Basil, [as — so — so ; or how in each place.] 

XVI. (XIX.) 'fis 7rpos, oaov or oaa Trpos, with an accusative of a 
person or thing, signify with regard to : ws irpbs eyue, abia<popov tovtu 
ye : with regard to myself ; as far as I am concerned, ri yap Kal 
cihiKov/j.eda i)S npos r}ficis avrovs, Ocivcitw atro\v6fjevoi irpbs rbv Kvpiov ; 
Clem. Alex. Str. iv. 

'fls 7T|0os sometimes denotes comparison : rv(pXds 6 Avyxevs enelvos 
ws 7rp6s kjxe, in comparison ivith me, compared with me : Lucian. v. 
Xen. Cyrop. i, 5, 11. With eiri : ra [ley hi] Kara ttjv ^IvKaXrjaabv, Trcidet 
Xprjaaidevwv, (MvKaXrjaaiwv viz.) ovberbs, ws enl /leyedei,* (for the size 
oj the town,) twv Kara, tov TroXefxov, i\aaov oXofvpaaOai alio), roiavra 
iwe$T}\ Thuc. vii, 30. and without any preposition; puKpos ye ws 
roaov-wv eriiv, but little for its age: Athen. Deipn. xiii, p. 584. So 
ut: v. Corn. Nep. in Epam. c. 5. Curt, ix, 1, 24. 

XVII. (XX.) '£1? is put before etc twv hvvaTwv, and phrases of the 
like import: eVei he ws ee twv hvvarujv erotfxa ijv, to the best of their 
power, as far as circumstances would admit: Thuc. ii. p. 100. 

XVIII. (XXI. XXII.) "Hs is put for ovrws, so: eboKei yap 6 irpbs 
xleXoTiowr)aiovs TroXe/jos Kal ws eaeadat avrols, even so: Thuc. i. d\Aa 
Kal ws avefit/Live, but even so, even in those circumstances : Horn. II. 
t, 303. V. II. a, 116. ws Xvkoi upva (piXova, &s ira7ba (piXovaiv 
kpaoTui: so, in the same manner: Plat. Phaedr. p. 241. ws he (and 
in the same manner, and thus) Kat 'lovbalois, bioixQeiarjs rrjs 7raAa<os 
ypa(pf]s, to veov /cat euyejes eyKev-piCerui rrjs eXaias cpvTOv : Clem. Al. 



s The following examples may further £avro : Id. viii, 104. Kal irp6s re raAAct 

illustrate this phrase. In the first passage e\t\prbaavro ois eKaara, Kal irpbs rovro : 

of Thuc. Weiske renders ws eKaaroi, ut Id. vii, 65. avenAevaav e| "EWrjo-rrovrov 

sejuncti ab aliis, or, ut non mixti et ws eKaaroi Kara. ttSAgis, Id. i, S9. Ziv 

conjuncti cum aliis. Pleon. Gr. &AX01 aKpoaadai ois eKaaros wpytrro, Id. ii, 

T6 irapiSvres eyKArifiara inoiovvro ois 21. iarpdrevaav kavrSiv fxkv x L ^' l0ts 

eKaaroi, Kal Meyaprjs : Thuc. i, (\7. SwAirais, rwv o\ ^v^/xaxaiv &s eKdarois : 

ol Se ^vfxjxaxot ^vveAeyovro, Boicorol fiev Id. i, 113. eiroKefj-ovv p.lv Kal 'dXAoi, 

irevraiaax'iAwi b-KK'irai Kal roaovroi tyikol 'OS 'EKA2TOI2 ETNEBAINEN, iv rrj 

Kal linrris irevraKoawi Kal u/mttttoi %aoi, ^uceAia, Kal avrol oi luceAioerai, &c. 

KopivOioi oe Stax'iXioi dirAlrai, ol 5' &AA01 Id. iii, 90. So as eKarepoi, Thuc. iii, 

ws eitaaroi, QKidawi Se iravarpana : 74. — J.S. 

Id. v, 57. rb nlv apiarepbv (elxe) ®pd- ' '£ls tirl fieyeSei] tfroi itoAecos, % ws 

auAAos, & b~e OpaavfiavAos rb de£iov o'i iwl fxeyedei rrddous. Schol. — J. S. 
5e aA^oi arparnyol ws eKaaroi dierd- 



216 THE PREPOSITION. [Chap. ix. 

.Sir. vi. Obb' &$ is not even so: 'AXefavbpos be oob' un r// noXet irpoo- 
e/3a\ev t Alt. Exp. Al. i, 7." 

"(Is, with earl before il, is sometimes of the same import as ttws, in 
a certain manner, in certain respects: eon pev ws tov okovofjov koi 
vuv ap^ovros, icul irepi vyieias Ibelv' eon b' u>s ov, aXXa tov iarpov : 
Aristot. Polit. i. 

Also when d)s follows the word to which it relates, it is accented, 
as 6ebv i!>s, Horn. Od. r, [bpvo^ovs ws, Od. t, 574:] 

"floirep ri; is a demand of an example: as what for instance ? 
aojeXovres tov eptoTos ti eibos, ovo/uixiofiev to tov oXov eirtrSevTes ovojxa, 
epioTa' tcl be uWa aXXois KarwypLoLxiiQa ovbfxaaiv. wawep ti ', ifyb' eyw. 
"iloirep Tobe. Olaff oti, &c. Plat. Synip. p. 205." 



CHAPTER IX. 

THE PREPOSITION. 

Of prepositions in general, it may be remarked that by poets and 
Ionic writers they are often separated widely from the cases governed 
by them ; as, avTap vno \diov a/xepbaXeov Kovafitcie irobiov uvrtav re 
Ka\ ittttiov : Horn. II. /3, 465. eodXwv pev yiip a7r' eodXa ixadiiaeai, 
Theogn. 34. ev yap ae ttJ vvktI tovtyi avaipeoiiai, Herodot. Er. c. 6ty. 
See Ter. Andr. iii, 3, 6. Ovid, de Pont, iii, 3, 46. Hercid. ep. ix, 69. 
In Attic writers also fj.ev, yap, bri, ovv, &c. are inserted between 
prepositions and their cases, as ev pev elpijvy, &c. Prepositions have 
often been erroneously added by transcribers, see Bruuck. ad Eurrp. 
Phoen. 828. aud often interchanged, as 7rapa and itpb, v. Berg!, ad 
Alciphr. 3Q5. A preposition is sometimes repeated, but not by 
chance or negligence, nor tautologically, the first being in place of 
an adverb, v. Herodot. ii, 176. and Hermann, De Emend. Rat. 
Gr. Gr. *Ar in II. \p, 709- for rivet, i. e. avw. "ev b' virepas Te, tcaXovs 
Te, 7robas t evebrftrev ev avTtj : Horn. Od. e, 260. *Ev be is in place of 
an adverb ; to explain which the poet adds, according to his custom, 
ev avrrj. In some phrases and passages, however, one or other of the 
prepositions is redundant, as, anb fiofjs evenev, tivos ylipiv eveca, aii(pl 
a ovveKa. v. Diss, de ellips. et pleonasm, in Museo Antiq. Stud, i, I. 
p. 202. So a preposition is sometimes redundant, when a substantive 
performs the office of another preposition : 'EreocXeous davovTos ct/i^' 
eTVTaaTOfxovs irvXas abeXcbov \eip\ YioXvreiKovs viro, Eurip. Suppl. 401. 
On the other hand one preposition sometimes serves for two nouns, 

* Kvpos 8e, bpuivrovs"'E.K\7]vas viKuvras dot. mat. 1011, 22. ed. R. — J. S. 
to KaQ* avTobs, — 0118' &s effo^ dii&Keiv : v Add the following phrase : Qwttov, % 

Xen. Anab. i, 8, 15. v. iii, 2, 14. 011 Sis tis av dSero, more quickly than one 

ix7\v aX\' el koI jUTjSev toutwv virrjpxev could have thought it possible, fiereoopovs 

rjfMP, oi>5' ws x a ^- e7r " v ecrT ' "yvwvai wepl ££eic6fj.i(rav ras afjid^as, Xen. Anab. i,5, 8. 

avTwv — : Demosth. adv. Spud. 1032, 19. o'l re aKovTiarai fipaxvTepa i\k6vtl^ov ?j &>s 

ed. R. els tt)v olaiav ovS' &s clad Qaa Qui ii^iKvelaQai tSiv otyei'dovrjTaii', Id. ib. iii, 3, 

tovtovs ri^iutreVf Demosth. adv. Ba'ot. de 6. — J. S. 



§ i. Rule 1, 2.] 'Auf. 217 

being joined with the last only, although equally applicable to the 
first : vl be veoL fioXirijv re tcu is yopov ivrvveotie, Callim. h. A poll. 8. 
v. Ruhnk. in epist. crit p. 130. Valck. ad Mosch. ii, 13S. ad Callim. 
p. 17S. seq. Hor. Carm. iii, 25. 2. Lastly, one individual preposi- 
tion sometimes appertains to two different cases: npos i)u> re icai rov 
Tavaibos, Herodot. iv, 122. See Wessel. 



SECTION I. — ON THE PREPOSITIONS d/t^t, ava, avev, aPTi, otto. 

Rule I.— 'A/i^i, (in epic poetry d^is) in the poets and Ionic 
writers signifies, with a genitive, about, by, and on account of; 
with a dative, about, on account of, and around:® but ap<pis with a 
genitive is oftener ivitfiout. apart from, beyond, out of. [See II. 
$, 393.] 

In other prose writers it is usually joined with an accusative; 
€%etv a/jfi ti, or Tiva, to be engaged about, or employed in, a thing ; 
to be engaged for, or with a person : oam d/u,/>! u>bS]v eyovai, Arr. 
de Exp. Al. C. 11. 6 fiev Kva£apr]s afjcpl hemvov el^ey, was at supper : 
Xen. Cyrop. v. Elvat a/j<pi ri has the same meaning: afi<t>l ravra 
ijnav, Dionys. Hal. ix. p. 642. I. 14. Kara vopovs — , tovs a.[x(j)i dvaiav 
vy? 'EWr'ivw xaraaTadevras, about, or concerning, sacrifice : Id. vii. 
p. 479. init. 

II. With the same case it signifies about, h e. nearly : aniywv 7 v s 
'Pwjurjs a/jrfl tovs rptaKorra orabiovs, Dion. Hal. i. p. 73. b 5. ane- 
Quvov u/u<pl tovs fivpiovs Kal Tpia^iktovs, Id. v. p. 310. 1. 18. and with 
fidXtara : ~u>v be iroXiru/v cifMpi tovs rjjxiaeis fidXitr-a biefQaprjcrav, Id. 
x. p. 677. 1. 4. elvai afityl be^a err], to be about ten years old. 

Before enumerating the significations of d/i^i in composition, it 
may be remarked generally, — 1. that words do not always receive 
any additional or different sense by being compounded with prepo- 
sitions : hence the compounded and the simple have been frequently 
interchanged by ignorant copyists. See Brunck, i'nd. ad Aristoph. in 
v. preepositiones. Bos, ad Thorn. M. p. 683. Brunck, ad Aristoph. 
Lys. 408. 1010. 1220. — 2. that the same preposition in the same 
compound word may have a different import in different passages : 
avayeiv e. g. may signify sometimes to lead back, sometimes to lead 
upwards ; aveyew sometimes to hold back or restrain, sometimes to 
raise, &c. 'A/u^t then in composition signifies — 1. encompassing, 
environing, surrounding, enclosing, circuition ; as in ufupifiakXeiv, 
a/jKjjiTidepai, a/AOiirepiarpecpeaOni. — 2. on both sides or parts ; as in 
afxcftopevs, a vessel with tivo handles ; aptylfiios, afj.<pibe£ws, a^fwborTa 
$<La. — 3. the same figuratively, as in a/u<pt\oyus, au<pifio\os, afifypia- 
tos. — 4. It intends, amplifies, or augments the signification of words 
with which it is compounded ; as in a/iQiirrevfm, an extreme difficulty 

w See Aristoph. Nub. 595. ed. Br. 586. respect to, Hesiod. Theog. 476. 
ed. Bekk. a/upl, concerning, as to, with 

Viger. 2 E 



218 'Avu. [Chap. ix. §i. 

of breathing ; untyifiporn atnrts, a shield which covers the whole 
person; afifa^uaOat, to feel or handle very exactly and minutely. 

III. 'Ard (av in poetry before consonants) with a dative is on or 
with: xpvoey ava OK^irrp^, Horn. II. a, 15. Both in poetry and 
prose it much oftener governs an accusative, with which case it has 
all tlie following uses : ava -naaav i}/j.eprjv, every day, Herodot. ii, 130. 
avh iravra erect, in all years, every year: Id. viii, 65. iraoav av 
optyvav, through the whole night: Eurip. Rhes. 42. dvd rriv "FAXuba, 
through Greece ; eXauas rbv 'iirvov at a Kpuros, having put his horse 
to the utmost speed in his power, having rode with all his might: 
Dionys. Hal. iii. p. 167. I. 11. p. 190. 1. 24. and xi. p. 707. I. 33. 
a 1 a Kparus rroXe/ue'tv, TroXiopKelv, with the utmost force and might : 
Id. xi. p. 703. 1. 38. did Kparus rrjv noXiv eXetv, by assault, by force, 
by storm, sword in hand. 

IV. In the sense of ev : ra fxev \6yia tov Qeov dvd arofia eyovai,* 
in their mouths, they speak or talk of, &c. Clem. Al. Str. vii. 'Avd 
ixepos for ev fiepei, which see in Chap. III. $ vii. R. 2. 

'Ava, into, through: v. Eurip. Ion, 1476. (1455.) 1515. (1494.) 
Phaniae epigr. 4. Damaget. epigr. 9. 

V. It signifies among: ovvofibaas dvd Trpwrovs, Xiphilin. in Domit.^ 
Up, against the course of: emu daXarrrjs dra tov iroTafxbv bieKU/xiaav, 

Dionys. Hal. v. 

'Ava -xpovov is, in process of time : dra XP° V0V v7r ° TvpprjvuJv a<py- 
pedtjaav, Id. i. KarecrKTj^ev ava yjtuvov els 7roXefJiovs, Id. ii. v. He- 
rodot. i, 173. v, 27- Eurip. Ion, 848. 

VI. 'Ava rbv avrbv Xoyov is, in the same manner: Clem. Al. Str. 
II. p. 318. 1. 15. 'Ava Xoyov for /caret Xoyov, or bta Xoyov, by dis- 
course or by argument : ava tov rrjs aXrjdelas Xoyov, Id. in Protrept. 
p. .9. I. 31. 

VII. It signifies equal division or distribution: Kiwap&fiov- ical 
rapbov ava ovyKiav /aiav, of each one ounce; dare Kal bwpeitv rols 
'Pw/jalois ava irevre Kal e'lKotri bpa^fjas reXevrwv KaraXnretv, twenty- 
five drachma to each: Xiphilin. in Augusto. eXafiov ava br\vaptov, 

they received each a denarius : Matth. xx, 9. v. Rev. iv, 8. And 
with an accusative of a person : tovs arpari^ras efyevai KeXevei dvd 
■nevre, by fives , five and five . It is sometimes added redundantly to 
em err os in another case, and not the accusative : Rev. xxi, 21.* 

In composition dvd signifies — 1. elevation or raising; as in dva- 
Kvrrreiv, avafiaivetv, ave^etv ras %e~tpas. — 2. repetition ; as in dvarpe- 
X etv > avnypafeiv, avariBeadai, avabe^eadni, dva;rXetv. — 3. putting 
off, tendency backwards, delaying; as in avafiaXXeiv, avairivreiv, 
uvievai. — 4. separation ; as in ava^wpelv, to depart. — 5. It intends 



x See Horn. II. j3, 250 — J. S. served that in the passage here referred 

y *Hv 5^ a^idays twv ifiuv <f>i\uv els to, avh. els eKaaros twv irvXiivwv i\v ef 

elvai, %<tti ava irpc&rovs : Pisistratus to evbs fj.apyap'iTov, there is an ellipsis of the 

Solon in Diog. Laert. Sol. p. 19. 1. 31. of case of ava, — eh e. r. ir. ava eva, fy, &c. 

H. Stephens' last edition. — J. S. and that Vigerus did not, in appearance, 

z The Mess, de Port Royal have ob- understand the passage. — J. S. 



RULE3- 12.] "* "Avev, 'Avri, 'Atto. 219 

or augments ; as in avaireideiv, avaXlweiv, avafioyv : v. Abresch. ad 
Cattier. p. 65. Valck. ad Hippol. p. 303. b. 

VIII. "Avev (by some reckoned an adverb,) governs a genitive 
only, and usually signifies without ; but it signifies also besides, over 
and above ; as, avev tov rfjs TcpovitcipZ,6.aris rmoiceaeiv evboKifxtjaews, Kal 
fivptats iavrdv eve/3aXe rots Ktvbvvois : v. Aristid. pro Quat. p. 247- 
Also out of, except in : e^rifiaavro itqbevu 'Pw/nct/wv avev irapara^ews 
avaipeiv, Plut. in Pomp. 

IX. AvtI also governs a genitive only, and is most commonly, in 
place of ; i. e. equal to, as good as: avri vv itoXXwv Xauiv eoTiv avrip, 
ovre Zevs nrjpi <piXr)Grj, Horn. II. t, 1 lfj. and this sense it retains in 
composition: ttoXXujv avTa^tos ciXXwv, II. X, 514. ov eyu <pr)ut avri 
•sravTbJV Tb>v evda.be aywvoiv elvat, to be worth them all: Plat, instead 
of: air ayairris iiiaos ev^aaQati v. Schaef. in Liban. epist. 1398. 

And in the sense of comparison, equality, permutation, preference, 
it is frequently joined with the verbs aya-rr^v, alpelaQai, be-^eadat, 
aXXdrreiv, riQeerdat : cut* iravros ayadov Tidefxevcjv, exelvov top iivbpa 
ebiropelv, preferring before, &c. Dionys. Hal. x. 

X. Sometimes avrl signifies, on account of, in return for: elrd ix 
iptor^s, avrl noias aperies a.£,iu> Ttfxdadai I Demosth. pro Cor. avd' uv 
rffv eirap^iav EKaiaooe, Ttfxcoplas viroiieveiv tcls e<T%aras bUatos i\v : on 
account of, for the sake of: Soph. El. 537. 

In conjuring and obtestations avri signifies by: ol a' avri traibwv 
Tuivbe Kal \pvxijs, Trarep, iKETevoiiev : Soph. CEd. C. 1326." 

In composition avrl signifies — 1. equality, balancing, or equalisa- 
tion : avra^ios, avriQeos, avrlpporros, avriypaipov, avrinerpos : Soph. 
CEd. C. 1^2. — 2. opposition, resistance, counteraction ; as in avriKe- 
yeiv, avrnrapararretv, avrnrape^dyeiv, dvTiicelodai, avrityepetv , avribiKos, 
avTi-xpio-QS. — 3. oppositeness ; as in dvTiQvpov, avTifiXeireiv, avriKvrj- 
jutov. — 4. reciprocation or requital; as in avThifeXel'v, avrevepyeTelv, 
avriKaXe'iv, avTidepaneveiv. — 5. rivalry and imitation ; as in avri- 
reyyoi. — 6.\exchange or substitution ; as in avrwveladai, avTmapeyeiv. 

XI. 'Atto with its case (which is always a genitive) has sometimes 
an adverbial signification ; as, dno tov abo^-ov, unexpectedly : Thucyd. 
vi, 47. aitb y\tl)TTT}s, orally, viva voce ; npeofiets eTrio-ToXi'jv re KOfxi- 
£ovres, Kal avroi airo yXwHrarjs berjaoLievoi, &c. Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 
13. airo fivrjLirjs and aTro ardfiaTos, eiireiv : memor iter , from memory, 
by heart : Plat. Theaet. Hence cnroaTo/xaTiieiv, to recite or dictate 

from memory : Plato Euthyd. p. 276. &7ro twv ovofxarwv, nominately, 
byname: Aristid. ad Capit. p. 545. airo tov irapaxpv/xa, at once, 
suddenly ; and tov irpotyavovs, and airo tov (f>avepov, openly : Thuc. 
i. airo airovbrjs, seriously, earnestly, zealously ; airo TavTOfxdrov, and 
d«ro Tv-%r)s, fortuitously ; airo tov cppovifiov, discreetly, prudently. 

XII. 'Airo tov fieXrioTOV, and airo tov KpariaTov, signify, with the 
best intentions, honestly, sincerely, with good faith : Dionys. Hal. 

* Add, that avri sometimes signifies griefs; griefs for griefs, instead of the 

succession : reOvai-qv 8' d \xi\ ti Katcwv &/x- usual alternation of joys and griefs. — 

iravfia, /xepi/xvuv evpoi/j.r)v, SoirjS 5' avT 1 J. S. 
auwv avias : Theogn. 344. griefs after 



220 'At™. [Chap. ix. § i. 

i. p. 62. vii. p. 4/0. Sometimes irav-bs is added to fieXriarov : airb 
TraiTus roil fieXrirj-ov, Id. iii. p. 140. iv. p. 221. On these phrases 
and (Wo ruv biaKei^thov, see Leopard. Emend, i, 21. 

XIII. Preceded by the article it signifies conjunction, connexion, 
relation: 01 airb (f>iX(>ao(f)ia>i, the philosophers ; erepios /jet' yap 'Etj- 
KOvptj) boKel ra irpayfjara eyeiv, ereputs be to'is airb ri)s Erocls, {to the 
Stoics; literally, to those from the portico or porch,) erepus be ro7s 
airb Ttjs 'Anabrj/nias, (to the Academics,) erepws be vols airb tov Ilepi- 
7ra-ou, to the Peripatetics : Lucian, de Parasit. 01 airb H\arwvos, 
the Platonists, the Platonic philosophers: Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 384. 
1. 29. ot aoj a'lfiaros irat>res, Kad' exarepov yevos, to re irarpuov, Kai fjt)- 
rpwov, kindred, kinsfolk: Philo de Legat. ad Caium. And when the 
article is in the neuter, icara is understood before it : to be onto tTjs 
fxvTpos (but on his mothers side) iKvdrjs, JEsch'm. c. Ctes. p. 299. 
1. 10. fiaaiXevs fueyas ilToXeualos — -ra uev airb iraTpbs, 'HpanXeiivs tov 
Aids' ra be airb jj.rjTp6s, Anoyvoov tov Aids : Monum. Ptolem. Euerg. 
01 airb tTjs fiovXrjs, the senators : Herodian vii, 1. 01 curb rov irXijOovs, 
the plebeians ; 01 airb r&v alpeaewv , the heretics: Clem. Al. Str. ii. 
p. 383. 1. 30. 01 airb twv 'Adqvaiioy "laves, the Ionians descended from 
the Athenians; oi airb iraibeias, the learned: Epitom. Athen. i. cf. 
Casaub. ad Athen. i. c. 11. 01 airb twv /ueynXwv TtfirjfAaruv, [the men 
of great fortunes :] Aristid. ap. Thorn. M. p. 854. 

XIV. It is used in speaking of persons who have ceased to be in 
any office or employment : ireptTv^ovTes twv into inrareias — rtv\, con- 
sular men, men who had been consuls: Herodian vii, 1. ol airb Tijs 
crparnyias, those ivho have been generals, [or who have been praetors ;] 
6 airb rrjs irpea^eias, who has been ambassador. 

XV. Allied to this sense is that of after : airb beiirvov, immediately 
after supper ; airb iraibwv, after boyhood, from a boy; airb irapay- 
yeX/xaTOs, upon the word of command ; airb (raXiriyyos, at the sound 
of the trumpet ; airb tov iroXe/jov, after the war, at the end of the 
war. 

XVI. As irapa is very seldom nsed in speaking of inanimate things, 
except in poetry, (irapa vijwv, from the ships: Horn.) so airb is very 
seldom said, especially in prose, of animate things ; as, rows efcXeXey- 
fxevovs airb rov Qeov, by God: Clem. Al. Str. ii. p. 389- 1- 7- V. 
Matth. xi, 19.. Mark viii, 31. 1 Macchab. viii, 6. 12. ix, 15. and 
Jens, in Fere. Liter, p. 16. seqq. 

The following senses may also be noticed ; moral source : air' opdijs 
Kai bacaias koi abiatydopov tijs \pv^fjs iravra fiot ireirpaicrai, Demoslh. 
pro Cor. p. 355. 1. 12. See Eurip. Ion, 1313. fi air' dXX>;Xwv oxpeXeia, 
Plat. Ep. xiii. p. 360. 1. 13. through, on account of , because of : 
evbo£oi airb Xoyov Kai oo<j)ias, Plut. in Cic. p. 872. airb Tfjs dyav 
aKpaaias {jbovus eirt peyujTois fxiaQois edr}pu.T0, Herodian i, 3. airb Tfjs 
Xnpas, through joy: Acts xii, 14. v. Luke xix, 2. xxii, 45. 
Matth. xxviii, 4. John xxi, 6. airb tovtov, on this account : Herodot. 
ii, 64. V. c. 175. IQavfxaSot' tov 'Fjpfioyerijv airb rrjs (piXoo-o(t>ias, 
Liban. Epist. 20. v. Thuc. iv, 130.* form or manner of pro- 

6 Bhe\vTTOf.iai rhv hiirpeov anb Nekav- A v. 151. — J. S. 
Biov, on account of Melanthius : Aristoph. 



Rule 13—17-] 'Aire. 221 

ceeding: ax' etVayyeXi'as KpiveoQat, iEschin. c. Ctt'S. p. 441. [440, 
13. ert. R.j means: axo xoiwv ^ir]<pi(TfiaTwy ovros j) xoiu>v vdftuv ovic 
e'i\ri<p€v apyvpiov ', Dinarch. p. 33. axo jAoyBrjpCjv ku\ a\o\pwv xpay- 
fia-o)v apyvpiov avra xopiaandai, ^Eschin. Dial, ii, 3(5. The instru- 
ment, with: axo Kvafuov Kadio-raadai apyovras, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 9- 
v. Demosth. Phil. i. p. 49. [1. 22. ed. R.j value or cost: \pvo-ip 
0T€(j>a.t>(t> axo TaKavTutv e^i'iicoi'Ta, Demosth. de Cor. p. 256. [I. 24. 
ed. R.] See R.'s index. c from, denoting place : KaTufialreiv niro tov 
opovs, Mark ix, 9. xapiov diro YiKeXias., Msch'm. Dial, ii, 1. and twv 
lixxiuv 7jK0VTi$ev, Id. i, 4. beaxorqs early axavTiov avdpwxuiv ct(f>' fiXiov 
avtovTos f*e%pi bvo/jevov, iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 522. [1. 11. ed. R.] 
It is sometimes used periphrastically, and needs not be translated ; 
as, to ax );juew>-, our : Herodot. ix, 1. v. Wessel. p. 693. to axo 
aev, thy : Id. vii, 101. 

XVII. "Axo, with an acute accent on the penultima, signifies sepa- 
ration, absence, distance, incongruity, unsuitableness, disagreement, 
estrangement, &c. ws axo ttjs yfjs eyevovTo, when they were at a 
distance from land: Xiphilin. in Pomp. Hence the superlative airw- 
tcltu), Plut. de anim. procr. v. Bast, ad Greg. Cor. p. 210. s. axo 
Tpoirov, absurd, preposterous ; xpbs Tpoxov, the contrary ; ovk airo 
rpoxov, not without reason: Plut. in Caes. p. 734. 'iarai hk ravra ovk 
axo tov Trpay/iaTos, not foreign to the purpose : Demosth. adv. 
Timocr. p. 701. [I. 23. ed. R.] axo gkoxov, far from the mark ; 
axo tov el/corns, at variance with probability ; uxo naipov, unseason- 
ably ; axo dufiov, unacceptable, disagreeable ; axo dvftov /uaXXov tpoi 
ecreai, Horn. II. a, 562. axebei&v axnai fiaaiXevs, on xavraxatriv 
avrw aire Ovjuov Kal aXXorpia >/ /jieXaiva xprityos : Themist. Or. de 
Theodos. clem. v. Diog. L. i, 100. In the same sense axo yvw/uns : 
Kal Tf Aii tovto ovk axo yi'wfxr]s ?jv : Julian. August, in Caes. 

'Axo in composition signifies— 1. separation; as in axoflaivetv, 
axopdXXetv, axoridecrdai, axobibpaoKeiv, axeXavvetv, axobrjfielv, axei- 
xelv ofiiXiav, axoyiveadat axo rivbs, axofiiados, axoppi)Tov, axooTpa- 
T-qyos. — 2. restoration, restitution, recovery; as in axobibovai, axo- 
Kadtcrravai : Demosth. p. 256". [1. 4. ed. R.J axoXapfiaveiv, Lys. p. 
590. [I. 4. ed. R.] p. 609. — 3. accomplishment, consummation, and 
consequently desistance ; as in axoTeTeXecfieids, Xen. (Ec. xiii, 
3. axepyagecrOat, axocpoiTqv, Lys. Fragm. p. 38. ed. Reisk. axo- 
fxaxeadai, Id. p. ]48. v. Valck. ad Herodot. p. 122. 706. ad 
Theocr. Adon. p. 203. ad Moerin p. 401. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. 
p. 246. Wyttenb. ad Eel. hist. p. 339- Huschk. in Anal. p. 56. 
et in indie, in v. axoKXaietv. — 4. place, office, situation ; as in axv- 
yeios, opposed to xXeoiTt Kara tov KXvbutros, Lucian, Lexiph. t. ii. p. 
338. cf. Dorv. ad Char. p. 106. axoTeXewi, magistrates: Polyb. 
x, 21. xvi, 20. axofiaxeoVat l/c twv xXoiwv, to fight from the ships: 
Polyb. viii, 6. axodewpelv, to watch from a place of observation: 
Polyb. E. L. 65. — 5. imparture, communication, participation ; 
as in axofiepigetv. — 6. instrumentality ; as in axoKX-qpovv, to elect by 

c *Os a7r& fffimpas Saxaprjs vfias apicrrl- Aristoph. Eq. 538. — J. S. 
£wv ax4xip.xey 7 at a small cost or expense: 



222 Aici. [Chap. ix. § if. 

lot; Pol^b. ii, 58. — 7. materials, that from which any thing is 
made ; as in airofteXi, Dioscor. a-rrouefjuuripevos, Athcn. — 8. Il in- 
tends or augments the force of words; as in ('nrnxpiitrdai, unrHire'iv, 
inroKaXeli', axoToXnq.v, inroduv/JuSeiv, airofivr^poveiie.iv, &c. — Q. It has 
the force of a privative; as in curorifios for artfjos : v. Toup. ad 
Longin. p. 367. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 250. air6<riTo$ : v. Valck. 
ad Calliin. p. 7. 

On curb in composition, see Cattier. in Gazoph. Abresch. p. 
62. seq. 67. 74. Valck. ad Theocr. p. 238. et ad Callim. p. 
159. seq. 



SECTION II. — On the prepositions bia. and els. 

Rule I. A<a, with a genitive, signifies parts of time recurring at 
intervals: rijv fiivrot fiiav, (the one day) ti)v Ik tCjv TerapTTjfiopiuv 
ovjjnrXrjpovuevriv, bia irivre Kal avTos krwv eiaiiyayev : every fifth year l 
Xiphilin. in Julio, upbevovai be ra yrfbia avrwv, ev Bepei fiev bia rpirns 
i/uepas, every third day, ev yeifiiovi be hia eKTtjs, every sixth: Photius 
in Olympiod. exc. bia rpirov ereos, in the beginning of every third 
year: Herodot. ii, 4. v. Wessel. p. 105. 

II. Am x €l P" s > or X ei P" v > ^X e "'' ls not on 'y *° hold * n the hands, 
or handle, but also to be carefully employed upon ; to manage with 
care and attention ; (pofiov/jievoi yap bta x et P^ v eypvvi uaXXov Tr)v 
TToXtreiav, Aristot. Politic, v. ret re tuiv tynyayuv bia X ei P° s e^eif, 
Thud, ii, 13. 

III. WpotjojiiXricrai iravrl rw bia xapiriov r/iriaraTo, affably, cour- 
teously, complaisantly, engagingly : Xiphilin. in Julio, of Cleopatra. 
bi airoppriTwv 'etireiv, secretly, under injunction of secrecy: 
Dionys. Hal. viii. p. 482. I. 31. Kal uvpiovs aXXovs bia Kevrjs dve- 
irXaTTOfiev iju'iv avrols (puflovs, causelessly, vainly : Dionys. Hal. vi. 
p. 346. 1. 20. 

IV. 'Ev -rravTi bi aOvfilas eyeveoQe, you were dispirited, you 
desponded: Dion. Halic. vi. p. 399. 1. 49- biba£u) 7rws ?/ x^P a ^ l ' 
ciatpaXeias yerotro, in security : Id. xi. p. 700. I. 41. bi o^Aov yty- 
veadai tivi, to be troublesome to him : Plat. Alcib. i. to yap bia 
fxeaov xwpiovov ttoXv, between: Dionys. Hal. p. 688. 1. IS. wore — 
fiijhev av yeveadai to bta ueaov, aXX' i]TOi to b-nuoTiKov cnroXuXevai 
■n-Xrjdos, T), &c. so that there would have been no medium, no middle 
condition ; but the one or the other extreme of the alternative would 
have been unavoidable : Id. vii. p. 451 . I. 4. 

V. Ata, with a genitive, and the verbs e^w, Xaufiavio, Tideuai, and 
the like, forms many circumlocutory phrases; as, cV alcrxyprjs e^eiv, 
to be ashamed to; fiaQovaa be ?/ fiovXi] tovto, bi a\axvvr\s to 
irpayna eXdfie : thought the affair disgraceful to themselves ; were 
ashamed of it: Dionys. Hal. vi. bi eX7ribos ex €tv i t° ex V ec ^ or 
hope: v. Herodian ii, 1. rfjs 7ro\c-ws eTrapx^vra Toaomutv eriov bta 
Tip.rjs re Kal BavuaTos e^ere, you both honored and admired, or 
wondered at : Herodian ii, 2. (pepovat bia uvi\ fxns, they remember : 



Rule 1—6.] Am. 223 

Id. ii, 2. K&fiol be bt everts can, I wish or pray for it: Id. ii, 10. 
'AvaKpeovra — bta tnrovbrjs i)ye, valued or made ''much of him: ISA. 
V. H. ix, 4. Ka\ f} aXXr) be iratja. arparia it o'iktov to Trpdy/xa 
e\a/3ev, was moved with pity at the affair: Diorfys. Hal. x. p. 6?0. 
1.39- rriv nayeipttcriv /ja-^aipav bta \etpbs eyuv, holding, grasping: 
Id. xi. p. 720. 1. l6. bta fTTOfjtaros e%etv, to talk much of: bt airius 

ex €lv > to accuse, blame, find fault with: Id. iii. p. 148. 1. 36. it 
airlas elvat, to be blamed or accused: Id. i. p. 56". I. 33. it dxfte- 
Xelas rideadai, to convert to one's own profit or use : Id. vii. p. 446. 
1. 12. 

VI. Aia with a genitive signifies space, duration, interval: bta 
fiiov,for life, through life: Dionys. Hal. iii. p. 187. •• 37. v. Fisch. 
ad Piat. Pliffid. c. 20. ap%6fievos re icai bta reXovs tvvto eTrepap- 
Tvparo,from first to last ; always, to the end: Plat. Sophist, p. 237. 
bC ij/jepas, through the whole of the day: v. Valck. ad Herodot. 
p. 443. Wessel. p. 604. it erovs, during a whole year : bta ievrepov 
erovs, every other year [through a second year] : bta rpirov erovs, 
every third year [through a third year] : bta fxaicpov, at a great 
distance : oh bia panpov -rjv 'Vw/j.tjv vnoyeipiov k\etv eXniuavres, soon, 
at no distant time: Dion. Hal. iii. p. 254. 1. 35/* en-etra bta arabiuv 
jxaXiffrct kt) irevre ava(pntv('>nevos, a river disappearing under ground, 
and reappearing at a distance of five stadia: Herodot. vii, 30. arrb 
be tovtov bta e'uoa't kov arabiiov a\Xos irora[.i6s, at the distance of 
twenty stadia: Id. vii, 198. bta fipnyewv tlne'tv, in few words ; bta 
7r\et6ru)v e'nrelv, in many words ; bt" oXlyov, at a short distance : 
Thnc. vii. p. 515. bia beica be errciX^eiav irvpyot y)aav fxeyitXot, at 
every tenth bastion or bulwark: Time, iii, 21. Kwfiat bta ttoXXov, 
at a great distance apart ; davfxaSetv to. bta rrXeicrrov, things very far 
distant: and 01 bta nXeiorov, Thuc. iii, 115. /uaXa Trpeapurrjs pot 
ebo?ev eivat' bta -^povov yap kqi etiipaiceiv avrbv, for it was a long time 
since I had seen him: Plat, de Rep. [p. 371.1. 23. ed. Bas. 1.] Some- 
times bta is omitted before 'xpovov : ttoXXov ypovov, Xen. Agesil. 
ii, 23. e bta tooovtov, at so great (or at so little) an interval. 

It is often used adverbially with a genitive; as, bia ra^etov, 
quickly: Thuc. i, 8. bta ftpay^euv, briefly: Plat. Tim. [p. 473. 
I. 8. ed. Bas. 1.] and bia fipaxyrarwv, ib. p. 89- bta Tayovs, speedily : 
Thuc. ii, 18. it' airexdeias, inimically : Plato Theag. p. 130. 
1. 12. 

It is employed periphrastically with a genitive signifying the instru- 
ment: at yiovat at bta tov <ru)/J.aTos, Plat. Phaed. c. 9- a * i ta T <*>v 
oXiywv woXiTeiat, Demosth. adv. Lept. p. 489- [1- 27- ed. R.] )/ 
bia tG)v opKtov nioTis, iEschin. c. Ctes. p. 600. [1. 1. ed. R.y 

d Tin&ov Se &ov\olp.t]V av a£ioi{jLevov them : Aristoph. Pint. 98. — J. S. 

*rlv ep.ov opaadar Sia /xaxpov yap y x«P«> f Add that Sio; denotes succession : & 

permanent, lasting : Eurip. Hecub. 320. pev %p6vos 8$) Sta XP^ V0V vpov^atv' i/xol, 

ed. Pors. A(a is sometimes, through the Soph. Phil. 285. But Brunck explains 

whole extent of a place: Karearparoire- Sta xpitvov, aliquantisper, for a little 

Severe Sia ttjs twv ' hfynrlvaiv irdAews, while. Aia, with : Ppovrr] 5' efipdyn 5 i* 

Polyb. iii, 77.— J. S. ao-Tpamjs, Aristoph. Nub. 583. Br. 574. 

« TloWov yap avrobs oux idpaKa XP<$- Bekk. — J. S. 
vov,for it is a long time since I have seen 



224 Els. [Chap. ix. § ii. 

VII. Ata with an accusative often signifies instrumentality: $w- 
kikov avtTTt'a'Tot ray TToXeftnv, oi> bt' tjue, ov yap enoXtTevof.irjv iru) Tore I 
Demosth. pro Cor. |». 31.5. I. 17- rf]s kudubov bi exelvov Tvyun>, Dion. 
Halic. p. 305. I. 21. abbe yap vTrobiiuara eyei bia tov j^uXKea, ovb* 
vTt\a bta t6v atcvrea : Epist. Encli. c. 31. V. Hon). II. 6, 510. Aris- 
loph. Plut. 93. And see Chap. vm. § vi. R. y.? 

Aia is often elegantly construed with the neuter article and an 
infinitive: b<a to /.o) ooipol elrat, through not being wise: Plat. Gorg. 
p. 487. '• 5. ^o<f)ol is in the nominative, because it is understood of 
the same persons as the preceding verb. Oh% oloi re elat ftaauviieiv, 
bta to fin, &c. 

It is often understood before -ovto, ravra, and rl : as cat tovto, 
and on this account: jEschiu. Dial, iii, 9. v. Fisch. ad I. et Plat. 
Apol. c. 17. Raphe!, ad 2 Petr. i, 5. 

In composition bta signifies — 1. passage through, or transmission ; 
as in biopvrretv, biayeiv, bieXavietv, btacpalveiv, bianiTTTeiv, btanvelv, 
hiaou>£eiv irpos, &c. — 2. completion, accomplishment ; as in bianepav 
tov fiiov, Xen. CEc. xi, 7. biairpaTTeiv, biepyageodai : Pol) b. iv, 
22. biaTTiTTTeiv irpos rim, Polyb. iv, 86. viii, 21. bianpiretv, De- 
mosth. l6'3, 15. biaXoyiHecrdai, Id. 1236, 17. — 3. duration or tract 
of time; as in btaTeXelv, biafikveiv '. ovbev abitcov biayeyevrjfiai 
Ttoiuir: Xen. Apol. — 4. dispersion, division, distribution; as in bt- 
ayyeWew, Demosth.p. 163, 8. biavifieiv, biabiboiai, buaTaodai, biaano- 
irtjoai: to be silent one and all: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 381. biaana- 
traodat, ib. p. 312. biaTaTTeiv, btaTrojXiiaui et btaTwrpaoKeiv : ib. p. 92. 
btaytyvu)(jketv, biaboicif.iageiv : Xen. (Ec. xix, 16. — 5. separation: 
as in btaKadi$eiv, Xen. CEc. vi, 6. bia^wpiieip, ib. viii, 11. bta- 
Zevyvvvai, Demosth. p. 1399, 11. btareixiceiv, Polyb. viii, 27- — 6. 
secrecy, privacy; as in biabvvai, Demosth. p. 1045, 25. biaKXa-nj]- 
vai, Polyb. ii, 62. — 7« It intends or augments; as in biayuviyv, Po- 
lyb. iv, 10. bwfjLupTvptodai, Id. i, 37. bivfiwodai, Demosth. p. 
320, 7. bianvvdaveadat, v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 67O. biiayypiieu- 
6ai, biaKVkipv, btaQeppaiveaBai, bie^tevat, biaKuXvetv. — 8. It signifies 
eminence or excellence ; as in bie^ecr, biacpepeiv: v. Reisk. Animadv. 
vol. i. ad Dion. Chrys. p. 153. — 9- diversity or contrariety ; as 
in biayopeiietv, opposed to avvayopeveiv in Isaeus. v. Harpocr. — 9* 
contention for superiority ; as in biairiveiv : v. Hemst. ad Lucian, 
t. i. p. 444. a. Valck. ad Theocr. x. p. Cj5. ad Herodot. p. 379. 
Wyttenb. ad Eccl. Hist. p. 379. Tyrwh. ad Arislot. Poet. p. 215. 
Cattier. Gazoph. p. 70. 

VIII. Els governs an accusative only. Wheu it is joined with a 
genitive, an accusative is understood ; as, els $bnv, underst. bouov, to 
the infernal regions. eTreibav olv elrteXdu o'ikabe els euavTov, into my 
own house : Plat. Hipp. Maj. els kiovvoiov tov ypafifiaTikov elarjXtioy, 
I entered the school of, &c. Plat. Amat. init. els 'Aficpiapaov, into 
the cave of Amphiaraus. It sometimes signifies/or, in, in the per- 
formance or solemnization of ; Kpo re yafincwv, kcii is a\Act twv lepwv 

S Et ri y' ZffTi Xayarplv ko.1 tiu\bv, t) toph. Plut. 145. —J. S. 
X^fnv avdpdiroiiTi, 5ta ae^lyverai : Aris- 



Rule 7 — 11.] E2s. 225 

vofitSerdi t<j> vhan y^prjadat : Time, ii, p. 111. It is often omitted, 
when it signifies motion to a place ; and so in Latin, see Virg. Mx\. i, 
6. iv, 164, 165. and usually after verbs signifying division ; as, 
Xeyovres, <bs nXe'iara fiipt] t; ovaia vevefii]fxevri e'irj : Piato Parmen. c. 
14. rpels fioipas 6 £ep£t]s haaafievos ir&vTa tov 7re$bf orpa-bv, Hero- 
dot, vii, 121. hieXuipev roivvv avrijv hvo fxipn. Plat. Politic, c. 24. 

IX. It signifies, on account of, on the score of: fiovXofxevos ahrbv 
rols YleXoTTovvrftjlois es ti)v ai/rov Kal 'Adrjvaiuv (juXiav ws fiaXiGTa 01a- 
fiaWeiv : Time, viii, 88. 

X. It is used for Kara, against : to. lycXj;//ara to. is tovs 'Adrjvalovs, 
Time. i. arrepeihofxevos els UepucXea, bt 'Avafcayopov, rijv virovoiav '. 
fixing Pericles with the suspicion through Anaxagoras ; directing 

it against, or contriving that it should attach to, Pericles : Pint, in 
Pericl. So alviTrecrdat eh riva, to insinuate something agansi a 
person ; to throw out innuendos against him. l 

Also for Kara, according to: els fifxerepav bvvafiiv, according to 
our ability ; to the best of our power: Plato in Phzedr. p. 257. ovk 
aae/avos n)v o\piv es to fiapfiapucbv, Lucian, Dial. Mort. els to eraipi- 
tcbv, according to the manner or fashion of courtezans: Id. Bis 
Accus. v. Hor. Semi, i, 6, 95. 

XI. It is put for ei', as is to (jxxvepbv, for iv rw (pavepu, openly : ol 
KaTaXeupdevres {/kg tov Tvpdvvov els arparonehov, in the camp: Dion. 
Halic. p. 276. I. 41.* 

It signifies, quite to, as far as: hekvvrai ku\ es ifie to i-ivTjua, even 
to my time: Paus. in Acli. p. 399- « tovto yjpuv irepiean [wepi- 
eorr?j,] tcc Trpayfiara, to this condition ; is o hrj, until, until at length, 
and es 0, until: Herodot. Er. is t'i; how long? Horn. II. e, 46*5. 
<do\ he is tooovtov XoyitTTiKal, so far : Ml. V. H. i, 6. and with a 
genitive after tocovtos ; es fxkv hi) roaovro tov Xoyov ol Travres "E\/\»;ves 
Xeyovai, as far as this part of the account : Herodot. Er. els to- 
covtov fxerafiefiXiiKao-iv, to such a degree are they changed: Isocr. 
Paneg. KatcwdevTes is to ia-^arov, to the last degree: Paus. in 
Ach. 

Also, with respect to, with regard to:' ii'TeTv^Kora avdpwna 
TOiovrta o'ttp iyio ova av yfJ-qv irore ivTV%eiv els (ppovrfo'iv Kal els tcapre- 
plav : Plato Symp. c. 35. to y els eavrbv, as far as regards him- 
self: Soph. CEd. R. 706. ovhev els aatprjveiav, ovhe kciXXos, f] <ppacrts 
fiXaTTTeTai: Plut. Qujest. Plat, els wfioTnra Kal altrxporrjra vrrepfia- 
XeoQai iravras tyiXoveidiaasJ Photius in Herodiani exc. So, 'Iwi'ia, 
irapel, tuiv re lepwv, Kal tFjs tov aepos Kpaaews, 7rape%erai kui dXXn is 
o-vyypa<J>t]i> : Paus. in Ach. uuderst. <j>epovra, pertaining to: k as 
also in Xiyeiv els to fieXTMJTOv, and elnelv eh ayadov '. Horn. II. 1, 

* TV Se yyv — ovtois iK\nrat>8r}vai, — i This sense of els may be expressed 

Sxrre KapTewv virepfi&Wov eis Upas nKridos by for: For tusks with Indian elephants 

QivtyKtlv, in due season: Plut. in Mario he strove: Dryden, vol. iii.p. 426. War- 

p. 763. 1. 22. ed. H. St.— J.S. ton's edition, 1811.— J. S. 



* Nsvovd^TrjKev avrbv is ra irpdy/jLara, h I should construe is avyypwpip with 
1 reformed or corrected himself in nrapexerai, affords for, as subjects for, de- 
matters: Aristoph. Vesp. 743.— scription.—J . S. 

Viger. 2 F 



226 TAs. [Chap. ix. §ii. 

102. i/yoTifxai tvivvv tvui'Twv fiuXirrr' els tu Trpuy/jn elrai, Tovrtdv 
fiuprvpas nupeyeoQai, to be pertinent to, or promotive" 1 of, the matter 
in hand: Demosth. pro Phorm. 

XII. Ylapievai, and napeXOeli', els rbv bTmov, els t))i> fiovX>)i>, els rovs 
bixaaras, to address the people, the senate, to come into court, to 
trial. 

Ets is put for ap(p\, about : rptrjKovTopot fiev els hiaKoaias Kareaicevaa- 
dqcruv, Zosim. Hist. ii. 

For 7repl, about, at, near : ro~is els tov "\aTpov (pvXuTTOvcri arpaTiu)- 
rais, Id. iv. 

It is put for Tpos, to, before accusatives signifying persons; as in 
Horn. II. a, 100. 431. 389- o, 402. p, 709. Od. X , 479- Joseph. 
Arch, xii, 2, 5. eXdfov els riju ejii)v fxr)Tepa, Isaeus de Apollod. 
Hered. p. 169. R. ufiKvov/uai els tov k<x\ tov, Lysias de Eratosth. 
Caed. p. 27. [I. 8. ed. Reisk. In both these last passages Reiske lias 
substituted ws.] But to this head those passages are not to be 
referred, in which, by a person or animate thing, the place in which 
either the former or latter is, is signified ; as, <?£teVai els avdpuirovs, 
into public: Xen. Mem. i, 1,4. M. V. H. xii, 1. Pind. 01. vii, 56. 
Charit. iv, 4. Lys. p. 500. [I. 6. ed. R.] 

XIII. A genitive governed by the case of els is sometimes put 
before els, instead of after its case; usually when that case signifies 
a place which is a part only of the place or country denoted by the 
genitive; as, eafiaXuv rijs 'Arnicas es 'EXevtrlva, Thuc. ii. p. 114. 
a^pvres tTjs 'HXeias es fyeiuv, ebrjovv Tr/v yrjv'. lb. p. Il6. 

XIV. Ets is joined with adverbs and nouns signifying time: els 
&7ra£, is rpk, as far as once, as thrice ; not less than such a number 
of times ; alyd re toi biaoib bibvfiaroKov es rpls afxeX^ai, Theocr. i, 25. 
[v. Xen. Anab. vi, 4, 11.] v. Soph. Fragm. inc. 23. ap. Stob. 
tit. Ixiii. p. 239- et Huschk. in analect. p. 155. and Ml. V. H. 
xiii, 34. ret roiavra els }xev a-rra^ cat fipayiyv ^povov avre^ei, Demosth. 
Ol. ii. els ael or eaaei, for ever: tq enelvoi es ael ^peo)vrai, He- 
rodot. Eut. Keiaerai aoi evepyeaia ev rw >/yuerep&> o'ikio es ael ava- 
ypaxros, Thuc. i. ets eVeim, or elffeweira, or es to. eireira, for the 

future, henceforth ; els avpiov, to-morrow ; els Trivvarepnlav, the next 
day, the day after ; els rpirrjv rj/jepav, the next day but one, the third 
day, the day after to-morrow: Plat. Hipp. Maj. p. 268. vpaxQn^ir- 
Oai be ovk els /xaKpav, a\\' els tj]v eKrrjv eirl be«a tov ' A.vderjTr)piG>vos 
fj.r)vbs: not at a distant time, very soon; on the sixteenth of the 
month Anthesterion : iEschin. c. Ctes. ijtceiv — els ti)v oeXr]vr)v, to 
come at new moon : lb. els ty/v fxearju^piav, at noon ; els onore ; at 
what time ? els TptaKoarbv eros, in the thirtieth year from such a 
time; or, within thirty years. n But els" bvo, els rpeTs, &c. is two 

1 EItts7v els KaAbv, to say well: a\\' 8e«a (irjvas, within ten months: Poljb. 

els KaAbv o~v r' eTiras, ol Be y' aprlcos Kpe- Exc. Peiresc. p. 119. ed. Ern. — J. S. 

ovTttirpoo-o-TeixovTa o-qp.ali'ovo-i jj.oi : Soph. » Els Svo, a military term, two in rank: 

CEd. Pv. 78. — J. S. <5 5e KAeapxos riyelro /tenets Svo, iiropevero 

m See Supplement to Johnson's Die- 8e &A\ore ical &\\ore irpio-rdfj-evos : Xen. 

tionary, published in 1819.— J. S. Anab. ii, 4, 14.— J. S. 

" TlpoBoQivTiev twv Trpiinuv iTrinXuv e is 



Rule 12 — 15.] E& 227 

and two, three and three, &c. npuirov per fiyovTO tu> Ait Tavpoi irayica- 
Xoi els reaaapas, Xen. Cyrop. viii, 3, 6. 

'Es with re, eare, signifies as long as: eare fxev <paos tfv, ava KpaTos 
ebiwKev : Arrian xi, 11. but eare enl is as far as, quite to : eare eirl 
to arpafoTrebov i]Kpo^oXiS.ovro es rets TrpotyvXams, Arrian i. aarpaTrev- 
etv AvKtas, Kal ty\s e\o^ievr}s AvKias -^('opas fare enl tov Tavpov to opos : 
Id. iii. and used of time also, ecrre signifies quite to, until : enrb rrjs 
eWepas ecrre fieaas tcls vvKras, Id. iii, 4. and so elaoKe, which is els o 
*.e, until: Horn. II. v, 30. y, 409. 

Here may be mentioned that use also of els by which one thing is 
spoken of as immediately consequent upon another: /xeTevot]aav els 
to Kfjpvyfia 'Iwvd, at the preaching of Jonas : Luke xi, 31. [32.] 

XV. Eis is elegantly joined with the article in the neuter and an 
adverb or adjective in the superlative degree ; as, es ra /jtaXta-ra £,evos 
tov, connected by the closest possible ties of friendship and hospi- 
tality : Thuc. viii, 6. re<X7/ els to aacpaXeararov d\vpu)Qevra, fortified 
to the utmost degree of security : Paus. in Ach. yepu>v es to 
ea-^arov, aged in the extreme, in extreme old age: Lucian, Here. 
Gall. Also with nouns, and with adjectives not in the superlative 
degree : ets vTrepfioXrjv, extremely, excessively ; els Kaipov, seasonably, 
opportunely: and in the same sense Katpdv alone: Soph. Aj. 34. 
1334. els ko\6v ijtceis, opportunely : Plato Hipp. Maj. els KaXbv 
elirelv, to say rightly or well : [see note I, p. 221.] els beov, commo- 
diously, conveniently, opportunely ; els fxaKpav,far off, a long while, 
at a distant time ; ovk els jucu-pav, presently : Demosth. de Cor. p. 318. 
els TeXos, absolutely, utterly ;P also completely, to the end, until 
death, for ever: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 460. els ra TroXXh, gene- 
rally, for the most part ; els oaov, as much as, or as long as : Avti- 
o\6vTes els oaov evebe^ero avbpeihis, TeXevTalov Travres biecpBdprjaav : 
Herod ian vi. ets oaov fiev yap inrb brjuoKparlas rd 'Pwfxalwv biwiceiro, 
Id. ii. els awnv, altogether, absolutely, always, invariably : Epict. ? 
es oXiyov, slightly, cursorily : aireTreipaQr} es oXtynv rijs TrpoafioXi]s, 
Arr. Exp. Al. ii. but with eXdelv or a verb of similar signification, 
and an infinitive after it, it signifies, to be within a little of; to 
have a narrow escape from : es oXiyov cupineTo tt&v to arpc'iTevfjia twv 
'Adrjvaiwv viKrjdrjvai, Thuc. iv, 129- ■ els irXeov, more at large, 
more fully : Tavra /nev br/ Kal es nXeov eirk^eiaiv avOis fioi to. es 'Apica- 
bas, Paus. in Ach. eXvirrjaav be Kal els trXeov tovs 'Ay^aiovs, still 
more: lb. p. 413. Ets robe is, hither ; [and to this point, to this 
pass.] Note also that a person condemned to pay a fine is said, 
els apyvpiov KaTatprjtylgeadat, /Eschin. in Timarch. and that ets is some- 
times, after, i. e. in imitation of: KaTeaKevaafievos els tov upyalov 
pvdfxov, Diod. S. v, 58. v. Musgr. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 1483. to awpa 
irpos tov ijXiov els to Aldioiretov ein-^pavavTes, Lucian, Bis. Ace. 6. 

P Taiv 8e vavwrjywv els reXos aTreipow virapxeiv: Polyb. xi, 13. — J. S. 

ovrwv rrjs irepl ras irevritpeis vavnriylas, 1 "OpKOV TrapairTjcrai' el pev olovre, els 

&c. Polyb. i, 20. and in the same sense awav, el Se pfy, in twv 4p6vtwv : Epict. 

Kara rb reKos: 5tck -rb pi]ff vScop Karb. End), c. 44. — J. S. 
rb t4\os ev avrr), pyre tt)v aypiav uAtjc 



X 



22S 'Ek. [Chap. ix. § iii. 

biciKoaftovpevos els 'UpaicXia, and oirdre uonolro els Atocncovpovs ; Philo 
Juil. p. 10.93. b. v. Eurip. Hec. 1160/ 

In composition els signifies — 1. motion into; as in elaievai, elou- 
yetv, cloirepiretv, elo<popu. — 2. motion, tendency, or direction towards 
or to ; as in elaibelv, Theocr. Epigr. xix, 1. elaatyiKaveiv, Horn. II. 
£.230. v, 336. x> 17. Theocr. Id. xxii, 29- Demosth. p. 907, 5. 
[elaatpiicvovfjievoi, 1. 4. ed. Reisk.] — 3. publication ; exhibition or pro- 
pounding, &c. in public; as in elotyepeiv Katra baifiovia, Xen. 
Mem. ab init. et Apol. § 12. elokyeiv nva, Polyb. E. L. 93. 
elafepeiv yvLfx^v, Id. ii, 6. elaepy^eadai, Id. iii, 44. elar)ye~mdal n, 
Id. vi, 1. — 4. acquisition, as in eic;7ro<e7>/ : v. Cattier. Gazopbyl, 
p. 73. 



SECTION III. — On the prepositions Ik or t|, and Zv. 

Rule I. 'Ek before a consonant, l£ before a vowel, is used with 
its case (which is always a genitive) adverbially ; as, eic rov <pavepovot 
■npotyavovs, or kfityavovs, is openly : eic tov pqarov, most easily ; Ik tov 
bacalov, justly ; eic rov abitcov, unjustly ; eic rroXXijs eirt/xeXelas or iticpi- 
fieias, very carefully or exactly ; lij 'iaov, equally ; eic rov bjxolov, alike, 
in like manner ; s ek npoaayuyrjs, gradually, more and more ; l£ eroi- 
fxov, readily, promptly ; l£ ecf>6bov, by sudden onset, assault, irrup- 
tion ; ex 7rapa\\{i\ov, i. e. 7rapaXXiq\ws, comparatively, by comparison ; 
[also, similarly ; by parity of circumstances or reason ;] eic wpoaipe- 
oetjs, on purpose ; Ik Xa8paias eniQeaeus, by secret attack ; Ik tov 
em-nXelarov, for the most part ; l£ knifiovXfis or evehpas, insidiously, 
treacherously ; etc rod evOeos, rashly, precipitately ; ex rov 7rapa-^prjfj.a, 
Ik tov napav-iKa, l£ vnoyviov, Ik tov ahroo-yebiov, at once, extempore, 
inconsiderately ; eic tov actpaXovs, cautiously, securely ; Ik rrnpaaicevfis, 
designedly ; [premeditately ;] etc rov aveXniarov, and cnrpo<jbonr)TOv, 
unexpectedly; eic tov fiiuiov, forcibly, violently; Ik tov avaynalov, 
necessarily ; eic Tavrofxarov, fortuitously ; etc rrpoi-oias, designedly, 
wilfully; eic tov Tedapprjicoros, confidently, boldly; etc tov anovbaiov, 
seriously; eic rov 7rapa/3o\ov, venturously, desperately; etc TcoXXfjs 
vnepo^ias, very contemptuously or superciliously ; l£ vnovoias, upon 
suspicion; rnv ^jjltjv eic woXXov ■n-apeiXi^a^ev, long ago, from 
remote time: Isocr. Paneg. p. £)1. So eic ivaXatov, Paus. in Ach. 
p. 411. Ij- kav-ov, spontaneously, of himself; eic fxepovs, partly, in 
part.* 

II. 'Ek signifies after ; eic tovtov, after this: yeXaaai etc twv rrpoadev 

r Add, els Tavra, moreover, besides: is, on an equality, on a par : el yap dvvarol 

Demetrius Pepagoraenus in Prooemio de %/xev eic rod Xcrov ical avreiriPovAevirai Kal 

Podagra. V. Toup. ad Longin. § xliii. avTenifieWrjcrai., ri eSet 7]^as eic rov Sfioiov 

Els sometimes signifies the final cause : eV iicelvois ehai ; what necessity tvould 

ajcpowfiaiirdo-as (pwvasUvTwv els awScpev^iv, there have been for us, having thus equal 

for the purpose of escaping, in order that powers or means, to be in subjection to 

they may escape : Arisloph. Vesp. 562. them? c. 12. p. 396. ed. Bekk. — J. S. 
— j . S. ' Add eic iravios, indispensably, by all 

s But in Thucyd. b. iii. e« tov dfiolou means. See note w, p. 50. — J. S. 



Rule 1—4.] 'Ek. 229 

btiKpvutv, Xen. Cyrop. i, 2(5. evdvs l| apx^s wpfirjKOTe irpoeoravai 
rijs roXews, Xen. Memor. i, 2, 39- Ibpios 7ro\vs l£ v^voy, immediately, 
after sleep: Hippocr. Aph. vi, 41. ex irepiobov, eK nepiobiov, Ik 
TrepirpoTrijs, by turns or rotation. 

With : ko.1 Kparriaras avrStv etc ttoXXov tov nepiovros, ivith great ad- 
vantage or superiority : Eutrop. Metaphr. ii. and in the same sense, 
els ^elpas eXdwv, eK tov Kpurrovos aveywpriae '. Id. iii. Herodian vi, 
6, 11. ras eKtxTpareias ek (xeyiaruiv eiroifoaTO ovfMpopwv, (for fiera,) 
Metaphr. Eutrop. vii. 

III. 'Ek nepiovaias has a similar sense : kvbv k< ireptovaias Kparelv, 
when he might have conquered with ease, and without risk : Greg. 
Naz. 

'Ek wepiovirius ti ttoicIv is often, to do a thing with abundance of 
ease and security, or out of mere wantonness : vvros b' it irepwvoias 
fjey KdT7]yopel, Demoslb. pro Cor. [fxov KaT^yopel, p. 226. 1. 19. 
eel. R.] M 

01 b' Ik Treptovoias irovqpo) ovbefiiav ttpo^aaiv eypiev av elirelv, al- 
though they enjoy abundance, and are not urged by necessity : De- 
mosth. 

IV. 'Ek is sometimes, on account of; in consequence of; because 
of : Ik tovtojv €7raparcs fxev rjv ev iruorj rrj fiaoikevofievy yrj, Eutrop. 
Metaphr. vii. Ik be tov tovtwv oKiywptos v/nds e%eiv, Demosth. Phil, 
iv. p. 60. 1. 48. etc tov TTavras hpav ev "icu> cnroWv/jievovs, Thuc. ii, 
53. irapeKukei dappelv fxev eic twv i]bi] ctyioiv koXwv KeKivbvvevfievwv, 
km ore irpbs vevtKtjfxevovs 6 dywj/ veviKnKoaiv avrols eorai" Arr. Exp. 
Al. ii, f. where on has the same signification [i. e. the construction 
might have been nal ck tov — tov aywva, &c. with an infinitive] : eK 
tov; on what account? wherefore? Eurip. He!. 92. 

Sometimes, according to, in proportion to: ex twv evovrwv, ck twv 
bwuTwv, ere twv evbe^o/Ltevwv : to the best of one's power : see Epict. 
Erich, c. 44. Aristid. t. iii. p. 270. in which sense Ik twv ovtwv, 
Zosim. i, 2. but eK twv evovrwv yjprjaofjiai Tf \6yf, as the nature of 
the affair requires : Demosth. * 

For bia : Ik TocravTijs eTrifue\eias, by so much care and attention ; 
eK Tov-ov tov \6yov, by this method, or by this way of reasoning ; Ik 
daXaaaijs, by sea ; etc iravrbs or navros rpoirov, by every method ; [and 
totally, or all together ;] to which is opposed etc fxepovs or p.e/uwv : el 
£>' ovk eK tov ttclvtos, d\\' eK fiepovs eiraiveffopeda : Lucian, Dem. 
Enc. p. 899- [by the great ; in the gross ;] eK toiovtov tov rpo-Kov, in 
such a manner as this ; Ik filas, by force : Soph. Phil. 563. 

u The following is the interpretation of happen to lose, they suffer no inconve- 

this phrase offered by me in my Commen- nience. — J. S. 

tary on Demosthenes published in the " I suppose the passage alluded to is 

Classical Journal : Videtur figura ab Us the following : &AA.' inrb ttjs tovtovI tov 

desumta, qui supervacanea tantum ex for- xaAejrou fi\aff(f>rjfiias not o-vKoQavrias els 

tunis suis in discrimen commit tunt ; qui- towvtovs \6yovs ep-TrinTeiv avaynd£opai, 

bus vel amissis,jacturam non ita magnam oh in twv 4v6vtwv &s tiv Svpu/xai jue- 

faciunt. I suppose it is a figure taken rpuorara xpvcofiai : de Cor. p. 312. 1.20. 

from persons venturing the superfluous ed. Reisk. as far as the occasion or cir- 

part only of their fortune ; which if they cumstances will permit. — J. S. 



230 'Ek-. [Chap. ix. § iii. 

V. 'EKTrohiov™ or Ix Trohwv, (literally from before out's feet,) be- 
sides the sense mentioned in Cli. v. § v. It. 8. signifies with el vat, yi- 
veoQai, loraadai, or iroielatiai, to be killed or destroyed, [as we say, to 
be put out of the zuay :] ov ■noXXals vaTepou rifiipais eKirobwv 6 kclko- 
baifiwy yiverai, Philo de Legat. ad Caium. to /xetpuKiov en izobibv 
yeyei'Tjrai, Id. ib. 

'Ek is put for ev, in: etc 7rapara£ews Kparelv, in pitched battle: Po- 
lyb. ii, 19. In Thuc. vi, 32. b aXXos SfxiXos 6 ck yf/s is opposed to 
6 vavriKos SficXos: v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 10o\ Cic. Ep. iii, 9. Caes. 
B. G. i, 43. but in Horn. II. t, 375. tpaiveodai e<c ttovtoio is, to ap- 
pear to persons viewing it from the sea. 'Ek, per, by, through, from : 
'loQt yap e£ efxeo tu Treiroiev^ieva vtto Mr/buy, Herodot. viii, 80/ 

'E£ is redundant with nouns having Qev added to them, as l£ovpu- 
voQev in epic poetry. 

In composition ek signifies — 1. departure or removal from a place ; 
as in exfiaXXeiv, eKTrinreiv, Itcpteir, eKKop.i£eiv, e^ep-^eadai, €KTOwi£eiv 
eavTov. Polyb. i, 74. v. Valck. diatrib. p. 197. — 2. transfer, trans- 
ference; as in eKbibovai abeXcpijv, to give a sister in marriage: De- 
mosth. p. 763. [I. 8. ed. R.] avbpiavTa, arefavov, to set a statue, 
a crown, to be made by contract: Id. p. 268. 521. to let for hire: 
iEschin. Or. p. 2, 41. exbtbovai xw as » to transfer or give over to 
others: Demosth. p. 423. [1. 15.] — 3. secret removal ; as in e<ocXe7r- 
reiv, Polyb. i, 23. Xen. Apol. 23. eKirr}bq.v, Polyb. i, 43. eKTziTtreiv 
Id. iv, 86. — 4. removal from the rest, selection ; as in klkraaiv itoitio- 
6ai, Xen. CEc. iv, 6. eicXeyeiv, Demosth. p. 76O. e£aipeiv, Id. p. 608. 
— 5. removal from, or privation of, what is signified by the uncom- 
pounded word, or the contrary of the uncompoundedword: v. Valck. 
ad Herodot. p. 173. as in eKtcaXvirreiv tt\v ypaftjv, IE\. V. H. ii, 44. 
to tfdos, ib. iii, 7. eiccnrovbos, Polyb. iv, 33. eKvo/xim, Aristoph. 
Plut. 982. klunvvaBai, Demosth. p. 396. 1119. &c. efypKovv, to 
absolve from the obligation of an oath: Id. p. 535. [1. 23. ed. R.] — 
6. completion, accomplishment, consummation, end ; as in e£cu7e7cr0ai 
eraipovs, iEschin. Or. p. 24. 35. kKtyvoyv, Polyb. i, 48. k^abvvareiv, 
Id. i, 58. eKTtoXiopiceiv, Id. i, 39. ei$Keiv, Demosth. in Indie. [Reiske's 
index.] etcdepiSeiv, Id. p. 1253. eKirovelv, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 4. and 
OZc. xi, 12. etepyaala, Polyb. x, 42. — 7. removal from obscurity, 
or concealment, into publicity; as in etapepe.iv, /Elian ii, 4. x, 13. 
exXaXelv, Demosth. p. 354. e£a.yyeXXeii>, Id. p. 45. etcKeicrdui, Id. 
p. 458. kcTiQevai, Polyb. xv, 9. — 8. It intends or augments; (v. 
Valck. diatr. p. 167. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Iph. T. 259.) as m erf™- 
Xl^etp, M\. V. H. iii, 33. ix, 41. eKKayx&cieiv, Xen. Symp. i, l6. e«- 
Xoyio/Jtos, Polyb. x, 6. e^aKpifiovv, Id. ii, 56. e&vicpiveiv, Id. E. L. 
141. eKdepcureveiv, iEschin. Or. p. 24, 15. — 9- continuation or per- 



w rtopex' etaroSZiv, give me your place ; Soph. (Ed. R. 997. 'Ek vvktIs, in the 

stand out of the way ; make room: Aris- night, by night: teal yap 4k vvktos, ef 

toph. Vesp. 949. — J. S. rivos Stoiro 'Acrrvdyrjs^ irpwros rfo-ddveTO 

x 'Ek, upon : Kadii/xed' &Kpouf e« irdyoiv, Kvpos, ical irdvTwv aoKVoTara aveirifSa : 

Soph. Autig. 411. by: $>v oiiVeX* V K<5- Xen. Cyrop. i.— J. S. 
pivdos e£ i(.wv TraAai jj.ci.Kpav a.TccaicilT', 



Rule 5— 9.] 'Ev. 231 

sislence ; as in kKTpktyeiv, eKreivetv ras ^elpas. — 10. It is redundant ; 
as in klafiapraveiv : v. Musgrav. ad Eurip. Iph. A. 333. Fisch. 
praef. ad Well. p. 13. 

VI. The preposition kv is construed with no other case than a 
dative; which, when not expressed, is to be understood; as, kv 
ktovvcov Tpaywbovs kBeaaaade, Deinosth. de Pac. [p. 58. 1. 24. ed. R.] 
uuderst. kopTaaijiois yj/uepais.^ 

It is used for kirl with a genitive, before; as, kv ToaovTOis fxaprvai: 
ev to7s ctKaarals, or biairrjrals. biabiKa^eaBai ev tlgi twv larpOiv, Plat. 
Leg. 11. TrpoTeQeiarjs be fiovXijs kv to~is twv vewv ijyefxoai Ttepl Tijs vav- 
fxa%ias, Diod. S. xi, 12. 

'Ev, during the office or magistracy of: kv be tovtois tihs vofioQerats 
fii] BerrBe vo/nov fxrjbeva, Demosth. Ol. iii. So, kv tovtois vtvoltols. 

VII. 'Ev with its case is used adverbially: kv tovtw, meanwhile ; 
and in this sense kv J is correlative with it : kv tovtw, then, preceded 
by kneibav and orai', Xen. de Re Eq. vii, \J. x, 13. kv tovtw, there- 
fore, (a Hebraism,) Acts xxiv, 16. dvaara kv rayei, quickly, Acts 

xii, 7. v. Rom. xvi, 20. Rev. i, 1. Kinrotyavw ye vr) At'a, ws kv 
biKr) a' ervTzrov, justly : Aristoph. Nub. 1335. [1332. Br. 1314. 
Bekk.] cf. Plat, in Phaedr. p. 278. 1. 40. kv bkovn, kv tcmpy, kv 
Ka\<ji, seasonably, conveniently: Demosth. Phil. i. p. 19« 1. 21. [51, 
23. ed. R.] kv KuXy bpixe'iv, commodiously : Xen. H. Gr. ii. v. Thuc. 
v, 60. Ml. V. H. x, 11. kv "taw, equally, followed by koi, Thuc. ii, 
62. p. 137. [c. 6l.p. 306. 1. 2.ed. Bekk.] In the same sense ev 6/joiw, 
Thuc. ii, 53. kv rw irapovn, now, at present : iEschin. Dial, de Virt. 
init. kv 0pay^el, shortly, soon: Plat. Symp. p. 217. Sometimes, 
summarily , generally : Harpocrat. kv fipayyTepois, more briefly : Plat. 
Gorg. p. 449. In one word enfipayy, Plat. Hipp. min. p. 365. 1. 34. 
kv oXlyw, almost, to which kv itoXXw is opposed, Acts xxvi, 28. 29. 

VIII. To these adverbial expressions a genitive is sometimes joined : 
tijv be KepKvpav Ke'iadai kv kciXw fiev tov KopivdiaKov koXttov, (with 
regard to it,) Kat twv iroXewv, at kni tovtov KaBi/Kovaiv, kv KaXtjj be tov 
t>)v AaKwviKijv x&P av fiXawTetv (for injuring it) kv KaXXiarw be rijs 
avTtirkpav {]ireipov, Xen. Hist. Gr. vi. kv tovtw tt/s irapaoicevfjs ijaav, 
in this state of preparation, or were thus preparing : Thuc. ii. [c. 
17-] And sometimes a dative besides of the person or thing advan- 
taged, &c. vpb tov Bearpov, ical ov ttvlgiv kv KaXtp Tijs Bias ecrrai : and 
where all will have a good view : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 267. 

IX. 'Ev signifies, at, near : 'Ena/j.etvwvbas OTe krpwdr) kv Mavrivelq, 
JE\. V. H. xii, 3. f]TT7jfievos kv MavTtveiq, 'nnronayiq, Xen. H. Gr. vii. 
p. 645. v. Perizon. ad iEl. V. H. ii, 25. Bach, ad Xen. Ages, ii, 
23. kv apiGTepq. fiev eywv to. ^.oybiavwv opt), kv be^iq be avrov tov 
TiyprjTa : Arr. Exp. Al. iii, 7. on the left, on the right : kppifxevos 
kv irocrt, at, JE\. V. H. i, 16. v% Dorv. ad Char. p. 200. 418. ed. 
Lips. 

For els, to: cnroaTeXovvTes ottXitcis kv 2t«reX/a,Thuc. vii, 17. p. 449/ 

V Wolf understands va$ or eoprf. A3 stood.— J. S. 
theatres were dedicated or consecrated to z "Clixovro 5e ev rots oxvpois' Xen. 
Bacchus, perhaps Osdrpcp may be under- Anab. iv, 7, 12. where see Hutchinson, 



232 '!•>. [Chap. ix. § Hi; 

X. 'Etri^e/pjjreov v/iwv e&XeaQai ti)i> biafio\i)v, f\v ev TroXXy XP (>, 'V 
?\ere, (of," or from, a long time,) tciutt)V ev ovruurl dXiyy yjpoyf,{in so 
short a time:) Plato Apol. It signifies also within, wlien thus go- 
verning nouns of time : ev irevre yfiepais eftoqOi'iaaTe avrols, jEschin. 
c. Ctes. p. 286". 1. 35. v. Ml. V. H. i, 6. And also process of time : 
ev 8' nvre xP ()t 'V> ^ nen after a time : Pind. P}th. iii. 

XI. 'Ev al is sometimes when: to yevos to tuiv Opatcwv, ev $ ttv 
Oapcrtjerri, QoviKtoTarov e<mv : Thuc. vii. p. 509. c. 29. 'Ev w is often 
followed by ev tovto) as correspondent to it ; and then it may be ren- 
dered while : ev y utv Kopivdiwv ebeovTO ypTjoQai atpi veas, ev tovtu) 
bietydaprj to. Trpy'iyfiaTa : Herodot. Er. c. 89. So Xen. Cyrop. ii, 6. 
'Ev offy, also is while: ev oau) be KaTafiatveis, eyui enq.oofia.1 fieXos, 
Aristoph. Eccl. 1 144. It may be noticed in general that ev is em- 
ployed in signifying time: ev belirrtp, during supper; ev oirovbaTis, 
during a truce or peace ; ev jur/vt Tpirw, in the third month. 

'Ev w signifies also, by which, through which, which being done or 
effected: u/pfxrifievaiv yap tuiv ev 2a/iw 'Adrjvauov vXe'iv eVi 0(j>as civtovs 
(ev w <7a0e<7-ara 'laiviav Kal 'EXXt'jo-rrovrov evdvs ely^ov ol 7roXefiiot,) 
Tbuc. viii. c. 86. p. 612. Tip toiovtu) trpoaeKeivTO, ev uSnep kul p.a- 
Xmtto. oXiyapyjia en bq/xoKparias yevojxevr) cnroXXvTai, Id. viii. C. 88. 
p. 615. 

XII. 'Ev and its case are joined with ehai, and verbs of similar 
signification, in various forms; as, ev <p6ftu> elvai, to be in fear : v. 
Cic. Catil. i. c. 7. [§ 18.] Hor. Epod. i, 17. Hence efjfofios [Luke 
xxiv, 5.] and efupofiovpai. "EvTpo/jos, of kindred signification, is in 
Acts Ap. vii, 32. ev arTouari, and more elegantly ev Xoyois, ev ^r\[in, 
elvai, to be talked of , to be celebrated : yeveaXoyovvTes avrov two rfjs 
ev <pj)fiy Aa'ibos,from the famous Lais: Synes. Ep. iii. YloXvKpaTT)s 6 
Ha/xios ev Movcrais 7iv, was addicted or devoted to poetry : 1E\. V. H. 
ix, 4. ol ev 7roirj(rei yevojjievoi, poets: Herodot. ii, 82. ev aol yap 
eafiev, upon you is our sole dependence: Soph. CEd. R. 322. 
[314.] ev opyrj elvai rtvi, to have a person angry with one ; ev fihovrj 
elvai tivi, to be the delight of a person, to be agreeable to him ; 
ev aiTiais or ev eyicXfjfxaTi, elvai, to be accused: ol ev rals alTiais 
(ovtes viz.) Demosth. Ep. ii. p. iii. 1. 34. But ev alriais e^eev nva, is, 
to accuse one ; ev opyrj e^etv rtva, to be incensed against one; ev 
aicxyvT] TiOetrQai, to esteem disgraceful or shameful : v. Sail. B. C. c. 
31. Cic. ad Fam. x, 28. 

XIII. 'Ev is sometimes omitted : okotu) for ev okotu), Soph. 
Trach. 596. v. Hermann, ad Eurip. Htc. 591. 'AraAavrp, for 
eV 'AraXavrr/, Thuc. ii. to'is elprivw Trpayfxutri, for r. ev elprivr) 7T. 
Zosim. Hist. ii. ttj <pvyrj, for ev r. <p., Id. iii. p. 328. Sometimes 
redundant : ol Ylapdoi ev 7$ trferepip rpoirui ^pjjavro fiacnXeveodat, 
Xiphil. in Trajan, v. Brunck. ad Soph. CEd. R. 1112. Tyrwh. 
ad Aristot. Poet. p. 120. But it sometimes appears to be redundant, 

who gives several examples of this sense, tionary, published in 1819. This sense 
— J« S. of of is omitted even in Mr. Todd's 

See Supplement to Johnson's Die- edition of Johnson. — J. S. 



Rule 10—16.] 'Ei/. 233 

when it really is not ; e. g. in opos fikya avearpa/jfxevov kv ry £tiTi'i<ret, 
Herodot. Er. c. 48. 'Ev ry gyri/cei is for kv ry $r)re~tv, in making 
the search. 

XIV. 'Ev is joined wilh ypf in various phrases ; as, ndpeoQai kv 
XPV> to be shaven close to the skin : Theophr. irep\ /unpoX. [p. 59. 
1. 2. ed. Simps. Oxon. 1738.] /El. V. H. ix, 10. Hence?) kv xPf 
Kovpa, close shaving, called also iptXi) Kovpa, and in poetry Kovpa 
i,vpi]Krjs : and b kv yjm Kovpias, one so shaved; and in one word lupins. 
Figuratively £vpe~i kv ^pu is said of what is very dangerous ; chiefly 
in poetry. 

XV. Ov iTplv }} kv xpu) tov Kivhvvov aTckoTr] Tovbiav av jxayfiaai irpbs 
ras (nriXabas, not before he had been in the greatest danger: Synes. 
Ep. iv. In this sense a thing is said kni £vpov aKfArjs taraadai or 
e'xe<70Gu, for, to be in a very critical situation: Horn. II. k, 173. 
Theogn. 557. Herodot. Er. c. 11. kv XPV paxeo-dai or na.yr\v aw- 
a\pat, hand to hand: Plut. in Thes. 

XVI. Hence kv \pw, near, or close: kv yjpw ael irapanXkovTes, 
Thucyd. ii. c. 84. p. 155. This is expressed by stringere and 
radere : Virg. j£n. v. [l63. 170.] kv j(Pf T V J"'FP' irpoffurrafxevot, 
pressing close to her through fear: Lucian, in Zeux. [632. D. ed. 
Salm.] % kv \po) irpds to. (3tj3Xia awovaia, a close acquaintance with 
books: Id. adv. Indoct. t. i. p. 102. 1. 57. ed. Amst. 01 kv ypu 
<pi\oi, intimate friends : Suid. kv tt\ ayopa fifj/jia £vXtvov kv yptjj tov 
XiQivov KaTeffKevaarai, Xiphilin. in Sever, in summa superjicie. [I 
suppose it means close to; but it has not been in my power to 
examine the passage.] 

*Ej/ is put for avv : — kv TrkXrais kcu cucovtIois, — kv to£,qis, Xen. Mem. 
iii, 9, 2. v. jEschin. c. Ctes. p. 532. [1. 17- ed. Reisk.] Id. p. 254. 
[1. 14. ed. R.]* v. Enrip. Ale. 771- 

'Er, in the power of ; kv vfxlv kart, Lys. de Eratosth. ca?d. p. 40. 
[ed. R.] ottws kv kneiva) e'it}, ovriva fiovXoiro 'AOi^vaiwv tyavai tu>v 
avhpwv tovtuv elvai, Andocid. de Myst. p. 20. [1. 1. ed. Reisk.J v. 
Valck. ad Hippol. 324. ad Herodot. p. 241. Brunck. ad Soph. 
CEd. C. 247. ad Eurip. Med. 231. Aristoph. Lys. 30, 31. 

For hia, through, by means of: &<jt kv aurw, ^ kycb kukHs enpaTTOv, 
kv tovto) vfids (7u)S,eaQai: Andocid. p. 79- [1« 13. ed. R.] 

On account of: 01 ipevyovTes kv rots /.ivaTijpiois , Andocid. p. 142. 
ob toIvvv ovhe rr\v tfrrav avrijv kv oibevl tuiv Trap' kjxov yeyovvlav 
evprjerere rrj noXet, Demosth. de Cor. p. 308. [I. 7. ed. R.] 

6 'Ev may be translated ivith also when See Classical Journal, Loci quidam Luci- 

its case signifies the instrument : b~ie\av- ani etnendati atque explanati a J. Seager, 

verai dia/jLireph 6/xov roiis pripovs eKarepovs A.B. Bicknor W allies in Cora. Monum. 

iv pecrayKiiku), Plut. in Philopcem. p. 657. rectore. iv pax^'ipy avoXovvrat, Matth. 

1.15. opvidaiv aireppo\6yciiv awBpofj.)]v iv xxvi, 52. irard£op.ev iv pax^P'i '■> Luke 

Ai0<p Ka\ ip6(pifi <rvv8ia.Tapd£<=iv, Id. in De- xxii, 49. In the following passage it is 

metr. p. 1652. 1. 6. rbv 'Epprjv KeXevvov, used as in that of Xen. <ru p\v iirtpxv 

— KaOiKSfievov iv rfj fidfidy, veaviav ev6vs fxol iv pop<paiq, iced iv 56part, Kal iv 6<bpa- 

KtxXbv a.irepyd<ra.(r8<u avrov : Lucian, Dial, kl : Josephus Antiq. vi. c. 9. p. 250. ed, 

Plut. et Protesil. p. 428. ed. Amst. 1743. Huds.— J. S. 

Viger. 2 G 



234 'Err.'. [CHAP. IX. § iv. 

For, as: Xufie~iv kv <j>tpvij KotXijv Ivplav, Polyb. E. L. $2. bc- 
yeoBai kv TrapaKaradi'iKr) v raXavra, Id. Exc. Peir. p. 131. 

Out of: eirivov kv Keporiiois Trorripiots, Xen. Anab. vi. p. 370. 
kv apyvpy */ xP va <i> Tiveiv, Lucian, de Merc. cond. [485. e. ed. Salm.] 
v. Cup. Obs. ii, 8. et Burm. ad Phajdr. Fab. 25. From : rovd' 
vfias bia (ipa\kwv j3ovXo/jai bibc'i^ai, ov% ws ov /je/uadriKO-as Kal k v 
rols kv upxrj eiprifxh'ois, aXX' iVa, &c. Demostb. adv. Leochar. p. 1098. 
[I. 18. ed. R.] 

'Ei> yevet is, related, of kin : Eurip. Ale. 903. Sopb. Qui. R. 1016. 
ol kv yevei, kinsmen, relations. 

'Ev o'lvit), over wine, over the bottle: v. Valck. ad Callim. Fragm. 
p. 15. 262. 

'Ev eavTy (or perbaps more properly kv eavrov) elvai, to be in one's 
senses: v. Abresch. ad iEsch. p. 173. seq. Dorv. ad Cbar. p. 409. 
(508. ed. Batav.) Brunck. ad Soph. Phil. 950. kuittiv ovk kv avrov, 
Aristoph. Vesp. 642. With the genitive o"ikg> is understood. See Cli. 
v. § v. R. 9. and note c p. 80. 

In composition kv signifies, permanence or commorancy ; as in 
kfXfxeveiv Tciis airovbais, Xen. Ages, i, 11. tous bUais, Plat. Crit. 
c. 12. rols opKois, Lys. p. S70. to'is tottois, Demostb. p. l65. [1. 1. 
ed. R.] kyoiK€~iv kv xaip^, Xen. CEc. iv, 13. eyyeios. — 2. into ; 
as in k/mfiaiveiv els rijv daXaaaav, Lys. p. 11 6. kvTpifieiv, Xen. 
(Ec. x, 2. ky^keiv, kfxflaXXeiv, kfiirtTrreiv : kvrera/ikvos els to epyov, 
Xen. CEc xxi, 9« k/j.j3i(3d$eiv els rrjv bucatocrvvrjv riva, Id. ib. xiv, 
4. — 3. suitableness , conformity ; correspondence or coincidence; as 
in evbiKos, ewofxos, efifxerpos, kfXfxy'ivia. — 4. obligation ; as in evopicos, 
Polyb. vi, 47. — 5. participation or possession ; as in efKppwv, e/xfxta- 
60s, evre^vos, evoucos, efxneipos. — 6. It has the same signification as 
with its case uncompounded : e. g. evri/j.os, kvvirvtov, kvvoe'iv, ev- 
bo&s, kvaywvios, evbrj/xe'tv, kvobws. — J. It has a signification of abate- 
ment or diminution ; as in kvbibovai, v. Foes. CEcon. Hipp, evwfiov : 
cf. Casaub. ad Athen. Deipn. p. 60. eyKtppos, kfnropfvpos, eyicXwpos, 
e/uniKpos. — 8. It signifies similitude; as in evdijpos. On this signi- 
fication and that in No. 5, see Interpp. ad Eurip. Troad. 524. 
Abresch. ad iEsch. p. 314. et in corrigend. p. 659. — 9- It often 
indicates that something is done in a certain place: ywplov knirribes 
kvarparonebeveaQai'. v. Wessel. ad Herodot. p. 538. Abresch. Diluc. 
Thuc. p. 256. 

It is to be remarked besides, that verbs compounded with kv are 
sometimes joined with a genitive case ; as, kfifiarevetv narpibos, Soph. 
(Ed. R. 825. v. Brunck. The reason of this is that kv has the force 
of evbov. On kv in composition see Cattier. Gazophyl. p. 76. 

SECTION IV. — On the preposition km. 

Rule I. (I. II.) 'Enl is put before genitives signifying power, 
dignity, charge, office, employment ; as, ol eir d£t«o-ews and kfyvalas, 
persons in magistracies, or high stations ; krr\ tu>v avopprjrtov, a pri- 
vate secretary ; ol kirl t&v elaaywyiixwv kui k^ayiayiyanv, superin- 



Rule l — 5.] 'Etti. 235 

tendents of imports and exports, or of customs ; eit\ riLv ItthttoXwi', 
a secretary ; ol enl twv tKerripibiv or 'iketikwi', les Maitres des Re- 
quetes ; and the like. Sometimes wv, or reray/zeros, is added; and 
in Acts Ap. viii, 27- %v precedes the preposition. 

II. (III.) It is used in speaking of equal distribution of numbers; 
as, eVt rpiwv, or reaaapm', TUTTtodat, three and three, or four and four ; 
i(f evbs, one by one ; [eirl Teaoapwv ra^afieyoi rets vavs,~\ Thuc. ii, 90. 
In the same sense Kara fxlav. [See § v. R. 8.] 

III. (IV.) In a tactical use, en-l tpaXayyos ayeiv, TrpoajoaXXfiv, &c. 
is (paXayyrjbbv, or eirl Keptos, or Kara Kepas, to advance or attack ivith 
both wings extended or opened ; Ibovres Kara ptiuv enl tceptus TrapuTrXe- 
ovras, with the wing extended or opened: Thuc. ii, £)0. c Bdflos, 
the depth, i. e. the middle body as it were of the phalanx/ is said eVt 
TCTTapwv or eirl otCTw or e7rt wXewvwv, &C. TraparaTreadai or iroieiaBai, 
to be formed with four, eight, or more, together in each rank [file]. 
Hence v7rep<paXayy$v is to surround the enemy by opening both 
wings; vTrepKepyv, to surround only one wing of the enemy ; e but e7rt 
fxeTU)7rov, or Kara /aeTwiroi' or vpoatoirov, is with the front of the army 
opened or extended: v. Bud. p. 373. 631. 

IV. (V.) With a genitive of a reciprocal pronoun, eirl is put for 
bid : £<p' eavrov, of himself, or spontaneously ; aWois k<p eavrwv /3ou- 
Xevofxevois, at their own discretion, without the interference or par- 
ticipation of any one else : Dion. Hal. v. p. 324. 1. 33/ ovbev e/ue 
bel. en-' e/uavrov Xeyeiv, through myself: Id. in Exc. ware avras 
if' eavrwv avrojxdrws irpoawXeovoas opaadai, of themselves : Xiphil. 
in Sever. But at other times e<p' eavrov is apart, separately, by him- 
self, to himself, at home, or within his own bounds, &c. Qapwvevs 
tovs dvQpwnovs arvvi'jyaye irpwrov es KOivbv, avropabas rewS'Kal ecp eavrwv 
eKaarore oiKovvras : Pans. Cor. p. 112. kcu ILwKpdrns p.ev /cat Ylv- 
dayopas ovb' avrovs tovs Xoyovs, ev 61 s e8wv, avveypa\pav, d\\' k<f 
avrwv efiXoaofow : to themselves, for themselves : Aristid. pro Quat. 
p. 495. el fiev olv e<j>' avrwv biereXeaav ovres, in their own territories, 
within their own bounds: Zosim. i. speaking of the Atheniaus and 
Lacedaemonians ; vvktos yevofievrjs, ecf eavrwv eyevero ra arparoTreha, 
retired to their own respective quarters or camps: Id. iv. A city 
which is independent is said elvat or iceladai e<j>' eavrfjs. 'E<j> eavrov 
is said also of what one has peculiar or apart : elyov yap ical olrot 
e(f eavrwv fiuvnv 'Yinrofxa^ov, Herodot. Calliop. c. 37- v. Valck. ad 
Herodot. p. 634. 

V. (VI.) It is used with its case adverbially : err dbeias, securely, 

* 'As Uu el eKeye, p.iav KaraKoXovdomav e In Polybius the simple verb Kepav is, 

t»7 erepq- tovto yhp t£> eirl itepws KaAei: to open or extend the line of battle beyond 

Schol. p. 357. ed. Bekk. — J. S. the wing of the enemy : xvii, 20. — J. S. 

d The depth of a battalion is its extent / 'O XapiSv/xos, Sia^as els tV XsppSvn- 
from front to rear : it is determined, there- aov £<p' avrov, of himself, without the as- 
fore, by the number of ranks, or by the sistance of the Athenians, which he had 
number of men in each file : as the width requested : Demosth. in Aristocr. p. C72o 
is by the number of files, or by tbe num- I. 15. ed. Reisk.— J. S. 
ber of men in each rank. — J. S. 



936 'En-/. [Chap. ix. § iv. 

with impunity ; iri uXyjddas, truly, sincerely, in truth : Demostb. 
pro ('or. p. 315. Acts Ap. iv, 27 '• Luke iv, 25. xxii, 59. Mark 
xii, 32. ef' eKaar^s, (yfiepus viz.) daily, every day ; ra Kvpiwrura 
kni KecpnXaicjv kpG>, generally, summarily : Dion. Hal. ii. p. 124. 
1. 6". en ordjxaTos, nominalely, by name: Julian, Misopog. non longe 
ab init. ttoXXukis npbs k/jie bielyei knt tj-^oXfjs, at leisure: iEsch. 
c. Ctes. p. 301. 

For among, or beyond, (pree,) v. Aristid. Panath. 1. i. p. l6S. [This 
sense is very questionable.] 

VI. (VII.) 'Etc' avafx(pi<jfit)Ti]TOV enrobeiietos rfjv btafioXrjv anotyvyelv 
is, upon incontestable proof or evidence ; iriareis bobs km Qewv is, by 
calling upon the gods to witness: Dion. Halic. v. p. 299» !• 30. el 
fxkv owe vxia^vovvrai vyTiv ol narpiKiot, koi iriarets fiovXovTat bovvat ras 
km deu>v, Sti, &c. Id. X. p. 641. 1. 20. 

VII. (VIII.) But in km twv lepQv d/iouat, km is stir, upon: ret km 
twv iepwv (TvvofxoXoyrjOevTa to'is TrarpiKiois -trpos robs brjfiOrtKobs, Dion. 
Hal. xi. p. 728. I. 35. lepa Ovvavres, wfioaav km twv kfiirvpwv : Id. iii. 
p. 154. 1. 27- s opKia. re/movres, avroi re irpwrot aruvres em twv rofiiwv, 
ojfiocrav, &e. Dion. Hal. v. init. having immolated victims for the 
purpose, they solemnly swore, standing over them (or over the 
entrails) : v. Stanl. ad .ZEscli. Eum. 486. 

VIII. (IX.) 'Em often governs a genitive even when it signifies 
motion ; as, enl rfjs \wpr\s flabigeiv, frequently in Herodot. towards 
or through the country; em rov arparonebov KaTaflavn, into the 
camp: Dion. Hal. i. .p. 45. em rfjs yT]s, to the ground: Zosim. iv. 
em QpyKTjs exw.oet, to Thrace: Id. ib. cf. John vi, 21. But in this 
sense poets usually employ a dative ; as, em vavalv eXavveiv. 

With a genitive of nouns either proper or appellative, it signifies 
time: (v. Valck. ad Theoer. x. id. p. 115.) em Aape/ov rov 'Y<r- 
ra<77reos, Kac EkpEpio rov Aape/ov, kcu 'Apra£ep£ew rov Zep£ew, in the 
reign of Darius, &c. Herodot. Er. c. 98. e7rt ap^ovros 'Adijvaiois 
Ntcoorparov, in the archonship of Nico stratus : Arr. Exp. Al. ii, 11. 
b Neorwp lirrnKwraros i\v, ws Xkyerat, twv kf' avrov : of the men of 
his time: Aristid. pro Quat. p. 402. km rov aov fiiav, in your time 
or life: Plat, in Phaedr. p. 242. 1. 10. em twv heinvuv, in the time 
of supper: Diod. S. iv, 3. km fitds fipepas, in one day: Lucian, 
Dial. Crat. et Diog. eV elprjvrjs, in time of peace : Horn. Bceot. 304. 
[i. e. II. & 797.] 

With a genitive it signifies also, before, coram ; as, e7rt 7r6XXwv : 
v. Valck. ad Eurip. Hippol. 213. Hence of a judge or umpire before 
whom a matter is tried or discussed : km rov kolvov avvecpiov twv 
'YLXXr]vwv, Diod. S. xi, 55. 

It is put for iv : vxprjXwv b' km vawy redeiKe, Eurip. El. 6. With 
a genitive of regions or countries it signifies, upon the bounds of: 

s Both Viger and Hoogeveen translate big victims or sacrifices. This sense it 
€7ri tS>v ifjLirvpwv, super focis : but Suidas evidently has in Sophocles, zi>8vs Se Set- 
interprets to. Zjxitvpa, to Kouofieva lepe?a, oas, i(i-nvpuv eyev6/xr)V Bw/JLo?<ri ■KO.fMpXiii- 
and Hesychius toj Kai6fj.eva Upa } the burn- roiffiv, Antig. 1005. — J. S. 



Rule 6—10.] 'Enl. 237 

Aenpeov — Kelfievov ent rfjs AaicwvtKjjs Kai rr/s 'HXelas, Thuc. v, 34. 
ra enl QpaKrjs, the towns on the confines of Thrace, upon the shores 
of the iEgean sea : v. Gail, Obss. Gramni. p. 31. seq. 

IX. (X.) With a dative case, enl signifies, in the power of: tujv 
ovtwv to. fxey eariv ef' iifjuv, ra & ovk e<tf ijfj.1v : Epict. C. 1. t - 7rt to'is 
fiapjjapots yeviadai tt/v noXivf Zosim. v. yu>) e7rl jxavreffiv e'irjs, 
Xen. Cyrop. i. p. 25. 1. 32. elpl be enl tu> fiovXop.evw, at the 
mercy of every one : Plat. Gorg. p. 508. 'I. 29. In this sense it is 
elegantly joined with noielv : eav c' enl rw bijfjKp noirjvwrri rrjv npoal- 
peaiv, but if they put the choice in the power of the people: Dion. 
Hal. iv. p. 216. 1. 22. niivra to. koivo. en ifxol nenoiyjKaai fxovw, Id. 
viii. p. 506. 1. 22. ov jujjv oye hypos e<f eavru tyjv alpeaiv enoirjnev, 
assumed to themselves: Id. ii. p. lip. But oaov y enl KXeoicparet, 
is, as far as concerns Cleocrates: iEschin. Ep. v. 70 enl tovtois 
elvat, as far as they are concerned: see Markland. ad Lys. p. 482. 
ed. Reisk. And it also denotes superintendence ; over: napaboQevTes 
rw enl Tbj opvy/xart, Dinarch. adv. Demosth. p. 100. 1. 10. 

X. (XI.) It is used in expressing terms or conditions: cmovbas 
i'jyn/iiev enl prjro'is, upon certain and definite conditions: Andocid. 
26", l6. enl pr\T0~is Tiai Kai buopta/xevois enl to Kivbvvevfxa yuipeiv, Dion. 
Hal. x. p. 641. 1. 18. v. Theocr. xxii, 74. Ind. Demosth. Reisk. 
et H. Vales. Emend, iv. c. 3. The following are examples of enl 
thus used in various constructions : ol be etpanav anobwoeiv, e<p' w 
ju?) Katciv tcis K&fxas : on condition that he would not burn the vil- 
lages : Xen. Anab. iv. KaTanpobovTOS tcis re yeipvpas, Kai T&XXa twv 
Aiyvnrtwv npayfiaTa, erf w yeveodcti vnapyos AlyvnTOV, on condition 
of being appointed, &c. Photius Exc. Ctes. v. Aristoph. Pint. 
1142.(1141.) and with re: avrw — anooTaXrjoeoQai — fivas e'lKoai — , 
i<p' to re (iorjOijaetv ro7s 'A/jQiaaevetv, iEsch. c. Ctes. 505. r/pd)Ta enl 
tLgiv av ^v/jfiay^os yevoiro ; 6 be aneKpivaTO, e<f w 7e tovs noXhas eXev- 
Oepovs Kai avTovoftovs eqv: Xen. Hist. Gr. iii. enl tovtois eft) 
XapieloOai tcis avanavXas rwv noXe/J.d>v, k(f> §5 re ftrjbev en napatavelv 
aiiTovs, Kai enl t£, &c. Dion. Hal. x. p. f545. 1. 15. aKovaare vvv, e<p' 
ols av nore biKaiois KaTaXvcrwfxai tov noXefiov, on what terms — , Id. iii. 
p. 195. 1. l6. Ti}v. elpfjvrjv oTeptyvoiv, c^>' ols av nore biKaiois avTrjs 
tvxuhti; on whatsoever terms, &c lb. v. Andoc. 25. 1. noXXaKts 6 
Aapelos elnev, ovk av edeXijaai \a/3etJ> eKarov Ba/3u\wras enl tu> /u?) 
Zwnvpov e-^eiv oXoKXrjpov : on the terms or condition of not having, 
&C. Plut. Apophth. Atoyevrjv neldet — a.(pievai to. ywpia enl toXcivtois 
nevrijKovra Kai haTov, for a hundred and fifty talents: Paus. in 
Cor. p. 100. navTodev tovs enl Xoyois boKi/MorctTOVs en\ avvTa^eaiv 
ovk evKaTa<ppovriTois koXQv, at no contemptible appointments or sala- 
ries : Herodian i, 2. Kaivas yjbovas enl fxeyiaTois fiiaQo'is eQijpaTO, 
with offers of very great rewards: Id. i, 3. rows tyvyabas be avTwv 
KaTievai e7rl ro7s i]p,laeai twv nore ovriav, ore etpvyov, on the terms of 
having half what they possessed when they were banished: Arr. Exp. 
Al. ii, l. 

h See Thuc. iii. g. 12. p. 396. ed. Bekk. and note s p. 228.— J. S. 



238 'En*. [Chap. ix. § iv. 

XI. (XII.) It is used in phrases importing good or bad fortune, 
advantage or disadvantage, and the like ; as, en ayaQjj, or alma, 
Tvxy, with good fortune ; may fortune prosper it ! (hut in this phrase 
the preposition is sometimes omitted : ayadrj Tvyji f)ftels re lintels 
yeroifieOn, Xen. Cyrop. iv. p. 110. Tv^y ayadrj /carap^erw fya~tbpos, 
Plat, in Symp.) en ayaflots, or aitriou, olwvols : ivith favorable 
omens; enl rw atperipo) avutyepovTi ra biicata npatyvai, to, or with, 
their own advantage : Dion. Halic. vii. p. 435. ra efxtyavfj too avhpbs 
epya en' ovbevl XP^ ffr V yevofieva bielrjeoav, for no good: Id. viii. 
p. 544. 1. 34. But eV ayadols, without a substantive, is, with com- 
mendation, for praise : tnl rots fieXrioTOts avrutv ejxvr}fx6vevaev e£eni- 
TTjbes, with the highest eulogies : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 443. 

XII. (XIII.) 'Eti signifies after: enl tovtois, after these things, 
afterwards ; rjicet tis aXXos eV aXX<p, one after another ; na'ts e7r' 
avbpl, Kai avr)p enl 7caibl '. Synes. ep. iv. rr)v b' enl naaais Terayfjteurjv 
(avufioplav viz.) els Xc^os, 6 rwv anopwv (eire'f)(€p),the one ranked after 
all : Dion. Hal. iv. p. 223. 1. 6. enl Tract be KXavbia MapKeAAw, 
last of all : Plut. Romul. p. 27. 1. 33. ol enl naoi, the rearward: 
Xen. H. Gr. i. p. 432. 'AfiiiuKns ovkcti iiveayero fiXeneiv amos 
enl tvQXS tS Aavbajxibi, after that Dandamis had become blind: 
Lucian, Tox. [p. 88. c ed. Salmur. There is an obscure signification 
of terms or conditions ; and I think the passage referable to R. 10. 
(11.)] ttj enl ravTrjai, the following day: Herodot. Er. 12. See 
Hebr. ix, 17. Mark vi, 52." Also, besides, over and above, in 
addition : vnoaxbfievos a.be\(pi]v eavrov buaeiv, nal ^jprifiaTa en' avrrj : 
Time, ii, 101. napeflaXev a/ufipoaiav re, Kat en avrrj veicrap 
enoTtoe, Plato in Phaedr. p. 247. ml -npbs, enl tovtois, Aristoph. 
Plut. 1002. 

XIII. (XIV.) Also, on account of, because of: enl to7s yeyevrjfieiois 
XaXenGrs tyepeiv. e£e/3a\es oil , Apx~ lvov eic rrjs noXews enl npobooiq., 
Dinarch. in Demosth.- 7 bfx&v KaTeyivuirjKov enl rw fxeXXeiv neiQeadai, 
I thought you guilty of being about to, &c. Demosth. de Cor. 
enl rube, therefore: Arr. Exp. Al. i, 12. ii, 8. enl t$ yeXas, 
wherefore, on account of what? Aristoph. Av. 804. v. Plat. Soph. 
p. 105. 

Signifying the end or purpose : /j.r) levai enl -^wpav rr)v fiamXeus 
e7rl KaKa finbevl, Thuc. viii, 58. enl to~is toiovtols bxvyiiiiaai mi 
KaKO~is anaaav eneXnXvdws Tr)v olicovfxevr]V, Dinarch. c. Demosth. 
[p. 10. 1. 9. ed. Reisk.]* ov (pevyet to kukws aKovoai ko.1 elnetv enl rw 
fieXTiwv yeveoQai, Plut. de Profect. Virt. 

It has a peculiar signification of state, adjuncts, or circumstances, 



♦ Hoogeveen gives in\ this same sense J. S. 

in 67r' outoTs elprjKSras, Lys. Or. Funebr. 3 A6£av p.\v %x oVTas * w? o-vZpla, De- 

(p. 51. 1. 2. ed. Reisk.) so as to make mosth. adv. Phil. Epist. 155, 4. ed. R.— 

the words mean, who have spoken in J. S. 

their praise after their death : but Reiske, h In this passage of Dinarchus I take 

very properlv I think, interprets enl simply «rl to mean, with, accompanied by. See 

de. See H." Steph. Thes. i. 1212. f. and the context, and H. Steph, Thes. i. 1212. 

Time, ii, 34. p. 267. I. 1. ed. Bekk.— f. g.— J. S. 



Rule li— 17.] 'Eiri. 239 

in which it may be rendered by the participle having, or leaving : 
£rjv eirl TTcualv, to live having children; fevyeiv enl reicvois, to go 
into exile, leaving children behind; eirl natal veaviats biahoyois 
dveiravaaro, he died leaving sons, &c. Herodian iii. extrem. /3ao-t- 
Xeiav rows eirl btabo^ots natal TeXevn'iaavras, those of their emperors 
who may have died leaving children to succeed them: Id. iv. init. 
v. Horn. II. e, 154. Bergl. ad Alciphr. p. 18. seq. Hemst. ad Lucian. 
t. i. p. 355. seq. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 304. 

XIV. (XV.) 'Enl governs a dative of a person after whom another 
person/ or thing, is named ; or a dative of ovopa followed by a 
genitive of the person from whom the name is taken : 'AXe£,avbpeiav 
— rriv ex' 'AXe^dvbpo) KTioQeioav noXtv, Herodian iv. c. 8. en' 6v6/jcltl 
tov aylov Aa$dpov vabv ehelfxaro 'irepov, Zonaras. ckuXovv avrdf enl 
rw ovofian tov irarpos avTov Za^apiav, Luke i, 39- v « Esdr. iv, 63. 
Eccles. xlvii, 13. 1 Maccab. xiv, 43. Hence in the N. T. eV£ rw 
SvoficiTi fiov, in my name: v. Mark ix, 39- Luke ix, 48. 49- xxiv, 47. 
Acts Ap. v, 40. 

'Enl sometimes signifies the time at or in which any thing takes 
place or is done ; as, eVi tovtu, sur cela, sur or en ces entrefaites : 
v. John iv, 27. but enl roiirtp is sometimes, after this : ciXXa to 
enl tovto) anoiepivat, Plato Apol. 11. vvv bei^ara) enl rw efjoi vbart, 
in the time allowed me for speaking : (determined by the water in the 
clepsydra,) Demosth. de Cor. p. 333. I. 19- enetbrj be enl rots ypa/x- 
fiaoiv fiv, but when he came to speak about letters: Plato Phaedr. 
p. 274. 1. 44. Sometimes enl signifies, in the case or circumstances : 
tidvto enolrjo-e to teal enl Trj dvyarpt, he did the same as in the case of 
Ms daughter : Herodot. iii, 14. 

XV. (XVI.) 'Eirl notes particular condition or circumstances, in 
such phrases as, en abtjXta, at an uncertainty ; [see Rule 11. (12.)] 
vvv b' en' ab/)Xots ovat toIs ano tovtuv efjiavral yevrfaojievots, u/uisjs eirl 
Tip avvoiaeiv vp.lv, ectv npct^re tcivtci, neneloQat, Xeyetv aipovpat ° 
Demosth. Phil. i. [55, 3. ed. R. eV cibfiXots overt toIs — yevr)aop£vois is 
equivalent to kclitoi hbijXwv ovtwv twv — yevncrofJievwv, — .] 

XVI. (XVII.) In the mention of time, ent notes the totality of the 
portion of time signified by its case : e<p' n/m^pa, for a whole day ; 
ent fir)vl,for a whole month; eir' evtavTto,for a whole year. 

It signifies (especially in Thuc.) near or at : UepinoXiov alpovo-tv, 
o i\v eirl rw "AXtjki norapf : Thuc. iii, 99- p. 240. ?/ eirl AoKpols 
to'is 'Onovvrtois vTjtros, Id. ii, 32. 

XVII. (XVIII.) 'Enl sometimes signifies against : m avi)pnaaro a.v, 

1 'Avrvydvcp roivvv ovoiv viotv 4k 2rpa- Anab. vii, 7,23. compared with vii, 6, 13. 

tov'iki]S rrjs Kofyaiov yevofievoov, tov pXv, xpfifiara ovtoi fn\v %x ox)(riv * $ vjmv, De- 

iirl rade\(p £ {after his brother) Arj/irjTpi- mosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 405. 1. 10. ed. 

ov, rbv 8', €7rl Tip iraTpi, {after his father) Reisk. riyos evena. air\ws teal nop-iSi) 

4>i\iirirov d)v6(iaa , ev : Plut. in Demetr. reTv&cvfiivcas ovtws, & /3ov\erai Siairpd- 

p. 1630. 1. 6. 7. ed. H. St. — J. S. |ct<70ai, avWa^wfiev avTqi, /cat ravra ecp' 

m Upbs ravTa. KA.eW /cat iraXafidadio, rifuv Svto. ; and that too when his enier- 

Ka\ irav eir' £fj.ol TeKTaiviaQta : against prises are against ourselves, tend to our 

me: Aristoph. Ach. 660. iylb ex<*> 7ra pa own detriment: Demosth. c. Aristocr. 

cod iirl toTs orpcmctfTais oiiSif, Xen. p. C65. 1. 15. ed. Reisk. Seealso p.723. 



2-10 'Eth. [Chap.'ix. § iv. 

eV civrjJ Ti ftepiov ^ovUivtoh'. Tiberius thirsting for his blood : from 
<j>ori}v, to be eager for slaughter : Philo de Legat. ad Caium p. 774. 
1. 32. eneipov be airaynpevoyros, nal raXavra enarov eir t KrjpuZai'TOS 
avT<Z: and having proclaimed a reward of a hundred talents to any 
one who should kill him: Pint, in Pomp. p. 636." 

XVIII. (XIX.) With an accusative case e-7rt is used whenever 
motion to is signified ; and in the sense of as far as, or quite to ; 
and also against ; as, eireipdro tovs 'Adnvaiovs r>ys eV avrbv opyijs 
irapaXveiv, Time, ii, 65. 

More seldom in the signification of rest ; as, KuQl$eadai en-t ti)v ea- 
riav, Time, \.° 

XIX. (XX.) With a reciprocal pronoun and iroielaQat it signifies 
to get into one's power ; as, ti]v ttuXlv e(f eavrbv iroiftoaadai. Some- 
times the verb governs the reciprocal pronoun, and eirl the accusative 
of what is gotten or attained ; as, iroirjo-apevos re avrbv eV ktyvo'iav , 
Herodian i. c. 9 

XX. (XXI.) KXtVetv, ffrpecpeiv, kiriarpefyeiv, irepioiryv, eirl bvpv, is to 
turn to the right, because the spear was held in the right hand : 
e<t>' })viav and eV aairiba, to the left, the left hand holding the reins 
and the shield : eiriorpeibas eirl bopv, /cat to. Kevrpa irpoo-fiaXtov rols 
'tirnois, els irXayiovs efjfiaXXei: Dion. Halic. iii. p. 190. 1. 13. i\oav 
be Kirycreis, — ca0' 'lttttov fxev, nXiueis £(f ipiav, koX ttuXlv eirl bopv : 
Polyb. 

XXI. (XXII.) 'Eirl iroba avaya$,eoQai, and avaywpe'iv, is, to give 
ground, to retreat : a.XX' enl iroba ave-^aiovro, iraiovres cat iraibfie- 
vol'. Xen. Cyrop. vii. p. 178. eirl iroba ave^wprjaav fiaXXofxevoi, Id. 
Anab. v. p. 349- fxaXa ineSofievot, uveyjoprjoav eirl iroba'. Id. H. 
Gr. ii. p. 477. 

'Eirl moreover signifies end or purpose : ijkio eV avra ravra, Plato 
Theag. p. 122/ 

To eirl is, as to what regards, as far as concerns : rovtr efi evrv- 
X o"ire, Eurip. Iph. A. 1557- v. Hec. 514. Ale. 666. (669.) Valck. ad 
Herodot. p. 342. 

'E<£' era rerayjuerot, ranked side by side, without any others 
behind : Hesych. in 6yp.os. 

1. 4. Or ip.o\ is tbe true reading in amount of cost or expense: rhv irpo?ica 

Aristoph. Av. 543. See Classicaljournal, 6<pei\eiv eV ivvea o/3o\oh, at the rate of 

to!, ii. No. 4. p. 710. and the note on nine oboli a month for each mina: De- 

Aristoph. Av. 543. in p. 166. of Bekker's mosth. in Aphob. i. p. 818. 1. 29. ed. 

edit, printed for Mr. Priestley, 1826. — Reisk. v. p. 820. 1. 21. Hence figu- 

J. S. ratively, %v (elpiivTiv viz.) — SeSojKO fir) 

n Add, that iirl with a dative signifies \e\ri8a/jiei>, &<ntep ol 5avei£6p.evoi, iirl 

in, or at: t)K7]k6v yap, us 'AQ-nvaioi irore ir6\\a> (underst. t6kw~) &yovrss, Deraosth. 

SiKaffoieu 67rl rais olniaiffi ras Sitcas : Aris- de Fals. Leg. 372, 1. at a great sacrifice, 

toph. Vesp. 801. also to: iirl rovrcp to our great loss and detriment : see 303, 

ovTca irape(XKevaa-p.4vos rjei, &crre, &c. Xe- 1. 13, 20. 22. ed. Reisk. — J. S. 
noph. Mem.i, 3, 5. v! Ernest, ad Xen. ° KdQi£' iwl Kcinrrjv, to or at the oar: 

Mem. iii, 2, 3. Also the instrument ; or Aristoph. Ran. 197. i'£» eirl Kcinrvv, upon 

the means ; or the manner ; with: oarea the oar (by a wilful mistake of the order :) 

\evna. &obs SoXiy iirl t4x v V evO€riaas ib. 199. — J. S. 

«aT60ij/c6, Hesiod, Theog. 540. It is used p 'Eirl rl irdpeare Sevpo ; Aristoph. Lys. 

in specifying the rale of interest, or 1101. — J. S. 



Rule 18—21.] *Ewf. 241 

It is used in denoting duration of time : ebyovv rr)t' yrjv em bvo 
f}/j€pas, for two days : Q Thuc. ii, c. 35. fiuetov yaXa mveru) em 
TeauapaKovra ff.fiepas, Hippocr. de Nat. Mul. p. 568. cf. Acts Ap. 
xiii, 31. xvii, 2. xviii, 20. xix, 10. Luke iv, 25. e(j> r/fiepav yap e/c 
rrjs avta iroXews e^pwvTo (o~lra> viz.) for each day as it came, for the 
present day only, and no more : Thuc. iv, 69. en-2 -^povov, for some 
time, for a while: Horn. II. (3, 299- Luke xviii, 4. ef' oaov, so long 
us. [In the passage of Thuc. i, 4. k<f oaov i]bvvaro seems to mean, 
as far as he was able; p. 9. 1. 2. ed. Bekk.] and with -^porov, e<f 
oaov xpovov, Galat. iv, 1. Rom. vii, 1. 1 Cor. vii, 39« em m>Xv,for 
a long time ; en oXlyov uvrtay^ov-es, for a little while : Herodian iii, 
7- But inl iroXv signifies very much in Epict. and sometimes also 
vehemently, sharply ; and generally, summarily ; as, ws be curXws 
eiVeic, kcm pr} Kaff euaarov uXX 1 ws em tto\v : Isocr. Paneg. p. 421. 
Like km tto\v is km f*eya, vehemently ." Kareaeladi) to rei^os em fikya, 
Arr. de Exp. Al. ii, 33. [perhaps, to a considerable extent.'] See also 
c. 33. km irXeov, further : em irXeov be ovk ata'iKoa, Plato Phsedr. 
p. 261. (enl nXeov, ob ampliorem fructum: Aristot. Poiit. viii, 5, 20. 
em jjiKphr, it). 31. Reizius.) irepl {.lev ovv rijs Aaicebaifwviwv TroXireias 
em Toaovrov elpt'jadoj, so far : Aristot. de Rep. ii, Q/ 

In composition km signifies — 1. hostility, against ; as in kmrpkyeiv 
y^iopav, Polyb. iii, 6Q. kmtpepetv rivl iroXejiov, Id. xiii, 18. kmrei-^i- 
S.eiv, Demosth. see Reiske's ind. kiroiicobo{ie~u>, Polyb. ii, 46. kmp- 
prjTos, of bad name or character ; q. d. spoken against. — 2. succession, 
subsequence; as in kniyovot, Polyb. v, 65. Imyiyvofxevm, descend- 
ants, posterity : Demosth. p. 689- [1. 16. ed. Reisk.] Plat.Phaedr. 
p. 245. 1. 5. ol kmyiyvojxevoi tovtui aofioral, who succeeded him: 
Herodo!. Eut. c. 49. rov kmyiyvofxevov depovs, the following summer : 
Thuc. iv. init. rfj emyiyvojxhrj h^pa, the following day: Id. iii, 
75. ImirXeeiv, Poiyb. i, 50. (paXayiZ, eirciXXijXos, Id. ii, 69- tf. em- 
yewrjuaTiKov in Ciav. Cicer. Ern.~— 3. approach, accession, to; as in 
emarpefeadai els -^uipas, Xen. CEc. iv, 13. eirepyeo-Qai km tijv fiovXtjv, 
Polyb. Exc. Leg. 65. emfotT^v rtvl, Ml. V. H. iii, 18. — 4. addition 
or adjection, over and above ; as in kmbtbovat, Horn. II. t, 148. £m~ 
perpelv, Polyb. iii, 119. kmayyeiv, Xen. (Ec. xi, 13. eTrkrjjroe 
tpiXoi, Id. Ages, i, 36. em>l-apupTave).v, Demosth. p. 1215, 25. [not 
there, in Reiske's edition, but knelaixaprriTeov is in Demosth. in 
Androt. p. 5^5, 10. ed. Reisk.] kmovv/ula, emicptT))s, Polyb. iv, 3. 
5. motion to a place, to, into ; as in kmareXXeiv irpos riva, iElian 
xiv, 1. kmaicrjvovv em Ttjv oiKiav, Polyb. iv, 18. enciyeiv, kmnefi- 
ireiv, embr}/jieh>. — -6. elevation or ascent, up, upon; as in emfiaivetv . 
em -dv 'imrov, JLschin. Dial, i, 4. v. Dorv. ad Char. p. 172. 443. 

« But in the following passage £n\ Svo r Add eVi tSkov, at interest : davettrd- 

-r)fj.4pas is, at two days' notice ; appointing fjavos lya apyipiov izapb. XatpeSrifiov toS 

the time to be after two days: exetevev avafpAvarlov wivreKaiSena /ivas eirlrSicov, 

zlo-ayy4\Aeiu fxe, kcu rovs irpvTaveis irpo- $>s erv% ev & v € '*' 2r)CT(^, eiroydoov : De^ 

ypdcpeiv avrcp t^v Kpicriv enl fivo rifiipas, roosth. adv. Polycl. 1212, 1. ed. Reisk, 

us adiKovvTi, &c. Demosth. adv. Euerg. at eight oboli of monthly interest for each 

et Mnesib. p. 1151. 1. 29. ed. Reisk. — mina: i. e. according to our way of reck» 

J. S. oning, at sixteen per cent.-~J. S. 

Viger. 2 H 



242 Kara. [ClIAP. IX. § 5. 

e-n-nroXaieiu, Xen. CEc. xvi, 14. — 7. abode or commorancy ; as in 
eiriyetos, ein-^opios. — 8. the efficient cause ; as in i-mdavuTos, km^iijuos, 
Xen. Mem. i, 2, 57. kiri^api, Id. Hier. ix, 4. — 9- liable, subject, 
exposed; as in eni<]>6ovos, Xen. Symp. iii, 9. eirairios, enibtnos, 
Demosth. p. 1074, 1. [ed. Reisk.] eniKtvbvvos, Polyb. x, 13. — 10. 
aptitude, fitness, suitableness; as in enlyafjios, Demosth. 1009, 4. 
[1009, 14. eel. R.] enlicatpos, Id. 234, 14. [ed. R.] — 11. coercion, 
restraint; as in enk-xeiv. — 12. continuance or duration of lime ; as 
in e(pr)fxepios, continuing for one day only; ktyriiiepa, ephemeral ani- 
mals ; enireios, Polyb. vi, 43. Demosth. p. 649, 16. — 13. vicinity, 
juxtaposition ; as in e7rt6a\aW<a \wpia, Thuc. iii, 7« etyehpos. — 14. 
distribution ; as in kinbeKaros, Demosth. p. 1074, 24. knoyboos, Id. 
1212, 2. (see p. 30. n°. 10.) — 15. superintendence, charge, admi- 
nistration ; as in enioKoiros It). It intends or augments, as in embi- 

hovai, kiriopKeiv, eirctKoveiv, eiwroQeiv : Rom. i, 1 1 . On enl in compo- 
sition see Cattier. Gazoph. p. 77. 



SECTION V. — ON THE PREPOSITIONS Kara, fX€Ta, and itvp. 

Rule I. Kara, which is construed only with a genitive and ac- 
cusative, has, with a genitive, the following senses : at, in the signi- 
fication of direction or collineation ; as, rwv rofcvrwv es auifiara 
emfir/Kn K "« TroppuQev, <Ls Kara okottov (as at a mark) rolevovTtov '. 
Herodian vi. c. 7. § 19. at, in signification of position or situation; 
as, Iva Kara vwrov yevofxevot tCjv i 7roXe/j.ia)v, eniwcriv avrols, at their 
backs, behind them : Dion. Hal. iii. p. l65. I. 14. on, in specification 
of a particular part ; as, Kara Koppyjs valeiv, — Kara v&tov tp.ive.iv 
Twa, 

It notes the subject of appellation or denomination: Ka0' (Sv 
Kelrat to. oi'd/xara, to. Trepl rt)v uvvrjdeiav oh Terptfifxeva, Clem. Al. 
Pzedag. ii, 6. 

It signifies against, in the signification of harm, or hostility ; as, 
Kara Tiros elireiv raXrjOes, Dinarch. Or. p. 6. hoyfxa elafepeiv Kara 
ttjs v/uerepas voXews, Msch. c. Ctes. p. 507. [}• 8. ed. R.] v. De- 
mosth. adv. Aristocr. p. 646. [1. 4. ed. R.] Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 
233. [1. 14. ed. R.] Dinarch. p. 71. [1. 5. ed. R.] of, concerning ; 
noting the subject: ttoXvs 'iiraivos j)v /cam rrjs fifxerepas iroXevs, iEsch. 
c. Ctes. p. 515. [1. 16. ed. R.] o kcu fieyiarov eon na0' vfiwv 
kyKufiiov, Demosth. Phi!, ii. p. 68. [I. 2. ed. R.] — 3. down, from ; 
firj be rar' OvXiipTroio Kapyvwv, II. /3, l67- by, along, through: Kara 
TTjs tcXifiaKos Kara$alveiv, Lys. de Eratostb. caed. p. 13. [1. 3. ed. R.] 
Ka0' 8Xt)s ttjs 'lovbaias, Acts Ap. ix, 31/ during, for, through : ohbe 
e7r' oXiyov yjpovov, uXXa — Ka7a Travros tov altivos aeifivrjarov tcaraXeiipei 
toIs kinyiyvonevois tijv KpLaiv, Lycurg. adv. Leocr. p. 140. [1. 8. ed. 
R.] by, in swearing : kniridevai tcigtiv Kara rwv lepwv, Isaeus de 
Apollod. Her. p. 169, 170. [ed. R.] Kara -we iep&v reXe/wv Ifxpaat, 
Andocid. p. 48. [1. 8. ed. R.] avdpu)7rot Kara rov peiiov.os ojivhovai, 

5 UXslZdv Se Karct. xOovls &p/u.evos efy, Hesiod, Op. et D. ii, 235. — J. S. 



RULE 1—4.] Kara. 243 

Hebr. vi, 6. See Reiske's ind. to Demosth. [in Kara, p. 433. 1. 5.] e 
Sosicrates ap. Schol. Aristoph. ad Av. 521. M An expression belong- 
ing to this class is, ev-^eadai deo'is mf}' eicar6fi(3qs, v to vow a hecatomb 
to the gods: v. Huschk. in Anal. p. 133. under, beneath: bvvai 
Kara tTjs yijs, Plato Phaed. c. 60, 6\. w 

II. As to Kara with an accusative, it is to be observed, first, that it 
is very often understood ; as in to y eXu^iaruy, at thejeast ; atrivv 
Tpoirov, like food: Plat. Phsedr. p. 241. I. 30. evbalfju/v, u> 2wKpares, 
ardphtTTos el, to. ye roiavra, as to such matters : Lucian, Dial. Mort. 
t. iv. p. 44. ro jxeaov rfjs rifxepas, in the middle of the day : Theophr. 
v. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 58. 

III. In philosophical writings chiefly, things which exist only in 
appearance, as the rainbow, are called ra tear e/jifadiv : those which 
have a real and substantial existence, ra KafJ viroa-raffiv. 

Ka7a is, as, according to, after : levai Kara tovs aXXovs, in the 
same way : Herodot. ix, 53. according to, in respect of, on account 
of, in signification of the cause: vojxiSiovTes rijv llpumav 'AOrjva/W, 
Kara to vnrjKoov, elvai : Thuc. iv, 99' k(it avro tovto ovk ayaaat 
YlwXov, in, in regard to: Plat. Gorg. p. 482. v. Matth. xix, 3. and 
Kvpk. Obs. sac. ad Y. ~c." on account of , in signification of the end, 
purpose, or object : atyiZflvrai be kotcl deav eni tovtovs ttoXXoi t(Lv 
Zeriov, Dion. Hal. viii. p. 482. 1. 27. 01 be £evoi koi 6 aXXos oyXos 
Kara dear riKev, Time, vi, 31. tuiv e/jiropwr KarJ' laropiav 1) y_peiav 
elarcKpiKvovjuevbjv : Aristid. Panath. fades be tcara ti ; Aristoph. 
Nub. 238. [Answ. fiovXofxevos /xadelv Xeyeiv.] Kara xparos (as avh 
uparos) [see § i. R. 3.] is, by force, violently, imperiously, with a high 
hand: ical ouoi iLiKeXwv kcitcc icparos ap^opevoi vwo HvpaKOvaiwv, Thuc. 
iii. See Plut. Apophth. p. 17<5. In the same sense Kara to KpaTepbv, 
powerfully, mightily : Acts xix, 20. 

IV. It signifies, towards, over against, facing ; as, KelaOai kcit 
cti'dToXas. 

Also, by, or every : Kara noXets Ka< Kara Kw/xas. Kaf avhpa. Kara 
Ke<paXf]v. eicaarovs Kara awfxa, individually : iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 405. 
Kara fxfjva, every month : Kar' 7jfinp, Soph. Phil. 798. Eurip. Bacch. 
898. Tro. 392. kqO' fjfiepap, Soph. EI. 999- v. Valck. ad Herodot. 
p. 589- Kara vofxovs, in every district or prefecture: Valck. ad 
Herodot. p. 311. aei Kara iroXeftov eydwet, in every war: Athen. 
xiii. p. 557. v. Mattli. xxvii, 15. Mark xv, 6. 

Kaff eavTov (as ecf eavTov and irpds eavTov) is, separately, apart, 

1 See note j, p. 93. and Toup. ad Long. euxV irorfiffairQui x i ft&P <av > Aristoph. 

§ xvi.— J. S. ' Eq. 660.— J. S. 

* Viz. opKovs iroie1cx8ai Kara toiv Qeaiv, w Add Kara, in respect of: Ka.6l£ei Sh 

p. 86. Bekker's edition, printed for Mr. rbv arparbv — iv r6ir(p kclto, toov 68&>v 

Priestley, in 1826. In the Schol. 2co- apiaTair^vK6ri— : Plut.inLucull.p.908. 

Kpdr-rjs yap iv t£ ij8 ra>v KpT)TiKu>v, 1. 29. ed. H. St.. — J. S. 

wrongly. We know from Athenasus, h. vi. x v H\9ev (els Seobs v K&vdapos) Kar l%- 

that Sosicrates wrote on Cretan affairs. — 8pav aerov, Aristoph. Pac. 133. Prax. 

J. S. fiaicapla. y" &p' y woAjs esnai To\om6v. 

■ v Hii^aro rois 6eo7s Kara enaT6[ji.firis, Blep. Kara r i ; Prax. itoKkGov ovveica. 

Plut. in Mario p. 768. 1.12. ed. H. St. Aristoph. Eccl. 559. Kara tt)v Kviaffav 

rrj 5 s 'AypoTipa Kara, x i ^' i0>v vapyveffa zlaehfavde, Id. Pac. 1059. — J- S> 



244 Kara. [CHAP. IX. § v. 

alone, to or by himself ; as, kqB' eavrbv irjv. ovbels yap eXoir &v m&' 
civtvv -KavT t-^eiv/ Aristot. Etb. ix. Hence to ku& avru in philoso- 
phical writings, that which is in one certain thing alone, and as 
alone: Aristot. airbs kuB' eavrbv eZiirXevae, alone: Plut. in Cic. 
p. SSO. I. 47. expressed by tear' Ibiav in Matth. xiv, 20. ohic eu-i 
rovTuv avro ko0' aiird (of itself, in itself,) naXbv obbev, Plat. Svtnp. 
p. 181. and in the same sense, ov yap fxovov iipus to kuB'' avras 
<b(f>e\ouatv (7} re cnofpoai>vr) Kal >/ bitcaioavvr), viz.) Isocr. Nicocl. p. 63. 
Knfl' r)vvxiav is, at leisure, taking time: Time, i, 85. - 

V. Kara /j.iKpbv e-rrnrXelov is, more and more : Kara /uiKpbv Jjrrov, 
less and less. These expressions are equivalent to eiwrXelov e<pelrjs or 
ck TrpoaaywyTis, and i)ttov or eXaT~ov en irpovayiayris, or err' eXarTov 
e(pe^F]s. But Kara jjuicpbv alone is, by little and little; by degrees: 
Kara af.iiKpbv oiol re €7riXa(3ea9ai irr\ Tavbpbs eafiev, Plat. Soph. p. 241. 
which is expressed by Kara i^payy also : aymrria-eis, eav -nr) tcai Kara 
fipa"xy Trapaa7ra(jujfieBa ovrws loyypov Xoyov : Id. ib. But sometimes 
Kara fipayv is, in a small degree or proportion : as, iravTes oaoi Kal 
Kara ftpayy cr(t)<ppoavvr}s fAeTe-^ovatv, Id. in Timaeo p. 27» I. 22. 

It is used adverbially with other accusatives ; as, Kara Tayos, 
quickly, Thuc. iii, 18. Kara fxepos, in turn : see Ch. ill. § vii. R. 2. 
Kara Tpoircv, regularly, properly : Plat. 

Kara CTroT^ov is, in a straight row ; to which is opposed evaXXhH, 
alternately, [after the manner of a quincunx. See the word and 
figure in Gesner's Thesaurus.] napaXXa!-, in irregular series. 1 

VI. Kara 7ro§a or -rrobas, or Kara7roSas, is the same as eK irobbs 
(which however is sometimes, close, with foot set to foot, [or, as we 
say, hand to hand,]" i. e. on the track or footsteps ;) as, Kara Tvohas 
alpe.lv, to take by following ; Kara nobas ai/ruiv ievai, Thuc. Hence 
figuratively, ttj be Kara vobas ii^xeprj, on the next day: Herodot. iii. 
and ttj KaraKobas fjfiepa, Polyb. ii. p. Ql. kuto. wobas ttjs fta%r)s 
71-poeXBely, immediately after the battle. 

VII. With words of number Kara has the following senses: Ka0' 
eva, HaB' ev, ev kuB' ev, severally, individually, one by one ; 01 kuB' 
eva, M\. V. H. ii, 1. So 01 ca0' enaarov. ev icaB" ev adpoiaas oareov, 
Lucil. Epigr. 2. vpos be tovtois, aXXas rpujpeis irXeov ij e'wornv elXe, 
Kara fjtav Kal kuto. bvo Xa/jiftavwi', one at a time, and two at a time: 
Demosth. c. Lept. p. 371. 01 be 'Adr)valoi Kara fxiav vavv Teray/uevoi 
irepieTrXeov avrovs kvkXu>, in a single line, one ship following another: 
Thuc. ii, 84. 6 kuB' eh for eh eicna-ros, every one: Horn, xii, 5. 
els Ka6' els, one by one: John viii, £)• Sometimes in one word 
KaBels. Ka& els for Ka6' eva is numbered among solecisms by Lucian 
in Soloec. t. i. p. 577. ed. Amst. Sometimes ko0' eva and ku&' ev 

y Ka\ws, OTirj tear' ifiavrbv, kou fieO' owS' e%ou(ra: ev8elas $i6o~ovs tov vSaros e$ 

erepov Xtyo/Aai (rbv (iiaGbv viz.) Aris- rb ire\uyos : Thuc. ii, 102. p. 378. 1. 11. 

topb. Vesp. 786.— J. S. ed. Bekk.— J. S. 

2 T<J re yap f>ev/A.a (of the Achelous) « The French phrase pied d pied, by 

iffri p.4ya ical iroAv ical QoKepbv, a" re vrjaoi which Viger explains collato pede, appears 

irvKval, Kal aW-fjXais rrjs irpoo'X'io'ews rep to me to be rather equivalent to pedeten- 

fir) (TKe5dvvv(r0ai avvSefffioi yiyvovrai, ira- tim, cautiously, gradually, gingerly. — 

paWai- Kal ov Kara, crro7x ov nelp.evai 7 J.S. 



Rule 5 — 8.] Kara. 245 

have a signification exactly opposite to that mentioned above, 
namely, together: Kad' eva binavTes yevofxevoi, Dion. Hal. i. p. 3J. 
1. 21. llva /ui] Kad' eva navres yevopevoi, koivov e^eveyKrjre (car' avTuv 
iroXe/uov : Id. viii. p. 486. 1. 21. SXlyovs twv 6K ttjs Kojfirjs tpQaaavriov 
Kud' ev yeveaBai TrupaXafiwv, Id. i. p, 66. airo^pyjv olopevai T))v oheiav 
bvia/jtv, el Kad' ev al rpets (7rdXeis) yevoivro, fxiav aipfjaai ttoXlv ov 
fieyahriv: Id. ii. p. 101. 1. 26. 

VIII. Kara tvX0os is, in a body, aOpooi : trvve\86vTiav Kal -S>v ev 
reXei Kara tt\?j0os els to joovXevTTjpiov, Dion. Hal. vii. Kar' SXlyovs is 
the contrary, few in number, few together: en re rmv avTo/j6Xu>v to 
irXfjOos eKCMJTOTe, el tea) Kar SXlyovs, npovibv Tr)v bvvajiiv yvfyvev : He- 
rodian v. c. 4. § 8. few at a time : ol he (TTpariwTai to. [xev Trputra 
VKiayyovvro, KaT oXlyovs be ave^wpovv, Id. vi. c. 9- § 5. kut' oXlyovs 
yap ical ev iroXXols eavrovs biaaireipavres eXrjtrrevov, Zosim. iii. Kara 
ttooov is, in some measure, in some degree : KaraTcioTevaavTes rats 
Ibiais bvvapea, Kara ttouov ebQapaCJs el\ov : Polyb. ii. p. 92. 

Kara is used to signify proportion or comparison : buipa ov kotu 
fiij\a Kal aTe<pavovs arreblboTO avTrj, Lucian, de Amicit. [p. 62. A. ed. 
Salmur. cf. 59. A.] gifts not merely equivalent or tantamount to the 
apples and garlands which he had received, but houses, lands, &c. 
ov KaTa twv oIkimv Kal tt)s yrjs \peiav — avrr] rj bvvafiis (paiverai : Thuc. 
ii, 62. fiel$.u> Tiva rj Kar avdpwirov aofiav oofyot elaiv, Plat. Apol. 
c. 5. yaXeirwrepov fioi <patverai rj KaTa rrjv YXaiiKov re-^vrjv, Id. Phaed. 
C 58. afinpribv els eavrov, fxaXXov ?) /card Tr)v afiaprlav eavrbv renaw- 
p-qrat : Antiphon. Orat. p. 676. [1. 4. ed. Reisk.] el be t&> boKu> aet- 
govs, ») Kar efiavTov, Xeyeiv Xoyovs : Demosth. de Vectig. p. IT' 5 - ['• 9- 
ed. Reisk.] pr) roivvv Kara t6v Kvfiepin'iTrjv Orjs airbv, put him not 
then on a level with the pilot: Aristid. pro Quatuorv. p. 383. — simi- 
litude : bjxoXoyoirjv av eywye ov icara tovtovs elvai pr}Tu>p, Piat. Apol. 
c. 1. 

It serves to form a circumlocution instead of a genitive case: al 
Kara to awfia emQvpiai, for al tov o-wjuaros e-jnOvfiiai, Plato Phaed. 
c. 32. 

With a noun, (usually a proper name,) it notes, — 1. possession, or 
what belongs : 6 Eevo<p<Lv cupeXely ttj /car' avrbv vTrepj3e(3Xr]Ke tt)v IlXd- 
twvos a(peXeiav, Hermog. de form. or. ii, 12. to TraXaibv fiev olv ol 
'Apabtot Kad' avrovs efiaaiXevovro, had ki?igs of their own : Strabo 
xvi. p. 754. [See Rule 4. and note y.~] So ol Kar oIkov, the people of 
the house, the servants: Soph. Electr. 1150. [1147-] ro'ts Kara yivos 
owiaofiai, my kindred, my relations: iElian, V. H. i, 34. and ele- 
gantly with the neuter article plural : rd rard Wavaaviav tov AaKebai- 
/joviov Kal QifjitTTOK'Sea, &c. see p. 4. 1. 14. — 2. In quotation, or use, 
of another's words : ovk av o'iei }xe Kara. Tllvbapov Kal d<7)(fjA/as virep- 
repov xpayaa iroajaaadai; to use the ivords of Pindar, as Pindar 
says: Plato Phsedr. — 3. ivay, manner, custom: eywy' ovv ovtms eiri- 
Ttdi'fATjKa aKovaai, (JJore, av (3abi£wv Troiij tov neptTraTOv Meyapabe, Kal, 
Kara 'lipobiKov irpotrfias rw Ttiyei, tcoXiv inrins, ov fxi] gov atroXetcpQw, 
as Herodicusused to do : Plato, Phaedr. — 4. time : rpiros curb Kabfxov 
Kara AafibaKov, in the time of Labdacus : Arrian. abbvarov be$albpov 
ov fxuvov KaTa liaKpaTtfv drat, Athen. Deipnos. xi. Kar' kfxe, hi my 



246 Mcra. [CHAP. IX. § V. 

time: 6 Pausan. in Achaic. ku-u ti)v ap^y ru>v rpiaKovra, in the reign 
of the thirty tyrants : JEAmi, V. H. ii, 11. Kara be ruv Kara Kpv'iauv 
ypovov, but in the time of Croesus : Herod, i, 67. (But Kara ypovov is 
sometimes, in due time: >'/ be Kara yjiovov eretce Koprjv evfxop(pov, Plut. 
TrapaXX. 'E\\. nai Tw/z.) Ol Kad' rjuas avdpwnoi is not only the men 
of our time, but, of our condition: v. Lennep. ad Phal. p. 94. rovs 
Kad' rjuas tottovs, the regions in which we dwell: Phalar. p. 224. c 

In composition Kara signifies — 1. against: as in KarayeXyy rivos : 
KarayivwaKeiv twos davarov : iElian, V. H. iii, 47. Karaipevbouaprvpely 
— naratypove'iv — KaraviaraaQai — tivos : KararoXu^y rwv 7roXeuto)y : Po- 
lyb. iii, 103. — 2. descent; bringing, throwing, or keeping down, 
as in Karaflaivetv, Kanevai eWAtbov : iEsch. dial, iii, 20. Karao^^y, 
KadeXicveiy yavs : Polyb. i, 21. Karaaeieiv to. rei^rj, ./Elian, V. H. ill, 
l6. KarafiaWeiv rtya els airiGriav, Plat. Phsedr. c. 38. KarawaTelv, 
Xen. GEc. viii, 5. Ages, i, 15. — 3. return or restitution ; as in ran- 
evai, Lys. p. 212. [1. 7. ed. Reisk.] tcadobos kwipnviav, Hippocr. v. 
Foes. CEcon. KarepyeaBai oinabe, Lys. p. 497. [1. 12. ed. R.] Kara- 
nXe'iy, Demosth. p. 886. [1. 4. ed. R.] KaraTropeveaBai, Polyb. iv, \J. d 
Karayeiy els rf)v oUelav, Id. ib. Karaywyrf errl ri]v fiacikeiav, Id. E. 
L. 128. Karabexeadai, to receive back: JEschin. Or. p. 15. — 4. 
fulness, abundance ; as in KaTeibwXos tzoXis, Acts Ap. xvii, l6. rarci- 
tyofios, Polyb. i, 39. iii, 108." Kadvbpos, Id. v, 24. Karauovos, Id. 
xvii, 12. Kara<pvros, Id. xvii, 16. KaraXtdovy, Demosth. p. 296. [I. 
10. ed. R.] — 5. exhaustion, consumption, expense, waste, sacrifice, 
ruin; as in icaraicvfieveiy, /Eschin. Or. p. 13. Lys. p. 541. [1. 2. 
ed. R.] Karaixtado(j>ope~ty to. inap^oy-a, iEschin. Orat. p. 45. icara- 
bwpoboKe~iv, Lys. p. 808. [1. 9. ed. R.] KaraXeiTOvpye'iv, Isaeus p. 240. 
Kadnnrorpu<pe~iy, Id. p. 116. [I. 5. ed. R.] Kadnnraieodai is, to over- 
come: iEschyl. Eum. 146. v. Hemst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 389- 
Valck. ad Herodot. p. 473. Abresch. ad jEscb. ii. p. 103. — 6. It 
intends or augments ; as in KaTeXiricav, Polyb. viii, 5. KareXirnrfios, 
Id. iii, 83. naraXoyigeadai, iEsch. Or. p. 6l. kcitoIv voarjua, Fogs. 
OZc. Hipp. On Karaaiceva^eiv see Reiske's ind. to Demostli. /cara- 
"irioTeueiv reus Ibiats bvvaueai, Polyb. ii, 3. — 7. It very rarely has a 
diminuent force ; as in /ca0a\ju?)s, somewhat salt: Nicandr. — 8. under, 
beneath: as in Zeis icara-)(d6vtos, Ii. 1, 457. — 9- at the back, behind; 
as in Karoniy, ave/xos Karappeiov, Polyb. i, 60. — 10. distribution ; 
as in Karavefieiv, Kadr)uepiv6s. — 11. in ; as in Kuradvuios, II. p, 201. 

IX. Mera, with a genitive, is used by poets and orators, for with: 
fied^Hpas oTaaa, siding with Juno : Eurip. Hel. 895/ [See Rule 11.] 
With the dative it has the sense of by or with, [in signification of 



6 Ken-' i/xe is also, as far as I am con- d Aristophanes Ran. 1152 — 1165. 

cerned, as far as in me lies, (quantum in shows the difference between Karepxeo-- 

me est: Cic. 1 ad Q. F. i, 29.) Iva — p.-n- 6ai, to return from exile, and ^iteiv. See 

Sep vfuv kclt i(xe iWe'nrrjTai, Demosth. Classical Journal, vol. ii. p. 503. — J. S. 
adv. Polycl. p. 1224.1. 24. ed. Reisk. v. * Also among: ovrus &c Sotcioifu fier 

p. 1210. 1. 20".— J. S. avtipdnruv Oehs thai, Theogn. 339. and 

c Add Kara, among : &\Aa 8e /xvpia besides : <pf]alv re fier' avrov rols rjirid- 

Xvypa nar' avdpdnrovs akuAyrai, Hesiod. Aois iTrixiiprjffai Trepvaiv, ical rots irupe- 

Op. 100.— J. S. roiatv, Aristoph. Vesp. 1037.— J. S. 



Rule 9—11.] 2iv. 247 

means or instrument,] among, [between,] in, with. With an accu- 
sative, in poetry, it signifies, to, in, into, among, on account of, 
[against, Hes. Scut. H. 79-] [for, after,] to : Horn. II. b, v. 70. 
in prose, after. Also in signification of time: ical /uef3' fipepav teat bia 
vvktos, both by day and by night: JEA. V. H. xiii, 16\ yuefl' iifiepav 
e-^ojpet bia rfjs noXevs 6 Xoyos, when it was day, when day came -J 
Plut. in Caes. p. 712. ovre vvktos bvvarai icadevbeiv, ovre fied' fifxepav, 
ov av y, fxeveiv : Plat, in Phaedr. p. 251. 1. 42 J 

In composition fxera signifies — 1. transference, change, alteration ; 
as in fierafiifiaieiv tqv TToXefiov els rrjp A.tfivr\v, Polyb. i, 41. fiera- 
j3o\i] kokov tivos els ayadov, iEschin. Dial, iii, 5. fieraflaXXeiP eavrov 
ai'o) Ka\ kcitm, Plat. Phzed. c. 45. fieQiarapai woXirelap els oXiyapyjav, 
Demosth. p. 196. [1. 13. ed. R.] fxeTaaTparonebeveadai, Xen. Ages. 
i, 21. fieTdKadoTrXieieiv, Poiyb. iii, 88. fieraroia, Id. iv, 66. /uera- 
boKe~iv, Demosth. p. 467. [1. 21. ed. R.] fxeraireldeLP, Lys. p. 324. 
[I. 5. ed. R.] fierappvOfiiieiv, Xen. CEc. xi, 2. fieTaTideudai to. elpn- 
fxkva, Id. Mem. iv, 2, 18. — 2. fetching, calling, or sending for, 
approach, [pursuit, allocution ;] as in fieTanaXeladat, Xen. Ages, ii, 
29« fxeTanep.weadai, Id. Mem. iii, Q, 1 1 . aofiav fjterievai Id. ib. iv, 
2,9- fuerapcoielp, Odyss. k, 67. fieroixecdat, II. k, 111. — 3. after, 
back, behind ; as in fiera/ivpeiv, Lys. p. 145. [!. 7- ed. R.] fxerayi- 
vuidKetv, Id. ib. ovbev ye Qpovrleiwv, ovbe /Jterarrrpecpufiepos, Demosth. 
adv. Mid. p. 585. [1. 11. ed. R.] fxeraKXaleoeai, II. X, 7^3. fierav- 
riica, Theocr. Id. xxv, 222. — 4. communication, participation, asso- 
ciation, [acquisition ;] as in fierabibopat tov fiapovs, Xen. Mem. ii, 
7, 1. fxere^eiv. fxeTaXafx^aveiv twv Kivbvvwv, Ml. V. H. ix, 5. 
fjerabaivvadai tivi,\\. %> 498. fierafxeXiTe^dai tivi, Horn. h. in ApolJ. 
197- fieraTToie'Mrdai Teyvr}s, Plato Politic, c. 29. — 5. interval, inter- 
position, intervenue, intervention ; as in fiera-nvpyiov, Lys. fragm. 
p. 16. j-ierafxa.S.iov, II. e, 19. fieTabpofiabr]v, lb. 80. fieTahopmos, 
Od. b, 194. — 6. in ; as in fieTaxetpigeodai, Xen. CEc. xiv, 2. 
fxeToiKos, Demosth. p. 50. [1. 21. ed. R.] fxeTabrifitos, Od. 6, 293. 
— 7> privation, loss ; as in d^e fjterafia.vda.veip rijv kXevdepiav, ^Eschin. 
c. Ctes. p. 544. [I. 15. ed. R.] On fiera in composition see Cattier. 
Gazoph. p. 81/ 

X. Hvp governs a dative case only, and commonly signifies the 
same as fxera with a genitive. So, avv rots "EXXrjai fiaXXop rj avv t<j> 
fiapfiapa) ejpai, in Xen. H. Gr. iii. and arapres fxer aXXi)Xwp in 
Thuc. both in the same signification of standing by or siding 
with. 

XI. So fiera vouuv in Thuc. ii, 39> p. 124. and avv rols vojjlois 
(rw vofjtf) in Xen. Cyrop. i. c. 15. conformably to the laws, in 
obedience to the laws, legally. 1i>p with many other words also has 

/ ©vaavres teal iriovres ovk %ti p.ed' rjjxi- Horn. II. i\, 228. — J. S. 

pa.v av€<TTt]crav , a\Aa Tedvr\K6r*s — &<pdr)- h It may be here observed that fierct 

aav: Plut. in Solon, p. 171. I. 1. ed. H. alone is sometimes put instead of the verb 

St. — J. S. of which it is a component part : ep.oiy' 

s Add, besides: vvv p.eu 8^ <rd(pa eta-eat, laov /xev rrjcrSe ttjs x«>P. as J" € ' T «> %<t° v ne P 

olSdev olos, Otoi Kol Aa,pao7cni> apiffTrjes vp.?v, for p-ereariv, Aristoph. Eccl. 173. 

p.ereaat, /cat fter' 'AxiAA.55« p-qlftvopa. : —J. S. 



248 Ivy. [Chap. ix. 

an adverbial sense: 7ro\\a pev elite, to. he fJKovoev ov ovv tetany, 
indecorously, unbecomingly: Pans, in Ach. p. 420. ovv ra\ei, 
quickly: Soph. El. 1498. ai>v avr&7 (rw Ileiz.) yevvaiy, ovv avrtji 
rip Ileiz.) abUa), through mere generosity, — injustice: Xen. Ages. 
iv, 5. So npos blurts, and binrf alone, Soph. El. 1211. In the 
same manner pera with a genitive has an adverbial sense : pera tov 
biKalov for bucalws, Demosth. in fin. Philipp. epist. per abeias elfxl, 
insecurity: v. Demosth. pro Megalop. p. 83. 1. 26. pe-a xaipov, 
opportunely, according to occasion : Thuc. vi, 85. 

XII. 2vj/ Beuj, rather than pera Qeov, (although Plato has pera 
6ewv, Ep. viii. p. 355. fin.) is used in various ways : vyiaivovra oe its 
€TrtT07roXv ovv 6eo7s upwpev, by the blessing or favor of the gods: 
Xen. CEc. p. 851. 1. 15. £,vv Oeols ewiwpev enl tovs ubiKovvras, with 
the aid or favor of the gods : Thuc. 1. 

XIII. Sometimes a verb is added to the phrase : 7a pev oiv els to 
irapbv, ovv dew e'nre'tv, e\ei KaXws : God be thanked : Plato to Dio. 
oinat yap, oipai, ovv 6ew b' elpi) oerat, Tavrns anaXXafyiv oe rrjs 
ocpdaXfxlas : with the help of God: [tinder God, with due submission 
and reverence to Him; God willing:] Aristoph. Plut. 114. 2i)v 
'Abpaoreia elnelv is of nearly the same import. 

But ovv 6eu>, when not parenthetically used, is sometimes, by 
divine impulse or instinct : ws ol e'lrj ovv 0e« elprjpevov, to prjbeva tQv 
itwvTtov oXfiiov ehai : Herodot. i, 86. 

1,vv is very frequently suppressed : TtXevoavTes ehQvs -nevTe (cat 
e'iKoot ravol, Thuc. i, 26. tovs ye pi)v kcikovs civto'is tckvoiol kciI 
hopois e£6XXvpev, Eurip. Hipp. 1340. seq. KaTeTofcvoe ru Xoi/ity tovs 
'A)(atovs avTol.s f/ptovots teat Kvolv, Lucian, de Sacrif. p. 286. v. Her- 
mann, ad Horn. h. Apoll. vs. 148. Always after apa. v. Hor. Serin, 
i, 10. 86. Tacit. Ann. iii, 6l. 

Iu composition ovv signifies — 1. communion, conjunction, par- 
ticipation, association ; as in ovpirooiov, ovyyerrjs, ov/jpoiryv Ttvl 
eh — : Xen. Symp. iv, 23. Demosth. p. 1001. [I. 27- ed. R.] ov/j.- 
peTabibovai rijs eTufiovXrjs, Polyb. V, 36. ovppioelv to'is (ftlXois tovs 
€%dpovs, Id. i, 14. ovvapfw. oy^ebov ti olpat epe vrXeioj y^pi'jpaTa 
elpyaodai rj iiXXovs ovvhvo ovo-ivas fiovXei twv oo({>iotwv, than any 
other two put together: Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 2S2. Demosth. p. 
564. [1. 22. ed. R.] So ovvTpets, and ivveeUooi Horn. Od. £j, 98. 
ovpTtavTes, owdveiv, Polyb. iv, 49. — 2. assemblage, union, collection, 
junction, moderate contraction or compression ; as in ovppeeiv, ovy- 
KaXelv, ovvvetye'iv, ovyiceipaXaiovodat, Polyb. i, 66. ovieXelv, Xen. 
Mem. iii, 8, Q. ovyyoatysw, ovyKXeieir, ovoropos, ovpTrte£eiv, ovvo- 
<ppvs-. Theocrit. Id. viii, 72. Anacr. Od. xxviii, 16. — 3. universality, 
or plurality, majority ; as in ovoowSeiv, Polyb. x, 44. ovonevadeodcu 
to. eavrov, Lys. adv. Philon. p. 873. [1. 12. ed. R.] — 4. the instru- 
ment i [collision,] as in ov/j-^ocpeTv tovs Ovpeovs rats paypiipais, Polyb. 
xi, 28. — 5. agreement, conformity ; as in ovpperpos, Polyb. iv. 21. 
xi, 10. ovppopcpos, Rom. viii, 29. — 6. It intends or augments; as iu 
ovvTernpevus, Xen. CEc. xx, 22. ovvtovos irpoafioXij, Polyb. E. L. 134. 
— 7. It is redundant : v. Brunck. ad Eurip. Hipp. 695. 



Rule 1—5.] Bapa. 249 



SECTION VI.— ON THE PREPOSITION napa. 

E.ULE I. " EpyeoQai, napayiveoQai, nopeveaQai napa. rivos, is, to come, 
arrive, go from a person ; naph rfjs ovyKXrjrov flovXijs ayyeXXeiv, to 
announce on the part of the senate ; rbv (plXov nvXv nap' efxov npba- 
eme, deliver my particular commendations to my friend ; nap ifxov 
inaa, I paid with my own money ; nap' e/j.ov avaXwo-as, at my oiun 
expense, flap' eavrtiv is, of themselves, of their own accord: Phalar. 
p. 214. Elliptically, oi irapa aov, your messengers ; to. nap ifiov, 
(viz. yevofieva, vnap^avra,) my proceedings. 1 

II. With a dative it signifies, at, near, by, with; also before: naph 
Aapeiw icpiTrj, Herodot. iii. extr. and in: nap'a ro'ts ifxcpvXiots noXefiois 
Ovrjaiceiv, Piut. 

A dative is also sometimes put with it instead of an accusative, 
when it signifies motion : ityij xpfjvai levai naphTiaaaQipvei, ovs h£\ev- 
ore : Xen. Anab. ii. 

III. With an accusative naph signifies, by, near : avrjp nap 1 avbpa 
oTriaerai £t<f>Tj<p6pos, in array: Eurip. Hel. 1081. (1078.) v. Musgr. in 
Suppl. adnotat. during; unsuitably to, contrary to, against; 
within; — on account of; in comparison with; according to, in 
proportion to, beyond 'J also very frequently, to ; h as, naph rbv 
flaaiXea finer. But the following uses are the most remarkable. It 
signifies co-existence or coincidence : nap' avrb to abU^fxa : napa rbv 
nXovv : napa rb belnvov : rrj napa rh beivh euroXju/a : Dion. Hal. X. 
Trap' bXov rbv (3iov : 7rap' oXov rbv ayuiva : Demosth. napa rovs 
Kivbvvovs, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 433. naphrriv eizelvov apyfiv, Xen. Mem. 
ii, 1, 2. Trapa naaav rrjv ^oprjyiav, Demosth. p. 514, 8. ed. Reisk. 
ws jjiij nap' avra KoXaadeh], instantly : l Herodian. iii, 11, 17- 

IV. Against, contrary to: napa (pvoiv, napa rbnpinov, napa peXos, 
nap' d>pav (unseasonably). 

Except : nap' oKtyovs navres arypidqcrav. 

Besides: e'i rts aXXrj napd ravras earl fiaOij/jaros Ibea. ovk iari 
napa ravr aXXa, Aristopb. Nub. 698.'" ovbe /uf/v noie'iv rt, ovbe tl 
naa^eiv aXXn, nap a civ etce'iva i) notrj 7) nacr^y '. Plat. Phaed. c. 42. 

V. llapa bvva/.av may signify either above or below one's strength; 
[because naph denotes difference or incongruence.] 

Uaph signifies elegantly, through, or by means of; (v. Valck. ad 

1 llapa. with a genitive is sometimes by, the opinion of Hermann, nothing determi- 

noting the agent; alffxpbv rb <pevyew, nate can be understood with avra, but 

Kul rb npeafievovr' etxe ovrco yeAaaBai rod npa.yfj.ara would be preferable to p-fi/xara, 

ttacrtyu-firov irapa : Soph. CEd. C. 1423. — proposed by Reizius. II. thinks irapavra 

J. S. in iEschyl. Ag. 746. is, so, in the same 

3 Examples may be seen in H. Steph. manner. — J. S. 
Thes. t. iii. col. 37. and foil. — J. S. m I. e. it in unavoidable, it must be 

k Fpdcpei iiriaroA^v irapa f3a<n\4a, Xen. dene. So ovk iari irapa, ravr' &\\a, I am 

Anab. i, 6, 3. — J. S. determined to do it: Aristopb.. Pac. 110. 

' So irap' avra, /j.\v ovk iirpadrj, Polyb. — J. S. 
v, 95. for irapavr'iKa, says Ernesti. In 

Viger. 2 I 



250 Uapu. [Chap. ix. § vi. 

arg. Phoetl. p. xxi.)" irapa tovtov lidv/jovtri irdVres. trap' eicelvov 
iravTa rrj ir6Xei ylverai rdyaflrt. irapa tovto be kitoKofievoi, irap baov 
ifXiiQh ekarrovs ebpiQrjaav, only because ; for no other reason than 
because: Herod ian. vi, 6, 12. Jrapd ri o'ieoQe rat iroXeis Tore fiev ev, 
Tore be q>avXws Trparreu- : Dinarcll. c. Demosth. But 7rapd ri; is 
sometimes, to what end or purpose? irap" o, on which account, 
wherefore : irap 1 o Ka'i £opuh'rai ra aw/Aura, Philo Jud. de Circumc. 
p. 6'25. Olbev irapa tovto is an extenuating phrase, expressive of 
contempt for a thing a3 of no importance: Jo. Chrys. Iiom. 12. in 
ep. ad Rom. Casaub. ad Pers. v, 67, translates it, quid turn postea? 
and what then ? and what of that ? 

VI. It signifies dependence or influence; in the^ower of, or deter- 
mined by : iravv yap irapa tovto {ov% lpq.s ;) yeyove ra twv 'EXXi'jrwv 
irpdyfxara, el tovti to pfjfia, aXXa /n) tovti bieXe)(Br}v eyw, 1) bevpi Trjv 
\eipa, dXXh prj bevpi napijreyKn : for upon this forsooth entirely de- 
pended the affairs of the Greeks, whether I made use of this or the 
other expression, &c. Demosth. pro Cor." In this sense, ovrwal be 
Kat to irap' i)fxas rw KaB' ei[j,api,i£vr)v (evavTiwrarov eorii',) what de- 
pends upon our own will, what is in our own power: Diogenian. ap. 
Euseb. Praep. vi. So, 7rap' rjfxas be, baa eic rov cirovbd$.eiv fj/das, 
zal evepyelv, knl reXos ep%erui : are in our own power: ib. [underst. 
eort after be.] 

VII. Ilapd ttoXv is, far, by much : irepieyevovTO irapa iro\i> twv 2a/3/- 
vojv, Dion. Hal. iii. p. 182. 1. 12. vv yap w\ir\v eyioye oUrta irap 
oXiyov [so little different] iaeaOat (eKarepwv twv ipyfwv dpiOfxov,) a.X\a 
irapa iroXv : but different by a great excess : Plato Apol. [p. 14. I. 40. 
ed. Bas. I.] 

VIII. Sometimes with a genitive added, far below; as, irapa iroXv 
rfjs d£/as, irapa ttoXv ttjs eXiribos. irapa iroXv twv irepvai Karwpdw/xi- 
vwv tfXdev, he came far short of his last years achievements ; irapa 
iroXv eXeadai rjXdev, he was very far short of taking the city. See 
Duk. ad Thuc. viii, 76. 

IX. To 7rapd iroXv are opposed irapa fiitcpov, irap 1 oXiyov, irapa 
fipa-%11. irapa fiiKpov fjXdov vUrjs, they were very near gaining the 
victory: Eutrop. Metaphr. vi. 7rap' oXiyov 7]Kev r; iroXis dXwvai, Arr. 

" 'Hv.eh oe irapa rb rbv Meiov\{b~r]v tion, which I think the right one, (see t. ix. 

Tavra avyxooprjffai, fjavx'tav elxo^ev '• De- p. 296. of Reiske's Greek Orators) agrees 

mosth. adv. Leoch. p. 1087. 1. 2. ed. R. with Viger's. ' Reiske's would make the 

irapa rbv ttjs avrov ixrjTpbs 'SpKOv, Ka\ tt\v passage referable to Rule 5. Hooge- 

tov Sovros eKiivy rbv optcov evTjOetau, irarp'os veen's, which gives irapa, its common sig- 

TnrvxT]Ktis : Id. in Bosot. de nom. 1002, nification of motion, is quite inadmissible, 

1. iroWh fief ovv Xacas early curia tou and must have arisen from his not having 

rav&' oviws ex^v, na\ ov irap" ev, oboe considered the whole passage. The words 

Svo, els tovto Tct irpd.yij.aTa a(p?KTai : Id. are in answer to some observations which 

Philipp. iii, 110, 15. — J. S. iEschines, in his oration against Ctesi- 

P. 305. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. This is one phon, had made on the expressions and 

of the passages which I have thought it action of Demosthenes ; as, e. g. ov fiefi- 

necessary to give more at length than as vqade avrov -ret fiiapa teal airlOava p-rju-ara ; 

they appear in Viger, because it has been 554, 9. ed. R. see 461, 10. and Tavra Se 

variously interpreted, and the few words rivos* eo-riv , Si kIvoSos, pfaara % Qavv-ara ; 

cited by Viger cannot enable any one to 557, 1. — J. S. 
judge of the meaning. Taylor's interprets- 



Rule 6 — 15.] Tlapa. 251 

de Exp. Al. i, 23. irapa fipax" ™5 ravras eXelv '\9ovres, Zosim. i. 
So 7rap' eXa-^iGTOv eXdelv, to be within a very little; and nap 1 
ovhev : irap' ovhev fade irapaiptdrjvai, he was within a hair's breadth of 
destruction : Pint, in Cic. p. 880. 1. 33. of. p. 727. and napa Gxehov. 
to. /uev ijbr) neirovdoTes, to. he irapa Gyehbv eXdovres 7ra0elv, having nar- 
rowly escaped suffering : Dion. Hal. vii. p. 451. 1. 30. In this sense 
els also is used, when the verb signifies motion : see § ii. R. 15. 
. X. Hap' oXiyov el\e tijv hinr}v, within a little; very nearly : Trap' 
oXlyas \pi]<[)ovs ijTifxujdr], he was within a feiv suffrages of being de- 
graded; a few more suffrages would have rendered him ignominious : 
Demosth. 7rap' oXiyov airefvyes oXedpov, you but just escaped destruc- 
tion ; you very narrowly escaped destruction : Eurip. Iph. T. 
871. V. Thuc. vii, 71. ae ' yap Trap' oXiyov Tj hiefevyov rj air&X- 
Xwto, [for their escapes were always within a hairs breadth of de- 
struction, and their destruction was always within a hair's breadth 
of escape. So I understand it. p. 109. i. 1(5. ed. Bekk.] 

XI. With ayeiv, f]ye~iardai, Tldeadai, iroie'iadai, irapa fxiicpbv, oXiyov, 
fipuxv, yavXov, signify, to make little account of, and irapa iroXv the 
contrary : irapa fipaxy ti)i> eavrov aatyaXeiar, irpbs to fxrjhiva e| avrwv 
(ypafUfianav) GVKO^avTtjQrjvai defxevos '. Xiphil. Domit/ fjv ov irapa 
(pavXov, aXX' avrl iravris eirotelTo ireioQrjvai, Synes. ad Theophil. So 
Trap' ovhev : el fiovos eyto emvhvvevov, irap' ovhev av to irpayfia eiroiriGa- 
firjv, I should have thought nothing of it : Xiphil. in M. Antonin. 
Philos.? 

. XII. ITapa togovtov, without a case, is— 1. by so much; so great- 
ly : irapa togovtov ijTTtjdels ave^wprjae. — 2. by so little, by the want of 
SO little: irapa togovtov Manplvos ovic e^etyvye tovs hiwKovTas, within SO 
little was Macrinus of escaping his pursuers : Herodian. v. c. 4. § 23. 
ra 'IXXvpiKa he eOvrj, crreva ovtu, (cat ov iroXXijv e^oira 77/f viro 'Pwfxalois 
yfjv, irapa togovtov 6/j.opovs tea) yeirovas iroiel Veppavovs 'IraXiwrais : 
separate the Germans from the Italians by so small a barrier as their 
own narrow intervening territory : Herodian. vi. c. 7. § 9. 

XIII. With a genitive : p) irapa togovtov eXQufxev tTjs Igot^tos Betas, 
let us not be so far distant from, &c. let us not come only within 
so great a distance of it : Gregor. and in an opposite sense : irapa 
togovtov fj MiTvX{]vri fade Kivhvvov, so near danger: Thuc. iii. c. 49- 
irapa togovtov fxkv at ILvpaKovoai fadov Kivhvvov, into SO great danger : 
Id. vii, 2. 

XIV. With 7rap' ogov following : irapa togovtov ov KareXijcpOrj, irap' 
ogov ol hiwKovTes Trjs evdeias el^Tpair^Gav, he escaped being taken, only 
by the deviation of his pursuers : and in the same sense even without 
a negative, and with ko\ following : irapa togovtov ko\ Gv\xira-ov\xevoi y 
irap ogov \paieiv aiiTwv fiheXvGGo/jieQa : escaping being even trodden 
under foot, only through our abhorrence of touching them : Greg. 
irepl <piXoirTU)X' speaking of the poor 

XV. Ilapct is used in comparisons: irap' eavrov prjheva iiriTi'jheiov 

P To this sense of wapa Hermann refes died with. [70? Porson/] — J. S. 
irap' &Kpas airedpiaev rpt'xas, Eurip. Or. ? Ovtus sfioiye rovSe rov u.6pov tvx^v 

128. which he says ought not to be med- wap' ovdzv &Kyos, Soph. Antig. 466. — J.S. 



2j2 Tlapa. [Chap. ix. 

liyetTO, in comparison with himself ; roarovrov too Kiibuvov KarefpdvrjfTe, 
irapa to ai(T^>6v Tivnofiiystt', in comparison of, &c. Plato Apol. c. lG. 
(TKexpM/ueOu yap b>) irapa tov A.VKovpyov tov Mi\ria§*/i/ e£eTu£ovres, 
Aristid. pro Quat. p. 272/ cf. Rom. i, 25. Kpario-revovres irapa 
ret &X\a <BH>a, Xen. Mem. i, 4. 14. ' iraytcaXriv Xeyeis irapa <j>avXr]v 
iraibtuv, in comparison with which others are contemptible : Plat. 
Pliaedr. p. 276". 1. 41. With the comparative degree: v. Valck. 
Ep. ad Roev. p. 51. ad Adoniaz. p. 109. Keen, ad Greg. Cor. p. 
165. Valck. Diatrib. p. 119* airbs bi) nap' eavTOv beivorepos tcatf 
//fxepav yiverai, compared ivith himself; irapa rows tcaipovs iroXXa^ios 
eKarrra dewpeiv %pri cat eE,era£eiv ruiv erv/jiflavrojv, with reference to, &C. 
The difl'erence between irpos, when used in comparisons, (see below, 
§ viii. R. 13.) and Trapa, is that the latter sometimes notes tran- 
scendence or excellence beyond that which is signified by its case : 
riyovfiai be nai irpos ajjitpoTepovs, Kal nap afjufjorepovs av eivat Qe/ua- 
runXea tov re MikTiabi\v Kal tov Kl/jwva, not merely equal, but su- 
perior : Aristid. pro Quat. p. 321. 

XVI. Ilapa signifies recurrence or repetition after regular and 
equal intervals of time ; as, napa rpe'is f)fj.epas or rpirrfv rjfjepav, every 
third day ; and elliptically, napa fxiav, every other day ; irapa rpirrtr, 
every third day ; and without a numeral, nap ij/xepav, every other 
day ; 6 irap' fipepav Trvperbs, the tertian ague ; nap' ij/jeprjv irvpeTaivetv, 
to have a tertian ague: Arctaeus de morb. diut. i, 2. irapa f.ir\\>a, 
every other month; irap' kviavrbv, every other year;* and in the 
same sense iffiepav izap rjfxepav, fjfjva irapa ftr/va, eviavrbv irap' eviav- 
rbv. Also alternation of persons or things ; as, yepovTes Kal veaviat 
irap' eva avfj.iropev6fi.evoi, alternately ; eKarepy irX^yrjv irapa irXi)yqv 
ev-eivo/ievos, first on one, then on the other ; alternately. 

Also exception; as, ■nap' eva, except one; drjplov el irapa ypaju/xa, 
with the exception of a letter: Ammian. Epigr. 9. MapKos, when // 
has been taken away, becomes apicos, which is here [in this dull 
epigram] taken to be the same as upuros : see Valck. ad Herodot. 
p. 70S." 

In composition irapa signifies — 1. assumption, accession, produc- 
tion ; as in irapaXafifiavetv, irapaKOfxicieiv, irapaicaXelv, irapepyeoQai eVi 
to. Koiva, Ml. V. H. ii, 1. irapayeiv eh to biKaorfipiov, Demosth. p. 
805. [1. 14. ed. R.] — 2. passage, transgression or violation, beyond, 
against; as in irapobos, Lys. p. 9^- [h 12. ed. R.] irapaj3aiveiv : 
irapaoirovbeiv '. irapainjb^v tovs vofxovs, iEsch. c. Ctes. p. 582. [1. 7> 

r El Keyoi irap' avr^v BevoKXe-ns 5 animals. — J. S. 
Kapulvov, in rivalry with her, so that a * The following passage affords a re- 

cumparison might be made of his eloquence markable illustration of this sense of irapa : 

with hers: Aristoph. Thesm. 440. — J. S. outco Se taxvaev eV to?s 'Ax<uois, &ar\ 

s The words in Xenoprion are placed in el p^i nar' eviavrbv (every year) itfiv,. 

the following order ; irapa -ra &\Xa fwa, irap' eviavrbv (every?other year) alpeladai 

Sxrirep Beol, &v6poiiroi Pwrevovffi, <pvaei Kal crrparnybv avrbv, Kpycp 8e Kal yvc»>p.p 8i& 

r<2 vd/xari Kal rrj tyvxfj KparHTTevovres. iravrbs (constantly) apxetv : Plut.inArat. 

Instead of construing, with Hermann, p. 1898. 1. 3. ed. H. St. — J. S. 
Kpar. irapa t. a. f&ia, I understand abrwv u Add irap' 4/j.I for eveKa fiov : av Se y" 

after KparKXTevovns, and translate irapb. aurov [nivwv o¥p.u>£e irao' e/j.'. for all I care* 

to &\Ka fwa, compared with the other Aristoph. Av, 846.— J. S. 



§ vii. RULE 1—3.] Uepc. '253 

ed. R.] Trapairpeafieveiv, Demosth. p. 401. [1. 4. ed. R.] — 3. care' 
lessness, negligence, faultiness or imperfection, cursorily, amiss ; as 
in irapopav, irapadewpelv : Deinostl). p. 1414. [1. 22. ed. K.] irapa- 
iroXwXev, Demosth. p. 543. [1. 28. ed. R.] irapaKoveiv, Polyb. ii, 8. 
v. Tyrwh. ad Aristot. Poet. p. 129. — 4. propinquity, proximity ; 
as in Trupcnrefxireiv, TrapciKoXovQe'iv , irapaKaQ7]aQai, TrapinrXelv, TrapaoTa- 
ttjs : Polyb. xvii, 25. — 5. presence; with, at ; as in irapaTvy^aveiv : 
Xen. Apol. 11. TrapaKaraTiQedOai, Id. Symp. viii, 36". irapelvat. — 
6. (7.) addition, besides ; as in irapeiatyipeiv vdfiov, Demosth. p. 484. 
[1. 1. ed. R.] — 7. (8.) departure, deflexion ; as in Trapax^p^f obuiv, 
Xen. Hier. vii, 2. 7rape\?j\v0ws yjiovos, Id. Apol. 26. irapieuai, 
/Eschin. Dial, ii, 2. irapayeiv, Demosth. p. 487. 497. [I. 9. and 6. 
ed. R.] — 8. (9.) tract of time; as in Trapu^eifiuieiv. — 9- (10.) It 
intends or augments; as in Trapabibovai, wapadepf-iaiveodcu: iEschin. 
de Fals. Leg. p. 322. [1. 3. ed. R.] — 10. (11.) similitude; as in 
■KapaTr\t]ai(j)s, Xen. CEc. iii, 5. Trapo/jioios, Demosth. p. 12. [1. 8. 
ed. R.] v. Lennep. ad Phalar. p. 312. seq. — 11. (12.) secrecy, 
privacy, insinuation; as in TrapabrjXovv, Demosth. de Fa!s. Leg. p. 
348. [I. 7- ed. R.] ircpabivai, Id. pro Cor. p. 252. [1. 3. ed. R.] 
itapanipeiv, Id. ib. p. 281. [1. l6. ed. R.] v. Cattier. Gazoph. p. 83. 



SECTION VII. — On the prepositions Trepl and vp6. 

Rule I. Ilepl with a genitive signifies, about, on account of, for 
the sake of ; as, Trepl Trarpibos fxayeadai. ovbev Trpoor)<ei Trepl rwv aXXo- 
Tpluiv afxapTT}jia.TU)v ws abiKOvvras Kivbvveveiv, Lys. Areop. p. 264. 
[1. 3. ed. R.] Tteipavofjiai Trepl ttui'tuiv tuv ireirpay(ie.%'wv /ued' hfiw> uvrbv 
Ti/Aiopijaaadcn, Id. adv. Alcib. p. 519- ['• 2. ed. R.] v. John x, 33. 
enrep yiip abiiceiv \pu, rvpavribos Trepi kciXXmttov ttbiKelv : Eurip. Phten. 
-it eXevdepa (Tuj/uara — irepi ihv bajWa^av roiis T^vaKvXavujv at^aXwrovs, 
Dion. Halic. x. p. 651. 

II. With respect to, as to ; as, Trepl fiev yap rrjs fxaprvpias, ort ■fyevbrj 
HefiapTvprjiccHJii', avroi fioi hoKoxxnv epyw e^eXey^eiv avrijv '. v. Acts, 
xxviii, 22. and after troielv ; as, tovs efiireipovs r/owri/o-ef, 6, rt ypf] 
Ttoie'iv Trepl tVjs ey^eiprjaenjs. jxribev e^w noielv Trepl ravbpos, I know not 
what to do with the man ; bebiios fxtjrt teal Trepl av-ov vewepiaeiev, 
Herodian. i, 13, 13. with regard to himself. 

III. ITept ttoXXov Troie'iadai, or rideaOat, or yyeladai, is to make 
great account of, or to reckon of great importance : Trepl TrXeiovos, of 
more; Trepl TvXeiarov, of most ; Trepl iravrbs, all in all; Trepl fiiKpov, of 
little consequence ; Trepl eXarrovos, of less; Trepl kXayiarov, of least; 
Trepl ovbevos, of none at all. v Sometimes elvai is the verb joined 
with Trepl ttoXXov,&c. as, Trepl iroXXov eanv aipelodat to ^lapiov, it is of 
great importance that, &c. when a substautive is sometimes expressed 

" 'h-noKTivvvvcu^lv yhpavQpuirovs, Trepl sias in Eratoslh. p. 387. 1. 3. ed. Reisk. 
oiiSevbs 7)yovvT<r Xa/x^dveiv 5e xph- — J- S. 
para, irep) iroWov inoiouPTo : Ly- 



254 Ylepi. [Chap. ix. § vii. 

with 7roXu$ : as, ovS' evXaflirjs tori Trepl 7rX6nvos, Theogn. 118. nor is 
there a thing that requires more caution. And sometimes there is a 
dative of the person: OvoXuvtricois Trepl ttoXXov eart KaraXviyaaOai ret 
7rp()s 'Pu>/.taious ty*.A>'//unra, Dion. Ilvilic. viii. p. 488. 

IV. (V.) It signifies, above, over: Xu-^ayous re erepovs, Kal irept 
avui-rwv up-^ovra tuv ^LikIvviov inrubetfcni'res : Dion. Halic. vi. p. 375. 
1. 3d. ol be 'ApitJTOKpaTiKol Trepl ttui'tos OeXovres {tvishing above every 
thing-, above all things,) fii) Kivelodai ek tov iruTpiov Koafiov ti)v ttoXi- 
reiav, Id. vi. p. 384. 1. 35. 

V. (VII.) With a dative case Trepl signifies around: trepl ft^jxols 
X<>peveiv, Herod ian. v. c. 3. § l6. ti/s tuiv bopvepopwv Trepl avrrj typov- 
pas, Xiphil. in Macrin. 

About, On : Trepl rrj %etpl ypvaovv batcrvXtoi' (f>epeii>, Plato Reip. 
ii. p. 382. 1. 40. as el^ov Trepl awfiaaw eadfiras, Herodian, viii. c. 
bit. § 13. 

For, concerning, about, on account of : Trepl rrj noXet bebievai, tyo- 
fieHadai : TllUC. Tourtav c)>) eve/co. Qappeiv yjptj Trepl Tjj avrov \pw)(rj avbpa, 
Plato Piiaed. c. 6'3. Trepl TrrS^yw epibaivofuer, Horn. Od. a, 402. v. 
Od. /3, 245. p, 471. Tytarus ap. Lvcurg. p. 212. [1. 10.] ed. 
Reisk. 1 " 

Through, because of, out of: wepl </>o/3w, iEsch}'!. Choeph. 33. So 
afi(pl Tnpfiei, Id. 543. and au<fi (pofio), Eurip. Or. 815. [ed. Pors.] 
v. llgen. ad Horn. h. Cer. p. 560. 

VI. (VIII.) With an accusative Trepl usually signifies around, and is 
used in the same manner as a/ui<f>l, to which it is sometimes joined ; 
as, ctju0f 7rept xpjjvnv, Horn. 11. /3, 305. oydai V a/M{>l Trepl ^e-yaX.' 
"taj^ov, II. v, [<p, 10.] In such passages au<pl is used as an adverb. 
Sometimes both are united in one word ; as, u^nrepl aKuipovTes, 
Oppian, Hal. i. 

Ilept, as well as c'tfif), is joined with words signifying number, in 
the sense of about, nearly : vavs re Karabvaavres Trepl ejobofi^Kov-a, 
TllUC. i, 54. els eros i]br} Trepi ttov 6ybor}Koarov eXrjXaKUJS, having by 
this time arrived at somewhere about his eightieth year : Herodian. 
vii. c. 5. § 3. 

VII. (IX.) But the sense about, in signification of time, is peculiar 
to Trepl : irepl Xvyvwv atyas Trapeunreaorres eXaQov, Dion. Halic. vii. p. 
426". 1. 7- Kat yap i)v Trepl bvaiv i]\iov, Id. viii. p. 533. 1. 23. Trepl 
beiXrjv 6\plav, hi. vi. p. 364. 1. 13. Trepl fieoas viiKras, Id. ix. p. 56 1. 
1. 30. i'lbr} Trepl top opdpov ?]V, Id. viii. p. 515. 1. 25. irepl irXv,Qovaav 
ayopav, about the time when the forum is most crowded : Xen. Anab. 
ii. p. 273. M. V. H. xii, 30. v. Perizon. ad 1. c. Graev. Lect. 
Hes. c. 10. 

Ilept with a reciprocal pronoun, spontaneously : Trepl aii-a tcarappeT., 
Demosth. Ol. ii. p. 21. 1. 4. ed. R*. ebuuei Trepl avrf icaTaXvdrjaeadai, 
Plut. in Caes. p. 727. p. 1334. St. 



10 "Opa, Si /.uxiidpie, /X77 nep\ rots (piXrd- Bas. 1. — 5. S. 

rots icvfievris Te ko). KLvfivvevys, take care x A metaphor taken from melting snow^ 

lest you run a risk in what is most pre- sinking into and about itself, says Reiske : 

dous: Plato Prutag. p. 284. 1. 49. ed. Greek Orators, vol. x. p. 61.— J. S. 



Rule 4—9.] Upd. 255 

Flept signifies, occupation, pursuits, employment, office : ol irepl pV°- 
ptKi]v } the rhetoricians; ol irepl ttjv ypanpaTtKrjv, the grammarians; 
cl irepl aotyiav, the sophists : Plato Hipp. maj. p. 281. ol irepl rovi 
Xoyovs, the orators : Isocr. Evag. p. 377. More fully, ol irepl t>]i> QtXo- 
aotpiay biarpl/joi'Tes, Id. ad Nicocl. p. 48. ol irepl ttjv avXi)i', the cour- 
tiers : Julian, p. 271. Also state or condition ; vvv be lujKparrjs fiev 
eon irepl arrdevetav ryu rfjs crrpayyovpias, Plato to Laodamas. 

It serves to form a periphrasis instead of a genitive case ; as, at 
rjboval at irepl to a&fxu, for al rod ad)/j.aros, Plato Phaed. c. 63. v. et 
c. 9. Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 365. [1. 6. ed. R.] p. 1414. [I. 15. 
ed. R.]* 

In composition wept signifies — 1. circuit; roundabout; as in ne- 
ptpXeirew, irepieXavvetv, irepibtrelaQai : Xen. Symp. vii, 3. irept- 
arparonebeveiv iroXtv, Polyb. i, 2S. — 2. upon every side ; from every 
side; as in ireptyXt cr%pa, Hippocr. v. Fobs. (Ec. Hipp. ■xepitcuirTeiv, 
■xepieXelv. — 3. It intends or augments in a good sense, irspifiXeir- 
ros, irepiTevrjs, irepfyapi)s, ireptovala : Xen. CEc. i, 4. irepKpnvys, 
Lys. p. 719. [I. 13. ed. R.] ireptira6i]s, Polyb. i, 55. In a bad 
sense : irepifiorjTos avarao-ts Kal Katcla, Demosth. pro Cor. p. 324. 
[1. 28. ed. R.] irepiepyos, Id. Phil. iv. p. 143. [1. 17- ed. R.]— 4. 
negligence; contempt; as in irepiibelv, Xen. Symp. iv, 23. De- 
mosth. pro Cor. p. 246. [1. 7. ed. R.] ireptopqv, Id. ib. [I. 13.] ire- 
pt(ppope'iv, Aristoph. Nub. 225. -ireptoitTeaQat, Id. ib. 124. — 5. trans- 
ference, removal ; as in nepta-irgp iroXeptop enel, Polyb. i, 26. ireptTpe- 
7reiv eh Ttva tijv al-iav, Lys. p. 210. [I. 2. ed. R.] — 6. mastery, con- 
quest ; as in irepiyiyveaOat tivos, irepieliat. 

VIII. (X.) npo, which governs a genitive only, most usually signi- 
fies, before ; and that with regard either to place 4 y as npo QvpQv : -npo 
noXXov 7>7s TToXews ovti, being yet a great way from the city: Dion. 
Hal. ix. p. 593. 1. 20. or persons ; as, irpo tov fiatriXews. irpb iraarjs 
TTjs Trapara£ews, before all the army in array : or time ; as, *pb iroX- 
Xwp eru>p, many years before ; irpb Spas ctpapiraCeodat, prematurely ; s 
irpb yuias KaXav bwp MapWov, (or rrj irpb puas ls.aXavbu>v ij/xepa,) the day 
before the Calends of March, pridie Kalendas Martii ; rrj irpb beta 
KaXavbtiit ijpepa, the tenth day before the Calends. In this sense 
irporptTa is, three days before: Trporptra oicrivyv irotrio-avTes, Thuc. 
ii, 34. 

IX. (XI.) It signifies, rather than, before, in preference to : ^bev 
vnnXoyiCeoQat [xi)re 6a.va.-ov /JLi'ire aXXo ri p.r]bev irpb tov alaypov, Plat. 
Apol. Socr. 11. iravTas tovs Kivbvvovs vfiarao-dat OeXovcn, irpb tov Ttjv 

* Add irepl ir6Sa, fitting, applicable: yrjs, to pursue him from place to place: 

irepl irdSa Sri aoi Kal ^vdyyeXos ovros, Aristoph. Achani. 235. y?iv irpb yrjs 

Lucian, Adv. Indoct. p. 546. B. ed. e\avvofj.ai, iEsch. Prom. 703. See Dr. 

Salmur. — J. S. Blomfield's Glossary. — J. S. 

y Upb tov, which is commonly used of z Avp-n 5' 4k irorauov ^v%ph trviei rjZBi 

time, (see Aristoph. Eccles. 221. and foil.) irpb, Horn. Od. e, 469. Add irpb. (abso- 

appears in the following passage to signi- lute,) prematurely : irpi ye areva^eis, Kal 

fy anteriority of place: SvvriBein, Sicnre- <p6fiov irXea tis el- 'E7ri<rxes es t av Kal 

pdcrasTas irpb tov Svax^pias, els robs irpo- ret Koura irpoa/.iddris, iEsch. Prom. 721. 

fip-npievovs a<piiceo-Qai toitovs, antejacent : — J. S. 
Polyb. iii, 34. SiwKeiv rbv avdpa, y%v irpb 



256 H(ws. [Chap. ix. § viii. 

vTraf>yj>v<T<\v eXarTudrjvai 5o'£av. irpb tov Atos avrov /Jyciyev aiirbv, pre- 
ferred him before Jupiter himself: Xipliil. in Aug. irpb iravruv ay 
•noit}(7uifx>)v, kvoTtLVTO. tov Kivbvrov airwauadai : and so with ri/Aiicrdni, 
yyeladai, enaivelv, &C. /Ai/re iralbas irept irXeiovos iroiov, /i»/re 
T() Crjv, fili~e a.XXo fit]bev, irpb tov ctKalov : Plato Crit. C. ]6. el fii) 
biKatbr e pov y/urjv Kal KaXXtov eivat irpb tov tyevyeiv re ical airobi- 

bpacTKeir, Plat. Phaed. c. 47. 

For, for the sake of, in defence of : nob tovtov reQravai av 7roXXa.Kts 
eXotro, Plato Symp. c. 6. fia^eadat irpo re iraibwv ku\ irpb yvvaiKwv, 
Horn. 11. 8, 57- 

In composition irpb signifies — 1. anteriority as to place, before; 
as in TrporeixiaiJia, Polyb. iv, 6"l. irpoirvXaiov, Demosth. p. 174. [1. 
23. ed. R.] irpoayetv, Matth. ii, Q. "^po ™y bcpOaXfiwv irpoipalveTat, 
jEschin. de Pais. Leg. p. 313. [1. 14. ed. R.] — 2. advance, protru- 
sion ; fortcard ; as in irpofiatveiv : ovto) iroppcj irpoeXrjXvdaai (pvXctKrjs, 
Xen. Hier. iv. 4. ti)v aifxaoiav ir poay ay cvtcs, orevwrepav tijv bbbv 
ireiroiifKaaiv, Demosth. adv. Callicl. p. 1 279. [1. 13. ed. R.] irporel- 
vetv tcis x e ~ l P as > Demosth. de Fals. Leg. p. 421. [1. 18. ed. R.] npo- 
vevetr, Polyb. i, 21. — 3. defence, protection; as in irpbfiaxos, Xen. 
Hier. xi, 12. irpofiaXXeaOai, Reiske's hid. to Demosth. irpoTarreiv 
eavrbv, Andocid. p. 54. [1. 3. ed. R.] — 4. publication, publicity ; 
as in irpoetire'iv tivi iroXeuov, irpo'ievat, irpoypacpeiv, irpoKTjpvTTeiv. — 5. 
presidency, lead, administration, superintendence ; as in irpoioraadai 
twv 'EXXjpcjv, Demosth. p. 143. [I. 15. ed. R.] — 6. before, in signi- 
fication of time ; as in eavT>)v irpoavelXe tov avbpbs, Pint, de Garrul. 
p. 508. irpoayopevetv to /jiiXXov, Xen. Symp. iv, 5. irpoanoXXv^ai, 
Id. Apol. 27. irpoiriveiv, 3L\. V. H. iii, 15. irpoairodviiaKeir, Polyb. 
iii, 12. — 7. preference; as in irpoaipe'ioQai, irpoTt/j^v ri tivos. v. 
Cattier. Gazoph. p. 88. Upb is often redundant in compound words; 
v. Fisch. praef. ad Well. p. xiii. as in Tcpobtbaaiceiv : v. Brunck. ad 
Aristoph. Nub. 9S7. But often where it appears redundant, it has 
some force ; hin,fort, her ; as, rrpo'iairreiv, Ivinschicken. 



SECTION VIII.— On the preposition ir P 6s. 

Rule I. Pipes with a genitive very often signifies, agency, by; as, 
irpbs aTrcivTuv OepairevecrBai : irpbs avrtbiKOv w/doXvyrjrai. 

II. In favour of, for : KaXXias boKel /moi fiaXa irpbs Ylpw-ayopov 
elvai, Plat, in Protag. irpbs rfjs j3ovXrjs kari, to iroXXovs elvai tov 
bi'j/jov irpoararas : Dion. Hal. x. p. 657- I. 4. s os ecpdr) iroXXa irpbs 
iav-ov cat Kar eiceivtav £>m;rpa£ajuei>0s, Xiphil. in Aug. irpbs eav- 
tov to Xoyiov kXajifiavev, Zosiui. ii. c. 16. elvai /dkv yap irpbs avrov 
tov aerby, Arrian. i, 19. v. Hcinst. ad Lucian. t. i. p. 254. Koen. ad 
Greg. Cor. p. 44. 

a TV yap ifx.)]v bpyty iniravai x^eirbv elvai ital irpbs ah-rosv, Plut. in Brut. 
!a% irpbs £/a.ov \tyovri, Aristoph. Vesp. p. 1810. 1. 32. ed. H. St. — J. S. 
647. 456ksl 5e /ecu rb tov tSttov 6e?of 



Rule 1—7.] Tlpos. 257 

And just the contrary, against: irpbs avbpbs e)(8pov eirityipuiv tijv 
iptyov, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 457. v. Sylburg. ad 1. 

As, in the character of : irpbs vfipews rets vovdeaias Xaftfiavwr, Philo 
in Legat. ad' Caium. 

III. To, for, conducive to : eart fioi tovto irpbs ayadov. tcaKeivo 5i) 
toIs iroXefiiois irpbs Katcov yevon' dv. And without a dative : irpos tIvos 
av ayadov yevoiro ', 

IV. It signifies, congruity, fitness, suitableness, conformity, cha- 
racteristicalness : irpbs rdvbpos e<m to ey^eiptjpLa, the enterprise is 
quite in character with such a man; oyn ,&m irpbs rijs iroXews, row 
irdXai <ppovtfuaros — Kadvtpiecdai. irpbs Xoyov, pertinent ; h irpos rpbirov, 
according to disposition ; c or properly, fitly, decorously ; and dirb 
rpoirov, the contrary: irpbs dv/xov, agreeable, acceptable; dirb Ov/jiov, 
the contrary ; irpbs bUrjs, with reason, with cause : Soph. (Ed. R. 
1014. EI. 1211. to which bky is used as equivalent, El. 1212. 

V. It is used in phrases significant of kindred, consanguinity, 
relationship ; as, 01 irpos a'lfidros, relations [by, blood; "61 irpos irarpos, 
irpos urjrpos, relations on the father's, on the mother's, side : tXevdepos 
irpos irarpos ml /ijjrpos, vEschin. c. Ctes. p. 298. 1. 38. irdiriros 6 irpos 
firjTpds, Id. ib. In the same sense ol irpos dvbp5>v olneioi, and ol irpos 
yvvaiKCJv. to irpos irarpos, yuTjrpoy, &c. family on the father's side, 
mother's, &c. underst. ykvos, which is sometimes expressed ; as, rb /uej/ 
yap irpos irarpos avr<5 yevos ec rwv rfjs GvynXrirov fiovXfjs eiricrrj[x(3)v i\v, 
Herodian i, J. also <ri/yyei/e7s ra irpos irarpos, and the like ; relations 
on the fat hei-'s side; 'ABrjvaioi or~es to. irpos /ujjrpos, Paus. in Aeh. 
p. 398. I. 35. 

Not unlike this is the signification on the part of: o!/zcu yap ovk 
d^apiarws fiol e^eiv, ovre irpos vjiwv, ovre irpos rfjs 'RXXabos airdarjs '. 
Xen. Anab. i. 

VI. In swearing, conjuring, &c. it is by ; as, irpos Oeov. But in 
this form it is sometimes before; as, avainov elvai irpos Qeov re ical 
irpos dvBpwrrwv. bpa"v ovbev dbiKov ovre irpos BeStv ovre irpos dvBpuiiruv, 
Thuc. i, 71. v. II, a, 338. 

It signifies towards: rrjv erepyv tu>v yecpvpeojv rr}v irpos rov Tlovrov, 
Herodot. vii, 55. irpbs aovs, Eurip. Rhes. 557. d 

VII. With a dative case irpbs signifies, near, at : irpbs Trj iroXei. 
With, within : elvai irpbs eavra, to be engaged in thought ; irpbs 

iavrm o-Konel, he considers within himself. In : fjpev irpbs rube ry 
X6yu>, we were engaged in this discourse ; ol be eyprjyopevai re avrbv 
irdXat e<pa(jav, Kal irpbs eirio-oXals elvai : and that he was occupied in 
writing letters : Philostr. de Vit. Apoll. v, 31. irpbs tovtu 6Xos elfii, 

b El p.\v e\arrovrai % fxi] eXarrovrai a ApctKovridri : having the shape of a serpent 
pljTwp tSiv &\Ao)v Sta rb ovrws exetv, av- in your lower parts: Aristoph. Vesp. 438. 
ti'kk iTrio-Ke^Sfj.eda, idv ri rj/uv irpbs \6- Tlpbs, on account of; irari)p — airt&Xero, 



yov fi, vvv de rdSe irp6repov aK^ii^Qa: irpbs avro<pdip(ov ajj.ir\aKi)fJLaTa)V b~iir\as 
Plato Gorg. p. 307. 1. 48. ed. Bas. 1. — otfets apd£as avrbs avrovpyq x e P^ '■ Soph. 

J. S. Anticr. SI. nr n b c Sti t n i'i n- ai v e'vto've 

Ov yap ?jv irpbs rod Kvpov rpSirov, 

>ra (i.i) airoSiSovai : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 11. 

.S. 

T fl Ketcpoty ifjpus &vat, ra, irpbs wodwv 



Antig. 51. irpbs Sr; rovrwv 67wye 
c Ov yap %v irpbs rod Kvpov rpSvov, rl9r)u.i r\\v rav xpv^aruv /cttjciv irXeicrrov 
iyovra fir) airoMovai : Xen. Anab. i, 2, 11. a£iav ehat, Plato de Rep. i. p. 372. 1. 29. 
—J- S. ed. Bas. 1.— J. S. 



2 K 



C58 Y\p6s. [Chap. ix. § viii. 

I am wholly occupied in this: v. Hor. [Ep. i, 1, 11.] In this sense 
it governs an accusative also. 

In addition to, over and above, besides; irpbs yap ry ve/jie<TT)Tij> kuI 
uyerres, Plut. in Demostli. p. 855. reos kari' irpos he rw vey cnraXbs, 
1 lato Symp. p. l65. i\v he 6 TlXaTW irpbs rrj KaKorideiq. kcu <piX6ho£ps t 
Atlien. xi. p. 507. I. 31. v. Plat, in Phaedr. p. 240. 1. IS. 45. p. 270. 
init. Isocr. Nicocl. p. 70. [p. 86. 1. 4. ed. Battie, Cantab. 1729-] 
trpbs he tovtois, en he irpbs tovtois, and moreover ; and in the same 
sense, without a case, e irpos he, irpos he kcu : ical to irpos (or irpoabv), 
and the surplus ; nal irpos, Herodot. viii, 29. 

VIII. It signifies office, employment, capacity: e'L irws nvas irelaat. 
hvvr}Qelev, Hj twv 6\p07roi<ov, 1) tu>v irpos rats kv\i£i : Herodian iii, 5/ 

IX. With the accusative case irpos has very various senses ; as, 
irpbs x<*P lv >for the sake of pleasing, to win favor; also simply for 
the sake of: irpbs x^piv fiopds,for the sake of food : Soph. Ant. 30. 
v. Id. in Phil. 11.56. irpos eiros, to the purpose, pertinent ; tovto t'i 
irpos eiros ; what is this to the purpose? in which sense airoKpiveadat 
irpos to. epwrwjxeva '. irpbs rohert Hiravra KaQioTaoBai tov Xoyov, to 
turn the whole discourse to this point: Aristid. Xeyeiv irpbs to fieX- 
tmjtov, Plat. Gorgt p. 502. 1. 42. ^evara/ieros irpbs to ypeiuthes , for 
advantage, for profit : Herodian ii, 9. That which is relative is 
called by philosophers irpos ti : but irpbs t'i ; is, to what end, where- 
fore? v. John xiii, 28. 

To the amount of: diore cnroXecrdat avraiv irpbs eirraKoalovs, Xen. 
H. Gr. i. p. 435. So ad in Latin : v. Ter. Heaut. i, 1, 93. ad millia 
xcn. Caes. B. G. i. 

X. It is often put with an accusative case in an adverbial sense ; 
as, irpbs aKplfietav, accurately ; irpbs afdo}>jfi.t>, abundantly ; irpbs a<po- 
aiuatv, perfunctorily ; [par manibre d' ac*quit ; in such a manner as 
just to be able to say one has done a thing;] irpbs (Slav, forcibly, 
perforce; irpbs j3(av tlvos, against one's will, by compulsion ;S irpos 
eirijpeiav, contumeliously ; [and harmfully, vexatiously ;] irpbs eVr/- 
peiav Xaj3e~u>, to take as an insult or injury ; irpbs e^dpav, inimically, 
with hostile intentions ; irpbs mipbv, or &pav, opportunely, seasonably ; 
irpbs 6pyr\v, angrily ; irpbs i/fipiv, injuriously, insultingly ; irpbs vfipiv 
Xaj3e7v, to take as an injury or insult ; tvq he prj irpbs opyrjv rj irpbs 
vfipiv Xa(5rj to irpdyfia, Dion. Hal. ix. p. 576. I. 19. irpbs virepfioXrjv, 
surpassingly, exceedingly ; irpbs virovoiav, suspiciously ; irpbs (pdovov, 
enviously, invidiously ; irpbs fyiXiav, kindly, in a friendly manner. 

XI. I7pos signifies, towards, regarding, for : to. irpbs deovs ocria: 



* Xanth. x°P eveiv Pov\o[iai. Bacch. mosth. in Aphob. iii. p. 45. 1. 11. ed. 

K&yo>ye Trp6s. Aristoph. Ran. 415'. ijfj.e7s Herwag. ii. irpoain, Reisk. 859, 20. 

5' a£iovfAev rrj ir6\ei irpoiKa — afivveiv — . e Cod. Bavar. — J. S. 
«ai irpbs, ovk alrovfiev ovSev : Aristoph. / Add that irpbs signifies purpose or 

Eq. 578. wv d irar^p 7]fuv KareXiire are- end:"va. irpbs tovtois avTols i)yep.6ves 

povfiivovs, Kal irpbs inrb tovtwv vPpi^ofii- Siai, Xen. Mem. iii, 2, 3.— J. S. 
vovs : Demosth. in Aphob. i. p. 835. e iEschyl. toIs irovypoTs 8' 5}SeTat ; 

1. 10. ed. Reisk. yudo-eo-Oe,— to nefxap- Bacch. oil Srjr iKelvrj y', ctAXa XW™ 

Tvptipjva its io-Tiv a\7i8rj,—ical irpbs '6n irpbs ftiav : Aristoph. Ran. 1457. — J. S. 
V??/iio?Toi kuto. t\\v papTvpiav ovSey : De- 



Rule 8— 13.] Upbs. 25,9 

and simply ra irpbs deovs, Demosth. 01. iii. ra Trpos tovs iroXefxiovs 
evirpeirT] iroiijoaodai. irpbs ryv vboov iroielv, to be good for the disease ; 
to. irpos ooarnpiav <ptpovTa, the things conducive to preservation or 
safety ; Sea ye irpbs rfjv iroXiv, at least as far as the state is con- 
cerned ; (lay Xeyeis re^yiKwrepas Nv/u(pas — Avoiov Trpos Xoyovs elvat ! 
Plat. Phaedr. p. 263. to. irpos fffxds, the affairs that concern us : h 
(but, irpbs r/fxas korlv, it is in our own power ; irpos fifias avTovs eon 
kui to raXws Kal to kcikQs aKoveiv, Plut. Apophth. p. 177- *>) 

XII. On account of, on the score of : to aveonov, Kal drropov, Kal 
irpos KarabiKas fj \pea tijv kitiTifiiav airoXwXeKos (fivXov : Dion. Hal. iv. 
p. 235. 1. 35.' 

Towards, to or with : ras irpos aXXr/Xovs biaXXayas ironjaaadai. 
irpos tov eyBpbv biaXXaTTeoBai. irpos tovs cpiXovs KoivoXoyelodai. 
For : apyvpiov irpos tov o'itov KUTaXXctTTeodai. 
With, in company of : irpos tov flaotXea. 

XIII. It signifies, proportion, suitableness, agreeableness ; accord- 
ing to, with reference to 'J to fxev yap eipos 7jv es e£ /uaXiora arablovs' 
fiaSos be ovbe irpos Xoyov tov evpovs, aXXa iroXii brj ti fiadvrepos : 
Arrian, de Exp. Al. iii, 29. irpos utyav emorois biavelfiai. irpos to 
KadfJKov irdvTa oiKovoiie'iv. irpos HXXov £rjv. bel ovv irpos to. avLifial- 
vovra, olfxat, tovtois yprjoBai : Xen. Cyrop. i, 44. ovbe irpos apyvpiov 
Trjv evbaifiovlav eKpivov, Isocr. Paneg. p. 109. v. Matth. xix, 8. 

In comparison of: etvai tujv apyaiwv tovs irep\ r?}»' oofiav <pavXovs 
irpos vLids : Plat. Hipp. maj. p. 2S1. avBpwnwv 6 o-ofpwraTOs irpos Bebv 
irldrjKos (pavelrat, Id. ib. p. 289- oti fie irpos ras Gas irpa£eis eiraiveaai 
erbXiujoe, Lucian, Dial. Alex, et Pliilipp. t. i. p. 396. In this sense, 
ojs, &s ye, oaov, vera, oaov ye, oaa ye, oaov bi), 00a bt), may be put 
before irpos. 

Duration of time : irpos reooapaKOVTa ijfiepas, for forty days. 

TJpos ravra frequently signifies, wherefore, therefore ; as in Eurip. 
Iph. A. 15(58. 1607. So Trpos Tube, as in iEschyl. Eum. 533. Sept. c. 
Th. 314. 

Upds is also, with, i. e. the same way with; as, irpds to irvevfia 
irereoBat, to fly with the wind. 

In addition to, over and above : beXrov d^ofx-nv Qepwv 001 irpbs to. 
irp\v yeypap.Lie.va, Eurip. Iph. A. 896. Trpos tovt hv e'i p ebei ti Kal 
irorov Xafielv, Soph. Phil. 292. as Wakef. has rightly corrected the 
verse. IIpos eavrbv oKoirel., is, he considers within himself. So irpbs 
eavrbv avaXapfiaveiv, to think over to himself: Plat. Hipp. Maj. 
p. 288. v. Soph. El. 2S1. [285.] * 

* "Hitieoav yap irdvTes Stj il-elr) — elirew, of the fine: Polyb. v, 27. — J. S. 
€? ti 71s exoi twv irpos tov ir6\ep.ov : J Elf ris Kal &\\os, %X els *P 0S T ^ % T V 

Xen. Anab. iv, 3, 8. raxeccs oe Kal ir p b 9 n&aivav t)]v rpixa: Theophrast. Eth. 

robs vrjo-idoras, Kal ir pbs robs rrjv 'Acrlav Char. c. ii. for your years. — J. S. 
KarotKovvras rb irapa.TrXi]ffLov ovvifir) yt- k Add that irpbs with an accusative 

veodai : quickly it was the same case with signifies, equal to : irpbs roivvv iLiravra 

regard to the islanders, &c. Polyb. v, 105. tov mtw aWwv e/nroplaiv a.<piKvov- 

— J« S. fitvov (oItov, viz.) 5 e/c tov X16vtov oItos 

t'AiraydyuvenetevoeTbuAeovTiov irpbs eloirKewv ioHv : Demosth. adv. Lept. 

t\]v avaSoxhv, on account of his having p. 466. 1. 22. ed. Eeisk. — J. S. 
made himself answerable for the payment 



2fJ0 'Ynep. [Chap. ix. § ix. 

In composition irpbs signifies, motion towards, access to ; as in 
irpoaip-^endat. tlo (iaaiXel, yEI. V. H. ix, 3. irpucjohot, ^wpiov irpuo- 
puruv, Xen. Apol. 23. irpooKaXeladai. — 2. addition; over and above ; 
us in irpoaypdcpeiv, Demosth. p. 629- [1. 1. ed. R.] irpoo-eTi, irpoa- 
epuryv, Xen. Mem. iii, 9> 4. irpocrairoXeirai, Polyb. i, 74. irpoabia- 
oafe'iv, Id. iii, 24. irpoaeirifxeTpelv tlpI, Id. iv, 51. — 3. near, at, in, 
upon, against; as in irpoaKadicleodai, jEschin. Dial, ii, l6. irpoo- 
Kaprepe'tv rrj iroXiopicia, Polyb. i, 55. irpooKvaaQai rols Xfflois, Xen. 
Mem. i, 2, 30. — 4. towards; as in irpoo-cpepeaOai tipl, Xen. Mem. iii, 
1 1, 11. — 5. It intends or augments; as in irpocraiTe'iv , Xen. Apol. 9. 
■npooavafiaiveiv, Polyb. iii, 72. irpoaeiriatTiieadai, Id. i, 29. v. Cattier, 
Gazopb. p. 89- 



SECTION IX. — ON THE PREPOSITIONS virep, virb, x^p". 

Rule I. 'Y7rep governs a genitive and accusative only. Witb a 
genitive it signifies, over, above; about, concerning ; l by, in the 
name of: m Apollon. Rh. iii, 701. for, on account of. n It signifies 
also, in the place or stead of: V7rep twv airodavovTwv ev tl-> irpas 
Avriaras iroXefiio orpa.TiwTtiv, y/tyovv irepovs KaraypcHpeiv : Dion. Hal. 
p. 553. 1. 41. fxeXeip be tipl Kal oXXlo virep eavrov ti irpo'ibelp, Thuc. 
i, 141. [p. 211. 1. 14. ed. Bekk.] Also, the motive: 6 yap Beds eanp 
b ivepywv ev vp~iv Kal to BeXetv, kuI to evepyeiv, virep rfjs evboKias : of 
his good pleasure: Paul, ad Pbilipp. ii, 13. virep rfjs els to. koipo. 
<piXoTifiias, Dion. Halic. ix. v. Mark!, ad Eur. Suppl. 1125. 

II. For the sake of, for the purpose of: virep tov XuBelp. virep tov 
f.irj TrapairXijowv ti -nade'iv. virep be. tov Kal tcl /SapjSapa >}avya$.eiv eBvr) 
bia <ppovTibos rifiels e'£o/zer, Herodian iii. c. 7. § 15." 

III. Witb an accusative case virep signifies, beyond, above ; as, 
virep Xoyov, beyond expression, beyond the power of language; virep 
airavTa beravra, Kal to. aXXct, beivov ti Kal ovk aveKTOP eivai 'Pw/uat'ots: 
beyond all these things — : Dion. Halic. v. p. 332. 1. 26. tcl virep 
ijfids, the things which are above our power ; virep tovs IbiioTas exeiv, 
to exceed the capacity of ordinary persons : Isocr. Paneg. [p. 101. 
1. 5. ed.Battie, Cantabr. 1729.] virep top UpioTea fxr}^a.vij ti)v efifiv 
a.Kp6aaiv airobibpaaKeiv, with shifts beyond even those of Proteus : 
Lucian, Dem. Enc. p. 903. 

Through, by means of: twp virep iirirovs irTaiaavTiov, of the number 



1 'AW' ov% virep QiXiirirov, uai d>v arjS r' abrov KecpaXijs : Odyss. 0, 261. — 

itcewos irpcvnei vvv, oi>x oStlcs exovcriv : J. S. 

Demosth. Phil. iii. p. 119. 1. 4. ed. R. n 'Tirep abrov rod irapajirivai rbu v6- 

tcad' ot/s Kaipovs 7/ elcrayyeXia e56Sr] r\ els fiou, Tocravrijp eScoite SIkijv : Demosth. in 

tV fiovXr/v virep 'Apiffrdpxov tov Molt- Mid. p. 572- 1. 3.ed. Reisk. — J. S. 

Xov, '6ti eXi) NiK&b'yLiov aireKrovies : Id. in ° Add the sense, in favor of, for the 

Mid. 554, 11. ff acpe s obDev el3 or cov v trip advantage of : tovs v6llovh ws irpaorarovs 

Ttiiv irpaTTOLtevccv, Plut. in Aiat. p. 1884. Kal fierpiccraTOVs efoat, virep ra>v aSwd- 

l. 17. ed. St. — J.S. tuv fidKurr ecri: Demosth. in Timocr. 

m Aio-o-op.' virep Gveuv ko\ Saiftovos,— p. 759. 1. 20. ed. Reisk. — J. S. 



RuLli 1—6.] 'Ynep, 'Yiro. 26 1 

of those who ruined themselves by keeping horses: Schol. Aristoph. 
Nub. 31. 

[For, in signification of the end:] Avyelov — vnep rriv tZv ai^arwv 
eKxyaiv [e i:\votv] embiwKOPTOs, Schol. Aristoph. Nub. 508. [500. ed. 
Bekk.] 

Intermission : virep fxiav (underst. y/uepar), every other day. 

In composition inrep signifies — 1. beyond, (of place ;) as in ra 
virepopia, Xen. Symp. iv, 31. vwepopHeaBai, iEschin. c. Ctesiph. 
p. 522. [1. 4. ed. R.] virepBopeiv v\prj\ov virep epxos, Demosth. 
p. 422. [I. 24. ed. R. from Solon.] vnepicBpLeiv and vitepveo\Kelv, 
Polyb. iv, 19. viii, 29- — 2. beyond, (of time;) as in virepyrjpos, M\. 
V. H. iv, 1. virepcuc/uios, 1 Cor. vii, 36. v7repripepos, Demosth. p. 518. 
[I. 2. ed. R.] — 3. excess; as in virepayairav, Demosth. p. 1 72. [I. 18. 
ed. R.] vireptpofielaBai, Xen. (Ec. viii, \j. virepeaBieiv, Xen. Mem. 
i, 2, 3. virep^aipeiv, JE,\. V. H. iv, 25. virepepavBai rrjv evyeveiav 
twos, Id. xii, 1. vireptcaBapais, Hippocr. Aphor. iv, 5. — 4. contempt, 
pretermission or overpassing, negligence, transgression or violation ; 
as in virepopqv, Xen. Mem. i, 2, 9- virepoirriicos, Polyb. v, 46. virep- 
fialveiv ttoXXci, iEscbin. Dial, iii, 12. vofxov virepfiaiyeiv, Diod. S. 
xvii, 34. vnepftaXos, Iliad o, 94. &c. — 5. protection ; as in i»7rep- 
aairiceiv, Polyb. vi, 37 '• VTrepe\eiv ras xeipas tlvi, Id. xv, 29« — 6. 
superiority, preeminence ; as in virepj3a\\eiv , Xen. Mem. iv, 3, 7. 
bireptpepeiv 7r6XXu> twos, Id. Apol. 15. v. Cattier, Gazoph. p. pi. 

IV. 'Ytto governs a genitive, dative, and accusative. With a geni- 
tive it signifies, agency, by ; and in this sense it follows even a verb 
neuter ; as, airoBavelv viro twv it oXe pilar, viro rCov hiKaoT&v eKtreaely. 
And so with the verb substantive : elrai ej' bofy viro riros, to be 
honored by a person. It is sometimes suppressed : ijv tovto viKrjOys 
e/iov, Aristoph. Nub. 1083. Also under: vnb paXrjs, Lucian. 

V. It signifies, on account of, through, because of: viro r^s cnrexQeias : 
v. Markl. ad Suppl. Eurip. 1125. vir evbelas ovx e'x w °' Tl av ^"atrw 
XPVcrij)fxai. p For bia : viro gkotov. In : viro ri/s arotrlas j'jv Yefifjpos, 
in perplexity : Xiphil. in Sever. With : viro Girovb^s eiroielro rrjv 
buo'iiv, Time, iii, 33. 'Y<p' eavrov is, spontaneously : ravro fxoi 
iroiyjaai vcf vfiiov avruii', of your own accord: Id. iv, 64. But some- 
times l(p' eavrov is, under his own auspices, conduct or authority, 
in chief: Paus. in Ach. p. 417. in fi"- ? 

VI. With a dative viro signifies, under: biro viots yeveaOai, 
Metaphr. Eutrop. vi, 24. 

With: viro pafibots bfiov iraaats ical ireXeicetn, Pint. Public, i. e. the 
fasces being carried before him: and in the same sense vnb <pwTl, 
with lights carried before. The agent, instrument, means, cause : 
irpwTtj) (era) fxera Tip 1 viro TaXXois yevofikvqv aXwaiv, after the taking 

P TV Twf o\wv r^vSe rd£iv ffvvex ovaiv noting immediate consequence : robs %oas 

(ot Oeol) arpifirj koI ayriparov ku\ avafidp- iriveiv viro rrjs aaAiriyyos, at the sound of 

ri\rov, Kal virb k&\\ovs Ka.1 [xeycOovs the trumpet : Aristoph. Ach. 1001. 'Tirb 

adiriyijTov : Xen. Cyrop. viii. — J. S. is often conjoined with 4k by Homer : see 

1 Add, among: ov xopoW, ouS' v<p' II. %, 146. Od. \, 37. n, 107. 113. 

1)\[k.(cv veaviSwv, tyi)<pa>v Ki)/xby 'io"Tr\K %%- 1, 489. and Longin. § x.~ J. S. 
owr" : Aristoph. Tbesni. 1031. At, on, 



262 T«ro, Xupis. [Chap. ix. § ix. 

of the c[ty by the Gauls: Eutrop. Metaphr. ii. ?/ fiiv vtt 'Ay xlirrj 
Texe fiovKoXeovri, Horn. II. e, 313/ eKdavovnov be avriov xntb kuv/jluti, 
Zosim. ii. c. 2. v. Abresch. ad ^Esch. iii. p. 54. vtto tvIs oliceiois 
a/jLapTy'ifMaai, Kai ov-% vtto reus vols eoQuXn <jTpaTT)y{]/Jiacri. 6 fxev br) 
ravra eXeyev vnb bibatTKaXia rrj KaXXixpurovs : Paus. in Acll. p. 41(5. 

Close to : iroXiv KTioavTes virb rfj "Ibt], Paus. in Acll. p. 417* vit 
avrfj ttj 7ro\e«, Thucyd. ii, 79- 

Subservient to : to. opyava ra virb rrj fiovaiKy, Kal ret v-irb rats &XXais 
Texvats, Plato Hipp. maj. p. 295. 1. 34. 

VII. (VIII.) With an accusative virb signifies, close to, when motion 
is spoken of; as, vtto rr)v ttoKiv. vko "\Xiov fiXdov : Horn. Near, about, 
in signification of time : vtto tovs avrovs xpovovs. Under, in signifi- 
cation of dominion, or power ; [and also in a sense not figurative, of 
place :] v(p' eavrbv TroieicrOat, to bring into subjection to himself: v. 
Lennep. ad Phalar. p. 242. ws e^dpov 7rpo7n]XaKi$ovTOs abews tovs vnb 
X^pas, Dion. Hal. vii. p. 443. 1. 42. 

'Ytto ti, in a manner, in some manner : Xoyov eh'idn, Kal vno rt 
a<re/3>7, Plat. Pha3dr. p. 242. 1. 35. 

In composition ko signifies — 1. under, beneath; as in vwoyeios, 
vnofiaXXeiv Trjs yrjs, Xen. CEc. xix, 8. viroyBovios, viruldpios, viroyaa- 
rpiov, vTzopiviov, virobeiv, vTTOTepveiv, vwocwvrvetv vavs, Polyh. E. L. 
64. Acts Ap. xxvii, 17. — 2. within; [under the surface;"] as in 
op/moi vnolvXoi, Xen. CEc. x, 3. — 3. secretly, by stealth ; as in 
vwe^aipeiadai, Xen. Hier. v, 2. viravoiyeiv ypafx/jtara, Demosth. p. 
■889- [1. 28. ed. R.] vnoKadiSeiv, Polyb. xii, 2. Xndbv VTreiffr/Xde to 
yrjpas, iEschin. Dial, iii, 9« — 4. by degrees, as hairs are said koto. 
fxiicpa viroppeeiv, EL\. V. H. xi, 4. v. Valck. ad Theocr. Id. x. p. 
119. — 5. diminution; as in v7roXoyiieadat £k twv 64imviu)v, Polyb. 
vi, 37. It has a diminuent force in the following : vnepvdpos, vtto- 
cairpos, v7r6xXu)pos, viroXevKos. — 6. protection ; as in vnoawovbos, Xen. 
Ages, ii, lfj. — 7. subjection, obnoxiousness ; as in 71/1-17 viravbpos, 
Polyb. E. P. 3f5. vnofiaXXeiv riva toIs oxXois, lb. 52. vira'tTios, Xen. 
Mem. ii, 8, 4. viraKoveiv, lb. ii, 7> 10. viroKripos, v. Foes. (Econ. 
Hipp. — 8. approach, coming under: inrobvvetv to gevyos, iEschin. 
Dial, iii, 10. [undertaking :] vnobveaOai tt/v 7rpa£iv, Polyb. ii, 21. 
[addition, adjection :] vnemeiv, Demosth. p. 797. [I. 19. ed. R.] — p. 
It has an augmentative force ; as in virotnrelpeiv yeXwra, yElian, V. H. 
ii, 13. v7roniveiv, Xen. Symp. ix, 2. — 10. readiness ; as in virapxeiv, 
virelvat: v. Ind. Demosth. Reisk. — 11. retreat, return; as in vtto- 
Xwp{]aeis webival, Polyb. i, 34. — 12. irpb, forward, on ; as in vrrayetv. 
V. Thorn. M. p. 666. seq. v. Caltier, Gazoph. p. 91. 

VIII. (IX.) Xwpls governs a genitive case only, and commonly signi- 
fies, without, absque, sine : sometimes, besides, in addition to ; in 
which sense a case is not always joined with it : x m P ls ^> «M° S 
o/jiXos -iptXuiv, ovk SXiyos: Thuc. ii. and it takes an infinitive mood 
instead of a case : x^P^ h* v a( ™ eorepijerfleu, besides being deprived of 
you: Plat. Crit. But sometimes the genitive of the article is joined 

* 'AfyiKOfiiywis 8e rusv jrarepwv Kai ruv &v$pu — : Diog. Laert.in Diogen. p. 226. 
vwepex<ivTvi>, virb rcirois rcHpyjvcu rbv I. 23. ed. H. Steph, f. minim.— J. S. 



Rule 7—10.] XwpU. 263 

with the infinitive : x w P ls rov fxi) oixoXoytlv ravra etceivois, besides that 
these things do not agree with those : Arislid. pro Quat. p. 472. 

IX. (X.) It signifies, except: (Sore biacpdapTjvat iravras avQpwirovs, 
SXlywv x^P ts: Apollodor. i. p. 19. and in this signification it is fol- 
lowed by rj on, as j^wpls rj on Ylo/ATnjiavds 6 yepvjv ovk eariv ore a.irr)v- 
TJjfrev, except that, &c. Xiphil. in Conimod. and the case following is 
not influenced by the phrase : kclkovs orpartwras ovk eyei, %wpts rj on 
SXiyovs rivds: [oXlyovs is governed by e^ei understood;] or it is 
followed by rj ooos : X W P IS % oa0L V7r ° voawv, rj yrjpws, cpvyeiv abvvaroi 
r)aav, except as many as, &c. Dion. Hal. x. p. 646. 1. 19. or by 
av or el with a negative particle : x w l°' s "" VV r , a^a'"«Kos r) iroXepos, 
unless there should be a war with the Gauls: Plut. Camill. p. 
151. 1. 26'. 

X. (XL) Sometimes it is rather an adverb than a preposition, signi- 
fying apart, separately : y^wpls yap hceivos, ml Kad' alrbv brj fxovov 
e£era5erat. x^P^ ire P L eKaorwj' elireiv. oaov hia. arahiov x w |°'s clXXtj- 
\u)y biearrjKerai. 



THE END. 



PRINTED BY A. J. VALPY, RED LION COURT, FLEET STREET. 



PRINTED AND PUBLISHED BY A. J. VALPY, 

AND MAY BE HAD OF ALL BOOKSELLERS. 

LEMPRIERE ABRIDGED. — LEMPRIERE'S 

CLASSICAL DICTIONARY, ABRIDGED from Antiion's and Bau- 
ker's Second Edition. For Public and Private Schools of both sexes. By 
E. H. Barker. Royal 12mo. 8s. Gd. bound. 

* # * This Work contains every article in a condensed form. 

DICTIONARY of LATIN PHRASES; com- 

prehending a methodical digest of phrases from the best authors, which have 
been collected in all phraseological works hitherto published : for the more 
speedy progress of students in Latin Composition. By W. Robertson, A. M. 
of Cambridge. A new Edition ; with considerable additions, alterations, and 
corrections. For the Middle and Upper Classes in Schools. 15s. royal duod. bd. 
*„,* The present Edition has this advantage over its predecessors, that it is 
enriched with many hundred phrases which have hitherto been unrecorded ; 
and these have been drawn from the purest fountains, by actual perusal ; from 
Cicero, Tacitus, Terence, Plautus, &c. 

. GRADUS AD PARNASSUM; a new Edition, 

omitting the Verses and Phrases : the .English of the words is given, with 
their formation. Many new words are added, and other improvements. Fourth 
Ed. 7s. 6d. duod. 

VIRGIL, collated from the best Editions. By A. J. 
Valpy, M.A. Twelfth Edition. 3s. Gd. 18mo. 

VIRGIL, with English Notes, Original, and selected 

from the Delphin and other editions. No Interpretatio. Seventh Ed. 7s. Gd. 
' The body of Notes forming the Appendix constitutes an excellent com- 
mentary on Virgil, and must prove of peculiar benefit to the pupil in clear- 
ing up difficulties of the sense or the metre. But these explanatory Notes are 
of still farther utility, as tending to lead juvenile minds into a train of inquiry 
that will expand their ideas and facilitate their progress in classical literature. 
The notes of Voss contribute to enrich the impression.' — New Monthly Mag. 

HORACE; collated from the best Editions. The ob- 
jectionable Odes and Passages have been expunged. Printed uniformly with 
the Virgil. Fifth Edition. 3s. 6d. 

HORACE, with English Notes. Fifth Edition. 6*. 

ELEGANTI^) LATINS; or, Rules and Exercises 

illustrative of Elegant Latin Style. Intended for the middle and higher 
Classes of Schools. By the Rev. E. Valpy, B.D. Tenth Edition. Im- 
proved and made easier. 4s. Gd. A List of Phrases, as used in the original, 
and an Index, are added.— A KEY may be had, Pr. 2s. 

CICERO DE OFFICIIS, with Critical and Expla- 
natory Notes. The text of the Heusingers is followed. Third Ed. Gs. bds. 

' To students the present edition will prove particularly acceptable : con- 
siderable information and much useful elucidation will be found in the adsci- 
titious matter ; and the student will be thus benefited without any aug- 
mentation of labor.' — Crit. Rev. 

TACITI OPERA, Brotier's Text; with his 

Explanatory Notes translated into English, by the Rev. F. Valpy, M.A., 
Master of Reading School. 3 vols. £l. 7s. bds. 



fNly'33 



